Electronic Modular Control Panel 11 (EMCP 11)

C..a..
TERPILLAR® RENR2484-05
April 2002
'~W~1r@m~ ©[p)@[i@)1rO@mJ
UU'@ (lD [b)~@~[}j] @@i1o [Jj) ~
U@~1rOmJ~ @)mJcQJ ~cQJ]ruJ~1rOmJ~
Electronic Modular Control Panel 11+
(EMCP 11+)
8NS1-Up (Generator Set)
9ES1-Up (Generator Set)
5KW1-Up (Generator Set)
5PW1-Up (Generator Set)
6GW1-Up (Generator Set)
6WW1-Up (Generator Set)
8NW1-Up (Generator Set)
8TW1-Up (Generator Set)
LRW1-Up (Generator Set)
LRX1-Up (Generator Set)
LRY1-Up (Generator Set)
4BZ1-Up (Generator Set)
8AZ1-Up (Generator Set)
For Generator Sets Packaged in Lame, Northern Ireland and Tianjin, China.
For MUI EUI and PEEC nes. Includes EMCP 11+ with Para Feature.
I
i01658146
Important Safety Information

Most accidents that involve product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to
observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially
hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This
person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly.
Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and
could result in injury or death.
Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have
read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information,
Safety precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard
warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or to other persons.
The hazards are identified by the "Safety Alert Symbol" and followed by a "Signal Word" such as
'''DANGER'', "WARNING" or "CAUTION". The Safety Alert "WARNING" label is shown below.
The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows:

Attention! Become Alert! Your Safety is Involved.
The message that appears under the warning explains the hazard and can be either written or
pictorially presented.
Operations that may cause product damage are identified by "NOTICE" labels on the product and in
this publication.
Caterpillar cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The
warnings in this publication and on the product are, therefore, not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure,
work method or operating technique that is not specifically recommended by Caterpillar is used,
you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and for others. You should also ensure that the
product will not be damaged or be made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or
repair procedures
, . you, choose.
that
The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information that
was available at the time that the publication was written. The specifications, torques, pressures,
measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can
affect the service that is given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before
you start any job. Caterpillar dealers have the most current information available.
When replacement parts are required for this

product Caterpillar recommends using Caterpil-
lar replacement parts or parts with equivalent
specifications including, but not limited to, phys-
ical dimensions, type, strength and material.
Failure to heed this warning can lead to prema-

tUre failures, product damage, personal injury or
death.
3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents SP Fault Codes ................................................... 105

Diagnostic Codes .......... ......... ............................ 106
Programmable Spare Relay Outputs ....... ........... 107
Programmable Spare Output .............................. 107
Systems Operation Section Programmable Kilowatt Level Output ......... ......... 108
Alarm Modules ................................ .................... 108
General Information ................................................ 5
Alarm Module Control (Custom) ......................... 111
Component Location (For 33068 and 3406C MUI
Relay Driver Module ........................................... 113
Engines) ................................................................ 6
Customer Interface Module ................................. 114
Component Location (For 3406E and 35008 EUI
System Communication Module (Customer) ...... 115
Engines With Paralleling) .................................... 11
Component Location (For EUI Engines Without
Paralleling) .......................................................... 14 Troubleshooting Section
Component Location (For Non-Paralleling 3412C
PEEC Engines) ................................................... 17 Introduction
Component Location (For 3412C, 3508, 3512, and General Information ............................................ 116
3516 MUI Engines (Including Paralleling) and 3412C Service Tools ...................................................... 116
Engines With Paralleling) .................................... 19 Fault Identification ............................................... 117
EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) ............ 29
Instrument. Panel (For 33068 and 3406C MUI Symptom Procedures
Engines) .............................................................. 37 Starting Motor Remains Engaged (for EUI and PEEC
Instrument Panel (For 3508,3512, and 3516 MUI Engines) ............................................................ 119
Engines (Including Paralleling) and 3412C PEEC Starting Motor Remains Engaged (for MUI 3412C,
Engines With Paralleling) .................................... 38 3508,3512,3516 Engines) ............................... 121
Instrument Panel (For EUI Engines) ..................... 41 Engine Does Not Shutdown (for EUI Engines) ... 123
Instrument Panel (For Non-Paralleling PEEC Engi~e Does Not Shutdown (for MUI 33068, 3406C
Engines) .............................................................. 42 Engines) ............................................................ 127
Electrical Converter (Pulse Width Modulated) (For Engine Does Not Shutdown (for MUI 3412C,
EUI Engines and PEEC Engines Only) .............. 43 3508,3512,3516 Engines) ................................ 130
Data Link .............................................................. 44 Engine Does Not Shutdown (for PEEC
Sensors ................................................................. 45 Engines) ............................................................ 133
Modes Of Operation ............................................. 48 GSC Operation Is Erratic .................................... 135
Normal Mode ........................................................ 49 Display of Voltage or Current Is Zero (for MUI 3306B
Alarm Mode ......................................................... 51 3406C Engines) .. :............................................. 136
Shutdown Mode (For MUI Engines) ...................... 52 Display of Voltage or Current Is Zero (for MUI
Shutdown Mode (For PEEC and EUI Engines) .... 53 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516 and EUI and PEEC
Paralleling Mode ................................................... 55 Engines) ............................................................ 140
Service Mode ........................................................ 62 Display of Voltage or Current or Power Is
Fault Log Viewing OP1 ......................................... 64 Inaccurate ......................................................... 145
Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0 .......... 65 Indicators of Alarm Module or Remote Annunciator
Protective Relaying Setpoint Viewing OP2-1 ........ 65 Are Constantly Flashing .................................... 150
AC Factory Calibration Setpoint Viewing OP2-2 ... 65
Parallel Setpoint Viewing OP2-3 ........................... 66 Diagnostic Code Procedures
Password Entry OP3 ............................................. 66 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes ..................... 153
Fault Log Clearing OP4 ........................................ 67 GSC CID 0100 - FMI 02 (for EUI Engines) ......... 156
Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0 ................ 67 GSC CID 0100 - FMI 02 (for MUI and PEEC
Protective Relaying Programming OP5-1 ............. 71 Engines) ............................................................ 157
AC Factory Calibration Setpoint Programming GSC CID 0100 - FMI 03 ..................................... 159
OP5-2 .................................................................. 75 GSC CID 0100 - FMI 04 ..................................... 161
Parallel Setpoint Programming OP5-3 .................. 75 GSC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for EUI Engines) ......... 163
Spare InpuVOutput Programming OP6 (For 33068 GSC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for MUI and PEEC
and 3406C MUI Engines) .................................... 77 Engines) ............................................................ 164
Spare InpuVOutput Programming OP6 (For EUI And GSC CID 0110 - FMI 03 ..................................... 166
PEEC Engines) ................................................... 82 GSC CID 0110 - FMI 04 ..................................... 169
Spare Input/Output Programming OP6 (For 3412C, GSC CID 0111 - FMI 03 ..................................... 170
3508,3512, and 3516 MUI Engines) .................. 87 GSC CID 0168 - FMI 03 ..................................... 172
Hourmeter Programming OP7 .............................. 93 GSC CID 0168 - FMI 04 ..................................... 178
Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming OP8 ................ 95 GSC CID 0175 - FMI 02 ..................................... 184
Engine Setpoint Verification OP9 .......................... 96 GSC CID 0175 - FMI 03 ..................................... 186
AC Offset Adjustment OP1 0 ................................. 98 GSC CID 0175 - FMI 04 ..................................... 188
Parallel Setpoint Tuning OP-11 ............................. 99 GSC CID 0190 - FMI 02 ..................................... 189
Fault Description .......... ........ ............ ... ....... ..... .... 100 GSC CID 0190 - FMI 03 ..................................... 192
AL Fault Codes ......... .... ..... ............ .............. ....... 100 GSC CID 0248 - FMI 09 (for EUI Engines) ......... 195
4
Table of Contents
GSC CID 0248 - FMI 09 (for MUI and PEEC Indicator for Emergency Stop (for MUI3412C, 3508,
Engines) ............................................................ 196 3512,3516 Engines) ......................................... 30!
GSC CID 0268 - FMI 02 ..................................... 198 Indicator for Engine Overspeed .......................... 30~
GSC CID 0269 - FMI 03 ..................................... 199 Indicator for High Water Temperature ................. 30!
GSC CID 0269 - FMI 04 ..................................... 201 Indicator for Low Coolant Level ........................... 31 (
GSC CID 0333 - FMI 03 ..................................... 204 Indicator for Low Oil Pressure ............................. 31·
GSC CID 0333 - FMI 04 ..................................... 206 Indicator for Overcrank (for MUI and EUI
GSC CID 0334 - FMI 03 ..................................... 208 Engines) ............................................................ 31~
GSC CID 0334 - FMI 04 ..................................... 209 Indicator for Overcrank (for PEEC Engines) ....... 31 ~
GSC CID 0336 - FMI 02 ..................................... 211
GSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for EUI Engines) ......... 214 Testing and Adjusting Section
GSC CID 0441 - FMI 12 (for MUI Engines) ........ 216
GSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ..... 217 Testing and Adjusting
GSC CID 0442 - FMI12 ..................................... 219 External Potential Transformer Connections ....... 32'
GSC CID 0443 - FMI12 ..................................... 221 AC Voltage Range - Adjust ................................. 32~
GSC CID 0444 - FMI 12 (for MUI and EUI Alarm Module Control - Adjust ............................ 32,
Engines) ............................................................ 224 Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust ......................... 32~
GSC CID 0444 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ..... 227 Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (3306B and
GSC CID 0445 - FMI 12 (for EUI Engines) ......... 229 3406C MUI Engines) ......................................... 33(
GSC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for MUI Engines) ........ 231 Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (EUI Engines
GSC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ..... 233 Only) ................................................................. 33;
GSC CID 0446 - FMI12 ..................................... 235 Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (PEEC Enginef
GSC CID 0447 - FMI12 (for EUI Engines) ......... 236 Only) ................................................................. 33L
GSC CID 0447 - FMI 12 (for MUI Engines) ........ 239 Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (3412C, 3508,
GSC CID 0447 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ..... 241 3512, and 3516 MUI Engines Only) .................. 33E
GSC CID 0448 - FMI12 ..................................... 243 Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test .... 33i
GSC CID 0475 - FMI 03 ..................................... 245 EMCP Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) -
GSC CID 0475 - FMI 04 ..................................... 247 Replace ............................................................. 341
GSC CID 0500 - FMI12 ..................................... 248 EMCP Electronic Control (Bus Transformer Box) -
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for EUI Engines) ......... 249 Replace ............................................................. 34;
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for MUI Engines) ........ 254 Relay Module - Replace ...................................... 34L
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for PEEC Engines) ..... 262 EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) -
GSC CID 0590 - FMI 09 .................................... : 269 Replace .............................................................. 34E
GSC CID 0770 - FMI 09 (for EUI and PEEC EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Flash
Engines) ............................................................ 269 Program ............................................................ 34E
GSC CID 0770 - FMI 09 (for MUI Engines) ........ 271 Typical Generator Abbreviations ......................... 35e
GSC CID 0858 - FMI 03 ..................................... 272 Symbols .............................................................. 35~
GSC CID 0858 - FMI 04 ..................................... 273 Block Diagram of Generator Set Control ............ 35::
GSC CID 0859 - FMI 03 ..................................... 274 Connector Contact Identification of Generator Set
GSC CID 0859 - FMI 04 ..................................... 276 Control ....................................................•......... 354
GSC CID 1038 - FMI 03 ..................................... 277 Schematics and Wiring Diagrams ....................... 355
GSC CID 1038 - FMI 04 ..................................... 278 Service Record ................................................... 408
GSC CID 1167 - FMI 04 ..................................... 280
GSC CID 1168 - FMI 03 ..................................... 281 Index Section
GSC CID 1168 - FMI 04 ..................................... 282
GSC CID 1169 - FMI 02 ..................................... 284 Index ................................................................... 416
GSC CID 1170 - FMI 02 ..................................... 284
GSC CID 1170 - FMI 04 ..................................... 287
GSC CID 1170 - FMI 08 ..................................... 288
Diagnostic System Procedures

AL Fault Code ..................................................... 291
SP Fault Code ..................................................... 292
Charging System ................................................ 294
Troubleshooting Dedicated Shutdown
Indicators .......................................................... 302
Indicator for Emergency Stop (for EUI and PEEC
Engines) ............................................................ 303
Indicator for Emergency Stop (for MUI 3306B, 3406C
Engines) ............................................................ 304
5
Systems Operation Section

101385629
General Information
SMCS Code: 4490
LINES
CUSTOMER
CUSTOM REMOTE COMMUNICATION
ANNUNCIATOR MODULE
MODULE
c;
Ae METrR
[NGINE MONITOR
CUSTOMER START/STO? CONTROL
SUPPllED LOCAL ALARM/ANNUNCIATION
INPUTS GENSEl AlARI.IS/SHUTDOWNS/OJAGS COOLANT
TEMP
POWER METER
REVERSE POWER
EMC?!I +/rMe?]] -+p OVER/UNDER VOL TACE
CUSTOMER OVER/UNDER FREOUENCY
~ INJ5~0t[E
KW LEVEl
NINE
RELAYS
\J I~D~I
FOR c> C>
CUSTOM :; :;
ANNUNCIATION
RElAY
DRIVER
~. \JD
NINE MODUtE
RELAYS
roR
CC"
REMOl[
CONTROL
900730400
Illustration 1
Block diagram of a generator set with EMCP 11+
Note: The engine EeM (ADEM) that is shown in

illustration 1 is only present on EUI engines.
6
iQ13629S0
Component Location
(For 33068 and 3406C MUI
Engines)
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: 8NS1-Up
SIN: 9ES1-Up
SIN: Ll;iW1-Up
- I
SIN: LJ;lX1-Up
2
\\ \
I \
2
\
@
@
, @) @) @)
: 0..::.:. ib I I
o"m~""'& I I
0·'."'" GJ
o .,;r.;:.. "'41>
Q •.••,..... @)
0 ....·'
0'··.. ·
l I
·E:lI(qlY~E;l1
/ / /
91011
Illustration 2 900520137
Control Panel ~ Face Of Front Panel

(1) Generator Set Control + (GSC+) (5) Pump Stop Switch (optional) (9) Speed Potentiomeler (SP) (optional) or
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (6) Start Aid Switch (SAS) (optional) Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) (optional) (7) Pump Run Switch (optional) (10) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(4) Panel Ught Switch (PLS) (8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (11) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
7
10
~
12 3 4 11
0 @ @ 0 • @ 0
•
0°
@
@ @
@l @ ,0
@~
,
:@
'"
,
!1
EJ rl
®~ ~®
,, , "" ,,
",
" t
@
'@
@
, ,
6 ,
@
@ @
0 • @
0
• @
0
0 0
9 5 6 7 8
900520142
Illustration 3
Control Panel - Back Of Front Panel
Top view with front panel open
(1) Generator. Set Control + (GSC+) (6) Start Aid Switch (S.AS) (optional) (10) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (7) Pump Run Switch (optional) (11) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) (optional) (8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (12) Relay Module (RM) (part of GSC+)
(4) Panel Ught Switch (PLS) (9) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or
(5) Pump Stop Switch (optional) Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
8
o
o
II· EGOV I ~ f-
22 23 24 25 26
Control Panel Interior - Subpanel

(13) Ground fault relay transformer (optional) (20) Battery charger (optional)
(14) Transfer pump contactor (AC) (optional) (21) AC transformer box + (ATB+)
(15) Ground fault relay (ACnoptional) (22) Bearing temperature relay (optional)
(16) Con1rol relay (23) Generator temperature relays (optional)
(17) Arming relay (AC relay) (24) Generator alarm relay (DC) (optional)
(18) Transfer pump relay (~C) (optional) (25) Generator run relay (~C) (optional)
(19) Kilowatt level relay (optional) (26) Electronic governor (optional)
9
27 28 29 30313233343536
\ \
a
\ a
jj
.... a
- - - -
-- -- -\-
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
.. .. .. .. II ..
I
;
..
a
Fa
I~ 88~ I[ 8888888 'c
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....
,~
=:I
mm flo fl7 fiB f19 F'ZO f21 1"22
rvll
III
- !Iffi •• oo~ IIIIIIIIII

~?J ~ ~C9
---
--
IIIII '?UIl
a
.-J/
Of / '--.
a
37 38 39
900520180
Illustration 5
Control Panel ~ Customer Connection Box
Right side view of control panel with side cover removed
(27) Customer connection box (32) Fuse 18 (F18) Generator space heater (37) DC compartment
(28) Fuse 15 (F15) Battery charger DC' AC input (optional) (38) Healer contactor (optional)
output (optional) (33) Fuse 19 (F19) Engine block or jacket (39) AC compartment
(29) Fuse 23 (F23) Transfer pump relay (DC) water heater 1 AC input (optional)
(optional) (34) Fuse 20 (F20) Engine block or jacket
(30) Fuse 16 (F16) Heater contactor coil water heater 2 AC input (optional)
(optional) (35) Fuse 21 (F21) Transfer pump (optional)
(31) Fuse 17 (F17) Battery charger AC input (36) Fuse 22 (F22) AC Transfer pump
(optional) contactor coil (optional)
The DC compartment (37) is used to house

customer connections for remote signals such
as general alarm, engine running or remote
annunciator inter connections. The AC compartment
(39) is used to house AC fuses and controls for
the following components: optional space heater,
optional engine heaters, and optional fuel transfer
pump. The AC compartment is also the place for
customer interconnections of the AC supply to
power these optional AC devices.
10
o o o 0
~h==O=O °:::::::JO
40 41 42
g005212~
Illustration 6
Control Panel M Bottom View
(40) DC connector 2 ~ from engine (41) DC connector 1 - from engine (42) AC connector - from generator
43 44 45
IIIIII ~tll:'11 11?1=---l

o 00000
o F14
HrO==-------/--------I-- 0
i@ i@
-&i---~---
46 47
Illustration 7 g005212
Junction Box - Cover Removed

Located on exterior of generator terminal box
(43) Starting motor magnetic switch
(44) Pinion solenoid circuit breaker
(45) Alternator circuit breaker
(46) Fuse 14 (F14) Fuel control
(47) Fuel control relays
11
Most of the EMCP 11+ components are in one of the

following locations: front panel, subpanel, customer
connection box, and junction box. Other EMCP 11+
components that exist on the engine or near the
engine are: engine oil pressure sensor (EOPS),
engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS), fuel
control solenoid (FCS), magnetic speed pickup
(MPU), engine oil temperature sensor (EaTS)
(optional), and engine coolant loss sensor (EClS)
( optional).
101370344
Component Location
(For 3406E and 35008 EUI
Engines With Para"eling)
SMCS Cod!!: 4490
SIN: SKW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: BNW1-Up
SIN: BAZ1-Up
12
o Ir':'
O'·~IC'
c::=:::J 12
0""'1'::'"
o ..."=",, I I
0-
(O)I:J-HH- 13
O~
o L.'lU
14
NOTE A
g00585178
Illustration B
Components Of The EMCP 11+ And The EMCP II+P Control Panels.
(1) Generator Set Control Panel (GSC+) or (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Display (14) Breaker Open Push Button (Paralleling
the Generator Set Control + Paralleling (optional) panels only).
Control Panel (GSC+P) (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System (15) Parallel Mode Switch (Paralleling
(2) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) "SCROLL" Switch (optional) Panels Only)
(3) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System (16) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) "CLEAR/MODE" Switch (optional) (17) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(5) Pump Stop Switch (optional on 3406E, (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System "LH/RH" (18) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or
Not Present On 3500B) Switch (optional) (Not Present On 3406E Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
(6) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) Engines) (NOTE A) These pictographs are only
(7) Pump Run Switch (optional on 3406E, (13) Breaker Close Push Button (Paralleling present on EMCP II+P paralleling
Not Present On 3500B ) Panels Only) panels.
(8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR)
13
2 3 4 17 8 6 15 9 14 13
\
•
\ \ 1=1-==1........... =
@) ®
·,·•
®:
"9r
:~
T
®
r:L,~
I"'@)'"
0°
"'@)""
eo . n -.:-:(
,• . ·'®
• @J !
l:ll···.
0
®: ,
0
· o
D ®
,
0
0
0
C:t;
'@"
,
·
®
",
,, ..
IHI ~,
"
"',,
~
. " lil .
,
o
.. .
~
\;0 iiL
'"" AO
.
~
~
()
= =
18
/ 5 7 10
Istration 9 g00585566
mponents Of The EMCP 11+ And The EMCP II+P Control Panels.
Generator Set Control Panel (GSC+) or (8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (13) Breaker Close Push Button (Paralleling
the Generator Set Control + Paralleling (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Display Panels Only)
Control Panel (GSC+P) (optional) (14) Breaker Open Push Button (Paralleling
Custom Alarm Module (CAM) (optional) (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System panels only)
Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) "SCROLL" Switch (optional) (15) Parallel Mode Switch (Paralleling
Panel Light Switch (PLS) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System Panels Only)
Pump Stop Switch (optional on 3406E, "CLEAR/MODE" Switch (optional) (16) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
Not Present On 3500B) (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System "LH/RH" (17) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
Starting Aid Switch (SAS) Switch (optional) (Not Present On 3406E (18) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or
Pump Run Switch (optional on 3406E, Engines Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
Not Present On 3500B)
14
iQ1366220
Component Location
(For EUI Engines Without
Paralleling)
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: 5KW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: BNW1-Up
SIN: BAZ1-Up
0_" .. lib ,---==='-----,

o·""·--&.I
91
O"'_~-- L -_ _ _ _- '
0""'. ~
0·· ....• ®l , - - - - - - - - ,
0 ..• ..
0""'"
0·-'
o~",c!e
O~! .....
13 12 11 1C
Control Panel - Face of Front Panel

(1) Generator Set Control + (GSC+) (7) Caterpillar Monitoring System Main (10) Caterpillar Moniloring System LH/Rf
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (oplional) Display Module (Optional) Select Switch (Optional) (Not Present
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) (8) Caterpillar Monitoring System Scroll On 3406E Engines)
(4) Panel Ught Switch (PLS) Switch (Optional) (11) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(5) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System (12) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPE
(6) Voltage Adiust Rheostat (VAR) Clear/Mode Switch (Oplional) (13) Speed Potenliometer (SP)
15
2 3 4 13 12 11
~ I===-A
\
\ \ 9
.
II Irn
0",,- ""0,,,,- "",0 @
(
®®,
·
,
"0/
,
®
~
0° 0° ~
'® ~®I\'! I"'®'"
I
®~
,
.
·, .,, ~
~ ~
~ ~ @
\ ,
,
~
EJ
®~
··, •'@ ,=®
,
, ~ . .
1'',1
,,
""'" ,
..
1"'.1
",
""'" , , , mTIl3J
,
l 0000
mTI
o ~
®
0-~.
®
-°®
1m
0
,Aii
0
~ r.
O\~~)
,
o !J'
'"'"
\
~
5
\
10 6
~ 7 8
Control Panel - Rear of Front Panel

(1) Generator Set Control + (GSC+) (7) Caterpillar Monitoring System Main (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System LH/RH
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) Display Module (Optional) Select Switch (Optional) (Not Present
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) (8) Caterpillar Monitoring System Scroll On 3406E Engines)
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) Switch (Optional) (11) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(5) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System (12) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(6) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) ClearlMode Switch (Optional) (13) Speed Potentiometer (SP)
16
14 15 16 17
o o
n. r17 ,,.
EFR AR
se
88.0C1G1liQle. 88.~.8. 8e.~ClQoIlo GlID.ern.". 96l.eCl!9C10C1
. . :;::f: "'~1:: ... ::!:{: ~.: ¥:-L: ... =!:f:

.eG.~.e.GIO. eliloef!Clu".ctt "0/?,,o.,e ••• " •• eoll •••• •• 01l0Cl$""*
ATR ATR ATR STR STR
22 21
g0067C
Illustration 12
(14) Cylinder Pyrome1er (Optional) (18) Battery Charger (Optional) (21) Kilowatt Relay
(15) Earth Faull Relay (Oplional) (19) Bearing Temperature Relays (Optional) (22) General Alarm Relay (Optional)
(16) Arming Relay (Optional) (20) Alternator Temperature Relays (23) Digital Vollage Regulator
(17) Heater Contactor (Optional) (24) Potential Transformers
17
101362952
Component Location
(For Non-Paralleling 3412C
PEEC Engines)
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
o""""!ill> ,--===---,
o'-'"'&, I
0";:;'" 81 '--_ _ _ _ _..J
o=~
o--flij) , - - - - - - - - ,
0 ..... ·
0 ..... ·
13
900669982
Illustration 13
Control Panel - Face of Front Panel
(1) Generator Set Control + (GSC+) (8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System LH/RH
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Main Select Switch (Optional)
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) Display Module (Optional) (13) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System Scroll (14) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(5) Pump Stop Switch Switch (Optional) (15) Speed Potentiometer (SP)
(6) Start Aid Switch (SAS) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System
(7) Pump Run Switch ClearlMode Switch (Optional)
18
_ 0 _
2
\
3
-, 15
o _
® ®
- 0° 0°
--.<.9/
0
®
.
,
,
, ~
.
IW®~ 1W®'il
II
I;,
, 10>:,
,
,, - 1>
~
~; • ~
~
EJ ®
,,,
'@
I:',
,
,
®
~
1"'.1 1"'. .1
",
,,,
,,"" ,,
'"
'"
,"" ,, .. 0 • o
W].~c
mil
~
·
~\
b., b.,
~
o '" '" o "" '" 0
0
'"c 0
'"c 0
- If] '---
6 7 8 9 10 11
Illustration 14 900483;
Control Panel - Back Of Front Panel

(1) Generator Set Control + (GSC+) (8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System LH/RI-
(2) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Main Select Switch
(3) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) Display Module ., (13) Engine Control Switqh (ECS) .
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System Scroll (14) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB
(5) Pump Stop Switch Switch (15) Speed Potentiometer (SP)
(6) Start Aid Switch (SAS) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System
(7) Pump Run Switch Clear/Mode Switch
19
16 20
0
0 0 0
0 0
~ 0:0 c::> c) CJ aD ~
F15f27
0 0
I
0 0 0
0
1'1' ' '
0 0
Control Panel· Sub· Panel Interior

(16) Electrical Converter (Pulse Width (17) Crank Relay (19) Fuses
Modulated) (18) Generator Running Relay (optional) (20) AC Transformer Box
i01363413
Component Location
(For 3412C, 3508, 3512, and
3516 MUI Engines (Including
Paralleling) and 3412C Engines
With Paralleling)
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up
SIN: STW1-Up
SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Note: If your generator has a PEEC engine, the

control panel is as shown in illustrations 16 and
17 and 18. The interior of your control panel may
not have all components depicted in subsequent
illustrations.
20
10
o~..:.
0'-::'''' c::=:::J
0"""::'"
0.=1"
I I
0-
0 ..... '
0 ·... ·
18 16
NOTE A
g0058~
Illustration 16
Components Of The EMCP 11+ And The EMCP U+P Control Panels.
(1) Generator Set Control Panel (GSC+) or (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System (16) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
the Generator Set Control + Paralleling "SCROLL" Switch (optional) (17) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESP
Control Panel (GSC+P) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System (18) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional
(2) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) "CLEAR/MODE" Switch (optional) Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
(3) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System "LH/RH" (NOTE A) These pictographs are only
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) Switch (optional) present on EMCP II+P paralleling
(5) Pump Stop Switch (optional) (13) Breaker Close Push Button (Paralleling panels.
(6) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) Panels Only)
(7) Pump Run Switch (optional) (14) Breaker Open Push Button (Paralleling
(8) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) panels only).
(9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Display (15) Parallel Mode Switch (Paralleling
(optional) Panels Only)
21
ll~8c6==1:15
2 3 4 17 9 14
. ~~
0° !j0
@®
.. :r¥
®:,
,
"8T,
i*
'+
1~
I:'
.
~.
®
I"'@ I"'@'"
@ III
=
..
B ,
III I~!I
.," .,,,
1<>:
, ,
~ III .
'@ o
® ®
~
~
"" '"
0 = =
""
18
/ 5 7 10 11 12
g00730395
Illustralion 17
Components Of The EMCP 11+ And The EMCP II+P Control Panels.
(1) Generator Set Control Panel (GSC+) or (9) Caterpillar Monitoring System Display (14) Breaker Open Push Button (Paralleling
the Generator Set Control + Paralleling (optional) panels only).
Control Panel (GSC+P) (10) Caterpillar Monitoring System (15) Parallel Mode Switch (Paralleling
(2) Custom Alarm Module (CAM) "SCROLL" Switch (optional) Panels Only)
(3) Alarm Module (ALM) (optional) (11) Caterpillar Monitoring System (16) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
(4) Panel Light Switch (PLS) "CLEAR/MODE" Switch (optional) (17) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB)
(5) Pump Stop Switch (optional) (12) Caterpillar Monitoring System "LH/RH" (18) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or
(6) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) Switch (optional) Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
(7) Pump Run Switch (optional) (13) Breaker Close Push Button (Paralleling
(8) Voltage Adiust Rheostat (VAR) Panels Only)
22
o
o
o o
1'1""""1'1'1'1'1'1'1' 1' ' ' 1'1'1' 1'1' ' ' ' ' ' ' 1' 'I" I" '''''''1''1'''1'1 •
o
33 32
Illustration 18 g0058£
Instrument Panel Interior For EMCP II+P - Subpanel

(19) Control Relay (CR) (25) Breaker Auxiliary Relay (BKRR) (30) Fuse 32 (F32) Dead Bus Transform'
(20) Generator Running Relay (GRR) (Paralleling Panel only) Protection (Paralleling Panels only)
(optional) , (26) AC Transformer Box (ATB+) , (31) Fuse 40 (F40) (Paralleling Panel onl
(21) Fuse 15 (F15) (optional) (27) Bus Relay (BUSR) (Paralleling Panel (32) Terminal Block
(22) Fuse 23 (F23) (optional) only) (33) Terminal Block
(23) Generator Cooldown Relay (GCR) (28) Under Voltage Timer (UVT) (Paralleling
(Paralleling Panel only) Panel only)
(24) Breaker Control Relay (BCR) (29) Fuse 31 (F31) Dead Bus Transformer
(Paralleling Panel only) Protection (Paralleling Panels only)
23
34 35 36
~ ~
/
o
/ 0
11 .
1-
2301A LOAD SHARING AND SPEED CONTROL
@
WOODWARD PART NO. 9907-018
C-.
.. "
~~
I~ • ~ I I
~
0
;: .. ;;; -; i A 0
ii l(!lJ 0 0
o \ \
G
38 37
900585615
Illustration 19
Instrument Panel Interior For The EMCP Il+P ~ Subpanel
(34) Dead Bus Transformer (37) Potential Transformer (For Loadshare (38) Potential Transformer (For Loadshare
(35) 2301A Speed Control Modules) Modules)
(36) 8T8+: Bus Transformer Box
24
o
o
@ LOAD SHARING MODULE
01>
I it"",
00 11
..
I>
43 42
Ilfustration 20 90058
Instrument Panel Interior For The EMCP II+P - Subpanel

(39) Dead Bus Transformer (42) Potential Transformer (For Loadshare (43) Potential Transformer (For Loadsh~
(40) Load Sharing Module Module) Module)
(41) BTB+: Bus Transformer Box
25
44
[It G!lA~'>I"
45
46
51
47
52 58
48 53 57
54
55
49 56
50
(p~
0
900585602
Illustration 21
Customer Connection Box For EMCP U+P Panels
(44) Kilowatt Relay (KWR) (S1) Terminal Block
(4S) Alarm Relay (ALR) (S2) Heater Contactor (HC) (optional)
(46) Pump Relay (optional) (S3) Earth Fault Relay (EFR) (oplional)
(47) Alternator (ATR) and Bearing (BTR) (S4) Fuses
Temperature Relays (optional) (SS) Battery Charger (BC) (optional)
(48) DC connectors (S6) Earth Fault Transfomer (Tx) (optional)
(49) AC connectors (S7) Pump Contactor (PC) (optional)
(SO) Voltage Regulator (S8) Arming Relay (AR) (oplional)
26
59
Be
::: ::::
ATR ATR ATR ATR ATR ATR 8TR SIR
68
illustration 22 gOO,
Instrument Panel - Customer Connection Box (3500 generator sets)

Right side view of control panel with side cover removed
(59) Cylinder Pyrometer (optional) (63) Battery Charger (BC) (optional) (66) Alarm Relay (ALR)
(60) Earth fault relay (EFR) (optional) (64) Alternator Temperature Relay (ATR) (67) Digital Voltage Regulator (DVR)
(61) Arming Relay (AR) (optional) (optional) and Bearing Temperature (6S) Potential Transformers
(62) Heater Contaetor (HC) (optional on Relay (BTR) (optional)
3406E and standard on 3500) (65) Kilowatt Relay (KWR)
--.-
27
1r()===============69~===()~
@ f1ma@;;"j
@
@ IClIIClIIClI
l'==() =~~ 72 71
()
70
Instrument Panel - Bottom View (EMCP 11+ Control Panel and

EMCP Jl+P Control Panel
(69) DC Connector #3 - from Customer Connection Box
(70) AC Connector - from generator
(71) DC Connector #1 - from engine
(72) DC Connector #3 - from engine
o
0P======j
§a:DC'lCJC)QDSO
o o
II II
o
o
Instrument Panel Interior - Subpanel (EMCP 11+ Control Panels - Does NOT apply to PEEC)
(73) Electronic governor (standard on 3500 (75) Control Relay (CR) (optional)
MUI generators and optional on 3412 (76) Generator Running Relay (GRR)
MUI generators) (77) Fuses
(74) Air shutoff relay (not used on 3400 (78) Terminal Blocl<
generator sets and optional on 3500 (79) Fuses
generator sets)
28
80 82 83 84
86 88 89
/ I \
@
0
'@
0
[}
e 0 0 e 8
\!l
.~
- 0 [}
,
85 90 --.<n-~ 91
@
--0
Illustration 25 900720350 Illustration 26 gOO'

Engine Relay Box (for ETS) With Cover Removed 3400 Engine Relay Box (For ETR) With Cover Removed
(80) Starting Motor Magnetic Switch (SMMS) (86) Starting Motor Magnetic Swilch (SMMS)
(81) Starting Motor Magnetic Switch (SMS) (starting and charging (87) Starting Motor Magnetic Switch (SMMS) (starting and
system option) charging system option)
(82) Circuit Breaker: Pinion Solenoid (88) Circuit Breaker: Pinion solenoid
(83) Circuit Breaker: Charging Alternator (89) Circuit Breaker: Charging Alternator
(84) Circuit Breaker: Fuel Control Solenoid (90) Fuel control (fuse)
(85) Slave Relay (SR), Fuel control relay (EFCR), Fuel Control (91) Fuel Control Relays (FCR)
Timer Module
Most of the EMCP 11+ components and the E~
II+P components are located on the front pane
subpanel, the customer connection box (3412)
the marshalling box. Other components that e:
on the engine or near the engine are the engil
oil pressure sensor ("EOPS"), the engine cool,
temperature sensor ("ECTS"), the magnetic sp
pickup (MPU), the engine oil temperature sem
("EaTS") and the optional engine coolant loss
sensor ("EClS").
29
101359233 • The displays show the fault codes. The displays

also show the information for programming that
EMCP Electronic Control is used by the GSC+.
(Generator Set)
• The GSC+ monitors the system for faults. If a
SMCS Code: 4490 fault occurs, the GSC+ provides a fault alarm
annunciation or the GSC+ performs a controlled
fault shutdown. The GSC+ uses indicators and
displays in order to describe the fault to the
5
operator or the service technician.
• The GSC+ contains programmable features for

certain applications. The programmable features
'2j 0 u~~::'~~:,o ~.©
o OY[~CR'''' ® "";=;c"";-;=;--:=;-=~;-;;;-;;;c""'''
6 are also used by the GSC+ in order to meet the
requirements of the customers.
vo"'" , Note: Setting P023 to 0 ensures proper operation
[IJ III
.~O~P'R(
OSPARE.:
,,0 sJu'j~~~" ! e
l
on MUI engines. Set P023 to 1 for Gas engines. Set
P023 to 2 for EUI engines. Failure to set setpoint
P023 can result in improper engine operation,
incorrect display of engine parameters, and
3! """ 'l~R~
I ...
•
logging an erroneous CID 590 diagnostic code.
For more information on the P023 setpoint and
other GSC+ setpoints, see Systems Operation,
4
"Engine-Generator Programming OP5-0".
10 11 12 13
Display Area Of The Generator Set ControJ+ (GSC+) GSC+ Part Number
(1) Dedicated Shutdown Indicators
Off>. 0
(2) Spare Fault Indicators (Or synchronizing lights on GSC+P) n¢.'!,-
(3)
(4)
Fault Shutdown Indicator
Fault Alarm Indicator
V1' O
.A"h
0 "'"I 1',--
~
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Upper Display
Lower Display
Keypad
Exit Key
(9) Service Mode Key
(10) Power Meter Key And Scroll Right Key
(
(
b c 8 p
~
(11)
(12)
AC Meter Key And Scroll Up Key
Engine Meter Key And Scroll Down Key
0 Ie
(13) Lamp Test Key And Select Key
( (>
(14) Alarm Codes Key And Enter Key
0
a
0 @
~ 0 V' "V 0
Note: The pictographs shown to the left of the Spare ~
Fault Indicators (2) are present only in paralleling g0031 0244

lIIustration 28
applications.
Location Of GSC+ Part Number
The main component of the EMCP 11+ system is Rear View Of GSC+
the generator set control + (GSC+). The GSC+ is
designed to operate when the GSC+ is powered by The part number is stamped into the rear housing
24 DCV or 32 DC\/. The GSC+ monitors and controls of every GSC+ above the harness connector. When
many of the functions of the generator set. The the GSC+ is updated internally, the part number
functions and features of the GSC+ are listed below. also changes. The part number can be used to
identify the effectivity of any changes .
• The GSC+ provides the generator AC output
information. The information includes the metering
of power. The GSC+ controls starting and
stopping of the engine .
• The GSC+ shows engine conditions and

generator output information on two displays.
30
GSC+ Serial Number The yellow spare fault indicators (2) FLASH whe
the conditions that are associated with that spar
f>. 0 fault are active. The three spare faults can be
o ""'"
i"o
"'" 0 "'"
programmed to show coolant loss, oil temperatL
~ 0 Ii' spare fault condition or no assignment. The spa
~
~B
fault condition may be a customer generated
( :> switch input. See Systems Operation, "SP Fault
P Ie Codes" for more information. The yellow fault ai,
indicator (4) or the red fault shutdown indicator
(
> will accompany the spare fault indicators (2). n
0 c spare fault indicators will tell whether the spare I
( :> input is programmed to be an alarm condition c
shutdown condition.
0
0
0 @
'V
'V 0 '" '" 0
The "Spare Fault" indicators have alternate funct
900394402
on the GSC+P during synchronization functions
Illustration 29 Spare 1 becomes the voltage indicator. This
Location Of GSC+ Serial Number indicator will illuminate when the difference bet'll
Rear View Of GSC+ the bus voltage and the oncoming generator voll
are within acceptable limits. Spare 2 becomes I
The serial number of the GSC+ is a ten digit number frequency indicator. This indicator will illuminatE
which is unique for each GSC+. The preceding when the frequency difference between the bw
illustration shows the location of the serial number and the oncoming generator are within accepta
on the back of the GSC+. The serial number is also limits. Spare 3 becomes the phase match indic,
shown to service personnel when the GSC+ is in This indicator illuminates when the phase differE
option OP2-2. The serial number which is shown between the bus and the oncoming generator ,
on the display and the actual serial number will within acceptable limits. When the GSC+P is n(
always match. See Systems Operation, "AC Factory performing paralleling functions, the Spare Fau
Calibration Setpoint Viewing OP2-2". indicators retain their normal functions as expla
in Systems Operation, "Spare Input/Output
Programming OP6".
Fault Indicators
The red dedicated shutdown indicators (1) repre
The ten fault indicators are used in order to show a the following shutdown faults: low oil pressure,
fault that is present. The ten fault indicators are also emergency stop, high water temperature, engir
used to describe a fault that is present. The fault overspeed and engine overcrank. When the G~
indicators are divided into four groups. The four detects a fault in one of these areas, the dedic,
groups are the fault alarm indicator (4), the spare shutdown indicator (that corresponds to the faL
fault indicators (2), the fault shutdown indicator (3) FLASHES. The engine is shutdown if the engin
and the dedicated shutdown indicators (1). is running, and the engine is not allowed to sta
No fault codes are associated with the dedicat,
The yellow fault alarm indicator (4) FLASHES when shutdown indicators because each indicator h,
the GSC+ detects a fault that is an alarm fault. a descriptive label.
The alarm fault does not cause the engine status
to change. The engine is able to start. The engine Many of the dedicated shutdown faults depen(
will continue operating, only if the engine is running
on certain setpoints in the GSC+. See System1
at the time of the alarm fault. Fault alarm indicator Operation, "Setpoint Programming OP5" for me
(4) is accompanied by an alarm fault code that is information. To restart the engine after a shutde
shown on upper display (5) when the alarm codes see Systems Operation, "Shutdown Mode".
key is pressed.
The conditions that are required to activate thE
The red fault shutdown indicator (3) FLASHES when
dedicated fault shutdowns are in the following
the GSC+ detects a fault that is a shutdown fault. list. The results of each dedicated fault are in t
The engine is shutdown if the engine is running and following list.
the engine is not allowed to start. Fault shutdown
indicator (3) is accompanied by a fault code that is
immediately shown on the upper display (5).
31
Low Oil Pressure - The engine oil pressure drops Upper Display
below the setpoints for low oil pressure shutdown
that are programmed into the GSC+. There are two
low oil pressure setpoints. One setpoint is used
when the engine is at idle speed. The other setpoint
IS used when the engine is at rated speed. When
a low oil pressure fault occurs, the low oil pressure
Indicator FLASHES, and the engine is shut down.
The engine is not allowed to start until the fault is
corrected. 900521435
Illustration 30
Upper Display (5) With All Segments
Emergency Stop - The operator presses the
emergency stop push button (ESPB) on the front
panel. When an emergency stop condition occurs, The primary function of the upper display (5) is
the emergency stop indicator FLASHES and the shOWing the following information of the generator
engine is shut down. The engine is not allowed to output: AC voltage, current, and frequency. Several
start until the condition is corrected. options are available on the upper display for AC
metering. These options can be viewed one at a
High Water Temperature - The engine coolant time by pressing the AC Meter key on the keypad.
temperature rises above the setpoint for high The options are listed below.
water temperature shutdown that is programmed
into the GSC+. When the high water temperature • Voltage (average), generator frequency, current
fault occurs, the high water temperature indicator (total)
FLASHES. The engine is shutdown and the engine
IS not allowed to start until the fault is corrected. • Voltage (line-line), generator frequency, current
(line) for anyone phase
Engine Overspeed - The engine speed exceeds the
setpoint for engine overspeed that is programmed • Voltage (line-line) for all three phases at once
Into the GSC+. When the engine overspeed fault
occurs, the engine overspeed indicator FLASHES. • Current (line) for all three phases at once
The engine is shutdown and the engine is not
allowed to start until the fault is corrected. Note: When total current increases above "9999A"
the GSC+ )Viii show current in "kA" units. '
Overcrank - The engine does not start within
the setpoint for total cycle crank time that is • Voltage (line-neutral) for all three phases at once
programmed into the GSC+. When the overcrank
fault occurs, the overcrank indicator FLASHES. Note: Line-neutral voltages are not shown when
The engine is not allowed to start until the fault is setpoint "P032" is set to 1 (delta generator sets)
corrected.
Upper display (5) is also used to show the various
Note: The GSC+ can be programmed to override fault codes for system faults. For more information
the shutdown for low oil pressure and high water on fault codes, see Systems Operation, "Fault
temperature faults. When the operator overrides Description".
the shutdown faults, the GSC+ responds to the
faults as though the faults are alarm faults. The
corresponding dedicated shutdown indicator is ON
CONTINUOUSLY. The corresponding dedicated I lin 1111111
shutdown indicator will not be flashing. The engine (I U.U 1111111
continues to run and the engine continues to start
instead of shutting down. When the dedicated V Ave
Hz A ToTAL
shutdown indicator is ON CONTINUOUSLY, the

900527264
setpoint for shutdown has been exceeded, but the Illustration 31
GSC+ is programmed to override the shutdown Upper Display Showing:
fault. The GSC+ does not treat the shutdown fault 480 volts, average fine to line voltage of all three phases
as a shutdown fault. The GSC+ treats the shutdown
60 hertz, generator frequency
fault as an alarm fault. At the factory, the GSC+ is
programmed to treat a low oil pressure fault and 3000 amperes, total line current of all three phases
a high water temperature fault as shutdown faults.
The operator or the service technician must decide
to override these shutdown faults. If desired, the
operator or the service technician can program the
GSC+ to treat the shutdown faults as alarm faults.
32
Lower Display
I I I II I I I I I I I I-I I I I I
-I (I U (I U.U IUUU
PHA-B PH'
v Hz A
Upper Display Showing: Illustration 36 9003

480 volts. line to line voltage of phase A to phase 8 Lower Display (6) Wilh All Segments
60 herts, generator frequency
1000 amperes, total line current of phase A The lower display (6) shows values for power
metering, engine parameters and the relay stat
The left side of the lower display serves as a p'
meter for the generator set. The following functr
will scroll automatically.
I I I I I I
~I 0 U • Total real power (kW)
PHA-8
Pli B-C
PHC-A
• Total reactive power (KVAR)
g00394497
Illustration 33
• Percentage of rated power (%kW)
Upper Display Is Showing:
480 volts, line to line voltage of phase A-8 • Power factor (average)
480 volts, line to line voltage of phase B-C
480 volts, line to line voltage of phase C-A • Total energy output (kW/h)
The display will stop scrolling when the opera I

presses the power meter key for less than fiVE
seconds. The display will show a particular
I I I I I I I I I-I I I I I ·1 I-I I-I I parameter continuously..Additional power metE
IUUU IUUU I U U 1_ functions will scroll. if the power meter key is I-
PHA
PHS for more than five seconds and then released.
A A PHe A
additional functions are shown below.
• Total real power (kW)
1000 Amps, line current of phase A • Real power phase A (kW)
1000 Amps, line current of phase B
1000 Amps, line current of phase C • Real power phase B (kW)
• Real power phase C (kW)
• Total apparent power (kVA)
• Tolal reaclive power (KVAR)

PHA
v Fl-IB
v PHC v • Percentage of rated power (%kW)
• Power faclor (average)
277 Valls, line to neutral voltage of phase A • Power factor phase A
277 Volts, line to neutral vollage of phase B
277 Volts, line to neutral voltage of phase C • Power factor phase B
Note: Line to neutral voltages are not shown when • Power factor phase C
the setpoint P032 is set to 1 for delta generator sets.
• Tolal energy oulput (kW/h)
33
• Total reactive energy output (kVARHr)
Note: All real power values are signed with a "+" or

a "-". A negative value indicates reverse power.
I I I I
Note: Real power phase A, B, and C as well as Clu
power factor phase A, B, and C are not shown when
setpoint P032 is set to 1 for delta generator sets.
900394565
Illustration 41
Lower Display Showing:
80 %kW, percentage of rated power of generator output
g00394559
Illustration 37
Lower Display Showing: Pf t",G
691 kW, total real power of generator output

900394566
Illustration 42
.83 PF, average power factor of generator output
[ ~A Note: You may view the power factor for the

individual phases in a similar manner.
900394561
Illustration 38
230 kW, real power of phase A
I I I I I I I
IUUU
Note: Phase B and phase C can be viewed in a
similar manner.
900394567
Illustration 43
I I 1000 kW/h, total energy of generator output

()
Note: Total energy output that is greater than
999,999 kW/h will be shown as MW/h in two steps
in order to maintain a resolution of 1 kW/h. The
900394562
first step will show MW/h as a whole number up to
Illustration 39 six places. The second step will show MW/h as a
Lower Display Showing: decimal to three places. For example: 1,000,001
831 kVA, total apparent power. kW/h will be shown as 1000 MW/h (first step),
followed by .001 MW/h (second step).
,
1- I_I PSI
U I
J
900394563
Illustration 40
900579439
Lower Display Showing: Illustration 44
462 KVAR, total reactive power of generator output. Lower Display Showing:
64 psi engine oil pressure.
The right side of lower display (6) shows the value

of certain engine parameters. The parameters are
listed below.
34
• Left side exhaust temperature (optional) Keypad

• Right side exhaust temperature (optional)
• Engine oil temperature (optional)
• System battery voltage

10000 DOC
POWER AC
METER METER
• Engine hours
gOO:
Illustration 46
• Engine speed
Keypad (7) for the EMCPII+ Control Panel
• Engine oil pressure

Keypad (7) is used to control the information II
is shown on upper display (5) and lower displ,
• Engine coolant temperature
(6). The seven keys have two sets of functions
Note: If the GSC+ displays dashes (---) for oil normal functions and service functions. See th
pressure, coolant temperature, or engine oil topic Systems Operation, "Service Mode" for c
description of the service functions of the keys.
temperature, this indicates that the GSC+ is
receivi~g invalid data from the sensor. The upper
normal functions of the keys are described in I
display will be showing a corresponding diagnostic following paragraphs.
code for the sensor. Refer to the appropriate
procedure in Troubleshooting, "Troubleshooting Power MeIer Key - This key controls the viewin
power meter information. This information is sh,
Diagnostic Codes".
on the lower display. Pressing the key for at leas
The value for one of these conditions is shown on seconds causes all the power meter data to sc
the display for two seconds. The display then scrolls once. The default power meter dala then resun
to the value for the next condition. A small pointer scrolling. Briefly pressing this key (for less than
identifies the engine condition that corresponds to seconds) will stop the scrolling of the power m
the value that is showing. When the engine meter functions until the key is pressed again.
key is pressed, the lower display (6) stops scrolling.
The lower display continuously shows one particular AC Meter Key - The AC meter key controls thE
value. The pointer flashes above the value that is viElwing of the AC parameters on the upper dis
Pressing the key causes the display to show c
showing on the display.
different set of parameters.
Engine Meter Key - This key controls the viewir

engine parameters on the lower display. Pressi
the key slops the scrolling of engine conditions
value for one particular engine condition will sr
continuously. The pointer flashes indicating thai
scrolllllg IS stopped. The scrolling of the eng in,
g00394569
conditions will resume when the engine meter I
Illustration 45 is pressed again.
K1, K3 and K5 are active. Lamp Test Key - Pressing this key performs a I
K2, K4, K6, K7 and K8 are not active. test on the GSC+ and the optional alarm modL
On the GSC+, the ten fault indicators are ON
The relay status indicators are on the bottom of the CONTINUOUSLY. Every segment of upper disp
lower display. When a GSC+ relay is activated, the (5) and lower display (6) are ON. On the optio!
corresponding indicator (K1, K2, etc) is shown on alarm module, all of the indicators are ON and
lower display (6). When a relay is not activated, the horn sounds. The lamp test function automatic,
corresponding indicator (K1, K2, etc) is not shown. turns off if an operator presses the key and hal
the key for longer than ten seconds.
35
Alarm Codes Key - If fault alarm indicator (4) is

FLASHING, pressing this key causes upper display
(5) to show the corresponding alarm fault code.
Pressing this key again will resume the showing
of generator AC output information on the upper
display (5). If fault alarm indicator (4) is OFF, this key
ff ~
has no function. For more information on alarm fault 0
codes, see Systems Operation, "Fault Description". 0 o
Exit Key - This key only functions when the GSC+ is ? @IT:J :;:::
in Service Mode. See Systems Operation, "Service
Mode".
:0000:
°ITfooo
Service Mode Key - Pressing this key causes
f=
the GSC+ to enter service mode. See Systems
Operation, "Service Mode" for more information.
0
o
o
Y Y' gg 0 Fe
o
:oo@oo:
0
Relays
F F
(®
o ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ 0 o go 0
'1'f ,O' 0 o
:~ =:OOgoITl
go =
~
~
~
I~
I~ B ~
~
'"""" o 0
I&» I® o
~ ~.
(,
Q :W- l~:t ./~, 0~ \® Illustration 48 900436699
~....,
~ 'W/ 'W/ 0 Relays In Relay Module
(1) Jumper block
The relays are located in the relay module on the

Illustration 47 g00521482 rear of the GSC+. The relays are permanently
Relay Module On Rear Of GSC+
attached within the relay module. The relays are
not removable. The entire relay module is replaced
if a relay has failed. For more information, see
Schematics And Wiring Diagrams, "Generator Set
Wiring Diagram".
Some of the contacts of the relays are internally

connected to the terminals of the relay module. The
contacts are available for the customer's use. The
voltage specifications and the current specifications
for each terminal of the relay are listed in the
following chart.
Note: Jumper block (1) is used to select the voltage

range of the voltmeter of the GSC+. Jumper block
(1) is installed for systems with 700 volts full scale
AC inputs. Jumper block (1) is NOT installed for
systems with 150 volts full scale AC inputs or for any
unit with external potential transformers. The relay
module comes factory equipped with the jumper
block (1) installed. See Testing And Adjusting, "AC
Voltage Range Selection".
36
"Iia bl e 1 The CTA is used to indicate that the engine is

Load Specifications For GSC+ Relay Module beginning to run without cranking. The GSC+
activates the CTR when the engine speed IS
Relay Module Rating For Rating For greater than the crank terminate setpoint (400 I
Terminal Number Resistive Inductive setpoint POll) and the starting motor relay ha:
Loads Loads been deactivated. The CTR deactivates when 1
RM13,14- Kl- EGR 0.45A at none(l) engine RPM reaches O.
N/O 24DCV
• When the relay is active the normally open
RM15 - K7 - FCR N/O lOA at lOA at contacts close. This activates the optional
RM16 - K3 - CTA N/O 24DCV 24DCV generator running relay (GRR) and enables,
RM17 - K3 - CTA N/C
RM18 - K4 - SMR N/O optional governor switch (GS) and the gover
RM2l - K4 - SMR N/C synchronizing motor. The GRR IS located In I
RM19- K6-ASR N/O customer connection box. The GS is located
RM20 - K6 - ASR N/C the front panel.
RM22 - K2 - GFR N/O
RM24 - K5 - RR N/O • When the relay is inactive the normally ClOSE
RM36,23 - K5 - RR N/C contacts close.
lOA at 5Aat 24DCV
RM37,26 - K8 - PSR 24DCV
N/C K4 - Starting Motor Relay (SMR)
RM38,25 - K8 - PSR
N/O • When the relay is active the normally .open
(1) Do NOT connect inductive loads to these termmals.
contacts close. This activates the starting me
magnetic switch.
The relays and the functions are listed below.
• When the relay is inactive the normally ClOSE
Kl - Electronic Governor Relay (EGR) c.ontacts close.
K5 - Run Relay (RR)

On MUI engines this relay is not used for any
factory installed devices.
contacts close. This provides power to the
On EUI engine~, this relay enables the e'1gine ECM
to begin fuel injection. optional start aid switch (SAS) and the cran
relay (CR).
On PEEC engines, this relay signals the engine to
go to rated speed immediately after starting. • When the relay is inactive the normally clOSE
contacts close. This contacts are for custorr
use .
contacts close .
K6 - Air Shutoff Relay (ASR)
• The relay has no normally closed contacts.
K2 - Generator Fault Relay (GFR) contacts close. This activates an optional al
shutoff solenoid during fault shutdowns.
The GSC+ uses the generator fault relay (GFR) to
activate the shunt trip coil of the optional circuit . • When the relay is inactive the normally ClOSE
breaker during a shutdown fault. The optional circuit contacts close.
breaker is located in the generator hOUSing.
K7 - Fuel Control Relay (FCR)
contacts close. This trips the optional circuit • When the relay is active the normally open
breaker when a shutdown fault occurs. contacts close. This activates the fuel contre
solenoid via the fuel control relay in the junc
• The relay has no normally closed contacts. box. Also, power is supplied to the optional
electronic governor.
K3 - Crank Termination Relay (CTA)
• The relay has no normally closed contacts.
K8 - Programmable Spare Relay (PSR)

37
On non-paralleling panels, this relay is for customer 101389954

use. It is programmable to activate for a variety of
conditions. On paralleling panels, this relay is used Instrument Panel
by the EMCP II+P and is not available for customer (For 3306B and 3406C MUI
use. For more information, see Systems Operation,
"Service Mode". Engines)
• When the relay is active, the normally open SMCS Code: 4490; 7451
contacts close.
SIN: 8NS1-Up
• When the relay is inactive, the normally closed SIN: 9ES1-Up
contacts close.
SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up
1 2 3 4
1@ "" ~ STARTltlG
[~ AID
@j::-l RUN
50 0
0
6 '-.....
~
I H
Z
<Ii. . .
(J
PAtlEl
LlCHTS
'0: ~
~~
/~ EIt£RGEtlC (
7 I~ STOP
~
(<§J
COOL DOWN
STOP
s r ART
900395939
Illustration 49
Instrument Panel Switches
(1) Pump stop switch. This switch is optional.
(2) SAS: start aid switch. The switch is optional.
(3) Pump run switch. The switch is optional.
(4) VAR: voltage adjust rheostat
(5) PLS: panel light switch
(6) SP: speed potentiometer(optional) or GS: governor switch
(optional)
(7) ESP8: emergency stop push button
(8) ECS: engine control switch
38
The engine control switch (ECS) (8) determines the Optional pump stop switch (1) is used in conjun
status of the control panel. In the AUTO position (3 with the generator mounted automatic fuel tran
o'clock), the GSC+ allows the operator to remotely system, if equipped. The pump stop switch is I
control and remotely monitor the generator set with to manually stop the AC fuel transfer pump. n
a Customer Communication Module. See Systems pump stop switch can be reset by depressing
Operation, "Customer Communication Module". pump stop switch a second time.
The GSC+ allows the engine to start whenever
the remote initiating contact is closed. The engine The optional start aid switch (SAS) (2) is prese
shuts down after the remote initiating contacts only on required generator sets. The start aid
open. An engine cool down time is programmable system is a manual shot type of system and tr
(setpoint P019) to give a 0 to 30 minute cooldown start aid system is a metered shot type of systl
period before the engine shuts down. The engine When the SAS (2) is placed and the SAS is hel
cool down time is set for five minutes at the factory. the ON position (momentary contact), the mete
The engine starts and the engine runs while the shot start aid system is activated. A specific an
ECS is in the MANUAL START position (6 o'clock). of ether is metered into a holding chamber. Wt
In the COOLDOWN/STOP position (9 o'clock), the SAS (2) is released, a solenoid allows ether to
fuel control solenoid shuts. the engine down after a to the engine. The metered shot start aid syStE
cooldown. In theOFF/RESET position (12 o'clock), deactivates when the following conditions are
the engine shuts down immediately and any fault present.
indicators are reset (except emergency stop while
the ESPB is pushed in). • The contacts of the run relay (RR) open.
If the red emergency stop push button (ESPB) (7) • The engine coolant temperature is sufficient
is pressed, the fuel is shut off. The operator must open the start aid temperature switch (SATS)
turn the ESPB (7) clockwise until the ESPB releases
in order to restart the engine. Next turn the ECS to • The SAS (2) is released to the OFF position.
OFF/RESET and then turn the ECS to the MANUAL
START. NOTICE
Crank the engine before you activate (keep SI
The voltage adjust rheostat (VAR) (4) connects to OFF position) the metered shot start aid system. I
the voltage regulator and the VAR is used to adjust age to the engine is possible by activating the sy
generator voltage to the desired level. The VAR is when the engine is not turning.
used in place of the voltage level rheostat. The
voltage level rheostat is located on the generator
voltage regulator assembly.
i01:
The optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP) (6) is Instrument Panel

used to raise the engine speed. The optional speed
adjust potentiometer is used to lower the engine (For 3508,3512, and 3516 M
speed when an electronic governor is used. An
optional governor switch is mounted in this location
Engines (Including Parallelir
if a governor with a speed adjust motor is used. and 3412C PEEC Engines W
The panel light switch (PLS) (5) turns ON the panel Paralleling)
lamps and turns OFF the panel lamps.
SMCS Code: 4490; 7451
An optional pump run switch (3) is used in SIN: 5PW1-Up
conjunction with the generator set mounted
automatic fuel transfer system, if equipped. The SIN: 6WW1-Up
generator set mounted AC fuel transfer pump will fill
the day tank of the generator set when the operator SIN: BTW1-Up
pushes the pump run switch. The pump will
SIN: LRY1-Up
automatically shut off when the fuel level contactor
reaches the high fuel level. The pump can be shut SIN: 4BZ1-Up
off manually by pressing the pump stop switch.
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
39
SCROLL
13
~
© ©
Q!SPLA YI!!!!!I
CLEAR
~MODE
DISPLAY!!!!
iFnll LH
© © "If RH
lH/RH I!!!!!I
SELECT
Q",
V EMERGENCY
STOP
~d
~"""O~ ~ 15
~ /7,};:i- ~~
7~--f-f-f----_~-=-13J 14
9 10 11 12 13
g00715451
Illustration 50
(1) Pump Stop Switch (not used on 3500 (7) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB) (13) Parallel Mode Switch SEMI-AUTO
generator sets) (8) Engine Control Switch (ESC) Position
(2) Starting Aid Switch (SAS) (optional) (9) Parallel Mode Switch MANUAL (14) Open Breaker Switch (Paralleling
(3) Pump Run Switch (not used on 3500 (PERMISSIVE) Position Panels only)
generator sets) (10) Parallel Mode Switch OFF Position (15) Close Breaker Switch (Paralleling
(4) Voltage Adjust Rheostat (VAR) (11) Parallel Mode Switch (Parallel Panels Panels only)
(5) Panel Light Switch (PLS) only)
(6) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or (12) Parallel Mode Switch AUTO Position
Governor Switch (GS) (optional)
The Engine Control Switch (ECS) (8) determines the If the red emergency stop push button (ESPB) (7)
status of the control panel. In the AUTO position, is pressed, the fuel is shut off. The operator must
the GSC+ allows the operator to remotely control turn the ESPB (7) clockwise until the ESPB releases
the generator set with a Customer Communication in order to restart the engine. Next turn the ECS to
Module (CCM). Also, the GSC+ allows the operator OFF/RESET and then turn the ECS to the MANUAL
to remotely monitor the generator set with a CCM. START.
See Systems Operation, "Customer Communication
Module". The GSC+ allows the engine to start The Voltage adjust rheostat (VAR) (4) connects to
whenever the remote start/stop initiate contact (IC) the voltage regulator and the VAR is used to adjust
is closed. After the remote start/stop initiate contact generator voltage to the desired level. The VAR is
(I C) opens, the engine will shut down. A cool down used in place of the voltage level rheostat that is
time delay is programmable from 0 to 30 minutes located on the generator regulator assembly.
before the engine shuts down. The setpoint is P019.
The cooldown time delay has a factory setting of The optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP)
five minutes. The engine starts and the engine runs (6) is used to raise the engine speed. Also, the
while the ECS is in the MANUAL START (6 o'clock) optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP) is used
position. In the COOLDOWN/STOP (9 o'clock) to lower the engine speed when the generator is
position, the fuel control solenoid shuts the engine using an electronic governor. An optional governor
down after cooldown. In the OFF/RESET position is mounted in this location, if a governor that is
(12 o'clock), the engine shuts down immediately. equipped with a speed adjust motor is used.
The faul! indicators are reset. The emergency stop
light is not reset while the ESPB is depressed. The panel light switch (PLS) (5) turns ON the panel
40
The optional pump run switch (3) is used in When the Parallel Mode Switch is in the SEMI-
conjunction with the automatic fuel transfer system position (13) (3 o'clock), the EMCP II+P bring
if the generator set is equipped. The pump run generator into sync with the bus and holds it
switch is not used with the 3500 generator sets. The indefinitely. The operator brings the generator
AC fuel transfer pump will fill the day tank of the by manually closing the breaker. Automatic v(
generator set when the operator pushes the pump matching is not provided.
run switch. The pump will automatically shut off
when the fuel level contactor reaches the high fuel When the Parallel Mode Switch is in the MAN
level. Also, the pump can be shut off manually by (PERMISSIVE) position (9) (9 o'clock), the opc
pressing the "Pump Stop" switch. adjusts the frequency and phase of the gene
in order to match the bus. When the generatc
The optional "Pump Stop" switch (1) is used in sync with the bus, the operator brings the ger
conjunction with the automatic fuel transfer system online by manually closing the breaker.
(if equipped). The "Pump Stop" switch is not used
with the 3500 generator sets. The "Pump Stop" When the Parallel Mode Switch is in the OFF
switch is used to manually stop the AC fuel transfer position (10) (12 o'clock), all paralleling funct
pump. The operator can. reset the "Pump Stop" are disabled.
switch by depressing the "Pump Stop" switch again.
The optional "Starting Aid" Switch (SAS) (2) is

present only on required generator sets. The
starting aid system is a manual shot type of system
and the starting aid system is a metered shot type
of system. When the SAS (2) is placed in the ON
pOSition and the SAS is held in the ON position, the
metered shot starting aid system is activated. A
specific amount of ether is metered into a holding
chamber. When SAS (2) is released, a solenoid
allows ether to flow to the engine. The metered shot
starting aid system deactivates when the following
conditions are present.
'. The contacts of the run relay (RR) open .
• The engine coolant temperature is sufficient to

open the start aid temperature switch (SATS) .
• The SAS (2) is released to the OFF position.
NOTICE
Crank the engine before you activate (keep SAS in
OFF position) the metered shot start aid system. Dam-
age to the engine is possible by activating the system
when the engine is not turning.
The Parallel (Synchronizer) Mode Switch (11)

controls the paralleling operation of the generator.
See Systems Operation, "Paralleling Mode" for a
description of the Paralleling functions.
The AUTO position (12) (6 o'clock) of the Parallel

Mode Switch is used for complete automatic
paralleling. The EMCP II+P brings the generator into
sync with the bus and sends a signal to close the
motor operated breaker. The EMCP II+P supporls
automatic paralleling to a dead bus. Autornatic
voltage matching is not provided.
41
i0138S9S9 The engine control switch (ECS) (6) determines the

status of the control panel. In the AUTO position (3
Instrument Panel o'clock), the GSC+ allows the operator to remotely
(For EUI Engines) control and remotely monitor the generator set with
a Customer Communication Module. See Systems
SMCS Code: 4490; 7451 Operation, "Customer Communication Module".
The GSC+ allows the engine to start whenever
SIN: 5KW1-Up the remote initiating contact is closed. The engine
shuts down after the remote initiating contacts
SIN: 6GW1-Up open. An engine cool down time is programmable
(setpoint P019) to give a 0 to 30 minute cooldown
SIN: BNW1-Up
period before the engine shuts down. The engine
SIN: BAZ1-Up cool down time is set for five minutes at the factory.
The engine starts and the engine runs while the
ECS is in the MANUAL START position. In the
2
COOLDOWN/STOP position (9 o'clock), the fuel
control solenoid shuts the engine down after a
cooldown. In theOFF/RESET position (12 o'clock),
the engine shuts down immediately and any fault
indicators are reset (except emergency stop while
the ESPB is pushed in).
3 If the red emergency stop push button (ESPB) (5)
is pressed, the fuel is shut off. The operator must
turn the ESPB (5) clockwise until the ESPB releases
in order to restart the engine. Next turn the ECS to
OFF/RESET and then turn the ECS to the MANUAL
START.
The voltage adjust rheostat (VAR) (2) connects to

the voltage regulator and the VAR is used to adjust
generator voltage to the desired level. The VAR is
5
!
18'
/ \ HllRGEIIC,
STOP
used. in place of the voltage level rheostat. The
voltage level rheostat is located on the generator
~
The optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP) (4) is

used to raise the engine speed. The optional speed
adjust potentiometer is used to lower the engine
speed when an electronic governor is used. An
optional governor is mounted in this location if a
Illustration 51 900670686 governor with a speed adjust motor is used.
Instrument Panel Switches
The panel light switch (PLS) (3) turns ON the panel
(1) Start Aid Switch (SAS) The switch is optional. lamps and turns OFF the panel lamps.
(2) Voltage Adiust Rheostat (VAR)
(3) Panel Light Switch (PLS)
(4) Speed Potentiometer (SP) (optional) or Governor Switch (GS) The optional start aid switch (SAS) (1) is present
(optional) only on required generator sets. The start aid
(5) Emergency Stop Push Button (ESPB) system is a manual shot type of system and the
(6) Engine Control Switch (ECS)
start aid system is a metered shot type of system.
When the SAS (1) is placed and the SAS is held in
the ON position (momentary contact), the metered
shot start aid system is activated. A specific amount
of ether is metered into a holding chamber. When
SAS (1) is released, a solenoid allows ether to flow
to the engine. The metered shot start aid system
deactivates when the following conditions are
present.
• The contacts of the run relay (RR) open .

open the start aid temperature switch (SATS).
42
• The SAS (1) is released to the OFF position. The engine control switch (ECS) (8) determine,
status of the control panel. In the AUTO positio
NOTICE o'clock), the GSC+ allows the operator to reme
Crank the engine before you activate (keep SAS in control and remotely monitor the generator set
OFF position) the metered shot start aid system. Dam- a Customer Communication Module. See SYStE
age to the engine is possible by activating the system Operation, "Customer Communication Module"
when the engine is not turning. The GSC+ allows the engine to start whenevel
the remote initiating contact is closed. The enG
shuts down after the remote initiating contacts
open. An engine cooldown time is programma'
i01260371 (setpoint P019) to give a 0 to 30 minute coolde
Instrument Panel period before the engine shuts down. The eng
cooldown time is set for five minutes at the fac
(For Non-Paralleling PEEC The engine starts and the engine runs while tt
ECS is in the MANUAL START position. In the
Engines) COOLDOWN/STOP position (9 o'clock), the fUi
control solenoid shuts the engine down after E
SMCS Code: 4490; 7451
cooldown. In theOFF/RESET position (12 o'cloe
SIN: LRY1-Up the engine shuts down immediately and any fE
indicators are reset (except emergency stop w
SIN: 4BZ1-Up the ESPB is pushed in).
3 4 If the red emergency stop push button (ESPB)

is pressed, the fuel is shut off. The operator m
1\CUMP
~~ @,/'' ' I
turn the ESPB (7) clockwise until the ESPB relE
in order to restart the engine. Next turn the EC
OFF/RESET and then turn the ECS to the MAN
o
mp
START.
sO The voltage adjust rheostat (VAR) (4) connect,

the voltage regulator and the VAR is used to a,
generator voltage to the desired level. The VAl
used in place of the voltage level rheostat. TiL
6 ...........~
I HZ 'W' PANEL voltage level rheostat is located on the genera
V LIGHTS
0:
........
~~ The optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP) (
used to raise the engine speed. The optional s
adjust potentiometer is used to lower the engil
4 EMERGENCY
speed when an electronic governor is used. jJ
optional governor is mounted in this location il
'~
governor with a speed adjust motor is used.
The panel light switch (PLS) (5) turns ON the r

An optional pump run switch (3) is used in

conjunction with the generator set mounted
automatic fuel transfer system, if equipped. Tt
Illustration 52 900395939 generator set mounted AC fuel transfer pump \
Instrument Panel Switches the day tank of the generator set when the ope
(1) Pump stop switch. This switch is optional. pushes the pump run switch. The pump will
(2) SAS: start aid switch. The sWitch is optional. automatically shut off when the fuel level contE
(3) Pump run switch, The switch is optional. reaches the high fuel level. The pump can be
(4) VAR: voltage adjust rheostat off manually by pressing the pump stop switct
(5) PLS: panel light switch
(6) SP: speed potentiometer(optional) or GS: governor switch
(optional)
(7) ESPB: emergency stop push button
(8) ECS; engine control switch
43
Optional pump stop switch (1) is used in conjunction 101390589

with the generator mounted automatic fuel transfer
system, if equipped. The pump stop switch is used Electrical Converter (Pulse
to manually stop the AC fuel transfer pump. The Width Modulated)
pump stop switch can be reset by depressing the
pump stop switch a second time. (For EUI Engines and PEEC
The optional start aid switch (SAS) (2) is present
Engines Only)
only on required generator sets. There are two types SMCS Code: 4490
of start aid system.
SIN: 5KW1-Up
• Manual shot type of system is for metered shot
type of system SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: SNW1-Up
• Automatic start aid is for continuous flow start aid
systems SIN: LRY1-Up
On manual start aid types, when the SAS (2) SIN: 4BZ1-Up
is held in the ON position (momentary contact),
the metered shot start aid system is activated. A SIN: SAZ1-Up
specific amount of ether is metered into a holding
chamber. When SAS (2) is released, a solenoid
~
allows ether to flow to the engine. The metered shot
start aid system deactivates when the following
conditions are present.
3 2 1
.
• The contacts of the crank termination relay (CTR) a<@j
<@j CATERPILLAR
open at approximately 400 RPM.

-8 S
II~~~~II
Kl 0 +8
· • The SAS (2) is released to the OFF position ..
NOTICE Illustration 53
g00474634
Crank the engine before you activate (keep SAS in Analog to PWM Converter
OFF position) the metered shot start aid system. Dam-
(1) Droop potentiometer.
age to the engine is possible by activating the system
when the engine is not turning.
The electrical converter is used to change the
analog signal of the speed potentiometer into
On automatic start aid types, the continuous flow a pulse width modulated signal. The engine
start aid system operates in the automatic or manual electronics can now recognize the PWM signal. The
mode. When the SAS is in the AUTO position, electrical converter is mounted on the subpanel
the automatic mode is activated. The system within the control panel.
automatically injects ether only during the crank
cycle. When the SAS is held in the MAN position, The electrical converter continuously generates
the manual mode is activated. The operator is able two PWM signals, speed and droop. The duty
to control the time ether is injected during cranking. cycle of the speed cycle varies from 2 to 95% in
The manual mode also allows the operator to inject proportion to the signal that is being received from
more ether after crank termination. This additional the speed potentiometer. This is adjusted by the
ether is used on cold engines that continue to operator. The duty cycle of the droop signal varies
detonate. The automatic mode deactivates when from 2 to 95% in proportion to the signal that is
the following conditions are present: being received from the droop potentiometer on the
electrical converter. This is adjusted by the service
• The contacts of the crank termination relay (CTR) personnel. The base frequency of the PWM signals
open at approximately 400 RPM. are constant at 415 Hz to 52S Hz.

• The SAS (2) is released to the OFF position.

44
The electrical converter is supplied operating power

011 341
at the terminals for the throttle position sensor. "8-" ,
GUIS~l
and "8+" is provided at the terminals. The terminal

"1" is an input and the terminal connects to terminal
GSC-J5
ALM DATA OUT
iw rn
)-( :, !If-,
"3" of the speed potentiometer. The terminal "2" is
an input and the terminal connects to terminal "2" ROM DATA
eSC-30
OUT
wm
)-(
,, ,,
,t !#+,,
(wiper) of the speed potentiometer. The terminal
"3" of the electrical converter is an input and the B
~ffiIl
)-( !6+,
,
terminal connects to terminal "1" of the speed ,,
potentiometer. The terminal "S" of the electrical G5C-19 'W)-) [3 D+ ~
,
converter is an output and the terminal provides a CAT OATA LINK+
,
speed signal to the engine electronic control. The
terminal "0" of the electrical converter is an output CAT DATA LINK-
G5C-20
V)-)BD ~ ~--~
and the terminal provides a droop signal to the ON 3$00
GEIiSETS
engine electronic control. gC
Illustration 55
The Connection Points For The CAT Data Link On MUI Am
101364202 Engines
Data Link There are three serial data links on MUI and f
engines. Illustration 55 show the connection ~
SMCS Code: 4490 at the GSC on MUI and PEEC engines. There
four serial data links on EUI engines. Illustrati
54 shows the connection points at the GSC+
EUI engines. The data links are described in
following paragraphs.
ALM DATA OUT
GSC-35 l' , ALM Data Output - This serial data link is a s
GSC-30
7 directional link. The GSC+ uses this data lin,
ROM DATA OUT for one-way communication with optional Alar
1 Modules (ALM) or the optional Customer Inter
B- Module (CIM). The ALM Data Link consists o'
19 single wire that conQects the GSC+ (cqnnect,
GSC-19
CAT DATA llNK+ contact 35) to an ALM or a CIM. A return conn
(battery negative) is required between the G~
GSC-20
CAT DATA LINK- and the module. See Systems Operation, "AI,
Modules" for more information about the ALM
CCM DATA LI~~~-21 -n Link. Also, see Systems Operation, "Custome
Interface Module"for more information on the.
CCM DATA LINK-
GSC-22 Data Link.
ROM Data Output - This serial data link is sir

directional. The GSC+ uses this data link for
Illustration 54 g00733885 one-way communication with the optional Rei.
The Connection Points For The CAT Data Link On EUI Engines Driver Module ("ROM"). The ROM data link co
of a single wire that connects the GSC+ (conr
contact 30) to the "RDM". Also, a return conn,
(battery negative) that is between the GSC+ al
module is required. An ROM is used in conjur
with the optional Customer Communication Me
(CCM). For more information, see the topic Sy
Operation, "Relay Driver Module (ROM)".
45
CAT Data Link - This serial data link is bidirectional.

The data link has two functions. For MUI and
PEEC engines, this data link is used for two
B A
way communication with the optional Customer VS OR A
~
Communication Module (CCM). For EUI engines, GND YL B
this data link is used for two way communication SIG GN c
with the engine ECM. The CAT Data Link uses a
C
shielded twisted pair cable that connects the GSC
(connector contact 19 and connector contact 20) to
the CCM or engine ECM. For more information, see
the Systems Operation, "Customer Communication
Module".
CACM Data Link - FOR EUI ENGINES ONLY This

serial data link is bidirectional. The GSC uses 900311286
this data link for two-way communication with the Illustration 56
optional Customer Communication Module (CCM). Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
The Data Link uses a shielded twisted pair cable
that connects the GSC (connector contact 21 The engine oil pressure sensor is an input of the
and conneytor contact 22) to the CCM. For more GSC+. The sensor tells the GSC+ the current
information, see the Systems Operation, "Customer engine oil pressure. The GSC+ shows the engine
Communication Module". oil pressure on the lower display and the GSC+
also uses the sensor information to determine when
a low engine oil pressure fault exists. The engine
i01379489 oil pressure sensor is mounted on the outside of
one of the engine oil galleries. The engine model
Sensors determines the exact location of the engine oil
pressure sensor.
SMCS Code: 4490
The engine oil pressure sensor is a pulse width
The GSC+/GSC+P monitors the following engine
modulated sensor. This sensor continuously
sensors that are listed below.
generates a PWM signal. The duty cycle of the
PWM signal varies from 10 to 90% .. The duty .
• Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil) for MUI and PEEC cycle varies proportionally to the oil pressure of
engines
the engine. The GSC+ receives the PWM signal.
The GSC+ measures the duty cycle in order to
• Temperature Sensor (Engine Coolant) for MUI determine the oil pressure of the engine. The base
and PEEC engines
frequency of the signal is constant at 500 ± 150 Hz.
The signal wire of the oil pressure sensor connects
• Optional Liquid Level Sensor (Engine Coolant) to connector contact 8 of the GSC+. The signal wire
for all engines
of the oil pressure sensor is found on connector
contact "C". The sensor is supplied operating power
• Optional Temperature Sensor (Engine Oil) for all (8 DCV) at connector contact "A" from the GSC+
engines
(connector contact 9).
• Speed Sensor (Engine) for all engines There are five setpoints that are related to engine
oil pressure. The setpoints that are programmed
Note: On MUI and PEEC engines, all of the listed into the GSC+ are P003, P004, P012, P013 and
sensors are connected directly to the GSC+. P014. See Systems Operation, "Engine Generator
On EUI engines, the oil pressure sensor and
Programming OP5-0".
coolant temperature sensor are connected to the
engine ECM instead of the GSC+. The engine
ECM sends the data from these two sensors Temperature Sensor (Engine
to the GSC+ for display purposes. Refer to Coolant)
Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B EPG Engines"
or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, "3406E EPG Note: This description applies only to MUI and
Engines" for information on these two sensors. PEEC engines.
Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)

Note: This description applies only to MUI and
PEEC engines.
46
VS OR A VS OR A
GND BK B GND BK B
B~
SIG WH c SIG WH C
Illustration 57 g00310269 g(
Illustration 58
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
The engine coolant temperature sensor is an input of The engine oil temperature sensor is optional
the GSC+. The engine coolant temperature sensor the sensor is an input of the GSC+. The sem
tells the GSC+ the engine coolant temperature. reports the engine oil temperature to the GS(
The GSC+ shows the engine coolant temperature The GSC+ shows the engine oil temperature,
on the lower display. Also, the GSC+ uses the lower display. Also, the GSC+ uses the infonT
information from the sensor in order to determine from the sensor in order to determine when ,
when a high coolant temperature fault exists or a high oil temperature alarm exists. The engine
low coolant temperature fault exists. The engine temperature sensor is mounted on the outsid,
coolant temperature sensor is mounted in the water one of the engine oil galleries. The exact loc,
jacket. The sensor is usually mounted toward the depends on the engine model.
front of the engine. The exact location depends on
the engine model. The engine oil temperature sensor is a pulse'
modulated type of sensor. The sensor continu
The engine coolant temperature sensor is a pulse generates a PWM signal. The duty cycle of II
width modulated sensor (PWM). This sensor PWM signal contin~ously varies from 10% to ,!
continuously generates a PWM signal. The duty in proportion to the oil temperature of the en£
cycle of the signal varies from 10 to 95% in The GSC+ receives the PWM signal and the (
proportion to the coolant temperature of the engine. measures the duty cycle in order to determine
The GSC+ receives the PWM signal and the GSC+ engine oil temperature. The base frequency 0
measures the duty cycle in order to determine signal is constant at 455 Hz (370 to 550 Hz).
the coolant temperature of the engine. The base signal wire of the oil temperature sensor conn
frequency of the signal is constant at 455 Hz (370 to to connector contact 14 of the GSC+. The sic
550 Hz). The signal wire of the coolant temperature
sensor connects to connector contact 7 of the
wire is found at connector contact "C" of the s
The sensor is supplied operating power (8 DC
GSC+. The signal wire is found at connector contact connector contact "A" from the GSC+ (conne
"C" of the sensor. The sensor is supplied operating contact 9).
power (8 DCV) at connector contact "A" from the
GSC+ connector contact 9. There are five setpoints that are related to eng
temperature. The five setpoints are programmE
There are four setpoints that are related to the the GSC+. The related setpoints are P003, PC
engine coolant temperature. These setpoints are P025, P026 and P027. See Systems Operatio
programmed into the GSC+. The related setpoints "Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0".
are P003, P004, POi5 and P016. See Systems
Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0".
Fluid Level Sensor (Engine
Temperature Sensor (Engine Oil) Coolant)
Note: This description applies to EUI, MUI an
Note: This description applies to EUI, MUI and
PEEC engines.
PEEC engines.
47
VS RO A'
B A
cQJ = ~ ''S'
It- ~
GNO BK B
-<U SIG GN C
'--- c
QEJ a= y= 0 n :r
900311256 g00311291
Illustration 59 Illustration 60
Engine Coolant Loss Sensor Engine Magnetic Speed Sensor
The engine coolant loss sensor is optional and the The engine magnetic speed sensor is an input of
sensor is an input of the GSC+. The sensor reports the GSC+. The sensor tells the engine speed to the
the loss of engine coolant to the GSC+. The GSC+ GSC+. The GSC+ shows the engine speed on the
uses the information from the sensor in order to lower display. Also, the GSC+ uses the information
determine when a low coolant level fault exists. The from the sensor for tasks such as activating an
engine coolant loss sensor is usually mounted near engine overspeed shutdown and terminating engine
the top of the engine radiator. The exact location cranking and determining the oil step speed. The
depends on the engine model. engine magnetic speed sensor is mounted on the
flywheel housing of the engine.
The engine coolant loss sensor sends a negative
battery signal to the GSC+. "8-" for a normal level. The sensor creates a sine wave signal from passing
Also, the engine coolant loss sensor sends +S ring gear teeth at the rate of one pulse per tooth.
DCV to the GSC+ for a low level. The signal wire The sensor sends a sine wave signal to the GSC+.
(connector contact "C") of the coolant loss sensor The frequency of the signal is directly proportional
connects to connector contact 13 of the GSC+. to the speed of. the engine. The GSC+ receives
The sensor is supplied operating power (8 DCV) at the sine wave signal and the GSC+ measures
connector contact "A" from the GSC+ (connector the frequency. The frequency is measured at one
contact 9). pulse per gear tooth in order to determine the
engine speed. The wires of the sensor connect to
There are three setpoints that are related to connector contact 1 and connector contact 2 of
the loss 01 engine coolant. The setpoints are the GSC+ within a shielded cable. The drain wire
programmed into the GSC+. The related setpoints of the shielded cable is connected to the "AUX"
are P004, POOS and P006. See Systems Operation, terminal strip.
"Engine/Generator Programming OPS-O".
There are four setpoints that are related to the
engine speed. The setpoints are programmed
Speed Sensor (Engine) into the GSC+. The related setpoints are P009,
PO 10, P011 and P012. See Systems Operation,
Note: This description applies to EUI, MUI and
"Engine/Generator Programming OPS-O".
PEEC engines.
48
101392028
Modes Of Operation
SMCS Code: 4490
Table 2
Display Area Functions When In Normal Mode, Alarm Mode Or Shutdown Modell)
Item Of Display Area Normal Mode~) Alarm Model~ Shutdown Mode
Upper Display AC Data Shown AC Data Shownl') Fault Code Shown
Lower Display AC Power Data, Engine Data AC Power Data, Engine Data AC Power Data, Engil
And Relay Status Shown And Relay Status Shown And Relay Status She
Shutdown Indicator(s) All Off All Off Flashing
Fault Alarm Indicator Off Flashingl') Off
Key Function Normal Mode Alarm Mode Shutdown Mode

Power Meter Key Starts And Stops The Starts And Stops The Starts And Stops Thl
Scrolling Of Power Meter Scrolling Of Power Meter Scrolling Of Power M
Data On Lower Display. Data On Lower Display. Data On Lower Displ
Selects All Power Meter Data Selects All Power Meter Data Selects All Power Mel
To Be Shown. To Be Shown. To Be Shown.
AC Select Key Selects The AC Data That Is Selects The AC Data That Is No Function
Shown On The Upper Display Shown On The Upper Display
Engine Meter Key Starts And Stops The Starts And Stops The Starts And Stops Th,
Scrolling Of Engine Scrolling Of Engine Scrolling Of Engine
Conditions On Lower Display Conditions On Lower Display Conditions On Lower
Lamp Test Key Performs A Lamp Test Performs A Lamp Test Performs A Lamp Tes
Alarms Code Key No Function . Shows The Alarm Fault Code No Function
On The Upper Display
Exit Keyl') No Function No Function No Function
Service Mode Key Enters The GSC+ Into Enters The GSC+ Into No Function
Service Model') Service ModelS)
(1) For a description of the display area functions when in Service Mode, see Systems Operation, "Service Mode". For a description
display area functions when in Paralleling Mode, see Systems Operation, "Paralleling Mode".
(2) Synchronization Mode is enabled in Normal Mode or Alarm Mode.
(3) When an alarm fault is present, the alarm fault code is shown on the upper display when the alarm codes key is pressed.
(4) This key only functions when in service mode, see Systems Operation, "Service Mode".
(4) Service Mode cannot be entered when the ECS is in the AUTOposition.
49
Service Mode - The GSC+ goes into Service Mode

when the operator presses the "Service Mode" key
that is located on the keypad. The operator can use
5 Service Mode for the following purposes:
f • Assist with troubleshooting diagnostic faults.
• Verify, calibrate or adjust the generator set

6 functions.
f • Satisfy special applications.
:=: Fl :=: Fl F: Fl :=: ::: F: F: F: ::::i'
_ _ _ e_e _ _ _ _ _ _ -o-
r::; IT.$ ~~~ llf' t~~"",,,,.,,",,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
• Satisfy the needs of the customer.
The operator can identify service mode by

Ie
! O ~HltlDO~'''.' observing the display area. When the generator set
HVU
/
is in Service Mode, "SERV" is SHOWN on the upper

3 ""U
... n~ J.~
L-
display.
4 7
Note: Service Mode cannot be entered when the
ECS is in the AUTO position.
Note: The GSC+P has an additional mode of
Display Area Of Generator Set Control + (GSC+).
operation. The fifth mode of operation is "Parallel
(1) Dedicated shutdown indicators. Mode".
(2) Spare faull indicalors (Or synchronizing lighls on Ihe GSC+P).
(3) Fault shutdown indicator.
(4) Fault alarm indicator. Parallel Mode - The GSC+P uses Parallel Mode to
(5) Upper display. synchronize the generator sets to other generator
(6) Lower display. sets or to a utility bus. The GSC+P is in Parallel
(7) Keypad.
Mode whenever the Parallel Mode Switch is in
AUTO, Semi-Auto, or Permissive positions. Parallel
The GSC+ has four modes of operation. A brief Mode is enabled in Normal Mode or Alarm Mode.
description of each mode follows this paragraph.
Some alarm conditions may stop the process of
See the individual topics for more detailed
Synchronization. For more information, see Systems
information. Operation, "Paralleling Mode".
Normal Mode - The GSC+ uses normal mode for
the normal operation of the generator set. The 101392029
operator can identify normal mode by observing
the display area. When the GSC+ is in tile normal Normal Mode
mode, all the dedicated shutdown indicators are
OFF. The fault shutdown indicator is OFF. The SMCS Code: 4490
fault alarm indicator is OFF and "SERV" is NOT
SHOWING on the upper display. Normal mode is used in order to monitor the
generator set. Normal mode is also used to control
Alarm Mode - If there is an alarm fault, the GSC+ the generator set. The GSC+ controls the engine
will automatically go into alarm mode in order to according to the information which is received from
alert the operator of a non-critical fault. The operator the operator and the information that is received
can identify the Alarm Mode by observing the from the engine sensors. The GSC+ performs the
display area. When the GSC+ is in Alarm Mode, following functions in normal mode:
the fault alarm indicator is FLASHING. The fault
code will be shown when the "Alarm Codes" Key • Engine starting function
is pressed.
• Monitoring of the important GSC+ conditions
Shutdown Mode - If there is a shutdown fault, the
GSC+ will automatically go into shutdown mode • Showing the important GSC+ conditions to the
in order to alert the operator of a critical fault. operator
The operator can identify the shutdown mode by
observing the display area. When the GSC+ is in • Fault detection
shutdown mode, a dedicated shutdown indicator
is FLASHING, or the fault shutdown indicator is • Engine stopping
FLASHING.
50
The operator can identify normal mode by observing 5. The GSC+ cycle cranks the engine until the
the display area. When the GSC+ is in normal mode, crank time reaches the setpoint (POll) for
all shutdown indicators are OFF. The fault alarm crank time or until the engine starts. The fe
indicator is OFF and "SERV" is NOT SHOWING on default of the setpoint (POll) is 10 second
the upper display. When the GSC+ is in normal crank time and 10 seconds of rest time.
mode, the engine is able to start or the engine is
able to run. 6. While the starting motor is cranking, the G
shows the status of the relays on the relay
Note: The optional Customer Communication indicators of the lower display.
Module (CCM) can remotely control certain
generator set functions. This remote control can • ETR fuel systems: K4 (SMR), K5 (RR), ~
only occur when the engine control switch (ECS) (FCR)
is in the AUTO position. See Systems Operation,
"System Communication Module (Customer)"for • ETS fuel systems: K4 (SMR), K5 (RR)
more information.
• On EUI engines, K 1 (EGR) is also showr
Engine Starting Sequence
7. The GSC+ deactivates the starting motor r
1, The GSC+ receives an engine start signal. The (SMR) and the GSC+ activates the crank
signal will be one of three. termination relay (CTR) when the engine sl
reaches the setpoint POll for crank termir
• The operator turns the ECS to the Manual Start speed. The factory default of setpoint POl
position. 400 rpm.
• The ECS is in the AUTO position and the 8. For MUI engines, the GSC+ activates the
remote initiate contacts (IC) close. electronic governor relay (EGR) when the
pressure reaches setpoint PO 14. Setpoint I
• The ECS is in the AUTO position and a start is for low oil pressure at idle speed. The fE
command is sent by the optional Customer default of setpoint P014 is 10 kPa (10 psi
Communication Module (CCM). The EGR signals the certain types of elect
governor (EG) in order to accelerate the el
2. The GSC+ checks the system before beginning to the rated speed. On PEEC engines, the
the cranking sequence. The GSC+. checks that signals the PEEC .in order to accelerate tr
no system faults are present. The GSC+ checks engine to the rated speed.
that all previous shutdown faults have been
reset. Note that shutdown faults are removed Note: The electronic governor relay (EGR) is
by turning the ECS to OFF/RESET position. The used on "8NS" or "9ES" generator sets.
GSC+ also checks that the engine is not already
running. If the engine is equipped with prelube, Note: The optional customer communication n
the GSC+ checks the status of the prelube. If (CCM) can remotely activate the EGR when I
the prelube is not complete, the GSC+ will not low oil pressure setpoint is exceeded. The or;
crank the engine. customer communication module can remote
deactivate the EGR when the low oil pressur
3. The GSC+ begins the crank sequence. setpoint is exceeded.
a, On MUI engines, the GSC+ activates the 9. The GSC+ shows the following information
starting motor relay (SMR) and the run relay
(RR). • Information for one or more phases on I
upper display
b. On PEEC engines, the GSC+ activates the
starting motor relay (SMR) and the run relay • Information for power meter on the lOWE
(RR). Once activated, the run relay (RR) display
removes the shutdown signal from the PEEC .
• Information for the engine system on the
c. On EUI engines, the GSC+ activates the display
starting motor relay (SMR), the run relay (RR)
and the electronic governor relay (EGR). • For ETR fuel system, the relay status of
(EGR), K3 (CTR), K5 (RR), and Kl (FCR
4. The GSC+ activates the fuel control relay (FCR). the lower display
51
• For ETS fuel system, the relay status of K 1 7. The GSC+ shows the status of the relays on the
(EGR), K3 (CTR), K5 (RR) on the lower display relay status indicator of the lower display. All
relay indicators should be "OFF" except on ETS
Engine Stopping Procedure systems. On the ETS systems, the "K7" indicator
remains active for 70 seconds after the engine
1. The GSC+ will receive an engine stop signal. speed and oil pressure are at zero.
The signal will be one of three.
Note: The engines can be shut down immediately
• The operator turns the ECS to the STOP by turning the ECS to the OFF/RESET. The cool down
position. timer is bypassed and the spare data output is
deactivated.
• The ECS is in the AUTO position and the
remote initiate contacts (IC) open.
i01103575
• The optional customer communication module

(CCM) sends a stop command to the GSC+
Alarm Mode
while the ECS is in the AUTO position and SMCS Code: 4490
while the remote initiate contacts are open.
The alarm mode alerts the operator when an alarm
2. After receiving the stop signal, the GSC+ checks fault is occurring. An alarm fault is not critical but
that there are no present system faults. an alarm fault is potentially serious. An alarm fault
precedes certain dedicated shutdown faults. An
3. The GSC+ begins the cooldown period. The alarm fault can be protective relaying functions that
cool down period is the setpoint P019. The have been enabled as an alarm fault.
factory default of setpoint P019 is five minutes.
When an alarm fault exists the GSC+ automatically
4. The GSC+ may now activate the spare output. activates alarm mode. The operator is alerted by the
The spare output is activated only if the spare FLASHING fault alarm indicator. Press the "ALARM
output SP07 has been programmed for this CODES" key in order to identify the alarm fault.
purpose. The spare output can activate the slave A corresponding fault code is then shown on the
relay during the cooldown cycle. The optional upper display. This fault code can be an AL fault
circuit breaker is then activated and this takes code, a SP fault code or a diagnostic fault code.
the generator off load. "Spare 1" indicator,"'Spare2" indicator or "Spare 3"
indicator may be flashing. The fault alarm indicator
5. After the cool down cycle (setpoint P019), the may also be flashing. For more information on fault
GSC+ deactivates the run relay (RR). The codes, see System Operation, "Fault Description".
electronic governor relay is deactivated after the When the GSC+ is in alarm mode, the engine is
engine oil pressure decreases to less than the able to start or the engine is able to run.
setpoint for low oil pressure shutdown at idle
speed (SP14). The AL fault codes that are shown on the GSC+
indicate the current status of the generator set. The
a. On MUI and EUI engines, the GSC+ shuts GSC+ does not show the AL fault codes after the
off fuel by deactivating the fuel control relay fault has been corrected. Diagnostic fault codes are
(FCR) logged in the GSC+ fault log for viewing by service
personnel.
b. On PEEC engines, the run relay (RR) sends
a shutdown signal to the PEEC. The PEEC
turns off the fuel shutoff solenoid which shuts
down the engine.
6. When the engine speed reaches zero rpm, the

GSC+ deactivates the crank terminate relay
(CTR) and a restart is now allowed.
Before the engine speed reaches 0 rpm, a

restart of the engine is possible. When the GSC+
receives an engine start signal, the GSC+ turns
on the fuel and the GSC+ allows the engine to
run. If the engine does not run, the starling motor
relay (SMR) does not activate until the crank
termination relay (CTR) is deactivated at 0 rpm.
52
Note: When the operator overrides a shutdown fault ,e

to be an alarm fault, the corresponding dedicated
fault shutdown indicator is on continuously. The Shutdown Mode
fault shutdown indicator stays on continuously if the (For MUI Engines)
particular fault occurs. When the fault shutdown
indicator is ON CONTINUOUSLY, the normal SMCS Code: 4490
shutdown response has been overridden by the
operator. The shutdown fault is treated as an alarm SIN: SNS1·Up
fault. For the shutdown faults that are overridden,
a fault code is not shown on the upper display. SIN: 9ES1-Up
The dedicated shutdown indicator remains ON
SIN: 5PW1-Up
CONTINUOUSLY until the fault is corrected and
the engine control switch (ECS) is turned to the SIN: 6WW1-Up
"OFF/RESET" position. The dedicated shutdown
faults that can be overridden are low oil pressure SIN: STW1-Up
and high coolant temperature. See Systems
Operation, "Setpoint Programming OP5 (P03)". For SIN: LRW1-Up
more information, see System Operation, "Shutdown SIN: LRX1-Up
Mode".
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Alarm faults do not have an immediate adverse
effect on the generator set. However, the operator Shutdown mode prevents damage to the gen
should investigate the cause of the alarm fault set when a shutdown fault is occurring. A Shl
condition at the earliest opportunity. If the operation fault is critical. When a shutdown fault occun
of the generator set is mandatory then the procedure GSC+ automatically activates shutdown mod,
to start and stop is identical to normal mode. The the shutdown fault is corrected. The GSC+ s
GSC+ will respond to the operator input that is from down the engine when the GSC+ is in shutd
the instrument panel and the engine sensors. mode. The GSC+ prevents starting of the en
and the GSC+ alerts the operator.
Alarm Mode Sequence
The GSC+ alerts the operator and the GSC·
1. An alarm fault~occurs. identifies the shutdown fault by FLASHING tl
corresponding shutdown indicator.. The name
2. The GSC+ detects the alarm fault and the GSC+ shutdown indicator identifies the shutdown fa
FLASHES the fault alarm indicator. The GSC+
does not change the status or operation of the Shutdown Indicators
generator set.
• Low oil pressure
3. Pressing the "ALARM CODES" key causes the
upper display to show a corresponding fault • Emergency stop
code.
• High water temperature
4. Correct the alarm fault. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Fault Identification". • Engine overspeed
5. After the alarm fault has been corrected, the • Engine overcrank
GSC+ turns OFF the fault alarm indicator and
the GSC+ removes the fault code from the upper • Fault shutdown
display. The GSC+ now returns to normal mode.
• Spare 1, Spare 2, Spare 3 (that are accom
by the fault shutdown indicator)
If the fault shutdown indicator is the only indi

FLASHING, additional information is availabl<
fault code is shown on the upper display wI"
more precisely identifies the cause of the Shl
fault. See System Operation, "Fault Descripti(
more information.
53
Shutdown Mode Sequence • K6 (ASR) will show for 15 seconds for an

emergency stop fault, engine overspeed fault,
1. A shutdown fault occurs and the GSC+ detects or speed sensor fault. K6 (ASR) will also show
the shutdown fault. if engine speed does not decrease at least
100 rpm.
2. To shut off the fuel. the GSC+ deactivates the
fuel control relay (FCR). • K7 (FCR) - (ETS fuel systems) for 70 seconds
after engine speed decreases to 40 rpm and
3. In order to prevent the engine from starting, the oil pressure decreases to SO kPa (12 psi). (K7
GSC+ deactivates the run relay (RR), and the is not shown for ETR fuel systems.)
GSC+ deactivates the starting motor relay (SMR).
4. In order to remove the generator load, the GSC+

Engine Start Sequence (After
activates the genset fault relay (GFR). This Shutdown)
activates the optional circuit breaker shunt trip
coil. 1. Correct the shutdown fault. See the System
Operation, "Fault Identification".
Note: The spare output may also be programmed to
activate when a shutdown occurs. This output can 2. Turning the engine control switch (ECS) to the
drive a rela.y in order to open the circuit breaker, or OFF/RESET position resets the GSC+. If no
the output can open a transfer switch. See System shutdown fault is active, the GSC+ returns to
Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming OP6". normal mode and the engine is able to start.
5. The GSC+ activates the air shutoff relay (ASR)

i01268136
for 15 seconds during an emergency stop fault,
during an engine overspeed fault, or during an Shutdown Mode
speed sensor fault (CID 190).
(For PEEC and EUI Engines)
6. When engine speed reaches 0 rpm, the
GSC+ deactivates the crank termination relay SMCS Code: 4490
(CTR). The electronic governor relay (EGR)
SIN: 5KW1-Up
is deactivated when the engine oil pressure
reaches the setpoint PO 14 for low oil pressure 'SIN: 6GW1-Up
shutdown at idle speed 70 kPa (10 psi).
SIN: SNW1-Up
7. If engine speed does not decrease by at least
100 rpm within five seconds, the GSC+ activates SIN: LRY1-Up
the ASR for 15 seconds. SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Note: The ASR would already be activated for an SIN: SAZ1-Up
emergency stop fault, engine overspeed fault, or
speed sensor fault. Shutdown mode prevents damage to the generator
set when a shutdown fault is occurring. A shutdown
8. The GSC+ FLASHES the corresponding fault is critical. When a shutdown fault occurs, the
shutdown indicator. If the fault shutdown indicator GSC+ automatically activates shutdown mode until
is FLASHING, a fault code is shown on the the shutdown fault is corrected. The GSC+ shuts
upper display. See Systerns Operation, "Fault down the engine when the GSC+ is in shutdown
Description". mode. The GSC+ prevents starting of the engine
and the GSC+ alerts the operator.
9. If the fault shutdown indicator is the only indicator
FLASHING, additional information is available. A The GSC+ alerts the operator and the GSC+
fault code is shown on the upper display that identifies the shutdown fault by FLASHING the
better identifies the cause of the shutdown fault. corresponding shutdown indicator. The name of the
See the Systems Operation, "Fault Description". shutdown indicator identifies the shutdown fault.
10. The lower display continues to show the engine Shutdown Indicators
data.
• Low oil pressure
11. The relay status indicators show.
• Emergency stop
• K2 (GFR)
• High water temperature
54
• Engine overs peed 7. II engine speed does not decrease by at

100 rpm within five seconds, the GSC+ ae
• Engine overcrank the ASR for 15 seconds.
• Fault shutdown Note: The ASR would already be activated fe

emergency stop fault, engine overspeed faul
• Spare 1, Spare 2, Spare 3 (that are accompanied speed sensor fault.
by the fault shutdown indicator)
8. The GSC+ FLASHES the corresponding
If the fault shutdown indicator is the only indicator shutdown indicator. If the fault shutdown in
FLASHING, additional information is available. A is FLASHING, a fault code is shown on t~
fault code is shown on the upper display which upper display. See Systems Operation, "F
more precisely identifies the cause of the shutdown Description" .
fault. See System Operation, "Fault Description" for
more information. 9. If the fault shutdown indicator is the only in
FLASHING, additional information is avails
fault code is shown on the upper display
Shutdown Mode Sequence better identifies the cause of the shutdowr
1. A shutdown lault occurs and the GSC+ detects See the Systems Operation, "Fault Descrir
the shutdown fault.
10. The lower display continues to show the E
2. On EUI engines, in order to shut off the fuel, the data.

GSC+ deactivates the electronic governor relay
11. The relay status indicators show.
(EGR).
On PEEC engines, the GSC+ deactivates the run • K2 (GFR)

relay (RR). The normally open contacts of the run
relay now de-energize the REL relay coil. The • K6 (ASR) will show for 15 seconds for ;
emergency stop fault, engine overspeec
ESDR is then de-energized. The normally closed
or speed sensor fault. K6 (ASR) will alsc
contacts of the ESDR send a ground signal to
the PEEC in order to shut down the engine. if engine speed does not decrease at I,
100 rpm.
3. In order to prevent th'e engine from starting, the .'
• K7 (FCR) - (ETS fuel systems) for 70 se,
GSC+ deactivates the run relay (RR), and the
GSC+ deactivates the starting motor relay (SMR). after engine speed decreases to 40 rpn
oil pressure decreases to 80 kPa (12 ps
4. In order to remove the generator load, the GSC+ is not shown for ETR fuel systems.)
activates the genset fault relay (GFR). This
activates the optional circuit breaker shunt trip Engine Start Sequence (After
coil.
Shutdown)
Note: The spare output may also be programmed to
1. Correct the shutdown fault. See the Syste
activate when a shutdown occurs. This output can
Operation, "Fault Identification".
drive a relay in order to open the circuit breaker, or
the output can open a transfer switch. See System
2. Turning the engine control switch (ECS) te
Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming OP6".
OFF/RESET position resets the GSC+. If r
shutdown fault is active, the GSC+ return,
5. The GSC+ activates the air shutoff relay (ASR)
normal mode and the engine is able to st,
for 15 seconds during an emergency stop fault,
during an engine overspeed fault, or during an
speed sensor fault (CID 190).
6. When engine speed reaches 0 rpm, the

GSC+ deactivates the crank termination relay
(CTR). The electronic governor relay (EGR)
is deactivated when the engine oil pressure
reaches the setpoint P014 for low oil pressure
shutdown at idle speed 70 kPa (10 psi).
55
101355545
Paralleling Mode
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up
g00688669
Illustration 63
SIN: BTW1-Up
Note: The EMCP II+P is not designed for paralleling
SIN: LRW1-Up
with a UTILITY in a standard installation. The EMCPII
SIN: LRX1-Up +P WILL support paralleling of multiple generators.
The EMCP II+P can be reconfigured to operate
SIN: LRY1-Up in parallel with a utility. but must be modified to
operate in droop mode. Additional components
SIN: 4BZ1-Up must be added in order to perform proper load
control when paralleling with a utility. These subjects
SIN: BAZ1-Up
are beyond the scope of this manual. Consult your
Caterpillar Dealer for more information.
Note: The GSC+P is not intended for use with

1 DELTA-WIRED GENERATORS. If set point P032 is set
to 1 (delta generators). the synchroscope will flash
\•
.(>~<)
/
i(>~<)
as shown in illustration 63. An "AL1 T' diagnostic
code will appear when the "Alarm Codes" key is
pressed .
(>~<) AUTO
\ 4
g00720980
Illustration 62
Parallel Mode Switch
(1) MANUAL (Permissive) Position
(2) OFF Position
(3) SEMI-AUTO Position
(4) AUTO Posilion
The GSC+P is in Parallel Mode whenever the

Parallel Mode Switch is in the AUTO position. the
Semi-AUTO position. or the Permissive position.
There are several paralleling functions within
Parallel Mode. These functions are determined by
the following items: Parallel Mode Switch. Engine
Control Switch (ECS). Customer Communication
Module (CCM). if the Close Breaker Control Output
is connected to the breaker. if the Close Breaker
Control Output is not connected to the breaker. and
whether the bus is live or dead.
56
Table 3
EMCP+P Parallel Functions
Parallel Function Bus Status ECS Position Parallel Mode GSC+P Close BrE
Switch Position Frequency Qutpu
Control
Automatic Live Start or Autol 1) Auto Controls When
Synchronization frequency, brings synchroniz
generator in sync conditions
with bus. met, actival
a prograrr
duratiol
CCM controlled Live Auto~) Auto Controls When
Automatic frequency, brings synchroniz
Synchronization generator in sync conditions
with bus. met, actival
a prograrr
duratiol
CCM Remote Live Auto~) Auto Controls Not activE
Synchronization frequency, brings
Test generator in sync
with bus.
CCM Dead Bus Dead Autol2) Auto Does not control Activates
Paralleling frequency. a prograrr
duratiol
Dead Bus Dead Start or Autol1) Auto Does not control Activates
Paralleling frequency. a prograrr
duratiol
Semi-Automatic Live Start or Autol1) Semi-Auto Controls When
Paralleling frequency, brings synchroniz
generator in sync conditions
with bus. met, activ
continuOl
Enables m.
breaker clo~
Permissive Live Start or Autol1) Permissive Does not control When
Paralleling frequency. synchroniz
conditions
met, activ
continuol
Enables m,
breaker elm
Off Live or Dead Off/Reset, Auto, Off Does not control Not activa
Start, Stop frequency.
(1) Remote initiate contacts are closed.
(2) With remote start command and remote auto-synch command from GeM.
(3) With Remote test command and remote auto-synch command from CeM.
(4) When the Close Breaker Output is disconnected from the breaker, this function becomes Automatic Synchronization Test.
(5) When the Close Breaker Output is disconnected, this function becomes Synchroscope Only,
Glossary Incoming Generator - The generator that is

connected to the bus.
Bus - The common power conducting wires or
bars to which all power sources within the power Generator Circuit Breaker - A mechanical d,
system are connected through their individual circuit that has the ability to make, carry, or interrUI
breakers. phase currents between the incoming genel
and the bus.
Dead Bus - A bus from which all of the available
power sources are disconnected.
57
Phase Sequence - The order that the phase Synchroscope

voltages pass the zero crossover. The individual
sine waves must appear in the same sequence for The lower display of the GSC+P becomes the
the bus and the incoming generator. synchroscope when the GSC+P is performing one
of the synchronizing functions. A square symbol
Generator Circuit Breaker Closure Time - The revolves around the perimeter of the display in
amount of time required for the breaker to close its order to indicate the phase angle and frequency
contacts after its closing control circuit is energized. relationship between the bus and the incoming
generator.
Oscillate - To move back and forth with a steady,
uninterrupted rhythm. Table 4
GSC+P Synchroscope - Frequency And
Synchroscope - The lower display of the GSC+P Phase Angle Relationship
is performing one of the synchronizing functions.
A revolving square is used to indicate the phase Pointer Position Indication
angle and frequency relationship between the bus Rotating Clockwise Frequency of the incoming
and the incoming generator. generator is greater than
the bus.
RPM indicators - Indicates frequency relationship
between th.e bus and the generator. If the generator Rotating counterclockwise Frequency of the incoming
generator is less than the
frequency is greater than the bus frequency, then bus.
the RPM "UP" indicator is shown. If the generator
frequency is less than the bus frequency, then the Stopped in any position Frequency of the incoming
RPM "down" indicator is shown. These indicators other than top center generator and bus are the
are only used in Permissive Mode. same. The phases are
different.
Phase Angle - The relative angle between the Stopped at top center Frequency of the incoming
corresponding phase voltages of the incoming generator and bus are the
generator to those of the bus. same. In phase (phase
angle is 0').
Gain - GSC+P controlled parameter that
determines the rate of change of the phase angle The upper display toggles between the incoming
difference between the generator and bus during generator phase C-A voltage and frequency. The
synchronization. Increasing the rate of change right side of the upper display shows "bUS" or
setpoint (P308) will increase the rate that the "GEn". Pressing the AC meter keypad will stop the
GSC+P matches the phase angle between the toggling and the upper display will show only the
generator and the bus. generator voltage and frequency or the voltage of
the bus and the frequency of the bus. When the
Damping - The GSC+P controlled parameter that toggling is locked, "GEn" or "bUS" will be flashing.
determines the amount of overshoot and settling
time of engine speed during synchronization.
Increasing the damping setpoint (P309) will increase
the damping effect.
II II I I I II II
Close Breaker Sensor - A set of normally open IUU OU,U
auxiliary contacts on the generator circuit breaker
that indicate when the generator circuit breaker is HIC-A V Hz
closed. The contacts are active (closed) when the g00502139
circuit breaker is closed, and the level of the GSC+P Illustration 64
close breaker sensor input is negative. The inactive The Bus Voltage and the frequency are shown on the Upper
level is floating (approximately 12.0 DCV). Refer to Display.
the DC Schematic of GSC+P Synchronization.
Dead Bus Relay - The bus relay (BUSR) that

indicates the state of the bus. The normally closed I I II I I I I I I
contacts are closed when the bus is dead, and the
level of the GSC+P dead bus sensor input is battery
-I (:1 U o I,U
negative. A live bus is indicated by an inactive level HI!; A V Hz
floating at approximately 12.0 DCV. Refer to the DC
g00502174
Schematic Of GSC+P Synchronization. Illustration 65
The Generator Voltage And Frequency are shown on the Upper
Display.
58
Note: Before the operator begins the synchror

tuning procedure, the governor for the enginl
the fuel system should be adjusted. The adju
provides optimum performance. Changes to
governor settings will require retuning of the
- () Speed Adjust 1 output. Refer to the appropr,
governor service manual. DO NOT proceed
synchronization tuning or attempt to parallel
g00502175 generator before completing these adjustmer
Illustration 66
The Lower Display (synchroscope) is showing the Bus And
frequency of the generator. The Phase Angle Relationship is also Note: For optimum perlormance, synchronizE
shown on the Lower Display. tuning should be performed under the samE
The Generator And the Bus are not synchronized. temperature conditions as the synchronizatio
be performed.
The GSC+P uses P-I-D (proportional-integral

111 smc
derivative) control to accomplish synchronize
- -1:::11- - - - - -I quickly and smoothly. The P, I and 0 paramet
independently controlled by setpoints P30?,
- - - - - - - - _I and P309. Adjusting anyone of these setpoir
not affect the other two settings.
The GSC+P checks the following conditions,
The Lower Display (synchroscope) is Showing that the Generator
And the Bus are Synchronized.
synchronization:
Note: The "RPM" indicators are shown only in • The phase sequence of the incoming gen
Permissive Mode. must be the same phase sequence of the
• Voltages of the incoming generator must n

Spare Fault Indicators the voltages of the bus within the accepta
range. This requirement can be enabled c
The "Spare Fault" indicators have alternate functions disabled with setpoint P303. Setpoint P30,
on the GSC+P during synchroniz(ltion functions. . determines the acceptable range.
"Spare 1" becomes the voltage indicator. This
indicator will illuminate when the difference between • The frequency of the incoming voltages m
the bus voltage and the oncoming generator match the frequency of the voltages of th,
voltage are within acceptable limits. "Spare 2" bus. The voltages must be within accepta
becomes the frequency indicator. This indicator will tolerances.
illuminate when the frequency difference between
the bus and the oncoming generator are within • The phase angles between the incoming
acceptable limits. "Spare 3" becomes the phase generator voltage and the bus voltage mu:
match indicator. This indicator illuminates when within the acceptable range. The acceptal
the phase difference between the bus and the range is determined by setpoint P305. Th,
oncoming generator are within acceptable limits. dwell time for the acceptable phase angle
When the GSC+ P is not performing paralleling determined by setpoint P306.
functions, the Spare Fault indicators retain their
normal functions as explained in Systems Operation, During synchronization, the GSC+P continuo
"Spare Input/Output Programming OP6". monitors the frequency and the phase angle
incoming voltage of the generator and the bl
Synchronizing Tuning Procedure GSC+P uses this information to adjust the vc
of the Speed Adjust 1 output. The GSC+P re
Due to the variance in the characteristics of the the engine speed or the GSC+P lowers the E
engine and the characteristics of the governor, the speed until the frequencies and the phase al
GSC+P is used to tune the response of the Speed match within the programmed acceptable rar
Adjust 1 output. The response is tuned for optimum
speed and smoothness. After all synchronization conditions are withir
the acceptable ranges, the GSC+P will activ
the Close Breaker control output for either a
programmed duration or continuously, depen
on the synchronization function selected.
59
Tuning Procedure 9. Note the setting of Setpoint P307. Calculate 60%

of this value. This is done by multiplying Setpoint
1. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to the "OFF" P307 by 0.6. Reset Setpoint P307 to the new
position. DISCONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER value.
FROM THE GSC+P CLOSE BREAKER CONTROL
OUTPUT. For example, when the engine oscillates for 20
seconds, P307 is set to 80. Multiplying 80 by 0.6
2. Enter Service Mode and program the following equals 48. P307 is then set to 48.
setpoints under OP5-3:
10. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to OFF. The
P301 is set to 1 to enable synchronization. GSC+P display should return to the OP11
function. P307 remains set to the value that was
P307 is set to 10%. determined in Step 9. Set P308 to 10%.
P308 is set to 0%. 11. DO NOT exit Service Mode. Turn the Parallel
Mode Switch to SEMI-AUTO. The circuit breaker
P309 is set to 0%. remains disconnected from the GSC+P Close
Breaker control output.
Ensure that the other setpoints are programmed
to the def.ault setting that is programmed in the 12. The GSC+P will adjust the engine speed to the
factory. frequency of the bus. Then, the synchroscope
pointer will lock at a phase angle of 0%. The "IN
Exit Service Mode. SYNCH" symbol is ON. Wait 20 seconds, if "IN
SYNCH" is ON proceed to Step 13. Otherwise,
3. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed so that proceed to Step 15.
the frequency of the generator is 0.5 Hz higher
than the frequency of the bus. 13. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to the OFF
position. The GSC+P display should return to the
4. Enter Service Mode and select OP11. Refer to OP11 function. Adjust P308 upward by a small
Service Mode, "Synchronization Setpoint Tuning increment.
-OP11".
14. Repeat the previous three Steps until the "IN
5. DO NOT exit Service Mode. Turn the Parallel SYNCH" indicator does not come ON within 20
Mode Switch to the SEMI-AUTO position. The seconds. .
circuit breaker remains disconnected from the
GSC+P Close Breaker control output. Note: With some engine/governor combinations,
oscillation may be minimal or instability may be
6. The GSC+P will adjust the engine speed to the minimal or may not occur. When this happens,
frequency of the bus. Wait for twenty seconds. adjust setpoint P308 to 100 and proceed to Step
Then note the position of the synchroscope 15. Lower settings for P308 can be tried.
pointer. If the synchroscope pointer is not
oscillating at least two segments, proceed to 15. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to the OFF
Step 7. If the synchroscope pointer is oscillating, position. The GSC+P display should return to
proceed to Step 9. the OP11 function. Setpoints P307 and P308 are
left programmed to the previously determined
7. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to OFF. The GSC+P values. Set P309 to 5%.
display should return to the OP11 function.
Adjust P307 upward by a small increment. 16. DO NOT exit Service Mode. Turn the Parallel
Mode Switch to the SEMI-AUTO position. The
8. Repeat the previous three steps until the GSC+P will adjust the engine speed to the
synchroscope pointer is OSCillating steadily at frequency of the bus. If oscillation and overshoot
least two segments at the end of 20 seconds. are acceptable proceed to Step 18. Otherwise,
proceed to Step 17.
Note: With some engine/governor combinations,
oscillation or instability may be minimal or may not 17. Turn the Parallel Mode Switch to the OFF
occur. When this happens, adjust setpoint P307 to position. The GSC+P display should return
60 and proceed to Step 10. to the OP11 function. Adjust setpoint P309
upward in small increments. Repeat this and the
If necessary, adjust Setpoint P307 in increments previous step until oscillation and overshoot are
that are less than 10% for greatest accuracy. acceptable.
60
18. For optimum performance, further adjustment • Yes - The synchroscope is shown on II
of setpoints P307, P308 and P309 may be display and the three spare fault indic
necessary. Usually, the P307 setpoint should show the voltage, phase, and frequen
be somewhat lower than P308 for optimum relationship between the incoming ger
performance. Setpoint P309 should only be and the bus.
adjusted high enough for maximum stability.
4. The GSC+P checks if there are phase SE
Synchronization Sequence Of alarms, inappropriate voltage alarms, or
other alarms are present.
Operation
• Yes - The GSC+P will issue the apprOi
Before attempting to execute these functions, alarm. Synchronization is prevented ur
ensure that the Synchronization Tuning Procedure fault is corrected.
has been completed.
• No - The GSC+P will verify conditions
Note: If the GSC+P detects that the breaker has synchronization and perform automati
opened within 15 secQnds after closing, the GSC+P parallel. Close breaker for a programr
will lock out all synchronization functions until the duration when synchronization conditic
Parallel Mode Switch is turned to another position. met.
If th.e breaker opens after 15 seconds, the GSC+P
will attempt the requested synchronization function. Dead Bus Closure Sequence
Automatic Mode Synchronization Dead bus closure may be done locally at th,
Sequence or remotely using a CCM. The synchrosco~
the three spare indicators will all flash as s
Automatic Synchronization may be done locally at in illustration 68 when the GSC+P is ciosin!
the generator set or remotely using a Customer dead bus.
Communication Module (CCM).
1. If the procedure is being done locally, the

GSC+P checks that all Local Automatic
Synchronization Conditions have been met:
a. The bus is live.
b. The Parallel Mode Switch is in AUTO. illustration 68
c. The ECS is in RUN, or in AUTO with remote 1. If the procedure is being done locally, t
initiate. GSC+P checks that all dead bus conditi(
been met:
2. If the procedure is being done remotely, the
GSC+P checks that all Remote (CCM) Automatic a. Setpoint P310 enables Dead bus clm
Synchronization conditions have been met:
b. The voltage of the bus is less than S(
a. The bus is live. P311.
b. The Parallel Mode Switch is in the AUTO c. The Dead bus sensor indicates that t
position. is dead.
c. The ECS is in the AUTO position with Remote 2. If the procedure is being done remotely
Sync inputs AND Remote Starting inputs from GSC+P checks that all Remote (CCM) C
the CCM. Closure Conditions have been met:
3. The GSC+P checks that the engine speed is a. Dead bus closure is enabled by setr
greater than 90% of rated speed or the engine P31O.
speed is equal to 90% of rated speed.
b. The Bus voltage is less than set point
• No - The GSC+P will wait on the engine speed.
No synchronization will be initiated. c. Dead bus sensor indicates that the t
dead.
61
3. Parallel Mode Switch in AUTO. b. The Parallel Mode Switch must be in the
Permissive position.
4. For Local procedures, the ECS must be in the
RUN position, or the AUTO position with Remote c. The ECS must be in the RUN position or in
Initiate input. For remote procedures, the ECS the AUTO position with Remote Initiate input.
must be in the AUTO position with Remote SYNC
AND the Remote Starting inputs from CCM. 2. The GSC+P checks that the engine speed is
greater than 90% of rated speed or equal to 90%
S. The GSC+P checks that the engine speed is of rated speed.
greater than 90% of rated speed or equal to 90%
of rated speed. • No - The GSC+P will wait on engine speed.
No synchronization is initiated .
• No - The GSC+P will wait on engine speed.
No synchronization is initiated. • Yes - The synchroscope is shown in the lower
display of the GSC+P and the three spare
• Yes - The synchroscope is flashing on the fault indicators show the voltage, phase, and
lower display of the GSC+P and the three frequency relationship between the incoming
spare fault indicators are all flashing. generator and the bus.
6. The GSC+P waits until the dead bus time delay 3. The GSC+P checks if there are phase sequence
has completed. alarms, inappropriate voltage alarms, or other
synchronization alarms present.
7. The GSC+P checks for phase sequence
alarms, inappropriate voltage alarms or other • No - The GSC+P will enable the manual
synchronization alarms breaker closure continuously when the
conditions for synchronization are met.
Expected Result: There are no alarms present.
• Yes - The GSC+P issues the appropriate
Results: alarm. Synchronization is prevented until the
fault is corrected .
• OK - The phase sequence alarm, inappropriate
voltage alarm or other alarms are not Semi-Automatic Mode Synchronization
present. Dead Bus Closure is complete. The
Sequence (Performed Locally) .
synchroscope is turned OFF.
Semi-Automatic Synchronization may be done
• NOT OK - If the phase sequence alarm
locally at the generator set or remotely using a
is present, inappropriate voltage alarm or
Customer Communication Module (CCM).
other alarms are present, the GSC+P issues
the appropriate alarm. Synchronization is
1. All Local Semi-Automatic Synchronization
prevented until the fault is corrected.
Conditions have been met:
Note: If the dead bus sensor AND the GSC+P
a. The bus is live.
determine that the bus is dead, and dead bus
closure is not enabled, the GSC+P will issue
b. The Parallel Mode Switcll is in the AUTO
an AL 17 fault code. The AL 17 fault is initiated
position.
immediately after initiating synchronization. An
AL 18 fault code will be issued after the time delay
c. The ECS is in the RUN position, or the ECS is
for the dead bus is satisfied, and the maximum
in the AUTO position with the Remote Initiate
synchronization time has passed.
input.
Permissive Mode Synchronization 2. The GSC+P checks that the engine speed is
Sequence greater than 90% of rated speed or the engine
Permissive Mode can only be done locally at the
generator set. • No - The GSC+P will wait on the engine speed.
No synchronization is initiated.
1. All Permissive Mode Synchronization conditions
have been met: • Yes - The synchroscope is shown in the lower
a. The Bus is live. fault indicators show the voltage, phase, and
frequency relationship between the incoming
generator and tile bus.
62
3. The GSC+P checks if there are phase sequence • Yes - The GSC+P issues the appropri
alarms, inappropriate voltage alarms, or other alarm, and synchronization is preventE
synchronization alarms present. the fault is corrected.
• No - The GSC+P will verify the conditions

for synchronization and perform the
Semi-Automatic Parallel. The GSC+P
will enable the manual breaker closure
Service Mode
continuously when the conditions for SMCS Code: 4490
synchronization are met.
• Yes - The GSC+P issues the appropriate

alarm, and synchronization is prevented until
the fault is corrected.
Semi-Automatic Mode Synchronization

Sequence (Performed Remotely with
CCM)
Semi-Automatic Synchronization may be done
locally at the generator set or remotely using a
Customer Communication Module (CCM).
I ,
1. All Remote (CCM) Semi-Automatic

Synchronization Conditions have been / .A)
_ """ J T\
SHVW~""I. ~
10000 0
met: 3
/ 0 r"ULrJ~
'''"". ~
a. The bus is live. 4
b. The Parallel Mode Switch is in the AUTO

position. Illustration 69
GqC+ Display Ar!3a With S7'rvice Mode Descriptions Of I
c. The ECS is in the AUTO position with the (1) Dedicated shutdown indicators.
Remote Synch Test and the Remote Start (2) Spare fault indicators (Or synchronizing lights on GS(
inputs from the CCM. (3) Fault shutdown indicator.
(4) Fault alarm indicator.
(5) Upper display.
2. The GSC+P checks that the engine speed is (6) Lower display.
greater than 90% of rated speed or the engine (7) Keypad.
Service Mode is used for the following purp'
• No - The GSC+P will wait on the engine speed.
No synchronization is initiated. • Assist with troubleshooting of diagnostic fi
• Yes - The synchroscope is shown in the lower • Satisfy special applications.
fault indicators show the voltage, phase, and • Satisfy customer needs.
frequency relationship between the incoming
generator and the bus. • Verily the functions of the generator set.
1. The GSC+P checks if there are phase sequence • Calibrate or adjust the functions of the gel
alarms, inappropriate voltage alarms, or other set.
synchronization alarms present.
Service Mode has options that can be selee
• No - The GSC+P will verify conditions for Service personnel use the options to obtair
synchronization and perform Semi-Automatic information about the generator set, and th,
parallel. If this procedure is initiated from the
CCM, the breaker is NOT enabled.
operator can program functions of the gener,
I
63
Tab!e 5 Enter Key - This key is used to enter information

OP1, Fault log viewing that has been changed into the memory of the
GSC+.
OP2-0, Engine/Generator setpoint viewing
OP2-l, Protective relaying setpoint viewing Exit Key - This key is used to exit Service Mode.
The display now returns to Normal Mode. The
OP2-2, AC factory calibration setpoint viewing "SERV" indicator on the upper display is NOT
OP2-3, Synchronization setpoints!1! SHOWING when the GSC+ is NOT in Service Mode.
OP3, Password entry Service Mode Key - This key is used to enter
Service Mode. The "SERV" indicator on the upper
OP4, Fault log clearing
display FLASHES when the GSC+ is in Service
OP5-0, Engine/Generator programming Mode. The "SERV" indicator on the upper display
FLASHES when the keypad performs functions in
'OP5-l, Protective relaying programming
the Service Mode.
OP5-2, For factory use, not accessible by the user.
Procedure To Enter Service Mode
OP5-3, Synchronization setpoint programming!1!
OP6, Spare Input/Output programming Note: Any active shutdown fault must be made
inactive in order to access Service Mode. A
OPl, Hourineter programming
FLASHING shutdown indicator means that a
OPB, Voltmeter/Ammeter programming shutdown fault exists. To temporarily change a
shutdown fault from an active shutdown fault to
Opg, Engine setpoint verification an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS to the
OP10, AC offset adjustment OFF/RESET position. To permanently change a
OPll, Synchronization setpoint tuning"! an inactive shutdown fault, the fault must not be
(1) For use In paralleling applications only. occurring. Also, the ECS must be turned to the
OFF/RESET position. If the jumper from terminal 6
The keypad and the display of the GSC+ are used to terminal 9 is not installed on the ECS, then the
for activating Service Mode and selecting the GSC+ will not power up in OFF/RESET and any
desired option. In Service Mode, the keys on the active shutdown fault must be corrected before
keypad have different functions, and the keys on entering Service Mode.
the keypad have different names. The preceding
illustration shows the name of each key in Service Note: Service Mode cannot be entered when the
Mode. Also, there is a film (label) on the door of the ECS is in the AUTO position.
control panel that identifies each key. The service
functions of the keys are listed below. 1_ Press the "SERVICE MODE" key on the keypad
of the GSC+. The "SERV" indicator on the upper
Scroll Right Key - This key is used to view display FLASHES whenever the GSC+ is in
information and scroll information. When you are Service Mode.
entering the password, this key represents the
number 1. 2. The desired option (OP1 through OP11) can now
be selected. Each option is described in the
Scroll Up Key - This key is used to scroll up topics that follow.
information or this key is used to increase the value
of information. When you are entering the password 3_ To return to Normal Mode, press the "EXIT" key
this key represents the number 2. a few times until the "SERV" indicator is not
showing.
Scroll Down Key - This key is used to scroll down
through information or this key is used to decrease Note: To enter options OP4 through OP8 of the
the value of information. When you are entering the Service Mode, the engine must be shut down. Turn
password, this key represents the number 3. the ECS to the STOP position.
Note: The appropriate "Scroll" Key should be held

down in order to rapidly scroll through a large range
of information.
Select Key - To view an option, use the Select Key.

To change an option, use the Select Key. To start
the scrolling of information, use the Select Key.
I
64
Options OP4 through OP11 of the Service Mode The GSC+ automatically clears any inacti,
require a password. Password entry reduces the diagnostic codes that have been stored in
possibility of mistakenly altering information. OP3 fault log longer than 750 hours. For examp
is the option that is used for password entry. The diagnostic code is logged at 10 hours, the
password must be correctly entered before access GSC+ clears the diagnostic code when thi
is gained to OP4 through OP11. See Systems meter is at 760 hours. If a diagnostic code i
Operation, "Password Entry OP3". Option OP1 at 20 hours, then the code remains logged
and option OP2 are used for viewing information. hour meter is at 770 hours. This feature pn
Option OP1 and option OP2 are not protected with old diagnostic codes from clogging the faL
passwords. service personnel have forgotten to clear tI
log after correcting diagnostic codes.
i01379491
When an active diagnostic code changes
Fault Log Viewing OP1 inactive diagnostic code, the GSC+ will fUi
in the following manner.
SMCS Code: 4490
1. The diagnostic code is recorded in the I
OP1 is the option that is used for viewing diagnostic of the GSC+.
codes. The fault log contains a history of the
diagnostic codes. These diagnostic codes have 2. If no other active diagnostic codes are I
occurred in the generator set system since the last the DIAG indicator will stop FLASHING
service (diagnostic code clearing). Also, the total DIAG indicator remains on CONTINUOl
number of occurrences are shown on the upper
display. The fault log assists when service personnel 3. The fault alarm indicator that was FLAS
are troubleshooting the generator set system. turns OFF or the shutdown fault indicate
was FLASHING turns OFF.
The diagnostic code consists of a component
identifier (CID) and a failure mode identilier (FMI). Procedure To View The Fault
A "DIAG" status indicator is also shown on the
upper display. The CID informs the operator of the Note: For a list of all diagnostic codes, see
component that may have failed. The FMI describes And Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic
the type of failure that has occurred. When the
diagnostic code is active the DIAG status Indicator N6te: Service Mode cannot be 'entered wh,
FLASHES. ECS is in the AUTO position.
Only inactive diagnostic codes are stored in the fault Note: Any active shutdown fault must be n
log. An active diagnostic code that is programmed inactive in order to access service mode.
to be treated as an alarm fault becomes inactive FLASHING shutdown indicator indicates tI,
when the problem is no longer occurring. An active shutdown fault exists. To temporarily chan!
diagnostic code that is programmed to be treated shutdown fault from an active shutdown fa
as a shutdown fault becomes inactive when the an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS te
problem is no longer occurring AND the engine OFF/RESET position. To permanently chan'
control switch (ECS) is turned to the OFF/RESET shutdown fault from an active shutdown fa
position. Active diagnostic codes are indicated an inactive fault, the fault must not be ocC!
when "DIAG" is FLASHING. When the problem The ECS must also be turned to the OFF/F
becomes inactive "DIAG" is ON CONTINUOUSLY. position. If the jumper that electrically conr
The GSC+ stores a maximum of 12 diagnostic terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not installed on t
codes in the fault log. If an additional diagnostic then the GSC+ will not power up in OFF/RE
code becomes inactive, the GSC+ automatically any active shutdown fault must be correcte
clears the earliest inactive diagnostic code. The entering service mode.
GSC+ then places the new inactive diagnostic code
in the fault log. 1. Press the "SERVICE MODE" key in ordi
enter Service Mode. "OP 1" is showing
lower display. See Systems Operation, "
Mode"for more information.
65
2. Press "SELECT" key. If more than one diagnostic iQ1103526

code is present then the codes begin scrolling
on the display. The number of occurrences is AC Factory Calibration
shown above the "COUNT" indicator. The lower Setpoint Viewing OP2-2
display shows the value from the hour meter at
the first occurrence and the last occurrence of SMCS Code: 4490
each diagnostic code.
The option for the AC factory calibration setpoint
3. Press "SELECT" key. The diagnostic codes stop viewing is OP2-2. OP2-2 is also used for viewing
scrolling. other specific data. None of these items are
programmable by service personnel.
4. Press "SCROLL RIGHT" key. If more than one
count of a diagnostic code is logged then the The following information is shown on the display.
first occurrence with a corresponding value from
the hour meter is showing on the lower display. GSC+ Serial Number - The serial number of the
GSC+ has ten digits. This number is unique for
5. Press "SELECT" key. Diagnostic codes continue each GSC+. The serial number is stamped on a
scrolling. label on the back of the GSC+. The displayed serial
number will always match the number on the label.
6. Press "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on lower
display. GSC+ Software Level Identifier - The software level
identifier indicates the level of the software that
7. Press "EXIT" key. The display is now in normal is included within the GSC+. The identifier has
mode. nine characters. "XXXXXXX-XX" is the form of the
identifier.
101103597
Setpoints P20l through P222 - The setpoints are
Engine/Generator Setpoint the AC factory calibration setpoints. The AC factory
calibration setpoints contain information that is
Viewing OP2-0 used during the factory calibration procedures.
These setpoints are not programmable by service
SMCS Code: 4490 personnel.
OP2-0 is the option for viewing the engine/generator
setpoints. The engine/generator setpoints affect Procedure To View The Setpoints
the proper operation and serviceability of the
engine. The engine/generator setpoints also affect Note: The engine may be running or the engine
the accuracy of the information that is shown on may be stopped while the operator is viewing the
the display. The setpoints that are viewed or the setpoints.
setpoints that are stored in the GSC+ should match
the specified setpoints of the particular generator Note: Service mode cannot be entered when the
set. The setpoints are from POOl through P033 engine control switch (ECS) is in the AUTO position.
and the setpoints are programmable. See System
Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0". Note: An active shutdown fault must be made
inactive in order to access service mode. To
temporarily change a shutdown fault from an active
101103642 shutdown fault to an inactive shutdown fault, turn the
ECS to the OFF/RESET position. The shutdown fault
Protective Relaying Setpoint must be corrected, and the ECS must be turned
Viewing OP2-1 to the OFF/RESET position in order to permanently
change a shutdown fault from an active shutdown
SMCS Code: 4490 fault to an inactive shutdown fault. If the jumper
from terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not installed on the
OP2-1 is the option for viewing the protective ECS, the GSC+ does not power up in OFF/RESET
relaying setpoints. The protective relaying setpoints and any active shutdown fauit must be corrected
determine the response of the GSC+ when one or before entering service mode.
more of the protective relaying functions occur. The
protective relaying functions reduce the possibility of 1. Press "SERVICE MODE" key in order to enter
damaging the generator or the customer equipment. service mode. "OP 1" is showing on the lower
These setpoints are from PlOl through P142 and display. See System Operation, "Service Mode"
the setpoints are programmable. For a description for more information.
of each of these setpoints, see System Operation,
"Protective Relaying Programming OP5-l ". 2. Press "SCROLL UP" key. "OP2-0" is showing.
66
a. Go to Step 3 in order to view the setpoints

that are within OP2-0.
Password Entry OP3
b. Press the "SCROLL UP" key once or press
the "SCROLL UP" key twice in order to view SMCS Code: 4490
OP2-t or OP2-2. The display will show OP2-t
or OP2-2. Go to Step 3. OP3 is the option for entering the password
required for accessing OP4 through OPll. I
3. Press "SELECT" key. "POD t" is showing for OP2-0 for the service modes OP4 through OPlt ,
which is followed by the value of the setpoint. protected with passwords. The passwords r
"Pl0l" is showing for OP2-1 which is followed the possibility of mistakenly altering informc
by the value of the setpoint. The ten digit serial Options OPI and OP2 are used to view info
number is showing on the display for OP2-2. OPI and OP2 are not protected with passw
4. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or the "SCROLL The "SCROLL" keys must be actuated in 11
DOWN" key. The next setpoint value is showing. correct sequence in order to gain access t(
Repeat this step until all the desired setpoints through OPll. The password is identical fOI
and the setpoint values are viewed. GSC+. The password cannot be changed. ,
password is entered, the OP4 through OPIC
5. P.ress "EXIT" key. "OP1" is showing on the lower can be accessed. If a mistake is made duro
display. entry of the password, "PE FAIL" is briefly ~
on the upper display. The operator can rest
6. Press "EXIT" key. The display returns to the process of entering the password by pressi
normal mode. "SELECT" key.
Procedure To Enter The Password

i01386010
Note: Service mode cannot be entered WhE
Parallel Setpoint Viewing ECS is in the "AUTO" position.
OP2-3
Note: Any active Shutdown fault must be rr
SMCS Code: 4490 inactive in order to access Service Mode.
shutdown fault is active if the shutdown ind
SIN: 5PWt-Up for the fault is FLASHING. To temporarily cl
a shutdown fault from an active shutdown f
SIN: 6WW1-Up an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS to
SIN: STWt-Up OFF/RESET position. To permanently chan(
shutdown fault from an active shutdown fal
SIN: LRW1-Up an inactive shutdown fault, the fault must n
occurring. Also, the ECS must be turned te
SIN: LRX1-Up OFF/RESET position. If the jumper from terr
to terminal 9 is not installed on the ECS, thE
SIN: LRY1-Up
will not power up in OFF/RESET and any a
SIN: 4BZ1-Up shutdown fault must be corrected before el
Service Mode.
SIN: SAZ1-Up
1. Press "Service Mode" key in order to er
OP2-3 is the option for Parallel Setpoint Viewing. service mode. "OPt" is showing on the
The Parallel setpoints define various parameters that display. See Systems Operation, "Servia<
allow precise frequency and phase matching. These " for more information.
setpoints are from P301 to P314 are programmable.
For a description of these setpoints, see Testing And
Adjusting, "Parallel Setpoint Programming OP5-3".
2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key four times.'
is showing.
3. Press the "SELECT" key. "P E ____ _

I
showing on the display. The first dash is
4. Press "SCROLL RIGHT" key. "P E 1 __

showing on the display. The second da:
flashing.
67
5. Press "SCROLL DOWN"key. "P E 1 3 ___ " 1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order
is showing on the display. The third dash is to shut down the engine. Enter service mode
flashing. and enter the password. "OP 4" is showing
on the lower display. See Systems Operation,
6. Press "SCROLL UP" key. "P E 1 3 2 __ "is "Password Entry OP3" for more information on
showing on the display. The fourth dash is entering the password.
flashing.
2. Press "SELECT" key. ACID FMI fault code is
7. Press "SCROLL DOWN" key. "P E 1 3 2 3 _" is showing and the number of occurrences are
showing on the display. The fifth dash is flashing. showing. The lower display shows the hourmeter
values of the first occurrence of the fault and the
8. Press "SCROLL RIGHT" key. "P E 1 3 2 3 1" is last occurrence of the fault.
showing.
3. Press "SELECT" key. The CID FMI fault code,
9. Press "ENTER" key. "P E PASS"is showing. hourmeter value, and fault count will flash.
10. Press "EXIT" key. OP 4 is showing. 4. Press and hold the "ENTER" key for two seconds.
If there is only one CID FMI fault code, the CID
Note: Once the password is entered, any option can FMI fault that was flashing disappears and the
be accessed. The password remains activated until upper display is blank except for the flashing
Service Mode is exited. "SERV" indicator. "OP1" is showing on the lower
display. Proceed to the next step. If there is more
than one CID FMI fault code, the CID FMI that
i01702333
was flashing disappears. The upper display
Fault Log Clearing OP4 shows the next CID FMI fault code, the fault
count, and the hourmeter value. Repeat steps
SMCS Code: 4490 3 and 4 until all faults are erased. The lower
display then shows OP 1. Proceed to step 5.
Fault Log Clearing OP4 5. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the
lower display.
OP4 is the option for clearing an inactive fault from
the fault log of the GSC+. After a diagnostic fault 6. Press the "EXIT" key. The display is now in
is investigated and/or the fault is corrected, the normal mode.
fault should be cleared from the fault log. Fault
log clearing helps prevent confusion during future
service calls. After all diagnostic faults are cleared 101401340
and the GSC+ is in normal mode, the "DIAG"
indicator is not shown on the upper display. See
Engine/Generator
Systems Operation, "Fault Log Viewing OP1" for Programming OP5-0
more information.
SMCS Code: 4490
Procedure for Clearing Faults
OPS-O is the option for programming the
Note: Service Mode cannot be entered when the engine/generator setpoints. The engine/generator
engine control switch (ECS) is in the AUTO position. setpoints affect the proper operation and
serviceability of the engine, and the accuracy of
Note: An active shutdown indicator will be information shown on the display. The setpoints are
FLASHING. Active shutdown indicators must be programmed in the GSC+ at the factory.
deactivated in order to access the service mode. To
temporarily change a shutdown fault from an active The setpoints may require changing when the
shutdown fault to an inactive shutdown fault, turn GSC+ is moved from one engine to another engine.
the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. Permanently The setpoints may also require changing in order to
changing a shutdown fault from an active shutdown satisfy the customer's requirements. The setpoints
fault requires correcting the active shutdown fault. that are stored in the GSC+ must match the
The ECS must be turned to the OFF/RESET position. specified setpoints of the particular generator set.
If the jumper from terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not The setpoints are POOl to P033 and the setpoints
installed on the ECS, the GSC+ does not power up are programmable. The setpoints are described in
in OFF/RESET. Any active shutdown fault must be the OPS-O Setpoints. Refer to Table 6.
corrected before the service mode is entered.
68
Procedure For Engine/Generator 9. Press "EXIT" key. The display will return "
normal mode.
Programming
engine control switch (ECS) is in the AUTO position.
Note: Any active shutdown fault must be made

inactive in order to access service mode. When
a shutdown fault is active, a shutdown indicator
is FLASHING. To temporarily change a shutdown
fault from an active shutdown fault to an inactive
shutdown fault, turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET
position. To permanently change a shutdown
fault from an active shutdown fault to an inactive
shutdown fault, the shutdown fault must be no
longer occurring. The fault must be corrected and
the ECS must be turned to the OFF/RESET position.
If the jumper from terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not
installed on the ECS, the GSC+ does not power up
in the OFF/RESET position and any active shutdown
fault must be corrected before entering service
mode.
1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order to

shut down the engine. Enter service mode and
enter the password. "OP4" is showing on the
lower display. For more information, see Systems
Operation, "Password Entry OP3".
2. Press "SCROLL UP" key again. "OPS-O" is

showing on the lower display.
3. Press "SELECT" key again. "P001" is showing on

the display. "P001" is followed by the value of
the setpoint.
4. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or the "SCROLL

DOWN" key. The next setpoint is showing with
the value of the setpoint. Repeat this step until
the desired setpoint is showing.
5. Press the "SELECT" key. The value of the setpoint

is flashing.
6. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or press the

"SCROLL DOWN" key in order to adjust the
value of the setpoint.
Note: Press and hold the appropriate "SCROLL"

key in order to rapidly scroll through a large range
of values.
7. Press the "ENTER" key. The value of the setpoint I

stops flashing. Repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 until
all the desired setpoints are adjusted. II
8. Press "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the lower
display.
69
Table 6
OP5-0 Setpoints - Engine/Generator Programming(1)
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory Default
P001 Fuel Solenoid Type of fuel system solenoid used on the o - ETR fuel solenoid 0
Type generator set. All Lame-built generators 1 - ETS fuel solenoid
covered by this maual are ALWAYS
programmed as ETR (0), even if the
generator has an ETS fuel solenoid.
P002 Units Shown Type of measurement units shown on the o - English units (psi, 0
GSC+ display. degrees F)
1 - Metric units (kPa,
degrees C)
P003 Shutdown GSC+ responds to a low engine oil o - engine shutdown 0
Override For pressure or high coolant temperature fault. 1 - alarm only
Engine Fault (Determined by application or customer.) (shutdown override,
no engine shutdown)
P004 Shutdown GSC+ responds to a diagnostic fault with o - alarm only 0
.Enable For the engine oil pressure sensor, coolant (shutdown override,
Sensor Fault temperature sensor, oil temperature sensor, no engine shutdown)
sensor power suppty or coolant loss sensor. 1 - for engine shutdown
(Determined by application or customer.)
PODS Coolant Loss Tells whether or not the optional engine o - generator sets 0
Sensor Installed coolant loss sensor is installed on the without sensor
generator set. 1 - generator sets with
sensor
P006 Shutdown GSC+ responds to an engine coolant o - engine shutdown 0
Override For loss fault. (Determined by application or 1 - alarm only
Coolant Loss customer.) (shutdown override,
Fault no engine shutdown.)
P007 System Voltage System voltage (baltery voltage) of the 24 or 32 24
24 Or 32 Volts generator set. (Determined by application or
customer.)
P008 N/A This setpoint is not currently being used by N/A N/A
the GSC+ and cannot be programmed.
P009 Number Of Ring Number of teeth on the ring gear engine. 95 to 350 teeth 136 teeth for
Gear Teeth Used by the GSC+ to determine engine in increments of 1 MUI and PEEC
speed. engines. 183 teeth
for EUI engines.
P010 Engine Engine speed used by the GSC+ to deciare 500 to 4330 rpm 2120 rpm
Overspeed that an engine overspeed fault exists. The in increments of 10
engine overspeed setpoint (for all 60 Hz
applications) is 1.18 times the rated speed.
P011 Crank Terminate Engine speed used by the GSC+ to 100 to 1000 rpm 400 rpm
Speed disengage the starting motor during engine in increments of 10
cranking.
P012(2) Oil Step Speed Engine speed used by the GSC+ for 400 to 1800 rpm 1350 rpm
distinguishing between rated speed and idle in increments of 10
speed when a low oil pressure fault exists.
P013(3) Low Oil Pressure Oil pressure used by the GSC+ to deciare 34 to 420 kPa 205 kPa (30 psi)
Shutdown At that a low oil pressure shutdown fault exists (5 to 61 psi)
Rated Speed with engine at rated speed (the engine must in increments of 1
have exceeded the oil step speed for at least
nine seconds).
-- --
(continued)
70
(Table 6 eonld)
OP5-0 Setpoints - Engine/Generator Programming(1)
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory [
P014(3) Low Oil Pressure Oil pressure used by the GSC+ to declare 20 to 33S kPa 70 kPa (1
Shutdown At Idle that a low oil pressure shutdown fault exist (3 to 49 psi)
Speed with the engine at idle speed (the engine in increments of 1
must have been running for at least nine
seconds and the engine speed must be less
than oil step speed).
P015(') High Water Coolant temperature used by the GSC+ to 85 to 123'C 107'C (2
Temperature declare a high coolant temperature shutdown (185 to 253'F)
Shutdown fault exists (after a 10 second delay). in increments of 1
POlS Low Water
Temperature
Coolant temperature used by the GSC+ to
declare that a low temperature alarm fault
° to 3S'C (32 to 97'F)
in increments of 1
21'C (7
Alarm exists (after a 2 second delay). (Determined

by application or customer.)
P017 Total Cycle Cycle crank time used by the GSC+ to 5 to 3S0 seconds 90 sect
Crank Time declare that an overcrank fault exists. in increments of 1
P018 Cycie Crank Amount of time the GSC+ cranks and then 5 to 300 seconds 10 sect
Time rests the starting motor during a single in increments of 1
crank cycle. Determined by application of
customer.)
P019 Cooldown Time Amount of time the GSC+ allows the engine
to run after a normal shutdown is initiated.
° to 30 minutes
in increments of 1
5 minL

P020(5) AC Voltage Full scale AC voltage of the generator. The 700, 150, 300, 500, 700
GSC+ measures the AC voltage and shows SOO, 750, 3.0k, 4.5k,
it on the display. (Determined by application 5.25k, 9.0k, 15.0k,
or customer.) 18.0k, 30.0k
P021 AC Current Full AC current full scale is the ratio of the 75,100,150,200,300, SOOI
Scale currenl transformers (CT) based on a 400, SOO, 800, 1000,
5A secondary. It does not represent the 1200, 1500, 2000,
maximum AC current of the generator. The 2500,3000,4000A
GSC+ measures the current and shows it on
the display.
P022(~ GSC+ Engine Informs other devices on the CAT Data Link 01 through 08 01
Number (for example, CCM) of the engine number
for the GSC+ (Determined by application or
customer).
P023 Engine Type Identifies the engine as a mechanical unit 0- MUI diesel
injector (MUI) diesel, spark ignited (gas), or 1 - Gas
electronic unit injector (EUI) diesel engine. 2 - EUI diesel
P024(7) Crank Time
Delay
Amount of time the GSC+ delays activation
of the fuel control relay (FCR) during a crank
° to 20 seconds
in increments of 1
5 seCOI
cycle. This setpoint is for gas engines only.

P025 Oil Temperature
Sensor Installed
Tells whether or not the optional engine
oil temperature sensor is inslalled on the
°- generator sets
without an oil °
generator set. temperature sensor
1 - generalor sets with
an oil temperature
sensor
~.--
P026 High Oil Oillemperature used by the GSC+ to deciare 85 to 123'C 107'C (2:
Temperature a high oil temperature shutdown fault exists (185 to 253'F)
Shutdown (after a 10 second delay). in increments of 1
--
(c
71
(Table 6, contd)
OP5-0 Setpoints - Engine/Generator Programmingl!1
P027 Shutdown GSC+ responds to an engine high oil o - alarm only 0
Override For temperature fault. (Determined by application (shutdown override,
High Oil or customer.) no engine shutdown}
Temperature 1 - engine shutdown
Fault
P028 Nameplate Rated voltage of the generator. This setpoint 100V to 25kV 480V
Voltage is used for protective relaying functions. in increments of 1
P029 Nameplate Rated current output of the generator. o to 4000A 600A
Current in increments of 1
P030 Nameplate Rated power capability of the generator. o through 10MW 400kW
Power in increments of 1kW
P031 Rated Frequency Nominal frequency rating of generator set. 50, 60 or 400Hz 60Hz
P032 Connection Wye or delta configuration of generator. 0- wye 0
Configuration 1 - delta
Of Generator
P033(81 Number Of Number of generator poles. o through 254 4
Generator Poles. in increments of 2
..
(1) The setpolnts that are stored or the setpoints that are being programmed must match the specified setpoints of the particular generator set.
(2) On the 3412 Engine with a rated speed of 1200 rpm, the specified value is 750 rmp. For the 3412 engine with a rated speed of 1460 or 1600
rpm, the specified value is 1125 rpm.
(3) When oil pressure drops to within 34 kPA (5 psi) of the "POi3" or "P014"setpoint, a low oil pressure alarm is issued by the GSC+ and the
optional alarm module (with the exception of the NFPA 99 RAN).
(4) When coolant temperature rises to within 6°C (11°F) of the "POlS "setpoint, a high water temperature alarm is issued by the GSC+ and the
optional alarm module (with the exception of the NFPA 99 RAN).
(5) The values other than the default (700V) are for switchgear applications and require the use of external potential transformers and the
removal of the AC voltage range jumper located in the relay module. See Testing And Adjusting, nAC Voltage Range Selection".
(S) After setpoint P022 is reprogrammed, the GSC+ must be power cycled (powered down and then powered up).
(7) The P024 setpoint only functions when the P023 selpoint is set to 1 (gas engine).
(8) When P033 is programmed to 0 poles, the AL 15 fault (GSC+ Configuration Error) is disabled.
i01631415 Procedure For Protective Relaying

Protective Relaying Programming
Programming OP5-1 Note: Service Mode cannot be accessed when the
SMCS Code: 4490
Note: An active shutdown fault is indicated by a
Protective Relaying Programming FLASHING shutdown indicator. An active shutdown
fault must be made inactive in order to access
OP5-1 is the option for the programming of the service mode. To temporarily change a shutdown
protective relaying setpoints. When one or more of fault from an active shutdown fault to an inactive
the protective relay functions occur, the protective shutdown fault, the shutdown fault must no longer
relaying setpoints determine the response of the be occurring. The fault must be corrected. The
GSC+. The GSC+ provides the protective relaying ECS must be returned to the OFF/RESET position.
function in order to reduce the possibility of damage If the jumper from terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not
to the generator. The protective relaying functions installed on the ECS, the GSC+ does not power up
are used in order to reduce the possibility of in OFF/RESET and any active shutdown fault must
damage to Ihe customer equipment. The setpoints be corrected before entering service mode.
are programmed in the GSC+ at the factory to the
default values. The setpoints may be changed in 1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order to
order to satisfy the requirements of the customer. shut down the engine. Enter service mode and
The setpoints are from P101 to P142 and the enter the password. "OP 4" is showing on the
setpoints are programmable. Each of the setpoints lower display. For more information, see System
is described in Table 7. Operation, "Password Entry OP3".
72
2. Press "SCROLL UP" key two times. "OP5-1" is

3. Press "SELECT" key once. "P101" is showing.

"P101" is followed by the value of the setpoin!.

DOWN" key. The next setpoint is showing with
the setpoint value. Repeat this step until the
desired setpoint is showing.
5. Press "SELECT" key. The value of the setpoint

is flashing.
6. Press the "SCROLL UP" or the "SCROLL DOWN"

key in order to adjust the value of the setpoin!.
Note: In order to rapidly scroll through a large

range of values, press and hold the appropriate
"SCROLL" key.
7. Press "ENTER" key. The value of the setpoint

stops flashing. Repeat steps 4 , 5, 6 and 7 until
all the desired set points are adjusted.

display.
9. Press "EXIT" key. The display returns to normal

mode.
Table 7
OP5-1 Selpoinls (1) - Prolective Relaying Programming
Selpoinl Name Description Range Of Value
P101 Overvoltage Alarm The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled

Enable generator overvoltage alarm function. 1 - enabled
P102 Overvollage Alarm Voltage Ihe GSC+ uses to issue an 100 to 125% of nameplate
Threshold overvoltage alarm. voltage in increments of 1%
P103 Overvoltage Alarm Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds(2) in increments
Time Delay issuing an overvoltage alarm. of 1
P104 Overvoltage The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Shutdown Enabled generator overvoltage shutdown 1 - enabled
function.
Pl05 Overvoltage Voltage the GSC+ uses to issue an 100 to 125% of nameplate
Shutdown Threshold overvoltage shutdown. voltage in increments of 1%
-
Pl06 Overvoltage Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o 10 120 seconds(2) in increments
Shutdown Time Delay inssuing an overvoltage shutdown. of 1
.--- I
Pl07 Undervoltage Alarm The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Enable generator undervoltage alarm function. 1 - enabled
73
(Table 7 conld)
OP5-1 Setpoints III - Protective Relaying Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory
Default
P108 Undervoltage Alarm Voltage the GSC+ uses to issue an 60 to 100% of nameplate voltage 90%
Threshold undervoltage alarm. in increments of 1%
P109 Undervoltage Alarm Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds~1 in increments 10
Time Delay inssuing an undervoltage alarm. of 1 seconds
P110 Undervoltage The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled 1
Shutdown Enable generator undervoltageshutdown 1 - enabled
function.
P111 Undervoltage Voltage the GSC+ uses to issue an 60 to 100% of nameplate voltage 85%
Shutdown Threshold undervoltage shutdown. in increments of 1%
P112 Undervoltage Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds~1 in increments 15
Shutdown Time Delay issuing an undervoltage shutdown. of 1 seconds
P113 Overfrequency Alarm The GSC+ enables or disables 0- disabled 1
Enable the generator overfrequency alarm 1 - enabled
function.
P114 Overfrequency Alarm Frequency that the GSC+ uses to 50 to 60, for 50 Hz Gen 53 Hz
Threshold issue an overfrequency alarm. 60 to 70 , for 60 Hz Gen 63 Hz
400 to 480, for 400 Hz Gen 422 Hz
P115 Overfrequency Alarm Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds~1 in increments 10
Time Delay issuing an overfrequency alarm. of 1 seconds
P116 Overfrequency The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled 1
Shutdown Enable generator overfrequency shutdown 1 - enabled
function.
P117 Overfrequency Frequency the GSC+ uses to issue an 50 to 60, for 50 Hz Gen 55Hz
Shutdown Threshold overfrequency shutdown.
PEEC and EUI Engines: 60 to 66 Hz
70, for 60Hz Gen
MUI Engines: 60 to 70, for 60 Hz 63 Hz
Gen
480, for 400 Hz Gen
MUI Engines: 400 to 480, for 400 422 Hz
Hz Gen
P118 Overfrequency Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 secondsl21in increments 10
Shutdown Time Delay issuing an overfrequency shutdown. of 1 seconds
P119 Underfrequency The GSC+ enables or disables the o - disabled 1
Alarm Enable generator underfrequency alarm 1 - enabled
function.
P120 Underfrequency Frequency the GSC+ uses to issue an MUI Engines: 30 to 50, for 50 Hz 45 Hz
Alarm Threshold underfrequency alarm. Gen
50, for 50 Hz Gen
MUI Engines: 36 to 60, for 60 Hz 54 Hz
Gen
60, for 60 Hz Gen
f--
Hz Gen
I-------~

400, for 400 Hz Gen
----~----~- ... ~~-------. ..
(continued)
74
(Table 7 eonld)
OP5-1 Setpoints (1) - Protective Relaying Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value f
I
P121 Undertrequency Amount of time the GSC+ waits o to 120 seconds(2) in increments
Alarm Time Delay beforeissuing an undertrequency of 1 s
alarm.
P122 Undertrequency The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Shutdown Enable generator undertrequency shutdown 1 - enabled
function.
P123 Undertrequency Frequency the GSC+ uses to issue an 30 to 50, for 50 Hz Gen
Shutdown Threshold undertrequency shutdown. 36 to 60, for 60 Hz Gen
240 to 400, for 400 Hz Gen :
P124 Undertrequency Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds(2) in increments
Shutdown Time Delay issuing an undertrequency shutdown. of 1 s
P125 Reverse Power The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Shutdown Enable generatorreverse power shutdown 1 - enabled
function.
P126 Reverse Power Level of reverse power the GSC+ uses o to 20% of nameplate power in
Shutdown Threshold to issue a reverse power shutdown. increments of 1%
P127 Reverse Power Amount of time the GSC+waits before o to 30 seconds(2) in increments
Shutdown Time Delay issuing a reverse power shutdown. of 1 s
P128 Overcurrent Alarm The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Enable overcurrent alarm. 1 - enabled
P129 Phase Overcurrent Level of current the GSC+ uses to 100 to 160% of nameplate
Alarm Threshold issue a phase overcurrent alarm. current in increments of 5%
P130 Phase Overcurrent Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 250 seconds(2) in increments
Alarm Time Delay issuing a phase overcurrent alarm. of 1 s
P131 Total Overcurrent Level of current the GSC+ uses to 100 to 160% of three times
Alarm Threshold issue a total overcurrent alarm. nameplate current in increments
of 5%
P132 Total Overcurrent Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 250 seconds(2) in increments
Alarm Time Delay issuing a total overcurrent alarm. of 1 s
P133 Overcurrent Shutdown The GSC+ enables or disables the 0- disabled
Ecable overcurrent shutdown. 1 - enabled
P134 Phase Overcurrent Level of current the GSC+ uses to 100 to 160% of nameplate
Shutdown Threshold issue a phase overcurrent shutdown. current in increments of 5%
P135 Phase Overcurrent Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 250 seconds(2) in increments
Shutdown Time Delay issuing a phase overcurrent shutdown. of 1 s
P136 Total Overcurrent Level of current the GSC+ uses to 100 to 160% of three times
Shutdown Threshold issue a total overcurrent shutdown. nameplate current in increments
of 5%
P137 Total Overcurrent Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 250 seconds(2) in increments
Shutdown Time Delay issuing a total overcurrent shutdown. of one. s
P138 KW Level Relay The GSC+ enables or disables the kW 0- disabled
Enable level relay function. 1 - enabled
P139 KW Level Relay Level of power the GSC+ uses to o to 110% of nameplate power in
Threshold activate the kW level relay function. increments of 1%
P140 KW Level Relay Time Amount of time the GSC+ waits before o to 120 seconds!') in increments 0,
Delay activating the kW relay function. of 1
'---;
(.
75
(Table 7 eontd)
Default
P141 KW Level Relay Level of power the GSC+ uses o to 110% of nameplate power in 100%
Disengage Threshold deactivate the kW level relay function. increments of 1%
P142 KW Level Relay Amount of time the GSC+ waits o to 120 seconds(') in increments 10
Disengage Time Delay before deactivating the kW level relay of 1 seconds
function.
(1) The setpoints are programmed at the factory to the default value. The setpoints may be changed in order to satisfy customer or application
requirements.
(~) When programmed to 0 seconds, the actual time is from 0.5 to 1.0 seconds.
i01138546 101355535
AC Factory Calibration Parallel Setpoint Programming

Setpoint Programming OP5-2 OP5-3
SMCS Code: 4490 SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: 5PW1-Up SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up SIN: 6WW1-Up
SIN: 8TW1-Up SIN: 8TW1-Up
SIN: LRW1-Up SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up SIN: LRX1-Up
SIN: LRY1-Up SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4Bl1-Up SIN: 4Bl1-Up
SIN: 8Al1-Up SIN: 8Al1-Up
The AC Factory Calibration Setpoints (OP5-2) are The Synchronization setpoints within the GSC+P
only used in the factory. The setpoints are read only define various parameters that allow precise
and the setpoints are not accessible by the user. frequency and phase matching.
The setpoints are programmed (set) in the GSC+P

at the factory to the default values that are in the
following chart. The setpoints may be changed to
satisfy the customer or the application requirements.
76
Table 8
OP5-3 Setpoints - Paralleling Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value
P301 Synchronization Enables or disables the 0- disabled

Enable synchronization function, and specifies 1 - Woodward
the type of Load Share control being
driven.
P302 Breaker Coil Time The maximum amount of time the 0.2 to 5.0 seconds in increments
Urn it breaker coil can be energized without of 0.1 second
damaging the coil.
P303 Voltage Umit Enable Enables or disables the generatorlbus 0- disabled
voltage checking during automatic 1 - enabled
synchronization
P304 Voltage Umit The maximum acceptable difference 1 % to 15 % in increments of 1%
between the bus voltage and the
oncoming voltage, expressed as a
percentage of bus voltage.
P30511) Phase Tolerance Umit The maximum phase angle magnitude 1 to 25 degrees in increments of 5
allowed for breaker closure 1 degree
P306(1) Dwell Time The time during which the phase angle 0.1 to 1.0 seconds in increments
between the generator and the bus of 0.1 second
during synchronization.
P307(1j(2) Speed Control Gain Controls how fast the engine speed will 0.0% to 100.0% in increments of
change during synchronization. 0.1%
P308(1j(2) Speed Control Rate Controls the rate of change of the 0.0% to 100.0% in increments of
phase angle differencebetween 0.1%
the generator and the bus during
synchronization.
P30911j(2) Speed Control Controls the amount of overshoot and 0.0% to 100.0% in increments of
Damping settling time of engine speed during 0.1%
synchronization.
P310 Dead Bus Closure Enables or disables automatic closing 1 - enabledl')
Enable to a dead bus. 0- disabled
P311 Dead Bus Limit The maximum acceptable voltage for 5% to 50% in increments of 1%
the bus to be considered dead, as a
percent of rated voltage.
P312 Dead Bus On Time The amount of time the GSC+P waits o to 120 seconds in increments 0,
Delay before closing to a dead bus. of 1 second
P313 Frequency Match The amount of time before notification 5 to 1000 seconds in increments
Notification Time of possible synchronization failure. of 1 seconds s
Must not be greater than the Maximum
Synchronization Time.
P314 Maximum The maximum amount of time to spend 5 to 1000 seconds in increments
Synchronization Time attempting to synchronize before of 1 second s,
setting the Synchronization Time-out
Alarm
..
(1) P305, P306, P30?, P30a, and P309 can be adjusted to precIsely match indiVidual engine response and breaker closure characte
using OP11 - Synchronization Setpoint Tuning.
(2) The GSC+P uses p-r-D (proportional-integral·derivative) control to accomplish synchronization quickly and smoothly. The P parar
parameter, and D parameter are independanUy controlled by setpoints P307, P308, and P309 respectively. Adjusting anyone of I
setpoints will not affect the other two settings. For more information, see Systems Operation, "Synchronization Mode" Setpoint Tur
(3) Dead bus closure will only work in the automatic mode, NOT in permissive mode or semi automatic mode.
77
101298410
Spare Input/Output GSC-23

SPT
~~fRfNFAUlT!2"')--r-_ _ O)-_ _--o-1: ~ I
Programming OP6 CUSTOMER
INPUT
(For 3306B and 3406C MUI GENERATOR
SET
Engines) CONTROL (GSC)
""
SMCS Code: 4490
Typical Active Low Input Configuration For Spare Input 1 (SPi)
SIN: 8NS1-Up
The GSC+ must be programmed as to whether the
SIN: 9ES1-Up
active input state is high (+5 DCV to "8+") or low
SIN: LRW1-Up ("8-"). When an input is programmed for a HIGH
active input state, a high at the input is considered
SIN: LRX1-Up a spare fault and a low at the input is considered
a normal condition. When an input is programmed
OP6 is the option for the programming of the for a LOW active input state, a low at the input is
following parameters: spare inputs, spare indicators, considered a spare fault and a high at the input is
spare output, and the programmable spare relay considered a normal condition.
outputs. These spare inputs and outputs are
provided in order to satisfy the needs of the Setpoints SP01, SP04, SP07 and SP10 are used
customer. for programming the active input state of the spare
inputs. Table 9 describes each of the setpoints.
Spare Inputs Note: If an input is left floating, the internal circuitry
The spare inputs are referred to as SP1, SP2, SP3, of the GSC+ pulls the input high and the GSC+
responds accordingly. An example of a floating
and SP4. The spare inputs are accessed on the
terminal strip within the control panel on the rear input is an open switch.
wall. The terminations at the terminal strip for the
The GSC+ must be programmed for a response
spare inputs are listed below.
to an active spare fault. The GSC+ responds by
treating the condition as either a fault shutdown or a
• SP1 fault alarm. Setpoints SP02, SP05, SP08 and SP11
are used for the programming of the response.
• SP2 Table 9 describes each of the setpoints.
• SP3 Note: Spare faults that are programmed to shutdown
are ignored by the GSC+ when engine speed is
• SP4 less than crank termination speed.
The active input state, response taken and time
The GSC+ must be programmed for the amount of
delay for each spare input is programmable. The
time to delay the response to a spare fault (active
GSC+ responds to the active state of an input
and the response can be delayed. Setpoints SP01 input). After a spare fault occurs, the GSC+ does not
respond until the time delay has elapsed. Indicators
through SP12 are used for the programming of
are not activated and codes are not shown. Engine
the spare inputs. Table 9 describes each of the
setpoints. operation does not change. Setpoints SP03, SP06,
SP09 and SP12 are used for the programming of
the time delay. The time delay is selectable from 0
GSC-2J
SPT IY
to 250 seconds. Table 9 describes the setpoints.
~~~RfN f AUl T 0--f---c)----~+O--~
-.-r I
CUSTOMER
Alarm Mode Sequence Of Operation - When a fault
INPUT occurs in a spare input (input active) and the fault
GENERATOR
SET is programmed as an alarm fault, then the GSC+
CONTROL (GSC) --
- "" will respond in the following manner:
900525961
Illustration 70 1. The GSC+ waits for the time delay.
Typical Active High Input Configuration For Spare Input 1 (SPi)
2. The fault alarm indicator FLASHES.
3. The corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP3 or SP4

is shown on the upper display of the GSC+ when
the alarm codes key is pressed.
78
4. The engine continues to run and the engine is

able to start. GENERATOR
SET GUST
CONTROL (GSC) HIGH
Shutdown Mode Sequence Of Operation - The IMPE
following sequence occurs when a fault occurs LOAD
in a spare input (input active) and the fault is GSC-36
programmed as a shutdown fault. SPARE

6' SPARE
,--.
,.. I
1. The GSC+ waits for the time delay. Illustration 73
Typical Active High Configuration For Spare Output
2. The fault shutdown indicator FLASHES.
The spare output responds to a selected tr
3. The corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP3 or SP4 condition. The response and the trigger COl
is immediately shown on the upper display of are programmable, The spare output is ace
the GSC+. on the terminal strip in the customer con nee
on the side of the control panel. The spare'
4. The engine is shutdown or the engine is disabled marked as "SPARE" on the auxiliary termine
from starting.
The GSC+ must be programmed to accept
The fault shutdown indicator remains FLASHING input or a low input for the active state of th
and' the spare fault code remains shown until the output. An active low state means that the c
engine control switch (ECS) is turned to OFF/RESET. pulled to battery negative when the output i
After turning the ECS to OFF/RESET and correcting The output draws approximately 100 rnA w
the cause of the spare fault, the engine is able to the output is in the low state. An active higl
start and the engine is able to run. means that the output will be allowed to flo<
This is approximately 5.0 DCV when no dev
Note: Spare faults are not logged into the GSC+ connected to the spare output. When the s
fault log. output is in the high state, the spare outpu
floating. The spare output is capable of driv
Note: If you do not want to use the spare inputs, impedance logic circuits only. High impeda
program the spare inputs for a LOW active state. logic circuits are the circuits with the 36000
Connect nothing to the spare input wiring. minimum resistance. When the spare outpu
the high state, the spare output·will not driv
Spare Indicators impedance loads such as relays. Setpoint 0
used for the programming of the active stat,
The spare indicators are located on the face spare output. Table 9 describes the setpoinl
of the GSC+. The spare indicators are Spare
1, Spare 2, and Spare 3. The spare indicators The GSC+ must be programmed to accept
are programmable. A large selection of trigger condition that triggers the spare output to t
conditions is available to activate the spare active state. A large selection of trigger con
indicators. Setpoints SP17, SP18 and SP19 are is available to activate the spare output. Se'
used for the programming of the trigger condition. SP14 is used for the programming of the tri
Table 9describes all of the setpoints. condition. Table 9 describes the setpoints.
Note: The spare output is usually used in or

Spare Output activate the circuit breaker shunt trip coil du
engine cool down.
!BAT.J-
GENERATOR
SET CUSTOMER
RELAY
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the s"
CONTROl(GSC)
/g ..L
output circuit. See Testing And Adjusting, "C
Spare Output".
SPARE
GSC-36
Illustration 72
0----
63
-
SPARE
n.
Typical Active Low Configuration For Spare Output

T
g00525986
79
Programmable Spare Relay Procedure For Spare Input/Output

Outputs Programming
PSRI
R!.A-37 Fa RIA-1O K8 RM-26 Note: Any active shutdown fault must be made
SOURCE LOAD
inactive in order to access service mode. A
shutdown fault is active when a shutdown indicator
RM-3B F9 RM-ll
PSR2
K8 RM-25
is FLASHING. In order to temporarily change a
SOURCE lOAD shutdown fault from an active shutdown fault to
an inactive shutdown fault. turn the ECS to the
GENERATOR
OFF/RESET position. In order to permanently
SET change a shutdown fault from an active shutdown
CONTROL
(esc) fault to an inactive shutdown fault, the shutdown
fault must no longer be occurring. The shutdown
fault must be corrected and the ECS must be
turned to the OFF/RESET position. If the jumper
PSR RATING fOR RESISTIVE LOADS. from terminal 6 to terminal 9 is not installed on the
lOA at ~4 DCV or lOA at 110 ACV
ECS, the GSC+ does not power up in OFF/RESET
PSR RATING fOR INDUCTIVE LOADS. and any active shutdown fault must be corrected
5A at 24 DCV or 7.5A at 110 ACV before entering Service Mode.
900526051 1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order

Illustration 74
to shut down the engine. Enter service mode
Programmable Spare Relay (PSR) and enter the password. "OP 4" is showing on
The programmable spare relay outputs respond Operation, "Password Entry OP3".
to a selected trigger condition. The response
and the trigger condition are programmable. The 2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key three times. "OP 6"
programmable spare relay (K8) is located in the is showing on the lower display.
relay module on the rear of the GSC+. RM-25 is the
termination for the programmable spare relay (PSR) 3. Press the "SELECT" key. "SP01" is showing. .
that is normally open. RM-26 is the termination for "SP01" is followed with the value of the setpoint.
PSR which is normally closed.
The GSC+ must be programmed as to whether key. The next setpoint with the value of the
the programmable spare relay outputs are active setpoint is showing. Repeat this step until the
or inactive when triggered. In a active state. the desired setpoint is showing.
normally open contacts will close and the normally
closed contacts will open. Setpoint SP15 is used 5. Press the "SELECT" key. The value of the setpoint
for the programming of the active state of the is flashing.
programmable spare relay output. The setpoint is
described in Table 9. 6. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or the "SCROLL
DOWN" key in order to adjust the value of the
The GSC+ must be programmed as to what setpoint.
condition triggers the programmable spare relay
outputs to the active state. A large selection of 7. Press the "ENTER" key. The value of the setpoint
trigger conditions is available in order to activate tile stops flashing. Repeat steps 4, 5, 6 and 7 until
programmable spare relay output. Setpoint SP16 is all the desired setpoints are adjusted.
used for the programming of the trigger condition.
The setpoint is described in Table 9. 8. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the
lower display.
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the
programmable spare relay output circuit. 9. Press the "EXIT" key. The display returns to the
See Testing And Adjusting. "CID 448 FMI 12 normal state.
Programmable Spare Relay Failed - Test".
80
Table 9
OP6-0 Setpointsll) - Spare Input/Output Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory De
SP01 Spare Input 1 Input state used by the o - active low 0
Active State GSC+ to declare that a 1 - active high
SP1 fault exists.
SP02 Spare input 1 GSC+ response to a 0- shutdown 0
Response SP1 fault. 1 - alarm
SP03 Spare Input 1 Amount of time the o to 250 seconds o secanl
Time Delay GSC+ waits before in increments of 1
responding to a SP1
fault.
SP2 fault exists.
SP05 Spare Input 2 GSC+ response to a 0- shutdown 0
Response SP2 fault 1 - alarm
SP06 Spare Input 2 Amount of time the o to 250 seconds 0
responding to a SP2
fault.
SPO? Spare Input 3 Input state used by the o - active low 0
SP3 fault exists.
SP09 Spare Input 3 Amount of lime the o to 250 seconds o secom
responding to a SP3
fault.
SP4 fault exist.
SP12 Spare Input 4 Amount of lime the o to 250 seconds o seeonl
responding to a SP4
faul!.
SP13 Spare Output GSC+ response to the o - active low 0
Response spare output trigger 1 - active high
condition.
SP15 Spare Relay Output GSC+ response to o - relay inactive when 1
Response the spare relay trigger triggered
condition. 1 - relay active when
triggered
81
(Table 9 eonld)
OP6-0 Setpoinlsl11 - Spare InpuVOutput Programming
SP14 Spare Output The condition used by 0- unused
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 - active SPI faultl2l
the spare output trigger 2 - active SP2 fault~1
response. 3 - active SP3 faultl 2)
4 - active SP4 fault~1
SP16 Spare Relay Output The condition used by 5 - any combination of
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger active SP1, SP2, SP3
the spare relay. or SP4 faults~1
6 - any active shutdown
fault (AL! - AL!4, SPI
8
- 4, or CID FMI)
7 - any active alarm
or shutdown fault (AL 1
- 15, SPI - 4, or CID
FMI)
8 - cooldown mode
9 - coolant loss fault~1
10 - high oil
temperature fault12)
11 - CCM controll'l
SP17 Spare Indicator 1 The condition used by 0- unused
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 - active SPI faultl21
spare indicator 1. 2 - active SP2 fault~1
3 - active SP3 faultl21
SP18 Spare Indicator 2 The condition used by 4 - active SP4 fault~1
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 5 - any combination of 0
Spare Indicator 2. active SP1, SP2, SP3
SP19 Spare Indicator 3 The condition used by or SP4 faults~1
Trigger Indicator the GSC+ to trigger 6 - coolant loss faultl21
spare indicator 3. 7 - high oil temperature
fault~1
(1) The selpolnts are programmed at the factory to the default value. The setpomts may be changed to satisfy customer or
applicationrequirements.
(2) Either alarm or shutdown faults are valid trigger conditions.
(3) When SP14 is programmed to 11 (GeM control), the spare output is always active low. When SP16 is programmed to 11 (GeM contro!),
the spare relay is always active when triggered.
82
i01366699 The active input state, the response that 1

taken and the time delay for each spare il
Spare Input/Output is programmable. The GSC+ responds to
Programming OP6 active state of an input and the response (
delayed. Setpoints SP01 through SP12 are
(For EUI And PEEC Engines) for the programming of the spare inputs. T;
describes each of the setpoints.
SMCS Code: 4490
SIN: SKW1-Up CUSTOMER
INPUT
GENERATOR
SET
SIN: 6GW 1-Up CONTROL (GSC)
SIN: BNW1-Up GSC-2J

SPARE fAULT
SPl IN
SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up Illustration 75

Typical Active High Input Configuration For Spare Input
SIN: BAZ1-Up
SP1
OP6 is the option for the programming of the
following parameters: Spare Inputs, Spare
SPARE F AUL T
SP1 IN /-+___
GSC-23
1'
~
-)--(~-o--
rr==:;=]l, CUSTOMER
Indicators, Spare Outputs, and Programmable V ~ INPUT
Spare Relay Outputs. These spare inputs and GENERATOR

SET
outputs are provided in order to satisfy the needs of CONTROL (GSC)
the customer.
Note: On EMCP II+P panels, spare input 3 and Illustration 76

spare input 4 are not available for use by the Typical Active Low Input Configuration For Spare Input
customer. If a OVR is fitted to the generator, spare
input 1 is used for a OVR shutdown fault. Any other The GSC+ must be programmed to accept
fault signals can be connected to spare input 2. active input state or a LOW active input st,
Multiple signals can be separated using diodes HIGH active input state is +S OCV to the v
provided that all signals are switched negative or of the batteries. A LOW active input state i,
all signals are switched positive. A mixture of both When an input is programmed for a HIGH
types of signals is incorrect. input state, a HIGH signal at the input cree
spare fault condition. When an input is pro,
for a LOW active input state, a LOW signal
Spare Inputs input creates a spare fault condition. When
is programmed for a LOW active input statE
The spare inputs are referred to as SP1, SP2, SP3
signal at the input is considered as a sparr
and SP4. The spare inputs are accessed through condition. A HIGH signal at the input is cor
the terminal strip. The terminal strip is located within as a normal condition. Setpoints SP01, SPO
the control panel on the rear wall. The terminations
and SP 10 are used to program the active i
for the spare inputs that are located on the terminal state of the spare inputs. Table 10 describE
strip are listed below.
of the setpoints.
• SP1 - On certain generators this is marked as Note: If an input is left floating, the internal 1
"SW1"
of the GSC+P pulls the input high and the (
responds accordingly.
• SP2 - On certain generators this is marked as
"SW2"
The GSC+ must be programmed for a res~
to an active spare fault. The GSC+P respor
• SP3 - On certain generators this is marked as treating the condition as a fault shutdown 01
"SW3"
alarm. Set points SP02, SPOS, SPOB and SP
used for the programming of the response ..
• SP4 - On certain generators this is marked as describes the setpoints below.
"SW4"
Note: Spare faults that are programmed to sl
are ignored by the GSC+P when engine sp
I
less than crank termination speed.
83
The GSC+ must be programmed for the amount of Spare Indicators

input). After a spare fault occurs, the GSC+P does The spare indicators are located on the face of
not respond. Indicators are not activated and codes the GSC+ and the spare indicators are referred
are not shown until the time delay has elapsed. to as Spare 1, Spare 2, and Spare 3. The spare
Also, engine operation is not changed until the time indicators are programmable. A large selection of
delay has elapsed. Setpoints SP03, SP06, SP09 trigger conditions is available to activate the spare
and SP12 are used for the programming of the time indicators. Setpoints SP17, SP18 and SP19 are
delay. The time delay is selectable from 0 to 250 used for the programming of the trigger condition.
seconds. Table 10 describes the setpoints. Table 10 describes all of the setpoints.
Alarm Mode Sequence Of Operation - If a fault

occurs in a spare input that is programmed as an
Spare Output
active input, the following steps occur and the fault
is programmed as an alarm fault: ,BAT+
GENERATOR CUSTOMER
SET
1. The GSC+ waits until the time delay elapses. CONTROL (GSC) RELAY Ie-:::.
2. The fault alarm indicator FLASHES. GSC-,36

I \V rn SPARE !8 ~
SPARE 6'
)----En
- 900409818
is shown on the upper display of the GSC+. Illustration 77
Typical Active Low Configuration For Spare Output
able to start.
GENERATOR CUSTOMER
Shutdown Mode Sequence Of Operation - The SET HIGH
CONTROL (GSC) IMPEDANCE
following sequence occurs when a fault occurs LOAD
in a spare input and the fault is programmed
,\Vrn
-
SPp!1
GSC-J6
as a shutdown fault. The spare input must be SPARE 6')--(
I
programmed to receive an active input.
900409840
Illustration 78
1. The GSC+ waits until the time delay elapses.
Typical Active High Configuration For Spare Output.
2. The fault shutdown indicator FLASHES.
The spare output responds to a selected trigger
3. The corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP3 or SP4 condition. The trigger condition should be high or
is immediately shown on the upper display of low. The response and the trigger condition are
the GSC+. programmable. The spare output is accessed on
the terminal strip in the customer connection box on
4. The engine is shutdown or the engine is disabled the side of the control panel. The spare output is
from starting. marked as "SPARE" on the auxiliary terminal strip.
The fault shutdown indicator remains FLASHING The GSC+ must be programmed to accept a high
and the spare fault code remains shown until the input or a low input for the active state of the spare
ECS is turned to OFF/RESET. After turning the output. An active low state means that the output is
ECS to OFF/RESET and correcting the cause of pulled to ground. The output draws approximately
the spare fault, the engine is able to start and the 100 mA when the output is in the low state. A high
engine is able to run. state allows the output to float. When there are no
devices that are connected to the spare output, a
Note: Spare faults are not logged into the GSC+ high input is 5.0 DCV. When the spare output is
fault log. in the high state, the spare output is floating. The
spare output is only capable of driving logic circuits
Note: If the customer does not prefer to use the that have a high impedance. A high impedance is
spare inputs, program the spare inputs to receive one that is greater than 36 000 ohms. When the
an active low state. Do not connect any components spare output is in the high state, the spare output
to the spare input. will not drive loads that have a low impedance. An
example of a load with a low impedance is a relay.
Setpoint SP13 is used for the programming of the
active state of the spare output. Table 10 describes
the setpoints.
84
The GSC+ must be programmed to accept the When the outputs are triggered, the GSC+ r
condition that triggers the spare output to the programmed to decide whether the outputs
active state. A large selection of trigger conditions PSR are active or inactive. In an active stat
is available to activate the spare output. Setpoint normally open contacts will close and the n
SP14 is used for the programming of the trigger closed contacts will open. Setpoint SP15 is
condition. Table 10 describes the setpoints. program the active state of the spare relay,
The setpoint is described in 10.
Note: A common use of the spare output is
activating the shunt trip coil of the AC circuit breaker The GSC+ must be programmed for the co
during engine cooldown. that triggers the output of the programmabl,
relay to the active state. A large selection o'
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the spare conditions is available to activate the outPL
output circuit. See CID 334 in the topic Testing the spare relay. Setpoint SP16 is used for I
And Adjusting Section, "Diagnostic Fault Codes" programming of the trigger condition. The s
for more information. is described Table 10.
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the 01

Programmable Spare Relay circuit of the programmable spare relay. FOI
Outputs information, see Testing And Adjusting, "DiE
Fault Codes".
Procedure For Spare Input/Oll

PSRI
SOURCE ')
RM-J7 FB
....v
RM-l0 KB
-+-
RM-26
.... Programming
::: LOAD
"- v
Note: Service Mode cannot be entered wh€
RM-38 ,. RM-11
PSR2
K8 R~25
SOURCE 2 ~ EJ ~
~
v
) LOAD
Note: Any active shutdown fault must be m
GENERATOR
inactive in order to access service mode. ,
SET shutdown fault is active when any shutdov.
CONTROL
(GSC) indicator is FLASHING. To temporarily chan
shutdown fault from an active shutdown faL
an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS to
OFF/RESET position. To permanently chan,
PSR RATING FOR RESISTIVE LOADS, shutdown fault from an active shutdown fau
lOA ot 24 DCV or lOA ot 110 ACV
inactive shutdown fault, the shutdown fault 1
PSR RATING FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS, longer be occurring. The fault must be carr
5A at 24 DCV or 7.5A ot 110 ACV and the ECS must be turned to the OFF/RE
position. If the jumper from terminal 6 to tern
900409883 not installed on the ECS, the GSC+ does nc
Illustration 79
up in OFF/RESET and any active shutdown
Programmable Spare Relay (PSR) must be corrected before entering Service r
Note: On EMCP II+P panels, the PSR is not available 1. Shut down the engine by turning the EC:
for use by the customer. The EMCP II+P uses this STOP position. Enter Service Mode and E
output. password. "OP 4" is showing on lower d
For more information, see Systems Oper
The programmable spare relay outputs (PSR) "Procedure To Enter The Password".
should respond to a selected trigger condition.
The response and the trigger condition are 2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key three times.
programmable. The programmable spare relay (KS) is showing on the lower display.
is located in the relay module on the rear of the
GSC+. RM-25 is the termination for the normally 3. Press the "SELECT" key. SP01 is showin!
open contacts of the PSR. RM-26 is the termination is followed by the value of the setpoint.
for the normally closed contacts of the PSR.
4. Press the "SCROLL UP" or the "SCROLL
key. The next setpoint and the value for
setpoint is showing. Repeat this step unl
desired value is showing.
85

is flashing.

setpoint.
7. Press the "ENTER" key. The value of the setpoint

all the desired setpoints are adjusted.
8. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the

lower display.
9. Press the "EXIT" key. The display returns to

Normal Mode.
Table 10
OP6-O Setpoints!11 - Spare Input/Output Programming
SP01 Spare Input 1 Active Input state used by the o - active low 0
State GSC+ to declare that a 1 - active high
SP01 fault exists.
SP03 Spare Input 1 Time Amount of time the o to 250 seconds in o seconds
Delay GSC+ waits before increments of 1
responding to a SP1
fault.
. State GSC+ to declare that a 1 - active high
SP02 fault exists.
Response SP02 fault 1 - alarm
SP06 Spare Input 2 Time Amount of time the o to 250 seconds in 0
responding to a SP02
fault.
SPO? Spare Input 3 Active Input state used by the o - active low 0
SP03 fault exists.
SPOg Spare Input 3 Time Amount of time the o to 250 seconds in o seconds
fault.
SP10 Spare Input 4 Active Input state used by the 0- active low 0
SP04 fault exist.
fault.
(conllnued)
- 86
(Table 10 eontd)
OP6"O Setpoints(l) " Spare Input/Output Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory Del
SP13 Spare Output GSC+ response to the o " active low 0
Response spare output trigger 1 " active high
condition.
SP15 Spare Relay Output GSC+ response to o " relay inactive when 1
condition. 1 " relay active when
triggered
SPt4 Spare Output Trigger The condition used by 0" unused
Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 " active SPOt fault(2)
the spare output trigger 2 " active SP02 fault(2)
response. 3 " active SP03 fault@)
4 " active SP04 fault(2)
SPt6 Spare Relay Output The condition used by 5 " any combination
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger of active SPOt, SP02,
the spare relay. SP03 or SP4 faults@)
6" any active shutdown
fault (ALI" AL 14, SPOI
8
" SP04, or CID FMI)
7 " any active alarm or
shutdown fault (AL 1 "
ALI 5, SPOt" SP04, or
CID FMI)
8 " cooldown mode
9" coolant loss fault(2)
10 " high oil
temperature faultl2)
11 " CCM contrai(3)
SPt7 Spare Indicator 1 The condition used by 0" unused
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 "active SPOt fault(2)
spare indicator 1. 2 " active SP02 fault(2)
3 " active SP03 fault(2)
SPt8 Spare Indicator 2 The condition used by 4 " active SP04 fault(2)
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 5 " any combination
Spare Indicator 2. 0
of active SPOt, SP02,
SPt9 Spare Indicator 3 The condition used by SP03 or SP04 faults@)
Trigger Indicator the GSC+ to trigger 6 " coolant loss faultl2)
spare indicator 3. 7" high oil temperature
fault(2)
8" kW level relay active
{1} The setpoints are programmed at the factory to the default value. The setpoints may be changed to satisfy customer requiremenl
or application requirements.
(3) When SP14 is programmed to 11 (GeM control), the spare output is always active low. When SP16 is programmed to 11 (CeM C4
87
101366700 Note: To access the Service Mode, any active

shutdown fault must be made inactive. A shutdown
Spare Input/Output fault is active if a shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
Programming OP6 To temporarily change a shutdown fault to an
inactive fault, turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET
(For 3412C, 3508,3512, and position. If the jumper from terminal 6 to terminal 9
3516 MUI Engines) is not installed on the ECS, the GSC+P does not
power up in OFF/RESET and any active shutdown
SMCS Code: 4490 fault must be corrected before entering the Service
Mode.
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up Spare Inputs
SIN: BTW1-Up The spare inputs are referred to as SP1, SP2, SP3
and SP4. The spare inputs are accessed through
Option OP6 is the option that is used to program the terminal strip. The terminal strip is located within
spare inputs. OP6 is also used to program the spare the control panel on the rear wall. The terminations
output to meet the requirements of the customer for the spare inputs that are located on the terminal
or the requirements of a particular application. In strip are listed below.
addition, there are three spare indicators on the
face of the GSC+P. The spare indicators can be • SP1
programmed to activate under certain conditions.
The spare inputs are accessed on the auxiliary • SP2
terminal strip ("AUX"). The auxiliary terminal strip is
located within the control panel on the left wall. • SP3
Note: On EMCP II+P panels, spare input 3 and • SP4

spare input 4 are not available for use by the
customer. If a OVR is fitted to the generator, spare The active input state response that is taken and the
input 1 is used for a OVR shutdown fault. Any other time delay for each spare input is programmable.
fault signals can be connected to spare input 2. The GSC+P responds to the active state of an
Multiple signals can be separated using diodes input and the response can be delayed. Setpoints
provided that all signals are 'switched negative or SP01 through SP12 are used for the programming
all signals are switched positive. A mixture of both of the spare inputs. Table 12 describes each of
types of signals is incorrect. the setpoints.
Table 11
CUSTOMER
GENERATOR INPUT
Input/Output Terminations On EMCP II+P .-r
SET
1
CONTROL (GSC)
Termination Description sp,
GSC-2J ~? ~ [!)]
SW1 Spare Input 1 SPARE FAULT
SPl IN
1-)-{
/-+..... V r:s.
BAT-
SW2 Spare Input 2

g00409441
SW3 Spare Input 3 Illustration 80
Typical Active High Input Configuration For Spare Input 1 (SPi).
SW4 Spare Input 4
SPARE Spare Output
SPARE FAULT j" SP'
/-+......
PSR-NO Programmable Spare
Relay NO Contacts
SPl IN
GSC-23
_)-{~
V m r~~J~M1R
PSR-NC Programmable Spare GENERATOR
SET
Relay NC Contacts CONTROL (GSC)
BAT-
Note: The service mode cannot be entered when g00409451

Illustration 81
the ECS is in the AUTO position. Typical Active Low Input Configuration For Spare Input 1 (SPi).
88
The GSC+P must be programmed to accept a Shutdown Mode Sequence Of Operation -

HIGH active input state or a LOW active input state. following sequence occurs when a fault c
A HIGH active input state is +5 DCV to the voltage in a spare input and the fault is programl
of the batteries. A LOW active input state is "8-". as a shutdown fault. The spare input mu,
When an input is programmed for a HIGH active programmed to receive an active input,
input state, a HIGH signal at the input creates a
spare fault condition. When an input is programmed 1. The GSC+P waits until the time delay e
for a LOW active input state, a LOW signal at the
input creates a spare fault condition. When an input 2. The tault shutdown indicator FLASHES,
is programmed for a LOW active input state, a LOW
signal at the input is considered as a spare fault 3. The corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP:
condition. A HIGH signal at the input is considered is immediately shown on the upper dis
as a normal condition. Setpoints SP01, SP04, SPO? the GSC+P.
and SP10 are used to program the active input
state of the spare inputs, Table 11 describes each 4. The engine is shutdown or the engine i,
of the setpoints, from starting,
Note: If an input is left floating, the internal circuitry The fault shutdown indicator remains FLA:
of the GSC+P pulls the input high and the GSC+P and the spare fault code remains shown L
responds accordingly. ECS is turned to OFF/RESET After turnin[
ECS to OFF/RESET and correcting the cal
The GSC+P must be programmed for a response the spare fault, the engine is able to start
to an active spare fault. The GSC+P responds by engine is able to run,
treating the condition as a fault shutdown or a fault
alarm, Setpoints SP02, SP05, SP08 and SP11 are Note: Spare faults are not logged into the
used for the programming of the response, Table 12 fault log,
describes the setpoints below.
Note: If the customer does not prefer to u:
Note: Spare faults that are programmed to shutdown spare inputs, program the spare inputs to
are ignored by the GSC+P when engine speed is an active low state. Do not connect any cor
less than crank termination speed. to the spare input.
The GSC+P must be programmed for the amount at

Spare Indicators
input), After a spare fault occurs, the GSC+P does
The spare indicators are located on the fa
not respond. Indicators are not activated and codes
the GSC+P and the spare indicators are n
are not shown until the time delay has elapsed.
to as Spare 1, Spare 2, and Spare 3, The
Also, engine operation is not changed until the time
indicators are programmable, A large sele,
delay has elapsed, Setpoints SP03, SP06, SP09
trigger conditions is available to activate tI-
and SP12 are used for the programming of the time
indicators, Setpoints SP1?, SP18 and SP1!
delay, The time delay is selectable from 0 to 250
used tor the programming at the trigger cc
seconds. Table 12 describes the setpoints.
Table 12 describes all of the setpoints,
Alarm Mode Sequence Of Operation - If a fault
occurs in a spare input that is programmed as an Spare Output
active input, the following steps occur and the fault
is programmed as an alarm fault:
GENERATOR
i'
CUSTOMER
1, The GSC+P waits until the time delay elapses. SET RELAY
CONTROL (GSC)
2. The fault alarm indicator FLASHES. GSC-J6
SPARE r-- 63
is shown on the upper display of the GSC+P, Illustration 82
Typical Active Low Configuration For Spare Output.
able to start.
89
Programmable Spare Relay

GENERATOR CUSTOMER
Outputs
SET HIGH
CONTROL (GSC) IMPEDANCE
LOAD
GSC-J6
SPARE
Illustration 83
/
r'W'rn
63)--{
S~
-
Typical Active High Configuration For Spare Output.
I
900409840
SOURCE 2 R~37
v
Fa R~10
v
PSRI
K8~
PSR2
RM-26
") LOAD
R~J8 F9 R':l1 "8 R~25
The spare output responds to a selected trigger

SOURCE 2 v V
.., LOAD
condition. The trigger condition should be high or

GENERATOR
lo.w. The response and the trigger condition are SET
programmable. The spare output is accessed on CONTROL
(GSC)
the terminal strip in the customer connection box on
the side of the control panel. The spare output is
marked as "SPARE" on the auxiliary terminal strip.
PSR RATING FOR RESISTIVE LOADS,
The GSC+~ must be programmed to accept a high lOA 01 24 DCV or IDA 01 110 ACV
input or a low input for the active state of the spare PSR RATING FOR INDUCTIVE LOADS.
output. An active low state means that the output is 5A 01 24 DCV or 7.5A 01 110 ACV
pulled to ground. The output draws approximately
100 mA when the output is in the low state. A high g00409883
state allows the output to float. When there are no Illustration 84
devices that are connected to the spare output, a Programmable Spare Relay (PSR)
high input is 5.0 DCV. When the spare output is
in the high state, the spare output is floating. The Note: On EMCP II+P panels, the PSR is not available
spare output is only capable of driving logic circuits for use by the customer. The EMCP II+P uses this
that have a high impedance. A high impedance is output.
one that is greater than 36 000 ohms. When the
spare output is in the high state, the spare output The programmable spare relay outputs (PSR)
will not drive loads that have a low impedance. An should respond to a selected trigger condition.
example of a load with a low impedance is a relay. The response and the trigger condition are
Setpoint SP13 is used for the programming of the programmable. The programmable spare relay (K8)
active state of the spare output. Table 12 describes is located in the relay module on the rear of the
the setpoints. GSC+P. RM-25 is the termination for the normally
open contacts of the PSR. RM-26 is the termination
The GSC+P must be programmed to accept the for the normally closed contacts of the PSR.
condition that triggers the spare output to the
active state. A large selection of trigger conditions Wilen the outputs are triggered, the GSC+P must
is available to activate the spare output. Setpoint be programmed to decide whether the outputs of
SP14 is used for the programming of the trigger the PSR are active or inactive. In an active state, the
condition. Table 12 describes the setpoints. normally open contacts will close and the normally
closed contacts will open. Setpoint SP15 is used to
Note: A common use of the spare output is program the active state of the spare relay output.
activating the shunt trip coil of the AC circuit breaker The setpoint is described in 12.
during engine cooldown.
The GSC+P must be programmed for the condition
Note: The GSC+P diagnoses a fault in the spare that triggers the output of the programmable spare
output circuit. See CID 334 in the topic Testing relay to the active state. A large selection of trigger
And Adjusting Section, "Diagnostic Fault Codes" conditions is available to activate the output of
for more information. the spare relay. Setpoint SP16 is used for the
programming of the trigger condition. The setpoint
is described Table 12.
Note: The GSC+P diagnoses a fault in the output

circuit of the programmable spare relay. For more
information, see Testing And Adjusting, "Diagnostic
Fault Codes".
90
Procedure For Spare Input/Output

Programming
Note: Any active shutdown fault must be made

inactive in order to access service mode. A
shutdown fault is active when any shutdown
indicator is FLASHING. To temporarily change a
an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS to the
OFF/RESET position. To permanently change a
shutdown fault from an active shutdown fault to an
inactive shutdown fault, the shutdown fault must no
longer be occurring. The fault must be corrected
and the ECS must be turned to the OFF/RESET
position. If the jumper from terminal 6 to terminal 9
is not installed on the ECS, the GSC+ P does not
power up in OFF/RESET and any active shutdown
fault must be corrected before entering Service
Mode.
1. Shut down the engine by turning the ECS to the

STOP position. Enter Service Mode and enter the
password. "OP 4" is showing on lower display.
For more information, see Systems Operation,
"Procedure To Enter The Password".
2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key three times. "OP 6"

is showing on the lower display.
3. Press the "SELECT" key. SP01 is showing. SP01

is followed by the value of the setpoint.

key. The next setpoint and the value for the
setpoint is showing. Repeat this step until the
desired value is showing.

is flashing.

setpoint.

all the desired setpoints are adjusted.

lower display.
9. Press the "EXIT" key. The display returns to

Normal Mode.
91
Table 12
OP6-0 Setpointsll ) - Spare Input/Output Programming
SPOI Spare Input I Active Input state used by the o - active low 0
State GSC+ to declare that a I - active high
SPOI lault exists.
Response SPOI fault. I - alarm
SP03 Spare Input I Time Amount of time Ihe o to 250 seconds in o seconds
Delay GSC+ waits before increments of I
responding to a SP1
fault.
SP02 fault exists.
Response SP02 fault I - alarm
SP06 Spare Input 2 Time Amount of time the o to 250 seconds in 0
fault.
SPO? Spare Input 3 Active Input state used by the o - active low 0
SP03 fault exists.
Response SP03 fault. I - alarm
Delay GSC+ waits before increments of I
fault.
SPIO Spare Input 4 Active Input state used by the o - active low 0
SP04 fault exist.
SPII Spare Input 4 GSC+ response to a 0- shutdown 0
Response SP04 fault. I - alarm
SPI2 Spare Input 4 Time Amount of time the o to 250 seconds in o seconds
fault.
SPI3 Spare Output GSC+ response to the o - active low 0
Response spare output trigger I - active high
condition.
SPI5 Spare Relay Output GSC+ response to o - relay inactive when I
condition. I - relay active when
triggered
(conllnued)
92
(Table 12 eontd)
OP6-0 Setpoints( 1) - Spare Input/Output Programming
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory 0
SP14 Spare Output Trigger The condition used by 0- unused

Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 - active SP01 lault")
the spare output trigger 2 - active SP02 fault(2)
response. 3 - active SP03 fault(2)
4 - active SP04 fault")
SP16 Spare Relay Output The condition used by 5 - any combination
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger of active SP01 , SP02,
the spare relay. SP03 or SP4 faults")
6 - any active shutdown
fault (ALl - AL14, SP01
8
- SP04, or CID FMI)
7 - any active alarm or
shutdown fault (AL 1 -
AL 15, SP01 - SP04, or
CID FMI)
8 - cooldown mode
9 - coolant loss fault(2)
10 - high oil
temperature fault(2)
11 - CCM cantrall')
SP17 Spare Indicator 1 The condition used by 0- unused
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 1 - active SP01 fault(2)
spare indicator 1. 2 - active SP02 fault(2)
3 - active SP03 fault")
SP18 Spare Indicator 2 The condition used by 4 - active SP04 fault(2)
Trigger Condition the GSC+ to trigger 5 - any combination
Spare Indicator 2. 0
of active SP01, SP02,
SP19 Spare Indicator 3 The condition used by SP03 or SP04 faults(2)
Trigger Indicator the GSC+ to trigger 6 - coolant loss fault(2)
spare indicator 3. 7 - high oil temperature
fault(2) ,.
S - kW level relay active
(1) The setpoints are programmed at the factory to the default value. The selpoints may be changed to satisfy customer requireme
or application requirements.
(3) When SP14 is programmed to 11 (CeM control), the spare output is always active low. When SP16 is programmed to 11 (CeM
93
J01299582 Procedure For Hourmeter

Hourmeter Programming OP7 Programming
SMCS Code: 4490 A new GSC+ with 0 hours is used as an example
in the following procedure. The example sets the
SIN: BNS1-Up hours to a value of 1234. If the value of the hours is
increased, this procedure is valid.
SIN: 9ES1-Up
SIN: SKW1-Up
SIN: SPW1-Up
Note: Any active shutdown fault (FLASHING
SIN: 6GW1-Up shutdown indicator) must be made inactive in order
to access Service Mode. To temporarily change
SIN: 6WW1-Up a shutdown fault from an active shutdown fault to
SIN: BNW1-Up an inactive shutdown fault, turn the ECS to the
OFF/RESETposition. In order to permanently change
SIN: BTW1-Up a shutdown fault from an active shutdown fault to
an inactive shutdown fault, the shutdown fault must
SIN: LRW1-Up not be present and the ECS must be turned to the
OFFIRESET position. The GSC+ will not power up in
SIN: LRX1-Up
the OFF/RESET position if the jumper from terminal
SIN: LRY1-Up 6 to terminal 9 is not installed on the ECS, and any
active shutdown fault must be corrected before
SIN: 4BZ1-Up entering service mode.
OP? is used in order to program the hours that are 1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order
on the hourmeter. to shut down the engine. Enter service mode
and enter the password. "OP 4" is showing
Note: The hours can be increased but not on the lower display. See System Operations,
decreased. "Password Entry OP3".
Note: The following procedure is applicable only 2. Press the "SCROLL UP" 'key four times. "OP 7"
to MUI or PEEC engines when the GSC+/GSC+P is showing on the lower display.
determines the value of the hourmeter on the
display. The setpoint P023 is programmed to a or 3. Press the "SELECT" key. The present hourmeter
1 and OP? is available for programming. When value is showing. 0 is the hourmeter value in
setpoint P023 is programmed to 2 (EUI Engine) this example.
the value for the hourmeter on the GSC+/GSC+P
display is determined by the engine ECM. In this 4. Press the "SELECT" key. "000000" is showing.
case OP? is not available for programming. The first digit is flashing.
The hours of a new GSC+ can be changed in order 5. Press the "SCROLL RIGHT" key two times.
to match the hours of the former GSC+. OP? allows "000000" is showing. The third digit is flashing.
the hours on a new GSC+ to exactly match the
hours of the previous GSC+. This improves the 6. Press the "SCROLL UP" key. "001000" is
tracking of engine maintenance when the GSC+ is showing. The third digit is flashing.
replaced. If the GSC+ is moved from one engine to
another engine, then the number of hours on the ? Press the "SCROLL RIGHT" key. "001000" is
GSC+ can be changed. This allows the number showing. The fourth digit is flashing.
of hours on the GSC+ to match the new engine.
The hours cannot be changed if the new hours are 8. Press the "SCROLL UP" key two times. "001200"
greater than the original hours. is showing. The fourth digit is flashing.
If the hourmeter shows all dashes, the hours can 9. Press the "SCROLL RIGHT" key. "001200" is
not be reprogrammed. See CID 26B if the hourmeter showing. The fifth digit is flashing.
shows all dashes instead of a reasonable numeric
value. CID 26B is within Testing And Adjusting, 10. Press the "SCROLL UP" key three times.
"Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes". "001230" is showing. The fifth digit is flashing.
11. Press the "SCROLL RIGHT" key. "001230" is

showing. The sixth digit is flashing.
94
12. Press the "SCROLL UP" key four times. "001234"

is showing. The sixth digit is flashing.
13. Press the "ENTER" key. "001234" flashes on the

lower display and "ArE YOU SUrE" is showing
on the upper display.
• For yes, press "ENTER" key. "001234" stops

flashing .
• For no, press "SELECT" key. "000000" is

showing. The first digit is flashing. Repeat this
procedure to program the hourmeter again.
Note: The original hourmeter value can be stored in

the GSC+ memory. When the display shows "ArE
YOU SUrE", press the "EXIT" key twice for a normal
display. The original hourmeter display remains in
the GSC+.
Note: Entering less hours into the GSC+ memory is

not allowed. The display will briefly show "ErrOr".
The display then shows the original hours that are
stored in the GSC+. The first digit will be flashing.

display.
15. Press "EXIT" key. The display returns to

normal mode. As the engine data scrolls, the
programmed value should show on the lower
display.
95
101103692
Voltmeter/Ammeter
Programming OP8
SMCS Code: 4490
Table 13
OPB Setpointsl1) - Voltmeter Ammeter Programming
Default
ACOl Phase A (VA) Voltage Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase A voltage transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC02 Phase B (VB) Voltage Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase B voltage transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC03 Phase C (VC) Voltage Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase C voltage transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC04 Phase A (IA) Current Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase A current transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC05 Phase B (lB) Current Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase B current transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC06 Phase C (IC) Current Calibration value used by the GSC+ to compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration the characteristics of the phase C current transformer increments of
within the ATB+. 1
AC07~1 Phase A (VA) Voltage Calibration value used by the GSC+ to· compensate for o to 255 in 0
Calibration of BTB+ the characteristics of the phase A voltage transformer increments of
within the BTB+. one.
(1) The setpoints are programmed at the factory to the calibration value listed on the bar code sticker of the ATB+.
(2) Setpoint is available on GSC+ only.
OPB is the option for programming the calibration Procedure For Voltmeter/Ammeter
value of the voltmeter and ammeter. When the
GSC+ or the AC transformer box + (ATB+) has been
Programming
replaced, the calibration values that are written on Note: Service Mode cannot be entered when the
the ATB+ bar code sticker, must be programmed
into the GSC+ in order to ensure accurate voltage
values and current values. Note: Any active shutdown fault must be made
inactive in order to access Service Mode. To
The GSC+ monitors six transformers in the ATB+ temporarily change a shutdown fault from an active
for information about the voltage and current.
shutdown to an inactive shutdown fault, turn the
Each transformer has individual characteristics
ECS to the OFF/RESET position. To permanently
that affect the voltage and current measurements
change a shutdown fault from an active shutdown
that are taken by the GSC+. A calibration value is fault to an inactive shutdown fault, the fault must not
measured and the value is assigned at the factory.
be occurring. Also, the ECS must be turned to the
The calibration value is recorded on the bar code
OFF/RESET pOSition. If the jumper from terminal 6
sticker that is located on the lower left hand side of to terminal 9 is not installed on the ECS, the GSC+
the ATB+. When the generator set is assembled
does not power up in OFF/RESET and any active
at the factory, the calibration values on the bar shutdown fault must be corrected before entering
code sticker are programmed into the GSC+. The service mode.
transformers calibration value is 0 to 255. The
transformers calibration value uses increments of 1.
96
1. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order to P003 Shutdown Override For Engine Fault
shut down the engine. Enter service mode and is the GSC+ response to a low engine oil I
enter the password. OP 4 is showing on the P003 is also the response to a high cool,
lower display. For more information, see Systems temperature fault. 0 is for engine shutdowr
Operation, "Service Mode"for more information. is set to 1 then the alarm responds only. TI
See the Systems Operation, "Password Entry will override engine shutdown. The defaull
OP3"for more information. for P003 is O.
2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key five times. "OP 8" POlO Engine Overspeed - The GSC+ use,
is showing on the lower display. P010 in order to show an engine overspeE
The engine overspeed setpoint is 1.18 tim
3. Press the "SELECT" key. "AC01" is showing. The rated speed for all 60 Hz applications. Th,
value of the setpoint is also showing. The value vary from 500 to 4330 rpm. The values are
will be between 0 to 255. in increments of 10. The default value for
2120.
is flashing. P013 Low Oil Pressure Shutdown At Rated
The oil pressure is used by the GSC+ to c
5. Press the "SCROLL UP" or the "SCROLL DOWN" that a low oil pressure shutdown fault ex is
,key in order to adjust the value of the ACOI the engine at rated speed. The speed mu
setpoint. Match the value that is shown on the exceeded the oil step speed setting for a
ATB+ with the line voltage (A) to the line voltage nine seconds. The values vary from 34 to
(8). (5 to 61 psi). The increments increase witt
of 1. The default value for P013 is 205 kPc
stops flashing. Note: When the oil pressure drops to a lev
within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the P013 setpoint,
7. Press the "SCROLL UP" key. Repeat steps 3, 4, oil pressure alarm is issued by the GSC+
5 and 6 for setpoints AC02 through AC06. optional alarm module.
8. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the P015 High Water Temperature Shutdown -
lower display. coolant temperature is used by the GSC+ .
that a high c001ant temperature Shutdown
9. Press the "EXIT" key. The display will return to exists after a 10 second delay. The value:
the Normal Mode. from 85 to 123°C (185 to 253°F). The incr,
increase with a value of 1. The default va
setpoint P015 is 107'C (225°F).
iQ1103596
Engine Setpoint Verification Note: A high water coolant temperature al

issued by the GSC+ when the coolant ten
OP9 rises to a level that is within 6°C (11°F) of
setpoint.
SMCS Code: 4490
The following conditions are required befe
OP9 is the option for verifying that the EMCP 11+ engine setpoints are verified.
operates correctly when a fault occurs with low
oil pressure, high coolant temperature or engine • The previously listed setpoints must be
overspeed. An engine overspeed fault causes for the engine application. See System (
the GSC+ to shut off the engine. When a low oil "Service Mode" in order to view a list c
pressure fault or a high water temperature fault setpoints. See System Operation, "Set~
is detected the GSC+ will shut off the engine or Programming OP5" in order to prograrr
the GSC+ will sound the alarm according to the setpoints.
programmed setpoint P003. Setpoint P003 is the
shutdown override setpoint for an engine fault. • The engine is checked at idle and ratec
No faults should be present at the initia
OP9 is only for verification of certain engine If necessary, troubleshoot and correct a
setpoints. OP5-0 is used for the actual programming
of these setpoints. The setpoints that are verified by
this procedure are listed below.
97
Procedure For Overs peed 5. The setpoint value that is flashing on the upper
display is increased by pressing the "SCROLL
Verification UP" key. With each press of the "SCROLL UP"
key, the setpoint value increases by five. Press
Note: Service mode cannot be accessed when the
the "SCROLL UP" key until the setpoint value IS
engine control ~witch (ECS) is in the AUTO position.
past the present value that is showing on the
lower display.
1. Start and run the engine at rated speed. Enter
service mode and enter the password. "OP 9"
When the setpoint value is greater than the present
is showing on the lower display. See System
oil pressure value, the engine shuts down. The
Operation, "Password Entry OP3". indicator for low oil pressure should be flashing.
The GSC+ should not be in service mode.
2. Press the "SELECT" key. The value of the
overspeed setpoint "P01O" is showing on the
upper display. The default value for P010 is 2120. Procedure For High Water
"SC 1" is showing on the lower display. "SC 1" is Temperature Verification
followed with the present engine speed value.
Note: Service mode cannot be entered when the
3. Press "SELECT" key. The setpoint value is ECS is in the AUTO position.
flashing on the upper display.
1. Start the engine and run the engine at rated
4. Decrease the setpoint value by pressing the speed. Enter service mode and enter the
"SCROLL DOWN" key. The default setpoint value password. "OP 9" is showing on the lower
is 2120. The default value is flashing on the display. See System Operation, "Password Entry
upper display. The setpoint value decreases by OP3".
10 rpm with each press of the scroll down key.
Press the "SCROLL DOWN" key until the setpoint 2. Press "SELECT" key. The value of overspeed
value is past the present engine speed value setpoint "P01O" is showing on the upper display.
that is showing on the display. The default value of the overs peed setpolnt IS
2120. "SC1" is showing on the lower display.
When the setpoint value is less than the present "SC1" is followed with the present engine speed
engine speed value, the engine will shut down. The value.
engine overspeed indicator will flash. The GSC+ Will
no longer be in the service mode. . 3. Press the "SCROLL UP" key tv,;o times. The value
of the P015 setpoint for high water temperature
Procedure For Oil Pressure shutdown is showing on the upper display. The
default value for setpoint P015 is 10rC (225'F).
Verification "P015" is showing on the upper display. "SC3"
is then shown on the lower display which is
Note: Service mode cannot be entered when the followed by the present coolant temperature
value.
1. Start the engine and run the engine at rated 4. Press the "SELECT" key. The setpoint value is
speed. Enter service mode and enter the
password. "OP 9" is showing on the lower
display. See System Operation, "Password Entry
5. The setpoint value that is flashing on the upper
OP3" for more information about entering the display is decreased by pressing the "SCROLL
password. DOWN" key. With each press of the "SCROLL
DOWN" key, the setpoint value decreases by
2. Press "SELECT" key. The value of the overs peed five degrees. Continue pressing the "SCROLL
setpoint P010 is showing on the upper display. DOWN" key until the setpoint value decreases
The default value for P010 is 2120. "SC1" is past the present coolant temperature value that
showing on the lower display. The present engine is showing on the lower display.
speed value is then shown on the display.
The engine shuts down and the high water
3. Press the "SCROLL UP" key once. The value of
temperature indicator begins flashing when the
the P013 setpoint for low oil pressure shutdown
setpoint value is less than the present coolant
at rated speed is showing on the upper display. temperature value. The GSC+ is no longer in
205 kPa (30 psi) is the default value. The present service mode.
oil pressure value is shown on the display.
4. Press "SELECT" key. The setpoint value is

98
101103530
AC Offset Adjustment OP10

SMCS Code: 4490
Table 14
OP10 Setpoints(1) - AC Offset Adjustment
Setpoint Name Description Range Of Value Factory De
PHA Phase A Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% of 0

Adjustment GSC+ in order to measured voltage in
offset the voltmeter increments of 0.04%
(for the phase A to
neutral reading) from
the actual voltage
measurement.
PH B Phase B Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% of 0
Adjustment GSC+ to offset measured voltage in
the voltmeter (for increments of 0.04%
the phase B to
the actual voltage
measurement.
PHC Phase C Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% of 0
Adjustment GSC+ to offset measured voltage in
the voltmeter (for increments of 0.04%
the phase C to
the actual voltage
measurement.
PH A-B Phase A-B Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% 01 0
Adjustment GSC+ to off.set the measured voltage in
voltmeter (for the increments of 0.04%
phase A to phase
B reading) from
the actual voltage
measurement.
PH B-C Phase B-C Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% of 0
Adjustment GSC+ to offset the measured voltage in
phase B to phase
C reading) from
the actual voltage
measurement.
PH C-A Phase C-A Voltage Value used by the -5.0% to +5.0% of 0
Adjustment GSC+ to offset the measured voltage in
phase C to phase
A reading) from
the actual voltage
measurement.
(1) The setpornts are programmed to the default value at the factory. The setpOInts may be changed In order to satrsfy the reqUiremel
customer or the requirements of the application.
OP10 is used in order 10 adjust the voltmeter Note: Caterpillar does NOT recommend altE
readings of the GSC+. The GSC+ AC voltages are AC voltmeter. Performing this procedure ree
calibrated at the factory. The measurements of AC the accuracy of the GSC+ voltmeter.
voltage should never require adjustment.
99
Note: The adjusted voltages are used for the display jOt 118204
only. The adjusted voltages will not be sent over
the CAT Data Link to other modules. The customer Parallel Setpoint Tuning OP-11
communication module is another module that
may receive information over the CAT Data Link. SMCS Code: 4490
The adjusted voltages are not used in order to SIN: 5PW1-Up
determine the fault thresholds for the protective
relaYing funcllOn. The GSC+ determines the values SIN: 6WW1-Up
that are not adjusted in both cases. The values that
are not adjusted for AC voltage are not shown in SIN: BTW1-Up
both cases. The values that are not adjusted will be
used instead of the displayed values. SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up
Procedure For AC Offset SIN: LRY1-Up
Adjustment
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
The adjusted voltages and the adjusted currents
are shown on the left side of the upper display. The SIN: BAZ1-Up
percentage of the offset is shown on the right side of
the upper display. The user can adjust each voltage OPll is the option for programming some of the
and current up to ±S.O% in increments of 0.04%. Synchronization setpoints. For more information,
refer to Systems Operation, "Synchronization Tuning
Note: Service Mode cannot be entered when the Procedure". P30S, P306, P307, P308, and P309 are
engine control switch (ECS) is in the AUTO position. the setpoints that are affected by this procedure.
!he setpoints are described in Systems Operation,
1. Start and run the engine at rated speed. Enter Parallel Programming OP5-3".
service mode and enter the password. "OP9"
is showing on the lower display. See System Procedure For Programming
Operation, "Password Entry OP3" for more
information.
Synchronization Setpoints
The generator set must be operating at rated speed
2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key once. "OP 10" is
showing on the lower display. . . when the technician is performing this procedure.
The parallel functions are available in OPll by
using the Parallel Mode Switch.
3. Press "SELECT" key. "AC CAL" is showing on
the lower display. The voltage in phase "A" is
Note: If a parallel function is requested with the
showing on the left side of the upper display. The
Parallel Mode Switch, the OPll display will be
voltage in phase "A" is line to neutral voltage.
replaced by the display of the synchroscope while
the synchronization is being performed. After
4. Press "SELECT" key. The offset percentage value
synchronization, the display will return to OPll.
IS flashing on the right side of the upper display.
1. Start the engine and run the engine at rated

5. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or press the
speed. Enter Service Mode and enter the
"SCROLL DOWN" key in order to adjust
password. For more information, see Systems
the voltage value to the desired value. The
Operation, "Password Entry - OP3". "OP9" should
percentage value continues flashing.
now be showing on the lower display.
6. Press "ENTER" key. The percentage value
2. Press the "SCROLL UP" key twice. OPll is
display will stop flashing.
7. Press "SCROLL UP" key. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5
3. Press the "SELECT". "P305" is showing on the
and 6 for the other setpoints.
lower display.
lower display. DOWN" key. The next setpoint and the value of
the setpoint is showing. Repeat this step until the
9. Press the "EXIT" key. The display returns to the
desired setpoint is showing.
normal mode.
5. Press the "SELECT" key. The value of this
setpoint is showing.
100
6. Press the "SCROLL UP" key or the "SCROLL A shutdown fault tells the GSC+ to shutdol
DOWN" key in order to adjust the value of the engine in order to prevent engine damage
setpoint. In order to rapidly scroll through a large GSC+ automatically activates shutdown m
range of values, press the appropriate "SCROLL" which shuts down the engine. The GSC+
key and hold the key. flashes the corresponding indicator. See S'
Operation, "Shutdown Mode" for more infor
7. Press the "ENTER key". The value of the setpoint
stops flashing. Most faults have a code. There are three tl
fault codes. The type is obtained from the
8. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 until all of the input that is involved. The three types of fat
desired setpoints are adjusted. are listed below.
9. Press the "EXIT" key. OP1 is showing on the AL Fault Codes - The AL fault codes are s
lower display. as AL 1 through AL15 (AL 18 on EMCP II+P:
upper display. The AL fault codes include f
10. Press the "EXIT" key. The display returns to the engine conditions. An example of an AL fat
Normal Mode. is the low engine oil pressure alarm. AL fau
also include protective relaying functions. J
example of an AL fault code is the underfrE
101379493
fault.
Fault Description SP Fault Codes - The SP fault codes are sl
SMCS Code: 4490 SP1 through SP4 on the upper display.
A fault is any condition that does not conform to Diagnostic Codes - Diagnostic codes are s
the rules that the GSC+ operates. A fault can be numeric values. Diagnostic codes are ident
active or a fault can be inactive. An active fault is the illumination of "CID FMI" on the upper c
a fault that is occurring now. An inactive fault is a
fault that has previously occurred. Some examples There is an exception. There are no fault c'
of faults are listed below. for the shutdown faults that correspond to
dedicated shutdown indicators. The shutdc
• Coolant temperature is 123"C (254"F). This is a faults are identified to the operator by the n
high water temperature fault. dedicated fault shutdown indicator. Low oil I
is an example of a dedicated shutdown ind
• Engine speed is 4500 rpm. This is an engine
overspeed fault.
• There is a broken wire in the engine harness. This AL Fault Codes

is a diagnostic fault.
SMCS Code: 4490
• There is a failed oil pressure sensor. This is a
diagnostic fault. AL Fault Codes are shown as AL 1 through J
the upper display. Fault codes AL 1 through
An amount of severity is attached to every fault. apply to all generator sets. The fault codes
The amount of severity also describes the GSC+ specific engine fault conditions. An examplE
response to a fault. Faults are either alarm faults engine fault condition is the low engine oil ~
or shutdown faults. Alarm faults are not critical. fault. The fault codes also include protectiv
Shutdown faults are critical. relaying functions. The underfrequency fault
example of the protective relaying function. 1
An alarm fault provides the operator with an codesAL 16 through AL 18 only apply to par,
early warning to the operator of a possible future applications.
shutdown fault. For an alarm fault, the GSC+
automatically activates alarm mode and the fault
I
alarm indicator FLASHES. See System Operation,
"Alarm Mode" for further information.
101
AL Fault Codes rely upon certain setpoints. See PO 14 is the setpoint for low oil pressure shutdown
Systems Operation, "Service Mode" for more at idle speed. While the engine is at idle speed,
information on setpoints. AL Fault Codes are not Setpoint P014 tells the GSC+ when to declare a low
stored in the fault log of the GSC+. Many of the AL oil pressure shutdown fault. When the setpoint is
Fault Codes are programmable as a fault alarm or reached, the dedicated shutdown indicator for low
as a shutdown fault. In order to show the severity oil pressure FLASHES and the engine is shutdown.
of the fault, the AL Fault Codes are accompanied
by a fault alarm indicator. Also, the fault shutdown AL4 Fault Detected By The Engine ECM - The AL4
indicator on the GSC+ can accompany an AL Fault fault occurs when the electronic control module
Code. The AL Fault Codes and the related setpoints (ECM) for the engine detects an alarm fault or a
are described in the paragraphs that fallow. shutdown fault. The engine ECM tells the GSC+
whether the AL4 fault is an alarm fault or a shutdown
AL 1 High Water Temperature Alarm - A high water fault. This indication includes faults that include
t~mperature shutdown is issued by the GSC+ when derating of the engine. When the engine ECM
the engine coolant temperature increases to about is used in applications with generator sets, the
6°C (11°F) from setpoint P015. The fault alarm engine ECM is programmed in the factory NOT to
indicator will FLASH. The AL 1 fault code is shown derate. The occurrence of an AL4 fault code could
on the upper display after the "Alarm Fault Codes" mean that the engine ECM is not programmed
key is pressed. correctly. For the particular engine, refer to the
Troubleshooting Service Module. The AL4 fault
P015 is the· setpoint for a high water temperature (P023) is disabled on MUI engines and gas engines.
shutdown. This setpoint sets the coolant level
temperature. The GSC+ uses the temperature in When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,
order to declare that a shutdown fault due to high the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the
water temperature is present. When the setpoint "AL4" fault code is immediately shown on the upper
is reached, the dedicated shutdown indicator for display.
high water temperature FLASHES and the engine
is shutdown. When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault,
the fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AL4
AL2 Low Water Temperature Alarm - When the fault code is shown on the upper display after the
engine coolant temperature decreases to setpoint alarm codes key is pressed.
PO 16, the GSC+ issues a low water temperature
alarm. Setpoint P016 is the.setpoint for the low AL5 Low Engine Coolant Level Fault - When· the
water temperature alarm. The fault alarm indicator engine coolant level drops below the probe of the
will FLASH and the AL2 fault code is shown on coolant loss sensor for ten seconds, the GSC+
the upper display after the "Alarm Codes" key is issues a low coolant level warning (AL5). The
pressed. GSC+ can be programmed (P006) to treat a low
coolant level warning as an alarm or a shutdown.
P016 is the setpoint for the low water temperature The fault can be disabled (P005). The GSC+P
alarm. By displaying P016, the GSC+ indicates a can be programmed to light one of the spare fault
low water temperature alarm fault. indicators when this fault occurs. The spare fault
indicators are located on the front of the GSC+.
AL3 Alarm for Low Engine Oil Pressure - When the
engine oil pressure decreases to within 34 kPa When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,
(5 psi) of Setpoint P013 or POI4, the GSC+ issues the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the
an alarm for the low engine oil pressure. The fault AL5 fault code is immediately shown on the upper
alarm indicator will FLASH and the "AL3" fault code display.
is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm
Codes" key is pressed. When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the
fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the "AL5" fault
P013 is the setpoint for low oil pressure shutdown code is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm
at engine rated speed. If the oil pressure falls below Codes" key is pressed.
this setpoint while the engine is at rated speed,
the GSC+ will declare a low engine oil pressure AL6 High Engine Oil Temperature Fault - When the
fault. When the setpoint is reached, the dedicated engine oil temperature rises to whithin 6°C (11°F)
shutdown indicator for low oil pressure flashes and setpoint P026, the GSC+ issues a high engine oil
the engine is shut down. temperature fault. The GSC+ can be programmed
(P027) to treat this fault as an alarm, a shutdown,
or the fault can be disabled (P025). When this fault
occurs, the GSC+ can be programmed to light
one of the spare fault indicators that is located on
the GSC+. The programmable setpoints are SP17,
SP18 and SP19
102
When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault, ALB Generator Under Voltage Fault (protec
the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the relaying function) - When the line to line vo
"AL6" fault code is immediately shown on the upper is between any two phases of the generat,
display. below Setpoint P1 DB or Setpoint P111, the
issues an under voltage fault. The GSC+ ,
When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, programmed to enable or disable the undE
the fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the "AL6" fault as an alarm, a shutdown, or an alarrr
fault is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm shutdown. The setpoints for the under volt
Codes" key is pressed. are P107and P110. The fault can be progr
with a time delay from 0 to 120 seconds.
AL 7 Generator Over Voltage Fault (protective relaying options with the time delay are P109 and f
function) - When the line to line voltage between fault threshold can be adjusted from 60 PE
any two phases of the generator rises above the 100 percent of the nameplate voltage (PO:
P102 setpoint or the P105 setpoint, the GSC+ setpoints that are used for the fault thresh,
issues an overvoltage fault. The GSC+ can be P10BandP111.
programmed to enable or disable this fault as an
alarm, a shutdown, or an alarm and a shutdown. When the fault is enabled as an alarm fau
The setpoints for the overvoltage fault are P101 and a shutdown fault, the fault thresholds and
P104. The fault can be programmed with a time delays can be independently programmec
delay from 0 to 120 seconds. These setpoints are independent programming allows the alarr
Pl03 and P 106. The fault threshold can be adjusted serve as an early warning to the shutdown
from 100 percent to 125 percent of the nameplate
voltage for the generator (P02B. The setpoints for When the fault is programmed as a shutdc
the fault threshold are P102 and P105. the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH ar
ALB fault code is immediately shown on th
When the fault is enabled as both an alarm fault display.
and a shutdown fault, the fault thresholds and time
delays can be programmed independently to allow When the fault is programmed as alarm fa
the alarm fault to serve as an early warning for the fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AI
shutdown fault. code is shown on the upper display after tI
Codes" key is pressed.
When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,
the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the Note:.The ALB fault is disabled when the,
AL 7 fault code is immediately shown on the upper control switch (ECS) is in the STOP/COOL
display. position.
When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the Note: If the AC offset adjustment (OPlO) I
fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AL7 fault been performed, then the adjusted voltag,
code is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm NOT used for determining the fault thresh,
Codes" key is pressed. protective relaying functions. The values th
adjusted for the AC voltage are still detern
Note: If the AC offset adjustment OP10 has the GSC+ (but not Shown), and will be use
been performed, then the adjusted voltages are of the displayed values.
NOT used for determining the fault thresholds
for protective relaying functions. The values that AL9 Generator Over Frequency Fault (protE
have not been adjusted for AC voltage are still relaying function) - When the generator frE
determined by the GSC+ (but not shown), and the rises above the P113 or the Pl17setpoint~
values will be used instead of the displayed values. GSC+ issues an overfrequency fault. The (
be programmed (Pl13 and P116) to enab
disable this fault as an alarm, a shutdown,
The fault can be programmed (P115 and
with a time delay from 0 to 120 seconds. 1
threshold (Pl14 and Pl17) can be adjuste,
to 72 Hz (for 50 Hz applications, 50 to 60
When the fault is enabled as both an alan

and a shutdown fault, the fault thresholds 1
delays can be programmed independently
the alarm fault to serve as an early warn in!
shutdown fault.
103
When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault, AL 12 Generator Phase Over Current Fault (protective
the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the relaying function) - When any current rises above
AL9 fault code is immediately shown on the upper the P129 or the P134 setpoints, the GSC+ issues
display. a phase over current fault. The GSC+ can be
programmed (P128, P133) to enable or disable this
When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the fault as an alarm, a shutdown or both. The fault can
fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the AL9 also be programmed (P130 and P135) with a time
fault code is shown on the upper display after the delay from 0 to 250 seconds. The fault threshold
"Alarm Codes" key is pressed. (P129and P134) can be adjusted from 100 percent
to 160 percent of the nameplate current (P029).
Note: The frequency shown on the GSC+ will FLASH
when the generator frequency is greater than 70 Hz When the fault is enabled as both an alarm fault
or equal to 70 Hz. and a shutdown fault, the fault thresholds and time
delays can be programmed independently to allow
AL 10 Generator Under Frequency Fault (protected the alarm fault to serve as an early warning for the
relaying function) - When the generator frequency shutdown fault.
drops below the P120 or the P123 setpoints, the
GSC+ issues an underfrequency fault. The GSC+ When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,
can be programmed (P119 and P122) to enable this the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the
fault or to disable this fault as an alarm, a shutdown AL 12 fault code is immediately shown on the upper
or both. Th'e fault can also be programmed (P121 display.
and P124) with a time delay from 0 to 120 seconds.
The fault threshold (P120and P123) can be adjusted When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the
from 36Hz to 60 Hz (for 50 Hz applications, 30 to fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AL 12 fault
50 Hz). code is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm
Codes" key is pressed.
When the fault is enabled as both an alarm fault
and a shutdown fault, the fault thresholds and time AL 13 Generator Total Over Current Fault (protective
delays can be programmed independently to allow relaying function) - When generator total current
the alarm fault to serve as an early warning for the (sum of three phases) rises above the P131 or P136
shutdown fault. setpoints, the GSC+ issues a total over current fault.
The GSC+ can be programmed (P128 and P133)
When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault, to enable or to disable this fault as an alarm fault,
the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the a shutdown fault or both. In addition, the fault can
AL 10 fault code is immediately shown on the upper be programmed (P132 and P137) with a time delay
display. from 0 to 250 seconds. The fault threshold (P131
and P136) can be adjusted from 100 percent to
When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the 160 percent of three times the nameplate current
fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AL 10 fault rating (P029).
code is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm
Codes" key is pressed. When the fault is enabled both as an alarm and a
shutdown fault, the fault thresholds and time delays
Note: The AL 10 fault is disabled when the engine can be programmed independently to allow the
control switch (ECS) is in the STOP/COOLDOWN alarm fault to serve as an early warning for the
position. shutdown fault.
AL 11 Generator Reverse Power Fault (protective When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,
relaying function) - When reverse power rises the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the
above the P126 setpoint, the GSC+ issues a reverse AL 13 fault code is immediately shown on the upper
power fault. The GSC+ can be programmed (P125) display.
to enable this fault or to disable this fault as a
shutdown. In addition, the fault can be programmed When the fault is programmed as an alarm fault, the
(P 127) with a time delay from 0 to 30 seconds. The fault alarm indicator will FLASH and the AL 13 fault
fault threshold (P 126) can be adjusted from 0 to 20 code is shown on the upper display after the "Alarm
percent of the nameplate power (P030). Codes" key is pressed.
When the fault is programmed as a shutdown fault,

the fault shutdown indicator will FLASH and the
AL 11 fault code is immediately shown on the upper
display.
104
AL14 Phase A No Voltage Input Fault (protective AL 16 Incorrect Phase Sequence - This f,
relaying function) - When the phase A voltage is not occurs whenever any synchronization fur
being received at the GSC+ input (GSC+ connector is in progress, and the GSC+P verifies tr
contact 10), the GSC+ issues a phase A no voltage generator and the bus have a phase sec
input fault. The phase A voltage input is needed mismatch. The incorrect Phase Sequence
to accurately measure the generator output. The immediately made active, and synchroniz
accuracy of some power metering functions and halted. In this case, the alarm is latched
AC frequency measurement may be reduced. The synchronization request is removed. If thE
GSC+ automatically treats a lost voltage input on was made locally using the SMS, then tho
phase A as an alarm fault. This response is not must be moved to the OFF position to CI
programmable. the alarm. If the phase sequence mismat
detected immediately following closure to
When this fault occurs, the fault alarm indicator bus, but no synchronization function is in
will FLASH and the AL 14 fault code is shown on the "Incorrect Phase Sequence" alarm is
the upper display after the "Alarm Codes" key is active but is not latched. In this case, if tr
pressed. sequence mismatch condition is not pres'
alarm will be removed.
AL 15 GSC+ Configuration Error - The GSC+
checks the relationship between the frequency of AL 17 Improper Generator Or Bus Voltage
the generator output voltage and the engine speed. fault occurs whenever the generator volta
This relationship is shown in the formula below. voltage, or both are incorrect for synchror
The alarm is generated only if synchroniz,
frequency (hertz) = (number of generator poles X enabled and synchronization request has
rpm) / 120 made. The conditions that may cause an '
Generator Alarm" or "Bus Voltage Alarm" .
The GSC+ automatically treats a configuration below.
error as an alarm fault. This response is not
programmable. This fault is corrected by • The Bus voltage is too low for synchroni
programming the proper values into setpoints POOg
(number of ring gear teeth) and P033 (number of • The Generator voltage is too low for
generator poles). synchronization.
When this fault occurs, the fault alarm indicator • The Generator voltage and the Bus volt,
will FLASH and the AL 15 fault code is shownon out of tolerance.
the upper display after the "Alarm Codes" key is
pressed. The specific conditions tested depend on
synchronization request and on setpoint v
Note: If setpoint P033 (number of generator poles) Setpoint P303 enables or disables gener,
is set to 0, the AL 15 fault is disabled. voltage or bus voltage checking during aL
synchronization. Setpoint P304 determinef
Paralleling Alarms mazimum acceptable difference in voltage
the bus voltage and the generator voltage
Paralleling Alarms are always treated as fault alarms
and will not shut down the engine. This alarm will prevent frequency control c
breaker closure while the alarm is active, I
Synchronization may be halted, depending upon not halt synchronization. If the condition Ci
the fault. With one exception, paralleling alarms are the alarm is removed while synchronizatio,
issued only when the GSC+P is in Synchronization progress, then the alarm will be removed ,
mode. The only paralleling alarm that will be active GSC+P will proceed with synchronization.
in Normal mode is AL 16 Incorrect Phase Sequence.
If this alarm is active in Normal mode, the alarm will If the Improper Generator Alarm or the SUi
be displayed when the "AL CODES" key is pressed, Alarm is active when synchronizationis ha
in the same manner as other fault alarms. due to a synchronizer Time-out Alarm, the
is latched until the synchronization reques
Paralleling alarms are detected and annunciated removed. In this case, if the request was I
only if synchronization is enabled by programming locally using the SMS, then the SMS must
the Synchronization Enabled setpoint, P301, with a moved to the OFF position to CLEAR the c
non-zero value. the request was made remotely using a C,
Communication Module (CCM), then the C·
send a Generator Synchronizer Control COl
(with a value of OFF) to CLEAR the alarm.
105
AL 18 Synchronizer Time-out Alarm - This fault iOl103650

occurs whenever the GSC+P is unable to complete
Automatic Synchronization or Dead Bus Parallel SP Fault Codes
after a programmed amount of time. For Ihe
purposes of this alarm, Automatic Synchronization SMCS Code: 4490
/Dead Bus Parallel is considered complete after
breaker closure has been verified. SP fault codes are associated with the spare inputs.
SP fault codes are either alarm faults or shutdown
This alarm has two time-out thresholds, faults. The four spare inputs and a spare output
Synchronization Time Warning and Maximum are provided in order to meet the needs of the
Synchonization Time fault. Synchronization may be customer. The spare inputs are programmable to
halted, depending on the time-out threshold that active state, severity, and delay time. See System
has been exceeded. Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming OP6".
The spare inputs and the corresponding SP fault
Timing for this alarm is started when Automatic codes are referred to as SP1, SP2, SP3, and SP4.
Synchronization is requested, and the Dead Bus
On-Time Delay (if the bus is dead) has completed. Alarm Mode Sequence Of Operation - The following
procedure happens when a fault occurs in a spare
Note: If the GSC+P closes the breaker, and a input (the active input) and the fault is programmed
fault occurs that causes the breaker to open as an alarm fault.
within 15 seconds, the GSC+P will lock out all
synchronization functions unlil the SMS is turned 1. The GSC+ waits for the time delay.
to another position. If Ihe breaker opens after 15
seconds, the GSC+P will reattempt the requested 2. The fault alarm indicator FLASHES.
synchronization function.
3. When the alarm codes key is pressed, the
Synchronization Time Warning corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP3, or SP4 is
shown on the upper display.
If the GSC+P is unable to complete Automatic
Synchronization or Dead Bus Paralleling during 4. The engine continues to run or the engine is
the time specified in the Synchronization Time able to start.
Warning setpoint, the GSC+P will activate the
AL 18 Synchronizer Time-out Alarm but continue Shutdown Mode Sequence Of Operation - The
synchronization. If synchronization is completed following sequence happens when a fault occurs
before the Maximum Synchronization Time fault in a spare input and the fault is programmed as a
setpoint has expired, the alarm will be deactivated. shutdown fault.
Maximum Synchronization Time Faull 1. The GSC+ waits for the time delay.
If the GSC+P is unable to complete Automatic 2. The fault shutdown indicator FLASHES.
Synchronization or Dead Bus Parallel during the
time specified in the Maximum Synchronization 3. The corresponding code SP1, SP2, SP3, or SP4
Time-out Fault setpoint, the GSC+P will activate is immediately SHOWN on the upper display of
AL 18 Synchronizer Time-out Alarm and halt the GSC+.
synchronization. In this case, the alarm is latched
until the synchronization request is removed. If the 4. The engine is shut down or the engine is
request was made locally using the SMS, then disabled from starting.
the SMS must be moved to the OFF position to
CLEAR the alarm. If the request was made remotely Note: Spare faults are not logged into the GSC+
by a CCM, then the CCM must send a Generator fault log.
Synchonizer Control command (with a value of OFF)
to CLEAR the alarm. Note: Spare faults that are programmed to shutdown
are ignored by the GSC+ when the engine speed is
less than crank terminate speed.
106
101103595 Control System Identifier - The control sy'

identifier is a single digit. The control syst,
Diagnostic Codes can generate a diagnostic code is the GS
SMCS Code: 4490 Failure Mode Identifier (FMI) - The FMI is
digit code. The FMI tells the type of failure
Diagnostic fault codes are associated with occurred. The FMI is shown on the upper
failed electrical components or circuits. These at the same time as the CID. For examplE
components or circuits provide information to "3" means that the signal voltage is too hi
the GSC+ or the components or circuits receive Testing And Adjusting, "Diagnostic Fault (
information from the GSC+. The diagnostic fault for a list of FMI codes.
codes are designated as alarm faults or shutdown
faults. See System Operation, "Shutdown Mode" DIAG indicator - When "DIAG" is FLASHlr
for more information. See System Operation, "Alarm diagnostic fault code (CID FMI) that is she
Mode"for more information. the upper display is active. When "DIAG"
CONTINUOUSLY, there is an inactive diag
Alarm Mode Sequence Of Operation - When an fault. The CID and the FMI will be recordE
alarm fault occurs, the GSC+ performs the following the fault log. Also, see System Operation,
steps. Log Viewing OP1 ". When the"DIAG" displi
showing then there are NO diagnostic faul
• The GSC+ activates the alarm mode.
• The fault alarm indicator FLASHES.
• When the alarm codes key is pressed, the I I I I I

corresponding diagnostic code (CID FMI) is I -I U
shown on the upper display.
CIO DIAG fM'
• The engine continues to run or the engine is able

Illustration 85
to start.
Upper Display Ihal is showing a "CID 190 FMI3" Diag'
Shutdown Mode Sequence Of Operation - When Code
a shutdown fault occurs, the GSC+ performs the
following steps. Note: The GSC+ response (alarm'or shutd
four diagnostic faults is programmable by
• The GSC+ activates shutdown mode. personnel. The response that is usually pro
into the GSC+ is for an alarm. P04 would'
• The fault shutdown indicator FLASHES. "0". When a shutdown response is progral
P04 would be "1". See Setpoint P04 within
• The corresponding diagnostic code (CID FMI) is Operation, "Engine/Generator Programmin!
immediately shown on the upper display. The diagnostic faults that can be programl
oil pressure sensor CID 100, coolant temp
• The engine is shut down or the engine cannot sensor CID 110, coolant loss sensor CID 1
be started. sensor power supply CID 269.
The diagnostic fault code (CID FMI) closely

identifies the cause of the fault. Each diagnostic
fault consists of two identifiers and an indicator. The
identifiers are shown on the upper display. Service
personnel interpret the identifiers in order to assist
with troubleshooting.
The indicators are listed below.
Component Identifier (CID) - The CID is a three digit

code. The code that is indicated corresponds to a
faulty component. The CID is shown on the upper
display. For example if the engine magnetic pickup
(MPU) is faulty then "190"would be displayed. See
the T8sting And Adjusting, "Diagnostic Fault Codes"
for a list of CID codes.
I
107
The GSC+ has a fault log to help with troubleshooting 101103632

of diagnostic faults. Inactive diagnostic fault codes
(CID FMI) are recorded in the fault log for viewing at Programmable Spare Output
a later time. The total number of faults are shown on
the upper display with the CID codes and the FMI SMCS Code: 4490
codes. An active diagnostic alarm fault becomes
inactive when the fault is no longer present and The spare output responds to a selected trigger
the ECS must be turned to OFF/RESET. The GSC+ condition. The response is high or low. The response
stores a maximum of 12 diagnostic fault codes in the and the trigger condition are programmable.
fault log. If an additional diagnostiC fault becomes
inactive, the GSC+ automatically clears the earliest The GSC+ spare output response must be
diagnostic fault code. This fault code is put into programmed active high or active low (setpoint
the fault log by the GSC+. Inactive diagnostic fault SP13). An active low pulls the output toward battery
cqdes that are more than 750 hours old are cleared negative when the output is active. The output
automatically by the GSC+. Only diagnostic fault draws a maximum of 100 mA when the output is
codes are recorded in the fault log. AL fault codes in the low state. The active high is approximately
and SP fault codes are not recorded in the fault log. 5.0 DCV when no devices are connected to the
See Service Manual, "Fault Log Viewing OP1 ". spare output. The spare output is able to drive high
impedance logic circuits (36 000 ohm minimum).
Clear diagnostic fault codes from the fault log after The spare output will not drive low impedance loads
correcting the fault. Clearing old codes will help such as relays.
avoid confusion. When all diagnostic faults are
cleared from the fault log and no active diagnostic The setpoint SP14 must be programmed to the
faults exist, the DIAG indicator is OFF. See System condition that triggers the spare output to the
Operation, "Fault Log Clearing OP4" . active state. The possible trigger conditions that
can activate the spare output are listed in System
101103636
See System Operation, "Spare Input/Output
Programmable Spare Relay Programming OP6" for more information on
Outputs programming the setpoints for the output.
SMCS Code: 4490 Note: Using the spare output to activate the shunt
trip coil of the AC circuit breaker during engine ' ,
The programmable spare relay is one of the cool down is common.
relays that is located in the relay module that
is on the'rear of the GSC+. The programmable Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the spare
spare relay outputs respond to a selected trigger output circuit. See Testing And Adjusting, "CID 334
condition. The response and the trigger condition Spare Output".
are programmable.
The GSC+ (setpoint SP15) must be programmed.

The programmable spare relay outputs are active
or inactive. In an active state, the normally open
contacts will close and the normally closed contacts
will open.
The condition that triggers the programmable

spare relay outputs to the active state must be
programmed in the GSC+ (setpoint SP16). The
possible trigger conditions that can activate
the programmable spare relay outputs are
listed in System Operation, "Spare Input/Output
Programming OP6".
See System Operation, "Spare Input/Output

Programming OP6" for more information on
programming the setpoints for this output.
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the spare

output circuit. See Testing and Adjusting, "CID 448,
FMI 12 Programmable Spare Relay Failed-Test" for
more information.
108
101103611
Programmable Kilowatt Level Alarm Modules

Output SMCS Code: 4490
SMCS Code: 4490
The programmable kilowatt level output is a o o

feature that can be enabled by programming
setpoint P138. The programmable kilowatt
level output can be disabled by programming
setpoint P138. The programmable kilowatt level
output draws a maximum of 100 mA when the , "
programmable kilowatt level output is active.
"
When the programmable kilowatt level output is
inactive, the programmable kilowatt level output
is pulled to battery positive. The programmable
kilowatt level output (GSC+ connector contact
34) will be activated whenever the total power
output of the generator passes the programmed
threshold (set point P139). This threshold can be
programmed from 0 percent to 110 percent of the
nameplate power (setpoint P030). A time delay can
be programmed from 0 seconds to 120 seconds
(setpoint P140).
Once the programmable kilowatt level output is

activated, the programmable kilowatt level output
will be deactivated when the total power output of o o
the generator drops below a programmed threshold
(setpoint P141). The programmed threshold is
different from the activation threshold. The threshold
can be programmed from 0 percent to 110 percent Illustration 86
of the total power rating of the generator. A
Alarm Modules
deactivation time delay can be programmed from 0
seconds to 120 seconds (setpoint P140). (1) Amber indicators. (2) Red indicators. (3) Lamp tes
Alarm silence switch. (5) Horn.
See System Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OPS-O" for more information. The ALM is an attachment. The ALM is b
the instrument panel. Red indicators (2) al
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses faults in the indicators (1) are the visual indicators. ThE
programmable kilowatt level output circuit. See is the audible indicator. A 24 DCV battery
Testing And Adjusting, "Diagnostic Codes". a 32 DCV battery system powers the ALM
The modules are either alarm modules or

annunciator. The versions are listed below
• NFPA 99 Alarm Module
• EMCPII Remote Annunciator
The only difference between these modulE

the graphics Him on the front of the pane:
the jumper wires on the rear. The EMCP II
annunciator has a lamp test switch. The fe
description of operation refers to the alam
annunciator module as the annunciator me
109
The alarm module (ALM) gives a warning of 6. Coolant temperature has exceeded the high
conditions that are becoming a problem. The water temperature shutdown setpoint that is
warning occurs before conditions are severe programmed into the GSC+.
enough to shut down the engine.
7. The engine has failed to start. overcrank.
An alarm fault develops while the generator set is
running and when the engine control switch (ECS) 8. The engine speed exceeded the engine
is in the COOL DOWN/STOP position or in the overs peed setpoint that is programmed into the
AUTO position . An alarm fault develops when the GSC+.
generator set is not running and when the engine
control switch (ECS) is in the COOLDOWN/STOP 9. The engine is shut down due to a coolant loss
position or in the AUTO position . That fault is fault.
indicated by the optional alarm module or the
rElmote annunciator. 10. The engine is shut down due to a spare fault.
Description Of Operation 11. The engine is shut down due to an emergency

stop fault.
Note: In the following paragraphs, the annunciator
can refer to the alarm module, or the annunciator 12. The engine is shut down due to a diagnostic
fault.
can refer to. the remote annunciator module.
The annunciator receives data from the following The first eight items control the operation of
items: switch inputs, internal circuitry, and a serial the indicators and horn. See Table 15 for more
information. The last four items control the operation
data link from the GSC+.
of the horn only.
Switch Inputs A maximum of three modules (alarm module, CIM,
or RDM) can be connected to the serial data link.
Four switch inputs are available for the switch The maximum distance between a module and the
connections. Switch inputs that are connected to GSC+ is 305 m (1000 It).
ground "8-" will be active. See Table 15.
The data link will malfunction under the following
Internal Circuitry conditions with multiple modules:·
Internal circuitry determines if the DC battery supply • One of the modules is powered down (8+ or 8-
voltage is too low. The setpoint is set at the factory disconnected)
at 24 DGV.
• The module that is powered down remains
Data Link connected to the data link.
The annunciator module receives data from the Under these conditions the indicators controlled
GSC+ by a serial data link. The received data by the data link of the other module(s) that are
includes the following list. powered up will flash at 0.5 hertz.
1, Coolant temperature has exceeded the high

temperature alarm setpoint that is programmed
into the GSC+.
2. Oil pressure is below the low oil pressure alarm

setpoint that is programmed into the GSC+.
3. Coolant temperature is below the low temperature

alarm setpoint that is programmed into the
GSC+.
4. The ECS is not in the AUTO or MAN/START

position.
5. Oil pressure is below the low oil pressure

shutdown setpoint that is programmed into the
GSC+.
110
Indicator And Horn Operation When an alarm fault occurs, the correspc
indicator flashes. The indicator flashes at
Table 15 and the horn sounds. If the alarm fault is
Indicator And Horn Function LATCHED the indicator turns off when the,
ceases. The horn also turns off when the,
Indicator NFPA 99 ALM EMCP RAN ceases. If the alarm fault is LATCHED, the
Color continues to flash until the "acknowledge/
1 Amber High Coolant High Coolant Temp input is activated. See Table 15for LATCHI
Temp Alarm Alarm faults as well as the indicator and horn fu
Lt, H, LAT, TO Lt, H, LAT, TO for each operating mode.
2 Amber Low Coolant Low Coolant Temp
Temp Alarm Alarm Normally, switch input (3) (terminal 10) an
Lt, H, LAT Lt, H, LAT input (4) (terminal 11) only operate indica
and indicator (8). However, switch input (:
3 Amber Low Oil Press Low Oil Press Alarm switch input (4) can also operate the horn
Alarm Lt, H, LAT terminal (10) (sw input 3) to terminal (3) ;
Lt, H, LAT connect terminal (11) (sw input 4) to termi
4 Amber Low Fuel Level Not In Auto
SW(I), H Lt, H Alarm Silence
5 Red Not In Auto High Coolant Temp
Lt, H Shutdownl1) Activating the alarm silence switch (4) Cal
Lt, H, TO horn to cease. Also, activating the alarm!
switch (4) causes the indicator to light con
6 Red Low DCV Low DCV
INT, TIM INT, TIM
Data Link Malfunction
7 Red Spare Overcrank
SW(3) Shutdown(l) If the data link malfunctions, the indicator!
Lt, H are controlled by the data link flash at 0.5
8 Red Spare Overspeed The indicators that are controlled by the S'
SW(4) Shutdown(l) function normally.
Lt, H
SW(2) Not Used Lamp Test,
(I) Latched by the GSC+
Activating the lamp test switch (3) results
sounding the horn and turning on all indie
The above table lists the following abbreviations.
continuously for 10 seconds or until the sv
deactivated.
ALM - Alarm Module
H - Horn is sounded.
INT - The signal source is inlernal to the module.
LAT - "LATCHED" alarm fault
LI - The data link from the GSC+ is the signal

source.
RAN - Remote Annunciator
SW - One of 4 switches is the signal source. The

number in parentheses indicates which switch is
the signal source.
TD - A 10 second delay occurs before the fault

is annunciated.
TIM - a 60 second time delay occurs before the

fault is annunciated.
111
Mode Selection
Table 16
Mode Selection And Switch Input Connectionsl 1)

Input Mode SELl ModeSEL2 Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
Terminal 5 6 B 9 10 11
Mode
NFPA 99 Alarm (Float) (Float) Low Fuel Level (Float) Spare Spare
EMCP RAN (Float) ("8-") (Float) ("8-") (Float) (Float)
(1) NOTE: Connections in parentheses are required to select the mode specified
The annunciator module operates in one of the Table 17

two modes described in Table 16. The modes are Connections For Customer Alarm Module
selected by connections made to the mode select
inputs (terminals 5 and 6) and switch (2) input Screw Terminal Signal Name
(terminal 9) as shown in Table 16. 1 "8+"
2 Not Used
iOl103579
3 Input 5 - Indicator 5 (Red)
Alarm Module Control 4 Input 6 - Indicator 6 (Red)
(Custom) 5 Input 7 - Indicator 7 (Red)
SMCS Code: 4490 6 Input 8 - Indicator 8 (Red)
7 "8-"
o o 8 Input 1 - Indicator 1
(Amber)
9 Input 2 - Indicator 2
(Amber)
10 Input 3 - Indicator 3
, . (Amber)
" 11 Input 4 - Indicator 4
(Amber)
12 Lamp Test
13 Hom Silence
3 14 Hom output
CIIEHPlLUII'
4 The CAM is an attachment that can be mounted
at the generator set or at a remote location. The
CAM annunciates faults, alarms or other conditions.
Customer supplied inputs give the CAM this
information.
o o @ @ The CAM operates when the CAM is powered by a

24 DCV battery system or a 32 DCV battery system.
The CAM is equipped with a horn, an alarm silence
I
II
switch and a lamp test switch. 8 switched inputs
900321237 are also provided for the customer to use.
Illustration 87
Custom Alarm Module (CAM) Note: A basic version of the CAM also exists. The
(1) Amber indicators. (2) Red indicators. (3) Lamp test switch. (4) basic version does not have a horn, an alarm
Alarm silence switch. (5) Horn. silence switch or a lamp test switch. The basic CAM
should be used with an existing fully equipped
CAM or an ALM.
112
Alarm Operation Customized Labeling

A given switch input will correspond to 1 of 8 The condition that is being monitored by
indicators on the face of the CAM. The indicators will indicator is determined by the customer.
FLASH at a rate of 2 hertz when the corresponding 130-3326 Film provides a wide variety of
input is closed to the battery negative terminal. order to customize the CAM to an applica
The red indicators are used to display shutdown
conditions, and the amber indicators are used to
display alarm conditions.
When an input that is corresponding to one of

the red indicators is activated, the indicator will
flash and the horn will sound. When the input is
disconnected from the battery negative terminal,
the horn will continue to sound and the red indicator
will continue to flash until the alarm silence switch
is pressed.
When an input that is corresponding to one of the

amber indicators is activated, the indicator will flash
but the horn does NOT sound. When the input is
disconnected from the battery negative terminal,
the amber indicator will turn off.
Alarm Silence Function

The alarm silence switch is activated by connecting
the corresponding input to the battery negative
terminal.
When an input is connected to the battery negative

terminal, activating the alarm silence switch causes
the horn to cease. The indicator stops flashing and
the indicator changes to being ON continuously.
The alarm silence function will be overridden if the
following event occurs. The status of any of the
eight switched inputs change. The change of status
will cause additional inputs to be closed to the
battery negative terminal.
The Alarm Silence Function will not be overridden

if the change in status is the opening of any of
the inputs from the battery negative terminal. The
indicators will turn OFF when the corresponding
input is disconnected from the battery negative
terminal.
Lamp Test Function

Activating the "Lamp Test" switch results in
sounding the horn and turning on all indicators
continuously for 10 seconds or until the switch is
deactivated. The "Lamp Test" input can be wired to
the switch of another alarm module.
113
101103648 The relay driver module (ROM) is an optional module

that can be used to expand the number of available
Relay Driver Module outputs on the GSC+. The ROM outputs are
controlled by the customer communication module
SMCS Code: 4490 (CCM). The ROM provides nine additional outputs
for the customer. The ROM outputs are individually
controlled by a serial data link from the GSC+. The
outputs may drive the optional relay board, or the
outpuls can be directly connected to horns, lamps,
or other devices. The relay board contains nine
- relays. Each of the relays have one set of Normally
- I I I I I I I I I I I I
Opened contacts and one set of Normally Closed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 contacts that are used for customers.
0 I I 0 Output Test
If an output test signal is received by the ROM, then

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 the ROM activates all outputs for ten seconds. The
I I I I I I I I I I I I i I outputs remain active until the output test signal is
deactivated. To perform an output test, connect
terminal 5 of the ROM to terminal 7 of the ROM
with a jumper.
2~ 1/ 12
lUlU
12
When the data link malfunctions, R1 output (terminal
2 of ROM) will FLASH at a rate of 0.5 Hz. Relays R2
:0 a: through R9 will maintain the present state or relays
"G
14
15 R9
FIO
11
R2 through R9 will default to the OFF position.
16 :0 a: Specifications
17Qf9
18 R8 10 "--J
19 :0 a: • The maximum distance between the ROM and
the GSC+ is 305 m (1000 It).
20~f8
21 R7 9 'U
22 :0 a: • The operating voltage range is from 15 to 45
23G
24 R6
F7
8 "--J OCv. The ROM is designed to operate when the
ROM is powered by 24 OCV or when the ROM
25 :0 a: is powered by 32 OCv.
26QF6
27 R5 7
28 :0 a: • The ROM is capable of operating with an earth
29[::~~rs
30 R4 6 ground or without an earth ground.
31 :0 a: • The ROM must share a common ground with the
@ 32[~r4
33 RJ 5 ~
GSC+ and the relay board.
34 :0 a:
35[~~r3
36 R2 " ~
• The terminals that are on the ROM are push on
37D a: blade type connectors (6.4 mm (.25 inch».
38QF2
39 Rl .:5 ~
• The terminals on the relay board are 6-32 screw
4 ©==a: 2 terminals.
~I F1, '='
"--J
II • The driver outputs of the ROM are intended
JlJnL to power incandescent lamps. Also, the driver
lUustration 88 g00327305 outputs of the ROM are intended to power relay
loads. The driver outputs sink up to 600 mA at 15
(1) Relay driver module
(2) Relay board (optional) DCV to 45 DCV. The driver outputs are protected
against short circuits to "8+".
• The relay outputs of the relay board are protected

by 1 amp fuses. The contacts are flashed with
silver. The contact is rated as 1 Amp at 28 OCv.
The relay coils draw 20 mA at 24 OCv.
114
Note: The GSC+ diagnoses a fault in the ROM • High coolant temperature alarm
circuit. See Testing and Adjusting, "CID 475 Relay
Driver Module" for more information. The CID 475 • Low oil pressure alarm
procedure contains schematics for relay driver
module installation purposes. • Low coolant temperature alarm
• Low oil pressure shutdown

101103589
Customer Interface Module • High coolant temperature shutdown
SMCS Code: 4490 • Overcrank
• Overspeed
• Diagnostic fault (GSC+)
• The engine control switch (ECS) is NOT
Application Guidelines
Lamp Test
When a lamp test signal is received, the
activates all outputs for 10 seconds. The
deactivates the outputs early if the lamp tE
Illustration 89 g00328626 is deactivated. Two lamp test signals are r
Customer Interface Module (elM)
When either of the following conditions arE
the lamp test of the CIM is activated.
(1) Relay Board
(2) Electronic Control
• Terminal 5 is connected to terminal 7 of ,
control (2).
See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring
Diagrams" for more information about the Customer
, • The GSC+ lamp test signal is received (
Interface Module (CIM).
data link.
The CIM provides an interface between the GSC+
Note: When terminal 6 is connected to ten
and the switchgear. Separate relay contacts are
of the electronic control (2), the CIM ignor
the interface that is between the GSC+ and the
GSC+ lamp test signal.
switchgear. The two major components of CIM are
the relay board (1) and the electronic control (2).
The electronic control (2) and the alarm annunciator Outputs
connect to the same serial data link. The operation
of the CIM is similar to the operation of the alarm • The relays that are on the relay board <-
annunciator. The information on the data link is protected by fuses. The contacts are fla~
decoded into discrete outputs. The outputs then silver. The contacts are rated at 1 amp ~
drive the relays that are located on the relay board The relays draw 20 mA at 24 DCV.
(1). The relay contacts can be used to sound a horn.
The relay contacts can be used to flash a lamp or • The outputs that are from the driver of t
the relay contacts can be used to trigger another electronic control (2) are intended to dri'
procedure. Once an output is activated, the output incandescent lamps or the driver output
remains energized until the faults that initiated the intended to drive the relay loads. The dI
alarm are cleared. All electronic control outputs outputs will consume a maximurn of 600 I
cycle at 0.5 Hz if a malfunction in the serial data link the voltage is 15 DCV to 45 DCV.
occurs. This includes the relays as well. The CIM is
designed for operation when the CIM is powered Specifications
by a battery system that supplies 24 DCV. The CIM
is also designed for operation when the CIM is • For installation of the CIM, the maximum
powered by a battery system that supplies 32 DCV. that is between the electronic control (2)
GSC+ is 305 m (1000 ft).
The available serial data link information is listed
below.
115
• The operating voltage range is from 15 DCV to 45 Tile CCM can remotely control the following
DCV. 24 DCV is the nominal voltage. functions when the GSC+ is in the normal mode
with the engine control switch (ECS) in the AUTO
• The CIM is capable of operating with earth position.
ground or operating without earth ground.
• Start the engine.
• The terminals that are located on the electronic
control are blade type connectors (push on) • Stop the engine if the remote start/stop contact
6.4 mm (0.25 inch). is not closed.
• Connections that may be used by the customers • Activate or deactivate the electronic governor
at the relay board (1) are 6-32 screw terminals. relay (EGR), provided that the low oil pressure
shutdown setpoint has been exceeded.
i01355558
• Activate the GFR or deactivate the GFR, provided
System Communication that the GSC+ has not detected a fault. In this
case, the GSC+ will already have activated the
Module (Customer) GFR.
SMCS Code: 1926 • Remotely abort the cooldown.
• Remotely control the spare output.

I Il@
~
+B -8 + - CAT DAiA LINK
• Remotely control the programmable spare relay.
~ RS-1J2C PQRT
Note: The CCM can only control the spare output
in an active low type of configuration. See System
Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming OP6"
I~·:::::·~::::::~~I for more information.
@ The addition of a specified modem allows two-way

@
'----'
, , communication when the generator set and the host
REAR VIEW. computer are sepa(ated. by great distances.
For more information regarding the CCM, see the

Operations And Maintenance Manual, SEBU6874,
~ CJJERPILLAR 0
\@ "Customer Communication Module (CCM) for Diesel
Engines". This manual contains information for the
STATUS AND
EMCP II, EMCP 11+ and EMCP Ii+P.
[ HULT COOES ~
B.B.B.
CAT DATA LINK Using the CCM in Paralleling
RS-232C TRAt/SUIT
RS-232C RECEIVE Applications
COMMUNICA lION MODULE
@\ @ The CCM can be used to remotely parallel
'---1 '---1 generators that are equipped with the EMCP II+P.
FRONT VIEW
The connections for the CCM are on contact
21 and contact 22. If the bus is dead when the
900329183
lIIuslration 90 first generator is started, the generator must
Customer Communication Module (CeM) have setpoint P310 (Dead Bus Closure) enabled.
A separate command is required to start each
The customer communication module (CCM) additional generator. Multiple generators can be
provides a communication link between the GSC+ started and synchronized in a specific sequence
and the host computer of the customer. The CCM by setting the programmable timer (setpoint P312).
converts data from the standard RS-232C format For automatic paralleling, the engine control switch
to the CAT Data Link format. The CCM can also must be in the AUTO pOSition. The parallel mode
convert data from the CAT Data Link format to the switch must be in the AUTO position. After using the
standard RS-232C format. An RS-232C cable is CCM to command an engine to start, the generator
available at most Electronics Stores. Caterpillar's will automatically synchronize.
146 - 8488 RS-232C Cable is a suitable cable. The
CCM allows an operator to remotely control the
same information that is available on the GSC+
display at the host computer.
116
Troubleshooting Section
Troubleshooting Section A WARNING

When the engine-generator, or any ,
which the engine-generator is synchron
Introduction operating, voltages up to 600V are pres
control panel.
101366703
Do not short these terminal with line '
General Information ground with any part of the body or an·
tive material. Loss of life or injury co
SMCS Code: 4490 from electrical shock or injury from m(
al.
Personal injury or death can result from high volt-

age. Do not connect generator to a utility elec
tribution system unless it is isolated frot
When power generation equipment must be in op-
tem. Electrical feedback into the distribl
eration to make tests and/or adjustments, high
tem can occur and could cause persona
voltage and current are present.
death.
Improper test equipment can fail and present a
Open and secure main distribution syste
high voltage shock hazard to its user.
or if the connection is permanent, inst.
ble throw transfer switch to prevent elect,
Make sure the testing equipment is designed for
back. Some generators are specifically
and correctly operated for high voltage and cur-
by a utility to run in parallel with the di
rent tests being made.
system and isolation may not be require
check with your utility as to the applicabl
When servicing or repairing electric power gener-
stances.
ation equipment:
• Make sure the unit is off-line (disconnected

from utility and/or other generators power
service) , and either locked out or tagged DO Service Tools
NOT OPERATE.
SMCS Code: 0785
• Remove all fuses.
Table 18
• Make sure the generator engine is stopped.
Tools Needed
• Make sure all batteries are disconnected. Part Description
Number
• Make sure all capacitors are discharged.
4C-3406 Connector Kit
Failure to do so could result in personal injury or 4 mm Hex Wrench for
death. Make sure residual voltage in the rotor, sta- fastener on GSC+ connector
tor and the generator is discharged.
6V-7070 Digital Multimeter
9U-7330 Multimeter (Optional) for
frequency and duty cycle
measurements
146-4080 Digital Multimeter (RS-232)
7X-1710 Cable Probes
117
101366706
Fault Identification
SMCS Code: 4490-035
Table 19
Fault Identification
Indicator Fault Code on upper DIAG Indicator
left side of GSC+ display Fault Type See Topic
Fault Alarm CID FMlll) Flashing Active Alarm Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Codes
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4(1) Absent Active Alarm Diagnostic System
Procedures, "SP
Fault Code"
AL1 thru AL15(1) Absent Active Alarm Diagnostic System
Procedures, "AL
Fault Code"
Fault Shutdown CID FMI Flashing Active Shutdown Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Codes
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4 Absent Active Shutdown Diagnostic System
Procedures, "S P
Fault Code"
AL5 thru AL 15(1) Absent Active Alarm Diagnostic System
Procedures, "AL
Fault Code"
Dedicated Shutdown:
Flashing Absent Absent Active Alarm Troubleshooting
. Dedicated Shutdown
On Continuously Absent Absellt Active Shutdown Indicators
..
CID FMII2) On Continuously Inactive Alarm Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Codes
CID FMI~) On Continuously Inactive Shutdown Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Codes
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4 Absent Inactive Shutdown Diagnostic System
Procedures, "SP
None
Fault Code"
-
AL5 through AL 15(1) Absent Inactive Alarm Diagnostic System
Procedures, "AL
Fault Code"
Absent Absent Undiagnosed Symptom Procedures
Shutdown
(1) Fault code IS shown after alarm codes key IS pressed.
(2) Fault Code is stored in the fault log of the GSC+. To view the fault code, see Systems Operation, UFault Log Viewing OP1" within the
topic Service Mode.
118
5. Go to the second column in the chart. I

fault code that is presently shown on th
display (5).
6. Go to the third column in the chart wh

5 describes the status of "DIAG" indicato
nnn,-, 00·00 0000 7. Read the last two columns in order to f
(1,,(1,,(1,,0 U"U:U .. U U.U.U"U
.,.
,,, type of fault and corresponding topic w
module.
01" &l Oo4>{ll 7

,.""/
O S"utoo"" I"
3
/
",0"
D """ I r--
/' AlU".
• ~
L_
10000 000 1
4
g00614724
Illustration 91
GSC+ Display Area
(1) Dedicated shutdown indicators
(2) Spare fault indicators
(3) Fault shutdown indicator
(4) Fault alarm indicator
(5) Upper display
(6) Lower display
(7) Keypad
(8) DIAG indicator
Faults that are detected and diagnosed by the

GSC+ are shown to service personnel in the display
area of the GSC+. The GSC+ uses dedicated
shutdown indicators (1), fault shutdown indicator
(3), fault alarm indicator (4), "DIAG" indicator
(8), upper display (5) and lower display (6) to
tell service personnel about a fault. Perform the
following procedure in order to identify the fault that
is detected by the GSC+.
Note: The "DIAG" indicator (8) functions when

diagnostic information is available from the GSC+.
1. Make a note of the indicators that are functioning

on the left side of the "GSC+".
2. View the fault code on the upper display (5). If

the fault alarm indicator (4) is FLASHING and
no fault code is present on the upper display
(5), press the alarm codes key in order to view
the fault code.
3. Make a note of whether or not "DIAG" indicator

(8) is FLASHING ON CONTINUOUSLY or
ABSENT.
4. On the fault identification chart, look at the

first column. Locate the fault indicator that is
functioning.
119
Symptom Procedures
SMR
GENERATOR K4
i013654Q7 SET
CONTROL RM-21
(GSC)
Starting Motor Remains SMR
Engaged (for EUI and PEEC B+ " K4
RM-6
Engines) RM-33 RM-18
SMCS Code: 1453-035
SIN: 5KW1-Up 14
[SPB r-::E."s".p8'"
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: 8NW1-Up
SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
System Operation Description:
The starting motor remains engaged after the

engine has started. ,2 ,2
,1 24 24
"
ST ARTING 51 ARTING
SMR MOTOR TO CB2
MOTOR
K4 MAGNETIC (+BAT) MAGNETIC
GENERATOR £ SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
R~21
25 26
SMR
..... f3 K4 ...... . PSI PS2
B+
RIJ':::'33 - . RM-6 R~18 Illustration 93 900680589
Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR) On "EUI" Engines
[SPB ON
ENCLOSURE
C? Test Step 1. CHECK THE SETPOINTS.
----..... ESPB 6' [SPB
14
This test step checks the following setpoints: P011
~ -~
(crank terminate speed), P01? (total cycle crank
4
W ,.-34
time). and P018 (cycle crank time).
"
A. View the setpoints and make a note of setpoints
~ ~ P011, P01? and P018. See Systems Operation,
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0".
" "
I-~ $-~, B. Compare the setpoints with the specified
,,, ,, setpoints of the particular generator set. The
,,,
,
,,
"
-i -
"
,,,
,
,,
default value for P011 is 400 rpm. The default
value for PO 1? is 90 seconds. The default value
for PO 18 is 10 seconds.
,I ' - :2 24 2' :2 _' ,I
Note: Engines that are equipped with prelube

STARTING 51 ARTING
MOTOR TO leB2 MOTOR pumps may require cycle crank times (setpoint
MAGNETIC (+BAT) MAGNETIC P018) of 30 seconds or more.
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
Expected Result:
25 26
§- cP:SIJ The setpoint value that is being viewed should

Illustration 92 g00518564 match the specified setpoint value.
Schemalic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR) On "PEEC" Engines
120
Results: Results:
• OK - The setpoint is correct. Proceed to test • YES - The engine does not crank.
step 2.
Repair: Check the wire On "RM-18" of tl
• NOT OK - The setpoint that is being viewed does module for a short to +battery. Repair t
not agree with the specified setpoint. or replace the harness. If a short is not
replace the relay module. See Testing
Repair: Reprogram setpoints P011, P01? and Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
P018. See Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OP5-0". STOP.
STOP. • NO - The engine continues to crank. P

to test step 4.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE START
FUNCTION OF THE ENGINE. Test Step 4. CHECK THE START
FUNCTION OF THE ENGINE.
The following procedure will require checks to be
made during simulated engine starting. Disable the A. The conditions of the previous step ren
fuel system. fuel system is disabled. The engine is e
A. Disable the fuel shutoft solenoid or the PEEC in B. Stop the engine. Turn the battery discc
order to prevent the engine from starting but not switch to the OFF or shut the engine of
from cranking. To disable the EUI engine ECM, mechanical meanS.
remove the J1-40 pin connector.
C. Remove all wires from TS 1-25 in the gE
B. Prepare to manually stop the engine from housing. For dual starting motors, reme
cranking, if necessary. Turn the battery wires from TS 1-26.
disconnect switch to the OFF pOSition or shut the
engine oft by using mechanical means. D. Turn the ECS to START. Attempt to cral
engine.
C. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the
· START position. Allow the engine to crank. Expected Result:
D. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. The engine should not crank.
Expected Result: Results:
The engine should stop cranking. • OK - The engine does not crank.
Results: Repair: The "SMS" or related wiring has

Troubleshoot the "SMMS" and the relate,
• OK - The engine does not crank. Proceed to test See the Generator Set Wiring Diagram il
step 6. And Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Oi,
• NOT OK - The engine continues to crank. STOP.

Proceed to test step 3.
• NOT OK - The engine continues to cra
Test Step 3. CHECK THE START Proceed to test step 5.
A. The conditions of the previous step remain. The FUNCTION OF THE ENGINE.
fuel system is disabled. The engine is cranking.
A. The conditions of the previous step rem
B. While the engine is still cranking, push the fuel system is disabled. The engine is c
emergency stop push button.
B. Stop the engine. Turn the battery disco
Expected Result: switch to OFF or shut the engine oft by
mechanical means.
The engine should stop cranking.
121
C. Disconnect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid iOt369S28

of the starting motor.
Starting Motor Remains
D. Turn the ECS to START and attempt to crank the Engaged (for MU13412C, 3508,
engine.
3512,3516 Engines)
Expected Result:
SMCS Code: 1453-035
The engine should not crank.
SIN: BNS1-Up
Results: SIN: 9ES1-Up
• OK - The engine does not crank. SIN: 5PW1-Up
Repair: On "PEEC" engines, wire 052-125 or SIN: 6WW1-Up

125-152 in the engine harness is shorted to SIN: BTW1-Up
the battery. On "EUI" engines, wire 304-WH
or 314-PU in the engine harness is shorted to SIN: 4BZ1-Up
the battery. Troubleshoot the wiring. See the
Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And System Operation Description:
Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
The starting motor remains engaged after the
STOP. engine has started .
• NOT OK - The engine continues to crank.

SMR
Repair: The starting motor has failed. Troubleshoot GENERATOR K,/ ~

SET v
the starting motor. Refer to the Starting Motor CONTROL
(GSC)
" RM-21
and/or Engine Service Manuals.
F4 SMR
K4
~
STOP. B+
~ r--
RM~3 RM-5 RM-1B
Test Step 6. CHECK THE STARTING

MOTOR CYCLING. B-
A. The luel delivery is disabled. 2 14

ESPE
B. Turn the ECS to the START position.
Expected Result:
I
'0/ , .,
~ ~
.," !.ll
The starting motor should cycle on and olf
according to setpoint P018 (cycle crank time).
~
Results: " "
,I-~ ~-I,
,,
• OK - If the starting motor cycles correctly, the
,,,
I :3 ,3
problem is not present. STOP.

,,,
, 1--
,,
,,,
,
• NOT OK -If the starting motor remains engaged, ,1 ..!.-- :2 24 24 :2 _I
the starting motor has failed. "
51 ARTING ST ARTING
Repair: Troubleshoot the starting motor. Refer to MOTOR TO ICB2 MOTOR
MAGNETIC (+BAT) MAGNETIC
the Starting Motor and/or Engine Service Manuals. SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
2.
STOP. 25
@D ~5'D
g00722411
Illustration 94
Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR)
122
Test Step 1. CHECK THE SETPOINTS. Results:
This test step checks the following setpoints: POll • OK - The engine does not crank. Proce
(crank terminate speed), POl? (total cycle crank step 6.
time), and P018 (cycle crank time).
• NOT OK - The engine continues to cra
A. View the setpoints and make a note of setpoints Proceed to test step 3.
POll, P017 and P018. See Systems Operation,
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". Test Step 3. CHECK THE START
B. Compare the setpoints with the specified
setpoints of the particular generator set. The A. The conditions of the previous step relT
default value for PO 11 is 400 rpm. The default fuel system is disabled. The engine is c
value for POl? is 90 seconds. The default value
for P018 is 10 seconds. B. While the engine is still cranking, push
emergency stop push button.
Expected Result:
Expected Result:
The setpoint value that is being viewed should
match the specified set point value. The engine should stop cranking.
Results: Results:
• OK - The setpoint is correct. Proceed to test • YES - The engine does not crank .
step 2.
Repair: Check the wire on "RM-18" of th
• NOT OK - The setpoint that is being viewed does module for a short to +battery. Repair th
not agree with the specified setpoint. or replace the harness. If a short is not
replace the relay module. See Testing I'
Repair: Reprogram setpoints POll, POll and Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
P018. See Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OP5-0". STOP.
..
STOP. • NO - The engine continues to crank. Pr(
to test step 4.
FUNCTION OF THE ENGINE. Test Step 4. CHECK THE START
The following procedure will require checks to be
made during simulated engine starting. Disable the A. The conditions of the previous step rem'
fuel system. fuel system is disabled. The engine is CI
A. Disable the fuel shutoff solenoid or the governor B. Stop the engine. Turn the battery discor
in order to prevent the engine from starting but switch to the OFF or shut the engine off
not from cranking. mechanical means.
B. Prepare to manually stop the engine from C. Remove all wires from the output termin
cranking, if necessary. Turn the battery starting motor magnetic switch (SM MS)
disconnect switch to the OFF position or shut the junction box.
engine off by using mechanical means.
D. Turn the ECS to START. Attempt to cranl
C. Turn the engine control switcll (ECS) to the engine.
START position. Allow the engine to crank.
Expected Result:
D. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
The engine should not crank.
Expected Result:
Results:
The engine should stop cranking.
• OK - The engine does not crank.
123
Repair: The "SMS" or related wiring has failed. Results:

Troubleshoot the "SMMS" and the related wiring.
See the Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing • OK - If the starting motor cycles correctly, the
And Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams". problem is not present. STOP.
STOP. • NOT OK - If the starting motor remains engaged,

the starting motor has failed .
Proceed to test step 5. Repair: Troubleshoot the starting motor. Refer to
the Starting Motor and/or Engine Service Manuals.
FUNCTION OF THE ENGINE. STOP.
4. The conditions of the previous step remain. The

!01372075
fuel system is disabled. The engine is cranking.
B. Stop the engine. Turn the battery disconnect

Engine Does Not Shutdown
switch to OFF or shut the engine off by using (for EUI Engines)
mechanical means.
SMCS Code: 4490-035
C. Disconn'ect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid
of the starting motor. SIN: 5KW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
D. Turn the ECS to START and attempt to crank the
engine. SIN: BNW1-Up
Expected Result: SIN: BAZ1-Up
The engine should not crank. System Operation Description:
Results: The engine does not shut down when a shutdown

fault occurs .
• OK - The engine does not crank.
Repair: The wire to the pinion solenoid in

the engine harness is shorted to the battery. GENERATOR EeM
SET
Troubleshoot the wiring. See the Generator CONTROL (GSC) DIC SEN RET
Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting,
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
S/R/S 1
STOP.
S/RIS 2
Repair: The starting motor has failed. Troubleshoot

the starting motor. Refer to the Starting Motor
and/or Engine Service Manuals. g00681895
Illustration 95
STOP. System Schematic For Electronic Control Relay
Test Stell 6. CHECK THE STARTING

MOTOR CYCLING.
A. The fuel delivery is disabled.
B. Turn the ECS to the START position.
Expected Result:
The starting motor should cycle on and off

according to setpoint PO 1B (cycle crank time).
124
w(£1
GENERATOR )--
SET
CONTROL
(GSC) wG
)-
RM-2
U:I<~R'_+-_.--f-o"'-
ASOR
gR 10
rr
~_L....:::L..
1 1-
3
RM-l
B- +BAT sw 9 -t- I
_1_ I
I-
B
GENERATOR
SET L--f<r- I I
CONTROL
02.--+- I
I ---L
iX
,
ASOR2
G5C-39
OFF/RESET 2 -I
,,, G$C-32 ~~~__--f~5~-+-
, COOlOOWN/STOP I
GSC-40 ;) --1- EN
CC
8-: B-
"--------- AUTO S'tl
GSC-33 4 ----L..- (E
Illustration 96 g00681904 START
rX
System Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay (ASR) REMOTE
START
CONTAC'
I@J]
RM-27 ~~o-____~'~O'--+-
W
_____
FLYBACKV-
~~A¥6'~---I B-1-+-------------------
L-_ _ _~____12
Illustration 97
System Schematic For Engine Control 8wilch (ECS)
Note: It is critical that GSC+ setpoint P023

for the engine application. Ensure that setp
is programmed correctly for the engine ap
before continuing with this procedure.
There are several possible causes when a 1

fault occurs and an engine does not shut (
• Operator Error: The operating condition

generator may not be understood by the
Ensure that the condition is one that shm
an engine shutdown.
125
• Programming Error - Fault Is Overridden Or • NO - The GSC+ does NOT show a diagnostic
Disabled: It is possible to program the GSC+ code on the upper display. Proceed to Test Step
in order to override certain shutdown faults. An 2.
overridden shutdown fault will be treated as an
alarm fault. The YELLOW fault alarm indicator Test Step 2. CHECK THE YELLOW FAULT
will be FLASHING instead of the RED fault ALARM INDICATOR
shutdown indicator. If the GSC+ is programmed
in order to disable a particular fault, there will A. Check the display of the GSC+ for the yellow
not be any fault indicators or codes shown on fault alarm indicator.
the GSC+. In these cases, it is a good idea to
check any setpoints related to that fault. For Expected Result:
example, if a genset is not shutting down when an
overvoltage fault occurs, make sure setpoint P 104 The yellow fault alarm indicator is ON
(Overvoltage shutdown enable) is programmed CONTINUOUSLY.
correctly. It is also possible to program the engine
ECM to override or ignore certain shutdown Results:
faults. See Troubleshooting, SENR 1003, "35008
EPG Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, • YES - The yellow fault alarm indicator is
"3406E EPG Engines" for more information on ON CONTINUOUSLY. The GSC+ has been
prograrT)ming the engine ECM. programmed to override the normal shutdown
response. The setpoints have been modified and
• Programming Error - Setpoints Incorrect For the GSC+ treats the condition as an alarm fault.
Application Or Customer Needs: It is possible The engine will continue to run.
to program the GSC+ setpoints to a value that
does not allow the situation to be recognized Repair: In order to view the setpoints, seeSystems
by the GSC+ as a shutdown condition. In Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing
this case, check the appropriate setpoints for OP2-0". In order to reprogram the setpoints,
correct values. For example, if the genset is not see Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator
shutting down when a high coolant temperature Programming OP5-0".
condition occurs, make sure setpoint P015 (High
Water Temperature Shutdown) is correct for the STOP.
application.
• NO - The yellow fault alarm indicator is not .
• Faulty Component: Some examples of faulty illuminated at all. Proceed to Test Step 3.
components that could prevent the GSC+ from
shutting down the engine are: engine ECM, Test Step 3. CHECK FOR THE RED FAULT
GSC+, and a broken or shorted harness wire .. In SHUTDOWN INDICATOR
this case, the GSC+ or engine ECM will be issuing
a command to shut down the engine due to a A. Check the display area of the GSC+ for the red
diagnostic code, but the engine remains running. fault shutdown indicator.
Test Step 1. CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC Expected Result:

CODES
The red fault shutdown should be FLASHING.
A. Check the GSC+ for a diagnostic code on the
upper display. Results:
Expected Result: • YES - The red fault shutdown indicator is

FLASHING and the engine remains running.
The GSC+ should show a diagnostic code on the Proceed to Test Step 4.
upper display.
• NO - All fault indicators are. OFF A problem that
Results: is occurring should cause the GSC plus to shut
down the engine. It is possible to program the
• YES - The GSC+ shows a diagnostic code on GSC+ setpoints to a value that does not allow
the upper display. the situation to be recognized by the GSC+ as
a shutdown condition.
Repair: See the Testing and Adjusting section of
this book for the diagnostic code that is displayed
on the GSC+.
STOP.
126
Repair: Check the appropriate setpoints for correct Repair: The GSC+ Relay Module may h,
values. In order to view the setpoints, see System failed. It is unlikely that the GSC+ Relay
Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing has failed. Exit this procedure and perfDI
OP2-0". In order to reprogram the setpoints, entire procedure again. If the problem re
see System Operation, "Engine/Generator replace the GSC+ Relay Module. See Te
Programming OP5-0". And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
Module) - Replace".
STOP.
STOP.
Test Step 4. CHECK K1 INDICATOR ON
GSC+ orSPLAY • NOT OK - The engine runs and the eng
start. Proceed to Test Step 6.
A. The red fault shutdown indicator is FLASHING
and the engine remains running. Test Step 6. CHECK THE SYSTEM
USING THE ESPB.
B. Check the upper display of the GSC+.
The engine remains running and the red f,
Expected Result: shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
The K 1 symbol is showing on the GSC+ upper A. Push the emergency stop push button (f
display.
Expected Result:
Results:
The engine should shut down .
• YES - The K1 symbol is showing on the GSC+
upper display. The red fault shutdown indicator is Results:
FLASHING and the engine remains running. The
GSC+ may have failed. • OK - The engine does shutdown. ProceE
Test Step 7
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure • NOT OK - The engine does NOT shut de
and perform this entire procedure again. If
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See Repair: The engine ECM made have faile, ,
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control to Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B E
(Generator Set)-Replace" Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227,
EPG Engines".
STOP.
STOP.
• NO - The K1 symbol is not showing at calion the
GSC+ upper display. Proceed to Test Step 5. Test Step 7. CHECK THE WIRING
BETWEEN THE ENGINE ECM AND
Test Step 5. CHECK THE GSC+ RELAY GSC+.
MODULE.
The engine remains running and the red fa
The engine remains running and the red fault shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
A. Check the wiring between RM-13 of the I
A. In the generator housing, remove BOTH of the and JI-8 and JI-14 of the engine ECM. {
wires from RM-13 on the GSC+. for shorts, open connections, or damagel
Expected Result: Expected Result:
The engine should shut down.
II
The wiring has a sllort, open connection, o{
damaged.
Results:
Results:
• OK - The engine shuts down.
• OK - The wiring is damaged.
127
Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the wiring. See

Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And
Verify that the repair corrects the problem.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The wiring is not damaged at all. The

engine ECM may have failed.
GENERATOR
SET
Repair: The engine ECM made have failed. Refer CONTROL
(GSC)
to Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B EPG
Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, "3406E
. EPG Engines". , I ESPB 10 13
STOP.
12 11 ~I.:A
101364935
Engine Does Not Shutdown '-_.,.<:>'-""_--, SLAVE RELA Y

(for MUI 3306B, 3406C Engines)
SMCS Code: 4490-035 ,( oP------------<~ \
:10
SIN: 8NS1-Up
SIN: 9ES1-Up
~
SIN: LRW1-Up rE-L-EC-T-R-O-NiI-C-'-O--,~
GOVERNOR -
SIN: LRX1-Up 8290
\o+_ _ _~3~_ _ _-+
+
Systell] Operation Description: . ,~ 3
The engine does not shut down when a shutdown

fault occurs. +BA T--[LF1!i:41--::::l
29
ONE FUEL :30 .86

CONTROL
RELAY
\
__________ ~
'=."-<;--.
:87 "---::,8-=-5--¢--+---,
'8
TWO FUEL
CONTROL '3~ ~='~86~_~
RELAY
----------~
:87
-C=--<r----+
:85
27
g00531591
Illustration 98
Fuel Control Relay For ETR Systems
128
• Programming Error - Fault Is Overridden

Disabled: It is possible to program the GS
in order to override certain shutdown faults
overridden shutdown fault will be treated a:
alarm fault. The YELLOW fault alarm indica
will be FLASHING instead of the RED faull
GENERATOR
SET " shutdown indicator. If the GSC+ is prograrr
CONTROL
,- in order to disable a particular fault, there'
'-..._-----, (GSC)
not be any fault indicators or codes shown
the GSC+. In these cases, it is a good ide.
2
check any setpoints related to that fault. F(
example, if a genset is not shutting down wi
2
overvoltage fault occurs, make sure setpoin
(Overvoltage shutdown enable) is programr
correctly. It is also possible to program the E
I SOLENOIO f- ECM to override or ignore certain shutdowl
faults. See Troubleshooting, SENR 1003, "35
EPG Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR22:
"3406E EPG Engines" for more information
programming the engine ECM .
r;; -W---;; ---------: • Programming Error - Selpoints Incorrect I

, ,, Application Or Customer Needs: It is pos,
AIR SHUTOFF I IF REQUIRED, I to program the GSC+ setpoints to a value t
(FLAP) VALVE : CONNECT TO SPARE: does not allow the situation to be recognizE
TERMINAL BOX I FAULT CHANNEL I
~-------------------~ by the GSC+ as a shutdown condition. In

this case, check the appropriate setpoints I
correct values. For example, if the genset i,
shutting down when a high coolant temperE
System Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay condition occurs, make sure setpoint P015 I
Water Temperature Shutdown) is correct for
Note: It is critical that GSC+ setpoint P023 is correct application.
for the engine application. Ensure that set[loint P023
is programmed correctly for the engine application .; Faulty Component: So~e examples of faul
before continuing with this procedure. components that could prevent the GSC+ fl
shutting down the engine are: GSC+ and a
There are several possible causes when a shutdown broken or shorted harness wire .. In this caSE
fault occurs and an engine does not shut down: GSC+ will be issuing a command to shut d(
the engine due to a diagnostic code, but tt
• Operator Error: The operating conditions of the engine remains running .
generator may not be understood by the operator.
Ensure that the condition is one that should cause Test Step 1. CHECK FOR DIAGNOST
an engine shutdown. CODES
A. Check the GSC+ for a diagnostic code on
upper display.
Expected Result:
The GSC+ should show a diagnostic code on

upper display.
Results:
• YES - The GSC+ shows a diagnostic code

the upper display.
129
Repair: See the Testing and Adjusting section of • NO - All fault indicators are OFF. A problem
this book for the diagnostic code that is displayed that is occurring should cause the GSC+ to shut
on the GSC+. down the engine. It is possible to program the
GSC+ setpoints to a value that does not allow
STOP. the situation to be recognized by the GSC+ as
a shutdown condition.
, NO - The GSC+ does NOT show a diagnostic
code on the upper display. Proceed to Test Step Repair: Check the appropriate setpoints for correct
2. values. In order to view the setpoints, see System
Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing
iest Step 2. CHECK THE YELLOW FAULT OP2-0". In order to reprogram the setpoints,
~LARM INDICATOR see System Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OPS-O"
I. Gheck the display area of the GSC+ for the
yellow fault alarm indicator. STOP.
:xpected Result: Test Step 4. CHECK THE SYSTEM BY

USING THE ESPB.
he yellow fault alarm indicator should be
luminated CONTINUOUSLY. The engine remains running and the red fault
shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
lesults:
A. Push the emergency stop push button (ESPB).
YES - The yellow fault alarm indicator is
illuminated CONTINUOUSLY. Expected Result:
Repair: The GSC+ has been programmed to The engine should shut down.
override the normal shutdown response and
the GSC+ treats the condition as an alarm Results:
fault. The engine will continue to run. In order
to view the setpoints, see System Operation, • OK - The engine does shutdown. The relay
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". In module has failed.
order to reprogram the setpoints, see System
Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing
OPS-O". And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace"
STOP. STOP.
NO - The yellow fault alarm indicator is not • NOT OK - The engine does NOT shut down.
illuminated at all. Proceed to Test Step 3. Proceed to Test Step S.
'est Step 3. CHECK FOR RED FAULT Test Step 5. CHECK FOR FUEL CONTROL
iHUTDOWN INDICATOR. SOLENOID AND ENGINE PROBLEMS .
.. Check the display area of the GSC+ for a red The engine remains running and the red fault
fault shutdown indicator. shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
xpected Result: A. Remove F14 in the Junction Box.
he red fault shutdown indicator should be Expected Result:

LASHING.
The engine should shut down.
esults:
Results:
YES - The red fault shutdown indicator is
FLASHING and the engine remains running. • YES - The engine shuts down. Therefore. the fuel
Proceed to Test Step 4. control solenoid (FCS) has failed.
Repair: Replace the fuel control solenoid. Verify

that the repair corrects the problem.
STOP.
130
• NOT OK - The engine continues to run and the

red fault shutdown indicator is FLASHING. There
is a problem with the engine. FeR
K7
Repair: Refer to the appropriate engine service 8 ~

RM-31
E3 ~
RIA-4
e
RM-10
F4
manual in order to troubleshoot the engine.
RM-12 RM-39
STOP. "
SWITCHED ~ E3
flO
~
GENERATOR
i01372059 SET
CONTROL
(eSc)
Engine Does Not Shutdown
(for MUI 3412C, 3508,3512, 2 ESPB
3516 Engines)
12 11
SMCS Code: 4490-035
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up SLAVE RELAY
SIN: BTWt-Up
2
The engine does not shut down when a shutdown

fault occurs. SPEED
CONTROL
2 20--
ENGINE 10
ELECTRONIC
CONTROL
MODULE
+ 3
2
~)---{_3
+BA T----J.[lD
29 C m V
ONE
CONTROL
RELAY
FUEL
:30 :86
=n
----------~
:87 :85
26
TWO fUEL :30

CONTROL :86
RELAY \
----------~
:87 :85
!
I
L __
INCLUDED
ON 3400
r: 2
GENSETS
ONLY
Illustration 100
Fuel Control Relay For ETR Systems
131
• Programming Error - Fault Is Overridden Or

Disabled: It is possible to program the GSC+
ASR in order to override certain shutdown faults. An
'6
8 ~ E3 " ~
./ .... overridden shutdown fault will be treated as an
RM-J2 RM-5 R~19 alarm fault. The YELLOW fault alarm indicator will
37 be FLASHING instead of the RED fault shutdown
GENERATOR indicator. If the GSC+ is programmed in order to
SET
CONTROL disable a particular fault, there will not be any fault
(esc) B-
indicators or codes shown on the GSC+. In these
cases, it is a good idea to check any setpoints
2 related to that fault. For example, if a generator
is not shutting down when an overvoltage fault
- 2 37 occurs, make sure setpoint P104(Overvoltage
shutdown enable) is programmed correctly.
I SOLENOlD I- • Programming Error - Setpoints Incorrect For

Application Or Customer Needs: It is possible
to program the GSC+ setpoints to a value that
does not allow the situation to be recognized
by the GSC+ as a shutdown condition. In this
case, check the appropriate setpoints for correct
values. For example, if the generator is not
shutting down when a high coolant temperature
condition occurs, make sure setpoint P015 (High
AIR SHUTOFF
(FLAP) VAL VE
Water Temperature Shutdown) is correct for the
TERMINAL BOX application.
E14168
• Faulty Component: Some examples of faulty
g00445005
lllustration 101 components that could prevent the GSC+ from
System Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay (ASR) shutting down the engine are: GSC+ and a
broken or shorted harness wire .. In this case, the
Note: It is extremely important that GSC+ setpoint GSC+ will be issuing a command to shut down
P023 is correcl for the engine application. Make the engine due to a diagnostic code, but the
certain setpoint P023 is programmed correctly for engine remains running.
the engine application before continuing with this
procedure. Test Step 1. CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC
CODES
Note: It is extremely important that GSC+ setpoinl
P001 is correct for the engine. All generator sets A. Check the GSC+ for a diagnostic code on the
packaged in Larne, Ireland covered by this manual upper display.
must ALWAYS have this setpoint programmed to
o (ETR fuel solenoid) for both fuel solenoid types Expected Result:
(ETR or ETS).
The GSC+ should show a diagnostic code on the
There are several possible causes why an engine is upper display.
not shutting down when a shutdown fault occurs.
Results:
• Operator Error: The operating conditions of the
generator may not be understood by the operator. • YES - The GSC+ shows a diagnostic code on
Ensure that the condition is one that should cause the upper display.
an engine shutdown.
Repair: See the Testing and Adjusting section of
this book for the diagnostic code that is displayed
on the GSC+.
STOP.
• NO - The GSC+ does NOT show a diagnostic

code on the upper display. Proceed to Test Step
2.
t32
Test Step 2. CHECK THE YELLOW FAULT Repair: Check the appropriate setpoir
ALARM INDICATOR correct values. In order to view the se
see Systems Operation, "Engine/GenE
A. Check the display area of the GSC+ for the Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". In order to rE
yellow fault alarm indicator. the setpoints, see Systems Operation
"Engine/Generator Programming OPS-I
Expected Result:
STOP.
Tile yellow fault alarm indicator should be
illuminated CONTINUOUSLY. Test Step 4. CHECK THE SYSTE
USING THE ESPB.
Results:
The engine remains running and the faul
• YES - The yellow fault alarm indicator is indicator is FLASHING .
illuminated CONTINUOUSLY.
A, Push the emergency stop push buttor
Repair: The GSC+ has been programmed to
override the normal shutdown response and Expected Result:
the GSC+ treats the condition as an alarm
fault. The engine will continue to run. In order The engine should shut down .
. to view the setpoints, see System Operation,
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". In Results:
order to reprogram the setpoints, see System
Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming • OK - The engine does shutdown. ThE
OPS-O". module is faulty.
STOP. Repair: Replace the GSC+ relay modL

Testing and Adjusting, "Relay Module·
• NO - The yellow fault alarm indicator is not Verify that the repair corrects the probl
illuminated at all. Proceed to Test Step 3.
STOP.
Test Step 3. CHECK FOR RED FAULT
SHUTDOWNJNDICATOR. • NOT OK - The engine does NOT shul
Proceed to Test Step S.
A, Check the display area of the GSC+ for the red
fault shutdown indicator. Test Step 5. CHECK GSC+ SETP
P001 (FUEL SOLENOID TYPE)
Expected Result:
The engine remains running after pushin[
The red fault shutdown indicator should be and the red fault shutdown indicator is fI,
FLASHING.
A. Check setpoint POOt (Fuel Solenoid 1
Results: In order to view the setpoints, see Sy
Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoinl
• YES - The red fault shutdown indicator is OP2-0" .
FLASHING and the engine remains running.
Proceed to Test Step 4. Expected Result:
• NO - All fault indicators are OFF. A problem Setpoint POOt should be programmed to
that is occurring should cause the GSC+ to shut
down the engine. It is possible to program the Note: All generator sets packaged in Lan
GSC+ setpoints to a value that does not allow that are covered by this manual must al"
the situation to be recognized by the GSC+ as this setpoint programmed to "0" (ETR fue
a shutdown condition. for both fuel solenoid types (ETR or ETS)
Results:
• YES - Setpoint POOt is programmed t

Proceed to Test Step 6
133
• NO - Setpoint POOl is programmed to "1 ". The There are several possible causes why an engine is
setpoint is programmed incorrectly. not shutting down when a shutdown fault occurs:
Repair: Reprogram the setpoint to a value of "0".

In order to reprogram the setpoint, see Systems
Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming
OP5-0". G ~
RM-31
I
F2
I ~
RM-4
,CR
"7
/ ...
RI.;':::"15
STOP.
B+
SWITCHED
...
Rt.4-12 RM79
v
,
1
Test Step 6. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE ~
<10
FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID
,The engine remains running after pushing the ESPB
- B-
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
and the red fault shutdown indicator is FLASHING.
" CR/3
"
13 ~PEECR :85
A. At the fuel control solenoid, measure the voltage. "
.,,I' ,
I} ~r
Expected Result:
,
The voltage measured at the fuel control solenoid
should be approximately the same as the nominal li:~:
SWITCH 2 CONVERTER
(PWM)
battery voltage (+/- 2 volts).
59 13 ,
Results: W
x~
13
• OK - The battery voltage is correct at the FCS.
w "~'r
The FCS has failed or there is a problem with the
engine fuel system. PEEC
~
Repair: Refer to the appropriate engine service
manual. Replace the FCS or repair the fuel
system.
~I
b~
ENGINE
STOP. SHUTDOWN
'''0-
lB5
~'t,
• NOT OK - Battery voltage is not correct at the
- ESDR
FCS. The Emergency Fuel Control Relay (EFCR)
:86
has failed. 13
Repair: Replace the Emergency Fuel Control

Relay (EFCR). Verify that the repair corrects the
problem.
g00519201
Illustration 102
STOP. System Schematic For Unexpected Shutdown
101371569 Note: It is extremely important that GSC+ setpoint

P023 is correct for the engine application. Make
Engine Does Not Shutdown certain setpoint P023 is programmed correctly for
the engine application before continuing with this
(for PEEC Engines) procedure.
SMCS Code: 4490·035 Note: It is extremely important that GSC+ setpoint
SIN: LRY1-Up POOl is correct for the engine. All generator sets
packaged in Lame, Ireland with serial numbers
SIN: 4BZ1-Up (your list of SIN's) must ALWAYS have this setpoint
programmed to 0 (ETA fuel solenoid) for both fuel
System Operation Description: solenoid types (ETA or ETS).
The engine does not shut down when a shutdown There are several possible causes why an engine is
fault occurs. not shutting down when a shutdown fault occurs.
134
• Operator Error: The operating conditions of the • NO - The GSC+ does NOT show a dia
generator may not be understood by the operator. code on the upper display. Proceed to -
Ensure that the condition is one that should cause 2.
an engine shutdown.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE YELLOVI
• Programming Error - Fault Is Overridden Or ALARM INDICATOR
Disabled: It is possible to program the GSC+
in order to override certain shutdown faults. An A. Check the display area of the GSC+ fc
overridden shutdown fault will be treated as an yellow fault alarm indicator.
alarm fault. The YELLOW fault alarm indicator will
be FLASHING instead of the RED fault shutdown Expected Result:
indicator. If the GSC + is programmed in order to
disable a particular fault, there will not be any fault The fault alarm indicator should be iliumir
indicators or codes shown on the GSC+. In these CONTINUOUSLY.
cases, it is a good idea to check any setpoints
related to that fault. For example, if a genset is not Results:
shutting down when an overvoltage fault occurs,
make sure setpoint P104(Overvoltage shutdown • YES - The fault alarm indicator is illuml
enable) is programmed correctly. CONTINUOUSLY.
• Programming Error - Setpoints Incorrect For Repair: The GSC+ has been programm
Application Or Customer Needs: It is possible override the normal shutdown response
to program the GSC+ setpoints to a value that the GSC+ treats the condition as an al;
does not allow the situation to be recognized fault. The engine will continue to run. In
by the GSC+ as a shutdown condition. In to view the setpoints, see System Open
this case, check the appropriate setpoints for "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP;
correct values. For example, if the genset is not order to reprogram the setpoints, see S'
shutting down when a high coolant temperature Operation, "Engine/Generator Programn
condition occurs, make sure setpoint P015 (High OP5-0".
Water Temperature Shutdown) is correct for the
application. STOP.
• Faulty Component: ,Some examples of faulty • NO - The yellow fault alarm indicator is
components that could prevent the GSC+ from illuminated at all. Proceed to Test Step 3
shutting down the engine are: PEEC, GSC+, and
a broken or shorted harness wire .. In this case, Test Step 3. CHECK FOR RED FAI
the GSC+ or PEEC will be issuing a command to SHUTDOWN INDICATOR.
shut down the engine due to a diagnostic code,
but the engine remains running. A. Check the display area of the GSC+ fOI
fault shutdown indicator.
Test Step 1. CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC
CODES Expected Result:
A. Check the GSC+ for a diagnostic code on the The red fault shutdown indicator should b
upper display. FLASHING.
The GSC+ should show a diagnostic code on the • YES - The red fault shutdown indicator
upper display. FLASHING and the engine remains runr
Proceed to Test Step 4.
Results:
• NO - All fault indicators are OFF. A prol
• YES - The GSC+ shows a diagnostic code on that is occurring should cause the GSC+
the upper display. down the engine. It is possible to progr2
GSC+ setpoints to a value that does not
Repair: See the Testing and Adjusting section of the situation to be recognized by the GS
this book for the diagnostic code that is displayed a shutdown condition.
on the GSC+.
STOP.
135
Repair: Check the appropriate setpoints for correct • For engines with 8290 governor, the engine runs
values. In order to view the setpoints, see System at idle speed. The emergency stop push button
Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing (ESPB) will shut down the engine.
OP2-0". In order to reprogram the setpoints,
see System Operation, "Engine/Generator • For engines with a mechanical governor, the
Programming OP5-0" engine will shut down.
STOP. RESET THE GSC+

Test Step 4. CHECK THE SYSTEM BY A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. If the GSC+
USING THE ESPB. does not power down, remove the jumper that
connects terminals 6 and 10 on the ECS.
The engine remains running and the red fault
s.hutdown indicator is FLASHING. B. Turn the ECS to STOP.
A. Push the emergency stop push button (ESPB). Expected Result:
Expected Result: The GSC+ should power up with a normal display

and the GSC+ should respond to the ECS.
The engine. should shut down.
Results:
Results:
• OK - The GSC+ is operating normally.
• OK - The engine does shutdown.
Repair: The GSC+ will need to be replaced if the
Repair: Replace the PEEC or the ESDR. Verify problem reoccurs.
that the repair corrects the problem.
STOP.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The GSC+ does NOT operate correctly
• NOT OK - The engine does NOT shut down. and the fault shutdown indicator still flashes at the
There is an engine problem. rate of four to five times per second (4 to 5 Hz).
Repair: Check the fuel shutoff solenoid (FSOS) Repair: The GSC+ has failed. Replace the GSC+.
and the engine fuel system. Refer to the See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic
appropriate engine service manuals. Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
STOP. STOP.
i01370707
GSC Operation Is Erratic

SMCS Code: 4490-035
Fault shutdown indicator on the GSC+ flashes at

the rate of four to five times per second (4 to 5 Hz).
The displays of the GSC+ may not be responding.
The GSC+ does not respond to any position of the
engine control switch (ECS).
This is an internal fault of the GSC+ that can be

temporary or permanent. The fault is caused by
a component failure in the GSC+. Also, the fault
may be caused by severe electromagnetic fields
or radio frequency interference. The relays in the
relay module are automatically turned off when this
fault occurs. The effect of this fault on the engine
depends on the type of fuel system.
136
101369844
Display of Voltage or Current

Is Zero (for MUI 3306B, 3406C
Engines)
SMCS Code: 4490-035
SIN: BNS1-Up
SIN: 9ES1-Up
SIN: 5KW1-Up
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up
SIN: BNW1-Up
SIN: BTW1-Up
SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
SIN: BAZ1-Up
Zero volts or zero amperes are showing on the

display of the GSC+ for one or more AC phases.
This is showing while the genset is running and the
load is connected.
137
- <'
11
" " C , /
""
52
12 <'
G ) " m /r
" "" ""
-) r
"- " "i ,~r J
~
N
E
r -'
/
11 12 10
,-
" 52
" 50 50 50
"
i@i @) @J @ \@ <l!J!l I@J (~ '@l Q1!) @)
L- 50 50
&- &-
r-2L-)
LINK
JI-8
4D51 4 52 4 " (>50 4
" " -,:::~
-) JI-7
JI-6
11
F11
H21
12ll
H22
lJ
H2O
10'
I (2A) '"
(2A) '"~
(2A)
1---I ",,:::~:::~ 95 JI-5

JI-4
AC TRANSFORMER BOX+
"0
~
l " :::~
~
Jl-J
I Jl-2 (ATB+) 112 \0,
I ~) J1-1
111
108
r= 96
97
;-" GSC-17 (CHASSIS GROUND)
I I ;-" GSC-Io (Ae GROUND)

I
L--1
I 96
)" GSC-6 (Ie IN)
95
~. GSC-5 (18 IN)
..
94
GSC-4 (IA IN)
GENERATOR
)" SET
OJ
/_ GSC-12 (ve IN) CONTROL +
I (GSC+)
92
I /"'i" GSC-ll (va IN)
191 --p GSC-IO (VA IN)
illustration 103 900583168
System Schematic For AC Transformer Box +

A Wye Connection Is Shown For The Generator.
Test Step 1" THE PROBLEM IS WITH AC

VOLTAGE OR THE PROBLEM IS WITH AC
When the engine-generator, or any source to
CURRENT.
which the engine-generator is synchronized to, is
A. Determine if the problem is with AC voltage
operating, voltages up to 600V are present in the
or with AC current. Check the display of the
control panel.
GSC+ while the genset is running and the load
is connected.
Do not short these terminal with line voltage to
ground with any part of the body or any conduc-
Results:
tive material. Loss of life or injury could result
from electrical shock or injury from molten met-
• AC VOLTAGE - Zero volts are showing on the
al.
• AC CURRENT - Zero amperes are showing on

the display of the GSC+ for one or more AC
phases. Proceed to Test Step 7.
138
Test Step 2. CHECK THE FUSES. Test Step 4. CHECK THE CONNEf
A. Check the three fuses on the AC transformer box A. Shut down the engine.
+ (ATB+).
B. Check the harness connector and the'
Expected Result: of the ATB+.
The fuses should not be open. C. Check the GSC+ harness connector. S,
And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - I
Results:
D. Check for one or more damaged wires
• OK - The fuses are not open. Proceed to Test the ATB+ and the GSC+. See the Gen
Step 3. Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adj
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams" .
• NOT OK - One or more of the fuses are open.
Expected Result:
Repair: One or more of the fuses are open. Check
for a shorted component or damaged wiring. The wiring and the connectors should ha,
Troubleshoot and repair the problem. See Ihe good.
Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Results:
After the problem has been repaired, replace
the fuses. • OK - NO problem was found with the c'
or with the wiring. Proceed to Test Step
STOP.
• NOT OK - The problem was with the cc
Test Step 3. CHECK THE GENERATOR or with the wiring.
OUTPUT.
Repair: Repair the connectors or rep lac
A. Open the circuit breaker or remove the load. wiring harness.
B. Start the engine and run the genset. STOP.
C. Measure the voltage between 'all three luses on Test Step 5. CHECK THE OUTPui .
the ATB+. THE ATB+
Expected Res!Jlt: A. Remove the GSC+ harness connector f
ATB+.
The line to line voltage should measure the rated
voltage of the genset. B. At the terminal of the ATB+, measure t
resistance between the following termir
Results: terminal J 1-7 to terminal J 1-1, terminal.
terminal J 1-2, and terminal J 1-7 to term
• OK - The voltages are correct and the problem
remains. Proceed to Test Step 4. Expected Result:
• NOT OK - One or more of the voltages are NOT Each of the resistance measurements shOt
correct. 7.0 ± 1.0 Ohms.
Repair: The wiring or the connections are Results:

damaged. Check for damaged wiring between
the ATB+ and the bus. See the Generator • OK - Each of the resistance measureme
Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, ± 1.0 Ohms. Proceed to Test Step 6.
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Also, check
the electrical connections at the terminal of the • NOT OK - One or more of the resistanc
ATB+ . See Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical measurements is NOT 7.0 ± 1.0 Ohms.
Connector· Inspect".
STOP.
139
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the ATB+. Expected Result:
See Tesling and Adjusting Section, "EMCP
Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) - The resistance should be approximately 5 Ohms.
Replace".
Results:
STOP.
• OK - The resistances are approximately 5 Ohms.
Test Step 6. CHECK THE INPUTS OF THE Therefore, the current transformers are good.
ATB+ Proceed to Test Step 8.
A. Remove the three fuses on the ATB+: F11, F12, • NOT OK - One or more of the resistance
and F13 measurements are NOT correct. A related current
transformer or related wire is open.
B. At the terminal of the ATB+, measure the
. resistance between the following terminals: Repair: Replace the open current transformer or
terminal T11 to terminal H21, terminal T12 to repair the wiring. See the Generator Set Wiring
terminal H21, and terminal T13 to terminal H21 Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics
And Wiring Diagrams".
Expected Result:
STOP.
Each of the resistance measurements should be
1,050 ± 100 Ohms. Test Step 8. CHECK THE OUTPUTS OF
THE ATB+
Results:
A. Shut down the engine .
• OK - Each of the resistance measurements is
1,050 ± 100 Ohms. B. Remove the harness connector from the GSC+.
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely C. At the harness connector of the GSC+ , measure
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure the resistance between the following contacts:
and perform this entire procedure again. If contact 4 to contact 16, contact 5 to contact 16,
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See and contact 6 to contact 16. Be sure to allow
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control .. each measuremenUo stabilize.
(Generator Set) - Replace".
Expected Result:
STOP.
Each of the three resistances should be 120 ± 20
• NOT OK - One or more of the resistance Ohms .
measurements was NOT 1,050 ± 100 Ohms.
Results:
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the ATB+.
See Testing and Adjusting Section, "EMCP • OK - Each of the three resistances is 120 ± 20
Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) - Ohms. Proceed to Test Step 10.
Replace".
• NOT OK - One or more of the resistance
STOP. measurements are NOT correct. Proceed to Test
Step 9.
Test Step 7. CHECK THE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS Test Step 9. CHECK THE GSC+ HARNESS
CONNECTOR
A. Shut down the engine.
A. Remove the GSC+ harness from the ATB+.
B. At terminals 51, 52, and 53 of the ATB+,
disconnect only the wires that lead away from B. Check the resistance of the wires in the GSC+
the ATB+. These disconnected wires go to the harness for an open wire. See the Generator
current transformers. These current transformers Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting,
are CT1, CT2, and CT3. "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
C. Measure the resistance from terminal 50 to each Expected Result:

of the disconnected wires.
The wires in the GSC+ harness should measure
less than 5 Ohms.
- 140
Results: Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace t

ATB+. See the Testing and Adjusting SE
• OK - The wires in the GSC+ harness measure "EMPC Electronic Control (AC Transform
less than 5 Ohms. Replace".
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the STOP.

ATB+. See the Testing and Adjusting Section,
"EMPC Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) -
Replace".
STOP.
Display of Voltage or Cur
Is Zero (for MUI 3412C, 3!
• NOT OK - The wires in the GSC+ harness do
NOT measure less than 5 Ohms.
3512,3516 and EUI and P
Engines)
Repair: Repair the wiring or replace the GSC+
harness. Verify that the repairs fixed the problem. SMCS Code: 4490-035
STOP. SIN: SNS1-Up

SIN: 9ES1-Up
Test Step 10. CHECK THE INPUTS OF
THE ATB+ SIN: 5KW1-Up
A. The wires that were previously disconnected SIN: 5PW1-Up

from terminals 51, 52, and 53 will remain
disconnected. The only wires which are SIN: 6GW1-Up
connected to these terminals should lead into SIN: 6WW1-Up
the ATB+.
SIN: SNW1-Up
B. At the terminal strip of the ATB+, measure the
resistance between the following terminals: SIN: STW1-Up
terminal 51 to terminal 50, terminal 52 to terminal
SIN: LRY1-Up
50, and te(minal 53 to terminal 50.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Expected Result:
SIN: SAZ1-Up
All the resistance measurements should read less
than 1 Ohm. System Operation Description:
Results: Zero volts or zero amperes are showing or

display of the GSC+ for one or more AC p
• OK - All the resistance measurements do read This is showing while the genset is running
less than 1 Ohm. load is connected.

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
STOP.

measurements are NOT correct.
141
11 1';:
" $1 , /
.,""
'( 12 In "
G ) ,u
"
V'
" " "" /
r<:
@
N
E
" " (r 3 / (
51 52 53 50 50 50 Tt 12 T3 TO
LINK
r
~). JI-8
~?-
50
Tt ~. T2ll. 13
~1.
JI-7
Jl-6 Vim H21 H22 H2O
101 ~)-( 101 a
I 95 ::~ J1-5 '"
(2A)
F12
(lA)
f13
(lA)
17--1 94 ::~ Jl-' 110 VIEl
)-(
113
110 :8
l ::
I " -) AC TRANSFORMER BOX+
JI-3
-~ JI-2 (ATB+) ~ 109 '\il[[l
)-( 109B
_ ) . Jl-l
Tll
L -__________~====~~ ) - ( 108 'Wm 108 a
I~ 97
eSC-17 (CHASSIS GROUND)
G5C-16 (AC GROUND)
GSC-6 (Ie IN)

GSC-5 (18 IN)
GENERATOR
GSC-4 (IA IN) SET
GSC-12 (ve IN)
CONTROL +
I (GSC+ )
I 92 eSC-II (VB IN)
L~ GSC-IO (VA IN)
Illustration 104
g00444304
System Schematic For An AC Transformer Box (ATB+)

A Wye Connection Is Shown For The Generator.
Test Step 1. THE PROBLEM IS WITH AC

VOLTAGE OR THE PROBLEM IS WITH AC
CURRENT.
which the engine-generator is synchronized to, is
A. Determine if the problem is with AC voltage
operating, voltages up to 600V are present in the
or wilh AC current Check the display of the
control panel.
GSC+ while Ihe genset is running and Ihe load
is connected.
Do not short these terminal with line voltage to
ground with any part of the body or any conduc-
Results:
tive material. Loss of life or injury could result
• AC VOLTAGE - Zero volts are showing on the
aL
• AC CURRENT - Zero amperes are showing on

the display of the GSC+ for one or more AC
phases. Proceed 10 Tesl Step 7.
142
Test Step 2. CHECK THE FUSES. Test Step 4. CHECK THE CONNE
A. Check the three fuses on the AC transformer box A. Shut down the engine.
+ (ATB+).
B. Check the harness connector and the
Expected Result: of the ATB+.
The fuses should not be open. C. Check the GSC+ harness connector S
And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
Results:
D, Check for one or more damaged wires
• OK - The fuses are not open. Proceed to Test the ATB+ and the GSC+. See the Ger
Step 3. Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Ad
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams" .
Expected Result:
Repair: One or more of the fuses are open. Check
for a shorted component or damaged wiring. The wiring and the connectors should ha'
Troubleshoot and repair the problem. See the good.
.Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Results:
After the problem has been repaired, replace
the fuses. • OK - NO problem was found with the c
or with the wiring. Proceed to Test Step
STOP.
• NOT OK - The problem was with the c(
Test Step 3. CHECK THE GENERATOR or with the wiring.
OUTPUT.
Repair: Repair the connectors or replae
A. Open the circuit breaker or remove the load. wiring harness.
B. Start the engine and run the genset. STOP.
C. Measure the voltage between all three fuses on Test Step 5. CHECK THE OUTPUl
the ATB+. THE ATB+
Expected Result: A, Remove the GSC+ harness connector I
ATB+.
The line to line voltage should measure the rated
voltage of the genset. B. At the terminal of the ATB+ , measure
resistance between the following termir
Results: terminal J 1-7 to terminal J 1-1, terminal
terminal J1-2, and terminal J1-7 to term
• OK - The voltages are correct and the problem
remains. Proceed to Test Step 4. Expected Result:
• NOT OK - One or more of the voltages are NOT Each of the resistance measurements sho
correct. 7.0 ± 1.0 Ohms.
Repair: The wiring or the connections are Results:

damaged. Check for damaged wiring between
the ATB+ and the bus. See the Generator • OK - Each of the resistance measureme
Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, ± 1.0 Ohms. Proceed to Test Step 6.
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Also, check
the electrical connections at the terminal of the • NOT OK - One or more of the resistanc
ATB+ . See Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical measurements is NOT 7.0 ± 1.0 Ohms.
Connector - Inspect".
STOP.
143
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the ATB+. Expected Result:
See Testing and Adjusting Section, "EMCP
Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) - The resistance should be approximately 5 Ohms.
Replace".
Results:
STOP.
• OK - The resistances are approximately 5 Ohms.
Test Step 6. CHECK THE INPUTS OF THE Therefore, the current transformers are good.
ATB+ Proceed to Test Step 8.
A. Remove the three fuses on the ATB+: F11, F12, • NOT OK - One or more of the resistance
and F13 measurements are NOT correct. A related current
transformer or related wire is open.
B. At the terminal of the ATB+, measure the
• resistance between the following terminals: Repair: Replace the open current transformer or
terminal T11 to terminal H21, terminal T12 to repair the wiring. See the Generator Set Wiring
terminal H21, and terminal T 13 to terminal H21 Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics
And Wiring Diagrams".
Expected Result:
STOP.
Each of the resistance measurements should be
1,050 ± 100 Ohms. Test Step 8. CHECK THE OUTPUTS OF
THE ATB+
Results:
A. Shut down the engine .
• OK - Each of the resistance measurements is
1,050 ± 100 Ohms. B. Remove the harness connector from the GSC+.
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely C. At the harness connector of the GSC+ , measure
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure the resistance between the following contacts:
and perform this entire procedure again. If contact 4 to contact 16, contact 5 to contact 16,
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See and contact 6 to contact 16. Be sure to allow
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control each measurement to stabilize.
Expected Result:
STOP.
Each of the three resistances should be 120 ± 20
• NOT OK - One or more of the resistance Ohms .
measurements was NOT 1,050 ± 100 Ohms.
Results:
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the ATB+.
See Testing and Adjusting Section, "EMCP • OK - Each of the three resistances is 120 ± 20
Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) - Ohms. Proceed to Test Step 10.
Replace".
STOP. measurements are NOT correct. Proceed to Test
Step 9.
Test Step 7. CHECK THE CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS Test Step 9. CHECK THE GSC+ HARNESS
CONNECTOR
A. Shut down the engine.
A. Remove the GSC+ harness from the ATB+.
B. At terminals 51, 52, and 53 of the ATB+,
disconnect only the wires that lead away from B. Check the resistance of the wires in the GSC+
the ATB+. These disconnected wires go to the harness for an open wire. See the Generator
current transformers. These current transformers Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting,
are CT1, CT2, and CT3. "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
C. Measure the resistance from terminal 50 to each Expected Result:

of the disconnected wires.
The wires in the GSC+ harness should measure
less than 5 Ohms.
-- 144
Results: Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace

ATB+. See the Testing and Adjusting ~
• OK - The wires in the GSC+ harness measure "EMPC Electronic Control (AC Transfor
less than 5 Ohms. Replace".
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the STOP.

ATB+. See the Testing and Adjusting Section.
"EMPC Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) -
Replace".
STOP.
• NOT OK - The wires in the GSC+ harness do

NOT measure less than 5 Ohms.
Repair: Repair the wiring or replace the GSC+

harness. Verify that the repairs fixed the problem.
STOP.
Test Step 10. CHECK THE INPUTS OF

THE ATB+
A. The wires that were previously disconnected
from terminals 51, 52, and 53 will remain
disconnected. The only wires which are
connected to these terminals should lead into
the ATB+.
B. At the terminal strip of the ATB+, measure the

resistance between the following terminals:
terminal 51 to terminal 50, terminal 52 to terminal
50, and terminal 53 to terminal 50.
Expected Result:
All the resistance measurements should read less

than 1 Ohm.
Results:
• OK - All the resistance measurements do read

less than 1 Ohm.

STOP.

measurements are NOT correct.
145
101375739
Display of Voltage or Current

or Power Is Inaccurate
SMCS Code: 4490-035
EXTERNAL AC JUMPER GSC

GENERATOR POTENTIAL I:=:!>I TRANSFORMER
BOX INSTALLED (AC VOLTAGE DISPLA YEO
VOL TAGE
TRANSFORMER (ATB) OR NOT CALCULATION)
lllustration 105 g00481725
Block Diagram Of AC Voltage Display In the EMCP 11+
11 ?2 <'
" ';;,> ( Tl -'
"« T2
$1
<'
G 1 " "
TJ
""
~; en -' S
-f N " :"2 CT3
('
~ E
(' -'
-'
11 T2
" " 53 50 50
" TJ 10
@ I@I (Q;jl tjiy ii1!) (@) 4~1 @J <:®) @jJ @

L- 50
50
" '\\
LINK
r :: ~5 Jl-8
m"
,---l Jl-7 4 52 53 b50 4 11 4 T2 4DlJ

96 _~ H2I Hn H2J
101
I ,,::~
Jl-6
'"
(2A) '"
(2A)
'lJ
(2A)
~
,,::~
JI-5
~ 110
::~
Jl-4
1 OJ Jl-3 AC TRANSFORMER BOX+
m
I 92 )- Jl-2 (ATB+) 10'
I ~) Jl-1 "
~ 108
I- 98 GSC-17 (CHASSIS GROUND)
I 97 eSC-16 (Ae GROUND)
I -"''''-'-l---r.i GSC-6 (Ie IN)

L ___ 95 :0 GSC-5 (18 IN)
GENERATOR
94 GSC-4 (lA IN) SET
CONTROL +
I
"
92
GSC-12 (ve IN) (GSC+ )
I GSC-ll (VB IN)
191 esc-Io (VA IN)
System Schematic For AC Transformer Box + (ATB+)

Schematic For Wye Connected Generator On 33068 And 3406C
146
11 , /
" ,s;' ," -'
c~
""
12 t'
,.
""
T3 -' t'
N
~1
"
:,: 03 -'
E ,
(0J "
51 52 50 50 50 T1 TO
" 12 T3
,- -
NOT PR(SEN T ON I I @> ©) @l <@l lillp ©) @ ®! \W (tIDi
PEEC ENGINE
S - - - -.... J ill! W: 50 50
,: ( - - - { I,
1 r~)
~-------
Jl-8
..
4 51 b52I"450 T1 I D12
LINK
T3
97 _) JI-7
" -) JI-6
H21
",
H22 H2O
101 'l!flill
>---")-(-
I~) JI-5 '"
(2A) (lA) '"
(2A)
-I 94 - ) JI-4 ~ "0 VIill
93 _,
AC TRANSFORMER BOX+ )-(-
l 92
91
=~
Jl-J
Jl-2
_) Jl-1
(ATB+) T12
"
~
'0'
108
'l!fm
Wm
)-(-
)-(-
98
97
,. eSC-17 (CHASSIS GROUND)
GSC-16 (Ae GROUND)
-"- j-.-,.t
95.
GSC-6 (Ie IN)
GSC-5 (IS IN)
GENERATOR
.," GSC-4 (IA IN)
GSC-12 (VC IN)

SET
CONTROL +
(GSC+ )
92
GSC-II (VB IN)
,
" GSC-IO (VA IN)
Illustration 107
System Schematic For AC Transformer Box + (ATB+)
Schematic For A Wye Connected Generator For All Models Covered By This Manual Except 33068 And 3406C
147
Table 20
~wAFiNIN.G
Selection of AC Voltage Range
GSC+ External Input Jumper
GSC+
P020 Potential Voltages Internal which ~he engine-generator is synchronized to, is
Setpoint Trans- for AC Multiplier operating, voltages up to 600V are present in the
former Trans- control panel.
former
Box Do not short these terminal with line voltage to
(ATB+) wound wi!h any part of the body or any conduc-
700 None 0-700 5 Required tIVe matenal. Loss of life or injury could result
150 None 0-150 1 None al.
300 2:1 0- 150 2 None
500 3.33:1 0- 150 3.33 None
Test Step 1. CHECK THE DISPLAY OF
THE GSC+P FOR VOLTAGE READINGS
600 4:1 0- 150 4 None
750 5:1 0-150 5 None A. Start the gense!.
3000 20:1 0-150 20 None B. Check the voltage readings on the display of the
4500 30:1 0- 150 30 None GSC+P.
5250 35:1 0- 150 35 None Expected Result:

9000 60:1 0- 150 60 None
The voltage readings on the GSC+P should be
15000 100:1 0- 150 100 None accurate.
18000 120:1 0-150 120 None
Results:
30000 200:1 0-150 200 None
• OK - The voltage readings on the GSC+P are
accurate. Proceed to Test Step 2.
Note: For related information, see Testing And
Adjusting, "AC Voltage Range - Adjust" ..
.• NOT OK - The voltage· readings on the GSC+P
are Inaccurate. Proceed to Test Step 4.
The P020 setpoint determines the proper AC voltage
range and the internal multipliers that are used by
the GSC+ for calculating AC voltage. If the external
potential transformers are present, the GSC+ uses THE GSC+P FOR CURRENT READINGS
the Internal multipliers to compensate for the ratio
of turns of tile external potential transformers. A. Check the current readings on the display of the
This must take place in order to ensure accurate GSC+P.
calculations by the GSC+ for AC voltage.
Expected Result:
A jumper block is located in the relay module. The
The current readings on the GSC+P should be
Jumper block connects a circuit which will divide
accurate.
the AC voltage by five. The circuit reduces the AC
voltage to an acceptable level for the GSC+ when
Results:
P020 is 700. When setpoint P020 is 700 a multiplier
of five is needed to compensate for the' presence
• OK - The current readings on the GSC+P are
of the circuit even though no external potential
accurate. Proceed to Test Step 3 .
transformer is present.
• NOT OK - The current readings on the GSC+P
Note: The jumper block should NOT be installed
are inaccurate. Proceed to Test Step 8.
when P020 is NOT programmed to a value of 700.
This will prevent voltage readings that are calculated
Incorrectly by the GSC+. The other values (150
through 30000) are used with an external potential THE GSC+P FOR POWER CONSUMPTION
transformer. These values result in input voltages
from 0 to 150 ACV at the AC Transformer Box + A. Check the power consumption on the display
(ATB+): No further reduction of the input voltage of the GSC+P.
IS required.
148
The power consumption that is displayed on the • YES - The jumper is installed correctl\
GSC+P should be accurate. to match the value in setpoint P020. Pr
Test Step 6.
Results:
• NO - The jumper is NOT installed COff
• OK - The power consumption that is displayed order to match the value in setpoint PO
on the GSC+P is accurate.
Repair: Install the jumper in accordanc
Repair: There is no problem at this time. Keep procedure in System Operation, "AC V
monitoring the system for inaccurate readings. Range - Adjust".
STOP. STOP.
• NOT OK - The power consumption that is Test Step 6. CHECK THE VALUE!
displayed on the GSC+P is NOT accurate.
Proceed to Test Step 10. A. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in
shut down the engine. Enter service n
Test Step 4. CHECK SETPOINT P020 enter the password. OP4 is showing or
display of the GSC+P. For more inforr
A. Check the setpoint P020. See Testing and see Systems Operation, "Service Moe
Adjusting, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing more information. See the Systems Or
OP2-0". "Password Entry OP3"for more inform,
Expected Result: B. Press the "SCROLL UP" key five time~

P020 should be set to match the system's
application. To find the correct setpoint, refer to c. Press the "SCROLL UP" key five time~
Table 20 . is showing on the lower display.
Results: D. Press the "SELECT" key. "AC01" is shl

value of the setpoint is also showing ..
• OK - Setpoint P020 is set for the application. will be between 0 to 255. Record the'
E. Press the "SCROLL UP" key in order t
• NOT OK - Setpoint P020 is NOT set for the the values for the setpoints AC02 thrOi
application. Record each value.
Repair: Program P020 to match the system's F. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showir
application. See Testing and Adjusting, lower display.
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Programming OP5-0".
G. Press the "EXIT" key. The display will
STOP. the Normal Mode.
Test Step 5. CHECK THE JUMPER FOR H. Compare the recorded values with the
CORRECT INSTALLATION are written on the bar code sticker of I
A. Check the setpoint P020. See Testing and Expected Result:

Adjusting, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing
OP2-0". The recorded values should match the v,
are written on the bar code sticker of the
B. Check the jumper on tile relay module for correct
AC voltage range. See System Operation, "AC Results:
Voltage Range - Adjust".
• Yes - The values match. Proceed to TE
Expected Result:
• NO - The values do NOT match.
The jumper should be installed correctly in order to
match the value in setpoint P020.
149
Repair: Program the setpoints in OP8 to match Test Step 9. CHECK THE VALUES IN OPS
the values on the ATB+. See System Operation,
"Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming OP8". A. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order to
shut down the engine. Enter service mode and
STOP. enter the password. OP4 is showing on the
Test Step 7. CHECK THE AC OFFSET Operation, "Service Mode"for more information.
ADJUSTMENT See the Systems Operation, "Password Entry
OP3"for more information.
A. Check the AC offset adjustment. See System
Operation, "AC Offset Adjustment OP10". B. Press the "SCROLL UP" key five times. "OP 8"
Expected Result:
C. Press the "SCROLL UP" key five times. "OP 8"
The offset values should be set to zero. is showing on the lower display.
Results: D. Press the "SELECT" key. "AC01" is showing. The

value of the setpoint is also showing. The value
• YES - The offset values are set to zero. will be between 0 to 255. Record the value .
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely E. Press the "SCROLL UP" key in order to retrieve
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure the values for setpoints AC02 through AC06.
and perform this entire procedure again. If Record each value.
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control F. Press the "EXIT" key. "OP 1" is showing on the
(Generator Set) - Replace". lower display.
STOP. G. Press the "EXIT" key. The display will return to

the Normal Mode .
• NO - The offset values are not set to zero.
H. Compare the recorded values with the values that
Repair: Reset the offset values to zero. See are written on the bar code sticker of the ATB+.
System Operation, "AC Offset Adjustment OPlO".
Verify that the voltage readings are accurate. Expected Result:
STOP. The recorded values should match the values that

are written on the bar code sticker of the ATB+.
Test Step S. CHECK SETPOINT P021
Results:
A. Check the setpoint P021. See Testing and
Adjusting, "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing • YES - The values match.
OP2-0".
Expected Result: that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
P021 should be set to 600A. the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
Results: (Generator Set) - Replace".
• OK - P021 setpoint is set to 600A. Proceed to STOP.

Test Step 9.
• NO - The values do NOT match.
o NOT OK - P021 setpoint is NOT set to 600A.
Repair: Program the setpoints in OPB to match
Repair: Program P021 to 600A. See Testing the values on the ATB+. See System Operation,
and Adjusting, "Engine/Generator Setpoint "Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming OP8".
Programming OP5-0".
STOP.
STOP.
_. 150
Test Step 10. INACCURATE POWER B. Check the polarity of the current transf,
CONSUMPTION IS DISPLAYED ON THE Refer to Illustration 108.
GSC+P.
Expected Result:
A. Start the genset.
The polarity of the current transformers sh
B. Check for inaccurate power factors for each correct.
individual phase by depressing the "Power Key"
for more than 5 seconds. Results:
Expected Result: • OK - The polarity of the current transfor

correct.
The power factors for each phase should be
accurate. Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace th
See Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Elec
Results: Control (AC Transformer Box) - Replace'
• OK - The power factors for each phase are STOP.

accurate.
• NOT OK - The polarity of the current trar
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely are NOT correct.
and perform this entire procedure again. If Repair: Install the current transformers tl
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See correct polarity.
(Generator Set) - Replace". STOP.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The power factors for each phase are Indicators of Alarm Modu
inaccurate. Proceed to Test Step 11.
or Remote Annunciator A
Test Step 11. CHECK THE POLARITY OF Constantly Flashing
THE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
SMCS Code: 4490-035
The fault indicators of the remote annuncia

the control panel alarm module that are co
by the data link will flash at a rate of 0.5 H;
two seconds).
-II>-
BUS BAR
CI3
A. Turn the ECS to the STOP position in order to

shut down the engine.
~····15~i·~·~····~·
• Verify That All Remote Modules Are Powered.

ALARt.4 MODULE 1 :
If multiple modules are connected to a GSC+,
ALL of the modules must be powered up. If
;;03D
I LINK SPARE FAULT a module is not powered and the +battery
INPUT (LED 7) wire is disconnected or if the ground wire is
.IPUNK
:"11 SPARE FAULT
disconnected, the wire on terminal 2 must be
disconnected as well.
INPUT (LED B)
:al 72
LOW FUEL
,cQLEVEL
• Verify The Length Of The Wire. The maximum
length of the wires between the GSC+ and a
remote annunciator is 304 m (1000 It). Note: The
:12! 20 lAMP TEST
(IF REOUIRED) actual length of the wire can be considerably
HORN~
- "I longer than the physical distance between the
two modules.
10
~"
• Check The Type Of Wire Or Cable On The
DC -:7 I 30
Remote Modules, Three separate wires for the
~
following connections are recommended for
SILENCE
SWITCH
E- :13
remote installations: +batterybattery negativedata
for the alarm. Other wires for the switched inputs
ALARM :2 I 90 on a remote annunciator may also be required
OAT ALINK I by the application. The wires should be size
, 16 AWG. Verify that the wire is NOT a shielded
type. Verify that the wire does not have twisted
conductors. This type of cable is not appropriate
for this purpose. These types of cables usually
GENERATOR GSC-35 have more capacitance than separate wires and
ALARM DATA
SET the data from the GSC+ can be corrupted.
CONTROL ~
(GSC)
RM-28 RM-27 • Verify The Methods Of Wiring. Each remote
-B!T Fl YBA~ annunciator must have a separate set of three
B-
wires between it and the GSC+. Do NOT connect
V
" any wires directly between remote annunciators.
The wires should NOT be in the same conduit as
L RM-12 FlO
RM-39
+B~
V
wires for AC voltage or other high voltage signals.
Test Step 1. CHECK THE DATA CIRCUIT

WIRE FOR AN OPEN
A. Clear the GSC+ Fault Log. See Systems
Operation, "Fault Log Clearing OP4".
Sys1em Schematic For Alarm Module (ALM) B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
OFF/RESET.
There are several possible causes when the
indicators of the alarm module are flashing. Before C. Temporarily connect terminal 1 to terminal 2 of
performing the test procedure, review the following the alarm module for a few seconds.
requirements for the alarm module .
D. Temporarily connect terminal 7 to terminal 2 of
• Check The GSC+ For Diagnostic Codes. If a the alarm module for a few seconds .
CID 333 FMI 03 or CID 333 FMI 04 diagnostic
code is active or if the codes are contained in the Expected Result:
fault log, perform those procedures first.
The CID 333 FMI 03 and CID 333 FMI 04 diagnostic
• Verify The Number Of Modules. A maximum of codes should be temporarily active while the faults
three modules can be connected to the GSC+ are occurring. The CID 333 FMI 03 and CID 333
data link for the alarms. FMI 04 diagnostic codes should be contained in
the GSC+ fault log.
152
Results: C, Temporarily connect pin 35 of the GSC

+battery for a few seconds .
• OK - The diagnostic codes occur and the codes
are contained in the GSC+ fault log. The GSC+ D, Temporarily connect pin 35 of the GSC
and the wire for the alarm (data) have not failed. battery negative for a few seconds.
Expected Result:
• NOT OK - The diagnostic codes do NOT occur
and the codes are not in the GSC+ fault log. The The CID 333 FMI 03 and CID 333 FMI 04 (
wire from contact 35 of the GSC+ to terminal 2 of codes will temporarily be active on the G
the alarm module is open or the wire has failed. display while the diagnostic codes are OCt
Also, the GSC+ may have failed. Proceed to Test
Step 3. Results:
Test Step 2. CHECK THE ALARM • OK - The diagnostic codes occur. The
MODULE FOR FAULTS. has not failed. The wire from GSC+ con
to terminal 2 of the alarm module is OpE
A, The indicators on the alarm module remain wire has failed.
flashing.
Repair: Repair the wire or replace the w
B. 'Disconnect the wire on terminal 2 of the alarm
module. STOP.
c. Measure the DC voltage from terminal 2 to • NOT OK - The diagnostic codes do nol
terminal 7 of the alarm module. The GSC+ may have failed.
Expected Result: Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procl
The voltage should be 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV. and perform this entire procedure again
the procedure, ensure that all cable prol
Results: fully seated and ensure that the probes
making contact with the GSC+ pins. If tf
• OK -; The voltage is 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV. The is repeated, replace the GSC+. See Tesi
requirements for the alarm module that were Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control (Ge
listed at the beginning of this procedure may not Set) - Replace".
be met.
STOP.
Repair: Review the list of requirements at the
beginning of this procedure. If all requirements
are being met, replace the alarm module. If the
problem is not solved, replace the GSC+. See
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV.

The alarm module has failed.
Repair: Replace the alarm module.
STOP.
Test Step 3. CHECK THE GSC+ FOR

DIAGNOSTIC CODES.
A. Install a cable probe on pin 35 of the GSC+
40-pin connector. Ensure that the cable probe
is fully seated.
B. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.

153
Diagnostic Code The GSC+ has a fault log to help with troubleshooting
of diagnostic codes. Inactive diagnostic codes
Procedures (CID FMI) are recorded in the fault log for viewing
at a later time. Also, the number of occurrences
are totalled and the number of occurrences is
101366708 shown on the upper display together with the CID
and FM I. An active alarm fault becomes inactive
Troubleshooting Diagnostic when the problem is no longer occurring. Also, the
Codes engine control switch (ECS) should be turned to
the OFF/RESET position for shutdown faults. The
SMCS Code: 4490-035; 7569 "DIAG" indicator is FLASHING when the problem
is currently occurring. The "DIAG" indicator is
Diagnostic codes are associated with failed ON CONTINUOUSLY when the problem occured
eJectrical components or circuits, that provide previously, but is inactive at the present time. See
information to the GSC+. Diagnostic codes are also Testing And Adjusting, "Fault Log Viewing OP1".
associated with failed electrical components or
circuits, that receive information from the GSC+. During troubleshooting, it is sometimes necessary
The diagnostic code closely identifies the cause to disconnect the harness connector from the
of the problem. GSC+ and diagnostic codes are created. Because
of internal circuitry, the GSC+ recognizes this
Each diagriostic code consists of the following condition as a FMI 03 for FMI 02 for certain
items: a component identifier (CID), a failure mode components. An FMI 03 or FMI 02 describes the
identifier (FMI), and "DIAG" indicator. These items voltage that is above normal. This fact is also used
are shown on the upper display. The diagnostic as an aid in the troubleshooting process. Clear
code indicator can be active or inactive. The these created diagnostic codes after the particular
CID identifies the component that has a problem. diagnostic code is corrected and the diagnostic
The FMI describes the nature of the diagnostic code is cleared. The following diagnostic codes are
code. When the "DIAG" indicator is FLASHING, recorded in a properly operating system when the
the diagnostic code is active. This means that harness connector is removed from the GSC+.
the diagnostic code is present. When the "DIAG"
indicator is ON CONTINUOUSLY, the diagnostic CID 0100 FMI 02 - Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
code is inactive and the CID FMI is recorded in (EUI Engines Only)
. the fault log. See Systems Operation, "Fault Log ..
Viewing OP1" in order to view the fault log. When CID 0100 FMI 03 - Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil)
the "DIAG" indicator is not showing, there are NO (MUI And PEEC Engines Only)
diagnostic codes that are detected or recorded.
Service personnel interpret the identifiers in order to CID 0110 FMI 02 - Temperature Sensor (Engine
assist with troubleshooting. Coolant) (EUI Engines Only)
When a diagnostic code occurs, the GSC+ CID 0110 FMI 03 - Temperature Sensor (Engine
FLASHES the "DIAG" indicator. The GSC+ Coolant) (MUI And PEEC Engines Only)
determines the type of problem the code
represents. There are two types of problems: CID 0111 FMI 03 - Fluid Level Sensor (Engine
an alarm fault and a shutdown fault. Then, the Coolant)
GSC+ FLASHES the corresponding fault alarm
indicator or fault shutdown indicator. The CID FMI is CID 0175 FMI 03 - Temperature Sensor (Engine Oil)
immediately shown on the upper display when there
is a shutdown fault. When there is an alarm fault, CID 0190 FMI 03 - Speed Sensor (Engine)
the alarm codes key is pressed first. Then, the CID
FMI is shown on the upper display. CID 0336 FMI 02 - Switch (Engine Control)
An FMI 02 describes an incorrect signal.
Note: ACID 0111 FMI 03 and aCID 0175 FMI 03

will only be recorded if the machine is equipped
with the proper sensors.
154
Clear diagnostic codes after the problem is Diagnostic Codes

investigated or the problem is corrected. This will
avoid a confusion during a future service call. Table 21
The "DIAG" indicator is OFF when all diagnostic Diagnostic Codes(1)
codes are cleared from the fault log and no active
diagnostic codes exist. See Testing And Adjusting,
"Fault Log Clearing OP4". CID No. I FMI No. Description
CID 100" Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil):
FMI 2 Incorrect sign
FMI3 Voltage above nc
FMI4 Voltage below no
CID 110 " Temperature Sensor (Engine Cool
FMI2 Incorrect sign.
FMI 3 Voltage above no
FMI4 Voltage below no
CID 111 " Fluid Level Sensor (Engine Coolal
FMI3 Voltage above no
CID 168 " Electrical System Voltage:
FMI3 Voltage above no
FMI4 Voltage below nOI
CID 175 " Temperature Sensor (Engine Oil):
FMI2 Incorrect signa
FMI3 Voltage above nOI
FMI4 Voltage below nor
CID 190" Speed Sensor (Engine):
FMI2 Incorrect signa
FMI 3 Voltage above nor
CID 248 " CAT Data Link:
FMI9
I Abnormal updal
CID 268 " EMCP Electronic Control (Generat(
FMI2 Incorrecl signal
CID 269 " Sensor Power Supply:
FMI3 Voltage above non
FMI4 Voltage below non
I
CID 333 " Alarm Module Control:
FMI3 Voltage above non
FMI4 Voltage below norr
CID 334 " Spare Output:
FMI3
FMI4
Voltage above norr
Voltage below norr
I
I
CID 336 " Switch (Engine Control):
I
FMI2 I Undefined slale
155
(Table 21, conld) (Tab)e 21, contd)

Diagnostic Codes!l) Diagnostic Codes!l)
CID No.1 FMI No. Description CID No.1 FMI No. Description
CID 441 - Electronic Governor Relay: FMI4 Voltage below normal
FMI12 Failed component CID 1168 " Dead Bus Sensor:
CID 442 - Generator Fault Relay: FMI3 Voltage above normal
FMI12 Failed component FMI4 Voltage below normal
CID 443 - Crank Termination Relay: CID 1169 " AC Transformer Box Sensor:
FMI12 Failed component FMI2 Incorrect signal
CID 444 " Starting Motor Relay: CID 1170 " Bus Transformer Box Sensor:
FMI12 Failed component FMI2 Incorrect siganl
CID 445 " Run Relay: FMI4 Voltage below normal
FMI12 Failed component FMI8 Abnormal signal
CID 446 " Air Shutoff Relay: CID 1178 - Pressure Sensor For Machine Overload
Warning:
FMI12 Failed component
FMI3 Voltage above normal
CID 447 " Fuel Control Relay:
(1) For troubleshooting, see the procedure with the same CID
FMI12 Failed component And FMI No.
(2) Parallelling Applications Only
CID 448 " Programmable Spare Relay:
FMI12 Failed component Example
CID 475 " Relay Driver Module:
I I I I I
FMI 4 Voltage below normal
I IU
CID 500 " EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set):
coo DIAG
FMI12 Failed componenl '"'
CID 566 " Unexpected Shutdown: Illustration 110 g00615969
FMI7 Improper mechanical response Upper Display Showing A "C!D 190 FM! 3" Diagnostic Code
CID 590 " Engine Electronic Control Module:
FMI9 Abnormal update
CID 770 " Customer Communication Module Data I
Link:
1- ~
FMI9 Abnormal update
e'G OIAG FM'
CID 858 " Generator Close Breaker:(2)
g00608337
Illustration 111
Upper Display Showing A "CID 190 E FMI 3" Diagnostic Code
FMI4 Voltage below normal
The "E" in the example shown in 111 indicates that
CID 859 " Kilowatt Level Output:
on EUI engines, the engine ECM has generated
FMI3 Voltage above normal the diagnostic code. The EMCP 11+ will display all
diagnostic codes from the engine ECM. This assists
the operator in diagnosing problems with the EUI
CID 1038" Governor Adjust Analog Output: engine. See Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B
EPG Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227,
FMI3 Voltage above normal "3406E EPG Engines"for more information.
CID 1167 " EPG Circuit Breaker:
(continued)
156
101334703 VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC CODE.

GSC CIO 0100 - FMI 02 (for EUI View the diagnostic code that is displayec
Engines) upper display panel of the EMCP II +. Det,
the diagnostic code is originating from thE
SMCS Code: 1924-035 ECM.
SIN: 5KW1-Up Expected Result:

SIN: 6GW1-Up There is a letter "E" after the number of thl
SIN: 8NW1-Up
is on the upper display panel of the EMCF
SIN: 8AZ1-Up Results:
Conditions Which Generate This Code: • YES - There is a letter "E" after the nur
the CID that is on the upper display par
This diagnostic code is for the pressure sensor EMCP 11+ .
(engine oil).
Repair; Troubleshoot the diagnostic coe
The engine ECM monitors the engine oil pressure the Engine ECM. Refer to Troubleshooti
in brder to protect the engine in case of a problem SENR 1003, "3500B EPG Engines" or
with the oil pressure. The oil pressure sensor is Troubleshooting, RENR2227, "3406E EF
mounted on an oil gallery on the engine. The exact Engines" for information on troubleshoot
location of the engine oil pressure sensor varies diagnostic code.
depending on the engine model. The GSC monitors
the oil pressure that is read by the engine ECM. STOP.
The possible causes of this diagnostic code are • NO - There is not a letter "E" after the c
listed below; of the CID that is on the upper display r
the EMCP 11+ .
• There is an open in the circuit for the CAT data
link. The open is between the engine ECM and Repair: There may be a problem with th
the GSC. Data Link. Determine if CID 0248 EMI C
present. Refer to Diagnostic Code ProCE
• There is a short or a failure in the oil pressure "GSC CID 0248 - FMI 09".
sensor that is connected to the engine ECM.
STOP.
The GSC issues aCID 0100 FMI 02 in order to show
that the GSC is unable to receive any valid data
about the oil pressure from the engine ECM.
The sensor is connected to the engine ECM. The

engine ECM sends data about the oil pressure
to the GSC+ via the CAT data link. Refer to
Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B EPG Engines"
or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, "3406E EPG
Engines" for more information on the oil pressure
sensor for the engine ECM.
System Response:
Note; The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a

problem with the oil pressure sensor as an alarm
fault. SelpointP04 is O. If the GSC+ is programmed
to treat a problem with the oil pressure sensor as
a shutdown fault, setpoint P04 is 1. Then, it is not
necessary to press the alarm codes key in order
to view the CID FMI. The diagnostic codes are
automatically shown on the upper display.
157
101336634 • 0 kPa (0 psi) is approximately a duty cycle of

13%. The voltage will be approximately 1.0 ~C\/.
GSC CID 0100 - FMI 02 (for MUI
and PEEC Engines) • 690 kPa (100 psi) is approximately a duty cycle
of 85%.
SMCS Code: 1924-035
System Response:
SIN: 8NS1-Up
Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a
SIN: 9ES1-Up problem with the oil pressure sensor as an alarm
fault. The factory default for P004 is O. If the GSC+
SIN: 5PW1-Up
is programmed to shutdown for a problem with the
SIN: 6WW1-Up oil pressure sensor. then it is not necessary to press
the alarm codes key in order to view the CIO FMI.
SIN: 8TW1-Up P004 is equal to 1 for a shutdown fault. The CIO
and the FM I are automatically displayed on the
SIN: LRW1-Up upper display panel of the EMCP 11+.
SIN: LRX1-Up
SIN: LRY1~Up
The possible causes of aCID 0100 FMI 02
SIN: 4BZ1-Up diagnostic code are listed below:
Conditions Which Generate This Code: • The base signal of the sensor is beyond accepted
limits.
ENGINE v+
0 67P • The duty cycle of the sensor signal is beyond
OIL
PRESSURE accepted limits.
SENSOR v- f® 62
(EOPS)
Begin performing these procedures only when
m~~ CIO 0100 FMI 02 is showing and the "OIAG"
indicator is FLASHING on the upper display. The
flashing indicator means that the fault is active.
The GSC+ treats aCID 0100 FMI 02 as an alarm
GENERATOR
0 fault. Active alarm faults are shown on the display
when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed and the
SET
CONTROL (GSC) 0 engine control switch (ECS) is in any position
GSC-B
15
0 except the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive
diagnostic code. the problem may be intermittent.
OIL PRESSURE JV 62 67
SS;ll 62
Use Illustration 112, and see Testing And Adjusting,
SENSOR V:
"Electrical Connector - Inspect" in order to
GS~9
SENSOR v+ 0« 67 troubleshoot a diagnostic code. Clear the diagnostic
code from the fault log after troubleshooting is
complete.
Illustration 112
900527056 Note: The operator may choose to troubleshoot
System Schematic For The Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (EOPS)
the sensor signal with a meter that is capable of
measuring frequency instead of performing this
This diagnostic code is for the pressure sensor procedure. The meter must also measure a duty
(engine oil). cycle.
The EMCP 11+ monitors the engine oil pressure in Note: If aCID 0269 for the sensor supply is active,
order to protect the engine from a problem with the correct the diagnostic code before performing this
orl pressure. The oil pressure sensor is mounted on procedure.
an oil gallery of the engine. The exact location of
the engine oil pressure sensor varies depending on Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND THE
the engine model. HARNESS.
The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply A. Make sure that CIO 0100 FMI 02 is showing on
from the GSC+. The oil pressure signal is a pulse the display.
width modulated signal. The base frequency of the
signal is 500 ± 150 Hz. As pressure changes. the B. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET
duty cycle of the signal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
158
C. Oisconnect the sensor from the engine harness. Repair: The GSC+ functions properly.
The sensor remains fastened to the engine. Troubleshoot the signal wire in the han
between the sensor connector and the
D. Turn the ECS to the STOP position. connector. See Testing And Adjusting, "
Connector - Inspect" for procedures on
E. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. The "Alarm Codes" the electrical connectors and terminals.
key does not need to be pressed for a shutdown
fault. STOP.
F. Monitor the display. Check whether the CIO 0100 • NOT OK - CIO 0100 FMI 02 is still sho;
FMI 02 is showing on the display. If CIO 0100
FMI 02 is not showing, then CIO 0100 FMI 02 is Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is
inactive. Now, the CIO 0100 FMI 03 should be that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this proc
showing. CIO 0100 FMI 03 is active. and perform this entire procedure agail
the problem remains, replace the GSC,
Expected Result: Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electroni(
CIO 0100 FMI 02 is not showing and CIO 0100 FMI
03 is showing. STOP.
Results:
• OK - CIO 0100 FMI 02 is not showing and CIO

0100 FMI 03 is showing.
Repair: The GSC+ and the harness function

properly. Therefore, the sensor has failed.
Replace the sensor. See Testing And Adjusting,
"Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test" for
more information.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The CIO 100 FMI 02 is still showing.

The harness or the GSC+ has failed. Proceed to
Test Step 2.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.

A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
B. Oisconnect the harness connector from the

GSC+. Turn the GSC+ to the STOP position.
C. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
D. Check if the CIO 0100 FMI 02 is not showing.

This means that the CIO 0100 FMI 02 is inactive.
CIO 0100 FMI 03 is now showing. CIO 0100 FMI
03 is now active.
Expected Result:
CIO 0100 FMI 02 is not showing. The CIO 0100 FMI

03 is now showing.
Results:
• OK - CIO 0100 FMI 02 is not showing. The CIO

0100 FMI 03 is now showing.
159
iQ1336878 The sensor is powered by an B volt sensor supply

from the GSC+. The oil pressure signal is a pulse
GSC CID 0100 - FMI 03 width modulated signal. The base frequency of the
signal is 500 ± 150 Hz. As pressure changes, the
SMCS Code: 1924-035 duty cycle of the signal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
SIN: 8NS1-Up
• 0 kPa (0 psi) is approximately a duty cycle of
SIN: 9ES1-Up 13% . The voltage will be approximately 1.0 OCv.
SIN: 5PW1-Up • 690 kPa (100 psi) is approximately a duty cycle

of B5% .
SIN: 6WW1-Up
SIN: BTW1-Up System Response:
SIN: LRW1-Up Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a

problem with the oil pressure sensor as an alarm
SIN: LRX1-Up fault. The factory default for P004 is O. If the GSC+
is programmed to shutdown for a problem with the
SIN: LRY1-Up
oil pressure sensor, then it is not necessary to press
SIN: 4BZt-Up the alarm codes key in order to view the CIO 0100
FMI 03. P004 is equal to 1 for a shutdown fault. The
SIN: BAZ1-Up CIO 0100 FMI 03 is automatically shown on the
upper display.
Conditions Which Generate This Code:
The possible causes of a CIO 0100 FMI 03 are
listed below:
ENGINE (£) 67P
OIL v+
PRESSURE • The sensor signal is shorted to +battery.
SENSOR v- ® 62
(EOPS)
• The sensor signal is open.
:"I~~ Begin performing these procedures only when

CIO 0100 FMI 03 is showing and the "OIAG"
<1> diagnostic code is active. The GSC+ treats a
GENERATOR CIO 0100 FMI 03 as an alarm fault. Active alarm
SET
CONTROL (esc) 0 faults are shown on the display when the "Alarm
Codes" key is pressed. The engine control switch
GSC-8 0 (ECS) must NOT be in the OFF/RESET position.
OlL PRESSUR~ ~ 15
62 67
For an inactive diagnostic code, the problem may
GS(.tl 62
SENSOR v- • be intermittent. Use Illustration 113 in order to
GSC-9 67 troubleshoot an inactive diagnostic code. Also
SENSOR V+ ",.
see Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
Inspect". Clear the diagnostic code from the fault
log after troubleshooting is complete.
Note: If aCID 0269 for the sensor supply is active,
System Schematic For Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
correct the diagnostic code before performing this
procedure.
This diagnostic code is for the pressure sensor
(engine oil).
Test Step 1. CHECK THE SUPPLY
The EMCP 11+ monitors the engine oil pressure in
CIRCUIT.
order to protect the engine from a problem with the
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and
oil pressure. The oil pressure sensor is mounted on
then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
the engine oil pressure sensor varies depending on
B. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
the engine model.
The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
C. At the engine harness side of the connector,

measure the DC voltage that is between contact
"A" and contact "B". Contact "A" is the supply.
Contact "B" is the sensor ground.
160
Expected Result: Repair: The signal circuit functions prol

Reconnect the sensor. Turn the ECS to 0
The voltage should be 8.0 ± 0.5 OCV and then turn the ECS to STOP. If the C
FMI 03 tault is still showing on the uppe
Results: the sensor has failed. Replace the sens
• OK - The voltage is 8.0 ± 0.5 OCV The sensor STOP.

voltage supply circuit tunctions properly. Proceed
to Test Step 2. • BATTERY VOLTAGE - The voltage is ee
+battery.
• NOT OK - The voltage is not 8.0 ± 0.5 OCV The
sensor voltage supply circuit has tailed or the Repair: The engine harness has tailed. 1
engine harness has an open circuit. Proceed to circuit within the engine harness is shor
Test Step 5. +battery. Troubleshoot the engine harne
repair the engine harness.
Test Step 2. CHECK FOR A DIAGNOSTIC
CODE. STOP.
A. Check the upper display tor a diagnostic code • NOT 7.0 ± 0.5 OR +BATTERY - The vol
for the sensor supply (CIO 0269). NOT 7.0 ± 0.5 OCV and the voltage is 1\
to +battery voltage. The GSC+ or the hi
Expected Result: has tailed. Proceed to Test Step 4.
CIO 0269 is not showing on the upper display. Test Step 4. CHECK THE HARNES
A SHORT.
Results:
Note: See Illustration 113 when this step
• OK - CIO 0269 is not showing on the upper performed. The sensor remains disconnec
display. The engine harness has an open circuit. the engine harness.
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
• NOT OK - CIO 0269 is showing on the upper
display. B. Ois.connect the harness connector trom
GSC+.
Repair: There is a problem with the sensor supply.
Exit this procedure and troubleshoot the sensor C. At the GSC+ harness connector, meaSL
supply (CIO 0269). resistance trom signal contact "8" to all
contacts ot the connector.
STOP.
Expected Result:
Test Step 3. CHECK THE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT. The resistance should be greater than 5001
for each measurement.
Note: The ECS remains in the STOP position and
the sensor remains disconnected trom the engine Results:
harness.
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5001
A. At the engine harness side ot the sensor tor each measurement. The harness tunc
connector, measure the voltage (OCV) between properly. Proceed to Test Step 5.
contact "C" and contact "B". Contact "C" is the
signal. Contact "B" is the sensor ground. • NOT OK - The resistance is not greater
5000 ohms tor each measurement.
Expected Result:
Repair: Troubleshoot the harness and rer
The voltage measures ... harness between the sensor connector a
connector ot the GSC+ .
Results:
STOP.
• 7.0 ± 0.5 OCV - The voltage is 7.0 ± 0.5 OCV.
161
Test Step 5. CHECK THE HARNESS FOR Repair: Connect all harness connectors that
AN OPEN. were previously disconnected. Start the engine.
If the CIO 0100 FMI 03 is still showing, replace
Note: See Illustration 113 when you are performing the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP
this step. The ECS remains in the OFF/RESET Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
position. The sensor remains disconnected from
the engine harness and the GSC+ remains STOP.
disconnected from the harness connector.
• NOT OK - There is a problem with a connector, a
A. Measure the resistance of the ground circuit. terminal or wiring.
Measure the resistance from contact "B" of the
harness connector for the sensor to contact "31" Repair: Repair the component that has failed.
of the harness connector for the GSC+.
STOP.
B. Measure the resistance of the signal circuit.
Measure the resistance from contact "C" of the
i01339871
harness connector for the sensor to contact "8"
of the harness connector for the GSC+. GSC CIO 0100 - FMI 04
C. Measur!l the resistance of the sensor supply SMCS Code: 1924-035
circuit. The sensor supply circuit is from contact
"A" of the sensor harness connector to contact SIN: 8NS1-Up
"9" of the GSC+ harness connector.
SIN: 9ES1-Up
Expected Result:
SIN: 5PW1-Up
For each measurement, the resistance should be 5 SIN: 6WW1-Up
ohms or less.
SIN: 8TW1-Up
Results:
SIN: LRW1-Up
• OK - The resistance is 5 ohms or less. Proceed SIN: LRX1-Up
to Test Step 6.
SIN: LRY1-Up
• NOT OK - The resistance is not 5 ohms or less.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Repair: The harness wiring with the incorrect
resistance measurement is open. The harness SIN: 8AZ1-Up
wiring has failed. Troubleshoot and repair
the failed harness wiring between the sensor Conditions Which Generate This Code:
connector and the GSC+ connector.
STOP. ENGINE v+ 0 67P

OIL
PRESSURE
SENSOR v- ® 62
Test Step 6. CHECK THE ELECTRICAL
'" ~"'-----'1
(EOPS)
CONNECTORS.
A. Check the electrical connectors, terminals and
wiring. Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical
Connector - Inspect".
GENERATOR
4>
Expected Result: SET
<V
CONTROL (GSC)
All connectors, terminals and wiring should function GSC-8

15
0
properly. OIL PRESSURE. 62 67
CSC-Jl 62
Results:
SENSOR v- 0-
GSC-9 .7
SENSOR v+sV-
• OK - All connectors, terminals and wiring should
function properly.
Illusfration 114 900527056
System Schemalic For the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

162
This diagnostic code is for the pressure sensor If aCID 0269 for the sensor supply is active, cc
(engine oil), the diagnostic code prior to proceeding with It
procedure.
The EMCP II + monitors the engine oil pressure in
order to protect the engine from a problem with the Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND 1
oil pressure. The oil pressure sensor is mounted on HARNESS.
the engine oil pressure sensor varies depending on A. Make sure that CIO 0100 FMI 04 is showing
the engine model. the display.
The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply B. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
from the GSC+. The oil pressure signal is a pulse
width modulated signal. The base frequency of the C. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harn
signal is 500 ± 150 Hz. As pressure changes, the The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
duty cycle of the signal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
D. Turn the ECS to the STOP position .
• 0 kPa (0 psi) is approximately 13% of the duty
cycle. The voltage will be approximately 1.0 OCv. E. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
• 690 kPa (100 psi) is approximately 85% of the F. Check if the CIO 0100 FMI 04 is not showin
duty cycle. Check if the CID 0100 FMI 03 is now showir
System Response: Expected Result:
Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a CIO 0100 FMI 04 is not showing. CID 0100 FM
problem with the oil pressure sensor as an alarm is now showing. CID 0100 FMI 03 is now actiVE
fault. The factory default for P004 is O. If the GSC+
is programmed to shutdown for a problem with the Results:
oil pressure sensor, then it is not necessary to press
the alarm codes key in order to view the CIO 0100 • OK - CIO 0100 FMI 04 is not showing. CID (
FMI 04. P004 is equal to 1 for a shutdown fault. The FMI 03 is now showing. CIO 0100 FMI 3 is n
upper display automatically shows the CIO 0100 active.
FM104.
Repair: The GSC+ and the harness function
Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the properly. The sensor has failed. Replace the
harness connector is disconnected from the GSC+ sensor. See Testing and Adjusting, "Pulse Wi
during the troubleshooting procedures. Clear Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test" for more sel
these created diagnostic codes after the particular testing.
problem is corrected.
STOP.
The possible cause of aCID 0100 FMI 04 is listed
below: • NOT OK - The CID 0100 FMI 04 is still show
The harness or the GSC+ has failed. Proceec
• A short to ground of the sensor signal. Test Step 2.
Begin performing these procedures only when CID Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.
100 FMI 4 is showing and the "OIAG" indicator is
FLASHING on the upper display. The diagnostic A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
code is active. The GSC+ treats aCID 0100 FMI
04 as an alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown B. Disconnect the harness connector from the
on the display when the "Alarm Codes" key is GSC+.
pressed. The engine control switch (ECS) must
not be in the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive C. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
diagnostic code, the problem may be intermittent.
To troubleshoot an inactive diagnostic code, use D. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
the preceding system schematic and see Testing
And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect". E. Check if the CIO 0100 FMI 04 is no longer
Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after showing. CIO 0100 FMI 03 should be showir
troubleshooting is complete. on the display.
163
xpected Result: • There is an open circuit on the CAT data link

between the engine ECM and the GSC.
100100 FMI 04 is nol showing and CID 0100 FMI
3 is now showing. • There is a problem with the temperature sensor
that is connected to the engine ECM.
:esults:
If aCID 024S FMI 09 for the CAT data link is active.
OK - CID 0100 FMI 04 is not showing and CID correct the diagnostic code prior to proceeding
0100 FMI 03 is now showing. with this procedure.
Repair: The GSC+ functions properly. The System Response:

signal wire is shorted to ground in the harness.
Troubleshoot the signal wire in the harness Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a
between the sensor connector and the GSC+ problem with the coolant temperature sensor as
connector. Also check the electrical connectors an alarm fault. Setpoint P004 is o. If the GSC+ is
and terminals. See Testing And Adjusting. programmed to treat a problem with the oil pressure
"Electrical Connector - Inspect". sensor as a shutdown fault. setpoint P04 is 1. Then.
it is not necessary to press the alarm codes key
STOP. in order to view the CID FMI. The CID 0110 FMI
02 diagnostic code is automatically shown on the
NOT OK - The CID 0100 FMI 04 is still showing. upper display.
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure harness connector is disconnected from the GSC+
and perform this entire procedure again. If during the troubleshooting procedures. Clear
the problem remains. replace the GSC+. See these created diagnostiC codes after the particular
Testing And Adjusting. "EMCP Electronic Control problem is corrected. In a properly operating
(Generator Set) - Replace". system. when the harness connector is removed
from the GSC+. the following diagnostic codes are
STOP. recorded.
Test Step 1. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC

101373263
. CODE.
iSC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for EUI View the diagnostic code that is displayed on the
:ngines) upper display panel of the EMCP 11+. Determine if
the diagnostic code is originating from the Engine
MCS Code: 1906-035 ECM.
IN: 5KW1-Up Expected Result:
IN: 6GW1-Up
There is a letter "E" after the number of the CID that
IN: SNW1-Up is on the upper display panel of the EMCP 11+.
IN: SAZ1-Up Results:
onditions Which Generate This Code: • YES - There is a letter "E" after the number of
the CID that is on the upper display panel of the
1e engine ECM monitors engine coolant EMCP 11+ .
,mperature in order to protect the engine from a
roblem with the coolant temperature. The coolant Repair: Troubleshoot the diagnostic code for
,mperature sensor is mounted in the water jacket. the Engine ECM. Refer to Troubleshooting.
ose to the front of the engine. The exact location SENR1003. "3500B EPG Engines" or
, the engine coolant temperature sensor varies Troubleshooting. RENR2227. "3406E EPG
epending on the engine model. Engines" for information on troubleshooting the
diagnostiC code.
1e GSC monitors the coolant temperature that is
,ad by the engine ECM. The engine ECM sends STOP.
e information to the GSC by the CAT data link.
• NO - There is not a letter "E" after the number of
1e possible causes of aCID 0110 FMI 02 are tile CID that is on the upper display panel of the
;ted below: EMCP 11+ . Proceed to Test Step 2.
164
Test Step 2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN i01340

CIRCUIT ON THE CAT DATA LINK.
GSC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for Ml
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. and PEEC Engines)
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the SMCS Code: 1906-035
GSC+. Disconnect the harness connector from
the engine ECM. SIN: BNS l-Up
C. At the harness connector for the engine ECM, SIN: 9ES l-Up
connect a jumper wire between contact J 1-9 and
SIN: 5PW1-Up
contact J 1-3.
SIN: 6WW1-Up
D. At the harness connector for the GSC+, measure
, the resistance between contact 19 and contact SIN: BTW1-Up
20.
SIN: LRW1-Up
Expected Result: SIN: LRX1-Up
The resistance that was measured between contact SIN: LRY1-Up
19 and contact 20 is less than 5 ohms.
SIN: 48Z1-Up
Results:
• OK - The resistance from contact 19 to contact
20 is less than 5 ohms. The CAT data link is ENGINE 0 671
COOLANT v+
correct. TEMPERATUE
SENSOR
(ECTS) y- ® 62
Repair: There is a problem with the temperature
sensor. On EUI engines, the temperature sensor
is connected to the engine ECM. Reconnect the ".f--<~~
harness connectors for the engine ECM and
the GSC+., Refer to Troublesh90ting, SENR1003,
"35008 EPG Engines" or Troubleshooting,
RENR2227, "3406E EPG Engines" for information GENERATOR
0
on troubleshooting the temperature sensor. CONTROL
SET
(Gse) 0
STOP. GSC-7 0'
COOLANT TEMP. ~ 16
62
GSC-31 67
• NOT OK - The resistance from contact 19 to SENSOR v- 'c;J 62
contact 20 is greater than 5 ohms. GSC;;~ 67

SENSOR v+ ",_
Repair: There is an open circuit in the CAT data

link between the GSC+ and the engine ECM.
Repair the wiring harness or replace the wiring
harness. Illustration 115 9005273
System Schematic For the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

STOP.
This diagnostic code is for the temperature
sensor (engine coolant),
The EMCP 11+ monitors engine coolant temperatur,

in order to protect the engine from a problem with
the coolant temperature. The coolant temperature
sensor is mounted in the water jacket, close to thE
front of the engine. The exact location of the engin
coolant temperature sensor varies depending on
the engine model.
165
ensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply Note: If a C ID 269 is active, correct the problem
the GSC+. The coolant temperature signal prior to proceeding with this procedure.
)ulse width modulated signal. The base
"ncy of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 Hz). Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND THE
mperature changes, the duty cycle of the HARNESS.
I varies from 10 to 95 percent.
A. Make sure that CID 0110 FMI 02 is showing on
JOC (-40°F) is approximately 10% of the duty the display.
:Ie. The voltage is approximately 1.0 DCV.
B. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
JOC (275'F) is approximately 93% of the duty
:Ie. C. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
,m .Response:
D. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat
blem with the coolant temperature sensor E. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. Pressing the "Alarm
I alarm fault. P004 = 0 is the factory default. Codes" key is not required for shutdown faults.
GSC+ is programmed to shutdown for a
3m with the coolant temperature sensor, then F. Check if the CID 0110 FMI 02 is not showing.
ot necessary' to press the "Alarm Codes" key The CID 0110 FMI 02 is inactive. Check if the
ler to view the CID 0110 FMI 02. P004 = 1 is CID 0110 FMI 03 is now showing. The CID 0110
Itdown. The CID 0110 FMI 02 is automatically FMI 03 is active.
n on the upper display.
Expected Result:
Diagnostic codes are created when the
'ss connector is disconnected from the GSC + The CID 0110 FMI 02 is not showing. The CID 0110
~ the troubleshooting procedures. Clear FMI 03 is now showing. The CID 0110 FMI 03 is
created diagnostic codes after the particular now active.
em is corrected.
Results:
1111 02 describes an incorrect signal.
• OK - The CID. 0110 FMI 02 is not showing. The
)ossible causes of aCID 0110 FMI 02 are CID 0110 FMI 03 'is now showing. The CID 110
below: FMI 03 is now active.
) base frequency of the sensor signal is Repair: The GSC+ and the harness function
lond accepted limits. properly. Therefore, the sensor has failed.
Replace the sensor. More testing for the sensor
) duty cycle of the sensor signal is beyond is available. See Testing And Adjusting, "Pulse
;epted limits. Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test".
1 to perform these procedures only when the STOP.

)110 FMI 02 is showing and when the "DIAG"
ltor is FLASHING on the upper display. The • NOT OK - The CID 0110 FMI 02 is still showing.
lOS tic code is active when the "DIAG" indicator The harness has failed or the GSC+ has failed.
'1SHING. The GSC+ treats aCID 0110 FMI 02 Proceed to Test Step 2.
I alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown on
isplay when the alarm codes key is pressed Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.
he engine control switch (ECS) is in any
on except the OFF/RESET position. For an A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
ve diagnostic code, the problem may be
nittent. To troubleshoot an inactive diagnostic B. Disconnect the harness connector from lhe
, use the preceding system schematic and GSC+.
esting And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
lct". Clear the diagnostic code from the fault C. Turn the ECS to the STOP pOSition.
fter troubleshooting is complete.
D. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
This procedure can be replaced by
Ie shooting the sensor signal with a meter that E. Check if the CID 0110 FMI 02 is not showing.
Jabls of measuring frequency and duly cycle. The CID 0110 FMI 02 is inactive. Check if the
festing And Adjusting, "Pulse Width Modulated CID 0110 FMI 03 is now showing. The CID 0110
1) Sensor - Test". FMI 03 is active.
166
Expected Result: i0134
CIO 0110 FMI 02 is not showing. The CIO 0110 GSC CID 0110 - FMI 03
FMI 03 is now showing. The CIO 0110 FMI 03 is
now active. SMCS Code: 1906-035
SIN: 8NS1-Up
Results:
SIN: 9ES1-Up
• OK - CIO 0110 FMI 2 is not showing. The CIO
0110 FMI 03 is now showing. The CIO 0110 FMI SIN: 5PW1·Up
03 is now active.
SIN: 6WW1-Up
Repair: The GSC+ functions properly. Therefore, SIN: 8TW1-Up
the signal wire has failed in the harness.
Troubleshoot the signal wire in the harness SIN: LRW1-Up
between the sensor connector and the GSC+
connector. Also check the electrical connectors SIN: LRX1-Up
and terminals. See Testing And Adjusting,
SIN: LRY1-Up
"Electrical Connector - Inspect".
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
STOP. .
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
• NOT OK - The CIO 0110 FMI 02 is still showing.
Repair: The GSC+ is has failed. Replace the
GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATUE
v+ 0 67T
@
STOP.
SENSOR
(ECTS) v- 62
''"~~---'1
GENERATOR
<i>
CONTROL
SET
(GSC) 0
COOLANT TEMP r.X'
GSC-7
16
0
62
GS;-Jl 6:
v~~&
62
SENSOR
67
SENSOR v+ "...
System Schematic For Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

(ECTS)
The EMCP 11+ monitors the engine coolant

temperature in order to protect the engine trom e
problem with the coolant temperature. The coolar
temperature sensor is mounted in the water jackE
close to the front of the engine. The exact locatio
of the engine coolant temperature sensor varies
depending on the engine model.
167
l sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply C. At the engine harness side of the sensor
n the GSC+. The coolant temperature signal connector, measure the voltage (OCV) that is
, pulse width modulated signal. The base between contact "A" and contact "S". Contact
wency of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 Hz). "A" is the supply for the sensor. Contact "S" is
temperature changes, the duty cycle of the the ground for the sensor.
nal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
Expected Result:
-40'C (-40'F) is approximately 10% of the duty
:ycie. The voltage is approximately 1.0 OCv. The voltage should be 8.0 ± 0.5 OCv.
35'C (275'F) is approximately 93% of the duty Results:

:ycie.
• OK - The voltage is 8.0 ± 0.5 OCv. The sensor
,te!1l Response: voltage supply circuit functions properly. Proceed
to Test Step 2.
Ie: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat
,ult with the coolant temperature sensor as an • NOT OK - The voltage is not 8.0 ± 0.5 OCv. The
rm fault. P004is set to 0 for the factory default. sensor voltage supply circuit has failed. Check
) GSC+ is programmed to shutdown when P004 the upper display for a diagnostic code for the
,et to 1. If the GSC+ is programmed to shutdown sensor supply (CIO 0269). Correct the problem
a fault with tlie coolant temperature sensor, then with the sensor supply. If there is not a problem
operator is not required to press the "Alarm with the sensor supply, then the engine harness
jes" key in order to view the CIO 0110 FMI 03. has an open circuit. Proceed to Test Step 4.
) CIO 0110 FMI 03 is automatically shown on the
Jer display. Test Step 2. CHECK THE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT.
) possible causes of a CIO 0110 FMI 03 fault
listed below: A. The ECS remains in the STOP and the sensor
remains disconnected from the sensor harness.
, short to +battery of the sensor signal. At the engine harness side of the sensor
connector, measure the voltage (OCV) between
,n open circuit of the sensor signal. contact "c" and contact "B". Contact "c" is the
. signal of the sensor. Contact "B" is the sensor
Jin performing these procedures only when CIO ground.
o FMI 03 is showing and the "OIAG" indicator
:LASHING on the upper display. The flashing Expected Result:
I\G" indicator means that the fault is active.
, GSC+ treats a CIO 0110 FMI 03 fault as an The voltage measures ...
m fault. Active alarm faults are shown on the
)Iay when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed and Results:
engine control switch (ECS) is in any position
ept the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive • 7.0 ± 0.5 OCV - The voltage is 7.0 ± 0.5 OCv.
t, use the preceding system schematic and
Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector Repair: The signal circuit functions properly. Verify
spect". Clear the fault from the fault log after this result by checking the upper display for the
Ibleshooting is complete. fault. Reconnect the sensor. Turn the ECS to the
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to
e: If a diagnostic code for the sensor supply the STOP position. If the CIO 0110 FMI 03 is still
) 0269) is active, correct the diagnostic code showing on the display, the sensor has failed.
the sensor supply prior to proceeding with this Replace the sensor.
~edure.
STOP.
;t Step 1. CHECK THE SUPPLY
~CUIT. • SATTERY VOLTAGE - The voltage is not 7.0 ±
0.5 OCv. Voltage is equal to + battery.
-urn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
:CS to the STOP position. Repair: The engine harness has failed. The signal
circuit within the engine harness is shorted to
)isconnect the sensor from the engine harness. + battery. Troubleshoot and repair the engine
-he sensor remains fastened to the engine. harness.
STOP.
168
• NOT 7.0 ± 0.5 DCV OR +BATTERY - The voltage C. Measure the resistance of the sensor supp
is NOT 7.0 ± 0.5 DCV. The voltage is NOT equal circuit. The measurement should be taken I
to + battery. The GSC+ or the harness is faulty. contact "A" of the sensor harness connectc
Proceed to Test Step 3. contact "9" of the GSC+ harness connector
Test Step 3. CHECK FOR A SHORTED Expected Result:

HARNESS.
For each measurement, the resistance should
Note: See illustration 116 when you are performing ohms or less.
this step. The sensor remains disconnected from
the engine harness. Results:
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. • OK - For each measurement, the resistancE
5 ohms or less. The harness functions propE
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the Proceed to Test Step 5.
GSC+.
• NOT OK - For each measurement, the resis:
C. At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the is not 5 ohms or less.
resistance from signal contact "7" to all other
contacts of the connector. Repair: The harness wiring with the incorree
resistance measurement is open. The harne
Expected Result: wiring has failed. Troubleshoot and repair
the failed harness wiring between the sense
For each measurement, the resistance should be connector and the GSC+ connector.
greater than 5000 ohms.
STOP.
Results:
Test Step 5. CHECK THE ELECTRICA
• OK - For each measurement, the resistance is CONNECTORS.
greater than 5000 ohms. The harness functions
properly. Proceed to Test Step 4. A. Check the electrical connectors, terminals
and wiring. Proceed to Testing And Adjustir
• NOT OK - For each measurement, the resistance "Ele.c;:trical Connector - Inspect" for more
is not greater'than 5000 ohms. information on checking the electrical conne
and wiring.
Repair: The harness wiring with the incorrect
resistance is shorted in the harness. Troubleshoot Expected Result:
and repair the failed harness wiring between the
sensor and the GSC+ connector. All connectors, terminals and wiring should fun
properly.
STOP.
Results:
Test Step 4. CHECK FOR AN OPEN
HARNESS, • OK - All connectors, terminals and wiring
function properly.
Note: See illustration 116 when you are performing
this step. The sensor remains disconnected from the Repair: Connect all harness connectors that I
engine harness. The ECS remains in the OFF/RESET previously disconnected. Start the engine. If
position. The sensor remains disconnected from the CID 0110 FMI 03 is still showing, the GSr
the engine harness and the GSC+ remains may have failed. It is unlikely that the GSC+ ,
disconnected from the harness connector. failed. Exit this procedure and perform this er
procedure again. If the problem remains, rep
A. Measure the resistance of the ground circuit The the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMC
measurement should be taken from contact "8" Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace"
of the sensor harness connector to contact "31"
of the GSC+ harness connector. STOP.
B. Measure the resistance of the signal circuit. The • NOT OK - All connectors, terminals and wiril
measurement should be taken from contact "C" do not function properly.
of the sensor harness connector to contact "7"
of the GSC+ harness connector.
169
Repair: Repair the component that has failed. Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat a
coolant temperature sensor problem as an alarm
STOP. fault. The factory default of P004 is O. If the GSC+ is
programmed to shutdown for a coolant temperature
sensor fault, the operator is not required to press
101366872
the "Alarm Codes" key in order to view the CIO 110
iSC CID 0110 - FMI 04 FMI 4. The upper display automatically shows the
CIO 110 FMI 4.
IIICS Code: 1906-035
The possible cause of a CIO 110 FMI 4 is provided
mditions Which Generate This Code: below:
lis diagnostic code is associated with the • A short to the -battery of the sensor signal.
mperature sensor. The FMI 04 means that the
19ine Coolant Temperature Sensor has determined Begin performing these procedures only when CIO
3t the Engine Coolant Temperature is below 110 FMI 4 is showing and the "OIAG" indicator
lrmal. is FLASHING on the upper display. The flashing
indicator indicated that the diagnostic code is
active. The GSC+ treats a CIO 110 FMI 4 as
ENGINE (]) 57T
an alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown
COOLANT v+
-EMPERATUE on the display when the "Alarm Codes" key
SENSOR €I 52
"" '---!"-~-'l
(ECTS) v- is pressed. The engine control switch (ECS)
must be in any position except the OFF/RESET
position. For an inactive fault, the problem may be
intermittent. To troubleshoot an inactive fault, use
And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
<i> Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
GENERATOR troubleshooting is complete.
SET
CONTROL (GSC)
0
GSC-:/ '6
0 Note: If a CIO 269 FMI 3 or a CIO 269 FMI 4 is
COOLANT TEMP • 62 active, correct the sensor supply fault prior to
GS~31 62
67 proceeding with this procedure.
SENSOR v- •
Gst;l 67 Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND THE
SENSOR v+ !-"
HARNESS.
A. Make sure that CIO 110 FMI 4 is showing on the
900527377
display.
stratian 117
stem Schematic For Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor S. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
~TS)
C. ~isconnect the sensor from the engine harness.

le EMCP 11+ system monitors the engine coolant The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
llperature in order to protect the engine from
coolant temperature problem. The coolant D. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
llperature sensor is mounted in the water jacket.
Ie exact location of the engine coolant temperature E. Press the Alarm Codes key.
nsor varies depending on the engine model.
F. Check if the CIO 110 FMI 4 is not present. Check
,e sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply if the CIO 110 FMI 3 is now showing.
1m the GSC+. The coolant temperature signal
a pulse width modulated signal. The base Expected Result:
lquency of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 Hz).
; temperature changes, the duty cycle of the CIO 110 FMI 4 is not showing. CIO 110 FMI 4 is
lnal varies from 10 to 95 percent. now inactive. CIO 110 FMI 3 is now showing. CIO
110 FMI 3 is now active.
-40°C (-40°F) is approximately 10% of the duty
cycle. This is approximately 1.0 OCV. Results:
135°C (275°F) is approximately 93% of the duty • OK - The GSC + and the harness function
cycle. properly. Therefore, the sensor has failed.
Replace the sensor.
170
Repair: For more sensor testing information, refer i017

to Testing and Adjusting, "Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM) Sensor - Test". GSC CID 0111 - FMI 03
STOP. SMCS Code: 1395-035
• NOT OK - The CID 110 FMI 4 is still showing. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
The harness or the GSC+ has failed. Proceed to
Test Step 2.
ENGINE
COOLANT v+
0 67L
Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+ LOSS

SENSOR @ 62
(EClS) v-
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position .
. B. Disconnect the harness connector from the

GSC+.
"" ---<"-------"'1
C. Turn the ECS to the STOP position. <?>
GENERATOR
D. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
SET
CONTROL (GSC) <0
GSC-l.3
16
<
E. Check if the CID 110 FMI 4 is not showing. CID COOLANT LOSS r;<
62
110 FMI 3 should now be showing. GSc':'.31
SENSOR v- -,.< 62
GS~9
Expected Result: 67
SENSOR v+ ~
CID 110 FMI 4 is not showing and CID 110 FMI 3 is

now showing.
gODS::
Illustration 11 B
Results: Simplified System Schematic For Engine Coolant Loss Sense
(EeLS)
• OK - The GSC+ functions properly. Therefore,
the signal wire has failed in the harness. The EMCP II + system monitors engine coolant
order to protect the engine in case of a coolant
Repair: Troubleshoot the signal wire in the harness temperature problem. The engine coolant loss
between the sensor connector and the GSC+ function is an option that requires the presence
connector. Also check the electrical connectors of the optional coolant loss sensor. The coolant
and terminals. For additional information, refer loss sensor is usually mounted near the top of II
to Testing and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector radiator.
- Inspect".
The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supr
STOP. from the GSC+. When coolant is NOT present at
sensor, a high signal is sent to the GSC+. A hig
• NOT OK - The CID 110 FMI 4 is still showing. signal is approximately +5 DCV. When coolant i!
present at the sensor, a low signal (battery negati
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely is sent to the GSC+.
and perform this entire procedure again. If Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See coolant loss sensor problems as an alarm fault.
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control P004 is equal to O. If the GSC+ is programmed'
(Generator Set) - Replace". shutdown, P004 is equal to 1. The operator is nc
required to press the "Alarm Codes" key in orde
STOP. to view the CID 111 FMI 3. The CID 111 FMI 3 i:
automatically shown on the upper display.
The possible causes of aCID 111 FMI 3 are listE

below.
• A short to +battery of the sensor signal
• An open circuit of the sensor signal

171
jin performing these procedures only when CID Results:

FMI 3 is showing and the "DIAG" indicator
LASHING on the upper display. The flashing • The voltage is 2.5 DCV (± 0.5 DCV) - The signal
cator means that the diagnostic code is active. circuit functions properly. Proceed to Test Step 3 .
. GSC+ treats aCID 111 FMI 3 as an alarm
t. Active alarm faults are shown on the display • The voltage is equal to battery positive - The
m the alarm code key is pressed and the engine harness has failed.
line control switch (ECS) is in any position
ept the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive Repair: The signal circuit that is within the engine
t, the problem may be intermittent. See Testing harness is shorted to the +battery. Troubleshoot
I Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect" in and repair the engine harness.
3r to troubleshoot an inactive fault. Also use the
~eding system schematic. Clear the fault from STOP.
fau)t log after troubleshooting is complete.
• The voltage is NOT 2.5 DCV (± 0.5 DCV) and the
e: If aCID 269 FMI 3 or aCID 269 FMI 4 voltage is NOT equal to battery positive - The
ctive, correct the diagnostic code prior to GSC+ or the harness has failed. Proceed to Test
~eeding with this procedure. Step 4.
;t Step 1. CHECK THE SENSOR Test Step 3. CHECK THE SENSOR.

LTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT.
-urn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Then, turn the ECS
o the STOP position. B. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
)isconnect the sensor from the engine harness. C. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
-he sensor remains fastened to the engine. The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
It the engine harness side of the sensor D. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET
:onnector, measure the voltage (DCV) that is
letween contact "A" and contact "8". Contact E. Turn the ECS to STOP
A" is the supply for the sensor. Contact "8" is
he sensor ground. Expected Result:
lected Result: CID 111 FMI 3 should no longer appear on the

upper display.
voltage should be 8.0 DCV (± 0.5 DCV).
Results:
iUItS:
• OK - CID 111 FMI 3 no longer appears on the
- The voltage is 8.0 DCV (± 0.5 DCV). Proceed upper display. STOP.
, Test Step 2.
• NOT OK - CID 111 FMI 3 is still showing on the
OT OK - The sensor voltage supply circuit has upper display. The sensor has failed. Replace
jled. Proceed to Test Step 5. the sensor. STOP.
.t Step 2. CHECK THE SIGNAL Test Step 4. CHECK FOR A SHORTED

ICUIT. HARNESS.
·urn the ECS to OFF/RESET Then, turn the ECS A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
) the STOP position.
lisconnect the sensor from the engine harness. The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
he sensor remains fastened to the engine.
C. Disconnect the harness connector from the
,t the engine harness side of the sensor GSC+.
onnector, measure the voltage (DCV) between
ontact "C" and contact "8". Contact "C" is the D. At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the
ignal. Contact "8" is the sensor ground. resistance from signal contact "13" to all other
contacts of the connector.
ected Result:
voltage should be 2.5 DCV (± 0.5 DCV).

172
Expected Result: • NOT OK - The harness wiring with the incorn

resistance measurement is open.
For each measurement, the resistance should be
greater than 5000 ohms. Repair: The harness wiring has failed.
Troubleshoot and repair the failed harness wir
Results: between the sensor connector and the GSC+
harness connector.
• OK - For each measurement, the resistance is
greater than 5000 ohms. The harness functions STOP.
properly. Proceed to Test Step 5.
Test Step 6. CHECK THE ELECTRICAl
• NOT OK - At one or more of the measurements, CONNECTORS.
the resistance is less than 5000 ohms.
A. Check the electrical connectors, terminals ar
Repair: The harness wiring with the incorrect wiring. Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Electr
resistance is shorted in the harness. Troubleshoot Connector - Inspect".
and repair the failed harness wiring. The fault is
between the sensor connector and the GSC+ Expected Result:
harness connector.
All connectors, terminals and wiring should func
STOP: properly.
Test Step 5. CHECK FOR AN OPEN Results:

HARNESS.
• OK - Connect all harness connectors that we
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. previously disconnected.
B. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness. Repair: Start the engine. If the CID 111 FMI 2
The sensor remains fastened to the engine. is still showing, the GSC+ may have failed. It
is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this
C. Disconnect the harness connector from the procedure and perform this entire procedure
GSC+. again. If the problem remains, replace the GSr
See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic
D. Measure the resistance of the ground circuit. The Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
ground circuit is from contact "8" of the sensor
harness connector to contact "31" of the GSC+ STOP.
harness connector.
• NOT OK - Repair the area with the problem.
E. Measure the resistance of the signal circuit. The STOP.
signal circuit is from contact "C" of the sensor
harness connector to contact "13" of the GSC+
harness connector. i0136
F. Measure the resistance of the sensor voltage

GSC CIO 0168 - FMI 03
supply circuit. The sensor voltage supply circuit SMCS Code: 1406-035
is from contact "A" of the sensor harness
connector to contact "9" of the GSC+ harness Conditions Which Generate This Code:
connector.
This diagnostic code is associated with an
Expected Result: electrical system voltage that is above normal
The FMI 03 means that the engine electronic con
For each measurement, the resistance should be 5 module (ECM) has determined that the electrica
ohms or less. system voltage is above normal.
Results:
• OK - For each measurement, the resistance is

5 ohms or less. The harness functions properly.
Proceed to Step 6.
173
-, ["""'-- ,-
w W w~ GJ w
n ,~)--~ V------{-,
1
'" r~IIN:J
os
Lj'l~
NEG
/ 2
~rt;51 r~,,31
~~ ~
11
""iJ£'
RM:'
R TT W 10
or'
~_L....l..
K3 1<7
10
~- L...:L
or'
'f J'
v 6 RM-l 6
RM-l
+8AT SW 9 -r- I "'BAT SW 9 -r- I
• _1- I GENERATOR • _1- I
GENERATOR I I SET I I
SET CONTROL
CONTROL o-?--r- I o-?--r- I
I I
:-rI
---L I 2-- ---L 1
GSC-.39 -/ GSC-39
OFF /RESET / Off /RESET
C-32
)lDOWN/STOP /'-
GSC-40
AUTO
GSC-J.3
START
/'
?
;(
~
..( 4 _'_
ENGINE
CONTROL
SWITCH
(EeS)
GSC-32
COOL DOWN/STOP
GSC-40
Auro
GSC-33
START
:-[1
4 ---'--
ENGINE
CONTROL
SWITCH
(Ees)
57
REMOTE 1 t~WI@]]
)--(~
~
REMOTE
START
CONTACT
30
START/
STOP
Ie .. x0 ..
RM-27
fL YBACK ~
v
30 30 RM-27
FL ,(BAC . V' "
TW'
:J , 2
-28 ...-..
<T v
Q RM-28~G
-BAT
\.J 2 2 2 2
ration 119 g00689475 g00681915

Illustration 120
,!ified System Schematic For Battery Voltage On MUI Engines System Schematic For Battery Voltages On EU! And PEEC
Engines
The EMCP 11+ monitors the battery voltage in order

to protect the EMCP 11+ from a battery problem or
from a charging problem. The battery voltage is
received from the engine electronic control module
(ECM) by the CAT data link. If you receive aCID
168 E diagnostic code, refer to Troubleshooting,
"3500B Generator Set Engines Troubleshooting".
diagnostic code. The threshold for aCID 168 FMI
03 for battery voltage is greater than 32 DCV tor
24 volt system. The threshold for aCID 168 FMI
03 tor batlery voltage is greater than 45 DCV for a
32 volt system.
174
Table 22
POSSIBLE CAUSES FOR CID 168 DIAGNOSTIC CODES
The Location that the Diagnostic Code Battery Voltage Thresholds Battery Voltage Threshol
Diagnostic Code is (24 Volt System) (32 Volt System)
Displayed On
Engine ECM CIO 168 E 00 The engine is running and
the battery voltage is greater
than 32 OCV more than two
seconds.
Engine ECM CIO 168 E 01 The engine is not running
and the battery voltage is
less than 9 OCV for more
than two seconds.
Engine ECM CIO 168 E 02 The engine is not running.
The battery voltage is less
than 9 OCV for a period of .07
seconds. The battery voltage
then returns to 9 OCV (or
greater). The other possible
diagnostic code cause is
that the battery voltage goes
below 9 OCV three times in
seven seconds.
GSC+ CIO 168 FMI 03 Regardless of engine statu
the battery voltage is great
than the P007 limit.
GSC+ CIO 168 FMI 04 Regardless of the engine
status, the battery voltage I
less than 18 OCV.
The setpoint for the system voltage (P007) specifies Test Step 1. CHECK THE SYSTEM'S
the battery voltage. VOLTAGE.
24 - 24 Volt System A. Turn the ECS to the STOP.
32 - 32 Volt System 8. Measure the voltage across the battery termini
Note: The GSC+ does not receive battery power Expected Result:
when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. When
contact 6 is connected to one of the contacts (8, For a 24 volt system, the voltage should be betw(
9, 10), the GSC+ receives battery power when the 24.8 DCV and 29.5 DCV. For a 32 volt system, tt
ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. voltage should be between 33.1 DCV and 39.3 01
Before beginning this procedure, ensure that the Results:

following steps have been performed:
• OK - For a 24 volt system, the voltage is 24.8
• VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC CODE. DCV to 29.5 DCV. For a 32 volt system, the
voltage is 33.1 DCV to 39.3 DCV. Proceed to ""
• Make sure that the CID 168 FMI 03 is shown on Step 2.
the display.
• NOT OK - For 24 volt systems, the voltage is I
• Enter service mode. between 24.8 DCV to 29.5 DCV. For a 32 volt
system, the voltage is not between 33.1 DCV t
• Turn the ECS to the STOP position. 39.3 DCV. The problem is in the charging SyStE
Note: When Program Setpoint P023 is set to 0, Repair: Proceed to Testing and Adjusting,
the GSC+ is programmed for an MUI engine. "Charging System - Test".
The engine's electronic control module (ECM) is
eliminated as a possibility of the problem. STOP.
175
st Step 2. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE C. Measure the voltage at terminal 6 on the ECS.
:TWEEN DC CONNECTOR TERMINALS Take note of the voltage.
10 THE BATTERY VOLTAGE.
D. Compare the voltage that was measured at the
, DC connectors are located at the bottom of DC connector terminals with the voltage that was
control panel. Terminals 1 and 2 are wired measured at the ECS.
ether in the circuit. Terminals 11 and 12 are
ld together in the circtui Expected Result:
furn the ECS to the STOP position. The voltage that was measured at the DC connector
terminals and the voltage that was measured at the
V1easure the battery voltage across the battey ECS are within 2.0 DCV of each other.
:erminals. Take note of the battery voltage.
Results:
V1easure the voltage between terminal 1 on
:he DC connector and terminal 11. Repeat the • OK - The voltage that was measured at the DC
lleasurement between terminal 1 and terminal connector terminals and the voltage that was
12. Repeat the measurement between terminal measured at the ECS are within 2.0 DCV of each
2 and terminal 11. Repeat the measurement other. Proceed to Test Step 4.
Jetween terminal 2 and terminal 12. Take note of
:he voltages .. • NOT OK - The voltage that was measured at the
DC connector terminals and the voltage that was
::;ompare the voltage measured at the battery measured at the ECS are NOT within 2.0 DCV of
Nith the voltage measured between the DC each other. The wiring harness is not correct.
~onnector terminals.
Repair: Repair the wiring harness or replace the
lected Result: wiring harness.
, voltage measured at the battery and the voltage Proceed to Test Step 10.
asured between the DC connector terminals
Juld be within 2.0 DCV. Test Step 4. CHECK THE CONTINUITY
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 7).
;ults:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches
)K - The voltage measured at the battery and terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire.
1e voltage measured between the DC connector
,rminals are within 2.0 DCV of each other. B. Place the ECS in the "OFF/RESET" position.
'roceed to Test Step 3.
C. With an ohmmeter, measure the resistance
lOT OK - The voltage measured at the battery between ECS terminal 6 and ECS terminal 7.
nd the voltage measured between the DC Continue to measure the resistance between
onnector terminals are NOT within 2.0 DCV of ECS terminal 6 and ECS terminal 7 while the
ach other. Th.e wiring harness is not correct. ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", and
"STOP" positions. Take note of the readings.
lepair: Repair the wiring harness or replace the
{iring harness. Expected Result:
'roceed to Test Step 10. When the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position, there
should be less than 5 Ohms resistance between
st Step 3. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6. There should
:TWEEN DC CONNECTOR TERMINALS be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Terminal
10 THE ECS. 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AUTO,
MANUAL, or STOP positions.
furn the ECS to the STOP position.
Results:
vleasure the voltage between terminal 1 on
he DC connector and terminal 11. Repeat the • OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance
neasurement between terminal 1 and terminal between ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6
12. Repeat the measurement between terminal when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position.
, and terminal 11. Repeat the measurement There are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS
Jetween terminal 2 and terminal 12. Take note of Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
he voltages. in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The
ECS has not failed. Proceed to Test Step 8.
176
• NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms Expected Resu It:

resistance between ECS Terminal 7 and ECS
Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms between between ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 VI
ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There Sf
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Tem
The ECS has failed. Proceed to Test Step 10. 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AI
Test Step 5. CHECK THE CONTINUITY
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 8). Results:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches • OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistancE
terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire. between ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal I
when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position.
Expected Result: There are greater than 5000 Ohms between
Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when the EC:
There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. T
between ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when ECS has not failed. Proceed to Test Step 8.
the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There should
be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Terminal • NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms
8 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AUTO, resistance between ECS Terminal 9 and EC~
MANUAL, or STOP positions. Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESE
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms bell
Results: ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when th
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP posit
• OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance The ECS has failed .
between ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6
when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. Repair: Replace the ECS. Reinstall the jump,
There are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS wire.
Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The Proceed to Test Step 10.
Test Step 7 ... CHECK THE CONTINUITV .
• NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms THE ECS (TERMINAL 10).
Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attac
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms between terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire.
ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when the
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. B. Return the ECS to the "OFF/RESET" position
The ECS has failed.
C. With an ohmmeler, measure the resistance
Repair: Replace the ECS. Reinstall the jumper between ECS terminal 10 and ECS terminal
wire. Continue to measure the resistance betweel
ECS terminal 10 and ECS terminal 6 while tl
Proceed to Test Step 10. ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", a
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 9). Expected Result:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance
terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire. between ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6,
the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There sh
B. Return the ECS to the "OFF/RESET" position. be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS TenT
10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in thE
C. With an ohmmeter, measure the resistance AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions.
between ECS terminal 9 and ECS terminal 6.
Continue to measure the resistance between
ECS terminal 9 and ECS terminal 6 while the
ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", and
177
mils: D. Compare the following voltage measurements:

the voltage measured between "RM-1" and
)K - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance "RM-28" and the voltage measured on the lower
,etween ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal display.
here are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Expected Result:
erminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
1 the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The The voltage that was measured between "RM-1"
CS has not failed. Proceed to Test Step 8. and "RM-28" should be within 2 DCV of the voltage
that was measured on the lower display.
lOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms
lsistance between ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Results:
erminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET
osition. There are less than 5000 Ohms between • OK - The voltage that was measured between
CS Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the "RM-1" and "RM-28" is within 2 DCV of the
CS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. voltage that was measured on the lower display.
he ECS has failed. Proceed to Test Step 10.
Repair: The problem is probably an intermittent
st Step 8. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE failure that was caused by a failed connector.
:TWEEN RM-1 AND THE ECS. Inspect the electrical connectors. Refer to Testing
and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect". If
rurn the ECS to the STOP position. the failed connector can not be found, the GSC+
may have failed. It is unlikely that the GSC+ has
:;heck the voltage between "RM-1" and "RM-28". failed. Exit this procedure and perform this entire
rake note of the voltage. procedure again. If the problem remains, replace
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP
:;heck the voltage on ECS contact 10. Take note Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
)f the voltage.
STOP.
:;ompare the following voltage measurements:
he voltage measured between "RM-1" and • NOT OK - The voltage that was measured
'RM-28" and the voltage measured on ECS between "RM-1" and "RM-28" is NOT within 2
~ontact 10. DCV of the voltage that. was measured on the
lower display. The GSC+ has failed.
)ected Result:
, voltage that was measured between "RM-1" that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
I "RM-28" should be within 2 DCV of the voltage and perform this entire procedure again. If
: was measured on ECS contact 10. the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
lults: (Generator Set) - Replace".
)K - The voltage that was measured between STOP.

'lM-1" and "RM-28" is within 2 DCV of the
oltage that was measured on ECS contact 10. Test Step 10. Reprogram the GSC+.
he harness is correct. Proceed to Test Step 9.
A. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
lOT OK - The voltage that was measured
etween "RM-1" and "RM-28" is NOT within 2 B. Program the setpoint P023. Refer to System
ICV of the voltage that was measured on ECS Operation, "Engine Generator Programming
ontact 10. Proceed to Test Step 10. OP5-0".
,t Step 9. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE c. Turnthe ECS to the OFF/RESET position. If

:TWEEN RM-1 AND THE LOWER applicable, disconnect the jumper wire on the
;PLAY. ECS that is between pin 6 and pin 9. Not all
generators will have a jumper wire between pin
rurn the ECS to the STOP position. 6 and pin 9.
:;heck the voltage between "RM-1" and "RM-28". D. Verify that the diagnostic code is no longer
rake note of the voltage. present.
:;heck the voltage that is shown on the lower

Jisplay. Take note of the voltage.
178
E. Replace the jumper between pin 6 and pin 9, Not

all generators will have a jumper wire between
pin 6 and pin 9,
~. -j-- ,--'--
Expected Result:
W [I;l G1 1
Setpoint P023 should be programmed to the correct r>-)--~

n I/---{
setting, The diagnostic code should no longer be
l~rl':J
os NEC
present. Ljrle-J
Results: GL(~
• OK - Setpoint P023 is programmed to the correct
setting, The diagnostic code is no longer present.
, STOP.
• NOT OK - Setpoint P023 is not programmed to

the correct setting, The diagnostic code is still
present.
""W:' 10-'9-
K.3 K7
RM-l
+BAT SW
GENERATOR
9
8
-j--
_1_
or'
r- L ,
I
I
1 6
Repair:'Reprogram the GSC+, Refer to System CONTROL

SET I I
Operation, "Engine Generator Programming 02--j-- I
I
:-rI
OP5-0", GSC-.39 , -L 1
OFF /RESET
STOP, GSC-32
COOL DOWN/STOP
CSC-40 ENGINE
AUTO CONTROL
i01372092 SWITCH
GSC-33 4 --'- (ECS)
GSC CID 0168 - FMI 04
t
START
SMCS Code: 1406-035

bW'8
)-{-!l REMOTE
START
CONTACT
30
Conditions Which Generate This Code: Xm

r~Y
RM-27 . . 30
This diagnostic code is associated with an FLYBACKV
electrical system voltage that is below normal. 2
The FMI 04 means that the engine electronic control RM-28 A
module (ECM) has determined that the electrical

-BAT V
"-'7 2 2
system voltage is below normal.
Simplified System Schematic For Battery Voltage On MUI Engin

179
'0/, W
1
'\ n 1/ 2
r~,t31
OS NEG
y,,~
~~
rP RM-l
+BAT SW
V 10-'],~ -
9 -t-
8 _1-
r -
.,-'
L '1
I
I
GENERATOR I I
SET
CONl ROl 02--t- I
I -L I
GSC-,39 ..;
OFF/RESET?
-32 ,(
2-,[
5-t-
.DOWN/STOP ~
~~;04D P
,--
I
I
ENGINE
CONTROL
SWITCH
' -----L- (ECS)
GSC-.33
START ft!-
57 ~
REMOTE
START/
I
STOP
Ie
, 30
RM-27 J\. '0
FL YBACK
:J 2
V
2
18~-e 2
,
g00689475
:ltion 122
11 Schematic For Battery Voltages On EUI And PEEC
es
EMCP 11+ monitors the battery voltage in order

otect the EMCP 11+ from a battery problem or
a charging problem. The battery voltage is
ved from the engine electronic control module
~) by the CAT data link. If you receive aCID
E diagnostic code, refer to Troubleshooting,
JB Generator Set Engines" or Troubleshooting,
BE Generator Set Engines". The GSC+ treats
) 168 FMI 4 as an alarm diagnostic code. The
hold for aCID 168 FMI 04 for battery voltage is
than 18 DCV for 24 volt system. The threshold
CID 168 FMI 4 for battery voltage is less than
CV for a 32 volt system.
180
Table 23
POSSIBLE CAUSES FOR CID 168 DIAGNOSTIC CODES
The Location that the Diagnostic Code Battery Voltage Thresholds Battery Voltage Threshol
Diagnostic Code is (24 Volt System) (32 Volt System)
Displayed On
Engine ECM CID 168 E 00 The engine is running and
the battery voltage is greater
than 32 DCV more than two
seconds.
Engine ECM CID 168 E 01 The engine is not running
and the battery voltage is
less than 9 DCV for more
than two seconds.
Engine ECM CID 168 E 02 The engine is not running.
The battery voltage is less
than 9 DCV for a period of .07
seconds. The battery voltage
then returns to 9 DCV (or
greater). The other possible
diagnostic code cause is
that the battery voltage goes
below 9 DCV three times in
seven seconds.
GSC+ CID 168 FMI 03 Regardless of engine stah
the battery voltage is grea·
than the P007 limit.
GSC+ CID 168 FMI 04 Regardless of the engine
status, the battery voltage
less than 18 DCV.
The setpoint for. the system voltage (P.OOl) specifies Note: When Program Setpoint P023 is set to 0,
the battery Voltage. the GSC+ is programmed for an MUI engine.
The engine's electronic control module (ECM) iE
24 - 24 Volt System eliminated as a possibility of the problem.
32 - 32 Volt System Test Step 1. CHECK THE SYSTEM'S

VOLTAGE.
Note: The GSC+ does not receive battery power
when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. When A. Turn the ECS to the STOP.
contact 6 is connected to one of the contacts (8,
9, 10), the GSC+ receives battery power when the B. Measure the voltage across the battery term in
ECS is in the OFF/RESET position.
Expected Result:
Before beginning this procedure, ensure that the
following steps have been performed: For a 24 volt system, the voltage should be betw
24.8 DCV and 29.5 DCV. For a 32 volt system, tl
• VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC CODE. voltage should be between 33.1 DCV and 39.3 0
• Make sure that the CID 168 FMI 04 is shown on Results:

the display.
• OK - For a 24 volt system, the voltage is 24.1
• Enter service mode. DCV 10 29.5 DCv. For a 32 volt system, the
voltage is 33.1 DCV to 39.3 DCV. Proceed to ;
• Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
• NOT OK - For 24 volt systems, the voltage is
• Program setpoint P023 to o. between 24.8 DCV to 29.5 DCV. For a 32 volt
system, the voltage is not between 33.1 DCV
• Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. 39.3 DCV. The problem is in the charging systl
181
iepair: Proceed 10 Testing and Adjusting, C. Measure the voltage at terminal 6 on the ECS.
Charging System - Test". Take note of the voltage.
>TOP. D. Compare the voltage that was measured at the

DC connector terminals with the voltage that was
st Step 2. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE measured at the ECS.
:TWEEN DC CONNECTOR TERMINALS
ID THE BATTERY VOLTAGE. Expected Result:
Turn Ihe ECS to the STOP position. The voltage that was measured at the DC connector
terminals and the voltage that was measured at the
Measure the battery voltage across the battery ECS are within 2.0 DCV of each other.
terminals. Take note of the battery voltage.
Results:
Measure the voltage between terminal 1 on
the DC connector and terminal 11. Repeat the • OK - The voltage that was measured at V and the
measuremenl between terminal 1 and terminal voltage that was measured at the ECS are within
12. Repeat the measurement between terminal 2.0 DCV of each other. Proceed to Test Step 4.
2 and terminal 11. Repeat the measurement
between terminal 2 and terminal 12. Take note of • NOT OK - The voltage that was measured at the
the voltages .. DC connector terminals and the voltage that was
measured at the ECS are NOT within 2.0 DCV of
:::;ompare the voltage measured at the battery each other. The wiring harness is not correct.
Nith the voltage measured between the DC
~onnector terminals. Repair: Repair the wiring harness or replace the
wiring harness.
)ected Result:
, voltage measured at the battery and the voltage
asured between the DC connector terminals. Test Step 4. CHECK THE CONTINUITY
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 7).
,ults:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches
lK - The voltage measured at the battery and terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire.
1e voltage measured between the DC connector
lrminals are within 2.0 DCV of each other. B. Place the ECS in the "OFF/RESET" position.
'roceed to Test Step 3.
lOT OK - The voltage measured at the battery between ECS terminal 6 and ECS terminal 7.
nd the voltage measured between the DC Continue to measure the resistance between
onnector terminals are NOT within 2.0 DCV of ECS terminal 6 and ECS terminal 7 while the
ach other. The wiring harness is not correct. ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", and
lepair: Repair the wiring harness or replace Ihe
liring harness. Expected Result:
roceed to Test Step 10. When the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position, there
should be less than 5 Ohms resistance between
st Step 3. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6. There should
TWEEN THE DC CONNECTOR be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Terminal
RMINALS AND THE ECS. 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AUTO,
furn the ECS to the STOP position.
Results:
v1easure the voltage between terminal 1 on
he DC connector and terminal 11. Repeat the • OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance
neasurement between terminal 1 and terminal between ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6
12. Repeat the measurement between terminal when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position.
~ and terminal 11. Repeat the measurement There are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS
letween terminal 2 and terminal 12. Take note of Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
he voltages. in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The
182
• NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms Expected Result:

Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms between between ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 wh
ECS Terminal 7 and ECS Terminal 6 when the the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There sho
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Termir
The ECS has failed. Proceed to Test Step 10. 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AU'
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 8). Results:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches • OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance
terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire. between ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6
. Expected Result: There are greater than 5000 Ohms between EC
Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS
There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. Th,
between ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when ECS has not failed. Proceed to Test Step 8.
the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There should
be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Terminal • NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms
8 and EOS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the AUTO, resistance between ECS Terminal 9 and ECS
MANUAL, or STOP positions. Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms betwE
Results: ECS Terminal 9 and ECS Terminal 6 when the
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positial
• OK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance The ECS has failed .
between ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6
when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. Repair: Replace the ECS. Reinstall the jumper
There are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS wire.
Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The Proceed to Test Step 10.
Te.st Step 7. CHECK THE CONTINUITY (
• NOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms THE ECS (TERMINAL 10).
Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attachE
position. There are less than 5000 Ohms between terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire.
ECS Terminal 8 and ECS Terminal 6 when the
ECS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. B. Return the ECS to the "OFF/RESET" position.
The ECS has failed.
Repair: Replace the ECS. Reinstall the jumper between ECS terminal 10 and ECS terminal 6.
wire. Continue to measure the resistance between
Proceed to Test Step 10. ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", anc
OF THE ECS (TERMINAL 9). Expected Result:
A. There is a jumper wire on the ECS that attaches There should be less than 5 Ohms resistance
terminal 6 to terminal 9. Remove this wire. between ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6 wh,
the ECS is in the OFF/RESET position. There shoL
B. Return the ECS to the "OFF/RESET" position. be greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Termini
10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is in the
C. With an ohmmeter, measure the resistance AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions.
between ECS terminal 9 and ECS terminal 6.
Continue to measure the resistance between
ECS is rotated to the "AUTO", "MANUAL", and
183
;ults: D, Compare the following voltage measurements:

the voltage measured between "RM-1" and
lK - There are less than 5 Ohms resistance "RM-28" and the voltage measured on the lower
'etween ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal display.
here are greater than 5000 Ohms between ECS Expected Result:
erminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the ECS is
1 the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. The The voltage that was measured between "RM-l"
CS has not failed. Proceed to Test Step 8. and "RM-28" should be within 2 DCV of the voltage
that was measured on the lower display.
lOT OK - There are more than 5 Ohms
3sistance between ECS Terminal 10 and ECS Results:
erminal 6 when the ECS is in the OFF/RESET
osition. There are less than 5000 Ohms between • OK - The voltage that was measured between
CS'Terminal 10 and ECS Terminal 6 when the "RM-1" and "RM-28" is within 2 DCV of the
CS is in the AUTO, MANUAL, or STOP positions. voltage that was measured on the lower display.
he ECS has failed. Proceed to Test Step 10.
Repair: The problem is probably an intermittent
;t Step 8. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE failure that was caused by a failed connector.
:TWEEN RM-1 AND THE ECS. Inspect the electrical connectors. Refer to Testing
and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect". If
rurn the ECS to the STOP position. the failed connector can not be found, the GSC+
may have failed. It is unlikely that the GSC+ has
~heck the voltage between "RM-1" and "RM-28". failed. Exit this procedure and perform this entire
rake note of the voltage. procedure again. If the problem remains, replace
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP
~heck the voltage on ECS contact 10. Take note Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace".
)f the voltage.
STOP.
~ompare the following voltage measurements:
he voltage measured between "RM-1" and • NOT OK - The voltage that was measured
RM-28" and the voltage measured on ECS between "RM-1" and "RM-28" is NOT within 2
;ontact 10. DCV of the voltage that was measured on the
lower display. The GSC+ has failed.
lected Result:
voltage that was measured between "RM-1" that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
"RM-28" should be within 2 DCV of the voltage and perform this entire procedure again. If
was measured on ECS contact 10. the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
,ults: (Generator Set) - Replace".
IK - The voltage that was measured between STOP.

iM-1" and "RM-28" is within 2 DCV of the
Jltage that was measured on ECS contact 10. Test Step 10. REPROGRAM THE GSC+.
he harness is correct. Proceed to Test Step 9.
A. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
OT OK - The voltage that was measured
etween "RM-1" and "RM-28" is NOT within 2 8. Program the setpoint P023. Refer to System
CV of the voltage that was measured on ECS Operation, "Engine Generator Programming
Jntact 10. Proceed to Test Step 10. OP5-0".
It Step 9. COMPARE THE VOLTAGE C. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. If
TWEEN RM-1 AND THE LOWER applicable, disconnect the jumper wire on the
iPLAY. ECS that is between pin 6 and pin 9. Not all
generators will have a jumper wire between pin
'urn the ECS to the STOP position. 6 and pin 9.
:heck the voltage between "RM-1" and "RM-28". D. Verify that the diagnostic code is no longer
ake note of the voltage. present.
:heck the voltage that is shown on the lower

lisplay. Take note of the voltage.
184
E. Replace the jumper between pin 6 and pin 9. Not

all generators will have a jumper wire between
pin 6 and pin 9. ENG1NE 0 670
OIL v+
TEMPERATUE
Expected Result: SENSOR
(EaTS) v- 0 62
'''~----'l
Setpoint P023 should be programmed to the correct
setting. The diagnostic code should no longer be
present.
Results:
GENERATOR
0
• OK - Setpoint P023 is programmed to the correct CONTROL
SET
(Gse) ~
setting. The diagnostic code is no longer present.
STOP. GSC-14
19
OIL TEMP 0 62
GSC-.3!.- 62
• NOT OK - Setpoint P023 is not programmed to SENSOR v- ~
the correct setting. The diagnostic code is still GSC-9-...- 67

SENSOR v+ ~
present.
Repair: Reprogram the GSC+. Refer to System

Operation, "Engine Generator Programming Illustration 123 gOO
OP5-0".
System Schematic For Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EO'
STOP.
The EMCP 11+ system monitors the engine coc
temperature in order to protect the engine fror
101367017 a coolant temperature problem. The coolant
temperature sensor is mounted in the water jac
GSC CID 0175 - FMI 02 The exact location of the engine coolant temper
sensor varies depending on the engine mode/.
SMCS Code: 1929-035
The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor sur
Conditions Which Generate This Code: from the GSC+. The coolant temperature sigm
is a pulse width modulated signal. The base
This diagnostic code is associated with the frequency of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 I
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor. The FMI 2 means As temperature changes, the duty cycle of thE
that the GSC+ has received an incorrect sensor signal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
signal.
• -40'C (-40'F) is approximately 10% of the d
cycle, which is approximately 1.0 OCV.
• 135'C (275'F) is approximately 93% of the d

cycle.
Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to trea

oil temperature sensor problem as an alarm fal
The factory default for P004 is O. The GSC+ m
be programmed to shutdown for an oil tempere
sensor fault. P004 is 1 for a shutdown. The ope
is not required to press the "Alarm Codes" key
order to view the CIO 175 FMI 2. lhe CIO 175
2 is automatically shown on the upper display.
The possible causes of a CIO 175 FMI 2 are lis

below:
• The base frequency of the sensor signal is

beyond accepted limits.
185
The duty cycle of the sensor signal is beyond Repair: For more information, refer to Testing and
accepted limits. Adjusting, "Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor
- Test".
legin performing these procedures only when CID
75 FMI 2 is showing and the "DIAG" indicator is STOP.
LASHING on the upper display. The GSC+ treats a
:ID 175 FMI 2 as an alarm fault. Active alarm faults • NOT OK - The CID 175 FMI 2 fault is showing.
re shown on the display when the "Alarm Codes" The harness or the GSC+ has failed. Proceed to
ey is pressed. The engine control switch (ECS) Test Step 2.
lust be in any position except the OFF/RESET
osition. For an inactive fault, the problem may be Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.
ltermittent. In order to troubleshoot an inactive
lUlt, use the preceding system schematic. See A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
9sting And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
lsp'ect". Clear the diagnostic code from the fault B. Disconnect the harness connector from the
19 after troubleshooting is complete. GSC+.
lote: This procedure can be replaced by C. Turn the ECS to the STOP position.
oubleshooting the sensor signal with a meter that
, capable of measuring frequency and duty cycle. D. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
ee Testing And Adjusting, "Pulse Width Modulated
)WM) Sensor - Test". E. Check if CID 175 FMI 2 is no longer showing.
Check if CID 175 FMI 3 is now showing.
lote: If a Sensor Supply fault (CID 269) is active,
orrect the fault prior to proceeding with this Expected Result:
rocedure.
CID 175 FMI 2 is not showing. The diagnostic code
est Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND THE is inactive. CID 175 FMI 3 is now showing. The
IARNESS. diagnostic code is active .
., Make sure that CID 175 FMI 2 is showing on the Results:

display.
• OK - The GSC+ functions properly. Therefore, the
· Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. signal wire has failed in the harness. Troubleshoot
the signal wire in the harness between the sensor
· Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness. connector and the GSC+ connector. Also check
The sensor remains fastened to the engine. the electrical connectors and terminals.
· Turn the ECS to the STOP position. Repair: For additional information, refer to Testing
· Press the "Alarm Codes" key. The "Alarm Codes"
key does not need to be pressed for shutdown STOP.
faults. Check if the CID 175 FMI 2 is not showing.
This means that the CID 175 FMI 2 is inactive. • NOT OK - The CID 175 FMI 2 is still showing.
Check if the CID 175 FMI 3 is now showing. CID
175 FMI 3 is now active. Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely
.pecled Result: and perform this entire procedure again. If
ID 175 FMI 2 is not showing. The diagnostic Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
)de is inactive. CID 175 FMI 3 is showing. The (Generator Set) - Replace".
agnostic code is active.
STOP.
esults:
OK - The GSC+ and the harness function

properly. Therefore, the sensor has failed.
f
,:. .;
Replace the sensor. ,:j .'
!J'
:II:
"
i
,.
i i
j j
186
i01367212 Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treal

oil temperature sensor problem as an alarm fat
GSC CID 0175 - FMI 03 The factory default for P004 is O. The GSC+ m;
be programmed to shutdown for an oil tempera
SMCS Code: 1929-035 sensor fault. P004 is 1 for a shutdown. The ope
is not required to press the "Alarm Codes" key
Conditions Which Generate This Code: order to view the CID 175 FMI 3. The CID 175 I
This diagnostic code is associated with the
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor. The FMI 3 means The possible causes of aCID 175 FMI 3 are lis
that the GSC+ has received an voltage above below:
normal sensor signal.
• A short to the battery positive terminal of thl
sensor signal.
ENGINE
OIL v+
(I) 670
TEMPERATUE • An open circuit of the sensor signal.
SENSOR
(EOTS) v- ® 62
Segin performing these procedures only when (
'" c--J'l-~ 175 FMI 3 is showing and the "DIAG" indicator

FLASHING on the upper display. The GSC+ tre,
CID 175 FMI 3 as an alarm fault. Active alarm fi
are shown on the display when the "Alarm Cod
<2> key is pressed. The engine control switch (ECS
GENERA TOR must be in any position except the OFF/RESET
SET <§> position. For an inactive fault, the problem may
,.
CONTROL (GSC)
intermittent. In order to troubleshoot an inactive
GSC-l4..,.. 0 fault, use the preceding system schematic. SeE
OIL TEMP ~ 62
GSC-:;';' 67 Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
62
SENSOR v- • Inspect". Clear the diagnostic code from the fal
GSC-~ 67 log after troubleshooting is complete.
SENSOR V+ P
Note: If aCID 269 FMI 3 or aCID 269 FMI 4
is acti\(e, correct the diagnostic code prior to
Illustration 124 g00529671 proceeding with this procedure.
System Schematic For Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EOTS)
Test Step 1. CHECK THE SUPPLY
The EMCP 11+ system monitors the engine coolant CIRCUIT.
temperature in order to protect the engine from
a coolant temperature problem. The coolant A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position anc
temperature sensor is mounted in the water jacket. then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
The exact location of the engine coolant temperature
sensor varies depending on the engine model. B. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harne
The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor supply
from the GSC+. The coolant temperature signal C. At the engine harness side of the sensor
is a pulse width modulated signal. The base connector, measure the voltage (DCV) that is
frequency of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 Hz). between contact "A" and contact "S". Conta(
As temperature changes, the duty cycle of the "A" is the supply. Contact "S" is the sensor
signal varies from 10 to 95 percent. ground.
• -40°C (-40°F) is approximately 10% of the duty Expected Result:

cycle, which is approximately 1.0 DCV.
The voltage should be 8.0 ± 0.5 DCV.
• 135°C (275°F) is approximately 93% of the duty
cycle. Results:
• OK - The supply circuit functions properly.

187
NOT OK - The supply circuit has failed. Check Expected Result:

the upper display for aCID 269 FMI 3 or aCID
269 FMI 4 and correct the diagnostic code. If The resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms
these diagnostic codes are not showing on the for the measurements.
upper display, then the engine harness has an
open circuit. Proceed to Test Step 4. Results:
est Step 2. CHECK THE SIGNAL • OK - The harness functions properly. Proceed
:IRCUIT. to Test Step 4 .
· Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and • Not OK - The harness wiring with the incorrect
then turn the ECS to the STOP position. resistance is shorted in the harness. Troubleshoot
and repair the failed harness wiring between the
· C\isconnect the sensor from the engine harness. sensor connector and the GSC+ connector. STOP.
· At the engine harness side of the sensor HARNESS.
connector, measure the voltage (DCV) between
contact "C" and contact "8". Contact "C" is the A. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
signal. Contact "8" is the sensor ground. The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
xpected Result: B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
1e voltage should be 7.0 ± 0.5 DCV. C. Measure the resistance of the ground circuit. The
measurement should be taken from contact "8"
esults: of the sensor harness connector to contact "31"
of the GSC+ harness connector.
OK - The signal circuit funclions properly. Verify
this result by checking the status of the diagnostic D. Measure the resistance of the signal circuit. The
code on the upper display. Reconnect the sensor. measurement should be taken from contact "c"
Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the of the sensor harness connector to contact "14"
ECS to the STOP position. If the CID 175 FMI 3 is of the GSC+ harness connector.
still showing on the upper display, t~e sensor has
failed. Replace the sensor. STOP. E. Measure the resistance of the sensor supply
circuit. The measurement should be taken from
NOT OK - Voltage is equal to +battery. The contact "A" of the sensor harness connector to
engine harness has failed. The signal circuit contact "9" of the GSC+ harness connector.
within the engine harness is shorted to +battery
("8+"). Troubleshoot and repair the engine Expected Result:
harness. STOP.
For each measurement, the resistance should be 5
NOT OK - Voltage is NOT 7.0 ± 0.5 DCV. Vollage ohms or less.
is not equal to + battery. The GSC+ or the harness
has failed. Proceed to Test Step 3. Results:
est Step 3. CHECK FOR A SHORTED • OK - The harness functions properly. Proceed
IARNESS. to Test Step 5 .
. Disconnecl the sensor from the engine harness. • NOT OK - The harness wiring with the incorrect
The sensor remains fastened to the engine. resistance measurement is either open or the
harness wiring has failed. Troubleshoot and repair
. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. the failed harness wiring between the sensor
connector and the GSC+ connector. STOP.
:. Disconnect the harness connector from the
GSC+. Test Step 5. CHECK THE ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS.
'. At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the
resistance from signal contact "14" to all other A. Check the electrical connectors, terminals and
contacts of the connector. wiring. Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical
Connector· Inspect".
188
Expected Result: The EMCP 11+ system monitors the engine cool,
temperature in order to protect the engine from
All connectors, terminals and wiring should function a coolant temperature problem. The coolant
properly. temperature sensor is mounted in the water jacl
The exact location of the engine coolant temperE
Results: sensor varies depending on the engine model.
• OK - Connect all harness connectors that were The sensor is powered by an 8 volt sensor SUPI
previously disconnected. Start the engine. If the from the GSC+. The coolant temperature signal
CIO 175 FMI 3 is still showing, the GSC+ may is a pulse width modulated signal. The base
have failed. Exit this procedure. Perform the entire frequency of the signal is 455 Hz (370 to 550 H
procedure again. If the CIO 269 is still showing, As temperature changes, the duty cycle of the
replace the GSC+. signal varies from 10 to 95 percent.
Repair: Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP • -40"C (-40"F) is approximately 10% of the dL
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace". cycle, which is approximately 1.0 OCv.
STOP. • 135"C (275"F) is approximately 93% of the dl

cycle .
• NOT OK - Repair the portion of the harness that
functions incorrectly. STOP. Note: The GSC+ is usually programmed to treat
oil temperature sensor problem as an alarm fau
The factory default for P004 is O. The GSC+ ma
i01367551
be programmed to shutdown for an oil temperat
GSC CIO 0175 - FMI 04 sensor fault. P004 is 1 for a shutdown. The oper
is not required to press the "Alarm Codes" key I
SMCS Code: 1929-035 order to view the CIO 175 FMI 4. The CIO 175 F
A possible cause of CIO 175 FMI 4 is listed bele
This diagnostic code is associated with the
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor. The FMI 4 means • A short to the -battery of the sensor signal.
tAat the GSC+ has received a voltage below normal
sensor signal. Begin performing these procedures only when C
175 FMI 4 is showing and the "OIAG" indicator i
FLASHING on the upper display. The GSC+ tree
CIO 175 FMI 4 as an alarm fault. Active alarm fa
ENGINE
OIL v+ 0 670
are shown on the display when the "Alarm COdE
TEMPERATUE key is pressed. The engine control switch (ECS)
SENSOR
(EaTS) v- ® 62
must be in any position except the OFF/RESET
51G __/fJ 19 position. For an inactive fault, the problem may t
1
intermittent. In order to troubleshoot an inactive
fault, use the preceding system schematic. See
Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical Connector -
Inspect". Clear the diagnostic code from the fau
<2> log after troubleshooting is complete.
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL (GSC) <S> Note: If a CIO 269 FMI 3 or CIO 269 FMI 4 is acti
GSC-l"-.-
<§> correct the diagnostic code prior to proceeding
19
OIL TEMP ~ 62 with this procedure.
GSC-31 67
52
SENSOR V- JV
GSC-9
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+ AND n
0- HARNESS.
SENSOR v+
"
A. Make sure that CIO 175 FMI 4 is showing on I
display.
System Schematic For Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EOTS) B. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
C. Oisconnect the sensor from the engine harne~

189
urn the ECS to the STOP position. • NOT OK - The CID 175 FMI 4 is still showing.
The GSC+ may have failed_ Exit this procedure_
'ress the "Alarm Codes" key. Perform the entire procedure again, If the CID
175 FMI 4 is still present, replace the GSC+_
;heck if the CID 175 FMI 4 is not showing.
Repair: For additional information, refer to
,ected Result: Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
175 FMI 4 is not showing. The diagnostic
e is inactive. CID 175 FMI 03 is showing. The STOP.
jnostic code is active.
i01367733
,ults:
K :... The GSC+ and the harness function

roperly. Therefore, the sensor has failed. SMCS Code: 1907-035
eplace the sensor.
epair: For more information, refer to Testing and
djusting, "Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor This diagnostic code is associated with the
Test". ' engine speed sensor. The FMI 2 means that the
ECM has determined that an incorrect signal from
TOP, the engine speed sensor has occurred.
OT OK - The CID 175 FMI 4 is showing. The
3rness or the GSC+ may have failed. Proceed GSC-2, 22 r-,
, Test Step 2, "AG PU GNO ~~.~~~~------------~
~~C-l.fC!.~.5-·-l--::-_Ic--;---I__________-¢
"1
MAG PU
it Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.
-urn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL (GSC)
lisconnect the harness connector from the
'SC+.
-urn the ECS to the STOP position.
'ress the "Alarm Codes" key.

g00530097
Illustration 126
;heck if CID 175 FMI 4 is no longer showing. System Schematic For The Engine Speed Sensor
;heck if CID 175 FMI 03 is now showing.
The EMCP 11+ system monitors engine speed. The
lected Result: EMCP 11+ system uses engine speed in order to
accomplish many tasks. These tasks are included
175 FMI 4 is not showing_ The diagnostic code in the following list.
lactive_ CID 175 FMI 03 is now showing_ The
lnostic code is active_ • Activating a shutdown for engine overspeed
lults:
• Terminating engine cranking
'K - The GSC+ functions properly_ Therefore, • Determining the oil step speed
Ie signal wire is shorted to the -battery in the
3rness_ Troubleshoot the signal wire in the
• Causing the air shutoff solenoid to engage during
3rness between the sensor connector and some fault shutdowns
Ie GSC+ connector_ Also check the electrical
Jnnectors and terminals_ The EMCP 11+ does not control engine speed. The
engine speed sensor is mounted on the flywheel
epair: For additional information, refer to Testing housing of the engine.
nd Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
TOP,
190
The sensor creates a sine wave signal. The signal Test Step 2. CHECK FOR AN
is created from passing ring gear teeth. The rate of INTERMITTENT FAULT.
the signal is one pulse per tooth. The sensor sends
the sine wave signal to the GSC+. The frequency A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
of the signal is directly proportional to the speed
of the engine. B. Turn the ECS to STOP.
The GSC+ treats aCID 190 FMI 2 as a shutdown C. Check the upper display for aCID 190 FMI 2.
fault. The engine is not allowed to crank or the
engine is not allowed to run when aCID 190 FMI 2 Expected Result:
diagnostic code is active.
CIO 190 FMI 2 should not appear on the upper
Note: The Engine Speed Sensor is commonly display.
referred to as magnetic pickup.
Results:
Note: Engines that are equipped with an electronic
governor or electronic engine control (PEEC) have • OK - CIO 190 does not appear on the upper
a separate speed sensor. The cable of the speed display. This step has corrected the problem.
sensor that is used by the GSC is marked with one STOP.
of the following numbers: 838-873, 838-973, and
973-938 . • NOT OK - CIO 190 FMI 2 appears on the UpPE
display. Proceed to Test Step 3.
This troubleshooting procedure is for aCID 190 FMI
2 that is active or inactive. Test Step 3. CHECK THE RESISTANCE
OF THE ENGINE SPEED SENSOR.
The possible causes of aCID 190 FMI 2 are listed
below. A. ~isconnect the sensor from the engine harnes'
The sensor remains fastened to the engine .
• The frequency of the signal is beyond accepted
limits. There is a short to the battery negative B. At the connector of the sensor, measure the
terminal. resistance between contact" 1" and contact "2
• The air gap of the speed ,sensor is too large. Expected Result: .
Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after The resistance should be between 100 to 350 ohrT
troubleshooting is complete.
Results:
Test Step 1. CHECK THE HARNESS AND
THE SPEED SENSOR. • OK - The resistance of the sensor is correct.
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
OFF/RESET. • NOT OK - Replace the sensor.
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the Repair: Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Speed
GSC+. Sensor (Engine) - Adjust".
C. At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the STOP.

resistance from contact" 1" to contact "2".
Test Step 4. CHECK THE HARNESS FOF
Expected Result: AN OPEN OR A SHORT.
The resistance should be from 100 to 350 ohms. A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
OFF/RESET.
Results:
B. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harnesE
• OK - There is probably an intermittent problem. The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
C. ~isconnect the harness connector from the
• NOT OK - The harness wiring or the speed GSC+.
sensor has failed. Proceed to Test Step 3.
191
Check for an open circuit. Check the resistance F. Check the connection between the sensor and
from contact "2" of the sensor harness connector the mating harness connector. Refer to Testing
to contact "2" of the GSC+ harness connector. and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
The resistance should be 5 ohms or less.
Expecled Resull:
Check for an open circuit. Check the resistance
from contact" 1" of the sensor harness connector The shield should be securely fastened. The
to contact "1" of the GSC+ harness connector. connection between the sensor and the mating
The resistance should be 5 ohms or less. harness connector should be secure.
Check for a short circuit. Check the resistance Resulls:

from contact" 1" to contact "2" of the GSC+
harness connector. The resistance should be • OK - The shield is securely fastened. The
grEjater than 5000 ohms. connection between the sensor and the mating
harness connector is secure. Proceed to Test
peeled Resu II: Step 6.
len the resistance is measured between contact • NOT OK - One of the items is not correct. Repair
of the sensor harness connector and contact the harness or replace the harness. STOP.
of the GSC+ harness connector, there should
5 ohms or less. Test Step 6. INSPECT THE SENSOR AND
ADJUST THE SENSOR.
3 resistance from contact "1" of the sensor
'ness connector to contact "1" of the GSC+ A. Remove the sensor from the engine flywheel
'ness connector should be 5 ohms or less. housing.
3 resistance from contact" 1" to contact "2" of the B. Inspect the sensor for damage and remove any
iC+ harness connector should be greater than debris from the tip.
JO ohms.
Expecled Result:
sulls:
No damage should be present.
)K - The harness functions properly. Proceed
o Test Step 5. Resulls:
~OT OK - The harness wiring with the incorrect • OK - No damage is present. Reinstall the engine
esistance measurement has failed. Replace speed sensor. Adjust the sensor.
he failed harness from the sensor to the GSC+
;onnector or repair the failed harness from the Repair: For more information, refer to Testing And
;ensor to the GSC+ connector. STOP. Adjusting, "Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust".
st Step 5. CHECK THE SHIELD AND Proceed to Test Step 7.

IE CONNECTORS.
• NOT OK - Damage is present. Replace the
Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to engine speed sensor.
OFF/RESET.
Repair: Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Speed
Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness. Sensor (Engine) - Adjust".
STOP.
Disconnect the harness connector from the
GSC+. Test Step 7. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
FAULT.
The harness has a shield (bare wire) which
protects the sensor signal wire from electrical A. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+
interference. This shield must be securely and the sensor.
fastened and the shield must make a good
electrical connection to the battery negative post B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
Jf the GSC+. ECS to STOP.
vVithin the EMCP 11+, check that the shield is C. Check the upper display for aCID 190 FMI 2.
securely fastened.
192
Expected Result: i013
ACID 190 FMI 2 diagnostic code should still be GSC CIO 0190 - FMI 03
active.
SMCS Code: 1907-035
Results:
• OK - ACID 190 FMI 2 is showing on the upper
display. The diagnostic code is still active and This diagnostic code is associated with the
the engine will not start. engine speed sensor. The FM I 3 means that It
ECM has determined that an above normal volt,
Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed. Exit signal from the engine speed sensor has occur!
this procedure and perform this procedure again.
If the diagnostic code is still present, replace the GSC-2
GSC+. Refer to Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP MAG PU GND (." 22 r..
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace". II
1
GSC-l ,
MAG PU IN ,,'O>-f--::--'-+-------IZf
STOP.
21
GENERATOR
• NOTOK -A CID 190 FMI 2 is not showing on the SET
CONTROL (GSC)
upper display. These procedures have corrected
the problem. The operator may continue with this
procedure. Proceed to Test Step 8.
Test Step 8. CHECK THE SIGNAL

VOLTAGE.
Illustration 127 g005:
A. This is an additional check of the circuit. Make
sure that all of the harness connectors are System Schematic For The Engine Speed Sensor
connected.
The EMCP 11+ system monitors engine speed. 1
B, Use a multimeter and 7x -171 0 Multimeter EMCP 11+ system uses engine speed in order tl
Probes in order to measure the AC signal voltage. accomplish many tasks. These tasks are includl
Measure the AC signal voltage between contact in the following list.
"1" and contact "2" of the GSC+ connector.
• Activating a shutdown for engine overs peed
C. Start and run the engine at rated speed.
• Terminating engine cranking
D. Measure the AC signal voltage of the engine
speed sensor. • Determining the oil step speed
Expected Result: • Causing the air shutoff solenoid to engage du

some fault shutdowns
The voltage should be equal to 2 ACV or greater.
The EMCP 11+ does not control engine speed. T
Results: engine speed sensor is mounted on the flywheE
housing of the engine .
• OK - The voltage is equal to 2 ACV or greater.
The speed sensor circuit is correct. STOP. The sensor creates a sine wave signal. The sigr
is created from passing ring gear teeth. The ratE
• NOT OK - The voltage is not equal to 2 ACV or the signal is one pulse per tooth. The sensor ser
greater. The most likely cause is improper air gap the sine wave signal to the GSC+. The frequenc
of the pickup. of the signal is directly proportional to the speer
of the engine.
Repair: For more information, refer to Testing And
Adjusting, "Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust". The GSC+ treats aCID 190 FMI 3 as a shutdolA
fault. The engine is not allowed to crank or the
STOP. engine is not allowed to run when aCID 190 FM
diagnostic code is active.
193
te: The Engine Speed Sensor is commonly Results:

3rred 10 as magnetic pickup.
• OK - CID 190 FMI 3 does not appear on the
te: Engines that are equipped with an electronic upper display. This step has corrected the
Jernor or electronic engine control (PEEC) have problem. STOP.
.eparate speed sensor. The cable of the speed
1Sor that is used by the GSC is marked with one • NOT OK - CID 190 FMI 3 appears on the upper
Ihe following numbers: 838-873, 838-973, and display. Proceed to Test Step 3.
3-938
Test Step 3. CHECK THE RESISTANCE
s troubleshooting procedure is for aCID 190 FMI OF THE ENGINE SPEED SENSOR.
lat is active or inactive.
A. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
, P9ssible causes of aCID 190 FMI 3 are listed The sensor remains fastened to the engine.
ow.
B. At the connector of the sensor, measure the
-here is an open in the signal circuit. resistance between contact "1" and contact "2".
Jar the diagnostic code from the fault log after Expected Result:
Jbleshooting is complete.
The resistance should be between 100 to 350 ohms.
st Step 1. CHECK THE HARNESS AND
IE SPEED SENSOR. Results:
Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to • OK - The resistance of the sensor is correct.
OFF/RESET. Proceed to Test Step 4.
Disconnect the harness connector from the • NOT OK - Replace the sensor.
GSC+.
Repair: Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Speed
At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the Sensor (Engine) - Adjust".
resistance from contact "1" to contact "2".
STOP.
pected Result:
Test Step 4. CHECK THE HARNESS FOR
l resistance should be from 100 to 350 ohms. AN OPEN OR A SHORT.
suits: A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
OFF/RESET.
)K - There is probably an intermittent problem.
'roceed to Test Step 2. B. Disconnect the sensor from the engine harness.
JOT OK - The harness wiring or the speed
ensor has failed. Proceed to Test Step 2. C. Disconnect the harness connector from the
GSC+.
5t Step 2. CHECK FOR AN
rERMITTENT FAULT. D. Check for an open circuit. Check the resistance
from contact "2" of the sensor harness connector
Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. to contact "2" of the GSC + harness connector.
The resistance should be 5 ohms or less.
Turn the ECS to STOP.
E. Check for an open circuit. Check the resistance
:::heck the upper display for aCID 190 FMI 3. from contact "1" of the sensor harness connector
to contact "1" of the GSC+ harness connector.
)ected Result: The resistance should be 5 ohms or less. I
I
) 190 FMI 3 should not appear on the upper F. Check for a short circuit. Check the resistance I,
Jlay. from contact "1" to contact "2" of the GSC+
harness connector. The resistance should be
greater than 5000 ohms. 'I
I
194
When the resistance is measured between contact • OK - The shield is securely fastened. The
"2" of the sensor harness connector and contact connection between the sensor and the matinc
"2" of the GSC+ harness connector, there should harness connector is secure. Proceed to Test·
be 5 ohms or less. Step 6.
The resistance from contact "1" of the sensor • NOT OK - One of the items is not correct. ReJ:
harness connector to contact "1" of the GSC+ the harness or replace the harness. STOP.
harness connector should be 5 ohms or less.
Test Step 6. INSPECT THE SENSOR At.
The resistance from contact" 1" to contact "2" of the ADJUST THE SENSOR.
GSC+ harness connector should be greater than
5000 ohms. A. Remove the sensor from the engine flywheel
housing.
Results:
B, Inspect the sensor for damage and remove al
• OK - The harness functions properly. Proceed debris from the tip.
to Test Step 5.
Expected Result:
• NOT O·K - The harness wiring with the incorrect
resistance measurement has failed. Replace No damage should be present.
the failed harness from the sensor to the GSC+
connector or repair the failed harness from the Results:
sensor to the GSC+ connector. STOP.
• OK - No damage is present. Reinstall the eng
Test Step 5. CHECK THE SHIELD AND speed sensor. Adjust the sensor.
THE CONNECTORS.
Repair: For more information, refer to Testing A
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to Adjusting, "Speed Sensor (Engine) . Adjust".
OFF/RESET.
The sensor remains fastened to the engine. • NOT OK - Damage is present. Replace the
engine speed sensor.
c. Disconnect the harness connector from the
GSC+. Repair: Refer to Testing And Adjusting, "Speer
Sensor (Engine) . Adjust".
D. The harness has a shield (bare wire) which
protects the sensor signal wire from electrical STOP.
interference. This shield must be securely
fastened and the shield must make a good Test Step 7. CHECK THE STATUS OF TI
electrical connection to the battery negative post FAULT.
of the GSC+.
A. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC
E, Within the EMCP 11+, check that the shield is and the sensor.
securely fastened.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn thE
F. Check the connection between the sensor and ECS to STOP.
the mating harness connector. Refer to Testing
and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector· Inspect". C. Check the upper display for aCID 190 FMI 3.
The shield should be securely fastened. The ACID 190 FMI 3 diagnostic code should still be
connection between the sensor and the mating active.
harness connector should be secure.
195
!sults: i01371937
OK - ACID 190 FMI 3 is showing on the upper GSC CIO 0248 - FMI 09 (for EUI
display. The diagnostic code is still active and
the engine will not start.
Engines)
SMCS Code: 4490-035
Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed. Exit
this procedure and perform this procedure again. SIN: 5KW1-Up
If the diagnostic code is still present, replace the
GSC+. Refer to Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: 8NW1-Up
STOP. SIN: 8AZ1-Up
NOt OK - ACID 190 FMI 3 is not showing on the Conditions Which Generate This Code:
upper display. These procedures have corrected
the problem. The operator may continue with this This diagnostic code is associated with the CAT
procedure. Proceed to Test Step 8. Data Link. The FMI 9 means that the ECM has
determined that an abnormal update has occurred.
1St Step 8. CHECK THE SIGNAL
)LTAGE . .
CUSTOMER
COMMUNI- ·+0
This is an additional check of the circuit. Make
sure that all of the harness connectors are
connected.
CATION
MODULE
(CCM) .-
OATA- '"
Use a multimeter and 7x - 1710 Multimeter

Probes in order to measure the AC signal voltage.
DATA+ n
Measure the AC signal voltage between contact
"1" and contact "2" of the GSC+ connector.
GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC)
Start and run the engine at rated speed. GSC~9
CAT DATA LINI<+ • D+
Measure the AC signal voltage of the engine GSC;.20
CAT DATA lINK- D-
speed sensor. J'-
RI.t-27
3D
pected Result: Fl YBACK GROUND ~
NOTE
RM-39 I---~r----I
3 voltage should be equal to 2 ACV or greater. 1D
BAl+ FUSED (>---
L_~~ ____ J
suits: 900530246
Illustration 128
)K - The voltage is equal to 2 ACV or greater. System Schematic For CAT Data Unk
'he speed sensor circuit is correct. STOP.
Note: When a customer communication module
~OT OK - The voltage is not equal to 2 ACV or is connected to a single generator set, "8+" is
lreater. The most likely cause is improper air gap connected directly from wire 10. When a customer
)f the pickup. communication module is connected to multiple
generator sets, "8+" must be connected through a
lepair: For more information, refer to Testing And diode. Refer to Figure 128.
\djusting, "Speed Sensor (Engine) , Adjust".
On EUI engines (35008), the GSC+ uses the CAT
,TOP. Data Link in order to communicate with the engine
ECM. The CAT Data Link consists of two wires that
connect the GSC+ to the engine ECM.
The possible causes of aCID 248 FMI 9 are listed

below.
• A short to the battery positive terminal ("8+") of

either of the two CAT Data Link wires
196
• A short to the battery negative terminal ("8-") of D. Measure the resistance between the negati'
either of the two CAT Data Link wires battery cable and both CAT Data Link wires
The GSC+ cannot detect an open in the circuit of Expected Result:

the CAT Data Link. The GSC+ treats aCID 248 FMI
9 as an alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown on The resistance between the negative battery c,
the display when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. and both of the CAT Data Link wires should b
The engine control switch (ECS) is in any position greater than 5000 ohms.
except the OFF/RESET position. Troubleshoot
and repair the wiring. See Testing And Adjusting, Results:
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Clear the fault
from the fault log after troubleshooting is complete. • OK - The resistance between the disconnec
negative battery cable and either of the CAT
Test Step 1. CHECK THE BATTERY Link wires is greater than 5000 ohms. STOP.
POSITIVE TERMINALS
• NOT OK - The resistance between the
A. Ensure that there are not shorts between +battery disconnected negative battery cable and eitr
and either of the CAT Data Link wires. the CAT Data Link wires is less than 5000 oh
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the wiring. H
any shorts between the disconnected negati
C. Disconnect both cables from the battery. battery cable and the CAT Data Link wires. F
to Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And VI
D. Measure the resistance between the positive Diagrams".
battery cable and both CAT Data Link wires.
STOP.
Expected Result:
i01~
The resistance between the positive battery cable
and both of the CAT Data Link wires should be
GSC CID 0248 - FMI 09 (for I\i
and PEEC Engines)
Results:
SMCS Code: 4490·035 .
• OK - The resistance between the disconnected
positive battery cable and either of the CAT Data SIN: BNS1-Up
Link wires is greater than 5000 ohms. Proceed SIN: 9ES1-Up
to Test Step 2.
SIN: 5PW1-Up
• NOT OK - The resistance between the
disconnected positive battery cable and either of SIN: 6WW1-Up
the CAT Data Link wires is less than 5000 ohms.
SIN: BTW1-Up
Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the wiring. Repair SIN: LRW1-Up
any shorts between +battery and the CAT Data
Link wires. Refer to Testing And Adjusting, SIN: LRX1-Up
SIN: LRY1-Up
STOP.
SIN: 48Z1-Up
Test Step 2. CHECK THE BATTERY Conditions Which Generate This Code:
NEGATIVE TERMINALS
This diagnostic code is associated with the C
A. Ensure that there are no shorts between the Data Link. The FMI 9 means that the ECM has
battery negative terminal and either of the CAT determined that an abnormal update has occurr
Data Link wires.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET
C. Disconnect both cables from the battery.

197

CUSTOMER B+
COMMUNI- ~ D. Measure the resistance between the positive
CATION
MODULE battery cable and both CAT Data Link wires.
(CCM) B- ~
OATA_ 1'"'\
Expected Result:
OATA+ The resistance between the positive battery cable

GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC)
Results:
GSC~9
CAT DATA LINK+ ~
GSC-ZD
D+ • OK - The resistance between the disconnected
CAT DATA lINK- ,," D-
positive battery cable and either of the CAT Data
Link wires is greater than 5000 ohms. Proceed
RM-27
3D to Test Step 2.
H YBACK GROUND ~ ~
NOTE
RM-J9 I--------~ • NOT OK - The resistance between the
BAT+ FUSED
10
,. , 'I -
, disconnected positive battery cable and either of
! J the CAT Data Link wires is less than 5000 ohms.
900530246
Ilustration 129
Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the wiring. Repair
:;ystem Schematic For CAT Data Link
any shorts between +battery and the CAT Data
Link wires. Refer to Testing And Adjusting,
~ote: When a customer communication module
s connected to a single generator set, "8+" is
;onnected directly from wire 10. When a customer
;ommunication module is connected to multiple Proceed to Test Step 2.
lenerator sets, "8+" must be connected through a
jiode. Refer to Figure 129.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE BATTERY
NEGATIVE TERMINALS
3enerator sets use the CAT Data Link in order to
;ommunicate with the Customer Communication A. Ensure that there are not shorts between the
v10dule (CCM). The CAT Data Link consists of two battery negative terminal and either of the CAT
Data Link wires.
vires that connect the GSC+ to the CCM.
rhe possible causes of aCID 248 FMI 9 are listed B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
lelow.
I A. short to the battery positive terminal ("8+") of
either of the two CAT Data Link wires D. Measure the resistance between the negative
battery cable and both CAT Data Link wires.
I A short to the battery negative terminal ("8-") of
either of the two CAT Data Link wires Expected Result:
-he GSC+ cannot detect an open in the circuit of

he CAT Data Link. The GSC+ treats aCID 248 FMI
) as an alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown on
The resistance between the negative battery cable
I
I,,
~e display when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed.
he engine control switch (ECS) is in any position Results:
lxcept the OFF/RESET position. Troubleshool
• OK - The resistance between the disconnected
md repair the wiring. See Testing And Adjusting,
Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Clear the fault negative battery cable and either of the CAT Data
rom the fault log after troubleshooting is complete. Link wires is greater than 5000 ohms. STOP.
fest Step 1. CHECK THE BATTERY • NOT OK - The resistance between the
)OSITIVE TERMINALS disconnected negative battery cable and either of
the CAT Data Link wires is less than 5000 ohms.
l. Ensur~ Ihat there are not shorts between +battery
and either of the CAT Data Link wires.
I. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET

198
Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the wiring. Repair The GSC+ treats aCID 0268 FMI 02 as an alarr
any shorts between the disconnected negative fault or the GSC+ treats aCID 0268 FMI 02 as
battery cable and the CAT Data Link wires. Refer a shutdown fault. The treatment depends on the
to Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring particular setpoint with bad data. The ring gear
Diagrams". teeth P009 setpoint and the engine overspeed P(
setpoints are treated as shutdown faults when th
STOP. particular data is corrupted. All other setpoints a
treated as alarm faults when the particular data
corrupted.
101361517
GSC CID 0268 - FMI 02 Note: Verify that the contact 6 to contact 9
jumper is NOT installed on the engine control
SMCS Code: 4490-035 switch (ECS). The contacts 6 to 9 jumper must
be temporarily installed if the indicator for the
Conditions Which Generate This Code: shutdown fault is FLASHING. The GSC+ setpoinl
must be programmed in the OFF/RESET positior
A portion of memory within the GSC+ stores the when a shutdown fault is active. If the alarm for
setpoints of important generator set conditions. The the fault indicator is FLASHING the GSC+ can
setpoints are listed below. be programmed with the ECS in the OFF/RESET
position or the COOLDOWN/STOP position.
• engine/generator setpoint programming OP5-0
CHECK THE SETPOINTS.
• protective relaying setpoints OP5-1
A. View the setpoints that are stored in the
• spare input/output programming OP6 memory of the GSC+. See Systems Operatior
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0".
• voltmeter/ammeter programming OP8
B. Also check Systems Operation, "Spare
The GSC+ detects aCID 0268 FMI 02 when the Input/Output Programming (OP6)" and Systerr
setpoint data is invalid or the setpoint data is out Operation, "Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming
of range. After detecting aCID 0268 FMI 02, the (OP8)".
GSC+ sets the affected setpoints to the default
value. For more information regarding setpoints and C. COfTlpare the stored s~tpoints to the specified
default values, see the topics that are listed below. setpoints of the particular generator set.
• Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator Expected Result:

Programming OP5-0"
The stored setpoints and the specified setpoints
• Systems Operation, "Protective Relaying should match.
Programming OP5-1"
Results:
• Systems Operation, "Spare Input/Output
Programming OP6" • OK - All the setpoints match. Start the engine
Check the upper display for aCID 0268 FMI
• Systems Operation, "Voltmeter/Ammeter 02. If the diagnostic code was inactive prior
Programming OP8" to performing this procedure, then these steps
should have corrected the problem.
The possible cause of aCID 0268 FMI 02 is
electrical interference. Repair: If the diagnostic code remains active,
The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely that th
This procedure is designed to correct an active CID GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure and perfo
0268 FMI 02 or the procedure is designed to correct this entire procedure again. If the problem
an inactive CID 0268 FMI 02. Clear the diagnostic remains, replace the GSC+. See Testing And
code from the fault log after troubleshooting is Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control (Generatol
complete. Set) - Replace".
STOP.
• NOT OK - One or more of the setpoints do nol

match.
199
Repair: Program the setpoints. See the following i01715280

sections.
• Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OP5-0" SMCS Code: 4490-035-NS
• Systems Operation, "Protective Relaying Conditions Which Generate This Code:

Programming OP5-1"
ENGINE ,~ 67T
• Systems Operation, "Spare Input/Output COOLANT v+
TEMPERATUE
Programming OP6" SENSOR @ 621
(ECTS) V
<£I)
• Systems Operation, "Voltmeter/Ammeter S'G 16
programming OPB"
STOP. ENGINE @67P

OIL v+
PRESSURE
SENSOR V ® 52?
(EOPS)
@15
srG
GENERATOR
SET Y Y Y
CONTROL (GSC) > )
GSC-8
OIL PRESSURE "
GSC-7
COOLANT TEMP
16 62 67 62 67
GSC-31
62
SENSOR V
GSC-9
67
SENSOR V+
GSC-14 "-
19
OIL TEMPERATURE
62 67
':~;':J
COOLANT
0 0
ENGINE
COOLANT
LOSS
srG k5D 18
SENSOR
v-
@ 62L
(EClS)
v+ ~_0 67L
ENGINE
OIL srG
@ 19 <3>
C
TEMPERA TURE
SENSOR
(EDTS) v-
,® 620 0
C
v+ @ 670 ~
C
g00516860
Illustration 130
Schematic For The Sensor Power Supply
I
r
I
200
The EMCP II + has a sensor supply voltage of 8 DCV CHECK THE GSC+.
from the GSC+ that powers the engine sensors.
The sensors that are displayed in 130 illustration A. Disconnect the harness from the GSC+.
may vary. The sensors may vary according to the
engine. See table 24 in order to determine the B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn It
sensors that are on your engine. ECS to the STOP position.
Table 24 C. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.

Sensor MUI EUI PEEC
Engines Engines Engines D. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269
03.
Coolant Yes No Yes
Temperature Expected Result:
Oil Pressure Yes No Yes
The CID 0269 FMI 03 should not be showing. 1
Coolant Loss Yes Yes Yes diagnostic code should be inactive.
Oil Temperature No Yes Yes
Results:
The engine oil temperature sensor is optional. The • OK - The CID 0269 FMI 03 is not showing.
engine coolant fluid level sensor is optional. GSC+ is functioning properly. Therefore, the
engine harness has a short to "8+".
The sensor power supply functions whenever power
is applied to the GSC+. Repair: Repair the engine harness or replacE
engine harness.
The GSC+ is usually programmed in the factory. The
GSC+ deals with a problem with the sensor power STOP.
supply CID 0269 FMI 03 as an alarm fault. P004 =
O. If the GSC+ is programmed to shutdown, P004 • NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 03 is showing.
is equal to 1 for a problem with the sensor power
supply. It is not necessary to press the "Alarm Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlil
Codes" key in order to view the CID 0269 FMI 03. that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedun
The CID 0269 FMI 03 is automatically shown on the and perform this entire procedure again. If
upper display. the problem remains, replace the GSC+. Se
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic COl
Diagnostic codes are created when the harness (Generator Set) - Replace".
connector is disconnected from the GSC+ during
these troubleshooting procedures. Clear these STOP.
created diagnostic codes after the particular
problem is corrected and the particular diagnostic
code is cleared.
The possible cause of aCID 0269 FMI 03 happens

when the voltage of the sensor power supply is
greater than 8.5 DCV.
Begin performing these procedures only when

CID 0269 FMI 03 is showing and the "DIAG"
GSC+ treats aCID 0269 FMI 03 as an alarm fault.
Active alarm faults are shown on the upper display
when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed and the
engine control switch (ECS) is in any position
except the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive
To troubleshoot an inactive diagnostic code, use
Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
the troubleshooting procedure is completed.
201
101359940 The EMCP II + has a sensor supply voltage of 8 DCV

from the GSC+ that powers the engine sensors.
GSC CID 0269 - FMI 04 The sensors that are displayed in illustration 131
may vary. The sensors may vary according to the
SMCS Code: 4490-035-NS engine. See table 25 in order to determine the
sensors on your engine.
Table 25
ENGINE Sensor MUI EUI PEEC
COOLANT v+ 'lZ'P 671
TEMPERATUE Engines Engines Engines
SENSOR v_ @jl 621
(ECTS) Coolant Yes No Yes
@ Temperature
SI.
16
Oil Pressure Yes No Yes
Coolant Loss Yes Yes Yes
ENGINE v+ (£)67P
OIL Oil Temperature No Yes Yes
PRESSURE
SENSOR v ® 62P
(EOPS)
SI.
@15 The engine oil temperature sensor is optional. The
engine coolant fluid level sensor is optional.
The sensor power supply functions whenever power

GENERATOR is applied to the GSC+.
,Y , , , ,
CONTROL
SET
(GSC)
GSC-8
Y
The GSC+ is usually programmed in the factory.
The GSC+ handles a diagnostic code that is
Ij
15
Oll PRESSURE
associated with the sensor power supply as an
COOLANT TEMP
GSC-7
16
alarm fault. P004 = O. If the GSC+ is programmed to
shutdown, P004 is equal to 1 for a problem with the
I
62 67 62 67
sensor power supply. It is not necessary to press j
GSC-:51 1
62 the "Alarm Codes" key in order to view the CID
SENSOR V
0269 FMI 04. The CID 0269 FMI 04 is automatically 1
~
GSC-9 shown on the upper display. ' .
67
SENSOR v+ ~ 'I
L-
GSC-14 19 Diagnostic codes are created when the harness
OIL TEMPERATURE
62 67 connector is disconnected from the GSC+ during
these troubleshooting procedures. Clear these
GSC-13 18 0 0. 0 created diagnostic codes after the particular
'""~~]
COOLANT
code is cleared.
ENGINE
COOLANT SI. f-1:-=
018 The possible cause of aCID 0269 FMI 04 occurs
LOSS when the voltage of the sensor supply is less than
SENSOR
(EClS) v- ® 62L 7.5 DCV
v+
10 ,n Begin performing these procedures only when CID
0269 FMI 04 is active and the "DIAG" indicator
ENGINE
all SI.
© 19 0>
(
is FLASHING on the upper display. The GSC+
treats aCID 0269 FMI 04 as an alarm fault. Active
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(EaTS) v- (
® 620 <3>
(
alarm faults are shown on the upper display
when Ihe "Alarm Codes" key is pressed and the
v+ @ 670 0
( engine control switch (ECS) is in any position
except the OFF/RESET position. For an inactive
900516860
lustration 131 To troubleshoot an inactive diagnostic code, use
ichematic For The Sensor Power Supply the preceding system schematic and see Testing
the troubleshooting procedure is completed.
III
'J
1.1
202
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GSC+. C. Disconnect the engine harness from the oil
temperature sensor.
D. Turn the ECS to STOP.
B. Disconnect the harness from the GSC+.
E. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
c. Turn the ECS to STOP.
F. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 I
D. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. 04.
E. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 FMI Expected Result:
04. If the diagnostic code is displayed then the
problem is active. If the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI (
then CID 0269 FMI 04 should NOT be showing
· Expected Result: when the sensor is disconnected.
The CID 0269 FMI 04 should NOT be showing on Results:

the upper display.
• OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. ThE
Results: temperature sensor has failed.
• OK - The GSC+ is functioning properly. Repair: Replace the oil temperature sensor ar
Therefore, the engine harness or a sensor has verify that the new sensor corrects the probler
failed. Proceed to test step 2.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The GSC+ has failed.
• NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still activE
Repair: Replace the GSC+. See Testing And The oil temperature sensor is not the cause of
Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control (Generator CID 0269 FMI 04. Proceed to test step 4.
Set) - Replace".
Test Step 4. CHECK THE COOLANT
STOP. LOSS SENSOR
Test Step 2. VERIFY' THE TYPE OF A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
ENGINE
B. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC
A. Select the appropriate engine in order to
determine the proper test sequence. C. Disconnect the engine harness frorn the cool;
loss sensor.
Expected Result:
Select the appropriate engine.
Results:
F. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 f
• PEEC - Test the engine sensor circuit for PEEC 04.
engines. Proceed to test step 3.
Expected Result:
• MUI - Test the engine sensor circuit for MUI
engines. Proceed to test step 4. If the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI C
• EUI - Test the engine sensor circuit for EUI when the sensor is disconnected.
engines. Proceed to test step 7.
Results:
Test Step 3. CHECK THE OIL
TEMPERATURE SENSOR • OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. Th
coolant loss sensor has failed.
B. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+.

203
Repair: Replace the coolant loss sensor and Expected Result:

verify that the new sensor corrects the problem.
If the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI 04,
STOP. then CID 0269 FMI 04 should NOT be showing
when the sensor is disconnected .
• NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still active.
The coolant loss sensor is not the cause of the Results:
CID 0269 FMI 04. Proceed to test step 5.
• OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. The
rest Step 5. CHECK THE OIL PRESSURE coolant temperature sensor has failed.
SENSOR
Repair: Replace the coolant temperature sensor
~. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. and verify that the new sensor has corrected the
problem.
:I. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+.
STOP.
::. Disconnect the engine harness from the oil
pressure sensor. • NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still active.
The coolant temperature is not the cause of the
). Turn the ECS to STOP. CID 0269 FMI 04. Therefore, the engine harness
has a short to the battery negative terminal "8-".
:. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
Repair: Repair the engine harness or replace the
=. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 FMI engine harness.
04.
STOP.
:xpected Result:
Test Step 7. CHECK THE OIL
f the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI 04, TEMPERATURE SENSOR
hen CID 0269 FMI 04 should NOT be showing
Nhen the sensor is disconnected. A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
~esults: B. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+.
• OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. The oil C. Disconnect the engine harness from the oil
pressure sensor has failed. temperature sensor.
Repair: Replace the oil pressure sensor and verify D. Turn the ECS to STOP.
that the new sensor has corrected the problem.
STOP.
F. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 FMI
• NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still active. 04 .
The oil pressure is not the cause of the CID 0269
FMI 04. Proceed to test step 6. Expected Result:
rest Step 6. CHECK THE COOLANT If the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI 04,
rEMPERATURE SENSOR then CID 0269 FMI 04 should NOT be showing
when the sensor is disconnected.
~. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
Results:
:I. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+.
• OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. The oil
::. Disconnect the engine harness from the coolant temperature sensor has failed.
temperature sensor.
Repair: Replace the oil temperature sensor and
). Turn the ECS to STOP. verify that the new sensor has corrected the
problem.
:. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
STOP.
=. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 FMI
04.
204
• NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still active. Jon

The oil temperature sensor is not the cause of the
CID 0269 FMI 04. Proceed to test step 8. GSC CID 0333 - FMI 03
Test Step 8. CHECK THE COOLANT SMCS Code: 4490·035
LOSS SENSOR
B. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+. ALARM MODULE ,1

:;03;0 I _ LINK SPARE FAULT
INPUT (LED 7)
C. Disconnect the engine harness from the coolant
loss sensor. I
';0
:'11 I _ LINK SPARE FAULT
,J
INPUT (LED B)
72 LOW FUEL
RlLE'/EL
,,21 20 LAMP TEST
(IF REOU'REO)
F. Observe the upper display for the CID 0269 FMI
,.I
04.
Expected Result:
HORN 9
DC ~ :~ ~~
[-J
I
If the sensor is the cause of the CID 0269 FMI 04,
when the sensor is disconnected. SILENCE
SWITCH :
Results: ALARM -2
DATALINK' ,
I 90
T
• OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is NOT active. The
coolant loss sensor has failed.
Repair: Replace the coolant loss sensor and verify

that the new sensor has corrected the problem. GENERATOR
ALARM
GSC-35
DAT~
SET
CONTROL j.,;
STOP. (GSC)
RM-28 RM-27
-8;'T
• NOT OK - The CID 0269 FMI 04 is still active. ,. V
fL Y8A~
V
The coolant loss sensor is not the cause of the
CID 0269 FMI 04. Therefore, the engine harness
has a short to the battery negative terminal "8-".
Repair: Repair the engine harness or replace the

engine harness.
Y RM-12 FlO
RM-J9
+B~
v
STOP.
Illustration 132 gOOE

System Schemalic For Alarm Module (ALM)
The alarm module (ALM) is available as an opt

The alarm module may be mounted on the fror
panel. Also, the alarm module may be placed.
a distance from the control panel as a remote
annunciator. The alarm module is used in order
satisfy the requirements of the customer. The al
module may be used in order to satisfy Nationl
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirement,
annunciating the presence of a diagnostic COdE
205
The ALM communicates with the GSC+ by a serial • NOT OK - ACID 0333 FMI 03 has not occurred.
data link. When the data link malfunctions, all of the The diagnostic code is NOT active. STOP.
indicators on the ALM, that are controlled by the
data link, flash at a rate of .5 Hz. Test Step 2. CHECK FOR SHORTED DATA
LINK WIRE
Note: The maximum number of the ALM or the
Customer Interface Module (CIM) that may be A. Disconnect the cable on the "B-" terminal of the
connected to the serial data link is equal to three. battery or open the optional battery disconnect
The maximum distance between a module and the switch.
GSC+ is 305 m (1000 ft). If these specifications are
not met, the ALM indicators may begin to flash. B. Disconnect both ends of the data link wire. The
Also, the GSC+ may show aCID 0333 FMI 03. If the following contacts are the ends of the data link
setup is not in compliance with the specifications. wire: contact 35 of the GSC+P and terminal 2 of
reduce the number of modules and/or shorten the the alarm module.
distance to the modules.
C. Measure the resistance between the data link
Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the wire and the battery positive terminal of the
harness connector is disconnected from the GSC+ GSC+P.
during these troubleshooting procedures. Clear
these created diagnostic codes after the particular Expected Result:
problem is corrected and the diagnostic code is
:Ieared. The resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms.
fhe possible cause of aCID 0333 FMI 03 diagnostic Results:

:ode is a short to "B+".
• OK - The resistance is correct. Proceed to test
fhe GSC+ treats aCID 0333 FMI 03 as an alarm step 3.
'ault. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log
,fter troubleshooting is complete. • NOT OK - The resistance is NOT greater than
5000 ohms. The data link wire is faulty.
~ote: If aCID 0333 FMI 03 is active on the upper
Jisplay and no alarm module is installed, then Repair: Refer to the system schematic in order to
;heck the terminal strips on the subpanel for a troubleshoot the harness wiring and repair the
,hort. Perform the check from the signal wire to harness wiring that has failed between the ALM
B+". Also, check the customer connection box for and the GSC+. Refer to Testing and Adjusting,
l short from the alarm data signal wire to "B+". "Schematics and Wiring Diagrams" for further
information.
rest Step 1. CHECK IF THE DIAGNOSTIC
:ODE IS ACTIVE STOP.
~. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the Test Step 3. CHECK THE ALARM
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to MODULE
the STOP position.
A. The cable on the "B-" terminal will remain
I. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. disconnected or the optional battery disconnect
switch is open.
:. Observe the upper display for aCID 0333 FMI
03. The diagnostic code is active if the upper B. Measure the resistance from terminal 2 of the
display shows aCID 0333 FMI 03. alarm module to the battery positive "+B".
). If the diagnostic code is not showing, enter the Expected Result:

service mode and view the fault log. Check the
upper display if the diagnostic code is active. The resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms.
expected Result: Results:
, CID 0333 FMI 03 is active. • OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms.
lesults:
• NOT OK - The resistance is NOT greater than
OK - ACID 0333 FMI 03 is active. Proceed to 5000 ohms. The alarm module has failed.
test step 2.
206
Repair: Replace the alarm module.
STOP. GSC CID 0333 - FMI 04

Test Step 4. CHECK THE GSC+. SMCS Code: 4490-035
A. The data link wire remains disconnected. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
B. Connect the cable on the "8-" terminal of the ALARM MODULE

battery or close the optional battery disconnect
switch. ,,; bUNK SPARE FAULT
INPUT (LED 7)
C. Turn the engine control switch to the STOP

position. 4DI
;'11 I LINK SPARE FAUL T
INPUT (LED 8)
D. Check for an active CID 0333 FMI 03 diagnostic ,81 72 LOW fUEL
0lEVEl
code on the GSC+.
Expected Result:
:121 20 LAMP TEST
(If REQUIRED)
-
,.I
The diagnostic code is NO longer active. HORN ~I
10
Results:
~'
DC _ :7 I 30
• YES - The diagnostic code is NOT active. The

diagnostic code does not exist at this time. SILENCE
SWITCH
[_~ :
Repair: The initial diagnostic code was probably

caused by a poor electrical connection or a
ALARM '2
DATAlINK'
I 90
J
short at one of the harness connectors that was
disconnected and reconnected. Check the wiring ,
for problems and resume normal operation.
Watch for a recurrence of the problem.
GENERATOR GSC-35
SET ALARM DAT~
STOP. CONTROL
(esc)
• NO - The diagnostic code has not been RM-28 RM-27
corrected. The GSC+ may have failed. -B!T nYBA~

B
~ ~
Repair: Exit this procedure and perform this

procedure again. Also, recheck if the diagnostic
code is active. If the cause of the diagnostic
code is not found, replace the GSC+. Refer to
y ~
RM-39
+B~
v
R:'12 flO
(Generator Set) - Replace" for more information.
STOP.
Illustration 133 gOO!
System Schematic For Alarm Module (ALM)
The alarm module (ALM) is available as an opt

The alarm module may be mounted on the frol
panel. Also, the alarm module may be placed
a distance from the control panel as a remote
annunciator. The alarm module is used in ordel
satisfy the requirements of the customer. The a
module may be used in order to satisfy Nation
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirementl
annunciating the presence of a diagnostic cod.
207
The ALM communicates with the GSC+ by a serial • NOT OK - ACID 0333 FMI 04 has not occurred.
data link. When the data link malfunctions, all of the The diagnostic code is NOT active. STOP.
indicators on the ALM, that are controlled by the
data link, flash at a rate of .5 Hz. Test Step 2. CHECK THE GSC+.
Note: The maximum number of the ALM or the A. Disconnect the cable on the 8- terminal of the
Customer Interface Module (CIM) that may be battery or open the optional battery disconnect
connected to the serial data link is equal to three. switch.
The maximum distance between a module and the
GSC+ is 305 m (1000 It). If these specifications are B. Disconnect the data link wire from contact 35
not met, the ALM indicators may begin to flash. of the GSC+.
Also, the GSC+ may show aCID 0333 FMI 04. If the
setup is not in compliance with the specifications, C. Reconnect the cable on the 8- terminal of the
reduce the number of modules and/or shorten the battery or close the optional battery disconnect
distance to the modules. switch.
Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the D. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the STOP
harness connector is disconnected from the GSC+ position.
these created diagnostic codes alter the particular Expected Result:
code is cleared. The CID 0333 FMI 04 is inactive.
The possible cause of aCID 0333 FMI 04 is a short Results:

to "8-"of the data signal.
• OK - The CID 0333 FMI 04 is inactive. Proceed
The GSC+ treats aCID 0333 FMI 04 as an alarm to test step 3.
fault. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log
after troubleshooting is complete. • NOT OK - The CID 0333 FMI 04 remains active.
The GSC+ may have failed.
Note: If aCID 0333 FMI 04 is active on the upper
display and no alarm module is installed, then Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely
.~heck the terminal strips on the subpanel for a that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this. procedure and
short. Perform the check from the signal wire to perform this procedure again. If the result of the
'8-". Also, check the customer connection box for procedure is the same, replace the GSC+. See
3 short from the alarm data signal wire to "8-". Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
(Generator Set) - Replace"
fest Step 1. CHECK IF THE DIAGNOSTIC
CODE IS ACTIVE STOP.
11.. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the Test Step 3. CHECK THE ALM AND DATA
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to LINK WIRE
the STOP position.
A. The data link wire remains disconnected from
B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. the GSC+.
:::. Observe the upper display for aCID 0333 FMI B. Disconnect the cable on the 8- terminal of the
04. The diagnostic code is active if the upper battery or open the optional battery disconnect
display shows aCID 0333 FMI 04. switch.
). If the diagnostic code is not shOWing, enter the C. Disconnect the data link wire from terminal 2 of
service mode and view the fault log. Check the the Alarm module.
upper display if the diagnostic code is active.
D. Measure the resistance from the data link wire to
:xpected Result: 8attery negative on the GSC+.
,1
\ CID 0333 FMI 04 is active. Expected Result: i
~esults: The resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms.

j
• OK - ACID 0333 FMI 04 is active. Proceed to
test step 2.
j
208
Results: i01::
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms. GSC CID 0334 - FMI 03
SMCS Code: 4490-035
• NOT OK - The resistance is NOT greater than
5000 ohms. The data link wiring is faulty. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
Repair: Use the system schematic to troubleshoot GENERATOR

and repair the harness wiring that has failed SET
CONTROL (GSC)
between the ALM and the GSC+. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Schematics and Wiring Diagrams". GSC-36 63 SPAR!
SP ARES;
/
r-<o>---!--___---""-____--j"''#
STOP.
gam
Test Step 4. CHECK THE THE ALARM Illustration 134
MODULE. System schematic for the spare output
A. The cable on the 8- terminal remains The spare output on the GSC+ is strictly for thE
disconnected or the optional battery disconnect of customers. The spare output is programmab
switch is open. order to activate under a variety of conditions.
default parameter programming causes the GS(
B. The data link wire remains disconnected. activate the output when the engine is in GOold
mode. The GSC+ treats aCID 0334 FMI 03 a1
C. Measure the resistance from terminal 2 of the an alarm fault. For more information, see Syste
Alarm Module to battery negative. Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming C
The customer and/or the dealer are responsiblE
Expected Result: documenting and troubleshooting any connecti
to this output.
The resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms.
The voltage on the spare output is approximal!
Results: 5.0 DCV when there are no connections and w
the spare output is not active. When the sparE
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms. output is active, the voltage on the spare outPl
The problem may be intermittent. approximately 0 volts. The spare output is cap'
of drawing (sinking) approximately 100 mAo
Repair: Use the System Schematic and examine
the wiring between the GSC+ and the Alarm The possible cause of aCID 0334 FMI 03 is a ,
Module for nicks, abrasion, or other damage. See to battery positive of the spare output signal.
Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics and Wiring
Diagrams". Troubleshooting of a spare output fault is direct
FMI defines the fault. FMI 03 occurs when the,
STOP. output is shorted to "8+". In order to find the e
cause of the fault, use the following information
• NOT OK - The reistance is NOT greater than
5000 ohms. The Alarm Module has failed. • FMI information
Repair: Replace the ALM. • system schematic of spare output
STOP. • documentation of the customer
• documentation of the dealer
I
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GENERATOI
SET CONTROL
A. Verify that the CID 0334 FMI 03 diagnostic (
is active.
B. Disconnect the wire from contact 36 of the G

209
;. Measure the voltage between contact 36 of the C. Turn the ESC switch to STOP and check if the
GSC+ and frame ground. diagnostic code is still active.
:xpected Result: Expected Result:
-he voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV. The diagnostic code is not active.
~esults: Results:
, OK - The voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV. • OK - The diagnostic code is not active. It is likely
The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 2. that the problem was in the wiring harness or the
problem is intermittent.
, NOT OK - The voltage is NOT approximately 5 ±
1.0 DCV. The voltage is NOT correct. The GSC+ Repair: Check the wiring between the GSC+ and
has failed. the customer device for problems. Repair the
wiring or replace the wiring if a problem is found.
Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed. Watch for a reocurrence of the diagnostic code.
Exit this diagnostic code procedure and repeat
the CID 0334 FMI 03 diagnostic code procedure STOP.
again. If the cause of the failure is still unknown,
then replace the GSC+. • NOT OK - The diagnostic code is still active.
There may be a problem with the customer
STOP. device.
"est Step 2. CHECK FOR A SHORT TO Repair: Ensure that the customer device does
'8+" IN THE WIRING OF THE SPARE not draw more than 100 mA. Also, the customer
)UTPUT device may have failed. Refer to the customer
documentation and the dealer documentation for
l. Disconnect the "8-" terminal from the battery. the device.
I. Disconnect the wire from contact 36 of the GSC . STOP.
. :. Disconnect the other end of the wire at the

101374924
customer device.
I. Measure the resistance between the wire that

was disconnected from contact 36 of the GSC+ SMCS Code: 4490-035
and the "8+" contact of the GSC+.
xpected Result:
he resistance is greater than 5000 ohms. GENERATOR

SET
CONTROL (GSC)
esults:
GSC-J6 SPARE
SPARE (!.)--+-_ _ _-=.:63'--_ _ _ _~
OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms.
The circuit is correct. 3
g00530806
Illustration 135
NOT OK - The resistance is less than 5000
ohms. The circuit is not correct. The spare output System schematic for the spare output
is shorted to "8+".
The spare output on the GSC+ is strictly for the use
Repair: Repair the wiring of the spare output relay. of customers. The spare output is programmable in
order to activate under a variety of conditions. The
STOP. default parameter programming causes the GSC+ to
activate the output when the engine is in cool down
est Step 3. RECONNECT TO CUSTOMER mode. The GSC+ treats aCID 0334 FMI 04 as
'EVICE an alarm fault. For more information, see Systems
. Reconnect the wire to the customer device. The customer and/or the dealer are responsible for
documenting and troubleshooting any connections
. Reconnect the wire IIlat was disconnected from to this output.
contact 36 to the GSC+
210
The voltage on the spare output is approximately B. Disconnect the wire from contact 36 of the m
5.0 DCV when there are no connections and when
the spare output is not active. When the spare C. Disconnect the other end of the wire at the
output is active, the voltage on the spare output is customer device.
approximately 0 volts. The spare output is capable
of drawing (sinking) approximately 100 mA. D. Measure the resistance between the wire thai
was disconnected from contact 36 of the GS(
The possible cause of aCID 0334 FMI 04 is a short and the "8-" contact of the GSC+.
to negative battery of the spare output signal.
Expected Result:
Troubleshooting of a spare output fault is direct. The
FMI defines the fault. FMI 04 occurs when the spare The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms.
output is shorted to negative battery. In order to
,find the exact cause of the fault, use the following Results:
information.
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohIT
• FMI information The circuit is correct. 3
• system schematic of spare output • NOT OK - The resistance is less than 5000
ohms. The circuit is not correct. The spare out
• documentation of the customer is shorted to negative battery (8-).
• documentation of the dealer Repair: Repair the wiring of the spare output.
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GENERATOR STOP.

SET CONTROL
Test Step 3. RECONNECT TO CUSTOM
A. Verify that the CID 0334 FMI 04 diagnostic code DEVICE
is active.
A. Reconnect the wire to the customer device.
B. Disconnect the wire from contact 36 of the GSC+.
B. Reconnect the wire that was disconnected fre
C, Measure the voltage between contact 36 of the contact 36 to the GSC+
GSC+ and frame ground.
C. Turn the ESC switch to STOP and check if th
Expected Result: diagnostic code is still active.
The voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV. Expected Result:
Results: The diagnostic code is not active .
• OK - The voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV. Results:

The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 2.
• OK - The diagnostic code is not active. It is iii
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT approximately 5 ± that the problem was in the wiring harness or
1.0 DCV. The voltage is NOT correct. The GSC+ problem is intermittent.
has failed.
Repair: Check the wiring between the GSC+ i
Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed. the customer device for problems. Repair the
Exit this diagnostic code procedure and repeat wiring or replace the wiring if a problem is fou
the CID 0334 FMI 04 diagnostic code procedure Watch for a reocurrence of the diagnostic cod
again. If the cause of the failure is still unknown,
then replace the GSC+. STOP.
STOP. • NOT OK - The diag nos tic code is still active.

There may be a problem with the customer
Test Step 2. CHECK FOR A SHORT TO device.
"B-" IN THE WIRING OF THE SPARE
OUTPUT
A. Disconnect the "8·" terminal from the battery.
211
Repair: Tthe customer device may have failed. The engine control switch (ECS) is used by the
Refer to the customer documentation and the operator for manually controlling the engine. The
dealer documentation for the device. ECS has four positions and each position connects
to a corresponding input of the GSC+. The selected
STOP. position of the ECS connects the corresponding
input of the GSC+ to the battery negative terminal
"8-". At any time, only one of these four positions
101361859 (inputs) is connected to the battery negative
~SC CID 0336 - FMI 02 terminal "8-".
,MCS Code: 7332-035 Each position of the ECS places the engine in
a different mode. The four positions and the
:ondilions Which Generate This Code: corresponding modes are described in the following
paragraphs.
"OFF/RESET" - The engine is shut down and

L the GSC+ is reset. The upper display and fault
indicators on the left side are temporarily cleared.
W 'W The GSC+ turns OFF unless a jumper is installed
from the ECS. The jumper electrically connects
1
os NEG
1 2
terminal "6" to terminal "9".
yq,.J r~ll:J
s<. "AUTO" - The engine starts and the engine runs

when the remote start/stop initiate contact closes
the start input that is located on the GSC+. The
GSC+ closes the remote start/stop initiate contact to
""LE'
the battery negative terminal "8-". Also, the engine
KJ K7 or' starts and the engine runs when the customer
communication module (CCM) sends a remote start
"-:'1~
command. At this time, the GSC+ starts the engine.
RM-1 6
The engine runs normally until the remote start/stop
+BAT SW 9 -t- I initiate contact opens. Also, the engine runs
GeNERATOR
,_1_ I normally until the customer communication module
SET
CONTROL
I I (CCM) sends a remote stop command. The engine
0-'--t- I enters a cooldown period. After the cooldown
2--
I -L 1
period, the engine is shut down. The GSC+ shows
GSC-39
:tl
~
OFf/RESET diagnostic codes on the upper display and on the
GSC-32 fault indicators as the diagnostic code occurs. The
COOL DOWN/STOP GSC+ is ON with the ECS in this position.
GSC-40
ENGINE
AUTO
CONTROL
SWITCH "MAN/START" - The engine starts and the engine
CSC-33
t < --'- (ECS)
runs until the operator turns the ECS to the
I
START
57 'J 30 "OFF/RESET" or the "COOLDOWN/STOP". The
REMOTE
--III START
CONTACT
engine starts and the engine runs until the GSC+
detects a shutdown fault. The GSC+ shows
diagnostic codes on the upper display and on the
fault indicators as the diagnostic code occurs. The
RM-27
FL YBACK
....
'V
30 1 GSC+ is ON with the ECS in this position .
2 "COOLDOWN/STOP" - The engine maintains rated

RM-2B~
-BAT speed for the cooldown period. The cool down
2 2
period is programmable from 0 to 30 minutes. After
the cooldown period elapses, the engine is shut
down. The GSC+ shows diagnostic codes on the
ustration 136 g00517891 upper display and on the fault indicators as the
diagnostic code occurs. The GSC+ is ON with the
implified Schematic For The Engine Control Switch (ECS)
ECS in this position.
212
Note: The remote start/stop contact is connected Expected Result:

to the GSC+ start input via a terminal strip. Wire
number 57 makes the connection from the terminal The resistance that is measured from contact
strip to the GSC+ start input. Before troubleshooting, to the "B-" terminal of the relay module shoulc
disconnect the remote start/stop initiate contacts ohms or less. The resistance that is measured
from the terminal strip. contacts "32", "33" and "40" to the "B-" termi
should be greater than 5000 ohms.
Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the
harness connector is disconnected from the GSC + Results:
these created diagnostic codes after the particular • OK - All resistance measurements are com
problem is corrected and the particular diagnostic Proceed to test step 2.
code is cleared.
• NOT OK - The resistance measurements ar
The possible causes of aCID 0336 FMI 02 are NOT correct. The harness wiring with the inc'
listed below. resistance measurement is open or the harn
wiring has failed .
• None of the GSC+ inputs from the ECS are
connected to ground. Repair: Repair the harness wiring or replace
harness wiring. Repair the wiring or replace
• More than one of the GSC+ inputs from the ECS wiring between the battery negative, the EC
is connected to the battery negative ("B-") at the and the GSC+ connector. Reconnect the rer
same time. The one exception is the start input. start/stop initiate contacts after troubleshooti
The start input of the GSC+ is also connected to complete.
the remote start/stop initiate contact. The contact
is controlled by the customer. The GSC+ will then STOP.
accept a connection from the battery negative
at the start input. Other inputs from the ECS are Test Step 2. CHECK FOR AN OPEN
also received. CIRCUIT IN THE "AUTO" POSITION
The CID 0336 FMI 02 is the only ECS diagnostic A. If equipped, the remote start/stop initiate
code that is detected by the GSC+. Clear contacts will remain disconnected from the
the diagnostic code from the fault log after terminal strip in the customer connection be
troubleshooting is complete. The GSC+ treats a
CID 0336 FMI 02 as a shutdown fault. Use these B. The harness connector remains disconnect,
procedures for an active diagnostic code or an from the GSC+.
inactive diagnostic code.
C. Check whether the corresponding contact c
Test Step 1. CHECK FOR AN OPEN GSC+ harness connector is the only contac
CIRCUIT IN THE "OFF/RESET" POSITION is connected to the battery negative.
A. It equipped, disconnect the remote start/stop D. Place the ECS in the AUTO position. MeasL
initiate contacts from the terminal strip in the the resistance from contact "40" of the GSC
customer connection box. harness connector to the "B-" terminal of
the relay module. Measure the resistance
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the from contacts "32", "33" and "39" to the "B·
GSC+. terminal. Make a note of the resistances tha
measured.
C. Check whether the corresponding contact of the
GSC+ harness connector is the only contact that Expected Result:
is connected to the battery negative.
The resistance that is measured from contact"
D. At the GSC+ harness connector, measure the to the "B-" terminal of the relay module should
resistance from contact "39" to the "B-" terminal ohms or less. The resistance that is measured'
of the relay module. Measure the resistance contacts "32", "33" and "39" to the "B-" termin
from contacts "32", "33" and "40" to the "B-" should be greater than 5000 ohms.
terminal. Make a note of the resistances that are
measured. Results:
• OK - The res is lance measurements are corn

213
• NOT OK - The resistance measurements are Test Step 4. CHECK FOR AN OPEN
NOT correct. The harness wiring with the incorrect CIRCUIT IN THE "COOLDOWN/STOP"
resistance measurement is open or the harness POSITION
wiring has failed.
A. If equipped, the remote start/stop initiate
Repair: Repair the harness wiring or replace contacts will remain disconnected from the
the harness wiring. Repair the wiring or replace terminal strip in the customer connection box.
the wiring between the battery negative, the
ECS, and the GSC+ connector. Reconnect B. The harness connector remains disconnected
the remote start/stop initiate contacts after the from the GSC+.
troubleshooting is completed.
STOP. GSC+ harness connector is the only contact that
is connected to the battery negative.
CIRCUIT IN THE "MAN/START" POSITION D. Place the ECS in the COOLDOWN/STOP
position. Measure the resistance from contact
A. If equipped, the remote start/stop initiate "32" of the GSC+ harness connector to the
contacts will remain disconnected from the "8-" terminal of the relay module. Measure the
terminal strip in the customer connection box. resistance from contacts "33", "39" and "40" to
the "8-" terminal. Make a note of the resistances
B. The harness connector remains disconnected that are measured.
from the GSC+.
Expected Resu It:
GSC+ harness connector is the only contact that The resistance that is measured from contact "32"
is connected to the battery negative. to the "8-" terminal of the relay module should be 5
ohms or less. The resistance that is measured from
D. Place the ECS in the MAN/START position. contacts "33", "39" and "40" to the "8-" terminal
Measure the resistance from contact "33" of the should be greater than 5000 ohms.
GSC+ harness connector to the "8-" terminal
of the relay module. Measure the resistance Results:
from contacts "32", "39" and "40" to the "8-"
terminal. Make a note of the resistances that are • OK - The resistance measurements are correct.
measured. STOP.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - The resistance measurements are

NOT correct. The harness wiring with the incorrect
The resistance that is measured from contact "33" resistance measurement is open or the harness
to the "8-" terminal of the relay module should be 5 wiring has failed.
ohms or less. The resistance that is measured from
contacts "32", "39" and "40" to the "8-" terminal Repair: Repair the harness wiring or replace
should be greater than 5000 ohms. the harness wiring. Repair the wiring or replace
Results:
• OK - The resistance measurements are correct.

ECS, and the GSC+ connector. Reconnect
the remote start/stop initiate contacts after the
troubleshooting is completed .
I
STOP.
• NOT OK - The resistance measurements are
NOT correct. The harness wiring with the incorrect Test Step 5. CHECK IF THE DIAGNOSTIC
resistance measurement is open or the harness CODE IS STILL ACTIVE
wiring has failed.
A. Clean the contacts of the harness connectors.
Repair: Repair the harness wiring or replace See Testing and Adjusting, "Electrical Connector
the harness wiring. Repair the wiring or replace - Inspect".
ECS, and the GSC+ connector. Reconnect B. Reconnect all of the harness connectors.
the remote start/stop initiate contacts after the
troubleshooting is completed. C. Clear all diagnostic codes from the fault log.
STOP. D. Operate the engine. i
Ii
214
E. Determine if the diagnostic code is active. The GSC+ uses the electronic governor relay (E
to signal the engine control module (ECM) to b,
Expected Result: injection. The GSC+ activates the EGR when tt
engine oil pressure is greater than the setpoint
The diagnostic code is NOT active. low oil pressure shutdown at idle speed ("P014
Also, "K 1" will be present on the lower display.
Results: closes the relay contacts of the EGR. The outPl
the electronic governor relay is rated at 1 amp.
• OK - The diagnostic code is NOT active. EGR is located within the relay module .
The problem does not exist at this time. The
initial problem was probably caused by a poor Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GS(
electrical connection or a short at one of the attempts to activate the EGR, "K 1" is shown on
harness connectors that was disconnected and lower display. When the EGR is not activated, "
reconnected. Resume normal operation and is not shown.
watch for a recurrence. STOP.
The possible causes of this diagnostic code ar
• NOT OK - The diagnostic code is active. listed:
Repair: The problem has not been corrected. • The EGR has an open coil or a shorted coil.
It is unlikely that the ECS has failed. Exit this
procedure and perform this procedure again. If The results to this diagnostic code are listed:
the cause of the diagnostic code is not found,
replace the ECS. • If CID 0441 FMI 12 occurs during the activatk
the EGR, the ECM will stop the fuel injection
STOP. the engine will shut down immediately.
• If CID 0441 FMI 12 occurs and the EGR is r

101362562
activated, the engine will be unable to start.
GSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for EUI Clear the diagnoslic code from the fault log aft
Engines) troubleshooting is complete. The GSC + treats ,
CID 0441 FMI 12 as an alarm fault. Active alan
SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7 faults are. shown on the display when the alarn
codes key is pressed. The active alarm faults v
SIN: 5KW1·Up be displayed when the ECS switch is placed in
SIN: 6GW1-Up position except the OFF/RESET position.
SIN: 8NW1-Up This troubleshooting procedure is for an active

0441 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure i
SIN: 8AZ1-Up an inactive CID 0441 FMI 12.
Conditions Which Generate This Code: Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF 1
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position an,
GENERATOR ".9' @j ECM then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
SET
CONTROL (esc) ..... 0
)--5=fo DIG SEN RET
RIA::14 8. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
EGR
0@j
)--s= Co
(C SIRIS I C. Observe the upper display. Check that the (
0441 FMI 12 is active.
A.
RM:';3
" 00
'-:)--s:: 0 S/R/S 2 D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter th,
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1.
Check that the diagnostic code is inactive.
900681895 Expected Result:

Illustration 137
System Schematic For Electronic Governor Relay (EGR) ACID 0441 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
diagnostic code or CID 0441 FMI 12 is display'
as an inactive diagnostic code.
215
Results: D. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

RM-13 to RM-14. Make a note of the resistance
• OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 is active or the CID measurement.
0441 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2.
E. Start and run the engine. Make sure that the
• NOT OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 has not engine oil pressure is greater than the setpoint for
occurred. The diagnostic code is not active and low oil pressure shutdown at idle speed (P014).
the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP
F. At the relay module, measure the resistance from
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL RM-13 to RM-14. Make a note of the resistance
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. measurement.
Note: Only open the relay module in a dry Expected Result:

environment. If the inspection and repair takes more
than approximately twenty minutes replace the The initial resistance measurement after removing
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing the wires from the relay module should be 5000
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". ohms. The resistance measurement should be
5 ohms after exceeding the setpoint for low oil
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. pressure shutdown at idle speed.
B. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Results:
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from • OK - The resistance measurements are correct.
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay The problem does not exist at this time. The
Module - Replace". initial problem was probably caused by a poor
electrical connection or a short at one of the
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module harness connectors that was disconnected and
to the GSC+. reconnected. Resume normal operation and
Expected Result:
• NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. measurements are NOT correct. The relay module
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not has failed.
be damaged.
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing
Results: And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. STOP.

The clamp is in place. The cable is not damaged.
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+.
• NOT OK - One or more of the components are

damaged or the components are missing.
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing.

If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See
STOP.
Test Step 3. PERFORM A FUNCTIONAL

CHECK ON THE EGR.
B. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-13 and RM-14 of

the relay module.
216
101364276 • If CID 0441 FMI 12 occurs during the activati,

the EGR, the ECM will stop the fuel injection
GSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for MUI the engine will shut down immediately.
Engines) • If CID 0441 FMI 12 occurs and the EGR is
SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7 activated, the engine will be unable to start.
SIN: SNS1-Up Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log af
troubleshooting is complete. The GSC+ treats
SIN: 9ES1-Up CID 0441 FMI 12 as an alarm fault. Active alar
faults are shown on the display when the alan
SIN: 5PW1-Up
codes key is pressed. The active alarm faults
SIN: 6WW 1-Up be displayed when the ECS switch is placed ir
pOSition except the OFF/RESET position.
SIN: STW1-Up
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active
SIN: LRW1-Up 0441 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure
SIN: LRX1-Up an inactive CID 0441 FMI 12.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF

DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position ar
GENERATOR [CM B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.

SET
CONTROL (GSC) ~~-I"'-- DIG SEN RET
RM_14 C. Observe the upper display. Check that the
S/RIS I
D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter tl
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1
5/R/S 2 . Check that the diagnostic code is inactive.
Expected Result:
900681895
ACID 0441 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
Illustration 138 diagnostic code or CID 0441 FMI 12 is displa
System Schematic For Electronic Governor Relay (EGR) as an inactive diagnostic code.
The electronic governor relay (EGR) is not used for Results:

any factory installed devices. The GSC+ activates
the EGR when the engine oil pressure is greater • OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 is active or the
than the setpoint for low oil pressure shutdown at 0441 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test stel
idle speed ("P014"). Also, "K 1" will be present on
the lower display. This closes the relay contacts of • NOT OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 has not
the EGR. The output for the electronic governor occurred. The diagnostic code is not active
relay is rated at 1 amp. The EGR is located within the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
the relay module.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+ CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
attempts to activate the EGR, "K 1" is shown on the
lower display. When the EGR is not activated, "K 1" Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
is not shown. environment. If the inspection and repair take~
than approximately twenty minutes replace 11-
The possible causes of this diagnostic code are desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Tes
listed: And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace" .
• The EGR has an open coil or a shorted coil. A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
The results to this diagnostic code are listed: B. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
217
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from Results:

the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay
Module - Replace". • OK - The resistance measurements are correct.
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module initial problem was probably caused by a poor
to Ihe GSC+. electrical connection or a short at one of the
harness connectors that was disconnected and
Expected Result: reconnected. Resume normal operation and
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector.
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
be damaged. measurements are NOT correct. The relay module
has failed.
Results:
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace" .
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. STOP.
iOl364307
• NOT OK _. One or more of the components are
damaged or the components are missing. GSC CID 0441 - FMI 12 (for
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing. PEEC Engines)
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
SIN: LRY1-Up
STOP. SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Test Stefl 3. PERFORM A FUNCTIONAL Conditions Which Generate This Code:
CHECK ON THE EGA.
B. Reconnect the negative battery cable.

GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL (GSC) ..
RM":::14
0
ECM
DIG SEN RET
EGR
the relay module.
D. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

..
RM~13 "
r S/RIS 1
RM-13 to RM-14. Make a note of the resistance \..; S/RIS 2

measurement.
E. Start and run the engine. Make sure that the

engine oil pressure is greater than the setpoint for
low oil pressure shutdown at idle speed (P014). g00681895
Illustration 139
System Schematic For Electronic Governor Relay (EGA)
RM-13 to RM-14. Make a note of the resistance The GSC+ uses the electronic governor relay (EGR)
measurement. to activate the close-for-rated speed contacts of the
programmable electronic engine control (PEEC).
Expected Result: When this occurs, the PEEC will increase the engine
speed from the idle speed to the rated speed. The
fhe initial resistance measurement after removing output lor the electronic governor relay is rated at 1
:he wires from the relay module should be 5000 amp. The EGR is located within the relay module.
Jhms. The resistance measurement should be
) ohms after exceeding the setpoint for low oil
Jressure shutdown at idle speed.
II
218
The GSC+ activates the EGR when the engine oil Expected Result:
pressure is greater than the setpoint for low oil
pressure shutdown at idle speed ("P014"). Also, ACID 0441 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
"K 1" will be present on the lower display. The relay diagnostic code or CID 0441 FMI 12 is display
contacts of the EGR will close. This action will send as an inactive diagnostic code.
a command to the PEEC that will advance the idle
to the rated engine speed. Results:
The GSC+ does not activate the EGR when the • OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 is active or the (
engine oil pressure is less than the setpoint for low 0441 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step
oil pressure shutdown at idle speed ("P014"). Also,
"K 1" is not present on the lower display. The relay • NOT OK - The CID 0441 FMI 12 has not
contacts of the EGR will open. This action will send occurred. The diagnostic code is not active i
a command to the PEEC that will advance the idle the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
to Ihe rated engine speed.
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or Ihe GSC+ CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
attempts to activate the EGR, "K 1" is shown on the
lower display. When the EGR is not activated, "K1" Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
is not shown. environment. If the inspection and repair takes r
than approximately twenty minutes replace the
The possible causes of this diagnostic code are desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testir
listed: And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
• The EGR has an open coil or a shorted coil. A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position .
There is not a system response to the CID 0441 B. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
FMI 12 because there is not a factory connection
to the EGR. C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Rele
The GSC+ treats aCID 0441 FMI 12 as an alarm Module - Replace".
fault. Active alarm faults are shown on the display
when the alarm codes key i$ pressed. The actiye D. Check the ,cable that attaches the relay mod
alarm faults will be displayed when the ECS switch to the GSC+.
is placed in any position except the OFF/RESET
position. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault Expected Result:
log after troubleshooting is completed.
The cable should be firmly seated in the conne
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CID The clamp should be in place. The cable shoulc
0441 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is for be damaged.
an inactive CID 0441 FMI 12.
Results:
Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
DIAGNOSTIC CODE. • OK - The cable is firmly seated in the conne,
The clamp is in place. The cable is not dama!
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+.
then turn the ECS to the STOP position. Proceed to test step 3.
B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. • NOT OK - One or more of the components a
C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CID
0441 FMI 12 is active. Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is mis~
If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. ~
D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter the Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Con
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1. (Generator Set) - Replace".
STOP.
219
fest Step 3. PERFORM A FUNCTIONAL i01364401

::HECK ON THE EGR.
Gse elo 0442 - FMI 12
~. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
;. Disconnect all wires from RM-13 and RM-14 of
the relay module.
GFR
F5 K2
~ ~ ~
). At the relay module, measure the resistance from B'
RM-13 to RM-14. Make a note of the resistance RM~J4 R~7 RM~22
measurement.
GENERATOR
SET B-
:. Start and run the engine. Make sure that the CONTROL
(esc)
engine oil pressure is greater Ihan the setpoint for
low oil pressure shutdown at idle speed (P014). 2 6
=. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

measurement.
'W '0/
:xpected Result: 24V DC 6
SHUNT 2
TRIP :Cl 2
-he initial resistance measurement after removing
ST
he wires from the relay module should be 5000 ~ ;C2 6
lhms. The resistance measurement should be
i ohms after exceeding the setpoint for low oil
900531020
)ressure shutdown at idle speed. illUstration 140
System Schematic For Generator Fault Relay (GFR) On MUI
~esults: Engines
, OK - The resistance measurements are correct.

initial problem was probably caused by a poor
reconnected. Resume normal operation and GENERATOR
SET B-
watch for a recurrence. STOP. CONTROL
(esc)
, NOT OK - Either one of the resistance 2
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module
has failed.

And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
24V DC
STOP. SHUNT
TRIP
:CI 2
c
ST
:C2
6
900518340
Illustration 141
System Schematic For Generator Fault Relay (GFR) On PEEC
Engines
220
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active (

0442 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure i[
an inactive CIO 0442 FMI 12.
Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF T

DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
GENERATOR
SET ,- A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and
CONTROL
(Gse) then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
2
B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
c. Observe the upper display. Check that the C

24V DC D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter thE

SHUNT Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1.
TRIP
:Cl 2 Check that the diagnostic code is inactive.
;C2
6 Expected Result:
Illustration 142 900687333 ACID 0442 FMI 12 is displayed as an active

System Schematic For Generator Fault Relay (GFR) On EUI
diagnostic code or CIO 0442 FMI 12 is displaye
Engines as an inactive diagnostic code.
The GSC+ uses the generator fault relay (GFR) in Results:

order to activate the circuit breaker for the shunt trip
coil during a shutdown faull. The GFR is located • OK - The CIO 0442 FMI 12 is active or the CI
within the relay module. The optional circuit breaker 0442 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step ~
is located in the generator housing.
• NOT OK - The CIO 0442 FMI 12 has not
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+ occurred. The diagnostic code is not active ar
attempts 10 activate the GFR, "K2" is shown on the the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP...
lower display. When the GFR is not activated, "K2"
is not shown. Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
The possible cause of aCID 0442 FMI 12 is an
open coil or a shorted coil of the GFR. Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
environment. If the inspection and repair takes m
The system response to this diagnostic code is than approximately twenty minutes replace the
listed below. desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testin(
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace" .
• When aCID 0442 FMI 12 occurs and the GFR is
activated, the diagnostic code will not have an A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
effect on the system. The system is not affected
because the optional circuit breaker is already B, Disconnect the battery negative cable.
open and shutdown mode is functioning. The
generator is already off-line. C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
• If aCID 0442 FMI 12 occurs and the GFR is Module - Replace" .
not activated, the GFR cannot activate the shunt
trip coil of the optional circuit breaker when a D. Check the cable that attaches the relay modu I
to the GSC+.
II
shutdown fault occurs.
The GSC+ treats aCID 0442 FMI 12 as an alarm Expected Result:

when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. The ECS The cable should be firmly seated in the connect
must be in any position except the OFF/RESET The clamp should be in place. The cable should I
position. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault be damaged.
221
lesults: Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing

, OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector.
The clamp is in place. The cable is not damaged. STOP,
101364889
, NOT OK - One or more of the components are

If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See Conditions Which Generate This Code:
(~enerator Set) - Replace".
CTR
-"~7
GENERATOR ~
STOP SET v
CONTROL RM-17
(GSC)
·est Step 3. PERFORM A FUNCTIONAL CTR
;HECK ON THE GFR. f1
~J,
,+ ~ ~
v
,. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. RM~JO RM-J RM-16
I. Reconnect the battery negative cable. ,-

:. Disconnect all wires from RM-22 of the relay 2
2 J'
module.
2
/
GENERATOR 2
I. Remove fuse "F5" from the relay module. RUNNING
J8 J8
:. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

RELAY
,I-~
;10
,2 J'
2
-
measurement. ,,,
B9
Turn the ECS to the STOP position and push in . ,I ,,: a,

the emergency stop push button.
aT
:11
B7
-
t At the relay module, measure the resistance from GRR/3
measurement. 2
:xpected Result:
MOTI
~
1:4 I
,I 2
,
he initial resistance measurement after removing
eM} I~;
1:1 :21 .38
1e wires from the relay module should be 5000 MOT2 I
hms. The resistance measurement should be less IGOVERNOR

1an 5 ohms when the ECS is placed in the STOP SWITCH
osition. 900531303
Illustration 143
lesults: System Schematic For Crank Termination Relay (CTR) On MUI
Engines
OK - The resistance measurements are correct.
electrical connection or a short at one of Ihe
reconnected. Resume normal operation and
NOT OK - Either one of the resistance

has failed.
222
CTR eTR
GENERATOR
SET
"3
.... GENERATOR
SET ":.. ....
CONTROL
(esc)
R;;:17 CONTROL
(GSC)
R~'7
B+ .... ~
F1
CTR
"3
... B+ ..... .:.:-,
eTR
~ ....
RM-JO RM-3 R~16 RM'::."JO RM-3 RM~'6
B- \ B-
2 3B e- 2 3B
2
2
/
2
GENERATOR 2
GENERATOR 38 38 3B 3B
RUNNING RUNNING
RELAY :10 2 RELAY :10 2 ~
;-f$J
,
,,
,2 38 .-$
,, ,2
"
,,
:91 ,:'11.
, B9
88
- :91 i :11
B9
Ba
BT B7 ~ aT a7
GRR/3 GRR/3 :22
RED 29A fSR!l 2a

:21 _\r:j":
2
I EFeR --- .
~ IJR1G YELLOW
1:4 ,
,51 2 eND
OUT
29B
27 :1
MOTl I
X-~
<
u
(M) MOl2
~:
1;1 I
:21 38
<
~
m
IGOVERNO~
SWITCH
Illustration 144 9OOS18443 Illustration 145 g00687

System Schematic For Crank Termination Relay (CTR) On PEEC System Schematic For Crank Termination Relay (CTR) On EU
Engines Engines
The GSC+ uses the crank termination relay (CTR;

order to activate optional components such as th
generator running relay (GRR) and the governor
control switch. The CTR is located within the rela
module. The governor control switch is located 0
the front panel.
The CTR is used to indicate that the engine is

beginning to run without cranking. The GSC+
activates the CTR when engine speed is greater
than the crank terminate setpoint. (Setpoint P011
should be 400 RPM.) Also, the starting motor rei,
has been deactivated. The CTR deactivates whel
the engine RPM reaches O.
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates the CTR, "K:

is shown on the lower display. When the CTR is r
activated, "K3" is not shown.

open coil or a shorted coil of the CTR.
223
1e system responses to this diagnostic code are Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
;ted below. CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
If aCID 0443 FMI 12 occurs and the CTR is Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
activated, the engine will continue to run, but environment. If the inspection and repair takes more
the GRR and the governor control switch are than approximately twenty minutes replace the
deactivated. On PEEC engines, the AUX is desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing
deactivated. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
If aCID 0443 FMI 12 occurs and the CTR is A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
not activated, then the engine is able to start
and the engine is able to run. The GRR and the B. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Governor control switch are not activated. On
P~EC engines, the AUX is not activated. C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
1e GSC+ treats aCID 0443 FMI 12 as an alarm Module - Replace".
,ult. Active alarm faults are shown on the display
hen the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. Also, the D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module
~tive alarm faults are shown when the ECS is to the GSC+.
any position except the OFF/RESET position.
lear the diagnostic code from the fault log after Expected Result:
:Jubleshooting is complete.
lis troubleshooting procedure is used to correct The clamp should be in place. The cable should not
1 active CID 0443 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting be damaged.
rocedure is for an inactive CID 0443 FMI 12.
Results:
est Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
IIAGNOSTIC CODE. • OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector.
, Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+.
then turn the ECS to the STOP position. Proceed to test step 3.
· Press the "Alarm Codes" key. • NOT OK - One or more of the components are
· Observe the upper display. Check that the CID
0443 FMI 12 is active. Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing.
· If the diagnostic code is not active, enter the Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP 1. (Generator Set) - Replace".
STOP.
xpected Result:
CID 0443 FMI 12 is displayed as an active CHECK ON THE CTR.
iagnostic code or CID 0443 FMI 12 is displayed
3 an inactive diagnostic code. A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
esults: B. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
OK - The CID 0443 FMI 12 is active or the CID C. Disconnect all wires from RM- 16 of the relay
0443 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2. module.
NOT OK - The CID 0443 FMI 12 has not D. Remove fuse "F1" from the relay module.
occurred. The diagnostic code is not active and
the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP. E, At the relay module, measure the resistance from
RM-16 to RM·3. Make a note of the resistance
measurement.
F. Start and run the engine. Make sure that the

engine speed is greater than crank terminate
setpoint (P011).
224
G. At the relay module, measure the resistance from Conditions Which Generate This Code:
RM-22 to RM-? Make a note of the resistance
measurement.
SMR
K<
GENERATOR
Expected Result: SET
CONTROL RM-21
(GSC)
The initial resistance measurement after removing SM'
the wires from the relay module should be greater K4
than 5000 ohms. The resistance measurement ,+ J-~I)--'v---<>-II-~I>--t--

RM-33 RM-5 RM-18
should be less than 5 ohms after exceeding the
crank terminate setpoint.
,-
Results:
, 1
• OK - The resistance measurements are correct. ESPB
~~
initial problem was probably caused by a poor 'if
,",,"
4
electrical connection or a short at one of the ,ex
harness connectors that was disconnected and I
reconnected. Resume normal operation and ~
,4 ,4
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module ,~-e
,
$-~,
,,, ,,
,3 :3
1--
I
has failed.
,, ,
,,,
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing ,, ,
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". ,1 1- :2 24 24 ;2~
STOP. S1 ARTING 51 ARTING

MOTOR
MAGNETIC
TO reB'
(+BAT)
MOTOR
MAGNETIC
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
i01364929
25 '6
GSC CIO 0444 - FMI 12 (for MUI [£:sD ~
and EUI Engines) Illustration 146 gODS:
SMCS Code: 44BO-035-R7 System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR) For MUI
Engines
SIN: SNS1-Up
SIN: BES1-Up
SIN: 5KW1-Up
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: 6WWI-Up
SIN: SNW1-Up
SIN: STW1-Up
SIN: LRWI-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
SIN: SAZI-Up
225

GENERATOR
SET
••S"R when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed, The ECS
can be in any position except the OFF/RESET
CONTROL RM-21
(OSC) position. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault
,;
FJ ••S"R
RM-6
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CID
RU-33 RM-18
0444 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is for
14
r:''"'5C::P-=S- DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
ESPB

e, Observe the upper display. Check that the CID

0444 FMI 12 is active,
D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter the

Service Mode, View the fault log for a OP1,
Check that the diagnostic code is inactive,
" " Expected Result:

S1 ARTING ST ARTING
MOlOR TO CB2
MOlOR ACID 0444 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 diagnostic code or CID 0444 FMI 12 is displayed
as an inactive diagnostic code,
25 26
PSI PS2 Results:
lustration 147
900680589 • OK - The CID 0444 FMI 12 is active or the CID
0444 FMI 12 is inactive, Proceed to test step 2,
iystem Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMA) For EUI
:ngines
• NOT OK - The CID 0444 FMI 12 has not
'he GSC+ uses the starting motor relay (SMR) to occurred, The diagnostic code is not active and
lctivate the starting motor magnetic switch (SMMS). the diagnostic code is not inactive, STOP.
he SMR is located within the relay module.
~ote: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+
lttempts to activate the SMR, "K4" is shown on the
Jwer display. When the SMR is not activated, "K4" Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
3 not shown.
'he possible cause of aCID 0444 FMI 12 is an desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing, See Testing
'pen coil or a shorted coil of the SMR. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace",
'he system responses to this diagnostic code are A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position,
sted below.
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable,
• If aCID 0444 FMI 12 occurs and the SMR is
activated, then the engine stops cranking. e. Temporarily,
remove the relay module from
• If aCID 0444 FMI 12 occurs and the SMR is Module - Replace" .
not activated, then the engine can not crank or
the engine can not start. If the engine is already
running, then the engine continues to run.
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module
to the GSC+.
111
I
I
226
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. • OK - The resistance measurements are corr
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not The problem does not exist at this time. The
be damaged. initial problem was probably caused by a pc
electrical connection or a short at one of thE
Results: harness connectors that was disconnected,
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. watch for a recurrence. STOP.
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
Proceed to test step 3. measurements are NOT correct. The relay me
has failed .
damaged or the components are missing. Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testir
If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See STOP.
STOP.

CHECK ON THE SMR.
B. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-18 of the relay

module.
D. Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module.
E. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

measurement.
F. Turn the ECS to the START position. Quickly

measure the resistance from RM-18 to RM-6.
Measure the resistance before the starting
motor relay achieves drop time because of the
cycle crank time. Make a note of the resistance
measurement.
Expected Result:
The initial resistance measurement after removing

the wires and the fuse from the relay module
should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistance
measurement should be less than 5 ohms before
the starting motor relay achieves the drop time
because of the cycle crank time.
227
i01365650 The possible cause of a CIO 0444 FMI 12 is an

open coil or a shorted coil of the SMR.
GSC CID 0444 - FMI 12 (for
PEEC Engines) The system responses to this diagnostic code are
listed below.
• If a CIO 0444 FMI 12 occurs and the SMR is
SIN: LRY1-Up activated, then the engine stops cranking. The
prelube pump is disabled. The AUTO position
SIN: 4BZ1-Up of the start aid switch is disabled. The battery
charger will continue to run.
• If a CIO 0444 FMI 12 occurs and the SMR is
SMR
not activated, then the engine can not crank
GENERATOR
SET
K<
.... and the engine can not start. The prelube pump
CONTROL R~21 is disabled. The AUTO position of the start aid
(GSC) switch is disabled. The battery charger will
SMR continue to function. If the engine is already
8--::Rt..t~33
.... ~
K'
.... running, then the engine continues to run.
RM-6 R~18
The GSC+ treats a CIO 0444 FMI 12 as an alarm
,- fault. Active alarm faults are shown on the display
ESPB ON when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. The ECS
ENCLOSURE , can be in any position except the OFF/RESET
---- ili
14
ESPB ESP8
position. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault
,W eX
n<" ~~ This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CIO
0444 FM I 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is for
~ ~
" "
. DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
I-~ ~-I,
,,, ,J ,, A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET pOSition and
-i
,J
,,, ,,, then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
,,, - ,
,, B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
"2 __ -I
~I-- :2 I
24
" . ----'---
C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO
STARTING 51 ARTlNG
MOTOR TO ICB2 MOIOR 0444 FMI 12 is active.
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
'5 26 Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1.
@!J ~
Illustration 148
900518564 Expected Result:
System Schematic For The Starting Motor Relay On PEEC
Engines A CIO 0444 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
diagnostic code or CIO 0444 FMI 12 is displayed
The GSC+ uses the starting motor relay (SMR) to as an inactive diagnostic code.
activate the starting motor magnetic switch (SMMS).
Also, the AUTO position of the start aid switch Results:
(SAS) and the optional prelube pump are activated.
The SMR deactivates the optional battery charger • OK - The CIO 0444 FMI 12 is active or the CIO
during engine cranking. The SMR is located within 0444 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2.
the relay module. The optional prelube pump is
located externally to the control panel. • NOT OK - The CIO 0444 FMI 12 has not
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+ the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
attempts to activate the SMR, "K4" is shown on the
lower display. When the SMR is not activated, "K4"
is not shown.
228
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL F. Turn the ECS to the START position. Quickly
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. measure the resistance from RM-18 to RM-E
Measure the resistance before the starting
Note: Only open Ihe relay module in a dry motor relay achieves drop time because of I
environment. If the inspection and repair takes more cycle crank time. Make a note of the resistar
than approximately twenty minutes replace the measurement.
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing
And Adjusting. "Relay Module - Replace". Expected Result:
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. The initial resistance measurement after removi
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable. should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistar
measurement should be less than 5 ohms befc
C. Temporarily. remove the relay module from the starting motor relay achieves the drop time
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting. "Relay because of the cycle crank time.
Module - Replace".
Results:
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module
to the GSC+. • OK - The resistance measurements are com
Expected Result: initial problem was probably caused by a po
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. harness connectors that was disconnected a
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not reconnected. Resume normal operation and
be damaged. watch for a recurrence. STOP.
Results: • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance

measurements are NOT correct. The relay me
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. has failed .
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testin
Proceed to test step 3. And Adjusting. "Relay Module - Replace" .
• NOT OK - One or more of the components are STOP.


If the cable is damaged. replace the GSC+. See
Testing and Adjusting. "EMCP Electronic Control
STOP.

CHECK ON THE SMR.
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-18 of the relay

module.
E. At the relay module. measure the resistance from

measurement.
229
i01365777 • If aCID 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR is

activated, any customer's equipment on RM-24 of
GSC CID 0445 - FMI 12 (for EUI the relay module will be disabled. The customer's
Engines) equipment that is connected to RM-23 will be
activated.
• If aCID 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR is not
SIN: 5KW1-Up activated, any customer's equipment on RM-24
of the relay module will not be activated. The
SIN: 6GW1-Up customer's equipment that is connected to RM-23
will remain activated.
SIN: BNW1-Up
SIN: BAZ1-Up The GSC+ treats aCID 0445 FMI 12 as an
alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown on the
Conditions Which Generate This Code: display when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed.
Also, the engine control switch (ECS) must be
in any position except the OFF/RESET position.
RR
o F& K5 troubleshooting is complete.
OI--~~"r-----1E3E3-~~"r-----"'--~-I-----,
RM-3~ RM-6 RM-24 This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CID
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(GSC) Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
RM-9 RM-36
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
EMERGENCY STOP
ON ENCLOSURE
;10 :2 ESPB B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
12
" C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CID .
I
Check that the diagnostic code is inactive. I
Expected Result: I
1
lIustratron 149
)ystem Schematic For The Run Relay (RR) On EUI Engines
900687608
diagnostic code or CID 0445 FMI 12 is displayed
Results:
i1
[he run relay (RR) is available for the customer's
Jse. The RR is located within the relay module. The • OK - The CID 0445 FMI 12 is active or the CID
3SC+ activates the RR during engine cranking and
unning.
~ote: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+


the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
,
,
lttempts to activate the RR, "K5" is shown on the
ower display. When the RR is not activated, "K5"
I
s not shown. Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
-he possible cause of aCID 0445 FMI 12 is an
)pen coil or a shorted coil of the RR. Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
environment. If the inspection and repair tal<es more I;
'he system responses to this fault are listed below. than approximately twenty minutes replace the
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing !
I
230
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. Results:
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable. • OK - The resistance measurements are corree
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from initial problem was probably caused by a POOl
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay electrical connection or a short at one of the
Module - Replace". harness connectors that was disconnected an
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module watch for a recurrence. STOP.
to the GSC+.
Expected Result: measurements are NOT correct. The relay mod
has failed .
. The cable should be firmly seated in the connector.
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing
be damaged. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
Results: STOP.
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. Test Step 4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
The clamp is in place. The cable is not damaged. OF THE RUN RELAY IN THE START
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. POSITION
A. Turn the ECS to the START position .
• NOT OK - One or more of Ihe components are
damaged or the components are missing. B. The wires from RM-23 and RM-24 remain
disconnected.
If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See C. At the relay module, measure the resistance fr
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control RM-23 to RM-9. Make a note of the resistanc(
(Generator Set) - Replace". measurement.
STOP. D. Measure the resistance from RM-24 to RM-S.

Make a note of the resistance measurement.
Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF
THE RUN RELAY IN THE OFF/RESET Expected Result:
POSITION
The resistance measurement from RM-23 to RM-
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistan(
measurement should be less than 5 ohms at RM
B. Reconnect the battery negative cable. to RM-S.
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-23 and RM-24 of Results:

the relay module.
• OK - The resistance measurements are corree
D. Remove fuse "F6" from the relay module. The problem does not exist at this time. The
initial problem was probably caused by a poo
E. At the relay module, measure the resistance from electrical connection or a short at one of the
RM-24 to RM-B. Make a note of the resistance harness connectors that was disconnected an
measurement. reconnected. Resume normal operation and
RM-23 to RM-9. Make a note of the resistance • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
measurement. measurements are NOT correct. The relay mod
has failed.
Expected Result:
The resistance measurement from RM-24 to RM-S And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
measurement should be less than 5 ohms at RM-23 STOP.
to RM-9.
231
101365856 Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+

attempts to activate the RR, "K5" is shown on the
~SC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for MUI lower display. When the RR is not activated, "K5"
:ngines) is not shown.
MCS Code: 4490-035-R7 The possible cause of a CIO 0445 FMI 12 is an

open coil or a shorted coil of the RR.
IN: SNS1-Up
The system responses to this diagnostic code are
IN: 9ES1-Up listed below.
IN: 5PW1-Up
• If a CIO 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR
IN: 6WW1-Up is activated, the SAS will be disabled. Any
customer's equipment on RM-23 of the relay
IN:'STW1-Up module will be disabled.
IN: LRW1-Up • If a CIO 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR is
IN: LRX1-Up not activated, the SAS will not be enabled. Any
customer's equipment on RM-23 of the relay
IN: 4BZ1-Up. module will not be activated.
onditions Which Generate This Code: The GSC+ treats a CIO 0445 FMI 12 as an
display when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed.
RR
F6 K5 in any position except the OFF/RESET position.
•• 1-~1>--'v--~;)---II---4)-+---, Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
RM-J5 RM-8 RM-24
RR
GENERATOR
SET
~23 This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CIO
~
CONTROL an inactive CIO 0445 FMI 12.
(GSC)
• RM-9 RM-J6
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
60 59 J9
, - - - - / SASV f---0-------- - - - - ' - ' - 0 B, Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
SAS
C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO

SATS D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter the

Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP 1.
Expected Result:
g00531413
Jstration 150 A CIO 0445 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
1e GSC+ uses the run relay (RR) in order to as an inactive diagnostic code.
~tivate the start aid system. The GSC+ provides
set of contacts of the run relay (RR 1) for the Results:
Jstomer's use. The RR is located within the relay
lodule. The starting aid switch (SAS) is located • OK - The CIO 0445 FMI 12 is active or the CIO
1 the front panel. 0445 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2.
1e GSC+ activates the RR during engine cranking • NOT OK - The CIO 0445 FMI 12 has not
1d running. occurred. The diagnostic code is not active and
232
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL F. At the relay module, measure the resistance
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. RM·23 to RM-9. Make a note of the resistan,
measurement.
Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
environment. If the inspection and repair takes more Expected Result:
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing The resistance measurement from RM-24 to Rt<.
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistal
measurement should be less than 5 ohms at AI
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. to RM-9.
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Results:
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from • OK - The resistance measurements are com
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay The problem does not exist at this time. The
Module - Replace". initial problem was probably caused by a po
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module harness connectors that was disconnected a
to the GSC+. reconnected. Resume normal operation and
Expected Result:
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. measurements are NOT correct. The relay mo
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not has failed.
be damaged.
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testin
Results: And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. STOP.

Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. Test Step 4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Proceed to test step 3. OF THE RUN RELAY IN THE START
POSITION
damaged or the components are missing. A. Turn tile ECS to the START position.
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing. B. The wires from RM-23 and RM-24 remain
If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See disconnected.
(Generator Set) - Replace". C. At the relay module, measure the resistance
RM-23 to RM-9. Make a note of the resistan(
STOP. measurement.
Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF D. Measure the resistance from RM-24 to RM-S
THE RUN RELAY IN THE OFF/RESET Make a note of the resistance measurement.
POSITION
Expected Result:
The resistance measurement from RM-23 to Rt<.'
B. Reconnect the battery negative cable. should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistar
measurement should be less than 5 ohms at m
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-23 and RM-24 of to RM-S.
the relay module.
D. Remove fuse "F6" from tile relay module.

RM-24 to RM-S. Make a note of the resistance
measurement.
233
Results: The GSC+ uses the run relay (RR) in order to

provide an engine shutdown signal to the PEEC .
• OK - The resistance measurements are correct. The GSC+ also uses the run relay (RR) in order to
The problem does not exist at this time. The activate the MAN position of the start aid switch. The
initial problem was probably caused by a poor RR is located within the relay module. The starting
electrical connection or a short at one of the aid switch (SAS) is located on the front panel.
reconnected. Resume normal operation and The GSC+ activates the RR during engine cranking
watch for a recurrence. STOP. and running .
• NOT OK - Either one of the resistance Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module attempts to activate the RR, "K5" is shown on the
has failed. lower display. When the RR is not activated, "K5"
is not shown.
F/epair: Replace the relay module. See Testing
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". The possible cause of a CIO 0445 FMI 12 is an
open coil or a shorted coil of the RR.
STOP.
The system responses to this diagnostic code are
listed below.
i01366018
GSC CID 0445 - FMI 12 (for • If a CIO 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR is
activated, the engine shuts down and the engine
PEEC Engines) does not start. The MAN position of the SAS is
disabled.
,MCS Code: 4490-035-R7
• If a CIO 0445 FMI 12 occurs and the RR is not
:;/N: LRY1-Up activated, the engine can not start. The MAN
:;IN: 4BZ1-Up position of the SAS is disabled.
~onditions Which Generate This Code: The GSC+ treats a CIO 0445 FMI 12 as an
display when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed.
RR
K5
in any pOSition except the OFF/RESET position.
8 ~
RM-J6
E:::J
f6
(lOA)
~
RM-B RM-24
-:!3
RR
K5
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CIO
GENERATOR
SET 0445 FM I 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is
CONTROL for an inactive CIO 0445.
(GSC)
~ E::3
F7
RM-9 (lOA) RM-36 Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
EMERGENGY
ON ENCLOSURE
STOP
ESP8
:10 :2 C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO
CR
12 39 0445 FMI 12 is active.
2
Expected Result:
ustration 151
900518798 A CIO 0445 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
ystem Schematic For The Run Relay (RA) On PEEC Engines
234
Results: C. Disconnect the wires lrom RM-23 and RM-24

the relay module .
• OK - The CID 0445 FMI 12 is active or the CID
0445 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2. D. Remove fuse "F6" from the relay module .
• NOT OK - The CID 0445 FMI 12 has not E. At the relay module, measure the resistance I
occurred. The diagnostic code is not active and RM-24 to RM-S. Make a note of the resistanc
the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP. measurement.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL F. Measure the resistance from RM-23 to RM-9
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. Make a note of the resistance measurement.
Note: Only open the relay module in a dry Expected Result:

• than approximately twenty minutes replace the The resistance measurement from RM-24 to RM
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistar
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". measurement should be less than 5 ohms at Rt;
to RM-9.
Results:
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• OK - The resistance measurements are corre
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from The problem does not exist at this time. The
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay initial problem was probably caused by a poc
Module - Replace". electrical connection or a short at one of the
harness connectors that was disconnected ar
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module reconnected. Resume normal operation and
to the GSC+. watch lor a recurrence. STOP.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance

measurements are NOT correct. The relay moc
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. has failed.
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not,
be damaged. Repair: Replace" the relay module. See Testin!
Results:
STOP.
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector.
The clamp is in place. The cable is not damaged. Test Step 4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. OF THE RUN RELAY IN THE START
Proceed to test step 3 . POSITION
• NOT OK - One or more of the components are A. Turn the ECS to the START position.
B. The wires from RM-23 and RM-24 remain
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing. disconnected.
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control C. At the relay module, measure the resistance I
(Generator Set) - Replace". RM-23 to RM-9. Make a note of the resistanc
measurement.
STOP.
D. Measure the resistance from RM-24 to RM-S.
Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF Make a note of the resistance measurement.
THE RUN RELAY IN THE OFF/RESET
POSITION Expected Result:
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. The resistance measurement from RM-23 to RM
should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistan
B. Reconnect the battery negative cable. measurement should be less than 5 ohms at RM
to RM-S.
235
lesults: The GSC+ activates the ASR for some active

shutdown faults.
OK - The resistance measurements are correct.
The problem does not exist at this time. The Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+
initial problem was probably caused by a poor attempts to activate the ASR, "K6" is shown on the
electrical connection or a short at one of the lower display. When the ASR is not activated, "K6"
harness connectors that was disconnected and is not shown.
watch for a recurrence. STOP. The possible cause of aCID 0446 FMI 12 is an
open coil or a shorted coil of the ASR.
NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module The system responses to this diagnostic code are
has failed. listed below.
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing • If aCID 0446 FMI 12 occurs and the ASR is
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". activated, then the system is not affected. The
system is not affected because the air shutoff
STOP. is already operating and shutdown mode is
functioning.
iQ1366828
• If aCID 0446 FMI 12 occurs and the ASR is not
~SC CID 0446 - FMI 12 activated, then there is no immediate effect on
the system. The engine is able to start and the
;MCS Code: 4490-035-R7 engine is able to run.
:onditions Which Generate This Code: • If aCID 0446 FMI 12 occurs and the ASR is not
activated, then the ASR cannot energize the air
shutoff solenoid when a shutdown fault occurs.

GENERATOR
SET Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE
CONTROL
(GSC) 8- DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
2 then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
2
8. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
I SOLENOID ~ C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO


:;;-~~--~;---------j Expected Result:
, ,,
AIR SHUTOFF I IF REQUIRED, I
(FLAP) VALVE : CONNECT TO SPARE: ACID 0446 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
TERMINAL BOX ,
I F AUL T CHANNEL I
, diagnostic code or CIO 0446 FMI 12 is displayed
,-------------------,
ustration 152 g00531536 Results:

ystem Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay (ASR)
• OK - The CIO 0446 FMI 12 is active or the CIO
he GSC+ uses the air shutoff relay (ASR) to
ctivate the air shutoff solenoid during a shutdown
• NOT OK - The CIO 0446 FMI 12 has not
lult. The ASR is located within the relay module.
he air shutoff solenoid is located within the air inlet
ystem of the engine.
236
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL F. Turn the ECS to the STOP position and PUE
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. in the emergency stop push button (ESPB)
Measure the resistance from RM-19 to RM-!
Note: Only open the relay module in a dry Make a note of the resistance measurement
than approximately twenty minutes replace the Expected Result:
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". The initial resistance measurement after remov
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resista
measurement should be less than 5 ohms whe
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable. ECS is placed in the STOP position.
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from Results:

Module - Replace". • OK - The resistance measurements are corr
The problem does not exist at this time. ThE
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module initial problem was probably caused by a pc
to the GSC+. electrical connection or a short at one of thE
harness connectors that was disconnected,
Expected Result: reconnected. Resume normal operation and
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
be damaged. measurements are NOT correct. The relay me
has failed.
Results:
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testir
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace" .
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+. STOP.
Proceed to test step 3 .
• NOT OK :..- One or more of tlie components are

damaged or the components are missing. GSC CIO 0447 - FMI 12 (for E
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing. Engines)
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
SIN: 5KW1-Up
STOP. SIN: 6GW1-Up
Test Step 3. PERFORM A FUNCTIONAL SIN: BNW1-Up
CHECK ON THE ASR.
SIN: BAZ1-Up

the relay module.
D, Remove fuse "F3" from the relay module.

measurement.
237
Conditions Which Generate This Code: Some generators use the ETR type of fuel system. In
the ETA type of fuel system, the GSC+ activates the
FCR. The FCR energizes the fuel control solenoid in
order to RUN the engine.
Note: There is another type of fuel system which

feR RM-15
K7 & is called energized to shutdown (ETS). In the ETS,
the GSC+ activates the FCR. The FCR energizes
ij ': " the fuel control solenoid in order to SHUT OOWN
RM-35 RM-8 R~24 the engine.
~~1TCHED - - " "
A--jF=I---<&~--jh
- Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates the FCR or
R~2 FlO RM~39
attempts to activate the FCR, "K7" is shown on the
GENERATOR
SET lower display. When the FCR is not activated, "K7"
CONTROL
(esc) is not shown. Also, setpoint P001 selects the type
of the fuel control solenoid. 0 = ETA. 1 = ETS.
1 The possible cause of a CI00447 FMI 12 is an open
PANEL coil or a shorted coil of the FCR.
LIGHTS
9 -2 -::3
H PANEL
The system responses to these diagnostic codes
LIGHT
SWITCH
are listed below.
• If a CIO 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the engine is

running, a CIO 0566 FMI 07 will become active.
A CIO 0566 FMI 07 describes an unexpected
shutdown. The shutdown mode is functioning.
The engine stops.
~
0
8
2.1.' 11..--.-
oI
~ ~
• If a CIO 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the engine is
NOT running, then the engine can not start or
the engine can not run .
.~.
The GSC+ tr~ats a CIO 0447 FMI 12 as an alarm
when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. Also, the
ECS must be in any position except the OFF/RESET
position. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault


DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
g00687804 then turn the ECS to the STOP position.
.lIustration 153
System Schematic For The Fuel Control Relay On "EUI" Engines B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key.
rhe GSC+ uses the fuel control relay (FCR) in C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO
Jrder to activate the fuel control solenoid (FCS). 0447 FMI 12 is active.
rhe GSC+ also uses the fuel control relay (FCR) in
Jrder to provide power to the optional electronic D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter the
)overnor (EG). The FCR is located within the relay Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1.
nodule. The fuel control solenoid is located in the Check that the diagnostic code is inactive.
'uel system of the engine. The electronic governor
:EG) is located on the subpaneL
238
Expected Result: Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK 01

THE FCR
diagnostic code or CID 0447 FMI 12 is displayed A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
Results:
C. Disconnect all wires from RM-15 and RM-4
• OK - The CID 0447 FMI 12 is active or the CID the relay module.
D. Remove fuse "F3" from the relay module .
occurred. The diagnostic code is not active and E. At the relay module, measure the resistance
the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP. RM-15 to RM-4. Make a note of the resistan
measurement.
CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE. F. Turn the ECS to the START position and pu~
in the emergency stop push button (ESPB).
Note: Only open the relay module in a dry Measure the resistance from RM-15 to RM-L
environment. If the inspection and repair takes more Make a note of the resistance measurement.
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing Expected Result:
The initial resistance measurement after removi
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position. the wires and the fuse from the relay module
should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistar
B. Disconnect the battery negative cable. measurement should be less than 5 ohms wher
ECS is placed in the START position.
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay Results:
Module - Replace".
• OK - The resistance measurements are COrrE
D. Check the cable that attaches the relay module The problem does not exist at this time. The
to the GSC+. . . initial problem was probably caused by a pO'
Expected Result: harness connectors that was disconnected al
The cable should be firmly seated in the connector. watch for a recurrence. STOP.
The clamp should be in place. The cable should not
be damaged. • NOT OK - Either one of the resistance
measurements are NOT correct. The relay mo'
Results: has failed.
• OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connector. Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testin!
The clamp is in place. The cable is not damaged. And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
Proceed to test step 3. STOP.

damaged or the components are missing. i013E

GSC CIO 0447 - FMI 12 (for M
If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+. See Engines)
(Generator Set) - Replace". SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
STOP. SIN: 8NSt-Up

SIN: 9ES1-Up
SIN: 5PW1-Up
239
SIN: 6WW1-Up Conditions Which Generate This Code:

SIN: STW1-Up
FeR
SIN: LRW1-Up #.
F2 K7
B.
R:"4 "
'"
RM~15
SIN: LRX1-Up R:"JI
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
R~12 R~J9
B+
SWITCHED V V
FlO
GENERATOR
~
SET
CONTROL
(eSc)
ESPB 10 13
2
12 n< 11 2~'A
~
SLAVE RELAY
, ( ~--------------~~
,9
\
:10
'/
~
LECTRON\IC
GOVERNOR
2
-
8290
lot------~~------~
,
+
,
-
+6A T ---{Ii4l-L'-""'.s----:c:O
29
ONE FUEL ;30 :86

CONTROL \ ~~~~
----------~
RELAY
:87 -=:,.:::,-¢---+-,
2.
TWO FUEL :30 :86

CONTROL
RELA Y
----------~
L--¢_ _ ~
:87 :85
27
System Schematic For Fuel Control Relay On ETR Systems

240
The GSC+ uses the fuel control relay (FCR) in c. Observe the upper display. Check that the
order to activate the fuel control solenoid (FCS). 0447 FMI 12 is active.
The GSC+ also uses the fuel control relay (FCR) in
order to provide power to the optional electronic D. If the diagnostic code is not active, enter tt
governor (EG). The FCR is located within the relay Service Mode. View the fault log for a OPl
module. The fuel control solenoid is located in the Check that the diagnostic code is inactive.
fuel system of the engine.
Expected Result:
The 3406C (S/N: BFS) and 3306B(S/N: 90S) use
the ETR type of fuel system. In the ETR type of fuel ACID 0447 FMI 12 is displayed as an active
system, the GSC+ activates the FCR. The FCR diagnostic code or CIO 0447 FMI 12 is displa\
energizes the fuel control solenoid in order to RUN as an inactive diagnostic code.
the engine.
Results:
Note: There is another type of fuel system which
is called energized to shutdown (ETS). In the ETS, • OK - The CIO 0447 FMI 12 is active or the (
the GSC+ activates the FCR. The FCR energizes 0447 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step
the fuel control solenoid in order to SHUT DOWN
the engine. • NOT OK - The CIO 0447 FMI 12 has not
occurred. The diagnostic code is not active
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates the FCR or the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
attempts to activate the FCR, "K7" is shown on the
lower display. When the FCR is not activated, "K7" Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
is not shown. Also, setpoint POOl selects the type CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
of the fuel control solenoid. 0 = ETR. 1 = ETS.
The possible cause of aCID 0447 FMI 12 is an environment. If the inspection and repair takes I
open coil or a shorted coil of the FCR. than approximately twenty minutes replace the
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testil
The system responses to these diagnostic codes And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace".
are listed below.
• If aCID 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the engine is
running, aCID 0666 FMI 07 will become active. B. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
ACID 0566 FMI 07 describes an unexpected
shutdown. The shutdown mode is functioning. C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
The engine stops. the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "ReIE
Module - Replace" .
• If aCID 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the engine is
NOT running, then the engine can not start or D. Check the cable that attaches the relay moe
the engine can not run. to the GSC+.
The GSC+ treats aCID 0447 FMI 12 as an alarm Expected Result:

when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. Also, the The cable should be firmly seated in the conne
ECS must be in any position except the OFF/RESET The clamp should be in place. The cable shoulc
Results:
0447 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is for • OK - The cable is firmly seated in the conne,
an inactive CIO 0447 FMI 12. The clamp is in place. The cable is not dama,
Test Step 1. CHECK THE STATUS OF THE Proceed to test step 3.
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
• NOT OK - One or more of the components a
A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position and damaged or the components are missing.

241
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is missing. i01367870

Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control GSC CIO 0447 - FMI 12 (for
(Generator Set) - Replace". PEEC Engines)
STOP. SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF SIN: LRY1-Up
THE FCR
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
C. 'Disconnect all wires from RM-15 of the relay

module. G ~ I
F2
I ~
FCR
K7
, ...
RM-31 RIA-4 RM'::15

RM-12 RM-39
E. At the relay module, measure the resistance from B.

SWITCHED
....
V
....
V
,
RM-15 to ·RM-4. Make a note of the resistance no
GENERATOR
measurement. B- SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
F. Turn the ECS to the START position. Measure the :1\
resistance from RM-15 to RM-4. Make a note of " CR/3
the resistance measurement. .,
" ~PEECR~
Expected Result: 3
The initial resistance measurement after removing ~--- 3
,."'" .'~~""
START SIGNAL
the wires and the fuse from the relay module m" }' (PWM)
measurement should be less than 5 ohms when the
59 • 13 3
W
x~
Results: "
The problem does not exist at this time. The PEEC w VI
"
~
<ilr
~r~
ENGINE
watch for a recurrence. STOP. SHUTDOWN
'31D-
" J :8:'>
~t3 ""r
ESDR
has failed. :86
"
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace",
STOP. 900519201
Illustration 155
System Schematic For The Fuel Control Relay On PEEC Engines
242
The status of the FCR has no effect on starting, Results:

running, or stopping of the PEEC engine. The FCR
contacts should not be used in applications for • OK - The CID 0447 FMI 12 is active or the
PEEC engines. The GSC+ will still activate the FCR 0447 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test ster
during normal engine operating conditions. It is
possible that customers have made connections to • NOT OK - The CID 0447 FMI 12 has not
the FCR contacts. The FCR is located within the occurred. The diagnostic code is not active
relay module. the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP.
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates the FCR or Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL
attempts to activate the FCR, "K7" is shown on the CABLE OF THE RELAY MODULE.
lower display. When the FCR is not activated, "K7"
is not shown. Note: Only open the relay module in a dry
environment. If the inspection and repair takes
The possible cause of aCID 0447 FMI 12 is an than approximately twenty minutes replace thf
open coil or a shorted coil of the FCR. desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Test
are listed below. A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position .
• If aCID 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the FCR is B. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
active, any Customer equipment on RM-4 and
RM-15 (normally open output) will be deactivated. C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Rei
• If aCID 0447 FMI 12 occurs and the FCR is Module - Replace".
inactive, any customer equipment on RM-4
and RM-15 (normally open output) will remain D. Check the cable that attaches the relay mo,
deactivated. to the GSC+.
The GSC+ treats aCID 0447 FMI 12 as an alarm Ex peeted Result:

when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed. Also, the The cable should be firmly seated in the conm
ECS must be in any position except the OFF/RE;SET The clamp should be in place. The cable shoul
Results:
This troubleshooting procedure is for an active CID
0447 FMI 12 or the troubleshooting procedure is for • OK - The cable is firmly seated in the connE
an inactive CID 0447 FMI 12. The clamp is in place. The cable is not damE
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
• NOT OK - One or more of the components;
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is mis
B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+.
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Cor
C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CID (Generator Set) - Replace".
STOP.
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1. Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF
Check that the diagnostic code is inactive. THE FCR
Expected Result: A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
ACID 0447 FMI 12 is displayed as an active B. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
diagnostic code or CID 0447 FMI 12 is displayed
as an inactive diagnostic code. C. Disconnect all wires from RM-15 of the rela\
module.
243
D. Remove fuse "F2" from the relay module. i01368079
E. At the relay module, measure the resistance from GSC CIO 0448 - FMI 12
measurement. SMCS Code: 4490-035-R7
F. Turn the ECS to the START position. Measure the Conditions Which Generate This Code:
resistance from RM-15 to RM-4. Make a note of
the resistance measurement.
GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC)
Expected Result: RM-37
....
,,----- --------~
The initial resistance measurement after removing F8
t~e wires and the fuse from the relay module lOA CUSTOMER
should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resistance RM-26
CONNECTIONS
measurement should be less than 5 ohms when the
+_~-t-L-_""'~
v
____ _
RM-10 PSR 1
K8
Results:
RM-38

....v
F9
The problem does not exist at this time. The lOA CUSTOMER
initial problem was probably caused by a poor CONNECTIONS
RM-25
harness connectors that was disconnected and ) ~~----:---<:~::>- ----
reconnected. Resume normal operation and ~M-ll PSR 2
watch for a recurrence. STOP. K8
• NOT OK - Either one of the resistance g00721914

Illustration 156
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module System Schematic For The Programmable Spare Relay ("PSR1"
has failed. & "PSR2").
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing The GSC+ uses the programmable spare relay
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". (PSR) in order to activate the customer equipment.
See Systems Operation, "Spare Input/Output
STOP. Programming OP6".
Note: Whenever the GSC+ activates or the GSC+

attempts to activate the PSR, K8 is shown on the
lower display. When the PSR is not activated, K8
is not shown.

open coil or a shorted coil of the PSR.

are listed below .
• If aCID 0448 FMI 12 occurs and the PSR

is active, any customer equipment on RM-25
(normally open) will be deactivated. Any customer
equipment on RM-26 (normally closed) will remain
activated .
• If aCID 0448 FMI 12 occurs while the PSR is

inactive, any customer equipment on RM-25
(normally open output) will remain deactivated
and any customer equipment on RM-26 (normally
closed) will remain activated.
244
The GSC+ treats a CIO 0448 FMI 12 as an alarm Expected Result:

fault. Active alarm faults are shown on Ihe display
when the "Alarm Codes" key is pressed and the The cable should be firmly seated in the com
ECS is in any position except Ihe OFF/RESET The clamp should be in place. The cable shol
Results:
0448 or the troubleshooting procedure is for an • OK - The cable is firmly seated in the conr
inactive CIO 448 FMI 12. The clamp is in place. The cable is not dan
Reassemble the relay module to the GSC+
DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
• NOT OK - One or more of the componentE
Repair: Replace the clamp if the clamp is m
B. Press the "Alarm Codes" key. If the cable is damaged, replace the GSC+
Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic C(
C. Observe the upper display. Check that the CIO (Generator Set) - Replace".
0448 FM I 12 is active.
STOP.
Service Mode. View the fault log for a OP1. Test Step 3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK a
Check that the diagnostic code is inactive. THE PSR
Expected Result: A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
A CIO 0448 FMI 12 is displayed as an active B. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
as an inactive diagnostic code. C. Oisconnect all wires from RM-25 of the reI:
module.
Results:
D. Remove fuse "F9" from the relay module .
• OK - The CIO 0448 FMI 12 is active or the CIO
0448 FMI 12 is inactive. Proceed to test step 2. E. At the relay module, measure the resistance
RM-25 to RM-11. Make a note of the resisl,
• NOT OK - The CIO 0448 FMI 12 has not measurement.
the diagnostic code is not inactive. STOP. F. Turn the ECS to the START position. Measu
resistance from RM-25 to RM-11. Make a n
Test Step 2. CHECK THE INTERNAL the resistance measurement.
Expected Result:
environment. If the inspection and repair takes more The initial resistance measurement after remQ\
than approximately twenty minutes replace the the wires and the fuse from the relay module
desiccant bag in the GSC+ housing. See Testing should be greater than 5000 ohms. The resist,
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". measurement should be less than 5 ohms whE
Results:
B. ~isconnect the battery negative cable.
• OK - The resistance measurements are cor
C. Temporarily, remove the relay module from The problem does not exist at this time. Thl
the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay initial problem was probably caused by a p'
Module - Replace". electrical connection or a short at one of th
harness connectors that was disconnected.
D. Check the cable that attaches Ihe relay module reconnected. Resume normal operation ane
to the GSC+. watch for a recurrence. STOP.
245
• NOT OK - Either one of the resistance Note: The maximum distance between a module
measurements are NOT correct. The relay module and the GSC+ is 305 m (1000 ft). If this specification
has failed. is not met, the data link may malfunction. The
GSC+ may show aCID 475 diagnostic code. If the
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing distance is not in compliance with the specification,
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". shorten the distance between the ROM and the
GSC+.
STOP.
The possible cause of aCID 0475 FMI 03 is a short
to the battery positive terminal.
101358754
GSC CID 0475 - FMI 03 The GSC+ is not able to detect an open circuit
condition of the relay driver module (ROM) data link.
SMCS Code: 4490-035 Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
the troubleshooting is complete.
Test Step 1. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF
THE DATA SIGNAL.
" flO 12
A. At the ROM, measure the DC voltage from

terminal 4 (positive meter lead) to terminal 7
(negative meter lead).
Expected Result:
The voltage will vary from 0 DCV to 10 DCV.
Results:
• OK - The voltage varies from 0 DCV to 10 DCV.

The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 4.
• NOT OK - The voltage does NOT vary from 0

DCV to 10 DCV. The voltage is NOT correct.
GSC-30 }.,_)'
GENERATOR ,- ROM • THE ROM.
SET DATA
CONTROL OUT
(GSC) A. At the ROM, disconnect all wires from terminal 4.
~
• "M-3D
+8AT
1-----' B. Disconnect the harness connector from the
RM-12 F10 GSC+.
Illustration 157 900531689 C. At the ROM, measure IIle DC voltage from

System Schematic For The Relay Driver Module (ROM) Data Link
terminal 4 (positive meter lead) to terminal 7
The GSC+ communicates with the relay driver
module (ROM) by a serial data link. When the data Expected Result:
link malfunctions, R1 output (terminal 2 of the ROM)
will be activated on and off at a rate of 0.5 Hz. The voltage is 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV.
Relays R2 through R9 may maintain the current
state. Also, the relays may default to the OFF Results:
position. These steps are controlled by a jumper
between terminals 6 and 7 of the ROM. If a jumper • OK - The voltage is 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV. The voltage
is NOT present when the serial data link has a fault, is correct. Proceed to test step 3.
the relay outputs (R2 through R9) will maintain the
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV.
states that the relays are currenlly in. If the jumper
The voltage that was measured at the ROM is
is present, R2 through R9 will default to OFF.
NOT correct.
246
Repair: Replace the ROM. Expected Result:
STOP. The resistance measurements should be greate

than 20000 ohms.
THE GSC+. Results:
A. All wires from terminal 4 of the ROM remain • OK - Both the resistance measurements are
disconnected. correct.
B. The harness connector from the GSC+ remains Repair: Check the electrical connectors, termil
disconnected. and wiring. See Testing And Adjusting, "Electr
Connector - Inspect". If the failure still exists a
C. Measure the DC voltage from contact 30 of the the inspection, replace the ROM.
GSC + to the battery negative terminal of the
relay module. The relay module is located on STOP.
the rear of the GSC+.
• NOT OK - Either one or both of the resistanc·
Expected Result: measurements are NOT correct. The harness
wiring with the incorrect measurement for
The voltage varies between 0 DCV to 5.5 DCV. resistance is shorted.
Results: Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the failed harn

wiring between the ROM and the GSC+. See I
• OK - The voltage varies between 0 DCV to 5.5 preceding System Schematic .
DCV. The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step
4. STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage does NOT vary between

o DCV to 5.5 DCV. The voltage is NOT correct.
and perform Ihis entire procedure again. If
STOP.
Test Step 4. CHECK FOR A "8+" SHORT

IN THE HARNESS.
A. All wires from terminal 4 of the ROM remain
disconnected.
B. The harness connector from the GSC+ remains

disconnected.
C. Measure the resistance from the wires of terminal

4 at the ROM to + battery of the relay module.
The relay module is located on the rear of the
GSC+.
D. Measure the resistance from the wires of terminal

4 at the ROM to battery negative of the relay
module. The relay module is located on the rear
of the GSC+.
247
101358925 The GSC+ is not able to detect an open circuit

condition of the relay driver module (ROM) data link.
3SC CIO 0475 - FMI 04 Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
the troubleshooting is complete.
,MCS Code: 4490-035
~onditions Which Generate This Code: THE DATA SIGNAL.
A. At the ROM, measure the DC voltage from
",
~
R9E i,~f-.IP-J '" " terminal 4 (positive meter lead) to terminal 7

-1""
" (negative meter lead).
RoE: ;j-<i-l
, ..L§
"
JJ
:~
R7E I Expected Result:
,1~ Fl
r-~~,~R£~
R6E~ .f"-l RELAY DRIVER MODULE
0
The voltage will vary from 0 DCV to 10 DCV.
" ,-
"E ,;-ii-l " ,-
@ @
Results:
"E, ,."...J
RsE J
"
, , , , •
- 0 0 9~
,
. • OK - The voltage varies from 0 DCV to 10 DCV.
'f"-l
" The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 4.
4
•
"E, ,'f.It-J " , I
, " , • NOT OK - The voltage does NOT vary from 0
"E ,f.It-J. " .r , DCV to 10 DCV. The voltage is NOT correct.
,
~
RELAY
ASSEMBLY
BOARD
> Test Step 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
.-
GSC-JO ~
RDM
DATA
OUT
THE ROM.
A. At the ROM, disconnect all wires from terminal 4.
y~ rv.
RM-39
+~T
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the
GSC+.
RM~12
~
>< FlO
C. At the ROM, measure the DC' voltage from
900531689 terminal 4 (positive meter lead) to terminal 7
lIustration 158
3ystem Schematic For The Relay Driver Module (ROM) Data Link
Expected Result:
rhe GSC+ communicates with the relay driver
nodule (ROM) by a serial data link. When the data The voltage is 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV.
ink malfunctions, R1 output (terminal 2 of the ROM)
"ill be activated on and off at a rate of 0.5 Hz. Results:
ielays R2 through R9 may maintain the current
ltate. Also, the relays may default to the OFF • OK - The voltage is 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV. The voltage
)osition. These steps are controlled by a jumper is correct. Proceed to test step 3.
)etween terminals 6 and 7 of the ROM. If a jumper
s NOT present when the serial data link has a fault, • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT 11.6 ± 0.5 DCV.
he relay outputs (R2 through R9) will maintain the The voltage at the ROM is NOT correct.
ltates that the relays are currently in. If the jumper
s present, R2 through R9 will default to OFF. Repair: Replace the ROM.
~ote: The maximum distance between a module STOP.
md the GSC+ is 305 m (1000 ft). If this specification
s not met, the data link may malfunction. The Test Step 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF
3SC+ may show aCID 475. If the distance is not THE GSC+.
n compliance with the specification, shorten the
jistance between the ROM and the GSC+. A. All wires from terminal 4 of the ROM remain
disconnected.
rhe possible cause of aCID 0475 FMI 03 is a short
o the battery positive terminal. B. The harness connector from the GSC+ remains
disconnected.
248
C. Measure the DC voltage from contact 30 of the Repair: Check the electrical connectors, tem
GSC+ to the battery negative terminal of the and wiring. See Testing And Adjusting, "Elec
relay module. The relay module is located on Connector - Inspect". If the failure still exists
the rear of the GSC+. the inspection, replace the ROM.
Expected Result: STOP.
The voltage varies between a OCV to 5.5 OCv. • NOT OK - Either one or both of the resistan
measurements are NOT correct. The harnes
Results: wiring with the incorrect measurement for
resistance is shorted .
• OK - The voltage varies between a OCV to 5.5
OCv. The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step Repair: Troubleshoot and repair the failed hal
4. wiring between the ROM and the GSC+. See
preceding System Schematic .
• NOT OK - The voltage does NOT vary between
a OCV to 5.5 OCv. The voltage is NOT correct. STOP.

101
and 'perform this entire procedure again. If
GSC CID 0500 - FMI12
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control SMCS Code: 4490-035
STOP.
ACID 500 FMI 12 means that the GSC+ is un,
Test Step 4. CHECK FOR A "8+" SHORT to accurately measure the AC voltage and the
IN THE HARNESS. current. The engine remains able to run. The e,
also remains able to start.
A. All wires from terminal 4 of the ROM remain
disconnected. Note: On the GSC+, the CIO 500 FMI 12 diagr
code will be shown even when the engine cor
B. The harness connector from the GSC+ remains switch (ECS) is in the OFF/RESET position.
disconnected.
VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC Co[
C. Measure the resistance from the wires of terminal IS ACTIVE.
4 at the ROM to + battery of the relay module.
The relay module is located on the rear of the
NOTICE
GSC+.
If a CIO 500 FMI12 occurs and the engine is rur
D. Measure the resistance from the wires of terminal the generator output may be at full voltage POtE
4 at the ROM to battery negative of the relay This could occur even if the GSC display is sho~
module. The relay module is located on the rear AC volts and a AC current for all three phases.
of the GSC+.
A. The CIO 500 FMI 12 is active.
Expected Result:
Expected Result:
The resistance measurements should be greater
than 20000 ohms. The CIO 500 FMI 12 is active.
Results: Results:
• OK - Both the resistance measurements are • YES - The CIO 500 FMI 12 is active.
correct.
Repair: Replace the GSC+. See Testing An(
Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control (Genen
Set) - Replace".
STOP.
249
• NO - The CID 500 FMI 12 is NOT active.
Repair: The GSC+ is operating normally.

GENERATOR
SET
STOP. CONTROL
(GSC)
"
(IDA)
101359330 G
,. r---~~~-IEJ=:f----<~~_/"_~-t---,
RM-32 RM-:;' ASR RIJ-19
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for EUI B.

Engines)
"A
SMCS Code: 4490-035
SIN: 5KW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: SNW1-Up
f '}f}--j16
ASOR/l
23A [--iiA ----~
CYLINDER ONL Y
ASOR
B-
SIN: SAZ1-Up
,,
,,
X : XASOR2
,,,
ASORI
,,
GENERATOR EeM ,
SET
CONTROL (GSC) .... 20
DIG SEN RET
B- L_____ ~: __ J
RM::14
900681904
EGR Illustration 160
r S/RIS 1 System Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay
... "
RM~13 The purpose of the CID 0566 is to alert the operator
5/RIS 2 that the GS8+ did not control the engine shutdown.
A shutdown fault initiated solely by the engine
ECM will result in aCID 566 diagnostic code on
the GSC+. The GSC+ normally controls all engine
900681895 shutdown functions for both normal operation and
Illustration 159
fault shutdowns. If an outside influence causes an
System Schematic For Electronic Governor Relay (EGR) On EUI 1
engine shutdown, the GSC+ shows aCID 0566.
Engines
There is only one failure mode for aCID 0566.
This failure mode is FMI 07. FMI 07 is an improper
mechanical response.
The diagnostic code causes the following sequence

of events: I
• On a running engine, the GSC+ detects that
engine speed has dropped from rated speed
to 0 rpm when the GSC+ has not called for a
shutdown.
• The GSC+ determines that no engine speed

sensor fault is present that explains the drop in
speed signal.
• The GSC+ declares aCID 0566 FMI 07 and

disables the engine from running or starting.
The possible cause of aCID 0566 FMI 07 is listed

below.
• A component that is not under the conlrol of the

GSC+ has caused an engine shutdown.
250
The GSC+ treats aCID 0566 FMI 07 as a shutdown Results:

fault. Clear the fault from the fault log after
troubleshooting is complete. • YES - The air shutoff solenoid can be activ,
and the air shutoff solenoid can be deactiva
Note: This procedure requires many voltage Proceed to test step 2.
measurements during simulated engine cranking.
The starting motor fuse "F4" on the relay module is • NO - The air shutoff solenoid can NOT be
removed in order to prevent activating the starting activated and the air shutoff solenoid can NC
motor and actual engine cranking does not occur. deactivated. Proceed to test step 11.
Voltage measurements must be made quickly
before the total cycle crank time (setpoint PO 17) Test Step 2. VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTI
elapses. The total cycle crank time is 90 seconds. CODE.
See Systems Operation, "Engine/Generator
Programming OP5-0". If a measurement of the A. Check if the CIO 0566 FMI 07 is showing. 1
voltage takes more than 90 seconds, the GSC+ means that the CIO 0566 FMI 07 is active.
shows an overcrank fault. The overcrank shutdown
indicator will FLASH. In order to continue with a Expected Result:
voltage measurement, the overcrank fault must be
reset by turning the engine control switch (ECS) to The CIO 0566 FMI 07 is showing as an active I
OFF/RESET. Then, turn the ECS to START.
Results:
Test Step 1. PERFORM AN INITIAL
CHECK. • OK - Only aCID 0566 FMI 07 is showing.
A. Make sure that there are NO OTHER ACTIVE
FAULTS. This means that there are no diagnostic • NOT OK - ACID 0566 FMI 07 is NOT show
codes which are showing on the upper display. No active CIO 0566 FMI 07 exists. STOP.
This means that no shutdown or alarm indicators
are flashing. Failure to do so may result Test Step 3. CHECK THE SYSTEM
in erroneous troubleshooting and needless VOLTAGE.
replacement of parts. The operator will make
many voltage measurements while the GSC+ A. With the engine off, measure the system vol
is attempting to crank the engine. If the GSC+ at the battery. Make a note of this measuren
detects other faults, it will prevent starting by This measurement of the system voltage is I
shutting off the fuel and air to the engine. The for comparison in future steps of this procec
resulting voltage measurements would then
be the exact opposite of the voltage which is Expected Result:
expected in the procedures.
For a 24 volt system, the system voltage shoul,
B. Check the fuel level and quality. from 24.8 to 29.5 OCv. For a 32 volt system, II
system voltage should be from 33.1 to 39.3 DC
C. Check for a plugged fuel filter.
Results:
D. Check for a plugged air filter.
• OK - The system voltage is correct. Proceec
E. Refer to the Service Manual for the engine if test step 4.
there is an obvious fault with the engine or the
fuel system. • NOT OK - System voltage is NOT correct.
F. Check the operation of the air shutoff solenoid Repair: For troubleshooting, see Testing Anc
(if present). Adjusting, "CIO 168 Electrical System".
The air shutoff solenoid activates and the air shutoff Test Step 4. CHECK SETPOINT POOl.
solenoid deactivates.
A. Check setpoint POO 1 for proper programmir
Note: If there is no air shutoff solenoid present, "O=ETR", "1=ETS". See Systems Operation,
proceed with the "YES" statement. "Engine/Generator Set point Viewing OP2".
251
Setpoint P001 should be programmed in order to • OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system
match the type of fuel control solenoid which is voltage that was previously measured in Step
used on the generator set. 3.A. There is an open circuit between RM-15 of
the relay module and the fuel control solenoid.
Results:
Repair: Repair the circuit. See the preceding
• OK - Setpoint P001 is programmed correctly. System Schematic .
STOP.
• NOT OK - Setpoint P001 is NOT programmed
correctly. • NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than the
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A.
'Repair: Reprogram setpoint P001. See Systems Proceed to test step 8.
OP5-0". Test Step 7. TROUBLESHOOT THE
BLOWN FUSE.
STOP.
This test step continues troubleshooting from test
Test Step·S. CHECK FUSES. step 7. See the preceding System Schematics.
Also, see Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics &
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Wiring Diagrams".
B. Check fuses "F2" and "F1O" on the relay module. A. The ECS remains in the OFF/RESET position.
Expected Result: B. Remove the fuse that is blown.
None of the fuses are open. • If the blown fuse is "F2", measure the
resistance from RM-15 of the relay module to
Results: battery negative ("8-").
• OK - None of the fuses are open. Proceed to test • If the blown fuse is "F 10", measure the
step 6. resistance from RM-39 of the relay module to
battery negative ("8-") .
Proceed to test step 7. Expected Result:
Test Step 6. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE For a fuse that is blowing, the circuit resistance
RELAY MODULE. should be less than 3 ohms.
A. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay Note: On some ETR fuel systems with a dual coil
module. fuel control solenoid, the correct normal resistance
can measure less than 1 ohm.
B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-15 to
the "8-" terminal of the relay module. Results:
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to • OK - The resistance is greater than 3 ohms and
START. the fuse is no longer blowing.
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage from Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are
RM-15 to the "8-" terminal. connected to the appropriate terminal of the relay
module. Check the wires for abrasion or worn
Expected Result: spots in the insulation that could be causing the
short. Check the wires in the panel, the generator
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system panel, and on the engine harness. Refer to the
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A. various wiring diagrams as necessary. Repair the
wiring or replace the wiring as necessary.
STOP.
252
• NOT OK < 3 n - If the resistance is less than Test Step 9. CHECK FOR DIAGNOST
3 ohms, there is a short to the battery negative CODES
("8-"),
A. Make sure that no other diagnostic codes
Repair: Remove one component or one wire at a active.
time that is in series with the load side of the fuse
terminal. Remove the components or the wires B. Check the upper display for any active diag
until the failed component or wire is isolated, codes.
Repair the failed component or the wiring or
replace the failed component or the wiring, Expected Result:
STOP. Only CID 566 FMI 7 is active.
• NOT OK > 3 fl - If a resistance is greater than 3 Results:

ohms and the fuse still blows when all the wires
are removed from the appropriate terminals, the • OK - Only CID 566 FMI 7 is active. Procee(
relay module has failed, test step 10,
Repair: Replace the relay module. • NOT OK - A diagnostic code other than CI[
FMI 7 is active,
STOP.
Repair: Correct the other diagnostic code.
Test Step 8. CHECK LOW VOLTAGE Proceed to the corresponding troubleshootir
CONDITION. procedure,
This test step continues troubleshooting from test STOP.

step 8. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay
module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics Test Step 10. CHECK VOLTAGE AT TI
And Wiring Diagrams". Prepare to make voltage RELAY MODULE.
measurements at the relay module.
A. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to module.
START.
B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-1 £
B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from the "8-" terminal of the relay module,
RM-4 to the "8-" terminal and from RM-31 to the
"8-" terminal. C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET Turn the ECS
START.
Expected Result:
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage fr,
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system RM-15 to the "8-" terminal.
voltage. The system voltage was measured
previously in test step 3A Expected Result:
Results: The voltage should be ± 2,0 DCV of the syste

voltage that was previously measured in Step,
• OK - The voltage is ± 2,0 DCV of the system
voltage. Proceed to test step g, Results:
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV of the • OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the syster
system voltage. The voltage is NOT correct. voltage that was previously measured in Ste
3A There is an open circuit between RM-1 E
Repair: Check the wiring and recheck the fuse the relay module and the fuel control solenoi.
"F2". Repair the wiring or the components or
replace the wiring or the components. Repair: Repair the wiring. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams",
STOP.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than

voltage that was previously measured in Step
253
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing Results:

• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system
STOP. voltage. The voltage is correct. A wire or a
component between RM-19 of the relay module
Test Step 11. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE and the air shutoff solenoid is shorted to + battery.
AIR SHUTOFF SOLENOID.
Repair: Repair the circuit. See Testing And
This test step continues troubleshooting from the Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
test step 1 (initial check). Prepare to make a voltage
measurement at the air shutoff solenoid. The air STOP.
solenoid may activate for as little as 15 seconds.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV of the
A., Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module. system voltage. Proceed to test step 13.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to Test Step 13. CHECK THE ASR.
START.
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module.
C. At the air shutoff solenoid, measure the voltage
across the terminals of solenoid. A. Remove fuse "F3" from the relay module.
Expected Result: B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
The voltage should be from 0 to 2.0 DCV. C, Make sure that "K6" is not shown on the lower
GSC+ display. If "K6" is showing, make sure that
Results: no other faults are active.
• OK - The voltage is from 0 to 2.0 DCV. D, At the relay module, measure the resistance from
RM-5 to RM-19. A measurement of less than
Repair: Voltage is correct. If the air shutoff 100 ohms indicates that the air shutoff relay is
remains tripped or cannot be reset, the fault is in shorted.
the air shutoff. Refer to the Service Manual for
the engine. Expected Reslllt: .
STOP. The resistance should be greater than 10000 ohms.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT from 0 to 2.0 DCV. Results:

• OK - The resistance is greater than 10000 ohms.
Test Step 12. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE Check for a short from +battery to RM-19 of the
RELAY MODULE. relay module.
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module. Repair: Repair the shorted wiring. If the short is
Prepare to make a voltage measurement at the internal to the relay module, replace the relay
relay module. module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay
Module - Replace".
A, Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
START . STOP.
B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from • NOT OK - The resistance is less than 10000
RM-19 to the "8-" terminal. ohms. The short is internal to the relay module.
Expected Result: Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing

The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system
voltage. STOP.
254
101359008 Conditions Which Generate This Code:

GSC CIO 0566 - FMI 07 (for MUI
Engines) ~
).,2
~
feR
K7
~
SMCS Code: 4490-035

" R:"'31 R:"4 R:'15
SIN: BNS 1-Up RM-12 R~39

B+
SWITCHED
SIN: 9ES1-Up flO
~
SIN: 5PW1-Up
- C?
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
SIN: 6WW1-Up
SIN: BTW1-Up ESPB 10
2
~I.:A
SIN: LRW1-Up
~
12 -,( 11
SIN: LRX1-Up ~ ~
SIN: 4BZ1-Up ~ Cj3
,2 SLAVE RELAY
2
( qo------------- -'~~,.
;10
'/
~!'
2
GOVERNOR -
8290
,
1
+ .. ,
- 'I
+ BAT f14
2.
:.-
ONE FUEL :30

CONTROL :86
RELA Y
\----------D$J
:87 :85
28
TWO FUEL :30 ;86

CONTROL
RELAY
----------~
:87 :85
Illustration 161 gOO!
System Schematic For Fuel Control Relay On ETR Systems

255
The GSC+ treats aCID 0566 FMI 07 as a shutdown

fault. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log
F>
ASR
K6
after troubleshooting is complete.
~ ..... ,
" Rt,1:32
v "" Note: This procedure requires many voltage
RM-5 RM-19
measurements during simulated engine cranking.
GENERATOR 37
The starting motor fuse "F4" on the relay module is
SET
CONTROL removed in order to prevent activating the starting
(GSC) B-
motor and actual engine cranking does not occur.
Voltage measurements must be made quickly
2
before the total cycle crank time (setpoint P017)
elapses. The total cycle crank time is 90 seconds.
- 2
Programming OP5-0". If a measurement of the
voltage takes more than 90 seconds, the GSC+
I SOLENOID I- shows an overcrank fault. The overcrank shutdown
indicator will FLASH. In order to continue with a
~'-~~~~r4-_2__~~'~__2__~ reset by turning the engine control switch (ECS) to
r
~ 1 OFF/RESET Then, turn the ECS to START.
~~~37~~~~_~37~____- ,
~ r;;-~--;;---------: Note: If the generator set is equipped with an
---- , ,, electronic governor, also check the engine speed
AIR SHUTOFF I IF REQUIRED, I sensor. See the Troubleshooting, "CID 0190"
(FLAP) VALVE : CONNECT TO SPARE: sections of this manual.
TERMINAL BOX ,
I F AUl T CHANNEL I
,
~-------------------'
Test Step 1. PERFORM AN INITIAL
900531536
CHECK.
Illustration 162
System Schematic For Air Shutoff Relay A. Make sure that there are NO OTHER ACTIVE
FAULTS. This means that there are no diagnostic
The CIO 0566 alerts the operator that the GSC+ codes which are showing on the upper display.
did not co~trol the engine shutdown. The GSC+ This means that no shutdown or alarm indicators
normally controls all engine shutdown functions for are flashing. Failure to make sure that there
both normal operation and fault shutdowns. If an are NO OTHER ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC CODES
outside influence causes an engine shutdown, the may result in erroneous troubleshooting and
GSC+ shows a CIO 0566. There is only one failure needless replacement of parts. The operator
mode for a CIO 0566. This failure mode is FMI 07. will make many voltage measurements while
FMI 07 is an improper mechanical response. the GSC+ is attempting to crank the engine. If
the GSC+ detects other faults, the GSC+ will
The diagnostic code causes the following sequence prevent starting by shutting off the fuel and air to
of events: the engine. The resulting voltage measurements
would then be the exact opposite of the voltage
• On a running engine, the GSC+ detects that which is expected in the procedures.
engine speed has dropped from the rated speed
to 0 rpm when the GSC+ has not called for a B. Check the fuel level and quality.
shutdown.
C. Check for a plugged fuel filter.
• The GSC+ determines that no engine speed
sensor fault is present that explains the drop in D. Check for a plugged air filter.
speed signal.
E. Refer to the Service Manual for the engine if
• The GSC+ declares a CIO 0566 FMI 07 and there is an obvious fault with the engine or the
disables the engine from running or starting. fuel system.
Note: An unexpected shutdown fault (CID 0566) will F. Check the operation of the air shutoff solenoid
initiate a circuit breaker shunt trip signal. (if present).
The possible cause of aCID 0566 FMI 07 is listed Expected Result:

below.
The air shutoff solenoid activates and the air shutoff
• A component that is not under the control of the solenoid deactivates.
GSC+ has caused an engine shutdown.
256
Note: If there is no air shutoff solenoid present, Test Step 4. CHECK THE GOVERNC
proceed with the "YES" statement. AND CHECK THE RACK.
Results: A. Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module .
• YES - The air shutoff solenoid can be activated B. Prepare to monitor the movement of the gc
and the air shutoff solenoid can be deactivated. linkage and the fuel rack.
c. Turnthe ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the EC~
• NO - The air shutoff solenoid can NOT be START.
activated and the air shutoff solenoid can NOT be
deactivated. Proceed to test step 16. D. Observe the governor and the fuel rack.
Test Step 2. Verify The DIAGNOSTIC Expected Result:

CODE.
The governor linkage and the fuel rack shoulc
A. Check if the CIO 0566 FMI 07 is showing. This in the "fuel on" direction.
means that the CIO 0566 FMI 07 is active.
Results:
Expected Result:
• OK - The fault is in the engine or the fuel s
The CIO 0566 FMI 07 is showing as an active
diagnostic code. Repair: Refer to the corresponding Engine,
Manual.
Results:
STOP.
• OK - Only aCID 0566 FMI 07 is showing.
Proceed to test step 3. • NOT OK - The governor linkage and the fu'
are not moving in the "fuel on" direction. Pr,
• NOT OK - A CIO 0566 FMI 07is NOT showing. to test step 5.
No active CIO 0566 FMI 07 exists. STOP.
Test Step 5. CHECK SETPOINT P001
Test Step 3. CI-!ECK THE SYSTEM
VOLTAGE. . . A. Check setpoint P001 for proper programm
"O=ETR", "1 =ETS". See Systems Operatiol
A. With the engine off, measure the system voltage "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2".
at the battery. Make a note of this measurement.
This measurement of the system voltage is used Expected Result:
for comparison in future steps of this procedure.
Setpoint P01 should be programmed in order
Expected Result: match the type of fuel control solenoid which
used on the generator set. The 3406C(S/N: 8
For a 24 volt system, the system voltage should be and 33068 (S/N: 90S) use the ETR type (P01
from 24.8 to 29.5 OCv. For a 32 volt system, the of fuel system.
system voltage should be from 33.1 to 39.3 OCv.
Results:
Results:
• OK - Setpoint POO 1 is programmed correc
• OK - The system voltage is correct. Proceed to Proceed to test step 6.
test step 4.
• NOT OK - Setpoint P001 is NOT programn
• NOT OK - System voltage is NOT correct. correctly.
Repair: For troubleshooting, see Testing And Repair: Reprogram setpoint P001. See Syst
Adjusting, "CIO 0168 Electrical System". Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming
OP5-0".
STOP.
STOP.
257
Test Step 6. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE D. At the relay module, measure the voltage from
FUEL CONTROL SOLENOID. RM-15 to the "B-" terminal.
A. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay Expected Result:

module.
B. Prepare to measure the voltage across the voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A.
terminals of the fuel control solenoid on the
engine. Results:
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to • OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system
START. voltage that was previously measured in Step
3.A. There is an open circuit between RM-15 of
0, At the fuel control solenoid, measure the voltage the relay module and the fuel control solenoid.
across the terminals.
Repair: Repair the circuit. See the preceding
Expected Result: System Schematic.
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system STOP.

voltage whi~h was measured in test step 3.A.
• NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than the
Results: voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A.
voltage which was measured in test step 3.A. The Test Step 9. TROUBLESHOOT THE
fault is with the governor or the fuel rack. Refer to BLOWN FUSE.
the appropriate Service Manual for generator sets
that are not equipped with an electronic governor. This test step continues troubleshooting from test
Proceed to test step 13, if the generator set is step 7. See the preceding System Schematics.
equipped with an electronic governor. Also, see Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics &
Wiring Diagrams" .
• NOT OK - The voltage is low. Proceed to test
·step 7 .. A. The ECS remains in the. OFF/RESET position.
Test Step 7. CHECK FUSES. B. Remove the fuse that is blown .
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. • If the blown fuse is "F2", measure the
resistance from RM-15 of the relay module to
B. Check fuses "F2" and "F10" on the relay module. battery negative ("B-").
Expected Result: • If the blown fuse is "F10", measure the

resistance from RM·39 of the relay module to
None of the fuses are open. battery negative ("8-").
Results: Expected Result:
• OK - None 01 the fuses are open. Proceed to test For a fuse that is blowing, the circuit resistance
step 8. should be less than 3 ohms,
• NOT OK - One or more of the fuses are open. Note: On some ETR fuel systems with a dual coil
Proceed to test step 9. fuel control solenoid, the correct normal resistance
Test Step 8. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE
RELAY MODULE. Results:
A. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay • OK - The resistance is greater than 3 ohms and
module. the fuse is no longer blowing.
B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-15 to

the "B-" terminal of the relay module.
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to

START.
258
Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV (
connected to the appropriate terminal of the relay system voltage. The voltage is NOT correct.
module. Check the wires for abrasion or worn
spots in the insulation that could be causing the Repair: Check the wiring and recheck the fl
short. Check the wires in the panel, the generator "F2". Repair the wiring or the components'
panel, and on the engine harness. Refer to the replace the wiring or the components.
various wiring diagrams, if necessary. Repair the
wiring or replace the wiring, if necessary. STOP.
STOP. Test Step 11. Check For Faults

• NOT OK < 3 n - If the resistance is less than A. Make sure that no other faults are active.
3 ohms, there is a short to the battery negative
("8-"). B. Check the upper display for any active faul
Repair: Remove one component or one wire at a Expected Result:

terminal. Remove the components or the wires Only CIO 0566 FMI 07 is active.
until the failed component or wire is isolated.
Repair the failed component or the wiring or Results:
replace the failed component or the wiring.
• OK - Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active. ProCE
STOP. test step 12.
• NOT OK > 3 n - If a resistance is greater than 3 • NOT OK - A diagnostic code other than CI
ohms and the fuse still blows when all the wires 0566 FMI 07 is active.
are removed from the appropriate terminals, the
relay module has failed. Repair: Correct the other fault. Proceed to tl
corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
Repair: Replace the relay module.
STOP.
STOP.
Test Step 12. CHECK VOLTAGE AT TI
Test Step 10. Check Low Voltage RELAY MODULE.
Condition.
This test step continues troubleshooting from test module.
step 8. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay
module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-1t
And Wiring Diagrams". Prepare to make voltage the "8-" terminal of the relay module.
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to START.
START.
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage fr
B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from RM-15 to the "8-" terminal.
RM-4 to the "8-" terminal and from RM-31 to the
"8-" terminal. Expected Result:
Expected Result: The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the syste

voltage that was previously measured in Step ~
voltage. The system voltage was measured Results:
previously in test step 3A
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the syste:
Results: voltage that was previously measured in Sle
3A There is an open circuit between RM-1E
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system the relay module and the fuel control solenoi,
voltage. Proceed to test step 11.
259
Repair: Repair the wiring. See Testing And Results:

Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams".
• OK - The fuse "F2" is NOT open. Proceed to
STOP. test step 16.
• NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than the • NOT OK - The fuse "F2" is open. Proceed to test
voltage Ihat was previously measured in Step 3.A. step 15.
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing Test Step 15. TROUBLESHOOT THE
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". BLOWN FUSE.
STOP. This test step continues troubleshooting from test
step 14. See the preceding System Schematics.
Test Step 13. CHECK SUPPLY VOLTAGE Also, see Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics &
OF ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR. Wiring Diagrams".
This test step continues troubleshooting from test A. The ECS remains in the OFF/RESET position.
step 6. Fuse "F4" remains removed lrom the relay
module. Prepare to make a voltage measurement B. Remove the fuse that is blown.
from the electronic governor to the relay module.
• If the blown fuse is "F2", measure the
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to resistance from RM-15 of the relay module to
START. battery negative ("8-").
B, Measure the voltage from the positive supply • If the blown fuse is "F 10" , measure the
terminal of the electronic governor to the negative resistance from RM-39 of the relay module to
supply terminal of the electronic governor. battery negative ("8-").
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system For a fuse that is blowing, the circuit resistance
voltage. The system voltage was previously should be less than 3 ohms.
measured in test. step 3.A.
Note: On some ETR fuel systems with a dual coil
Results: fuel control solenoid, the correct normal resistance
voltage that was previously recorded. The supply Results:
voltage is correct. The fault is in the electronic
governor or the actuator system. • OK - The resistance is greater than 3 ohms and
the fuse is no longer blowing.
Repair: Repair the electronic governor or the
actuator system. For the 8290 electronic governor, Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are
refer to the Service Manual Module, SENR6565. connected to the appropriate terminal of the relay
For the 524 electrically powered governor system module. Check the wires for abrasion or worn
and for the 1724 electrically powered governor spots in the insulation that could be causing the
systems, refer to the Service Manual Module, short. Check the wires in the panel, the generator
SENR6430. panel, and on the engine harness. Refer to the
various wiring diagrams, if necessary. Repair the
STOP. wiring or replace the wiring, if necessary.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV of the STOP.

system voltage that was previously recorded.
Proceed to test step 14. • NOT OK < 3 n - If the resistance is less than 3
ohms, there is a short to battery negative ("8-").
Test Step 14. CHECK FUSE "F2"
A. Verify that fuse "F2" is not open.
Expected Result:
The luse "F2" is NOT open.

260
Repair: Remove one component or wire at a time Test Step 17. CHECK LOW VOLTAGI
that is in series with the load side of the fuse CONDITION.
terminal. Remove the components or the wires
until the failed component or wire is isolated. This test step continues troubleshooting from
Repair the failed component or wiring or replace step 8. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the
the failed component or wiring. module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Scheme
And Wiring Diagrams". Prepare to make volt,
STOP. measurements at the relay module .
• NOT OK > 3 n - It the resistance is greater than A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS
3 ohms and the fuse still blows when all wires are START.
removed from the appropriate terminal, the relay
module has failed. B. At the relay module, measure the voltage I
RM-4 to the "8-" terminal and from RM-31
Repair: Replace the relay module. "8-" terminal.
STOP. Expected Result:
Test Step 16. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the syst,
RELAY MODULE. voltage. The system voltage was measured
previously in test step 3.A.
module. Results:
B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-15 to • OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the syst<
the "8-" terminal of the relay module. voltage. Proceed to test step 18.
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV c
START. system voltage. The voltage is NOT correct.
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage from Repair: Check the wiring and recheck the fl
RM-15 to the "8-" terminal. "F2". Repair the wiring or the components <
replace the wiring or the components. .
Expected Result:
STOP.
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A. Test Step 18. CHECK FOR FAULTS
Results: A. Make sure that no other faults are active.
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system B. Check the upper display for any active faul
voltage that was previously measured in Step
3.A. There is an open circuit between RM-15 of Expected Result:
the relay module and the fuel control solenoid.
Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active.
Repair: Repair the wiring. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams". Results:
STOP. • OK - Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active. Proce

test step 19.
• NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than the
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A. • NOT OK - A diagnostic code other than CII
Proceed to test step 17. 0566 FMI 07 is active.
Repair: Correct the other diagnostic code.

Proceed to the corresponding troubleshootir
procedure.
I
STOP.
261
Test Step 19. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE Results:

RELAY MODULE.
• OK - The voltage is from 0 to 2.0 DCV.
module. Repair: Voltage is correct. If the air shutoff
remains tripped or cannot be reset, the fault is in
B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-15 to the air shutoff. Refer to the Service Manual for
the "8-" terminal of the relay module. the engine.
c. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to STOP.

START.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT from 0 to 2.0 DCV.
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage from Proceed to test step 21.
RM-15 to the "8-" terminal.
Test Step 21. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE
Expected Result: RELAY MODULE.
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module.
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3A Prepare to make a voltage measurement at the
relay module.
Results:
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system START .
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3A
There is an open circuit between RM-15 of the B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from
relay module and the fuel control solenoid. Check RM-19 to the "8-" terminal.
the slave relay, the fuel control relays (1 FCR and
2FCR) and the wiring. Expected Result:
Repair: Repair the wiring. See Testing And The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system
Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams". voltage.
STOP. Results:
• NOT OK - The system voltage is lower than the • OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3.A. voltage. The voltage is correct. A wire or a
component between RM-19 of the relay module
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing and the air shutoff solenoid is shorted to + battery.
STOP. Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
Test Step 20. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE STOP.

This test step continues troubleshooting from the system voltage. Proceed to test step 22.
test step 1 (initial check). Prepare to make a vollage
measurement at the air shutoff solenoid. The air Test Step 22. CHECK THE ASR.
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module.
A. Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module.
A. Remove fuse "F3" from the relay module.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
START. B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET
C. At the air shutoff solenoid, measure the voltage C. Make sure that "K6" is not shown on the lower
across the terminals of solenoid. GSC+ display. If "K6" is showing, make sure that
no other faults are active.
Expected Result:
D. At the relay module, measure the resistance from
The voltage should be from 0 to 2.0 DCV. RM-5 to RM-19. A measurement of less than
100 ohms indicates that the air shutoff relay is
shorted.
262
Expected Result: ,0
The resistance should be greater than 10000 ohms. GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for
PEEC Engines)
Results:
SMCS Code: 4490-035
• OK - The resistance is greater than 10000 ohms.
Check for a short from +battery to RM-19 of the SIN: LRY1-Up
relay module.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Repair: Repair the shorted wiring. If the short is
internal to the relay module, replace the relay Conditions Which Generate This Code:
module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay
Module - Replace".
FeR
F2 K7
STOP.
G ~
RM-Jl
EJ ~
RM-4
/
RM-15
• NOT OK - The resistance is less than 10000

ohms. The short is internal to the relay module. RM-12 RM-39
B+
SWITCHED
Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testing "0
And Adjusting, "Relay Module - Replace". GENERATOR
,- SET
CONTROL
(GSC)
STOP.
" CR
" :66 PEECR :65
" '" l'

START
SWITCH
f---
:2
>9
SIGNAL
CONVERTER
(PWM)
" • J
J
x~
"
~
PEEC Vl
" ~
~I ID
b~
ENGINE
SHUTDOWN
:31
~"
13
"
System Schematic For Unexpected Shutdown

263
The purpose of the CID 0566 is to alert the operator Test Step 1. PERFORM AN INITIAL
that the GSC+ did not control the engine shutdown. CHECK.
The GSC+ normally controls all engine shutdown
functions, for both normal operation and fault A. Make sure that there are NO OTHER ACTIVE
shutdowns. If an outside influence causes an engine DIAGNOSTIC CODES. This means that there are
shutdown, the GSC+ declares aCID 0566. There is no diagnostic codes which are showing on the
only one failure mode for aCID 0566 and it is FMI upper display. This means that no shutdown or
07. FMI 07 is an improper mechanical response. alarm indicators are flashing. Failure to make sure
that there are NO OTHER ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC
This diagnostic code causes the following sequence CODES may result in erroneous troubleshooting
of events: and needless replacement of parts. The operator
will make many voltage measurements while
• On a running engine, the GSC+ detects that the GSC+ is attempting to crank the engine. If
engine speed has dropped from rated to 0 rpm the GSC+ detects other faults, the GSC+ will
when the GSC+ has not called for a shutdown. prevent starting by shutting off the fuel and air to
the engine. The resulting voltage measurements
• The GSC+ determines that no engine speed would then be the exact opposite of the voltage
sensor fault is present that explains the drop in which is expected in the procedures.
speed signal.
B. Check the fuel level and quality.
• The GSC": declares aCID 0566 FMI 07 and
disables the engine from running or starting. c. Check for a plugged fuel filter.
Note: An unexpected shutdown fault (CID 0566) will D. Check for a plugged air filter.
initiate a circuit breaker shunt trip signal.
E. Refer to the Service Manual for the engine if
Note: Diagnostic codes are created when the there is an obvious fault with the engine or the
harness connector (40 contact) is disconnected fuel system.
from the GSC+ during these troubleshooting
procedures. Clear these created diagnostic codes F. Check the operation of the air shutoff solenoid
after the particular diagnostic codes is corrected (if present).
and cleared.
Expected Result:
The possible cause of aCID 0566 FMI 07 is a
component that is not under the control of the The air shutoff solenoid activates and the air shutoff
GSC+ has caused an engine shutdown. solenoid deactivates.
The GSC+ treats aCID 0566 FMI 07 as a shutdown Note: If there is no air shutoff solenoid present,
fault. Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log proceed with the "YES" statement.
Results:
Note: This procedure requires many voltage
measurements during simulated engine cranking. • YES - The air shutoff solenoid can be activated
Starting motor fuse F4 on the relay module is and the air shutoff solenoid can be deactivated.
removed to prevent activating the starting motor Proceed to test step 2.
i
and actual engine cranking does not occur. Voltage
measurements must be made quickly before the • NO - The air shutoff solenoid can NOT be
total cycle crank time (setpoint P017) elapses. activated and the air shutoff solenoid can NOT be
The total cycle crank time is usually 90 seconds. deactivated. Proceed to test step 13.
Programming OP5-0". If a voltage measurement Test Step 2. VERIFY THE FAULT.
takes more than 90 seconds the GSC+ declares
an overcrank fault and the overcrank shutdown A. Check if the CID 0566 FMI 07 is showing. This
indicator will FLASH. In order to continue with a
reset by turning the ECS to OFF/RESET and then
turn the ECS to START.
means that the CID 0566 FMI 07 is active.
Expected Result: ,I I
The CID 0566 FMI 07 is showing as an active j

diagnostic code. I
264
Results: Repair: Reprogram setpoint POO1. See Sy:

Operation, "Engine/Generator Programmin
• OK - Only aCID 0566 FMI 07 is showing. OP5-0" .
STOP.
• NOT OK - ACID 0566 FMI 07 is NOT showing.
No active CID 0566 FMI 07 exists. Test Step 5. CHECK THE FUSES.
Repair: Refer to the Testing and Adjusting, "CID A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
0168 " procedures for troubleshooting information.
B. Check fuses "F2" and "F10" on the relay r
STOP.
Expected Result:
Test Step 3. CHECK THE SYSTEM
VOLTAGE. None of the fuses are open.
A. With the engine off, measure the system voltage Results:

at the battery. Make a note of this measurement.
This measurement of the system voltage is used • OK - None of the fuses are open. Proceed
for comparison in future steps of this procedure. step 6.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - One or more of the fuses are 0

For a 24 volt system, the system voltage should be
from 24.8 to 29.5 DCI/. For a 32 volt system, the Test Step 6. CHECK VOLTAGE AT TI
system voltage should be from 33.1 to 39.3 DCI/. RELAY MODULE.
Results: A. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the rela~
module .
• OK - The system voltage is correct. Proceed to
test step 4. B. Prepare to measure the voltage from RM-'
the "8-" terminal of the relay module .
• NOT OK - System voltage is NOT correct.
C. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECt
Repair: For troubleshooting, see Testing And START.
Adjusting, "CID 0168 Electrical System".
D. At the relay module, measure the voltage:
STOP. RM-15 to the "8-" terminal.
Test Step 4. CHECK SETPOINT P001. Expected Result:
A. Check setpoint P001 for proper programming. The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the syst,
"O=ETR", "1=ETS". See Systems Operation, voltage that was previously measured in Step
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2".
Results:
Expected Result:
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the systl
Setpoint P01 should be programmed in order to voltage that was previously measured in St,
match the type of fuel control solenoid which is 3.A. There is an open circuit between RM- 1
used on the generator set. The 3406C(S/N: 8FS) the relay module and the fuel control solene
and 33068 (S/N: 90S) use the ETR type (P01 = 0)
of fuel system. Repair: Repair the circuit. See the precedin
System Schematic.
Results:
STOP.
• OK - Setpoint P001 is programmed correctly.
Proceed to test step 5. • NOT OK - The system voltage is lower thar
voltage that was previously measured in Stel
• NOT OK - Set point P001 is NOT programmed Proceed to test step 8 .
correctly.
I
265
Test Step 7. TROUBLESHOOT THE Repair: Replace the relay module.

BLOWN FUSE.
STOP.
step 7. See the preceding System Schematics. Test Step 8. CHECK LOW VOLTAGE
Also, see Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics & CONDITION.
Wiring Diagrams".
A. The ECS remains in the OFF/RESET position. step 8. Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay
module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics
B. Remove the fuse that is blown. And Wiring Diagrams". Prepare to make voltage
o If the blown fuse is "F2", measure the
resistance from RM-15 of the relay module to A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
battery negative ("8-"). START.
o If the blown fuse is "FlO", measure the B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from
resistance from RM-39 of the relay module to RM-4 to the "8-" terminal and from RM-31 to the
battery negative ("8-"). "8-" terminal.
For a fuse that is blowing, the circuit resistance The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system
should be less than 3 ohms. Voltage. The system voltage was measured
previously in test step 3.A.
Note: On some ETR fuel systems with a dual coil
fuel control solenoid, the correct normal resistance Results:
o OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system
Results: voltage. Proceed to test step 9.
o OK - The resistance is greater than 3 ohms and o NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV of the
the. fuse is no longer blowing. system Voltage. The voltage is NOT correct.
Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are Repair: Check the wiring and recheck the fuse
connected to the appropriate terminal of the relay "F2". Repair the wiring or the components or
module. Check the wires for abrasion or worn replace the wiring or the components.
spots in the insulation that could be causing the
short. Check the wires in the panel, the generator STOP.
panel, and on the engine harness. Refer to the
various wiring diagrams as necessary. Repair the Test Step 9. CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC
wiring or replace the wiring as necessary. CODES
STOP. A. Make sure that no other diagnostic codes are
active.
o NOT OK < 3 n - If the resistance is less than
3 ohms, there is a short to the battery negative B. Check the upper display for any active diagnostic
("8-") codes.
Repair: Remove one component or one wire at a Expected Result:

terminal. Remove the components or the wires Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active.
until the failed component or wire is isolated.
Repair the failed component or the wiring or Results:
replace the failed component or the wiring.
• OK - Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active. Proceed to
STOP. test step 10.
o NOT OK > 3 n - If a resistance is greater than 3 e NOT OK - A fault other than CID 0566 FMI 07
ohms and the fuse still blows when all the wires is active.
are removed from the appropriate terminals, the
relay module has failed.
266
Repair: Correct the other fault. Proceed to the Results:

corresponding troubleshooting procedure.
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the sys
STOP. voltage that was previously recorded. The
voltage is correct. The problem is in the P
Test Step 10. CHECK THE CRANKING electronic engine control or the harness ir
VOLTAGE failed.
A. Turn the ECS to "OFF/RESET" and then to Repair: Refer to the specific Service Manu
"START". the Electronic Engine Troubleshooting.
B. Measure the voltage from TS2-39 to TS 1-2. STOP.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV

system voltage that was previously recordE
During cranking, the voltage should increase to voltage is low. Proceed to test step 12.
greater than 4.0 DCV and then stabilize between
1.5 and 2.0 DCV. Test Step 12. CHECK THE VOLTAGE
TERMINAL STRIP 1 (TS1).
Resl,llts:
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay m
• OK - During cranking, the voltage increases to Prepare to make a voltage measurement at t
greater than 4.0 DCV and then stabilize between strip 1 (TS 1) in the generator terminal box.
1.5 and 2.0 DCV. The voltage is correct. There is
an open circuit between TS2-39 and TS2-40. A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the EC:
START.
Repair: Check all wires for abbrasion or worn
spots in the insulation. Check the wires in the B. Measure the voltage from terminal TS 1- E
control panel and the geerator housing. Repair TSI-2.
the wiring or replace the wiring. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams". Expected Result:
STOP. The voltage should be ± 2 DCY of the SyStE

voltage that was measured preveously in tes
• NOT OK - During cranking, the voltage does 3.A.
NOT increases to greater than 4.0 DCV and then
stabilize between 1.5 and 2.0 DCV. The voltage Results:
remains low. Proceed to test step 11.
• OK - The voltage should be ± 2 DCV of
Test Step 11. CHECK SUPPLY VOLTAGE system voltage that was measured preveo
OF PEEC. test step 3.A. The voltage is correct. TherE
open between terminal TS 1-6 and the elec
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module. engine control (PEEC).
Prepare to make a voltage measurement at the
PEEC electronic engine control. Repair: Check the wiring. Refer to the prec
system schematic and the main chassis VI
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to diagram in the Schematics and Wiring Dia
START. section
B. Measure the voltage from the positive supply STOP.

for PEEC (PEEC connector contact 1) to the
negative supply for the PEEC (PEEC connector • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2 DCV 0
contact 21). system voltage IIlat was measured previOl
test step 3.A. The voltage is low. Proceed
Expected Result: step 13.

voltage. The system voltage was previously
measured in test step 3.A.
267
Test Step 13. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE Test Step 15. CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC
SLAVE RELAY. CODES
Fuse F4 remains removed from the relay module. A. Make sure that no other faults are active.
For reference, see the preceding System Schematic
and see Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics B. Check the upper display for any active faults.
and Wiring Diagrams". Prepare to make voltage
measurements at the slave relay (SR). Expected Result:
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active.
START.
Results:
B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from
slave relay (SR) terminal 30 to the relay module • OK - Only CID 0566 FMI 07 is active. Proceed to
• "8-" terminal. test step 16.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - A diagnostic code other than CID 566

FMI 7 is active,
voltage that was previously measured in Step 3A Repair: Correct the other diagnostic codes,
Proceed to the corresponding troubleshooting
Results: procedure .
• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the system STOP,

voltage that was previously measured in Step 3A
The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 14. Test Step 16. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT
TERMINAL STRIP 1 (TS1) •
system voltage that was previously measured in Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module.
test step 3A Prepare to make a voltage measurement at terminal
strip 1 (TS 1) in the generator terminal box.
Repair: Check the wiring and recheck the fuses.
Repair the wiring, if needed. See Testing And A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
Adjusting, "Schematics & Wiring Diagrams". START.
STOP. B. Measure the voltage from terminal TS 1- 6 to

TS1-2,
Test Step 14. CHECK CHECK THE SLAVE
RELAY Expected Result:
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to The voltage should be ± 2 DCV of the system
START. voltage that was measured preveously in test step
3A
B. Measure the voltage from SR terminal 87 to relay
module terminal 8-. Results:
Expected Result: • OK - The voltage is ± 2 DCV of the system

voltage that was measured preveously in test
The voltage should be ± 2.0 DCV of the system step 3A The voltage is correct. There is an open
voltage. The system voltage was measured between terminal TS1 and the electronic engine
previously in test step 3A control (PEEC),
Results: Repair: Check the wiring. Refer to the Testing And

Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams" .
voltage. Proceed to test step 15. STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV of the • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2 DCV of the
system voltage. The voltage is NOT correct. system voltage that was measured previously in
test step 3A The voltage is low.
Repair: Replace the slave relay.
STOP.
268
Repair: Check the wiring. See Testing And Results:

• OK - The voltage is ± 2.0 DCV of the SystE
STOP. voltage. The voltage is correct. A wire or a
component between RM-19 of trle relay moe
Test Step 17. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE and the air shutoff solenoid is shorted to + b,
This test step continues troubleshooting from the Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagram
test step 1 (initial check). Prepare to make a voltage
measurement at the air shutoff solenoid. The air STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT ± 2.0 DCV 0
A. Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module. system voltage. Proceed to test step 19.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to Test Step 19. CHECK THE ASR.
START.
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay mot
C. At the air shutoff solenoid, measure the voltage
across the terminals of solenoid. A. Remove fuse "F3" from the relay module.
Expected Result: B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET.
The voltage should be from 0 to 2.0 DCV. C. Make sure that "K6" is not shown on the 10'
GSC+ display. If "K6" is showing, make sur,
Results: no other faults are active.
• OK - The voltage is from 0 to 2.0 DCV. D. At the relay module, measure the resistancE
RM-5 to RM-19. A measurement of less thE
Repair: Voltage is correct. If the air shutoff 100 ohms indicates that the air shutoff rela'
remains tripped or cannot be reset, the fault is in shorted. .
the air shutoff. Refer to the Service Manual for
the engine. Exp",ct~d R!,!sult:
STOP. The resistance should be greater than 10000 c
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT from 0 to 2.0 DCV. Results:

• OK - The resistance is greater than 10000 c
Test Step 18. CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE Check for a short from +battery to RM-19 of
RELAY MODULE. relay module.
Fuse "F4" remains removed from the relay module. Repair: Repair the shorted wiring. If the shol
Prepare to make a voltage measurement at the internal to the relay module, replace the relE
relay module. module. See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay
Module - Replace".
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET. Turn the ECS to
START . STOP.
B. At the relay module, measure the voltage from • NOT OK - The resistance is less than 10001
RM·19 to the "8·" terminal. ohms. The short is internal to the relay modu
Expected Result: Repair: Replace the relay module. See Testil

voltage. STOP.
269
iQ1364061 Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
troubleshooting is complete. The GSC+ is usually
GSC CIO 0590 - FMI 09 programmed to treat aCID 590 diagnostic code
as an "alarm fault". Setpoint P04 is o. If the GSC
SMCS Code: 1901-035 is programmed to treat this code as a shutdown
fault, setpoint P04 is 1. Then, it is not necessary
Conditions Which Generate This Code: to press the "alarm codes" key in order to see
the diagnostic code. The diagnostic code is
This diagnostic code is usually associated with automatically shown on the upper display.
EUI applications. The CID 0590 failure means that
the engine electronic control module has stopped STOP.
responding to the periodiC requests for information
from the GSC+. • NOT OK - The resistance for both measurements
is greater than 5 ohms. The circuit is not correct.
Note: This diagnostiC code may occur on an
MUI application. The diagnostic code is caused Repair: Repair the wiring of the CAT data link or
by an incorrectly programmed P023 setpoint. replace the wiring of the CAT data link.
For MUI applications, the setpoint P0230f GSC+
must be set to O. Reprogram the set point and Clear the diagnostic code from the fault log after
other GSC+ setpoints. See Systems Operation, troubleshooting is complete. The GSC+ is usually
"Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0". programmed to treat aCID 590 diagnostic code
as an "alarm fault". Setpoint P04 is O. If the GSC
CHECK THE CAT DATA LINK is programmed to treat this code as a shutdown
fault, setpoint P04 is 1. Then, it is not necessary
A. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET position. to press the "alarm codes" key in order to see
the diagnostic code. The diagnostic code is
B. Disconnect the contacts 19 and 20 of the CAT automatically shown on the upper display.
data link from the GSC+.
STOP.
C. Disconnect the contacts 13 and 14 of the CAT
data link from the ECM.
101364314
D. Measure the resistance betweEjn contact 19 of
the GSC+ and contact 14 of the ECM. GSC CIO 0770 - FMI 09 (for EUI
and PEEC Engines)
E. Measure the resistance between contact 20 of
the GSC+ and contact 13 of the ECM. SMCS Code: 1926-035
Expected Result: SIN: 8NS1-Up
The resistance for both measurements is less than SIN: 9ES1-Up

5 ohms. SIN: 5PW1-Up
Results: SIN: 6WW1-Up
• OK - The resistance for both measurements is SIN: 8TW1-Up

less than 5 ohms. The circuit is correct. The ECM
SIN: LRY1-Up
has failed.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Repair: It is unlikely that the ECM has failed.
See Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "3500B EPG SIN: 8AZ1-Up
Engines" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, "3406E
EPG Engines" prior to replacing the ECM. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC)
GSC-21
ceM DATA LINK+ 0
GSC-22
ceM DATA LINK- 0
:------
System Schematic For CeM Data Link

270
Note: When a CCM is connected to a single genset, Repair: The "CCM data link" is shorted to
B+ is connected directly from TS1-17. When a CCM Repair the wiring or replace the wiring.
is connected to multiple gensets, the diode must
be connected as shown and B+ must be wired to The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm f
TS1-15. Active alarm faults are shown on the displa
the alarm codes key is pressed and the el
On gensets that are equipped with a CCM, the control switch (ECS) is in any position exc,
GSC+ uses the "CCM data link" to communicate OFF/RESET position. Clear the fault from It
with the Customer Communication Module (CCM). log after the troubleshooting is complete.
The CCM data link consists of two wires that STOP.

connect the GSC+ to the CCM.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE CCM FOR
The possible causes of aCID 0770 FMI 09 are SHORT TO -BATTERY
listed below.
• A short to the + battery ("B+ ") of either one of the
two contacts, 21 or 22 B. Disconnect the + and - battery leads fron
battery.
• A short to battery negative ("B-") of either of the
twei connector contacts, 21 or 22 C. Measure the resistance between contacts
and -B.
Note: The GSC+ cannot detect an open in the circuit
of the CCM data link. The GSC+ treats aCID 0770 D. Measure the resistance between contacts
as an alarm fault. Active alarm faults are shown on and -B.
the display when the "alarm codes" key is pressed
and the "ECS" switch is in any position except the Expected Result:
OFF/RESET position. Troubleshoot and repair the
wiring. See Testing and Adjusting, "Schematics and The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms for
Wiring Diagrams". Clear the fault from the fault log cases.
Results:
Test Step 1. GHECK THE CCM FOR Jl.
SHORT TO +BATTERY ;. OK - The resistance is greater 'than 5000 ,
for both cases. The circuit is correct.
Repair: The failure is intermittent. The prob
B. Disconnect the + and - battery leads from the cause is a poor electrical connection. Che,
battery. wiring and repair the wiring, as needed.
C. Measure the resistance between contacts 21 The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm fi
and +B. Active alarm faults are shown on the displa~
the alarm codes key is pressed and the er
D. Measure the resistance between contacts 22 control switch (ECS) is in any position eXCE
and +B. OFF/RESET position. Clear the diagnostic (
from lhe fault log atter the troubleshooting
Expected Result: complete.
The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms for both STOP.

cases.
• NOT OK - The resistance is less than 5000
Results: The circuit is not correct.
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms Repair: The CCM data link is shorted to B-.
for both cases. The circuit is correct. Proceed to the wiring or replace the wiring.
test step 2.
• NOT OK - The resistance is less than 5000 ohms.

The circuit is not correct.
271
The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm fault. Test Step 1. CHECK THE CCM FOR A
Active alarm faults are shown on the display when SHORT TO +BATTERY
the alarm codes key is pressed and the engine
control switch (ECS) is in any position except the A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
OFF/RESET position. Clear the diagnostic code
from the fault log after the troubleshooting is B. Disconnect the + and - battery leads from the
complete. battery.
STOP. C. Measure the resistance between contacts 21

and +B.
101364469
D. Measure the resistance between contacts 22
GSC CIO 0770 - FMI 09 (for MUI and +B.
-Engines) Expected Result:
SMCS Code: 1926-035 The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms for both
cases.
SIN: SNS1-Up
SIN: 9ES1-Up Results:
SIN: 5PW1-Up • OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms

for both cases. The circuit is correct. Proceed to
SIN: 6WW1-Up test step 2.
SIN: STW1-Up
SIN: LRW1-Up The circuit is not correct.
SIN: LRX1-Up Repair: The "CCM data link" is shorted to B+.

Repair the wiring or replace the wiring.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm fault.
Conditions YIIhich Generate T~is Code: . Active alarm.faults are shown on the display when
the alarm codes key is pressed and the engine
GENERATOR SET control switch (ECS) is in any position except the
CONTROL (GSC)
GSC-21
GeM OAT A LINK+ 0 from the fault log after the troubleshooting is
GSC-22 complete.
ceM DAT~
STOP.
900545923
Illustration 165 Test Step 2. CHECK THE CCM FOR A
System Schematic For CeM Data Link SHORT TO -BATTERY
This "CCM data link" is not used for MUI A. Turn the ECS to the OFF/RESET position.
applications. It is unlikely for aCID 770 to occur.
However, the connector contacts 21 and 22 are B. Disconnect the + and - battery leads from the
present. Therefore, a fault is possible. battery.
The possible causes of aCID 0770 FMI 09 are C. Measure the resistance between contacts 21
listed below. and -B.
• A short to the + battery ("B+") of either one of the D. Measure the resistance between contacts 21
two contacts, 21 or 22 and ·B.
• A short to battery negative ("B-") of either of the Expected Result:

two connector contacts, 21 or 22
The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms for both
Note: The GSC+ cannot detect an open in the circuit cases.
of the "CCM data link". Troubleshoot and repair the
wiring. See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematic And
Wiring Diagrams".
272
Results:
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms GSC CID 0858 - FMI 03
for both cases. The circuit is correct.
SMCS Code: 1420-035
Repair: The failure is intermittent. The probable
SIN: 5PW1-Up
cause is a poor electrical connection. Check the
wiring and repair the wiring, as needed. SIN: 6WW1-Up
The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm fault. SIN: 8TW1-Up

Active alarm faults are shown on the display when
the alarm codes key is pressed and the engine SIN: LRW1-Up
control switch (ECS) is in any position except the SIN: LRX1-Up
from the fault log after the troubleshooting is SIN: LRY1-Up
complete.
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
STOP.
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
The circuit is not correct. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
Repair: The CCM data link is shorted to B-. Repair The close breaker control output drives the E
the wiring or replace the wiring. Control Relay (BCR). The BCR activates thE
generator circuit breaker. The generator circ
The GSC+ treats aCID 770 as an alarm fault. breaker connects the generator to the bus..
Active alarm faults are shown on the display when inactive level of this output is floating. The v(
the alarm codes key is pressed and the engine may range from 5.2 DCV to the voltage of tt
control switch (ECS) is in any position except the battery terminal. The active voltage level is E
OFF/RESET position. Clear the diagnostic code voltage of the battery negative terminal ("B-"
from the fault log after the troubleshooting is
complete. For Automatic Synchronization, the output 0
the close breaker control is pulsed active fo
STOP. programmed period of time. The period of tit
set according to setpoint P302. While the cor
for synchronization are satisfied, the close bt
control output is repeatedly activated at one'
intervals. When the breaker sensor input indi
that the generator circuit breaker is closed .
activation of the close breaker control outp'u'
discontinued. Also, the activation of the clos
breaker input is discontinued when setpoint I
(Maximum Synchronization Time) is exceede,
For SemiAutomatic synchronization or Permi~

synchronization, the close breaker control ou
held active while the conditions for synchroni
are met.
A possible cause of aCID 0858 FMI 03 is a E

the battery positive terminal ("B+ ") of the sigt
the close breaker control output. ACID 0858
03 is only detected when the GSC+P is allen
to activate the output of the "close breaker c(
The GSC+P treats aCID 0858 FMI 03 as an
fault. CID 0858 FMI 03 will cause the GSC+F
stop the synchronization process until the FM
cleared and the diagnostic code is corrected
I
!
273
Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE Results:

VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE CLOSE
BREAKER CONTROL OUTPUT. • OK - The voltage level is 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV. The
voltage level is correct. The GSC+P is operating
A. Turn the "ECS" switch to STOP. correctly. The problem is in the wiring or a
component that is connected to the close breaker
B. Locate the wire that connects pin 37 on the control output.
GSC+P and terminal lIon the Parallel Mode
Switch. Repair: Use the information about the FMI and the
system schematic for the close breaker control
C. Remove the wire from terminal lIon the Parallel output to find the exact cause of the diagnostic
Mode Switch only. GSC+P remains connected code.
to the wire.
STOP.
t>. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin
37 on the GSC+P. • NOT OK - The voltage level is not 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV.
The voltage level is NOT correct.
Expected Result:
The voltage should measure 5.2 ± 1.0 DCV. that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
Results: the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
• OK - The voltage measures 5.2 ± 1.0 DCV. The (Generator Set) - Replace" .
voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 2.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is less than 4.2 DCV or
the voltage greater than 6.2 DCV.
101365091

and perform this entire procedure again. If SMCS Code: 1420-035
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control Conditions Which Generate This Code:
The close breaker output drives the Breaker Control
STOP. Relay (BCR). The BCR activates the generator
circuit breaker, connecting the generator to the
Test Step 2. CHECK THE ACTIVE bus. The inactive level of this output is floating
VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE CLOSE (may range from approximately 5.2 DCV to battery
BREAKER OUTPUT. positive), and the active level is at battery negative
("B-").
A. The wire from terminal lIon the Parallel Mode
Switch remains disconnected. For Automatic Synchronization, the close breaker
output is pulsed active for a programmed period
B. Start the engine and run the engine. of time according to setpoint P302. As long as
synchronization conditions are met, the close
C. Perform the Permissive Paralleling function. breaker output will be activated repeatedly at one
If necessary, refer to Systems Operation, second intervals until the breaker sensor input
"Synchronization Sequence Of Operation". indicates the generator circuit breaker is closed or
setpoint P314, Maximum Synchronization Time is
D. Manually bring the engine into synchronization exceeded.
with the bus. The synchroscope pointer will be
at the top center posilion. This position indicates For SemiAutomatic or Permissive synchronization,
a phase angle of zero degrees. the Close Breaker Output will be held active as long
as synchronization conditions are met.
Expected Result:
When the "IN SYNC" symbol is turned ON, the

voltage level of the close breaker control output
should read 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV.
274
A possible cause of aCID 0858 FMI 04 is a short to Expected Result:

battery negative (B-) of the Close Breaker Output
signal. ACID 0858 FMI 04 is only detected when When the "IN SYNC" symbol is turned ON, the
the GSC+P is NOT activating the Close Breaker close breaker output voltage level should read I
Output. The GSC+P treats aCID 0858 FMI 04 as ± 1.0 DCV.
an alarm fault. CID 0858 FMI 04 will cause the
GSC+P to stop the synchronization process until Results:
the diagnostic code is cleared and corrected.
• OK - The voltage level is 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV. ThE
Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE voltage level is correct. The GSC+P is ope rat
VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE CLOSE correctly.
BREAKER OUTPUT.
Repair: The problem is in the wiring or a
A. Turn the "ECS" switch to STOP. component connected to the close breaker
output. Use the FMI information and the closl
B. Locate the wire that connects pin 37 on the breaker output system schematic to find the e
GSC+P and terminal 11 on the SMS. cause of the diagnostic code.
C. Remove the wire from terminal 11 on the SMS STOP.

only. GSC+P remains connected to the wire.
• NOT OK - The voltage level is not 0.0 ± 1.0 [
D. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin The voltage level is NOT correct.
37 on the GSC+P
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlik,
Expected Result: that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
The voltage should measure 5.2 ± 1.0 DCV. the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Con
Results: (Generator Set) - Replace".
• OK - The voltage measures 5.2 ± 1.0 DCV. The STOP.

voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 2.
• NOT OK - The voltage is below 5.2 ± 1.0 DCV.

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure SMCS Code: 4490-035
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See Conditions Which Generate This Code:
GENERATOR SET
STOP. CONTROL (OSC)
RM-B-r B+
Test Step 2. CHECK THE ACTIVE
VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE CLOSE GSC-34
KW RELAY ~ -
BREAKER OUTPUT.
A. The wire from terminal 11 on the SMS remains 10
disconnected. GSC+P remains connected to the :T
~ ------~~----------~
wire.
,7 ,7 2
KW RELAY
B. Start the engine and run the engine. 1
g007~
C. Perform the Permissive Paralleling function. lfIustraUon 166
If necessary, refer to Systems Operation, System SchemaUc For kW Level Output
"Synchronization Sequence Of Operation".
D. Manually bring the engine into sync with the

bus. The synchroscope pointer will be at the top
center position indicating 0' phase angle.
275
The kW level output will be activated whenever Results:

the total power output of the generator exceed
the setpoint P 139. The kW level output is the • OK - The voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV
connector contact 34 of the GSC+. This setpoint The voltage is correct. Proceed to test step 2.
can be programmed from 0 to 110 percent of the
rated power on the nameplate (setpoint P030). • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT approximately 5 ±
This setpoint can be programmed with a time 1.0 DCV The voltage is NOT correct. The GSC+
delay from 0 to 120 seconds (setpoint P140). See has failed.
System Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming
OP5-0". Also, see System Operation, "Service Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed.
Mode". Once the output is activated, the kW level Exit this diagnostic code procedure and repeat
output will be deactivated when the total power the CID 0859 FMI 03 diagnostic code procedure
output of the generator drops below a programmed again. If the cause of the failure is still unknown,
setpoint (setpoint P141). This setpoint is different then replace the GSC+.
from the activation setpoint. This setpoint can be
programmed from 0 to 110 percent of the power STOP.
rating on the nameplate of the generator. This
setpoint can be programmed with a time delay from Test Step 2. CHECK FOR A SHORT IN
o to 120 seconds. THE WIRING OF THE kW LEVEL OUTPUT
When kW relay is disconnected from the GSC+, the A. Shut down the genset.
voltage on the kW level output is approximately 5.0
DCV When kW relay is connected to the GSC+, the B. Disconnect the cable on the "8-" terminal of the
voltage on the kW level output is approximately 0 battery, or open the optional battery disconnect
volts. The kW level output is capable of drawing switch.
(sinking) approximately 100 mA. Documenting and
troubleshooting any connections to this output is the C. The wire remains disconnected from contact 34
responsibility of the customers and the dealers. of the GSC+.
The possible cause of aCID 0859 FMI 3 is a short D. Measure the resistance between the wire that
to the +battery circuit of the kW level output. was disconnected from contact 34 of the GSC+
and contact 10 of the kW relay.
The GSC+ treats aCID .859 FMI 03 as an alarm
fault. Expected Result:
Troubleshooting of this failure is straight forward. The resistance is 480 ohms ±48 ohms.
The FMI 03 defines the problem as a short to "8+".
Use the following information in order to find the Results:
exact cause of the diagnostic code.
• OK - The resistance is between 430 and 530
• FM I information ohms. It is unlikely that the GSC+ has failed.
• system schematic of the kW level output Repair: It is unlikley that the GSC+ has failed.
The system may need to be reset. Reset the
• customer's documentation system by turning the engine control switch (ECS)
to the OFF/RESET position. Exit this diagnostic
• dealer's documentation code procedure and repeat the CID 0859 FMI 03
diagnostic code procedure again. If the cause of
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GENERATOR the failure is still unknown, replace the GSC+. See
SET CONTROL Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
(Generator Set) - Replace"
A. Verify that the CID 0859 FMI 03 diagnostic code
is active. STOP.
B. Disconnect the wire from contact 34 of the GSC+. • NOT OK - The resistance is less than 430 ohms
or the resistance is greater than 530 ohms. The
C. Measure the voltage between contact 34 of the resistance is NOT correct.
GSC+ and 8-.
Expected Result:
rhe voltage is approximately 5 ± 1.0 DCV.

276
Repair: The kW relay is faulty or there is a short The possible cause of aCID 0859 FMI 04 is c
between the wire disconnected from contact 34 to the "-battery" circuit of the kW level output.
of the GSC+ and 8+. Replace the kW relay or
repair the wiring. The GSC+ treats a C ID 0859 FM I 04 as an al
fault.
STOP.
Troubleshooting of this failure is straight forw,
The FMI 04 defines the diagnostic code as a
i01368873 to "8-". Use the following information in order
GSC CID 0859 - FMI 04 the exact cause of the diagnostic code.
SMCS Code: 4490-035 • FMI information
Conditions Which Generate This Code: • system schematic of the kW level output
• customer's documentation
GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC) • dealer's documentation
RM-B+ B+ 1-+---,
Test Step 1. CHECK THE GENERATe
J(W
GSC-3-4
RELAY r-.H-~
SET CONTROL
A. Verify that the CID 0859 FMI 04 diagnostic
10 is active.
KWR
B. Disconnect the wire from contact 34 of the
2
KW RELAY
Expected Result:
Illustration 167 900721817 The diagnostic code becomes inactive.

System Schematic For kW Level Output
Results:
The kW level output will be activated whenever
the total power output of the generator exceed • OK - The diag nos tic code changes to ina
the setpoint P139. The kW level output is the Proceed to test step 2.
connector contact 34 of the GSC+. This setpoint
can be programmed from 0 to 110 percent of the • NOT OK - The diagnostic code remains a
rated power on the nameplate (setpoint P030). The GSC+ may have failed.
This setpoint can be programmed with a time
delay from 0 to 120 seconds (setpoint P140). See Repair: It is unlikely that the GSC+ has fai
System Operation, "Engine/Generator Programming Exit this diagnostic code procedure and rE
OP5-0". Also, see System Operation, "Service the CID 0859 FMI 03 diagnostic code pro(
Mode". Once the output is activated, the kW level again. If the cause of the failure is still unk
output will be deactivated when the total power then replace the GSC+.
output of the generator drops below a programmed
setpoint (setpoint P141). This setpoint is different STOP.
from the activation setpoint. This setpoint can be
programmed from 0 to 110 percent of the power Test Step 2. CHECK FOR A SHORT
rating on the nameplate of the generator. This "8-" IN THE WIRING OF THE kW LE
setpoint can be programmed with a time delay from OUTPUT
o to 120 seconds.
A. Shut down the genset.
When kW relay is disconnected from the GSC+, the
voltage on the kW level output is approximately 5.0 B. Disconnect the "8-" terminal from the batl
DCV. When kW relay is connected to the GSC+, the
voltage on the kW level output is approximately 0 C. The wire remains disconnected from cont
volts. The kW level output is capable of drawing of the GSC+.
(sinking) approximately 100 mA Documenting and
troubleshooting any connections to this output is the D. Measure the resistance between the wire
responsibility of the customers and the dealers. was disconnected from contact 34 of the
and the "8-" terminal.
277
Expected Result: The possible cause of aCID 1038 FMI 03 is a short

from the output signal of the "Speed Adjust 1" to
The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms. + battery.
Results: ACID 1038 FMI 03 is detected when the GSC+P

is NOT activating the output of the "Speed Adjust
• OK - The resistance is greater than 5000 ohms. 1". The GSC+P treats aCID 1038 FMI 03 as an
The resistance is correct. alarm fault. The synchronization process will be
stopped until the diagnostic code is cleared and
Repair: The failure is intermittent. The probable the diagnostic code is corrected.
cause is a poor electrical connection. Check the
wiring for damage and clean all connections. Exit Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE
this procedure and perform the CID 0859 FMI 04 VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE OUTPUT OF
procedure again. If no failure is found and the THE "SPEED ADJUST 1".
aiagnostiC code is still active, replace the GSC+.
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to STOP.
STOP.
B. Locate the wire that is connecting pin 27 of the
• NOT OK - The resistance is less than 5000 GSC+P to the terminal 4 of the "BKRR". Remove
ohms. The resistance is NOT correct. The circuit this wire at the terminal 4 of the "BKRR"only. Pin
is shorted: 27 of tile GSC+P will remain connected to the
wire.
Repair: Repair the wiring between contact 34 of
the "B-" terminal. C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage on
pin 27 of GSC+P.
STOP.
Expected Result:
101362540
The voltage should measure 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV.
GSC CIO 1038 - FMI 03 Results:
SMCS Code: 1264-035
• OK - The voltage level is 0.0 ± 1.0 DCV. Proceed
SIN: 5PW1-Up to Test Step 2..
SIN: 6WW1-Up • NOT OK - The voltage level is below the correct

range or the voltage level is above the correct
SIN: 8TW1-Up
range.
SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
SIN: LRY1-Up the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
SIN: 4BZ1·Up
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
STOP.
The output of the "Speed Adjust 1" provides VOLTAGE LEVELS OF THE OUTPUT OF
an analog signal that is being used to vary the THE "SPEED ADJUST 1".
engine speed in order to match the phase of the
generator to the phase of the bus. The full output A. The wire that is connecting pin 27 of the GSC+P
voltage is approximately -5.0 to +5.0 DCV. If the and the terminal 4 of the "BKRR" remains
synchronization is disabled, the output will be 0.0 disconnected.
± 0.5 DCV.
B. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed so the
Note: Setpoint P308 must be set to a value that frequency is 1.0 Hz higher than the frequency
is greater than zero in order for this procedure to of the bus.
be completed. This setpoint can be a value from
o to 100. The factory default is 50. See Systems C. Perform the Semi-Automatic paralleling function.
Operation, "Parallel Setpoint Programming" for more If necessary, refer to Systems Operation,
information. "Synchronization Tuning Procedure".
278
D. Allow the voltage to stabilize. Use a cable probe • NOT OK - The voltage is above or the volt
to measure the voltage on pin 27 of GSC+P. below the correct voltage.
Expected Result: Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is ur

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedL
The voltage should measure -5.0 ± 1.0 DCV. and perform this entire procedure again. I
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. E
Results: Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic C
(Generator Set) - Replace" .
• OK - The voltage level is -5.0 ± 1.0 DCV.
Proceed to Test Step 3. STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is above or the voltage is

IC
below the correct voltage.

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure SMCS Code: 1264-035
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See SIN: 5PW1-Up
(Generator Set) - Replace". SIN: 6WW1-Up
STOP. SIN: 8TW1-Up

SIN: LRW1-Up
VOLTAGE LEVELS OF THE OUTPUT OF SIN: LRX1-Up
THE "SPEED ADJUST 1".
SIN: LRY1-Up
A. The wire that is connecting pin 27 of the SIN: 4BZ1-Up
GSC+P and terminal 4 of the "BKRR" remains
disconnected. SIN: 8AZ1-Up
B. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed so that Conditions Which Generate This Code:
the frequency is 1.0 Hz lower than the frequency
of the frequency of the bus . The output of the "Speed Adjust 1" provides
an analog signal that is being used to vary tI
C. Perform the Semi-Automatic paralleling function. engine speed in order to match the phase of
If necessary, refer to Systems Operation, generator to the phase of the bus. The full ou
"Synchronization Tuning Procedure". voltage is approximately -5.0 to +5.0 DCV. If
synchronization is disabled, the output will be
D. Allow the voltage to stabilize. Use a cable probe ± 0.5 DCV.
to measure the voltage on pin 27 of GSC+P.
Note: Setpoint P308 must be set to a value tf
Expected Result: is greater than zero in order for this procedufl
be completed. This setpoint can be a value Ie
The voltage should measure +5.0 ± 1.0 DCV. o to 100. The factory default is 50. See Syste
Operation, "Parallel Setpoint Programming" foc
Results: information .
• OK - The voltage level is +5.0 ± 1.0 DCV. The possible cause of aCID 1038 FMI 04 is a
from the output signal of the "Speed Adjust 1
Repair: The GSC+P is operating correctly, and battery negative.
the problem is in the wiring or the component that
is connected to the output of the "Speed Adjust ACID 1038 FMI 04 is detected when the GS(
1". Use the FMI information and use the System is NOT activating the output of the "Speed Ac
Schematic of the "Speed Adjust 1" to find the 1". The GSC+P treats aCID 1038 FMI 04 as
exact cause of the fault. alarm fault. The synchronization process will t
stopped until the diagnostic code is cleared c
STOP. the diagnostic code is corrected.
279
Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE Results:

VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE OUTPUT OF
THE "SPEED ADJUST 1". • OK - The voltage level is -5.0 ± 1.0 DC\/.
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is above or the voltage is
B. Locate the wire that is connecting pin 27 of the below the correct voltage.
GSC+P to the terminal 4 of the "BKRR". Remove
this wire at the terminal 4 of the "BKRR"only. Pin Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely
27 of the GSC+P will remain connected to the that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure
wire. and perform this entire procedure again. If
C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage on Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
pin 27 of GSC+P. (Generator Set) - Replace".
The voltage should measure 0.0 ± 1.0 DC\/. Test Step 3. CHECK THE ACTIVE
VOLTAGE LEVELS OF THE OUTPUT OF
Results: THE "SPEED ADJUST 1".
• OK - The voltage level is 0.0 ± 1.0 DC\/. Proceed A. The wire that is connecting pin 27 of the
to Test Step 2. GSC+P and terminal 4 of the "BKRR" remains
disconnected .
• NOT OK - The voltage level is below the correct
range or the voltage level is above the correct B. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed so that
range. the frequency is 1.0 Hz lower than the frequency
of the frequency of the bus .
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure C. Perform the Semi-Automatic paralleling function.
and perform this entire procedure again. If If necessary, refer to Systems Operation,
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See "Synchronization Tuning Procedure".
(Generator Set) - Replace". D. Allow the voltage to stabilize. Use a cable probe
to measure the voltage on pin 27 of GSC+P.
STOP.
Expected Result:
VOLTAGE LEVELS OF THE OUTPUT OF The voltage should measure +5.0 ± 1.0 DC\/.
THE "SPEED ADJUST 1".
Results:
A. The wire that is connecting pin "27" of the
GSC+P and the terminal 4 of the "BKRR" remains • OK - The voltage level is +5.0 ± 1.0 DC\/.
disconnected.
Repair: The GSC+P is operating correctly, and
B. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed so the the problem is in the wiring or the component that
frequency is 1.0 Hz higher than the frequency is connected to the output of the "Speed Adjust
of the bus. 1". Use the FMI information and use the System
Schematic of the "Speed Adjust 1" to find the
C. Perform the Semi-Automatic paralleling functioll. exact cause of the fault.
If necessary, refer to Systems Operation,
"Synchronization Tuning Procedur". STOP.
D. Allow the voltage to stabilize. Use a cable probe • NOT OK - The voltage is above or the voltage is
to measure the voltage on pin 27 of GSC+P. below the correct voltage.
Expected Result:
The voltage should measure -5.0 ± 1.0 DC\/.

280
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE CIRCUIT
and perform this entire procedure again. If BREAKER SENSOR.
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to Sl
B. Locate the wire that is connecting pin 25
STOP. the GSC+P to the terminal "B" of the "BKI
Remove this wire at terminal "B" of the "B
only. Pin 25 of GSC+P will remain connec
101363574
the wire.
C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltagE
SMCS Code: 1420-035 25 of the GSC+P.
SIN: 5PW1-Up Expected Result:

SIN: 6WW1-Up The voltage should measure 10.5 ± 1 DCV.
SIN: 8TW1-Up
Results:
SIN: I:.RW1-Up
• OK - The voltage is 10.5 ± 1 DCV. Procee
SIN: LRX1-Up Test Step 2.
SIN: LRY1-Up
• NOT OK - The voltage is not within the co
SIN: 4BZ1-Up range.
SIN: 8AZ1-Up Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is ur

that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedl
Conditions Which Generate This Code: and perform this entire procedure again. I
the problem remains, replace the GSC+. E
The circuit breaker sensor is used by the GSC+P Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic C
to determine if the generator circuit is opened or (!3enerator Set) - RE!place".
closed. When the circuit breaker sensor input is
inactive the input will float to approximately 10.5 STOP.
DCV. An inactive state will indicate that tile circuit
breaker is open. When the circuit breaker sensor Test Step 2. CHECK THE FUNCTION
input is active, the voltage level will be at the level THE INPUT OF THE CIRCUIT BREAt
of the battery negative terminal "B-". An active state SENSOR.
indicates that the breaker is closed.
A. The wire that is connecting pin 25 of the
The possible cause of aCID 1167 FMI 4 is a short GSC+P and terminal "B" of the "BKRR" ref
from the input signal of the circuit breaker sensor disconnected.
to battery negative.
B. Start the engine. Adjust the engine speed
ACID 1167 FMI 04 is detected when the input of generator frequency is more than 0.2 Hz c
the circuit breaker sensor is active. The CID 1167 frequency of the bus.
FMI 04 indicates a closed breaker and one or both
of the following items are true. C. Perform the Permissive Paralling function.
Refer to Systems Operation, "Synchronizat
• The difference of frequency between the Sequence Of Operation".
generator and the bus is greater than 0.2 Hz.
D. Ensure tllat the synchroscope is present Of
• The difference of phase between the generator lower display of the GSC+P.
and the bus is greater than 10°.
E. Touch the loose end of the wire of pin 25 c
When the above conditions are present for two GSC+P to the battery negative terminal "B·
seconds, the GSC+P will issue aCID 1167 FMI 4
as an alarm fault. The GSC+P will then stop the
synchronization process until the diagnostic code is
cleared and the diagnostic code is corrected.
281
Expected Result: The possible cause of aCID 1168 FMI 03 is a short

from the input signal of the dead bus sensor to +
After two seconds, the CID 1167 FMI 4 should be battery.
active.
ACID 1168 FMI 03 is detected under the following
Results: condition .
• OK - The GSC+P issues the diagnostic. • The voltage of the Phase A of the bus is less
than 20% of the rated voltage and the input of
Repair: The GSC+P is operating correctly, and the dead bus sensor is floating. The voltage of
the problem is in the wiring or the component that the Phase A is determined by the "BTB+" input
is connected to the input of the circuit breaker to the GSC+ P.
sensor. Use the FM I information and use the
Close Breaker Input System Schematic to find the The GSC+P treats aCID 1168 FMI 03 as an alarm
•exact cause 01 the diagnostic code. fault. The dead bus paralleling function will be
stopped when this diagnostic code is detected. No
STOP. other synchronization processes will be affected.
• NOT OK - The GSC+P does not issue the Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE
diagnostic. VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE INPUT OF THE
DEAD BUS SENSOR.
Repair: The GSC+P has failed. Replace the
GSC+P. See Testing and Adjusting, "EMPC A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to STOP.
B. Locate the wire that is connecting pin 29 of
STOP. the GSC+P to the terminal 9 of the bus relay
("BUSR"). Remove this wire at terminal 9 of
the "BUSR" only. Pin 29 of GSC+P will remain
101364010
connected to the wire.
GSC CID 1168 - FMI 03 C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin
SMCS Code: 445B-035 29 of the GSC+P.
SIN: 5PW1-Up Expected Result:

SIN: 6WW1-Up The voltage should measure 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV.
SIN: 8TW1-Up
Results:
SIN: LRW1-Up
• OK - The voltage level is 1O.5± 1.0 DCV. Proceed
SIN: LRX1-Up to Test Step 2.
SIN: LRY1-Up • NOT OK - The voltage level is not within the
SIN: 4BZ1-Up correct range.
SIN: 8AZ1-Up Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely

Conditions Which Generate This Code: and perform this entire procedure again. If
This dead bus sensor provides an additional Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
indication of the state of the bus. The bus can be (Generator Set) - Replace".
live or dead. The input of the dead bus sensor is
compared to the reading of the bus voltage, and STOP.
the diagnostics are produced if the measurements
dilfer Test Step 2. CHECK THE FUNCTION OF
THE BUS RELAY.
When the input of the dead bus sensor is inactive,
the input will float to approximately 10.5 DCV. An A. Reconnect the wire that is connecting pin 29 of
inactive state indicates that the bus is live. When the GSC+P to the terminal 9 of the "BUSR".
the input of the dead bus sensor is active, the bus
will be dead. B. Use a cable probe to monitor the voltage on pin
29 of the GSC+P.
282
C. Ensure that the bus is dead, or carefully ,r

disconnect power from the relay corl of the
"BUSR". GSC CID 1168 - FMI 04
Expected Result: SMCS Code: 445B-035
SIN: 5PW1-Up
The voltage of pin 29 of the GSC+P should measure
0.0 ± 0.5 DCY. SIN: 6WW1-Up
Results: SIN: BTW1-Up
• OK - The voltage is 0.0 ± 0.5 DCY. Proceed to SIN: LRW1-Up

Test Step 3. SIN: LRX1-Up
• NOT OK - The voltage is incorrect. SIN: LRY1-Up
Repair: The GSC+P has failed. Replace the SIN: 4BZ1-Up

GSC+P See Testing and Adjusting, "EMPC
SIN: BAZ1-Up
STOP Conditions Which Generate This Code:
Test Step 3. CHECK THE FUNCTION OF This dead bus sensor provides an additional
THE BUS RELAY. indication of the state of the bus. The bus ca
live or dead. The input of the dead bus sens,
A. Carefully reconnect any power wires of the compared to the reading of the bus voltage,
the diagnostics are produced rf the measuren
"BUSR" that may have previously been removed.
differ.
B. Ensure that the bus is live.
When the input of the dead bus sensor is ina
the input will float to approximately 10.5 DCY..
C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin
29 of the GSC+P. inactive state indicates that the bus rs Irve. W
the input of the dead bus sensor is active, th,
will be dead. •
Expected Result:
The voltage should measure 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV. The possible cause of aCID 116B FMI 04 is E
from the input signal of the dead bus sensor
Results: battery negative.
• OK - The voltage is 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV. ACID 116B FMI 04 is detected under the follr
condition.
Repair: The GSC+P is functioning properly. The
problem is in the wiring or the component that rs • The voltage of the Phase A of the bus is gr
connected to the input of the dead bus sensor than 50% of the rated voltage and the inpu
of the GSC+P Use the FMI information and the the dead bus sensor is floating. The voltag,
Dead Bus Sensor input System Schematic to find the Phase A is determined by the "BTB+" ir
the exact cause of the diagnostic code. to the GSC+P
STOP. The GSC+P treats aCID 116B FMI 04 as an E

fault. The dead bus paralleling function will b
• NOT OK - The voltage is incorrect. stopped when this diagnostic code is detecte
other synchronization processes will be affect,
Repair: The GSC+P has failed. Replace the
GSC+P See Testing and Adjusting, "EM PC Test Step 1. CHECK THE INACTIVE
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace". VOLTAGE LEVEL OF THE INPUT OF'
DEAD BUS SENSOR.
STOP.
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to ST(
283
B. Locate the wire that is connecting pin 29 of Test Step 3. CHECK THE FUNCTION OF
the GSC+P to the terminal 9 of the bus relay THE BUS RELAY.
("BUSR"). Remove this wire at terminal 9 of
the "BUSR" only. Pin 29 of GSC+P will remain A. Carefully reconnect any power wires of the
connected to the wire. "BUSR" that may have previously been removed.
C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin B. Ensure that the bus is live.
29 of the GSC+P.
C. Use a cable probe to measure the voltage at pin
Expected Result: 29 of the GSC+P.
The voltage should measure 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV. Expected Result:
Results: The voltage should measure 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV.
• OK - The voltage level is 10.5± 1.0 DCV. Proceed Results:

to Test Step 2.
• OK - The voltage is 10.5 ± 1.0 DCV.
• NOT OK - The voltage level is not within the
correct range. Repair: The GSC+P is functioning properly. The
problem is in the wiring or the component that is
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely connected to the input of the dead bus sensor
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure of the GSC+P. Use the FMI information and the
and perform this entire procedure again. If Dead Bus Sensor input System Schematic to find
the problem remains. replace the GSC+. See the exact cause of the diagnostic code.
Testing And Adjusting. "EMCP Electronic Control
(Generator Set) - Replace". STOP.
STOP. • NOT OK - The voltage is incorrect.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE FUNCTION OF Repair: The GSC+P has failed. Replace the
THE BUS RELAY. GSC+P. See Testing and Adjusting. "EMPC
Electronjc Contrpl (Generator Set) - Repla<;:e" ..
A. Reconnect the wire that is connecting pin 29 of
the GSC+P to the terminal 9 of the "BUSR". STOP.
B. Use a cable probe to monitor the voltage on pin

29 of the GSC+P.
C. Ensure that the bus is dead. or carefully

disconnect power from the relay coil of the
"BUSR".
Expected Result:
The voltage of pin 29 of the GSC+P should measure

0.0 ± 0.5 DCV.
Results:
• OK - The voltage is 0.0 ± 0.5 DCV. Proceed to

Test Step 3 .
• NOT OK - The voltage is incorrect.

the problem remains. replace the GSC+. See
Testing And Adjusting. "EMCP Electronic Control
STOP.
284
101364594 Results:
GSC CIO 1169 - FMI 02 • OK - The line-to-line voltages are equal wit
±5% and the voltages are within a rea sana I
SMCS Code: 1409-035 value of the rated voltage of the genset.
SIN: 5PW1-Up
Repair: The ATB+ has failed. Replace the A
SIN: 6WW1-Up See Testing and Adjusting, "EMPC Electron
Control (AC Transformer Box) - Replace".
SIN: 8TW1-Up
STOP.
SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up • NOT OK - The voltages are not correct.
SIN: LRY1-Up Repair: Use the ATB+ System Schematic ar

the AC Schematic in the Schematics And 'Iv
SIN: 4BZ1-Up Diagrams section to troubleshoot the wiring
find the exact cause of the problem. Ashar
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
on the output of the phases of the ATB+ wi
not normally cause permanent damage to tl
ATB+. Remove the problem and check for r:
operation before replacing any components
The "ATB+" reduces the AC voltages to neutral
voltages and phase currents from the generator to
STOP.
usable signal levels for the GSC+P. The GSC+P
uses these reduced signals for the following
reasons: metering AC power, calculating the phase iO'
angle with the bus, and detecting the phase
sequence of the generator. The phase sequence of GSC CIO 1170 - FMI 02
the generator is the following order: Phase A, Phase
B, and Phase C. SMCS Code: 1409-035
SIN: 5PW1-Up
The possible cause of aCID 1169 FMI 02 is a short
between two or three pllases of the output of the SIN: 6WW1~Up
ATB+ . The phase angle between any two phases is
120". The short will make the phase angle between SIN: 8TW1-Up
any two phases unequalto 120".
SIN: LRW1-Up
The GSC+P treats aCID 1169 FMI 02 as an alarm
SIN: LRX1-Up
fault. The GSC+P will stop the "Speed Adjust 1" and
Close Breaker functions by the GSC+P. The CID SIN: LRY1-Up
1169 FMI 02 will not affect any other synchronization
processes. SIN: 4BZ1-Up
CHECK THE LlNE-TO-LiNE VOLTAGES. SIN: 8AZ1-Up
A. Start the engine. Conditions Which Generate This Code:
B. Record the line to line voltage on the upper The Bus Transformer Box (BTB +) reduces thE
display of the GSC+P. AC line to neutral voltages of phase A and ph,
C from the bus to usable signal levels for the
Expected Result: GSC+P. The GSC+P uses these reduced sign,
for detecting the phase angle with the general
The line-to-line voltages should be equal within The GSC+P also uses these reduced signals I
±5%. The voltages should also be within a detecting the phase sequence of the bus. ThE
reasonable value of the rated voltage of tile genset. GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase A in ord,
measure the amplitude of the voltage on the b
The GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase C in .
to measure the frequency of the voltage on the
285
The possible cause of a CID1170 FMI02 diagnostic C. Use a digital multimeter and measure the voltage
code is a short between the phase A and phase between "B1" and "B2" on the BTB+.
B inputs of the BTB +, causing a phase angle of
approximately 0°. Expected Result:
Test Step 1. CHECK THE PHASE The voltage should be the same as the rated
ANGLE OF THE INPUTS TO THE BUS generator line to line voltage.
TRANSFORMER BOX (BTB +)
Note: If external potential transformers for medium
and high voltage generators are present, the
voltage will be the same as the secondary of the
potential transformer.
Results:
• OK - The voltage is correct. Proceed to Test

Step 4 .
• NOT OK - The voltage is not correct. Proceed

to Test Step 3.
Test Step 3. CHECK THE BTB+ INPUT

CIRCUIT
A. Stop the engine. Turn the engine control switch
(ECS) to "STOP".
B. Disconnect the wires labelled "B 1" and "B2" from

the BTB + terminals.
900603288
Illustration 168
C. Measure the resistance between "B 1" and "B2"
Bus transformer box on the BTB+.
A. Stop the engine. Turn the engine control switch Expected Result:
(ECS) to "STOP".
The resistance should be 2140 ohms ±400 ohms.
B. Remove the two fuses from the BTB +.
Results:
C. Measure the resistance of the fuses with a digital
multimeter. • OK - The resistance is correct. There is a failure
in the wiring between the BTB+ and the generator.
Expected Result:
Repair: Use the System Schematic for the BTB+
The resistance should be less than 1.0 ohms. and the AC schematic in order to troubleshoot the
wiring and find the exact cause of the diagnostic
Results: code. See Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics
And Wiring Diagrams" .
• OK - The resistance is less than 1.0 ohms. The
fuses have not failed. Install the fuses. Proceed STOP.
to Test Step 2.
• NOT OK - The resistance is not correct. BTB+
• NOT OK - The fuses are blown. Replace the has failed.
fuses. Proceed to Test Step 2.
Repair: The BTB+ has failed. Replace the BTB+.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic
THE BTB+ INPUT Control (Bus Transformer Box) - Replace".
A. Start the engine and run the engine at rated STOP.

speed.
Test Step 4. CHECK VOLTAGE ON GSC+P
B. The Bus must be live. Close the breaker of the INPUT
generator or energize the Bus from another
source. A. Stop the engine.
286
B. Install cable probes on the GSC+P 40 pin Repair: Use the System Schematic for the B'
connector contacts 17 and 18. and the AC schematic in order to troublesho(
wiring and find the exact cause of the diagn
C. Start the engine. The engine is running at rated code. Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics A
speed. Wiring Diagrams".
D. Measure the voltage between GSC+P connector STOP.

contact 17 and 18
• NOT OK - The voltage is not correct. Procel
Expected Result: to 6
The voltage should be equal to the voltage Test Step 6. CHECK THE BTB+ OUTP
measured in Test Step 2 divided by 15 ± 2% (14.7 CIRCUIT
to 15.3).
A. Stop the engine
Results:
B. Disconnect three-terminal connector J1 on I
• OK - The voltage is correct. CID 1170 FMI 2 is BTB+
still active. The GSC+ may have failed
C. Measure the resistance from contact A to co
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. Exit this B of J1.
procedure and perform this entire procedure
again. If the result is still the same, replace Expected Result:
the GSC+. See Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace". The resistance should be 14.6 ohms ± 3.0 ohrr
STOP. Results:
• NOT OK - The voltage is not correct. Proceed • OK - The resistance is correct. There may t
to 5 an intermittent problem.
Test Step 5. CHECK VOLTAGE ON BTB+ Repair: The system may need to be reset. SI
OUTPUT down the system by turning the engine cont,
switch (ECS) to the OFF/RESET position. ThE
A. Stop the engine. restart the genset and verify that the genset
operating properly. Watch the genset for anI
B. Install cable probes on connector contacts A and reoccurrence of the problem.
B of three-terminal connector J1 on the BTB+.
STOP.
C. Start and run the engine at rated speed.
• NOT OK - The resistance is not correct. ThE
D. Measure the voltage between connector contacts BTB+ is faulty.
A and B of J1.
Repair: The BTB+ has failed. Replace the B1
Expected Result: See Testing and Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic
Control (Bus Transformer Box) - Replace"
The voltage should be equal to the voltage
measured in Test Step 2 divided by 15 ± 2% (14.7 STOP.
to 15.3).
Results:
• OK - The voltage is correct. There is a wiring

failure between the GSC+P and the BTB+.
287
i01375349 A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to "STOP".

GSC CID 1170 - FMI 04 B. Locate the input wires of the BTB +.
SMCS Code: 1409-035 C. Start the engine and run the engine at rated
speed.
SIN: 5PW1-Up
SIN: 6WW1-Up D. Close the breaker in order to energize the bus.
SIN: 8TW1-Up E. Measure the voltage from phase A to the neutral

lead and measure the voltage from phase C to
SIN: LRW1-Up neutral lead. Make note of the voltages.
SIN: LRX l-Up
F. Measure the voltage from Phase A to Phase B.
SIN: LRY1-Up
G. Compare the voltages measured in the previous
SIN: 4BZ1-Up two steps.
SIN: 8AZ l-Up Expected Result:
Conditions Which Generate This Code: The voltage measured from Phase A and Phase C to
the neutral lead should be greater than 55% to 60%
The Bus Transformer Box (BTB +) reduces the of the voltage measured from Phase A to Phase B.
AC line to neutral voltages of phase A and phase
C from the bus to usable signal levels for the Results:
GSC+P. The GSC+P uses these reduced signals
for detecting the phase sequence of the bus. The • OK - The voltage measured from Phase A and
GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase A in order to Phase C to the neutral lead is greater than 55%
measure the amplitude of the voltage on the bus. to 60% of the voltage measured from Phase A to
The GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase C in order Phase B. Proceed to Test Step 2.
to measure the frequency of the voltage on the bus.
• NOT OK - The voltage measured from Phase A
The possible cause of a CID1170 FMI04 diagnostic and Phase C to the neutral lead is NOT greater
code is an opennelJtral connection to the input of than 5'5% to 60% of the voltage measured from
the BTB +, causing a phase angle of approximately Phase A to Phase B.
180°.
Repair: The neutral wire is open. Use the System
Test Step 1. CHECK THE VOLTAGE Schematic for the BTB + and the AC schematic
OF THE INPUTS TO THE BUS in Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring
TRANSFORMER BOX (BTB +) Diagrams" section to troubleshoot the wiring and
find the exact cause of the diagnostic code.
STOP.
Test Step 2. CHECK VOLTAGE ON GSC+P

INPUT.
(ECS) to "STOP".
B. Install cable probes on the GSC+P 40 pin

connector contacts 17 and 18.
C. Start the engine and run the engine at rated

speed.
D. Close the breaker in order to energize the bus.
E. On the GSC+P, measure the voltage from

connector contact 17 to battery negative, and
from connector contact 18 to battery negative.
900603288 Make note of the voltages.
Illustration 169
Bus transformer box
288
F. Measure the voltage between GSC+P connector

contact 17 and GSC+P connector contact 18.
Make note of the voltages. GSC CID 1170 - FMI 08
G. Compare the voltages measured in the previous SMCS Code: 1409-035
two steps.
SIN: 5PW1-Up
Expected Result: SIN: 6WW1-Up
The voltage measured from contact 17 and 18 to SIN: 8TW1-Up

battery negative should be greater than 55% to
60% of the voltage measured between contact 17 SIN: LRW1-Up
and contact 18. SIN: LRX1-Up
Results: SIN: LRY1-Up
• OK - The voltage measured from contact 17 and SIN: 4BZ1-Up

18 to battery negative is greater than 55% to 60%
SIN: 8AZ1-Up
of the voltage measured between contact 17 and
contact 18. The GSC+ may have failed.
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure and The Bus Transformer Box (BTB +) reduces t
perform this entire procedure again. If the cause AC line to neutral voltages of phase A and r
C from the bus to usable signal levels for th
of the problem is the same, replace the GSC+.
See Testing and Adjusting, "EMPC Electronic GSC+P. The GSC+P uses these reduced sig
Control (Generator Set) - Replace". for deteCling the phase angle with the gener
The GSC+P also uses these reduced signal~
STOP. detecting the phase sequence of the bus. T
GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase A in or
• NOT OK - The voltage measured from contact 17 measure the amplitude of the voltage on the
and 18 to battery negative is NOT greater than The GSC+P will utilize the signal of phase C il
to measure the frequency of the voltage on tt
55% to 60% of the voltage measured between
contact 17 and contact 18.' . .
. ..
The possible cause of aCID 1170 FMI 08 dia<
Repair: The AC ground wire is open between the code is an open phase C connection to the 1
BTB+ and the GSC+P, or the jumper on BTB+ of the BTB +.
terminals B21 and B22 is broken or damaged.
Repair or replace as needed. Use the System Test Step 1. CHECK THE BTB+ FUSI
SchematiC for the BTB + and the AC schematic
in to troubleshoot the wiring and find the exact A. Stop the engine by turning the engine cor
cause .of the diagnostic code. See Testing And switch (ECS) to STOP.
AdJusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
If none of these repairs corrects the problem, 8. Remove the two fuses from the BTB+
replace the BTB +. See Testing and Adjusting,
"EMPC Electronic Control (Bus Transformer Box) - C. Measure the resistance of the fuses with a
Replace". multimeter.
The resistance should be less than 1.0 ohms.
Results:
• OK - The resistance is less than 1.0 ohms.

fuses have not failed. Install the fuses. Proe
to Test Step 2
• NOT OK - The fuses are blown.

289
Repair: Replace the fuses. Test Step 3. CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON

THE OUTPUT OF THE BTB+.
STOP.
Test Step 2. CHECK THE VOLTAGE (ECS) to "STOP".
OF THE INPUTS TO THE BUS
TRANSFORMER BOX (BTB +) B. Install cable probes on connector contacts A and
B of three-terminal connector J 1 on the BTB+.

speed.
D. Close the breaker in order to engergize the bus.
E. Measure the voltage between connector contacts

A and B of J1.
Expected Result:
The voltage should be equal to the voltage

measured in Test Step 2 divided by 15 ± 2% (14.7
to 15.3).
Results:
• OK - The voltage is correct. Proceed to Test

Step 4 .
900603288 • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT correct. The BTB+

Illustration 170
has failed.
Bus transformer box
Repair: The BTB + has failed. Replace the BTB
4. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to "STOP". +. See Testing and Adjusting, "EMPC Electronic
Control (Bus Transformer Box) - Replace".
B. Locate the input wires of the BTB +.
STOP.
speed. Test Step 4. CHECK THE INPUT WIRES
OF THE GSC+P FROM THE BTB +.
D. Close the breaker in order to energize the bus.
E. Measure the voltage from phase A to phase C. (ECS) to "STOP".
Expected Result: B. Locate the input wires on contact 17, and contact
18 of the GSC+P from the BTB +. Install cable
The voltage should be the normal operating voltage. probes on these contacts.
Results: C. Start the engine and run the engine at rated
speed .
• OK - The voltage is the normal operating voltage.
Proceed to Test Step 3. D. Close the breaker in order to energize the bus .
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT the normal E. Measure the voltage between GSC+P connector
operating voltage. contact 17 and 18.
Repair: There is no voltage on phase C. Use the Expected Result:
System Schematic for the BTB + and the AC
schematic in Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics The voltage should be equal to the voltage
And Wiring Diagrams" section to troubleshoot the measured in Test Step 2 divided by 15 ± 2% (14.7
wiring and find the exact cause of the diagnostic. to 15.3).
STOP.
290
Results:
• OK - The voltage is correct. CID 1170 FMI 2 is

still active.

STOP.
• NOT OK - The voltage is not correct. The wiring

harness has failed between the BTB + and the
generator.
Repair: The wiring harness has failed between

the BTB + and the generator. Repair the wiring
harhess or replace the wiring harness. Use
the System Schematic for the BTB + and the
AC schematic in the Testing And Adjusting,
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams" section.
STOP.
291
Diagnostic System
Procedures
i01367572
AL Fault Code
SMCS Code: 4490-035
Table 26
AL Fault Code Troubleshooting
• AL Fault Code Description Troubleshooting
AL1 High Water Temperature Alarm See the Troubleshooting, "Troubleshooting
Coolant temperature increases to within 6°C (11'F) Dedicated Shutdown Indicators".
of setpoint P015.
AL2 Low Engine Coolant Temperature Alarm See the Troubleshooting, "Troubleshooting
Coolant temperature decreases to setpoint P016. Dedicated Shutdown Indicators".
AL3 Low Engine Oil Pressure Alarm See the Troubleshooting, "Troubleshooting
Oil pressure drops to within 34 kPa (5 psi) of the Dedicated Shutdown Indicators".
P013 or P014 setpoint.
AL4 Fault Detected By Engine ECM Refer to the appropriate engine troubleshooting
The engine ECM detects an alarm fault or a service manual.
shutdown fault.
AL5 Low Engine Coolant Level Fault Check level of engine coolant. The level of engine
Coolant level drops below the probe of the coolant coolant must be above the probe of the sensor.
loss sensor. Check for CID 111 faults. Perform the electrical
connector inspection test. Refer to the Testing and
Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
AL6 High Engine Oil Temp Fault Check level of engine coolant. The level of engine
Oil temperature increases to within 6'C (11'F) of coolant must be above the probe of sensor. Check
setpoint P026. fan belt, etc. Check P026 setpoint.
AL7 Generator Overvoltage Fault Refer to the service manual for the voltage regulator
Line to line voltages rises above the P102 or P105 that is being used. Check P101 through P106
setpoints. setpoints.
AL8 Generator Undervoltage Fault Refer to the service manual for the voltage regulator
Line to line voltage drops below the P108 or the that is being used. Check P107 through P112
P111 setpoints. setpoints. Refer to the engine service manual for
the cause of low engine speed. If engine speed is
reduced and the engine control switch (ECS) is
NOT in STOp, the GSC+ will issue this fault.
AL9 Generator Overfrequency Fault See the Troubleshooting, "Indicator For Engine
Frequency rises above the P114 or P117 setpoints. Overspeed". Check setpoints P113 through P118.
AL10 Generator Underfrequency Fault Refer to the engine service manual for a cause of
Frequency drops below the P120 or P123 low engine speed. If engine speed is reduced and
setpoints. the ECS is NOT in STOp, the GSC+ will issue this
fault. Check setpoints P119 through P124.
AL 11 Generator Reverse Power Fault Refer to the engine service manual for a cause of
Reverse power rises above the P 126 setpoint. lost engine power. Check setpoints P125 through
P127.
AL12 Generator Phase Overcurrent Fault Check for a cause of the overcurrent.
Phase current rises above the P129 or P134 Check setpoint P029 and setpoints P128 through
setpoints. P135.
-
AL13 Generator Total Overcurrent Fault Check for a cause of the overcurrent. Check setpoint
Total current rises above the P131 or P136 P029 and setpoints P128 through P137.
setpoints.
-~~-:--"C""
(continued)
292
(Table 26 eontd)
AL Fault Code Troubleshooting
~-
AL Fault Code Description Troubleshooting

AL14 Phase A No Voltage Input Fault Check for an open circuit on the wire that is
Phase A voltage not being received at GSC+ input. connected to the GSC+ connector contact 11
Check for a short on the wire that is connectl
the GSC+ connector contact 10. See the Tes
And Adjusting, "Schematics and Wiring Diagr
AL15 GSC+ Configuration Error Check setpoints P009 and P033. Setpoint P(
Frequency of generator output voltage does not represents the number of ring gear teeth. Set
match engine speed. P033 represents the number of generator po
Correct the setpoint value, if necessary.
Additional AL Fault Codes (for GSC+P)
AL16 Incorrect Phase Sequence Check for the cause of the phase sequence
The generator and the bus have a phase mismatch. mismatch. Check wiring to the bus transform,
(STS +) and the AC transformer box (ATS +).
AL17 Improper generator or bus voltage 1. The generator voltage and the bus voltagE
The generator voltage or the bus voltage are either must be above 10% of the nameplate voltagE
too low or the voltages do not match. P028 when setpoint P020 is set to 700. Gene
voltage and bus voltage must be above 50% '
nameplate voltage in P028 when setpoint PO:
set to any other value than 700.
2. Check Setpoints P303 and P304 in order I
determine whether the generator voltage and
bus voltage match within the tolerance that i,
specified.
AL18 Synchronizer Time-Out Check for cause of synchronization time-out.
The GSC+P is unable to complete automatic Ensure that the engine is responding properly
synchronization or dead bus paralleling within the GSC+P Speed Adjust 1 Output signal. Check
time allowed in P314. wiring errors. Check setpoints P313 and P31'
proper values. Increase the values, if necessa
AL fault codes depend on certain setpoints.

more information on setpoints, see the Syste,
Operation, "Service Mode". AL fault codes ar
I I I diagnosed by the GSC+ . These codes are r
nl stored in the fault log. Many of the AL fault CI
are programmable as a fault alarm or as a fE
shutdown. The AL fault codes are accompani
900442245 either the fault alarm indicator or the fault shu
Illustration 171
indicator on the GSC+ in order to show the s.
Upper Display With AL Fault Code AL3 Showing of the fault.
AL Fault Codes are shown as "AL 1" througll "AL 15"
on the upper display. The fault codes include
specific engine fault conditions. An example of a
specific engine fault condition is the low engine oil SP Fault Code
pressure alarm. An example of a protective relaying
fUllction is the underfrequency fault. SMCS Code: 4490-035
I-I
I 1-
Illustration 172 gOi

Upper Display With SP Fault Code SPI Showing
293
Table 27
Spare Fault Codes
GENERATOR SET
CONTROL (GSC) Spare GSC+ Terminal Related
Fault Code Connector Strip Setpoints(l)
-~-f
GSC-2J0- _____--.::SPc.:I-o Contact
SPARE FAULT1~}-
GSC-24 r< SP2 "..... SP1 23 SP1 SP01, SP02,
SPARE FAULT 2 >-'0'.)---1------=-0
Spare Fault 1 SP03
GSC-25 ~ SP3
SPARE FAULT .3 (;.5--+-----='-0
SP2 24 SP2 SP04, SP05,
GSC-29 r< SP4
SPARE F AUl T 4 ('.)---1------"'--'-0 Spare Fault 2 SP06
SP3 25 SP3 SPO?, SPOB,
Spare Fault 3 SP09
SP4 29 SP4 SP10, SP11,
Illustration 173 g00578243 Spare Fault 4 SP12
System Schematic For Spare Fault Inputs (1) See Systems Operation, "Spare Input/Output Programming
OP6".
A spare fault informs the operator of an undesirable
condition (fault) that exists. The spare inputs SP fault codes are associated with the spare inputs.
are programmed into the GSC+ to meet the The SP fault code that is shown on the upper
requirements of the customer or application. An display identifies the spare input that caused the
active spare input causes an alarm fault or a alarm fault or the shutdown fault. The spare inputs
shutdown fault. For programming of the spare are accessed on the terminal strip within the control
inputs, see System Operation, "Spare Input/Output panel on an inside wall.
Programming OP6". The programmer (customer,
operator or service personnel) should make a note When an SP fault code is showing on the upper
of the actual conditions that cause an SP fault code display, check the notes which were made by the
to be shown on the upper display. The GSC+ does service personnel in order to determine the cause.
not diagnose the spare inputs. Spare faults are not
recorded in the fault log. The spare fault inputs can be used with the factory
installed options and the customer installed options.
The, GSC+ treats an active input state as a fault. The following items are the factory options for the
The active state can be programmed on the GSC+ spare fault input: ground fault, low fuel level, high
as a high voltage level or a low voltage level. The fuel level, high generator winding temperature, and
factory default is a low voltage level. A high level high generator bearing temperature. Each of these
is within the range of +5 DCV to + battery. If the options will include a dedicated indicator and a
input remains floating, the GSC+ pulls up the input label on the custom alarm module.
voltage to 10.5 DCV. In this case, the input is
treated as high level. An example of a floating input Troubleshooting Procedure
would be an open switch. A low level on the input is
"8-" (ground). In order to troubleshoot spare faults, use the
following general procedure.
When a spare fault occurs, the GSC+ determines
the type of fault. There are two types of faults: 1. Check for obvious causes which are related to
alarm and shutdown. Then, the GSC+ FLASHES the device that is responsible for the spare fault.
the corresponding fault alarm indicator or fault
shutdown indicator. The SP fault code is immediately 2. Verify that the programming of the spare fault
shown on the upper display for a shutdown type of (alarm or shutdown) is appropriate for the
fault. For an alarm type of fault, the alarm codes key application.
is pressed firs!. Then, the SP fault code is shown on
the upper display. After a spare fault is corrected or 3. Check the function of the responsible device.
a spare fault is not present, the SP fault code is no Reset the fault by turning the engine control
longer shown on the upper display. switch (ECS) to the OFF/RESET position. Verify
that the fault is still present.
4. Disconnect the responsible device from the

spare fault input and verify if the fault still exists.
5. Check the wiring to the corresponding spare

fault input for an unwanted Sllor!. The short can
be to the battery negative ("8-"). The short can
be to the battery positive terminal ("8+").
294
101401146 (Table 28 eonld)
Alternator Specifications
Charging System
Peak Mil'1
SMCS Code: 1406-035 Current Pec:
Rating CUI
System Operation Description: (Amps) (An
109-2362, 9W-3043 55
Table 28
, OR-3652(D+), 112-8032
Alternator Specifications
3E-7772(IG), OR-9437(IG), 60
Peak Minimum 105-3132(IG), 4N-3986,
Current Peak OR-5203
Rating Current
(Amps) (Amps) 155-7434, 132-2156(1), 70
107-7977(1),OR-8279(1)
12 Volt Alternators
169-4319, 167-7812 75 6
8C-5535 32 28 ,
107-7976,114-2401,OR-8997, 75
7N-4784, OR-5201 40 36 3E-7577, OR-3615
6T-1396, 7T-2096, 8C-5908, 51 46 165-5140 100 ,
OR-3654 ,
9X-7803, OR-3749 100
9W-2648, 9W-2949, 8T-9700, 55 49
105-2811(IG),OR-4327(IG), Parts-Service Only Discontinued 12 Volt Altern,
105-2812(IG), OR-9273(IG), 6T-1193 18
34-3268,68-4139,3E-7295(D+),
7T-2876(D+), 100-8223 7N-6118, 6N-5460, 4N-4540 40 :
7G-7889 60 54 6T-1195 42 :
8C-5510(1),OR5200 61 55 7X-1340 45 ,
8N-2268 75 68 9G-6079, 6T-1194 63 !
3E-7892,OR-3616 85 77 Parts-Service Only Discontinued 24 Volt Altern.
105-2813(IG), OR-9274(1G), 90 81 9G-6081,6T-1196 40 :
105-2814(IG),OR-4328(IG),
149-2064(REG), D+ - Diode trio output. Alternator requires external
OR-9410(REG), 9X-0341 (D+) excitation.
8C-6163, OR-1699, 107-2519 105 95 REG - Regulator Terminal. Alternator requires exle
excitation.
167-7816 110 99
I - Ignition Terminal. Allernator can be externally ex
9X-6796, 9X-9096, 121-4134, 115 104 Ihrough this terminal.
121-4136, OR-3527
IG - Ignition Terminal. System voltage must be sup I
3E-8827, 121-4135, 117-1379(1) 130 117 10 this terminal to turn on the allernator. Some of th
alternators use the IG terminal as a sense terminal
152-8746 135 122
125-9597, OR-8332 145 131
Often when problems with the charging syster
24 Volt Alternators being investigated, the alternator is not the prc
If a low battery condition is present test the bal
2P-1204,3Y-8200 19 17 first. See Special Instruction, SEHS7633, "Batt
2Y-8310 21 19 Test Procedure" for more information. If the en
cranks slowly, then test the starting system. S
6T-1395, 7T-2095, OR-3653 33 30 Service Magazine, SEPD0020, "Testing The St
6N-9294, OR-5217, OR-3482 35 32 On The Engine" for more information. If a wan
indicator for the charging system is ON, see
5N-5692, OR-2698 45 41 Service Magazine, SEBD1751, "Difference Bet
5S-9088, 100-5047, 112-5041, 50 45 Alternator Indicator In Electronic Monitoring Sy
3E-7578, OR-5206, OR-3667, (EMS) And Low Voltage Indicator In Operatin[
OR-3668 Monitoring System (OMS)".
(continued)
295
Note: Severely discharged batteries can cause Test Step 3. CHECK THE RESISTANCE IN
low system Voltage. This can occur even while the THE EXCITATION CIRCUIT (CONTINUED).
engine is running above idle, and the alternator is
working properly. Proper low engine idle is also Note: This step is only for alternators with external
important. excitation when the terminal for excitation is
labelled: "IG".
Test Step 1. DETERMINE THE
ALTERNATOR EXCITATION METHOD. A. Turn the key start switch to the ON position.
A. Check the rear of your alternator in order to B. Verify voltage at the excitation terminal. Connect
determine the method of excitation. See table 1 the red lead from a multimeter to the excitation
in order to verify the proper alternator excitation. terminal. Connect the black test lead to a ground
source (alternator case ground).
I!'xpected Result:
Note: For G38, K3A, and L3A alternators, Insert a
Test method 1. These alternators have a "1 ", "REG", 7X -171 0 Multimeter Probe Group into the rear of
or "0+" terminal. Test method 2. These alternators the middle wire in the connector. See figure 174
are self-excited. Test method 3. These alternators below. Insert the probes spoon lead between the
have a "IG" terminal. seal and the wire that surrounds the wire and the
outer shell of the connector. Do not insert the probe
Results: . between the wire insulation and the black seal. This
terminal (IG) is the terminal for excitation.
• Method 1 - The alternator has a "1 ", "REG", or
"0+" terminal. Proceed to test step 2.
• Method 2 - The alternator is self-excited. Proceed

to test step 4.
• Method 3 - The alternator has an "IG" terminal.

Test Step 2. CHECK THE RESISTANCE IN

THE EXCITATION CIRCUIT.
A, Turn the key start switch to the ON position.
B. Verify voltage at the excitation terminal. Connect

the red lead from a multimeter to the excitation
terminal. Connect the black lead to a ground
source (alternator case ground).
C. Read the voltage that is shown on the multimeter.
Expected Result: Illustration 174 900496660
Special wire probe technique for G3B, K3A, L3A alternators.

The voltage reads at least .2 volts.
Results: C. Read the voltage that is shown on the multimeter.
• YES - The voltage reads .2 volts or more. The Expected Result:

excitation circuit is correct. Proceed to test step 4.
The voltage measurement is within .5 volts of the
• NO - The voltage is less than .2 volts. There is a battery voltage .
problem in the wiring harness to the alternator or
there is a poor electrical connection. Correct the Results:
problem and operate the generator set. Watch for
a recurrence of the problem. STOP. • YES - The voltage reads battery Voltage. The
excitation circuit is correct. 4.
296
• NO - The voltage tllat is measured is more than • VOLTGE TOO HIGH - The voltage measur
a .5 volt less than the battery Voltage. There is a is greater than the voltage that was obse"
problem in the wiring harness to the alternator or in the previous test step "Check The SyStE
there is a poor electrical connection. Correct the Voltage". The voltage is also greater than
problem and operate the generator set. Watch for the maximum voltage that is listed in the
a recurrence of the problem. STOP. specifications for the alternator. The alterm
over charging. Proceed to test step 19.
Test Step 4. CHECK THE SYSTEM
VOLTAGE. • VOLTAGE LOWER - The voltage is not hi,
than the voltage that was observed in the pi
A. Before you start the generator set, connect a test step. Proceed to test step 7.
voltmeter between the "B+" terminal and the
case of the alternator. Turn OFF all electrical Test Step 6. TEST THE ALTERNATO
loads. OUTPUT.
B. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start Note: For the proper output current, refer to ta
the engine. Read the voltage on the voltmeter.
Make a note of the voltage that was measured. A. Ensure that the batteries are NOT fully cha
Expected Result: Note: A fully charged baltery may have open
voltage above 12.5 volts on 12 volt systems ..
This voltage should be approximately system systems may be as high as 25 volts.
voltage.
B. If the batteries are fully charged, then crar
Results: engine for 30 seconds. This action reduce
battery voltage. Operate the lights for 10 IT
• YES - The voltage is approximately system while the engine is off as an alternative.
voltage. Proceed to test step 5.
c. Connect the 9U - 5795 Current Probe or 8T
• NO - The voltage is less than system voltage. Ammeter to a DMM (digital multimeter). Tt
Proceed to test step 7. multimeter must have a peak hold feature. '
the probe around the alternator output wirE
Test Step 5. CHECK THE OPERATION OF Before .you clamp the probe around the w
THE ALTERNATOR. . ensure that the probe is "zeroed".
A. The voltmeter remains connected between the D, Set Ihe digital multimeter to "peak hold" or
"B+" terminal and the case of Ihe alternator. mode" on the "mV" scale.
B. Start the generalor set. Set the throttle to at least E. Turn on all electrical accessories: lights, a
75 percent. Read the voltage on the voltmeter. conditioning, and radio.
Make a note of the voltage that was measured.
F. Start the generator set, and immediately SE
Expected Result: throttle to at least 75%. The peak current \
appear on the voltmeter in "peak hold" or '
The voltage measurement is greater than the mode.
voltage that was recorded in the previous test step
"Check The System Voltage". Expected Result:
Results: The current reading should be at least 90% a

specified peak output.
• VOLTAGE HIGHER - The vollage measurement is
greater than the voltage that was observed in the
previous test slep "Check The System Voltage".
Results:
I
The voltage is also less Ulan the maximum
voltage that is listed in the specifications for the
alternator. The alternator is partially charging the
battery. Proceed to test step 6.
• YES - The current is at least 90% of the SPE
peak output. Proceed to test step 13.
• NO - The current is less tllan 90% of the

I
specified peak output. Proceed to tesl step
297
Test Step 7. CHECK THE DRIVE SYSTEM Expected Result:

OF THE ALTERNATOR.
The voltage at the battery Sllould be less than the
A. Check the condition of the alternator drive belt. voltage at the alternator. The difference in voltages
Clean the pulley and replace the drive belt if the should not be more than 1 volt on 12 volt systems.
drive belt is oily. Dry the drive belt if the belt is The difference should not be more than 2 volts on
wet. Replace the drive belt. if the belt is worn. 24 volt systems.
B. Check the tension of the alternator drive belt. Results:

Adjust the drive belt to the correct tension.
• YES - The voltage at the battery is less than the
C. Check the nut on the alternator pulley. Tighten voltage at the alternator. Also, the difference in
the nut if the nut is loose. voltages is less than 1 volt for 12 volt systems
and the difference is less than 2 volts for 24
Expected Result: volt systems. The wiring that is related to the
alternator is correct at this time.
The drive system of the alternator is functioning
correctly. No corrections to the drive system were Repair: There is an internal problem with the
necessary. alternator. Repair or replace the alternator.
Results: STOP.
• YES - The drive system of the alternator is • NO - The voltage at the battery is less than the
functioning correct/yo No corrections were voltage at the alternator. However, the difference
necessary. Proceed to test step 8. in voltages is greater than 1 volt for 12 volt
systems and the difference is greater than 2 volts
• NO - The drive system of the alternator was not for 24 volt systems. Proceed to test step 9 .
functioning correctly. Corrections were necessary.
Test Step 9. TEST THE POSITIVE SIDE
Repair: Ensure that the problems have been OF THE CHARGING CIRCUIT.
corrected. Exit this procedure and retest the
alternator charging system. A. Measure the voltage between the frame ground
and the "8+" alternatOF terminal. Make a note of
STOP. the voltage that was measured. Perform the next
measurement immediately.
Test Step 8. TEST THE CHARGING
CIRCUIT. B. Measure the voltage between the frame ground
and the + battery post. Make a note of the
A. Verify that the nut on the "8+" alternator terminal voltage that was measured.
is tight. Also, verify that the wire has a good
connection to the "8+" terminal. Expected Result:
B. Start the engine and set the throttle to at least 75 The voltage difference does not exceed 1 volt on
percent. Turn ON all electrical accessories for 24 volt systems or 0.5 volts on 12 volt systems.
the remainder of this test step. Allow the engine
to run for at least 3 minutes before continuing. Results:
C. Measure the voltage between the "8+" alternator • YES - The voltage difference does not exceed
terminal and the alternator case ground. Make a the tolerance. The positive circuit is good.
note of tile measured Voltage. Perform the next Proceed to test step 10.
measurement immediately.
• NO - The voltage difference exceeds the
D. Measure the voltage across the battery. Put the tolerance.
red lead on the battery posilive terminal, and put
the black lead on the battery negative terminal. Repair: There is high resistance in the positive
Make a note of the voltage that was measured. side of the charging circuit that is caused by one
of the following conditions:
• An electrical connection Ilas loosened.
• An electrical connection has corroded.
• The main relay has failed.

298
• A circuit breaker has failed. Results:
Repair the problem or replace any component • YES - The voltage does not change Proce
that has failed. Exit this procedure and retest the test step 12.
alternator charging system.
• NO - The voltage rises and the alternator b
STOP. charging.
Test Step 10. TEST THE NEGATIVE SIDE Repair: The wire to the "R" terminal is short
OF THE CHARGING CIRCUIT. Repair the wiring or replace the wiring. Exit
procedure and retest the alternator chargin,
A. Check the voltage between the negative battery system.
post and the alternator case ground.
STOP.
Expected Result:
Test Step 12. RESTORE THE RES IOU
The voltage does not exceed 1 volt on 24 volt MAGNETISM OF THE ROTOR.
systems or 0.5 volts on 12 volt systems.
A. Connect one end of a jumper wire to the "E
Results: terminal (D+ terminal for the K 1, Nl, and ~
Series alternators) of the alternator.
• YES - Tile voltage difference does not exceed
the tolerance. The negative circuit is good. B. Connect the other end of the Jumper wire te
Proceed to test step 11. "R" terminal of the alternator for two secane
• NO - The voltage difference exceeds the Expected Result:

tolerance.
The voltage output rises on the "8+" terminal.
Repair: There is high resistance in the negative residual magnetism of the rotor has been resto
side of the charging circuit that is caused by one
of the following conditions: Results:
• An electrical connection has loosened. • YES -. The voltage output rises., The residui
magnetism of the rotor has been restored. T
• The alternator ground has loosened. alternator is now charging.
• The engine ground has opened. Repair: Exit this procedure and retest the
Repair the problem or replace any component
that has failed. Exit this procedure and retest the STOP.
• NO - The voltage output does not rise.
STOP.
Repair: There is an internal problem with thE
Test Step 11. TEST THE CIRCUIT OF THE alternator. Repair or replace the alternator.
"R" TERMINAL.
STOP.
A. Start the engine and set the throttle to at least
75%. Test Step 13. TEST FOR UNDESIRABI
CURRENT FLOW IN THE ALTERNATO
B. Connect a voltmeter between the "8+" terminal CHARGING SYSTEM.
and the alternator case ground.
A. Turn olf all of the accessories. Turn the keys,
I
C. Disconnect the wire from the "R" terminal. Select to the OFF position.
"YES" if the "R" terminal is not used on the
generator set.
Expected Result:
The voltage does not change.

299
B. Clamp a 9U - 5795 Current Probe or aT - 0900 Results:

Ammeter around the main ground cable. Clamp
Ihe 1001 with the positive side away from the • YES - The current is below 0.050 amperes. The
battery. Reset the probe (zero) before you clamp charging system is functioning properly at this
the probe around the wire. Read the current on time. The failure is possibly an intermittent draw
the meter. Make a note of the current that was in the system. The batteries may have failed.
measured. Ensure that NO accessories were ON during the
test. Exit this procedure and retest the alternator
Expected Result: charging system. STOP.
The current is below 2 amperes. The "YES" selection • NO - The current is above 0.050 amperes. There
is dependent on the presence of a main disconnect is a draw in the system. Proceed to test step 16.
switch on the generator set that is being tested.
Test Step 15. MEASURE THE CURRENT
Results: OF THE SYSTEM BY REMOVING THE
NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE.
• YES - WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH - The
current is below 2 amperes. For generator sets A. Disconnect the ground cable from the negative
with a main disconnect switch, proceed to test battery post. There may be more than one
step 14. battery that is connected to ground. Disconnect
all of the batteries that are connected to ground.
• YES - WITHOUT DISCONNECT SWITCH - The Do not disconnect cables that are between
current is below 2 amperes. For generator sets batteries that are connected in series.
without a main disconnect switch, proceed to
test step 15. B. Connect an ammeter between the disconnected
battery ground cable and one of the negative
• NO - The current is above 2 amperes. There battery terminals. Connect the red positive lead
is a current draw in the system. Proceed to test of the ammeter to the cable. The negative lead
step 16. should be connected to tile battery terminal. If
a multimeter is being utilized for this test, use
Test Step 14. MEASURE THE CURRENT the 10 ampere connections in order to avoid
OF THE SYSTEM BY USING THE MAIN damage.
DISCONNECT SWITCH.
Note: The standard acceptable current draw is 50
A. Turn the disconnect switch to the ON position. milliamperes. A current draw above 50 milliamperes
usually indicates a problem. Contact a Caterpillar
B. Connect an ammeter across the disconnect dealer for more information.
switch terminals. Connect the red lead to the
terminal on the frame side. Connect the black Expected Result:
lead to the terminal on the battery side. If a
multimeter is being utilized for this test, use the The current is below .050 amperes (50 milliamperes).
lOA connections in order to avoid damage.
Results:
C. Turn the disconnect switch to the OFF position
and read the current. Make a note of the • YES - The current is below 0.050 amperes. The
measured current. charging system is currently good. The problem
is a possible intermittent current draw in the
Note: The standard acceptable current draw is 50 system. The batteries may have failed. Check that
milliamperes. A current draw above 50 milliamperes NO accessories were ON during the test. STOP.
usually indicates a problem. Contact a Caterpillar
dealer for more information. • NO - The current is above 0.050 amperes. There
is excessive current flow in the system. Proceed
Expected Result: to test step 16.
The current is below 0.050 amperes (50 Test Step 16. TEST THE CURRENT OF
milliamperes). THE ALTERNATOR OUTPUT BELOW 2
AMPERES.
A. Turn tile keyswitch to the OFF position.
300
B. Connect the 9U· 5795 Current Probe or 8T - 0900 Test Step 18. IDENTIFY THE SOURC
Ammeter to a DMM (digital multimeter). Clamp EXCESSIVE CURRENT DRAW.
the probe around the "B+" wire of the alternator.
Belore you clamp the probe around the wire, A. Make sure that every electrical componen'
ensure that the probe is "zeroed". turned OFF. Make sure that the keyswitch
turned OFF. Make sure that the dome light
C. Read the current on the meter. Make a note of OFF.
the current that was measured.
B. Clamp a 9U-5795 Current Probe or 8T -0\
Expected Result: Ammeter around the main ground cable. C
the tool with the positive side away from II
The current is under 2 amperes. battery. Reset the probe (zero) before clarr
the probe around the wire. Use the curren
Results: probe if the draw is above approximately
amperes. Use the Ammeter if the draw is t
• YES - The current is under 2 amperes. Proceed approximately 2 amperes.
to test step 17.
C. Remove the fuses or open the circuit breal
• NO - The current is over 2 amperes. one at a time. Check the current after eac
fuse has been removed or each circuit bre
Repair: There is an internal problem with the has been opened. After observing the curr
alternator. Repair or Replace the alternator. reinstall the fuse or close the circuit break,
Start with the main circuits first, and proce'
STOP. smaller circuits.
Test Step 17. TEST THE OUTPUT D. Check if any components on the circuit are
CURRENT OF THE ALTERNATOR BELOW
0.015 AMPERES. E. If everything is OFF. then disconnect electr
components on the circuit one at a time.
A. Disconnect the wire from the "B+" terminal of Monitor the current after each component
the alternator. Set the multimeter on the 10 amp disconnected.
scale. Connect the red lead of the multimeter
to the wire that was disconnected. Connect the F. All of the cqmponents in the circuit should
black lead of the multimeter to the "B+" terminal disconnected. If the problem still exists, th'
of the alternator. Make a note of the current that check the wiring in the circuit. There may I
was measured. circuit leakage through corrosion or circuit
leakage through a short.
Expected Result:
Note: The standard acceptable current draw i~
The current is less than 0.015 amperes. milliamperes. A current draw above 50 milliam
usually indicates a problem. Contact a Caterp
Results: dealer for more information.
• YES - The current is under 0.015 amperes. The Expected Result:

alternator is operating correctly. There may be
a current draw on the generator set. Proceed to The source of the excessive current draw wai
test step 18 . determined.
• NO - The current is over 0.015 amperes. Results:
Repair: There is an internal problem with the • YES - The source of the excessive current I
alternator. Repair or replace the alternator. was determined.
STOP. Repair: Repair the problem or replace any

component that has failed. Exit this procedu
and retest the alternator charging system.
STOP.
• NO - The source of the excessive current d

was not determined.
301
Repair: Exit this procedure and retest the Test Step 20. TEST THE POSITIVE SIDE
alternator charging system. OF THE CHARGING CIRCUIT.
STOP. A. Measure the voltage between the frame of
the generator set and the "8+" terminal of
Test Step 19. TEST FOR AN the alternator. Make a note of the voltage that
OVERCHARGING CONDITION FROM THE was measured. Perform the next measurement
ALTERNATOR. immediately.
A. Verify that the nut on the "8+" alternator terminal B. Measure the voltage between the frame of the
is tight. Also, verify that the wire has a good generator set and the positive terminal of the
connection to the "8+" terminal. battery. Make a note of the voltage that was
measured.
B. Start the engine and set the throttle to at least 75
• percent. Turn ON all electrical accessories for Expected Result:
the remainder of this test step. Allow the engine
to run for at least 3 minutes before continuing. The voltage difference does not exceed 1 volt on
24 volt systems or 0.5 volts on 12 volt systems.
C. Measure the voltage between the "8+" terminal
of the alternator and the case of the alternator. Results:
Make a note of the voltage that was measured.
Perform the next measurement immediately. • VOLTAGE OK - ALT. WITHOUT IGIS TERM. - The
voltage difference does not exceed the tolerance.
D. Measure the voltage across the battery. Put the The positive circuit is good.
red lead on the positive terminal of the battery,
and put the black lead on the negative terminal Repair: There is an internal problem with the
of the battery. Make a note of the voltage that alternator. Repair or Replace the alternator.
was measured.
STOP.
Expected Result:
• VOLTAGE EXCESSIVE - ALL ALT. - The voltage
The voltage at the battery should be less than difference exceeds the tolerance.
the voltage at the alternator. On systems that are
12 volt, the difference in voltages should not be Repair: There is high resistance in the positive
more than 1 volt. On systems that are 24 volt, the side of the charging circuit that is caused by one
difference should not be more than 2 volts. of the following conditions:
Results: • An electrical connection has loosened.
• YES - The voltage at the battery is less than the • An electrical connection has corroded .
voltage at the alternator. Also, the difference in
voltages is less than 1 volt for 12 volt systems • The main relay has failed.
and the difference is less than 2 volts for 24
volt systems. The wiring that is related to the • A circuit breaker has failed.
alternator is correct at this time.
Correct the problem. Exit this procedure and
Repair: There is an internal problem with the retest the alternator charging system.
alternator. Repair or Replace the alternator.
STOP.
STOP.
• VOLTAGE OK - ALT. WITH IGIS TERM. - The
• NO - The voltage at the battery is less than the voltage difference does not exceed the tolerance .
voltage at the alternator. However, the difference The positive circuit is good. Proceed to test step
in voltages is greater than 1 volt for 12 volt 21.
systems and the difference is greater than 2 volts
for 24 volt systems. Proceed to test step 20. Test Step 21. ALTERNATOR
OVERCHARGING TEST.
A. Start the engine and set the throttle to at least
75 percent.
302
B. Measure the voltage between the sense terminal '0

(S) and/or the "IG" terminal to the case of the
alternator. Troubleshooting Dedicated
Shutdown Indicators
Expected Result:
SMCS Code: 4490-035-IND
The voltage at the "S" terminal and/or "IG" terminal
is above the specification.
Results:
• YES - The measured voltage exceeds the

specification. There is an internal malfunction in
the alternator. See the appropriate service manual
for the alternator in order to test the internal
components and connections. STOP.
• NO - The measured voltage is below the

measurement that was taken in the initial tests
(8+ to alternator case). The sense circuit in
the generator set has high resistance. Correct IilJ~ til /}oIDo(l,
,n 10000
I , I I , I
the problem. Exit this procedure and retest the
alternator charging system. STOP. .A) ,,,,,'
/ _ ~"U"'~"". ~ 000 1
3 I P ""., ,~
AlARo.t.,.....--
:~::'~R ":"(R ~~~~':,c \~~i 1~l;C~~ ,,,t 5~~!lt'l
4
Illustration 175 goe
Display Area Of Generator Set Control + (GSC+)
(1) Dedicated shutdown indicators
(2) Spare fault indicators
(3) Fault shutdown indicator
(4) Fault alarm indicator
(5) Upper display
(6) Lower display
(7) Keypad
The dedicated shutdown indicators show the

system that is responsible for an engine shutd,
The symbol and nomenclature that is located
next to the indicator identifies the responsible
system. Dedicated shutdown faults are activat.
automatically by the GSC+. Dedicated shutdo\
faults depend on certain setpoints. When the ('
decides that operating conditions are critical, t
GSC+ FLASHES the corresponding shutdown
indicator. Then, the GSC+ shuts down the eng
The GSC+ does not record dedicated shutdov
faults in the fault log.
The dedicated shutdown indicators (faults) are

listed below.
• Low Oil Pressure
• Emergency Stop
• High Water Temperature
• Engine Overspeed
303
• Overcrank System Operation Description:
To find the cause of a dedicated shutdown fault,

perform the correct procedure.
101368021
SMR
Indicator for Emergency Stop 8 ~
F4
E3 ~
K4
/' ....
RM-J3 RM-6 RM:'18
(for EUI and PEEC Engines)
B+ RR
SMCS Code: 4490-035-IND SWITCHED~
E3 ~
KS
/' ....
RM-J5 FB RM-8 R~24
SIN: 5KW1-Up GENERATOR
SET GSC 38
SIN: 6GW1-Up CONTROL
(GSC)
SIN: BNW1-Up
RM-27
B-
SIN: LRY1-Up ~~ ~~b~~gK
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
,--C-- 30
17 39 14
SIN: BAZ1-Up ESPB ESPB
~ r-":' I-
4;:- 3
r-::
1-- -
-40-
2A 1A 2A 1A
12 -x
;<-' ~
W 4 2 1 2 1
, "" ,-,(
~_B6
:86
--~ ~--
:85 :85
12
,2
i
2
:10
op-
900510987
Illustration 176
System Schematic For Emergency Stop Circuit On PEEC Engines
In order to find the cause of an emergency stop

shutdown, perform the following procedure.
Test Step 1. CHECK THE EMERGENCY

STOP PUSH BUTTON (ESPB).
A. Pull out the ESPB in order to deactivate the push
button. Some versions of ESPB must be turned
clockwise before you pull out the ESPB.
304
B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the Repair: Troubleshoot the circuit. See the
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to Generator Set Wiring Diagram. Refer to
the STOP position. Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics and 'VI
Diagrams". Repair failed components or rE
Expected Result: failed components, if necessary. Repair thE
or replace the wiring, if necessary.
The ESPB should pop out. The emergency stop
indicator should be OFF. STOP.
Results: • NOT OK - The emergency stop indicator

FLASHING .
• OK - The system is operating correctly. The
problem may be intermittent. Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is ur
that the GSC+ has failed. Exit this proced
Repair: Check the harness and all electrical and perform this entire procedure again.
connections of the ESPB circuit. See Testing and the problem remains, replace the GSC+. ~
Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect". Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic C
STOP.
STOP,
• ESPB NOT POPPED OUT - The ESPB does not
pop out.
Repair: Replace the ESPB. Indicator for Emergency 51

STOP. (for MU13306B, 3406C Engil
• ESPB OUT, INDICATOR FLASHING - The ESPB SMCS Code: 4490-035-IND
pops out and the emergency stop indicator is
FLASHING. Go to 2. SIN: 8NS1-Up
SIN: 9ES1-Up
STOP INDICATOR. , SIN: LRW1-Up
Note: The following procedure will create diagnostic SIN: LRX1-Up

codes. Clear these created diagnostic codes after
A. The ECS remains in the STOP position.
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the

GSC+.
C. Temporarily install a jumper from contact "39" of

the GSC+ to "B-". This simulates the OFF/RESET
position of the ECS.
D. Check the operation of the emergency stop

indicator.
Expected Result:
The emergency stop indicator should be OFF.
Results:
• OK - The problem is with the ESPB or the related

wiring.
305
System Operation Description: B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to
the STOP position.
Expected Result:
The ESPS should pop out. The emergency stop

RM-3J RM-6 Rt.i-16
indicator should be OFF
Rt.4-12 RM-J9
Results:

GSC-38 problem may be intermittent.
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(GSC) Repair: Check the harness and all electrical
connections of the ESPS circuit. See Testing and
RM-27 Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
B- fL YBACK
GROUND
STOP.
2 30 17 10 14
• ESPB NOT POPPED OUT - The ESPS does not
[SPB
pop out.
Repair: Replace the ESPS.

30 4 3
" STOP.
12 11 2A lA 10
• ESPB OUT, INDICATOR FLASHING - The ESPS
FLASHING. Go to 2.
~.~2LU.-~'4______~
STOP INDICATOR.
Note: The following procedure will create diagnostic
codes. Clear these created diagnostic codes after
A. The ECS remains in the STOP position.
12 B. Disconnect the harness connector from the

GSC+.
C. Temporarily install a jumper from contact "39" of

the GSC+ to "S-". This simulates the OFF/RESET
position of the ECS.
D. Check the operation of the emergency stop

g00578818
indicator.
Illustration 177
System Schematic For Emergency Stop Circuit On ETR Systems Expected Result:
In order to find the cause of an emergency stop The emergency stop indicator should be OFF
Results:
STOP PUSH BUTTON (ESPB). • OK - The problem is with the ESPS or the related
wiring.
A. Pull out the ESPS in order to deactivate the push
button. Some versions of ESPS must be turned
clockwise before you pull out the ESPS.
306
Repair: Troubleshoot the circuit. See the System Operation Description:

Generator Set Wiring Diagram. Refer to
Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics and Wiring
Diagrams". Repair failed components or replace
failed components, if necessary. Repair the wiring
SMR
a F4 K4
STOP.
~ ~
/ ~
E3
RM-33 RM-6 R~18
• NOT OK - The emergency stop indicator is
FLASHING. B+
SWITCHED ~
RR
K5
~
/
E3
Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely RM-35 FB RM-8
GENERATOR ose
and perform Ihis entire procedure again. If
SET
CONTROL 'B
~~
(GSC)
RM-27
(Generator Set) - Replace". ,- <~ Fl ¥BACK
GROUND
STOP. 17
,2- '0
101368028 ESPB ESPB
Indicator for Emergency Stop

(for MUI 3412C, 3508, 3512,
3516 Engines) ~
12 ~
>
4_
2A
~
-
1A
,-,c
>
'-- ~
2A
r-
1A
SMCS Code: 4490-035-IND

SIN: 5PW1-Up 'Ii' 4 ~
2 1 ,-x 2 1
SIN: 6WW1,-Up
SIN: STW1-Up
,-------- -----.
3500 ,, PRELUBE I :
PRELUBE
eKT
'- --- - ---
.86
(B6
--~
:85 :85
~
12
"
i
-
, eR
:10
Illustration 178
System Schematic For Emergency Slop Circuit On ETR t
In order to find the cause of an emergency,

Test Step 1. CHECK THE EMERGEI\

STOP PUSH BUTTON (ESPB).
A. Pull out the ESPB in order to deactivate th
button. Some versions of ESPB must be tL
clockwise before you pull out the ESPB.
307
B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the Repair: Troubleshoot the circuit. See the
OFF/RESET position and then turn the ECS to Generator Set Wiring Diagram. Refer to
the STOP position. Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics and Wiring
Diagrams". Repair failed components or replace
Expected Result: failed components, if necessary. Repair the wiring
The ESPB should pop out. The emergency stop
indicator should be OFF. STOP.
Results: • NOT OK - The emergency stop indicator is

FLASHING .
problem may be intermittent. Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely
Repair: Check the harness and all electrical and perform this entire procedure again. If
connections of the ESPB circuit. See Testing and the problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect". Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Control
STOP.
STOP.
• ESPB NOT POPPED OUT - The ESPB does not
pop out.
i01368847
Repair: Replace the ESPB. Indicator for Engine Overspeed

STOP. SMCS Code: 4490-035-IND
• ESPB OUT, INDICATOR FLASHING - The ESPB Test Step 1. CHECK THE SETPOINTS.
FLASHING. Go to 2. This step checks the following setpoints: P009 (ring
gear teeth) and P010 (engine overspeed).
STOP INDICATOR. A. View the setpoints P009 and P01O. Make a
note of setpoints P009 and P01O. See System
Note: The following procedure will create diagnostic Operation , "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing
codes. Clear these created diagnostic codes after OP2-0".
B. Compare the actual setpoints with the specified
A. The ECS remains in the STOP position. setpoints for the particular generator set.
B. Disconnect the harness connector from the Expected Result:
GSC+.
The actual setpoint value and the specified setpoint
C. Temporarily install a jumper from contact "39" of value should agree.
the GSC+ to "B-". This simulates the OFF/RESET
position of the ECS. Results:
D. Check the operation of the emergency stop • OK - The setpoints match. Proceed to Test Step
indicator. 2.
Expected Result: • NOT OK - The setpoints do not agree.
The emergency stop indicator should be OFF. Repair: Reprogram setpoints P009, P010 and
P014. See System Operation, "Engine/Generator
Results: Programming OP5-0" .
• OK - The problem is with the ESPB or the related STOP.

wiring.
308
Test Step 2. CHECK FOR POSSIBLE

CAUSES.
Indicator for High Water
A. Check for the possible causes of the engine Temperature
overspeed condition. Refer to tile Engine Service
Manual and/or the Governor Service Manuals. SMCS Code: 4490-035-INO
Expected Result: System Operation Description:
No cause should be found.
ENGINE
v+ ",,£- 571
COOLANT
Results: TEMPERATU£
SENSOR
(ECTS) v- ® 52
• OK - No cause should be found. Proceed to Test

51.
'iE 15
Step 3 .
• NOT OK - The cause is found.
Repair: Replace the necessary engine or

governor components. GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL (GSC)
STOP. GSC-7
COOLANT TEMP r.<"
'-'
15
52
Test Step 3. CHECK THE ENGINE GSC,;..Jl
52
OVERSPEED FUNCTION. SENSOR v- •
GS;~9 57
SENSOR v+ ~
A. When possible, disable the engine from reaching
rated speed.
B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to

Illustration 179 9
OFF/RESET and then turn the switch to START.
Simplified Schematic For The Engine Coolant Temperalur
C. Slowly increase the RPM to rated speed.
Note: This schematic is not for EUI engines.
Expected Result: engine ECM monitors the coolant temperatur
EUI engines. The engine ECM sends the infor
The engine should not overspeed. The GSC+ to the GSC+. The following procedure OOES
should not shut down the engine. The GSC+ should to EUI engines.
not issue an overspeed fault.
In order to find the cause of a high water
Results: temperature shutdown, perform the following
procedure .
• OK - The engine reaches rated speed. The
GSC+ does not issue an overspeed fault and the Test Step 1. CHECK FOR THE
GSC+ does not shut down the engine. The GSC+ DIAGNOSTIC CODE.
and the system are functioning properly.
A. Check for the following active diagnostic c
Repair: Perform an overs peed verification. See CIO 110 (coolant temperature sensor) and
System Operation, "Engine Setpoint Verification 269 (sensor power supply). See Testing A
OP9". Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Oiagnostic Co.
• NOT OK CIO 110 or CIO 269 should not be showing .
Repair: The engine overspeeds and the GSC+

issues an overs peed fault. Refer to the Engine
Service Manual and/or the Governor Service
Manual in order to find the cause of the problem.
means that CIO 110 or CIO 269 are not activE
Results:
• OK - CIO 110 or CIO 269 are not showinc

Proceed to Test Step 2. '
I
STOP.
309
• NOT OK - CIO 110 or CIO 269 is active. Repair: Reprogram setpoint P015. See System
Repair: Correct the active CIO 110 or CIO 269 OP5-0".
prior to proceeding with this procedure. See the
topic Testing And Adjusting, "Troubleshooting STOP.
Oiagnostic Codes". On EUI engines, see
Troubleshooting, SENR1003, "35008 EPG Test Step 4. CHECK THE HIGH WATER
Engines", "P-503" or Troubleshooting, RENR2227, TEMPERATURE FUNCTION.
"3406E EPG Engines", "P-503".
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
STOP. OFF/RESET. Then, turn the ECS to START.
Test Step 2. CHECK OBVIOUS CAUSES. B. Run the engine until the water temperature has
stabilized.
A. Check the water level.
C. Check and note the actual water temperature
B. Check the fan drive belts. which is showing on the lower display.
C. Check for other obvious causes of high water D. Compare the actual temperature that is showing
temperature. on the lower display with setpoint P015.
Expected Result: Note: It may be necessary to check the accuracy of

the temperature that is shown on the lower display
No obvious cause should exist. of the GSC+. Install an accurate engine coolant
temperature gauge. Install the sensor as close
Results: as possible to the EMCP 11+ coolant temperature
sensor.
• OK - No obvious causes were found. Proceed
to Test Step 3. Expected Result:
• NOT OK - An obvious cause exists. The actual temperature which is showing on the
lower display should be less than setpoint P015 .
Repair: Correct the problem. Refer to the Engine . This actual temperature should not cause a high
Service Manual. water temperature shutdown.
STOP. Results:
Test Step 3. CHECK SETPOINT P015. • Temp less than P015, indicator OFF - The actual
temperature is less than the setpoint P015 and the
Note: Setpoint P015 describes high water high water temperature indicator does not FLASH.
temperature.
Repair: The problem is not present now. The
A. View setpoint P015. Make a note of setpoint problem may be intermittent. Check the harness.
P015. See System Operation, "Engine/Generator Check all of the electrical connections of the
Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". water temperature circuit. See Testing And
Adjusting, "Electrical Connector - Inspect".
B. Compare the setpoints which are viewed with the
specified setpoints of the particular generator STOP.
set.
• Temp less than P015, indicator FLASHING - The
Expected Result: actual temperature is less than the setpoint PO 15
and the high water temperature indicator remains
The actual setpoint value and the specified setpoint FLASHING.
value should agree.
Repair: Therefore, the GSC+ has failed. Replace
Results: the GSC+. See Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP
Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Replace" .
• OK - The setpoints agree. Proceed to Test Step 4.
STOP.
• NOT OK - The setpoints do NOT agree.
• Temp higher than P015 - Actual temperature is
greater than the setpoint P015.
310
Repair: The temperature is correct for a high Test Step 1. CHECK THE COOLAN'
water temperature shutdown. The engine LEVEL.
should shutdown, and the indicator for high
water temperature should FLASH. The GSC+ is A. Check the level of the engine coolant. SE
operating properly. Refer to the Engine Service Operation And Maintenance Manual for t
Manual in order to find the cause of high water engine.
temperature.
Expected Result:
STOP.
The coolant level should be at the proper IE
The coolant level should be above the probE
101715301
coolant loss sensor.
Indicator for Low Coolant Level Results:
SMCS Code: 4490-035-INO
• OK - The coolant level is at the proper Ie
SIN: BNS1-Up Proceed to Test Step 2.
SIN: 9ES1-Up • NOT OK - Coolant level is not correct.
SIN: .5PW1-Up
Repair: Find the cause and correct the ca
SIN: 6WW1-Up Refer to the Engine Service Manual.
SIN: BTW1-Up STOP.

SIN: LRW1-Up Test Step 2. CHECK FOR A DlAGNa
SIN: LRX1-Up FAULT.
SIN: LRY1-Up A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to II

OFF/RESET position and then turn the EC
SIN: 4BZ1-Up the STOP position.
SIN: BAZ1-Up B. Wait for ten seconds.
System Operation Description: C. Check for an active CIO 111 diagnostic c
CIO 111 describes the coolant loss sense
GENERATOR See Testing And Adjusting, "Troubleshooti
SET Oiagnostic Codes".
CONTROL
(GSC)
Expected Result:
~l~SgR v+ 0 . AUX-SY+
CIO 111 should not be showing. The indicate
GSC-.}1
SENSOR ,- ,..., AUX_SV_'il the low coolant level should not be FLASHINI
r;:- Results:
8 <
• OK - No CIO 111 diagnostic codes are ac
GSC-l.}
COOLANT
lOSS 0- C The indicator for the low coolant level is Of
[elC
- Repair: Therefore, the fault may be intermit
ENGINE
COOLANT
Co- 846-60C
Check the harness and all the electrical
LOSS
SENSOR
(EelS)
, ~
845-608 connections of the circuit for the low coolan
A 844_60.0, See Testing And Adjusting, "Electrical Com
~
- Inspect".
STOP.
System Schematic For Engine Coolant Loss Sensor (EelS) • NOT OK - CIO 111 is active.
In order to find the cause of a low level shutdown,

perform this procedure.
311
Repair: Correct the active CIO 111. See Testing Results:

And Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Oiagnostic
Codes". • OK - A CIO 0100 or CIO 0269 is not showing.
STOP.
• NOT OK - A CIO 100 or CIO 269 is active .
• NOT OK - CIO 111 is NOT active. The indicator
for the low coolant level is FLASHING. Repair: Correct the active CIO 100 or CIO 269
prior to proceeding with this procedure. See
Repair: Therefore, the sensor has failed. Replace System Operation, "Oiagnostic Codes".
the coolant loss sensor.
STOP.
STOP.
Test Step 2. CHECK OBVIOUS CAUSES.
i01367984
A. Check for low oil pressure.
Indicator for Low Oil Pressure B. Check the oil level.
SMCS Code: 4490-035-INO
C. Check for oil leaks.
D. Check for other obvious causes of low oil
pressure.
ENGINE v+ IS> 67P
OIL
PRESSURE Expected Result:
SENSOR v- ® 62
(EOPS)
"'~~
No obvious cause should exist.
Results:
• OK - No obvious causes for low oil pressure
GENERATOR
0 exist. Proceed to Test Step 3.
CONTROL
SET
(GSC) 0 • NOT OK - An obvious cause does exist.
GSC-!, 15 0 Repair: Correct the problem. Refer to the Engine
OIL PRESSUR~ ~ 62
GSC-31
62 67 Service Manual.
SENSOR v- ~
GSC-,,3,
SENSOR v+ 0
67 STOP.
Test Step 3. CHECK SETPOINTS.

This step checks the setpoints P012 (oil step
g00537438
Illustration 181 speed), P013 (lOW oil pressure at rated speed) and
System Schematic For Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (EOPS) On P014 (low oil pressure at idle speed).
MUI And PEEC Engines
A. View setpoints P012, P013 and P014. Make
To find the cause of a low oil pressure shutdown, a note of the values for these setpoints. See
perform this procedure. System Operation, "Engine/Generator Setpoint
Viewing OP2-0".
Test Step 1. CHECK FOR A DIAGNOSTIC
CODE. B. Compare the setpoints that were noted with the
specified setpoints of the particular generator
A. Check for a CIO 0100 (oil pressure sensor) or set.
CIO 0269 (sensor power supply) diagnostic code
that is active. (On EUI engines, check for a CIO Expected Result:
100 E diagnostic code.) See System Operation,
"Oiagnostic Codes". The setpoint value that was noted and the specified
setpoint value should agree.
Expected Result:
Results:
CIO 0100 or CIO 0269 should not be showing
(active). • OK - The setpoints agree. Proceed to Test Step 4.
312
• NOT OK - The setpoints do not agree. Repair: The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlik,
Repair: Reprogram setpoints P012, P013 and and perform this entire procedure again. If
P014. See System Operation, "Engine/Generator the problem remains, replace the GSC +. See
Programming OPS-O". Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic Can
STOP.
STOP.
Test Step 4. CHECK THE LOW OIL
PRESSURE FUNCTION. • Pressure too low - The actual pressure is les
than the setpoint for rated speed or idle spee
A. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to the
OFF/RESET and then turn the switch to the Repair: The pressures are correct for a low 01
START. pressure shutdown. Therefore, the engine sho
shutdown and the low oil pressure indicator
B. Allow oil pressure to stabilize after the engine should FLASH. The GSC+ is operating propel
has started. Refer to the Engine Service Manual in order t
find the cause of low oil pressure.
C. When the engine is at idle speed, compare the
actual pressure that is showing on the lower STOP.
display with the setpoint P014. The actual
pressure that is showing on the lower display
should be greater than setpoint P014. 10131:
D. When the engine is at rated speed, compare

Indicator for Overcrank (for
the actual pressure that is showing on the MUI and EUI Engines)
lower display with the setpoint P013. The actual
pressure should be greater than setpoint P013. SMCS Code: 4490-03S-IND
Expected Result: SIN: BNS1-Up

SIN: 9ES1-Up
The actual pressure at idle speed and at rated
speed should be greater than the respective SIN: SKW1-Up .
setpoint value. These actual pressures should not
cause a low oil pressure shutdown. SIN: SPW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
Note: It may be necessary to check the accuracy of
the oil pressure that is shown on the lower display SIN: 6WW1-Up
of the GSC+. Install an accurate engine oil pressure
gauge as close as possible to the EMCP 11+ engine SIN: BNW1-Up
oil pressure sensor.
SIN: BTW1-Up
Results:
SIN: LRW1-Up
• OK - Both actual pressures are greater than the SIN: LRX1-Up
corresponding setpoint value and the low oil
pressure indicator does not FLASH. The problem SIN: BAZ1-Up
is not present now.
Repair: The problem may be intermittent. Check

the harness and all electrical connections of the
oil pressure circuit. See Testing And Adjusting,
"Electrical Connector - Inspect".
STOP.
• Pressure OK, indicator FLASHING - Both actual

pressures are greater than the corresponding
setpoint value and the low oil pressure indicator
remains FLASHING.
313
FCR
SMR ~
F2
~
~7 ~
B+
GENERATOR
SET
~/ ~
R:"31 R:-4 " R~15
'V
CONTROL
(esc)
" RM-21
RM-12 RM-39
F4 S"R B+ ~
K4
.+ ~ s- SWITCHED v
flO
v
RM~3 R::"'8
RM-6
.- .- GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(esc)
2 14
ESP8 ,0 13
2
6 ESPB
2~'A
, ,.
~'--'
12 n< n< 11
W ~
;<
L "-' ;<
~ r,;-
~ ,2 SLAVE RELAY
[-$
,,,
"
,3
"
,3
~-:,
,,
2
( c:P---------- ----'~~
-i-
:10 "
, ,
,,, ,,,
,, ,,
~
,2 24 24 ,2
"
'I
~'
2
51 ARTING STARTING GOVERNOR -
MOTOR TO ICB2 MOTOR 8290
MAGNETIC (+BAT) MAGNETIC 3
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 1
+
,
25 2.
~ CEkJ +BAT -IFi4l-

29
W
J/ustration 182 900531356
3ystem Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMA) On 33068 ONE FUEL :30
CONTROL :86
!\nd 3406C Powered Generators \
RELAY
----------{$
:87 :85
2B
TWO fUEL :30 :86

CONTROL
\
RELA Y
----------~
:87 :85
27
~ 2
g00531591
Illustration 183
System Schematic For Fuel Control Relay On ETA Systems On
33068 And 3406C Powered Generators
314
SMR
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
K4
Rt.l-21 G ~
RM-31
E03 ~
RM-4
FeR
K7
~ ...
RM':::'l~
(GSC)
F4
SMR
FJ K4
~~Er~~~~~
RM-33 RM-6 RM-18
B+
SWITCHED
....v
RM-12 RM-39
.....
v
"0
GENERATOR
~
B- SET
CONTROL
ALSO (GSC)
INCLUDED 14
ON 3500\
G[NSETS ___ ~ ESPB I ESPB 10
, , 2
,------, ill :0: W

:PRElUBE ~
ICONTROL I
I 14
~::-;-~--£)---0>--+
34
____l...oO--I--' 12 11 2~'A
, ':~
~ ______ J~ FITTED
If PRElUBE NOT ~ ~ ,.-
THEN LINK
,4 ,4 ,2 SLAVE RELAY
,,,
~-$
,3
$-~,
,,, ( cP---- _----_--- -~' 1
-\
1--
,3
,,, , 2
,,, ,,, :10

"
,
'~ ,2 24 24 :2 _I ,1
"
SPEED
5T ARTING
MOTOR TO eB2r 5T ARTING
MOTOR
MAGNETIC 10 J2
CONTROL
20- ~
~r'
MAGNETIC
.
(+BAT) ENGINE
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
CONTROL
MODULE
25 26
~
• +
Q:SiJ 2
3
~)---{
Illustration 184
System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR) On 3500
g00445209 -I-BAT 'rJ".1'
~
29 ern V
- -c--'-,
3
Engines And 3412C Engines IrONE FUEL
I
CONTROL
RELAY
:30 :86 ~W
I ----------D$]
:87 :85
28
I
I TWO FUEL :30 :86
CONTROL
RElA Y
----------~
:87 :85
I
I 27
L __
INCLUDED
~etJ
1
- ---
ON 3400
GENSETS -L 2
ONLY
Illustration 185 g0044t
System Schematic For Fuel Control Relay On ETR Systems 0

3500 Engines And 3412C Engines
315
Repair: Exit this procedure. Troubleshoot the

active code or indicator.
SMR
GENERATOR K4
SET STOP.
CONTROL RM-21
(GSC)
SMR
Test Step 2. INSPECT THE FUEL AND
B< " K4 AIR SUPPLY.
RM-3J R"'-~ RM-18
A. Check the fuel level and quality. Refer to the
Engine Service Manual.
14
B. Check for a plugged fuel filter. Refer to the
r-:E=-=S"'P""B--, Engine Service Manual.
ESPB
C. Check for a plugged air filter. Refer to the Engine

Service Manual.
Expected Result:
The air and fuel systems are within specifications.

,4
Results:
• OK - The air and fuel systems are within

specifications. Proceed to Test Step 4.
:1 :2 24 24 :2 :1
• NOT OK - One or more of the items in this Test
ST ARTING ST ARTING Step are NOT within specifications.
MOTOR TO CB2
MOTOR
MAGNETIC (+BA T) MAGNETIC
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 Repair: Correct the problem with the
corresponding system. Reset the genset. Operate
25 26 the genset and verify that the problem has been
PSl P52 corrected,
lustration 186 g00680589 STOP.

;ystem Schematic For Starting Motor Relay On EUI Engines
35008 Series) Test Step 3. AIR SHUTOFF SOLENOID 'j
INSTALLATION CHECK.
1 order to find Ihe cause of an overcrank shutdown
lerform the following procedure. ' A. Check the engine for the air shutoff solenoid.
'est Step 1, PERFORM THE INITIAL Expected Result:

;HECK.
The engine has the air shutoff solenoid.
t. Check for active diagnostic codes (with the
exception of the CIO 566 FMI 7 code). Check Results:
for other flashing indicators on the GSC+. If any
codes are present, correct the diagnostic codes • OK - The engine has the air shutoff solenoid.
first. Go to the appropriate procedure for that Proceed to Test Step 4.
fault.
• NOT OK - The engine does NOT have the air
:xpected Result: shutoff solenoid. Proceed to Test Step A.
10 other diagnostic codes or indicators are active. Test Step 4. AIR SHUTOFF SOLENOID
INSTALLATION CHECK.
lesults:
A. Check the air shutoff solenoid for activation. The
OK - No other diagnostic codes or indicators are solenoid must be deactivated in order for the
active. Proceed to Test Step 2. engine to start. See Testing And Adjusting, "Air
Shutoff Solenoid - Check".
NOT OK - Another diagnostic code is active or
an indicator is active. Continue to tile next test step.
316
Test Step 5. CHECK THE AIR SHUTOFF Expected Result:

SOLENOID.
The setpoints are correct. The factory default Ve
A. Check the engine starting system. Check the are 90 seconds for PO 17 and 10 seconds for PI
fuel system. In order to check the fuel control Engines that are equipped with pre lube pumps
solenoid, see Testing And Adjusting, "CID require cycle crank times (setpoint P018) of 3C
566 FMI 7 Unexpected Shutdown Improper seconds or more.
Mechanical Response - Test". Check for a fault
with the engine starting system or the fuel Results:
system.
• OK - The setpoints are correct. Proceed to 1
Expected Result: Step 8.
The air shutoff solenoid is working properly. • NOT OK - The setpoints are NOT correct.
Results: Repair: Reprogram the setpoints. Reset the

genset. Operate the genset and verify that tr
• OK - The air shutoff solenoid is working properly. problem has been corrected .
STOP.
• NOT OK - The air shutoff solenoid is NOT
working properly. Test Step 8. CHECK THE BATTERY
VOLTAGE.
Repair: Correct the problem with the air shutoff
solenoid. Reset the genset. Operate the genset A. The engine should be off.
and verify that the problem has been corrected.
B. Measure the system voltage at the battery.
STOP.
Expected Result:
Test Step 6. CHECK THE FUSES.
For 24 volt systems, the voltage should be fror
A. Check the fuses "F2" and "F4" on the relay 24.8 to 29.5 DCV. For 32 volt systems, the volte
module. should be from 33.1 to 39.3 DCV.
The fuse is NOT blown. • OK - The voltage is correct. Proceed to Tesl

Step 9.
Results:
• NOT OK - The battery voltage is NOT within
• OK - The fuse is NOT blown. Proceed to Test specifications.
Step 7.
Repair: Further testing of the battery system
• NOT OK - The fuse is blown. Proceed to Test necessary. See Testing And Adjusting, "CID .
Step 15. Electrical System".
Test Step 7. CHECK THE SETPOINTS. STOP.
A. View the setpoints P017 (total cycle crank Test Step 9. CHECK THE ENGINE
time) and P018 (cycle crank time). Make a STARTING FUNCTION.
note of the setpoinls. See System Operation,
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". Note: The GSC+ is attempting to crank whenev
Compare the setpoints against the default the K4 indicator is ON. The K4 indicator is loca
selpoinls of the particular generator set. on the lower display. Be aware of the 10 secor
crank cycle (set by P018)that is factory set. Be:
that the K4 indicator is ON while you are mak
the following measurements. More than one s
may be required to complete this test.
317
A. Disconnect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid Repair: The engine wire harness is faulty. Repair
of the starting motor. Do not allow the "B+" the engine wire harness or replace the engine
wire connection to contact the frame or other wire harness. See the Generator Set Wiring
metal components. The "B+" wire remains Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics
disconnected for all of the remaining steps of And Wiring Diagrams".
this procedure.
STOP.
B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to
OFF/RESET and then turn the switch to START. Test Step 11. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT
THE CONTROL PANEL.
c. Measure the voltage from the B+ Pinion Solenoid
wire (currently disconnected from the starting A. Disconnect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid
motor) to "B-" (ground) while the K4 indicator of the starting motor. The "B+" wire remains
is ON. disconnected for all of the remaining steps of
this procedure.
Expected Result:
B. Prepare to make a voltage measurement at
The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the the DC connector 2. Use the 7x -171 0 Cable
battery Voltage. Probes. DO NOT disconnect DC connector 2.
DC connector 2 is the left most connector when
Results: viewed from the front panel.
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the c. From within the control panel, prepare to measure
battery voltage. The voltage is correct. the DC voltage from "B-" (ground) to connector
contact 6 of DC connector 2. Use the 7X - 171 0
Repair: The starter motor has failed. Repair the Cable Probes .
starting motor or replace the starting motor. Verify
that the new starter motor corrects the problem. D. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
Refer to the Engine Service Manual or Starting switch to START. Measure the voltage.
Motor Service Manual.
Expected Result:
STOP.
The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT correct. Proceed battery Voltage.
to Test Step 10.
Results:
Test Step 10. CHECK THE SMMS.
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the
A. Disconnect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid battery voltage.
of the starting motor. The "B+" wire remains
disconnected for all of the remaining steps of Repair: The engine wire harness is faulty. Repair
this procedure. the engine wire harness or replace the engine
wire harness. See Generator Set Wiring Diagram
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the in the Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And
switch to START. Wiring Diagrams".
c. In the junction box, measure the DC voltage from STOP.

"B-" (ground) to the output terminal of starting
motor magnetic switch (SMMS). • NOT OK - The voltage was not within
specifications. Proceed to Test Step 12.
Expected Result:
Test Step 12. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT
fhe voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the RM-18.
)attery Voltage.
A. The "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the
Aesults: starting motor remains disconnected.
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
battery voltage. Proceed to Test Step 11. switch to START.
• NOT OK - The voltage is not within specifications. c. Measure the DC voltage from RM-1S of the relay
module to "B-" (ground) while the K4 indicator
is ON.
318
Expected Result: B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
switch to START.
battery Voltage. C. Measure the DC voltage from RM-33 of the rei"
Results: is ON.
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the Expected Result:

battery voltage. The voltage is correct.
Repair: The emergency stop push button (ESPB) battery Voltage.
or the related wiring is faulty. Troubleshoot the
ESPB and the related wiring. See the Generator Results:
"Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". • OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the
battery voltage. The fuse "F4" is blown. Proceec
STOP. to Test Step 15.
• NOT OK - The voltage was not correct. Proceed • NOT OK - The voltage is not correct.
to Test Step 13.
Repair: The "B+" terminal or the wiring to RM-33
Test Step 13. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT faulty. Repair the wiring or replace the wiring. SE
RM-5. the Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing Ani
starting motor remains disconnected. STOP.
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the Test Step 15. TROUBLESHOOT BLOWN
switch to START. FUSE.
C. Measure the DC voltage from RM-6 of the relay A. Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module.
is ON. a. At the relay module, measure the resistance frol .,
"B-" (ground) to RM-18 (MUI Engines) or RM-5
Expected Result: (EUI Engines).
The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the C. For fuse "F2", measure the resistance from "B-'
battery voltage. (ground) to RM-15 (MUI Engines) or RM-4 (EUI
Engines).
Results:
Expected Result:
• OK - The vollage is within ±2.0 DCV of the
battery voltage. The resistance measures greater than 5 Ohms.
Repair: The relay module is faulty. Replace Results:

the relay module. First, make sure that the K4
indicator is ON. See Testing And Adjusting, • OK - Resistance is greater than 5 ohms. The
"Relay Module - Replace". fuse is not blown.
STOP. Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are

connected to the appropriate terminal of the
• NOT OK - The voltage was not correct. Proceed relay module for abrasion or worn spots in the
to Test Step 14. insulation that could be causing the short. Chec
the wires in the generator panel. Check the wire
Test Step 14. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT in the engine harness. Refer to the appropriate
RM-33. wiring diagrams for the circuit that is being
checked. Repair the wiring or replace the wiring
starting motor remains disconnected. STOP.
319 ~
Troubleshooting Section I
I
I
!
NOT OK - Resistance is approximately 5 ohms In order to find the cause of an overcrank shutdown,
or less. perform the following procedure. An overcrank
shutdown occurs when the engine has failed to
Repair: There is a short to ground. See the start in a specified amount of time. A fault will be
Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And logged and the engine will not be allowed to start
Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". until the fault has been cleared.
Remove one component or wire at a time that is
in series with RM-18 until the failed component or Test Step 1. PERFORM THE INITIAL
wire is isolated. Replace the component or wiring CHECK.
that has failed.
A. Check for active diagnostic codes (with the
STOP. exception of the CID 566 FMI 7 code). Check
for other flashing indicators on the GSC+. If any
codes are present, correct the diagnostic codes
101362459
first. Go to the appropriate procedure for that
ndicator for Overcrank (for fault.
'EEC Engines) Expected Result:
MCS Code: 4490-035-IND No other diagnostic codes or indicators are active.

IN: LRY1-Up Results:
IN: 4BZ1-Up
• OK - No other diagnostic codes or indicators are
ystem Operation Description: active. Proceed to Test Step 2.
• NOT OK - Another diagnostic code is active or
GENERATOR
.,
S"R an indicator is active.
SET
CONTROL RM-21 Repair: Exit this procedure. Troubleshoot the
(GSC)
active code or indicator.
" .,
S"R
STOP.
" RM-3J RM-6 RM-18
Test Step 2. INSPECT THE FUEL AND

AIR SUPPLY.
::SPB ON
::NCLOSURE A. Check the fuel level and quality. Refer to the
14
------- r:E-=s",pS:-' [SPB Engine Service Manual.
W B. Check for a plugged fuel filter. Refer to the

~--~--1-<UJ~r-~~3~'-+~~-r----~ Engine Service Manual.
C. Check for a plugged air filter. Refer to the Engine

Service Manual.
Expected Result:
The air and fuel systems are within specifications.
Results:
,I ,2 24 24 ,2 ,I
• OK - The air and fuel systems are within
STARTING ST ARTING specifications. Proceed to Test Step 3.
MOTOR TO CB2
MOTOR
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 • NOT OK - One or more of the items in this Test
Step are NOT within specifications.
25 26
'51 PS2
g00518564
stration 187
stem Schematic For Starting Motor Relay On PEEC Engines
320
Repair: Correct the problem with the Results:

corresponding system. Reset the genset. Operate
the genset and verify that the problem has been • OK - The engine has the prelube option. Pro,
corrected. to Test Step 6.
STOP. • NOT OK - The engine does NOT have prelu

Test Step 3. AIR SHUTOFF SOLENOID
INSTALLATION CHECK. Test Step 6. CHECK THE PRELUBE
OPTION.
A. Check the engine for Ihe air shutoff solenoid.
A. Check the prelube system for proper operat
Expected Result: See Special Instruction, REHS0439, "Caterp
Prelub Diagnostics".
The engine has the air shutoff solenoid.
Expected Result:
Results:
The Prelube system is functioning normally.
o OK - The engine has the air shutoff solenoid.
Proceed to Test Step 4. Results:
o NOT OK - The engine does NOT have the air o OK - The Prelube system is functioning norn
shutoff solenoid. Proceed to Test Step 5. Proceed to Test Step 7.
Test Step 4. CHECK THE AIR SHUTOFF o NOT OK - A problem exists in the Prelube
SOLENOID. system.
A. Check the air shutoff solenoid for activation. The Repair: Correct the problem with the
solenoid must be deactivated in order for the corresponding system. Reset the genset. Op,
engine to start. See Testing And Adjusting, "Air the genset and verify that the problem has b
Shutoff Solenoid - Check". corrected.
The air shutoff solenoid is working properly. Test Step 7. CHECK THE FUEL SYSTE
Results: A. Check the fuel system. In order to check th
fuel control solenoid, see Testing And Adjus
o OK - The air shutoff solenoid is working properly. "CID 566 FMI 7 Unexpected Shutdown Impr
Proceed to Test Step 5. Mechanical Response - Test". Check for a f,
with the engine starting system or the fuel
o NOT OK - The air shutoff solenoid is NOT system.
working properly.
Expected Result:
Repair: Correct the problem with the air shutoff
solenoid. Reset the genset. Operate the genset There is no fault.
and verify that the problem has been corrected.
Results:
STOP.
o OK - There is no fault in the engine starting
Test Step 5. PRELUBE OPTION CHECK. system or the fuel system. Proceed to Test St,
A. Check the engine in order to see if the Prelube o NOT OK - There is a fault in the engine starl
option has been installed. system or the fuel system. I
Expected Result:
The engine has the prelube option.

Repair: Exit this procedure. Troubleshoot the
indicated fault. Refer to the Engine Service
Manual.
I
STOP.
321
Test Step 8. CHECK THE FUSES. Results:
A. Check the fuses "F2" and "F4" on the relay • OK - The voltage is correct. Proceed to Test
module. Step 11 .
Expected Result: • NOT OK - The battery voltage is NOT within

specifications.
The fuse is NOT blown.
Repair: Further testing of the battery system is
Results: necessary. See Special Instruction, REHS0354,
"Charging System Troubleshooting" .
• OK - The fuse is NOT blown. Proceed to Test
Step 9. STOP.
• 'NOT OK - The fuse is blown. Proceed to Test Test Step 11. CHECK THE ENGINE
Step 1? STARTING FUNCTION.
Test Step 9. CHECK THE SETPOINTS. Note: The GSC+ is attempting to crank whenever
the K4 indicator is ON. The K4 indicator is located
A. View the setpoints P01? and P018. Make a on the lower display. Be aware of the 10 second
note of tlie setpoints. See System Operation, crank cycle (set by PO 18) that is factory set. Be
"Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0". sure that the K4 indicator is ON while you are
Compare the setpoints against the default making the following measurements. More than
setpoints of the particular generator set. one start may be required to complete this test.
Note: The factory default values are 90 seconds for A. Disconnect the "B+" wire on the pinion solenoid
P01? and 10 seconds for P018. Engines equipped of the starting motor. Do not allow the "B+"
with prelube pumps may require cycle crank times wire connection to contact the frame or other
(setpoint P018) of 30 seconds or more. metal components. The "B+" wire remains
disconnected for all of the remaining steps of
Expected Result: this procedure.
The setpoints are correct. B. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) to ..
OFF/RESET and then turn the switch to START.
Results:
C. Measure the voltage from the B+ Pinion Solenoid
• OK - The setpoints are correct. Proceed to Test wire (currently disconnected from the starting
Step 10. motor) to "B-" (ground) while the K4 indicator
is ON .
• NOT OK - The setpoints are NOT correct.
Expected Result:
Repair: Reprogram the setpoints. Reset the
genset. Operate the genset and verify that the The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the
problem has been corrected. battery voltage.
STOP. Results:
Test Step 10. CHECK THE BATTERY • OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the
VOLTAGE. battery voltage. The voltage is correct.
A. The engine should be off. Repair: The starter motor has failed. Repair the
starting motor or replace the starting motor. Verify
B. Measure the system voltage at the battery. that the new starter motor corrects the problem.
Refer to the Engine Service Manual or Starting
Expected Result: Motor Service Manual.
For 24 volt systems, the voltage should be from STOP.

24.8 to 29.5 DCV. For 32 volt systems, the voltage
should be from 33.1 to 39.3 DCV. • NOT OK - The voltage is NOT correct. Proceed
to Test Step 12.
322
Test Step 12. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT Repair: The Starting Motor Magnetic Switch
T51-25. (SMMS) may have failed or the engine wire
harness has failed. Replace the SMMS or thE
A. The "8+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the engine wire harness. See the Generator Set
starting motor remains disconnected. Wiring Diagram in the Testing And Adjusting,
B. Turn Ihe ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the
switch to START. STOP.
C. In the generator housing, measure the DC • NOT OK - The voltage was not correct. Proc,
voltage from terminal TS1-25 to "8-" (ground) to Test Step 14.
while Ihe K4 indicator is ON.
Test Step 14. CHECK THE VOLTAGE A
Expected Result: RM-18.
The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the A. The "8+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the
battery voltage. starting motor remains disconnected.
Results: B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn 11-

switch to START.
• OK -'The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the
battery voltage. Proceed to Test Step 13. C. Measure the DC voltage from RM-18 of the n
module to "8-" (ground) while the K4 indicat,
• NOT OK - The voltage is NOT correct. is ON .
Repair: The engine wire harness has failed. Expected Result:

Repair the engine wire harness or replace
the engine wire harness. See the Generator The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the
Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Adjusting, battery Voltage.
Results:
STOP.
Test Step 13. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT battery voltage. The voltage is correct.
TS1-5.
Repair: The emergency stop push button (ESf
A. The "8+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the or the related wiring has failed. Troubleshoot t
starting motor remains disconnected. ESP8 and the related wiring. See the Generat
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
switch to START.
STOP.
C. Measure the DC voltage from terminal TS 1-5 in
the generator housing to "8-" (ground) while the • NOT OK - The voltage was not correct. Proce
K4 indicator is ON. to Test Step 15.
Expected Result: Test Step 15. CHECK THE VOLTAGE A

RM-5.
battery voltage. A. The "8+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the
starting motor remains disconnected.
Results:
B. Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn th,
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of the switch to START.
batlery voltage.
C. Measure the DC voltage from RM-6 of the rei.
module to "8-" (ground) while the K4 indicate
is ON.
323
The voltage should be within ±2.0 DCV of the The resistance measures greater than 5 Ohms.
battery voltage.
Results:
Results:
• OK - Resistance is greater than 5 ohms. The
• OK - The voltage is within ±2.0 DCV of Ihe fuse is not blown.
battery voltage.
Repair: Carefully check ALL wires that are
Repair: The relay module is faulty. Replace connected to the appropriate terminal of the
the relay module. First, make sure that the K4 relay module for abrasion or worn spots in the
indicator is ON. See Testing And Adjusting, insulation that could be causing the short. Check
'~Relay Module - Replace". the wires in the generator panel. Check the wires
in the engine harness. Refer to the appropriate
STOP. wiring diagrams for the circuit that is being
checked. Repair the wiring or replace the wiring .
• NOT OK - The voltage was not correct. Proceed
to Test Step 16. STOP,
Test Step 16. CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT • NOT OK - Resistance is approximately 5 ohms
RM-33. or less.
A. The "8+" wire on the pinion solenoid of the Repair: There is a short to ground. See the
starting motor remains disconnected. Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And
B, Turn the ECS to OFF/RESET and then turn the Remove one component or wire at a time that is
switch to START. in series with RM-18 until the failed component or
wire is isolated. Replace the component or wiring
C. Measure the DC voltage from RM-33 of the relay that has failed.
module to "8-" (ground) while the K4 indicator
is ON. STOP.
Expected Result:

:>attery voltage.
Flesults:

battery voltage. The fuse "F4" is blown. Proceed
to Test Step 17.
• NOT OK - The voltage is not correct.
Repair: The "8+" terminal or the wiring to RM-33

has failed. Repair the wiring or replace the
wiring. See the Generator Set Wiring Diagram in
Testing And Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring
Diagrams".
STOP.
rest Step 17. TROUBLESHOOT BLOWN

:USE.
t Remove fuse "F4" from the relay module.
3. At the relay module, measure the resistance from

RM-18 to "8-" (ground).
324
Testing and Adjusting Section
Testing and Adjusting

Section
Testing and Adjusting

i01104947
External Potential Transformer

Connections
silllcs Code: 1409-077
GENERATOR EXTERNAL PT'S, AT8+ GSC+

4..,WIRE WYE WYE CONNECTED (CT'S NOT SHOWN)
F13
• •
PHASE A •
F14
PHASE B •
PHASE C
NEUTRAL F15
• •
•

Wye Configuration Of External Potential Transformers (PT) On 4-Wire Wye Generator
This configuration allows the accurate measurement of all power parameters by the GSC+ including when the loads are unbalanced and neutr,
current is present. All power parameters are shown on the display of the GSC+.
325
GENERATOR EXTERNAL PI'S. ATB+ GSC+

3-WIRE DELTA OPEN DELTA (CT'S NOT SHOWN)
CONNECTED
F13
• •
PHASE A •
F14
PHASE B • •
PHASE C •
F15
• •
•
g00584153
ration 189
1 Delta Configuration Of External Potential Transformers (PT) On The 3-Wire Delta Generator
configuration allows the accurate measurement of power parameters by the GSC+ including when the loads are unbalanced and circulating
mt is present The real power phase A, Band C can not be determined. The power factor phase A, Band C can not be determined.
phases are not shown on the GSC+ display.
GENERATOR EXTERNAL PT·S. ATB+ GSC+

4-WIRE WYE OPEN DELTA (CT'S NOT SHOWN)
CONNECTED
F13'
• •
PHASE A •
F14
PHASE B •
PHASE C
NEUTRAL F15
• •
•
900584154
ration 190
1 Delta Configuration Of External Potential Transformers (PT) On The 4-Wire Wye Generator
configuration results in less accurate measurement of all power parameters by the GSC+ when the loads are unbalanced and neutral
'Ot is present. Real power phase A, B, C and power factor phase A, B, C can not be determined and are not shown on the GSC+ display.
3: The wye configuration of external potential

sformers (PT's) is preferred for 4-wire wye
erators because of the greater accuracy
n loads are unbalanced. With the open delta
figuration. some power parameters can not
jetermined. These parameters are real power
se A, B. C and power factor phase A, B, C. For
:imum accuracy. the open delta configuration of
mal PT's should be used only for 3-wire delta
erators.
326
On 4-wire wye generators, three separate potential

transformers (PT's) are required for accurate
power metering unless the loads are completely
and continually balanced. Even if the loads are
balanced, some power parameters can not be
determined. These parameters are not shown on the
GSC+ display: real power phase A, B, C and power
factor phase A, B, C. The ATB+ contains three
potential transformers in order to accommodate
4-wire wye generators. The full capabilities of
the ATB+ are not utilized when an open delta PT
configuration is used for 4-wire wye generators.
Qn 3-wire delta generators, two potential

transformers allow maximum accuracy for all load
cOhditions. However, again real power phase A,
B, C and power factor phase A, B, C can not be
determined and are not shown on the GSC+ display.
The GSC+ must be programmed when connecting

external pr's to the ATB+.
Procedure For Programming When

PT's Are Used
1. Program setpoint P032 in order to match the
configuration of the external PT's. Setpoint P032
must always match the configuration of the
external PT's regardless of whether the generator
is a wye or delta. This is necessary because the
ATB+ is connected only to the external PT's and
cannot sense the generator connections .
• For external PT's that are connected in a wye

configuration, program setpoint P032 to 0
(wye). Setpoint P032 is also programmed to 0
when no PT's are present on wye generators .
• For external PT's that are connected in a delta

configuration, program setpoint P032 to 1
(delta). Setpoint P032 is also programmed to 1
when no PT's are present on delta generators.
Note: When setpoint P032 is programmed to 1

(delta), real power phase A, B, C and power factor
phase A, B, C can not be determined and are not
shown on the GSC+ display.
2. Program setpoint P020 to match the turns

ratio of the external PT's. See the AC Voltage
Range Selection chart in Testing And Adjusting,
"AC Voltage Range - Adjust". Setpoint P020
should match the turns ratio of the external
PT's independent of whether setpoint P032 is
programmed for wye or delta.
327
101104949
~C Voltage Range - Adjust

IIICS Code: 4490-025
EXTERNAL AC JUMPER GSC

GENERATOR POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER INSTALLED (AC VOL TAGE DISPLA YEO
TRANSFORMER BOX OR NOT CALCULA TION) VOL TAGE
(ATB)
g00481725
Istration 191
nctional Block Diagram Of AC Voltage Display In EMCP 11+
0
0 0
@1W"3
:0000:
0
:00;00: 0
:OO@[TI:
o 00 0
0
:00 00:
o
00
00 0
0
Istralion 192 900436699
-lays In Relay Module

Jumper block
328
Table 29 The P020 setpoint determines the proper AC

AC Voltage Range Selection
voltage range and the internal multiplier that are
used by the GSC+ for calculating AC voltage. The
GSC+ External AC GSC+ Jumper GSC+ uses the internal multiplier to compensate fe
P020 Potenlial Trans- Internal the turns ratio of the external potential transformer~
Selpoint Trans- former Multiplier if present. The turns ratio of the external potential
former Box transformer must match this internal multiplier to
(ATB+) ensure accurate AC voltage calculation by the
Input
Voltage GSC+.
Range
The jumper block (located in the relay module)
700 None 0-700 5 Required connects a divide-by-five circuit to the AC voltage
150 None 0- 150 1 None input of the GSC+. The divide-by-five circuit
reduces the AC voltage input to a manageable leVE
300 2:1 0-150 2 None for the GSC+ when P020 is 700. When setpoint
500 3.33:1 0-150 3.33 None P020 is 700, a multiplier of five is needed to
compensate for the presence of the divide-by-five
600 4:1 0-150 4 None circuit (jumper installed) even though no external
750 5:1 0- 150 5 None
potential transformer is present.
3000 20:1 0-150 20 None Note: In order to prevent inaccurate voltage

4500 30:1 0- 150 30
calculation by the GSC+, the jumper block should
None
NOT be installed when P020 is programmed to
5250 35:1 0- 150 35 None a value other than 700. The other values (150
9000 60:1 0- 150
through 30 000) are used with an external potentia
60 None
transformer and result in input voltages from 0 to
15000 100:1 0- 150 100 None 150 ACV at the AC Transformer Box + (ATB+). No
0- 150
further reduction of the input voltage is required.
18000 120:1 120 None
30000 200:1 0- 150 200 None
Jumper block (1) is used to select the voltage

range of the·voltmeter of the GSC+. Jumper block
(1) is installed for systems with 700 volts full scale
AC inputs. Jumper block (1) is NOT installed for
systems with 150 volts full scale AC inputs or for any
unit with external potential transformers. The relay
module comes from the factory already equipped
with the jumper block (1) installed.
Jumper block (1) is easily removed by grasping

and pulling it. Jumper block (1) is easily installed by
aligning and then pushing in. If a jumper block is
required but is not available, three separate jumpers
can be substituted. Each of the three manufactured
jumpers connect a pair of pins. A pair of pins must
not touch another pair of pins.
The relay module must be removed from the GSC+

to gain access to the circuit board and jumper
block (1). See Testing And Adjusting, "Relay Module
- Replace".
•
329
101104950 4. Connect a variable DC power supply to the alarm

module. The positive lead connects to terminal
.Iarm Module Control - Adjust 1. The negative lead connects to terminal 7. Set
the power supply voltage to the desired low DCV
ncs Code: 4490-025 alarm setpoint. The setpoint must be between 8
and 38 volts.
0 0 @ @
5. Turn the adjustment potentiometer clockwise until
the potentiometer stops.
0
6. After one minute, the indicator on the ALM
0 for low battery voltage FLASHES. Press the
0 alarm silence switch. The low battery voltage
indicator should change from FLASHING to ON
0 CONTINUOUSLY.
0
7. Slowly turn the adjustment potentiometer
0 counterclockwise until the low battery voltage
0 indicator turns OFF
0 8. Replace the plug.

ClJERPllLARo
9. Disconnect the variable DC power supply and
l ...... P
t(ST
@ reconnect the wires to terminals 1 and 7.
i011049S5
Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust

o o @ @ SMCS Code: 1907-025
tration 193 900482185
m Module
lug
all alarm applications, the low DC volts alarm

80int is adjusted by a potentiometer that is A 1
,ted under access plug (1) on the rear of the 2
jule. The adjustment range is from 8 to 38 volts.
, factory setting of the alarm setpoint is 24 DCV
Ijustment Procedure
g00289497
3ain access to the rear of the ALM. Removal of Illustration 194
he ALM is not necessary unless removing the Speed Sensor
\LM is needed for access. All wiring remains (1) Speed sensor
;onnected to the terminals of the ALM unless the (2) Locknut
;tep notes otherwise. (A) Air gap
lemove plug (1) in order to gain access to the Note: The engine speed sensor is commonly
Idjustment potentiometer. Moisture may enter referred as a magnetic pickup sensor.
he ALM when plug (1) is removed. Remove
)Iug (1) in a dry environment. Remove the plug This adjustment procedure is for the engine speed
1 an air conditioned area if the relative humidity sensor.
,xceeds 60%.
1. Remove the speed sensor (1) from the flywheel
)isconnect the wires on terminals 1 and 7. housing. Remove all debris from the tip of the
;ecure these wires so that the wires do not speed sensor. Align a ring gear tooth directly in
ontact each other, ground or other electrical the center of the threaded sensor opening.
onnections.
330
2. By hand, screw the speed sensor (1) into the i0129863

hole until the end of the sensor contacts the
gear tooth. Starting Motor Magnetic
Switch - Test
3. Turn the sensor (1) in the counterclockwise
direction through 270 degrees (three-fourths (3306B and 3406C MUI
turn). Engines)
4. Tighten locknut (2) to 25 ± 5 N'm (18 ± 4 Ib ft). SMCS Code: 1426-081
Note: Do not allow speed sensor (1) to turn as SIN: 8NS 1-Up
locknut (2) is tightened.
SIN: 9ES1-Up
SIN: LRW1-Up
SIN: LRX1-Up
SMR
GENERATOR
SET
~'.- ....
CONTROL
(GSC) " RM-21
F4 S"R
K'
•• ~
R~3
1-,
RM-18
RM-6
--- .-
2 14
ESPB
.r
W ,,
'" ","
>
2~' i
, J
~
" "
~-~ ~-I,
,,, ,3 ,3
,,,
,,
,,,
,,
-i-
,,,
,,
,
,2 24 ,2
~
24
"
51 ARTING S1 ARTING
MOTOR TO leB2 MOTOR
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
2' 26
§J ~'2:J
90053135E
Illustration 195
System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR)
331
3, Connect a DC voltmeter. Connect the positive

cable to terminal TS 1-24 and the negative cable
to TS1-25 in the generator housing. If the second
magnetic switch is tested in a dual starting
motor system, then connect the negative cable
to terminal TS 1-26.
Note: The jumper wire of Step 4 can remain

connected for only ten seconds.
4. Temporarily connect wire 4 to the battery positive

.- terminal ("8+"). Disconnect this wire immediately
(il after the voltage is measured. Do NOT leave
the wire connected more than ten seconds.
11111~8111 The correct measurement changes from
approximately 24 DCV to approximately 2 DCV.
(il If the voltage is greater than 2.0 DCV, then replace

- the magnetic switch. If the switch passes the
requirements of Step 1 and Step 4, the switch
@
is functioning correctly. Reconnect the wires and
cables that were removed in this procedure.
tration 196 g00583676
::tion Box Without The Cover

3: junction box is located on the side of the generator terminal
.)
Starting Motor Magnetic Switch (SMMS).
J starting motor magnetic switches (SM MS) are

ld in a system with two starting motors. One
tch is used for each starting motor.
1St Procedure
From beneath the control panel, disconnect DC
connector 2 from the control panel. DC connector
2 is the left most connector when viewed from
the front panel. From beneath the control panel
use the 7X - 171 0 Multimeter Probes in order
to measure the resistance between connector
contact 6 (SMMS) and connector contact 11
("8-"). The resistance should measure the
following value .
• 26 to 33 ohms for single starting motor systems
• 13 to 17 ohms for dual starting motor systems
If the resistance is NOT correct, replace the

defective magnetic switch. If the resistance is
~orrect, proceed to Step 2.
Disconnect the cable that is going from the pinion

solenoid to the starting motor. Do this procedure
In both starting motors of a dual starting system.
332
i014Q0525
Starting Motor Magnetic

Switch - Test
(EUI Engines Only)
SMCS Code: 1426-0Bl
SIN: SKW1-Up
SIN: 6GW1-Up
SIN: BNW1-Up
SIN: BAZ1-Up
SMR
K4
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL RM-21
(GSC)
SMR
fJ K4
,+
RM-33 RM-6 RM-18
,-
2 14
[SPB Espa
tEl~W
,1
ST ARTING 5T ARTING
MOTOR TO CB2
MOTOR
MAGNE TIC (+BAT) MAGNETIC
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
25 26
PSI PS2
System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMA)

333
o 0
©
900737896
;tration 198
etian Box And The Starting Motor Magnetic Switch
:1 starting motor magnetic switches (SMMS) are 4. Temporarily connect a jumper wire from terminal
3d in a system with two starting motors. One 1 ("8+") to terminal 4.. Disconnect this wire
Itch is used for each starting motor. immediately after the voltage is measured. Do
NOT leave the wire connected more than ten
seconds. The correct measurement changes
ist Procedure from approximately 24 DCV to approximately 2
DCV
From beneath the control panel, disconnect
DC connector 2 from the control panel. From
If the voltage is greater than 2.0 DCV, then 'replace'
beneath the control panel use the 7X -171 0
the magnetic switch. If the switch passes the
Multimeter Probes in order to measure the
requirements of Step 1 and Step 4, the switch
resistance between connector contact 6 (SMMS)
is functioning correctly. Reconnect the wires and
3nd connector contact 11 ("8-"). The resistance
cables that were removed in this procedure.
should measure the following value .
• 26 to 33 ohms for single starting motor systems
f the resistance is NOT correct, replace the

jefective magnetic switch. If the resistance is
;orrect, proceed to Step 2.
Jisconnect the cable that is going from the pinion

1Oienoid to the starting motor. Do this procedure
In both starting motors of a dual starting system.
nside the junction box at the SMMS, connect

he positive cable of the multimeter to terminal
-S 1-24 and the negative cable to TS 1-25 in the
jenerator housing. If the second magnetic switch
s tested in a dual starting motor system, then
:onnect the negative cable to terminal TS 1-26.
~: The jumper wire of Step 4 can remain

nected for only ten seconds.
334
i01296386
Starting Motor Magnetic

Switch - Test
(PEEC Engines Only)
SMCS Code: 1426-081
SIN: LRY1-Up
SIN: 4BZ1-Up
'@
0
[fl
GENERATOR
SET
CONTROL
(eSC)
SMR
K'
""
R~21
S
SMR Ell
-
G-----:~-
RM-33 --'
f3
RIA-6
~ .....
R~16 @
0 [fl
,-
ESPB ON
---.....
ENCLOSURE
[SPB
2
ESP8
14
4 W n< 3.G ~
3. ~G Illustration 200 g00686852
~ ~
Junction Box For ETA Generators Without The Cover
(1) Starting Motor Magnetic Switch (SMMS).
" " Two starting motor magnetic switches (SMMS) are

,,I-~ ~-i used in a system with two starting motors. One
,,, ,,,
,3 :3 :
,
,,,
,
-i-
,,
,,
switch is used for each starting motor.
Test Procedure
,2 24 24 :2 _I
rL "
ST ARTING
1. From beneath the control panel, disconnect the
51 ARTING
MOTOR TO 'CB2 MOTOR jumper wire between terminal TS 1-4 and TS 1-5 in
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 the generator housing. From beneath the control
panel use the 7X -1710 Multimeter Probes
25 26 in order to measure the resistance between
connector contact TS1-5 and contact TS1-2. The
~ ~trJ resistance should measure the following value.
System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay • 26 to 33 ohms for single starting motor systems
If the resistance is NOT correct, replace the

defective magnetic switch. If the resistance is
correct, proceed to Step 2.
2. Disconnect the cable that is going from the pinion

solenoid to the starting motor. Do this procedure
on both starting motors of a dual starting system.
335 - I
1nect a DC voltmeter. Connect the positive i01400676

lie to terminal TS 1-24 and the negative cable
rS1-25 in the generator housing. If the second Starting Motor Magnetic
gnetic switch is tested in a dual starting
tor system, then connect the negative cable
Switch - Test
:erminal TS1-26. (3412C, 3508, 3512, and 3516
The jumper wire of Step 4 can remain
MUI Engines Only)
cted for only ten seconds. SMCS Code: 1426-0S1
nporarily connect a jumper wire from TS 1-1 to SIN: 5PW1-Up
1-5 in the generator housing. Disconnect this
a immediately after the voltage is measured. SIN: 6WW1-Up
NQT leave the wire connected more than ten
;onds. The correct measurement changes SIN: STW1-Up
n approximately 24 DCV to approximately 2
V. SMR
GENERATOR K'
voltage is greater than 2.0 DCV, then replace
SET •
CONTROL
(GSC) R~21
agnetic switch. If the switch passes the
aments of Step 1 and Step 4, the switch f3
SMR
;tioning correctly. Reconnect the wires and 5+ .... K'
....
, that were removed in this procedure. RM-33 ---.... RM-6 RM-18
5-
2 14
[) ESPB ESPB
2r---<
G W nL
2f, 3' J,
~ ~
"
,,-~,
"
e-i,,,
,,,
~
,3 ,3
,
,, ,,,
,, -
,,
~ ,2 2' 24 :2 _' ,1
"
STARTING STARTING
,) e62
MAGNETIC
SWITCH
MOTOR
1
(+BAT)
MOTOR
MAGNETIC
SWITCH 2
25 26
~trJ @tl
900442023
Illustration 201
System Schematic For Starting Motor Relay (SMR)
336
Illustration 202
900442025
Junction Box For Earlier Generators - Cover Removed

Located on exterior of generator terminal box.
(1) Starting motor magnetic switch
r- g
o 0
~
[
~
©
ll,
LY
gOO;
Illustration 203
Junction Box For Later Generators - Cover Removed
Located on exterior of generator terminal box.
(1) Starling motor magnetic switch
337
Two starting motor magnetic switches (SMMS) are iOl715308

used in dual starting motor systems, one for each
starting motor. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
Sensor - Test
Test Procedure
SMCS Code: 4490-081-NS
1. From beneath the control panel, disconnect DC
connector number 2 from the control panel. DC ENGINE 0 07P
v+
connector number 2 is the left most connector OIL
PRESSURE
when viewed from the front panel. From beneath SENSOR v-
® 52
(EOPS)
the control panel use the 7X - 171 0 Cable Probes
to measure the resistance between connector
contact 6 (SMMS) and connector contact
11 (8-). The resistance should measure the
""~~
following values.
• 26 to 33 ohms for single starting motor systems GENERATOR

0
SET
CONTROL (GSC)
0
GSC-8 <2>
OIL PRESSURE';< " .2
If the resistance is NOT correct, replace the GS~~1 .7
v-- ~
.2
defective magnetic switch. If the resistance is SENSOR
correct, proceed to Step 2. GSC~9 67
SENSOR v+:f<
2. Disconnect the cable going from the pinion
solenoid to the starting motor. Do this on both
starting motors of a dual starting motor system.
900537438
Illustration 204
3. Inside the junction box, at the SMMS. prepare System Schematic For Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (EOPS)
to connect a DC voltmeter. The positive lead
connects to wire 24 and the negative lead
connects to wire 25. (If a second magnetic ENGINE
COOLANT v+
o m
C
67l
---{~® II
switch is te'sted in a dual starti"ng motor system. lOSS "
SENSOR
0t8
then connect the negative lead to wire 26.) v_ a 62L
(EClS)
Note: The jumper wire of Step 4 4 energizes the

starting motor magnetic switch. The jumper wire can
remain connected for only ten seconds.
4. In the junction box. at the SMMS, temporarily

"'" "1 " t"J
[!gj
connect a jumper wire from terminal 1 (8+) to GENERATOR

terminal 4. Disconnect this wire immediately
SET
CONTROL (GSC) 0
after the voltage is measured (no more than 10 GSC-13
0
seconds). The correct measurement changes COOLANT lOSS " 62 0
from approximately 24 DCV to approximately 2 GSC-31
62
SENSOR v-~
DCV. 67
GSC-9 67
SENSOR V+r
If voltage is greater than 2.0 DCV, then replace
the magnetic switch. If the switch passes the
requirements of Step 1 and Step 4, it is functioning
correctly. Reconnect the wires and cables that were g00686791
removed in this procedure. Illustration 205
System Schematic For Engine Coolant Loss Sensor (EelS)
338
ENGINE
COOLANT v+ 0 67T
TEMPERATUE
SENSOR @ 62
(ECTS) v-
"'J~
GENERATOR
0
CONTROL
SET
(CSC)
GSC-7
TEMP_~' 16
0
0 50% 'SWC)'i
.,0,;., •.':::,"\:
l
;~:·iiH~!;~11~:.
COOLANT 62
67 DUTY >i ·c.C·i·.·
SENSOR v-
GSC-31
. 62 CYCLE
LOW
;(;hi!i
'----'
GS~9 67
SENSOR V-I- ;-._
System Schematic For Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

(ECTS)
TIME
ENGINE
v+ (£) 670
OIL
TEMPERATUE Illustration 208 g002884
SENSOR
(EOTS) v- ® 62
Pulse Width Modulated Signal
510 r-----cW ,.
~0>
This test is provided in addition to the CIO 100, CI
110 and CIO 175.troubleshooting procedures. SeE
Testing And Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Oiagnosti(
Code". The pulse width modulated sensors are
listed below.
GENERATOR
CONTROL
SET
(CSC) <S> • oil pressure sensor
GSC-14 I.
0
OIL TEMP ~ 62 • coolant temperature sensor
GSC-31 67
SENSOR v- J; 62
• oil temperature sensor
GSC-9 67
SENSOR V+ •
These PWM sensors produce a digital signal. In a
digital signal, the duty cycle varies as the conditiol
900529671 changes. The frequency remains constant.
Illustration 207
System Schematic For Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EDTS)
339
lie 30 Table 31
Sensor Specifications Sensor Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (EOPS)11) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)11)
And
>ressure (kPa) Signal Signal (Duty Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EOTS)11)
(psi) (VoltageW) CycleW)
DCV % Temperature Signal Signal (Duty
(OC) (oF) (Voltage)(2) DCV Cyele)12)
to 69 (0 to 10) 0.92 to 1.44 12.8 to 20.8 %
9 to 138 (10 to 1.44 to 1.92 20.8 to 28.1 -40 to -29 (-40 1.18 to 1.23 10.0 to 10.6
0) to -20)
38 to 207 (20 to 1.92 to 2.40 28.1 to 35.4 -29 to -18 (-20 1.23 to 1.30 10.6 to 11.6
0) to 0)
07 io 276 (30 to 2.40 to 2.89 35.4 to 42.6 -18 to -7 (0 to 1.30 to 142 11.6 to 13.3
0) 20)
76 to 345 (40 to 2.89 to 3.34 42.6 to 49.6 -7 to 4 (20 to 40) 1.42 to 1.63 13.3 to 16.2
0)
4 to 16 (40 to 60) 1.63 to 1.97 16.2 t021.1
45 to 414 (50 to 3.34 to 3.89 49.6 to 56.6
0) 16 to 27 (60 to 1.97 to 2.43 21.1 to 27.5
80)
14 to 483 (60 to 3.89 to 4.29 56.6 to 64.0
0) 27 to 38 (80 to 2.43 to 3.00 27.5 to 35.6
100)
83 to 552 (70 to 4.29 to 4.74 64.0 to 70.5
0) 38 to 49 (100 to 3.00 to 3.67 35.6 to 45.0
120)
52 to 621 (80 to 4.74 to 5.25 70.5 to 78.1
0) 49 to 60 (120 to 3.67 to 4.35 45.0 to 54.7
140)
21 to 690 (90 to 5.25 to 5.74 78.1 to 85.0
00) 60 to 71 (140 to 4.35 to 5.00 54.7 to 63.9
160)
The base frequency IS 350 to 650 Hz,
The voltages and currents are guidelines for troul;lleshooting. 71 to 82 (160 to . 5.00 to 5.58 •. 63.9 to 72.0
The voltages and currents are not considered exact. Tolerance 180)
is ±10%.
82 to 93 (180 to 5.58 to 6.05 72.0 to 78.6
200)
93 to 104 (200 to 6.05 to 6.42 78.6 to 83.8
220)
104 to 116 (220 6.42 to 6.72 83.8 to 88.1
to 240)
116 to 125 (240 6.72 to 6.90 88.1 to 90.6
to 257)
125 to 135 (257 6.90 to 7.05 90.6 to 92.7
to 275)
(1) The Base frequency is 370 to 550 Hz.
(2) The voltages and currents are guidelines for troubleshooting.
The voltages and currents are not considered exact. Tolerance
is ±10%.
The engine coolant temperature sensor and

the engine oil temperature sensor are the same
Caterpillar part. The two sensors are used
in different applications. The engine coolant
temperature sensor and the oil temperature sensor
have the same specifications.
340
Test Procedure • "OK": The voltage is from 7.5 to 8.5 DCV.

Proceed to Step 4.
Table 32
Tools Needed • NOT OK: The voltage is equal to the +
battery. The sensor supply is shorted'
9U-7330 Multimeter 1 to the + battery in the engine harness.
A multimeter is optional for Troubleshoot and repair the engine harnes:
frequency and duty cycle
STOP.
measurements.
7X-170 Multimeter Probe Group 1 • NOT OK: The voltage is not from 7.5 to 8.t
146-4080 Digital Multimeter (with RS-232 1
DCV and the voltage is not equal to the +
interface) battery. Proceed to Step 3.
3. Check The Status Of The Diagnostic Code.

This procedure requires the measurement of the
frequency and duty cycle of the sensor signal. Observe the GSC+ display.
Use the 9U - 7330 Digital Multimeter in order to
measure the frequency and the duty cycle. In order Expected Result: ACID 269 diagnostic code
to measure frequency, turn the rotary switch to AC is active.
volts. Then, press the "HZ" button once. In order to
measure the duty cycle, turn the rotary switch to AC Results:
volts and press the "HZ" button twice.
• OK: ACID 269 diagnostic code is active. Go
Note: The 6V - 7070 Digital Multimeter does to the procedure in Testing And Adjusting,
not measure the frequency or the duty cycle. "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". STOP.
However, the DC voltages are listed in Ihe Sensor
Specifications chart as an alternative to measuring • NOT OK: ACID 269 diagnostic code is NOT
the frequency and the duty cycle. The 6V - 7070 active. The harness has failed. Troubleshoot
Digital Multimeter can be used for measurements and repair the harness. STOP.
of the DC voltage.
4. Check The Sensor Signal.
1. Perform Initial Preparations.
The ECS remains in the STOP position.
a. Locate the suspect sensor.
a. Measure the frequency and the duty cycle of
b. Identify the sensor wires and connector the signal at the sensor connector. Conduct
contacts. See the preceding System the measurements from contact "C" to contac
Schematics. "8" of the sensor connector.
c. DO NOT DISCONNECT ANY HARNESS b. Make a note of the measurements.

CONNECTORS AT THIS TIME.
Expected Result: The measured frequency
d. Use the 7X -171 0 Multimeter Probe in order and the measured duty cycle should agree
to make future measurements by inserting with the values that are listed in the Sensor
through the back of the harness connectors. Specifications chart.
2. Check Sensor Supply Voltage. Results:
a. Turn the engine conlrol switch (ECS) to • OK: The measurements agree. The sensor
OFF/RESET. Then, turn the ECS to STOP. is functioning correctly. Proceed to Step 5.
b. Measure the sensor supply voltage at the • NOT OK: The measurements DO NOT
sensor connector. Perform the measurement agree. Proceed to Step 7.
from contact "A" to contact "8" on the sensor
connector. 5. Check The Signal At The GSC+ Harness
Connector.
Expected Result: The voltage should be from
7.5 to 8.5 DCV. a. Measure the frequency and the duty cycle of
the signal at the GSC+ harness connector.
Results:
341
• For the oil pressure signal, measure the Expected Result: For Step 7.c, the resistance
resistance from contact 8 to contact 31 . should be 5 ohms or less. For Step 7.d, the
resistance should be greater than 5000 ohms.
• For the coolant temperature signal, measure
the resistance from contact 7 to contact 31. Results:
• For the oil temperature signal, measure the • OK: All resistance measurements are
resistance from contact 14 to contact 31. correct. Therefore, replace the sensor.
STOP.
Expected Result: The measured frequency
and the measured duty cycle should agree • NOT OK: One or more resistance
with the values that were measured in Step 4. measurements are NOT correct.
Troubleshoot and repair the engine harness.
,Results: STOP.
• OK: The measurements agree. The sensor

iOl1Q4952
is functioning correctly. Proceed to Step 6.
• NOT OK: The measurements DO NOT

EMCP Electronic Control (AC
agree. The harness is faulty. Troubleshoot Transformer Box) - Replace
and repair the engine harness. STOP.
SMCS Code: 1409-510
Check The Status Of The Diagnostic Code,
a. Check if sensor diagnostic codes are still

active.
Expected Result: Sensor diagnostic codes

are still active.
Results:
• OK: Sensor diagnostic codes are still active.

The GSC+ may have failed. It is unlikely that
the GSC+ has failed. Exit this procedure and
perform this entire procedure again. If the
problem remains, replace the GSC+. See
Testing And Adjusting, "EMCP Electronic
Control (Generator Set) - Replace". STOP.
• NOT OK: If sensor diagnostic codes

are NOT active, check the connectors
and wiring. See Testing And Adjusting,
"Electrical Connector - Inspect". STOP.
Check The Engine Harness.
~. Disconnect the engine harness from the

sensor.
g00436522
1. Disconnect the GSC+ from the harness. Illustration 209
AC Transformer Box + (ATB+)
~. Check the harness for an open circuit. A
correct circuit will be approximately 5 ohms The ATB+ is located on the subpanel within the
or less. control panel.
I. Check the signal wire for a short circuit to the Replacement Procedure
+ battery. Check the signal wire for a short
circuit to ground. Check the signal wire for a 1. Shut down the engine. Remove the positive lead
short circuit to the sensor supply. A correct wire from the battery.
circuit will be greater than 5000 ohms.
342
2. Make sure that all wires at the terminal strip of the i01368~
ATB+ are marked with the respective termination

point. During reassembly, these wires must be EMCP Electronic Control (Bus
reattached to the correct terminal. Remove all Transformer Box) - Replace
external wires from the terminal strip.
SMCS Code: 1409-510
3. Disconnect the ATB+ connector from the harness
connector. SIN: 5PW1-Up
4. Remove all mounting nuts and mounting screws SIN: 6WW1-Up

that fasten the ATB+ to the subpanel. Remove SIN: STW1-Up
the ATB+.
SIN: LRW1-Up
~. Place the new ATB+ in the subpanel. Install the
mounting nuts and mounting screws. Tighten the SIN: LRX1-Up
mounting nuts and mounting screws.
SIN: LRY1-Up
6. Reconnect the harness connector to the ATB+. SIN: 4BZ1-Up
Reconnect all the wires to the terminal strip that
were removed. Reconnect the positive lead wire SIN: SAZ1-Up
to the battery. If necessary, see the Generator
"Schematics and Wiring Diagrams".
7. Program the bar code (calibration value) for the

voltmeter/ammeter into the GSC+. See System
Operation, "Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming
OP8".
8. If the generator set is operating in parallel with

another generator set and the voltmeter values
must match, then reprogram the AC offset. See
. System Operation, "AC Offset Adjustment OP10".
Illustration 210
Bus Transformer Box + (BTB+)
The BTB+ is located on the subpanel within the

control panel.
Replacement Procedure
1. Shut down the engine. Remove the positive lea

wire from the battery.
2. Make sure that all wires at the terminal strip of tr

BTB are marked with the respective terminatior
point. During reassembly, these wires must be
reattached to the correct terminal. Remove all
external wires from the terminal strip.
3. Disconnect the BTB connector from the harnes,

connector.
343
, Remove all mounting nuts and mounting screws

that fasten the BTB to the subpanel. Remove the
BTB,
Place the new BTB in the sub panel. Install the

mounting nuts and mounting screws. Tighten the
mounting nuts and mounting screws.
Reconnect the harness connector to the BTB.

Reconnect all the wires to the terminal strip that
were removed, Reconnect the positive lead wire
to the battery. If necessary, see the "Generator
Set Wiring Diagram" in Testing And Adjusting,
"~chematics and Wiring Diagrams".
344
101104951
Relay Module - Replace

SMCS Code: 4490-510
L
4 A A
5 : ;:Ib:
:: '@'
SECTION AA
Replacement Of The Relay Module

The Rear View of the GSC+
(1) Relay Module (3) Tape (5) D-Ring Seal
(2) Screws (4) Desiccant Package (6) Cable connector
Relay module (1) contains tile relays, fuses and Replacement Procedure
terminals that are used to operate external devices
of the EMCP 11+ system. Relay module (1) is a 1. Remove the positive lead wire from the battery.
component of the GSC+.
Reference: Special Instruction, SEHS9710, "Relay

Module Replacement".
345
Make sure that all wires at the terminal strips 101104954

of the relay module (1) are marked with the
respective termination point. During reassembly EMCP Electronic Control
these wires must be reattached to the correct (Generator Set) - Replace
terminal. Remove all wires from the terminals and
posts of relay module (1). SMCS Code: 4490-510
Remove ten screws (2) that fasten relay module
(1) to the GSC+. Replacement Procedure
Be aware that O-ring seal (5) exists. Partially 1. The new GSC+ must be reprogrammed after
separate relay module (1) from the GSC+. the new GSC+ is installed. If the GSC+ that
Carefully disconnect cable clamp and cable is being replaced is functional, then make a
co~nector (6) from relay module (1). note of the following items: hourmeter value, all
engine setpoints, and any spare inputs/outputs
On the PC board of the original relay module and that are programmed. See System Operation,
the replacement relay module, check that the "Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0" and
small jumper block (near the ribbon cable) is the System Operation, "Protective Relaying Setpoint
same. See Testing And Adjusting, "AC Voltage Viewing OP2-1".
Range - Adjust".
2. Shut down the engine. Remove the positive lead
Replace desiccant package (4) with the new wire from the battery.
desiccant package and tape that is included
with the replacement relay module. Attach the 3. Remove the harness connector from the GSC+.
new desiccant package in the same manner as A 4 mm hex wrench is required to turn the
the one removed. fastening screw.
,teo Do not remove the new desiccant package 4. Make sure that all wires at the terminal strips
m the protective container until immediately are marked with the respective termination
fore it is installed into the GSC+. Installing point. During reassembly these wires must be
, replacement relay module should take reattached to the correct terminal. Remove all
proximately 20 minutes. Longer periods of time wires from the terminals and from the posts of
I cause the desiccant package to become the relay module.
:urated with moisture particularly if in a humid
"ironment. 5. Remove the six nuts that fasten the GSC+ to the
front panel. Remove the GSC+.
Install new O-ring seal (5) in the groove of relay
module (1). Make sure that O-ring seal (5) is 6. Place the new GSC+ in the front panel. Install
seated properly. Align and reconnect cable the six nuts. Tighten the nuts.
connector (6) to the relay module (1). Install the
cable clamp. 7. Reconnect the harness connector to the GSC+.
Reconnect all the wires to the terminals of the
Place relay module (1) on the GSC+. Check relay module that were removed. Reconnect the
that O-ring (5) remains seated. Align the screw positive lead wire to the battery. If necessary, see
holes of relay module (1) and the GSC+. Install the Generator Set Wiring Diagram Testing And
and tighten ten screws (2) to 1.70 ± 0.25 N'm Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams".
(15 ± 2 Ib in).
8. Reprogram the setpoints, the spare
Reconnect all the wires to the terminals of the inputs/outputs, the hourmeter, the
relay module tilat were removed. Reconnect the voltmeter/ammeter and the AC offset
positive lead wire to the battery. If necessary, see adjustment. See System Operation, "Service
the Generator Set Wiring Diagram in Testing And Mode". Use the values from the original GSC+.
Adjusting, "Schematics And Wiring Diagrams". Refer to Step 1.
346
101236880
EMCP Electronic Control

(Generator Set) - Flash
Program
SMCS Code: 4490-591
Connection Procedure
This procedure is used to update the software for
generator sets that have an Electronic Modular
Control Panel 11+ (EMCP 11+) with Generator
'Set Control + (GSC+). There is a procedure for
connecting the service tools to the GSC+ and there
is a procedure for flashing the software.
Table 33
Tools Needed
152 - 7143 GSC Data Cable
171-4400 Communication Adapter II Group (includes
ALL of the following items)
171 -4401 Communication Adapter II (includes
CD-ROM and User Manual)(l)
160 - 0133 Data Link Cable 60.96 em (24 in)(l)
160 - 0141 Serial PC Cable762 em (25 1t)(1)
177 - 4595 Block/Foam (for carrying case)(l)
6V - 3072 Carrying Case(1)
NEHS0758 Communication Adapter II CD-ROM and
User Manual(1)
(1) Included In 171 ·4400, but may be ordered as a separate Item
347
348

349
elay Module on the GSC+ Control 1. Obtain a flash file copy on a floppy disk or a
UX terminal strip. CD-ROM. See Special Instruction, "Accessing
52 - 7143 GSC Data Cable
ersonal Computer.
Flash Software For Machines".
60-0140 PC/COMM Adapter Cable (formerly 7X-7425)
60-0133 Data Link Cable (formerly 139-4166 2. Find the ET directory by using the "File Manager".
71·4401 Communication Adapter (formerly 7X-1701) Open ET.
3: This procedure is for Generator Set Control + 3. Start "WinFlash" by double clicking on the
is mounted in a EMCP 11+ Panel. 24DCV must "WinFlash" icon with the pointer of the mouse.
lVailable from the panel. "WinFlash" is a part of the ET software package.
'erify that the generator set is not running. 4. After the start-up is complete, ET will
urn OFF the power to the EMCP II + panel automatically try to connect to the GSC+ through
ly ejisconnecting the negative terminal of the the communication adapter.
lattery.
5. The "WinFlash" program will display the serial
;onnect the communication adapter to the PC by numbers of any modules that are found on the
Ising the 160 - 0 141 PC/COMM Adapter Cable. data link.
;onnect the 160 - 0 133 Data Link Cable to the 6. Select the serial number of the unit that needs the
Data Link" port on the communication adapter. software update. Click "OK". The serial number
of the GSC+ that is desired can be obtained by
;onnect 152 - 7143 GSC Data Cable to the looking at the first value under OP2-2 in Service
'pposite end of the 160-0133 Data Link Cable. Mode. In order to obtain the value, press the
"Service Mode" key on the GSC+ once. Then,
;onnect the "Data+" and "Data-" spade terminals press the "SCROLL UP" key once. The "SCROLL
,f the cable to the appropriate terminals in the UP" key is also the "LAMP TEST" key. All GSC+
lUX terminal strip. The AUX terminal strip is units have a serial number suffix of "HA". This
)cated inside the EMCP II + Panel. Connect the can be used for verification.
Power+" spade terminal to "RM1" of the relay
10dule on the GSC+. Connect the "Power-" 7. Insert the floppy disk or the CD-ROM that
pade terminal to "RM28" of the relay module contains the flash file. Click on the "Select File"
,n the GSC+. .button and. open tt]e contents of the appropriate
drive. Select the appropriate ". fls" file. If the flash
3: For a switchgear conversion that contains the file is already on the hard drive, select the file
;+ control, the connection point for the "Data+" from the appropriate drive.
is GSC-19 on the 40 pin connector of the
;+. The connection point for the "Data-" wire is 8. If the generator set has an energized-to-run
iSC- 20 on the 40 pin connector of the GSC+. solenoid, proceed to 9. If the generator has an
spade terminals that are on the harness for energize-to-shutoff solenoid, wait for at least 70
:e wires need to be replaced with two 8T - 8730 seconds before proceeding to 9.
nector Socket. After the terminals have been
aced, the modufied portion of the harness can 9. Click on the "Begin" button. The flash process
emoved from the 40 pin connector by using the should begin. A bar that shows the progress of
- 9588 Wire Removal Tool. Contact GSC-2 and the update will be displayed on the screen.
>39 must be jumpered together.
Note: If power loss to the GSC+ occurs, the Flash
iet the engine control switch (ECS) to Update procedure must be re-started from the first
lFF/RESET. Connect the battery to the electrical step.
ystem again. Then, turn the ECS to the
;OOL/STOP position. 10. The display of the GSC+ will be blank and the
"Fault Shutdown" indicator will be blinking while
'erify that the GSC+ and the communication the software update is in progress .
.dapter are receiving power.
11. Do not disturb the process until the process is
urn on the PC. The operating system on the finished. Once the process is finished, the GSC+
omputer must finish loading. will automatically start working again. Exit the
"WinFlash" software.
Ish Update Procedure
l: Before starting tllis procedure, record
,oints PO 15, PO 16, and P026.
350
12. The GSC+ should now have the new software. BTB - Bus Transformer Box
In order to verify the version of the software,
go to the display at OP2·2. Scroll up one time. C -Common
Read the part number that is displayed. Check
setpoints P015, P016, and P026. Reprogram if CAM - Custom Alarm Module
necessary.
CAR - Custom Alarm Relay
13. Turn the engine control switch (ECS) back
to the "OFF/RESET" position and disconnect CB - Circuit Breaker
the negative terminal of the battery from the
electrical system again. Disconnect the cables CCM - Customer Communication Module
for the service tool. Remove the jumper wire from
terminals 2 and 39 on the 40-contact connector CDM - Engine Cool down Timer Module
if necessary. Close the panel.
CIM - Customer Interface Module
14. Reconnect the battery to the electrical system
and return the set back to service. CT - Current Transformer
CTR - Crank Termination Relay

101139058
Typical Generator D - Diode
Abbreviations DCV - DC Voltmeter
SMCS Code: 4490 DS - Disconnect Switch
A - Ammeter EClC - Engine Coolant Loss Sensor Connector
ACT - Actuator EClS - Engine Coolant Loss Sensor
ADS - Engine Combustion Air Damper Position ECS - Engine Control Switch
Switch
ECTS - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
AFCR - Auxiliary Fuel Control Valve
EFCR - Emergency Fuel Control Relay
AlM - Alarm Module
EFL - Emergency Fuel Light
AlS - Alarm Silence Push Button
EG - Electronic Governor (Speed Sensing)
AlT - Alternator
EGA - Electronic Governor Actuator
AR - Arming Relay
EGR - Electronic Governor Relay
ASOS - Air Shutoff Solenoid
EHC - Ether Hold-In Coil
ASR - Air Shutoff Relay
EHS - Ether Hold-In Switch
ASSV - Air Start Solenoid Valve
ENFR - Engine Failure Relay
ATB - AC Transformer Box
EOTC - Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Connector
AUX - Auxiliary Terminal Strip
EOTS - Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
AUXREl - Auxiliary Relay (Crank Termination)
EOPS - Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
AWG - American Wire Gauge
EPC - Ether Pull-In Coil
BATT - Battery
EPS - Ether Pull-In Switch
BCF - Battery Charger Failure Switch
ES - Ether Solenoid
351
,PB - Emergency Stop Push Bullon OCR - Overcurrent Relay
,L - Emergency Stop Light OCT - Overcrank Timer
- Fuse OP - Oil Pressure
;R - Fuel Control Relay OPG - Oil Pressure Gauge
;TM - Fuel Control Timer Module OPL - Oil Pressure Light
IB - Fuel Rupture Basin OSL - Overspeed Light
; - Fuel Solenoid OSR - Oil Step Relay
;OS· - Fuel Shutoff Solenoid OVR - Overvoltage Relay
'R - Generator Fault Relay PEEC - Programmable Electronic Engine Control
)L - Generator On Load PL - Panel Illumination Light
)V - Governcir PLS - Panel Light Switch
'HI - Ground Post (High Voltage) POS - Positive
'LO - Ground Post (Low Voltage) POT - Potentiometer
; - Governor Switch PP - Prelube Pump
;C - Generator Set Control PPMS - Prelube Pump Magnetic Switch
M - Governor Synchronizing Motor PPPS - Prelube Pump Oil Pressure Switch
OV - Gas Shutoff Valve PR - Preregulator
- Frequency Meter PS - Pinion Solenoid
'R - Kilowatt Level Relay PWM - Electrical Converter (Pulse Width

Modulated)
- Remote StarUStop Initiate Contact
RAN - Remote Annunciator
. Load Leads
ROM - Relay Driver Module
_ - Low Fuel Level Light
RPL - Reverse Power Light
.AS - Low Fuel Level Alarm Switch
RPR - Reverse Power Relay
, - Latching Fuel Control Solenoid
RPSR - Reverse Power Slave Relay
-AS - Low Oil Level Alarm Switch
RR - Run Relay
_AS - Low Water Level Alarm Switch
SASV - Start Aid Solenoid Valve
rL - Low Water Temperature Light
SATS - Start Aid Temperature Switch
\j - Manual
SAS - Starting Aid Switch
J - Magnetic Speed Pickup
SEC - Second
- Normally Closed
SHTC - Circuit Breaker Shunt Trip Coil
- Normally Open
SIG - Signal
_ - Overcrank Light
352
SL - Synchronizing Light iOO872:::
SLM - Synchronizing Light Module Symbols

SLR - Synchronizing Light Resistor SMCS Code: 4490
SM - Starting Motor
SMMS - Starting Motor Magnetic Switch

iJ OUTGOING/INCOMING PANEL TERMINAL
SMR - Starting Motor Relay o INTERNAL PANEL TERMINAL
@ POWER TERMINAL
SP - Speed Adjust Potentiometer
(l ATB TERMINAL
SPM - Synchronizing Parallel Module GI MARSHALLING BOX DC TERMINAL
H MARSHALlING BOX AC TERMINAL
SR - Slave Relay
JIf GSC 40 WAY HARNESS CONNECTOR
SS - Synchronizing Switch ~ GSC RELAY MODULE TERMINAL
T - Generator Line Leads ~ V PANEL 70 WAY CONNECTOR
TO - Time Delay Relay

-(- 0 DC CONNECTOR No.1 (BLACK)
-(- W DC CONNECTOR No.2 (GREY)
TSC - Transfer Switch Position Indicating Contact -(- @ AC CONNECTOR FROM AL 1. (GREEN)
V - AC Voltmeter
-(- 0 Oil PRESSURE ENGINE CONNECTOR
-(_. @ ENGINE TEMP. ENGINE CONNECTOR
VAR - Voltage Adjust Rheostat -(- @ MAGNETIC PICKUP ENGINE CONNECTOR
-(- 0 COOLANT LOSS ENGINE CONNECTOR
VR - Voltage Regulator -(- @ OIL TEMPERATURE ENGINE CONNECTOR
WT ~ Water Temperatur'l -(-
ITl 40 WAY ENGINE CONNECTOR
WTG - Water Temperature Gauge

-(-
mJ MARSHALlING BOX 40 WAY DC CONNECTO
-(- MARSHALlING BOX 40 WAY AC CONNECTC
till
WTL - Water Temperature Light -(- & PRELUBE CONTROL 2 WAY CONNECTOR
XDUCER - Transducer
Z - Zener Diode
i010536
Block Diagram of Generator

Set Control
SMCS Code: 4490; 7566
353
GSC+ GENERATOR SET CONTROL + (GSC+) RELAY MODULE

TERMINAL STRIP
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
MAG PU IN
),jAG PU GND
I NEUTRAL IN
rA IN
18 IN
Ie IN +BA 1. SW
COOL. TEMP SNSR IN +BAT. UNF'USED RM29
all PRESS. SNSR IN erR IN
+V SNSR OUT fCR IN
VA GEN IN ASR OR ISR IN
VB GEN IN SMR IN
VC GEN IN GFR IN
COOL. lOSS SNSR IN RR2 IN
OIL TEMP SENSOR IN RR1 IN
AUTO SYNC PSRl IN
AC GND PSR2 IN
VA BUSS IN +BAT. fUSED OUT
VC BUSS IN
EGC IN
CAT DATA UNf< +
CAT DATA LINK - > NOTE B EGC NiO OUT
GeM OAT A LINK +

GeM DATA LINK -
> NOTE C
FeR N/O OUT
erR N/O OUT
erR Nle OUT
SPARE F AUl T swt IN SMR NiO OUT
SPARE fAULT SW2 IN
ASR OR ISR N/O OUT
SPARE FAULT SW3 IN ASR OR ISR Nle OUT
SYNC CHECK SMR Nle OUT
SPEED ADJUST 1 GFR N/D OUT
SPEED ADJUST 2 RRl Nle OUT
SPARE FAULT SW4 IN RR2 N/D OUT
ROM OATA OUT
PSR2 N/D OUT
SNSR GND
PSRI Nle OUT
STOP sw IN FLY8ACK GNO
51 ART jRUN SW IN -BAT.
KW RELAY OUT
AtM DATA OUT
SPARE DATA OUT 1
CLOSE BREAKER OUT AC VOL T AGE RANGE SELECT
EMER STOP SW IN
OFF /RESET SW IN NOTE A
~¢
AUTO, SW IN VA SEl
2 AC GND
I c:::c 3
4
5
VB
AC
SEl
GND ABBREVIA T IONS
~1_1i
VC SEl IA - LINE A CURRENT
6
AC GND IB - LINE B CURRENT
IC - LINE C CURRENT
VA -LINE A VOLTAGE
VB - LINE B VOLTAGE
VC - LINE C VOL T AGE
EGC - ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR
NOTE A, THE RANGE SELECT JUMPER IS INSTALLED IN CONTROL
All CONTROLS TO SELECT THE OfF AULT 0-70DV ISR - IGNITION SHUT-OFF RELAY
INPUT RANG£. REMOVAL OF THE JUMPER SELECTS PP - PRE-LUBE PUMP
0-150V INPUT RANGE. ASR - AIR SHUT-Off RELAY
CTR - CRANK TERMINATE RELAY
Non B· FOR MUI APPLICATIONS, CONNECTS TO CCM. FCR - FUEL CONTROL RELAY
FOR EUI APPLICATIONS, CONNECTS TO ENGINE ECM. GFR - GENSET FAULT RELAY
PSR - PROGRAMMABLE SPARE RELAY
NOTE C, FOR MUI APPLICA lIONS, NOT USED. RR - RUN RELAY
FOR EUI APPLICATIONS, CONNECTS TO CCM. SMR - STARTING MOTOR RELAY
GEN - GENERA TOR
I - CURRENT
g00508636
tration 214
354
iOl053626
Connector Contact
Identification of Generator
Set Control
SMCS Code: 4490; 7553
SECTION AA
EXPLODED
o.00 "00 "00 0 0

"0 "0 gr0
0
"0 "0 "0 "0 "0 "0

a 9l<Q)!i~
"0 0 "0 "0
"0 "0 o
",\0 01I 91 ,\0 ,\0 n0"
Ol
, 0
o~r0,
0
II 0\ l
0
9 , o,
0
, , 0 0
L
Illustration 215 gOO4:

355
i01408736 Air Shutoff System For EUI Engines

Schematics and Wiring
Diagrams GENERATOR
SET
SMCS Code: 7566 CONTROL
CGse)
Air Shutoff System For MUI

Engines
B+
o
o AIR SHUTOFF
(FLAP) VALVE
~:)~]-----/16 CYLINDER ONLY
z TERMINAL BOX LOR/1 ASOR
,--------------------------------- Z;}A 1--i3-A-----~
Iw B-
i '\
,,
C
101
1 ,,
,
,, Z ASORl
,
,, ,,,
,,
,,, 0 1 2 :3 B-: 8-:
.---------~
,,,
, 1 Illustration 217
900688261
,------------- --------------------
,,
2 37:, 77
,
,,,
,
,,,
,
--CON-fRO-L--P-ANEL---W f -~ 7f -:-w
I
:
\I
f ;,- I
LJJ
0::
2 I 77 IS
t t ! t ': , >---
>--- '0-1
I --' : 1-:::>
/-- =:> , <C
~ +~ : f--
,0
L-'-. --1
W
m ILdW:::::: t
lZa:::::z I
: z «~:( :
,OQI I
:uU)u:
.------~
g00546141
Justration 216
356
2301 A Speed Control For The Electronic 1724/8290 Governor Fe

Following MUI Engines: 3412C, The Following MUI Engines: 3306
3508,3512,3516 3406C
WOODWARD ELECTRONIC FUEL GOVERNOR
(ISOCHRONOUS)
t:::::::l. ~ ~ C
Q 0 '\7 Q
START GAIN STABILITY RATED
tun SPEED
LIMIT
!301A cPEED C01HROl ~~~

'0 (J '0 (J '0 (J
o ,~ .. I~
1 2 .3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 12
LINK LINK
43 42
~1',¢' Sl' 95 rh
+
>-
~ ~ ~
>-
I
C==i
C==
00 00 ~
,
I +
'" '"
(L (L
'" '"
SPEED ADJU,
900688614 POTENTIOMET
Illustration 218
(2Kohm, 10 TURI
C -}-
@rt
~ MAGNETIC
{~'1 PICK UP No.2
g005~
Illustration 219
357
Motorized Governor For 3306, 3406, Start Aid System For The Following
,md 3412 MUI Engines MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C
~VE SUPPLr
~;J:~'::~ .. ______ .. _______~:9

(~
'"
~.
z '"
no:
0
~ f-
a r ./ :.),
., '-...... OfF
- to
.'u
>, /,
S 2
STAR r AID ~.Ol UlOiD VAL V[ X-- SASV
\ )
\ F- 60
SPEED· START AID T[MPERAIIJRE SWITCH SAT'S

LOWER/RAISE
SWITCH
MOT I MOT2
ENGINE -'IE
g00546207
Illustration 221
MOTI 1.1012
,;EtlERATOR
SYHCHRONIZING
MO I OR . .
lustration 220 900546205

358
Start Aid System For PEEC Engines Start Aid System For The Followin
And The Following MUI Engines: MUI Engines: 3508, 3512, 3516
3412C
ETHER START
GENERATOR SET CONTRul
(IF REQUIRED)
CONTROL (GSC) 3500 GENSETS
+V£ SUPPL Y B+ RM-35 RM-8 RM-24
l13 .. .... E3 .... /~ ",>-+~--,

...... n~(f,
SlUT
V V 1'5 V RR 'v'
SWITCH
',n f "o., - ~ ~ j::q,~

}~\(,::~---------------------\f
r /
'-.../ OF F
@J lX
ISOA
CASV
~s~
WI
S9
SATS
-BAl
<!l TO 51AR11II~
IIA~H£rlC
AN!) I'REtVllE
COHTRO~
1401
SWITCH
CIRcum
g00688,
Illustration 223
START AID SOLENOID VALVE
START AID TEMPERATURE

359
~enerator Running Relay And Generator Running Relay And

~eneral Alarm Relay For The General Alarm Relay For EUI And
:ollowing MUI Engines: 3306B, PEEC Engines And The Following
406C MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512,
3516
NO rE-
FOR EMCP II wITH NO ALARM MODULE THEN
RELAY" WILL ACflVATE ON SHUTDOWN ONU NOTE.
rOR EMlP II WITH NO ALARM M0[JUlE THEN
+ 8A TT UPON RELA'( WILt ACriVATE ON SHUTDOwn ONt)
rRECEIPT OF FAUt T
t SA TT UPON
rRECEJPT OF rAUL T
ALR;.3
:2
ALR
:10
..
SA T,T
!
tJ1
REMOlE CONTACTS
FOR GENERAL ALARM
6
,
n~
~4 ~5 ~b
.
REMOTE CONrA(;TS
FOR l;£NERAL ALARM
NOTE I
FOR [MCr II WITH NO ALARM MODULE CUNtJEc r T(I WIRE SA T1
NUMBER 6.
FOR [MCr II WITH ALARM MODULE OPTION CONNEC T TO
HORN St WITH WIRE NUMBER 60 tWfE •
NOTE ., FOR EMep II WITH NO ALARM MODULE COWIEeT 10 WJkE
NUMBER 6.
FOR EMcr II WITH tiD ALARM MODULE CONr~ECT 10 WIRE
NUMBER 2. FOR EMep II WITH ALARM MOOULE OPTION CONIl[cl TO
FOR EMcr II WITH ALARM MODULE, CONNECT TO HORN a·- HORN B+ WITH WIRE NUMBER to
WITH WIRE NUMBEk 59 NoTE ..
FOR EMer II WITH NO ALARM MODULE CONNEC r fO WIRE
NUMBER 2
FOR EMl"P II WITH ALARM MODULE. CO~iNEO TO II(iFiN B-
WITH WIRE NUMBER 59
, ,
JB
GRk/3
GRR n~
:10
~7 ~8 &~
2 .10
REMOTE CONI An~!
FOR GENERATOR RUNNING ,
BATT
L - BArT
90054 6208
stration 224
lIIustrallon 225
g00688345
II
I
I
360
Over/Under Voltage Relay For The Over/Under Voltage Relay For EI

Following MUI Engines: 33068, Engines And The Following MUI
3406C Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 351,
,.- _
0',
0- .,". w
" .'c:',
" J
~
crJl~8111Eli
O~Ef. UII[I[[,; J~ll TAljE
PROIECTlOIJ UNIT
(3 PHASE , 4 WIRE,
70 ~iJ 30 70
70 30 3u 7v
30 70
- &A Tl L COtINEt..f lu
APPROPRIA TE
f AUL T GIiANtlEL
900546211
Illustration 226
7uB $PI
((lImEn rv
APPROPRIA 1E
8AIT FAULT CHANnEL
I
361
Fuel Level Contactor For PEEC

Engines And The Following MUI
Engines: 33068, 3406C
LEVEL ;,WITCH
(TOP VIEW)
rtJo
L'}NU~ .. ! IU
APPRnPRIA TE
fAUl T CHANNll
SAT 1
f"lG
lOW-LOW
fun LEVEL
SWlTCH

c-
oo
iii
g.
men::i!El> a;i~
:::I c: -'c: ~'"
:;.
" to'C--
-''0 :::I" 0 co
'"'" :::1-,,3
'" CD'<~1Il
OJ
:::l
!'! "CD _ a.
(,,) 0 CD r;'
DC CIRCUIT
AC CIRCUIT (,,)~en
~
c
SATT F:!3 COPPER

0"""-"
O):::I"IIlC:
~IIJ S. !eo
CD
~.
:::l
co
_... y-' . 13:; f25

pos 8USBAR 4 mm;> (f)
~ ~ " :i' ~
(2A)
" 1<>""
E~N r"2 '21
""'",,
200v TO 250V (,,)
~ 2,tO III
ro
g.
I lOW I
'" (fA) lSA} 131 AC SUPPL 1 o·
LEVEL SWITCH
: LEVEL
:, ~~~iCH
: yR/l
J.- '1 81
E' 208
'" '"
0
:$o'tJ~ :::l
(TOP VIEW) I HIGH

PUMP
STOP
20~;95
OIL
NOTE CUSTOMER C';SLE TO (") :E c: CD-
~
: LEVEL
r
:13 '97 :96
COW/IeT DIRECll'!
6mm 1 TERMINALS
CIHO
;5'3 ~
'"' to '0 en
I rUEl OIL 205 '9
~~W..!TStl :14
:98 \PR/J
202 203 -11
s:~~
w! t~~1:~t:~?,~ c:,,-
-CABLE
ENTRY 83
" t,' t,'
PUfdP
RW~
PUI.IP
TRIPI
STOP tt: .,. ~~6·J'J
-c:CD
!eo 3
'~L~,~ t-ftJd
;X2 ,Xl
"- L-
1
TERMINAL BOX
L_t---,211 20; 210
PR1:2 ,UEL l...t \......

PUMP J -::!::-
53
" '"
LEVEL SWITCH
(SIDE VIEW)
~~JT ---a"'C-----------------______--t
TERMINAL
80)·
:2
MOT. V. ;;;;;
VAL V( t;.
1 ~
Rl
------------------,~~~~----~,~---------
363
Automatic Fuel Transfer System

With Free Standing Pumped Fuel
Supply For PEEC Engines And The
Following MUI Engines: 3412C,
3508,3512,3516
c
"'g ~~
g DC CIRCUIT
~.r::.
::J
" AC CIRCUIT (Q
~
'"
::J
Cl.
BATT
pas
LEVEL
F23
(2A)
SWITCH
84
"
207
W 1
{2A)W
COPPER
sus BAR
F22~r-:-:-=--!~'"
F2~
(6A)
:
, CUSTOMER
lODV TO 250V
~
c:
~.
::J
(Q
h
(TOP VIEW) 13' @ AC SUPPLY
OJ
(!)
g
\1:13 ,97
/L
~ I INOTE- CUSTOIJER CABLE TO o
~
AU' CONNECT DIRECTLy ONTO ::J
14 98 E' ___ 6mm 2 TERMINALS
- CABLE
ENTRY
84
202 203
PUMP
STOP XV
;lOW--tJtJ'
: LEVEL
,:
"
m y.
f.. ~
m mv : ElX 206 95
OIL
1208 113\ 1131
PRJ1
1 FUEL I V 96
: SWITCH ~ :1 81 205 9
"-
TERMINAL BOX
: HIGH
I LEVEL
PR/2 "
PR/3
'11
: FUEL I7
~~~I!S~ 83
2~f~8~~f~
~-'3' ~:= :J:j
MOT. !85
I A~u"p
VALVE ;Xl
, X I..¢>'RUN
:X2
® PUMP
TRIP I
STOP
:X2
SA TT 84
-0-:-:-
~l_:~ -~ ~~{~I-t~ LEVEL SWITCH
(SIDE VIEW)
NEG L_+-_211 209210
VI
[ill
X FUEl
PUMP ~M
= V~
13'
'"
TERMINAL
BOX
SW21 NOR~ALL Y CLOSED
51'1'11 ~ORIlAUY CLOSEO

<0
~ro
'"
"
<=
!l
OJ
g. m"::El>
~I: _.1:
(.QCD--
" -- - :::r 0
~ ~ cnto3
ml:CD!»
.. "'0- .....
DC CIRCUIT c,,)'C 0 n'
AC CIRCUIT
(.) -< :E "
0""1:
OlOO-CD
to .." 0 -
'----y-" I.,'E~"' '

BATT ''23 CUP PER-
PO':; BUS!lA!' ~
(,)-f""~
4 mm ~
l~
j 24',
F~21'1'! F21 C'l'STCiMEP
.j:>,::Tr-!»
I l(JW I 3
207 \2I-)I1](cA)
',r-
'OOv 10
SU;:'PL,
Z~O\
OCDCD~
LEVEL SWITCH
I LEVEL
\ 'VEL
I'
: yp./1 E"'----- 208 r---------r,-1,,;;--,
\13! - ,=
131
0 Ol,,<(I)
(TOP \' lEW)
: S.WiTCH
t HIC,H
: LEVEL
r
rl _1 81
"
PUMP
STOP
;97
2061,S5
OIL
'96
~,OT[' CUSTO~~f'
6
(~BLE
COWIEeT DIPEOl \
mm ~ TEPMlfll-L::
re
ON,';' -
(")O~CS'
O'''C cn
.."
I rUEL
~~!~£~ '"
"
OIL
+~906:
:D51' 9
ee. :EI:,<
~D2
" -·3 (I)

~ 'C -
::' t~~'t;.:'f5221"
-C,ll,t?,LE
Ei~TRY 183
~~UMP~·.I.~Uf.lp.
,«,RUN
~2
~~~C'
'.(?
~~',J~Jj,J
1'>1 .~
(.QCDCD
5:0.3
-c:
'-~'-3.5-?"~~
TERMII',AL BOX L-
llJ L
O/L -Z-
FUEL
PUMP
~ -;-\-9~- Sf
- - -C)-
:;11 209 21D
ML
!<
J-:::!:,..
83
'" LEVEL SVdTCi-I

(SIDE VIEW)
~~JT ---0"'"-----------____________--1
TEP.f.I!llAL
80).
col
"'5-
SHI11~1!~~U! wr~ ec
III
SWJI NuAWhl) CL!nw ::>
CL
~~zj !lO~"'All. y Cl~S[(..
§:
C
~"'I "()R~AU' ClOSED
"'
5-
'"~ ec
A
m Cfl
~
~
'"
gcu
00l
::>01
.,.~;~
'--
366

With Below Floor Level Pumped
Fuel Supply For PEEC Engines And
The Following MUI Engines: 3412C,
3508,3512,3516
I
I
I
OJ
g
"
~ DC CIRCUIT
AC CIRCUIT
F::?3 COPPEF
~3~T
1 E4
--0 EO
, ;'A,I 8USBA~ 4mm< l::(C
207 [,'}lm F:n

(6A) m ''-0 AC
CUSTOMER
:OOv TO 250v
]" ~_ _ _-,1.!.3 SUPPL i
LEVEL SWITCH WI
~L
(TOP VIEW)
13
NOTL CUSTOMER CABLE TO
r-,I
AU' 97
14 CONNECT (\IRECTl f ONTO
E mm < TERMINALS
~"J1
Oil
-
CABLE
E'\!TR)
:'lOW
LEVEL WtJ
:
.3
. [!]
x~
V 120~'95 Oil
20B 1131
131
PRJI
l
I FUEL
SWITCH
:
'
'I
• 81
20" :9(;
• 9
PRJ:)
TERMII,AL BOX !
I
HIGH
L[\'EL ,"
: FUEL
~~::!~~~ ~~~
:i f~8ft'~
§it- ~~ ~ :~):J
Xl Y1
PUMP
, ,6..·PUMP
X>'RUN
·X2
® TRIP/
STOP
"
BATT 84
'E"_:~ -~ ~]aJ
211 209210
LEVEL Sl'nTCH
(SIDE VIEW)
!IEG "--+--'
I
TERMINAL
BCIX
v% FUEl~
PUMP~
col
~
m1 I j 13, 5'
cc
IlJ
"a.
~
c
(J)
'"~ s-
co
ro ({)
2l CD
ro
~
aw
00l
" ....
368

With Gravity Fuel Supply For The
Following MUI Engines: 3306B,
3406C
DC CIRCUIT
rl0\V-- -
: LEVEL PRI I
I FUEL
LEVEl. 'SWITCH : SWI rCH+--0-""'-:""-"
(TOP VIEW) : HIGH
t LEVEl LEVEL SWITCH
~ FUEL (SIDE VIEW)
~~~I!~~
TERMINAL -
BOX
-(ABLE
ENTRY "
TERMINAL BOX
83 PR/2
7
85
MOT "-
VALVE!5 MV
'-----','
Illustration 233 900546:

369
~utomatic Fuel Transfer System

lVith Gravity Fuel Supply For PEEC
:ngines And The Following MUI
:ngines:3412C,3508,3512,3516
DC CIRCUIT
F.!5
~6r --O>-"--iE3B------------~
lCAI VIr
[3
LEva SWITCH
(TOP VIEW) LEVEL SWITCH
(SIDE VIE W)
IL;)W-- 3
:lEVEl
I FUEL
: SWITCH
J~R/l .6 TERMINAL -
81):(
- I~A8l
EIHRY
E : filCH
I LEVEL
: FUEL
~~~I!~~I
PR/2
B3
TERMII,Al BOX MV
:1 MUT.
VALVE
Z~JT --~-----------~~ ___
900688393
lustration 234
370
Battery Charger, Jacket Water

Heater, and Space Heater For The
Following MUI Engines: 3306B,
3406C
HlCPU PANEL 6mm z
COPPER eUSBAR
2 J
no
~
FOB
{:!Al '"
(SA) (2A)
,,
JJ6
US
liriK
'" 1141
"6
,,
1 tllHE CUSTOIJER CABLE TO
G£N£R-
AfOR "' GENfR-
ATOR
CRn "
,, COtmECT DIRECrU ONTO
{i mm ~ fERMIUM S
HEATER :H4 HEA TER
137 137
,
JACKET WATER HEATER
GErlfR- 140
ATOR
HEATER
lIUK
OR
BLOCI'. HEA fER!
,.]Il~. ('ROUIID
ENGltiE HEATER OPTlOII
GENERATOR HEATER OPTION
Illustration 235 90054622E

371 -r
attery Charger, Jacket Water

~ater, and Space Heater For The
112C
(<lPPER OII~f1A1?
U~ WSl\llAlR
£l,ICf'1I PAIl[t'>
f 16
l~A)
f>7
(SA) '"
(2A) 200V TO
AC WPPl Y
2~OV
, I"
.~.
'" ,114 I 1134 '"
,,, I NOTE lU:.lIiM[k CA!JL~ 10
COtHJEe1 DIR£CTl r lItlTO
, I 6 rmn ~ TERMINALS
, ,}6 ,,, I JAr,;f:(1 WA TEll HlA JEll
CRII I
Vx i:
m,,,:: ---- ------1-~'- -- -~;- --- J:
Z20\240VAC
140 1142 13~

SPACE 137 :a:,
"'
HEAT[R ,
Q
LINK
EtWIN£ t1[A1ER OPWIN
SPACE HEATER
U01E bA fU~E fOR SA BAfTlRY CHARo"tR

lOA FV~E NE[[)£O FOR lOA BATTERY CliARo,;ER
g00688417
Ir~tion 236
372
Battery Charger, Jacket Water

Heater, and Space Heater For 3500
Engines
copp ER 8US!lAR
'"~
no
(" '"
(" '"
(OA '"
(32A
'"
(32A '"
,",,,",,
lODV TO 25011
I.e SUPPLY
,,. '" >if J
'" '" '" '" '" '"
NOTE:
CUSIOr.lER CABLE TO
ENTER aIR [eTl Y ONTO
TERIHNALS
136 ~137
~I~'" ,,,,
I~" J. V
IWt
~ " '"
ALREADY
FITTED AS
STANDARD
'" '" '"

,,.
'" '" '"
JACK £1 WATER HEATER
,,. ,-
'" '" '" " '" '" '"
./
/'
~-
-220\2"O~ ,5-
:A2
"
"
" "
,. <C "
.---'
" t,
LtV Ii
". ~
~
AL TER :Hl :HJ ALTER '" '" '" '" '"
Pc
NATOR
HEAT'E'!! :H2
• 11l1K
:1014
NATOR
HEATER
- hENGINE h
t::Y'
At TER- [NGINf:
NATOR JACKET JACKET
V lGJ
CONST "NT VOLT ACE
HEATER WATER WATER
, , '"
BATTERY CHARGER
HEATER HEAlER
E3 36 }---(~~ -240 No.1 No. 2
(oj
"I>-~I' '"
6' ~- "':0 '" '" '" '"
g007377(
Illustration 237
. I
373
iround Fault System For PEEC

:ngines And The Following MUI
:ngines: 33068, 3406C, 3412C
t!OI( If 4 ~ULt a~EAHR miLO

CHAtII,[ II to 10
~ P0U IlIl(A~ER OPHOI1Al
,__ ~__--\_,,,,-__'_"R_"_~V_U~l[ '_~ _;l:Sr~ _~_'____________________

" +r_'~'~""[[ REf,"" 1
.
G
'0 I
~~~,,~----+-~----------------------~I~~
* II
u
" 0
lJ
®
@
I ~ I
I I
UI ff2
~__.!"~B r;;: ~ - -?i2?~t~ ~ ,.

,I ...
I
C/ ~-oc WG
I ffU
'~£iEN~ER ~_~UlmE ... l Tv APPRO~RIA1(
A2
., RlM 4/0) tv
,
•- r.ROUtID f Alii T R A FALit r <.;HMmEl f
;--~ "'
126 125 1l0lE ... 1,
IRANSfllRIACR
2SHI2~O VAC WIRE tlO 125 fOR Hm VAl
IPH SO/bOHl orIJERWJS( WIR( NO 115
(~60 VAC Ollll)
IDS 1I~
CORE
~ALANC£ 1U
" 12
BREAKER
BOX
13
N
E
(" '"
L ~oov $Y~mIS
200V SrSIEMS
- IIEUTRAl
flJ~HI TJ PHASE
g00546227
Jstration 238
374
Ground Fault System For EUI

Engines And The Following MUI
Engines: 3508,3512,3516
NOl( If 4 POLE 8RE~KER FillED

\ ""'ICE"', 10 4 POLE 6REAKER OPTIONAL
r¥
(SEE IIOTE REF.AOIj
"
PROJECTION C.T.s
l "
•)1"
pO
,
y
®
\ " ,"
'f< 1* 1 " ®
\" · ~l m
1* 1 u @
"E
"
~: ·, )~ '" !\ 1 ;{- 1 " •
" en
/I\ 1, I
I E
•
l-EF1m ~
NEUTRAL EARTHING LINK
rACTORY nnED I
24V DC
SHUNT I
I L~C21
TRIP ,Cl
~
--=-0
~ -'
Ef' EF2
- -
~m"
22 21
" 2""i2l
r,;1' JO
EARTH fAULT RELAY ~_DC tlEG
~_CONN(Cr TO APPROPRIATE
A2_ A1 'Efti' I fAULT CHANNEL
115 1111
:\0
-- ,
'6 :2
115 108
NEUTRAL fUSED T1 PHASE

..
g0068842{
Illustration 239
,i
375
lelay Driver Module For The

'ollowing MUI Engines: 3306B,
406C
l-
'12 f-----! FlO L
Ii3 12
R9E~ I-
"is ~ F9 11
16
R8Et~ =!-J
-
10
~ F8
R7
E
~
19
~
-
9 U I
~
2?
F7 r- 6 6 ( (
14 13 12 10 9 8
R6E 23
~ ~ F6 -
8-
"
~ RELAY DRIVER MODULE
RsEu ~
.~ f-
7
@ @
~ F5
6
E ~
28
R4 f-
3D ~ F4 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
f,' - 0 0 9 +
R3E~ ~
-
~
4
~ F3
I-
~
E 34
~
R2 3
~ F2 -
E 37
~ 2
r
R1
~ ~, Fl - r ~
:'c2 1
c2-, f-
RELA Y BOARD ,.} ~~ ~ ~~

ASSEMBLY
GENERATOR GSC-30 •
SET 8-
RDM
CONTROL DATA
(GSC) OUT
Y ~
v
RM-12 FlO
RM-39
+BAT
V
~
Istration 240 g00546228
1
))
1
1
1,
J
1!
i
., ~
376
Relay Driver Module For PEEC And

EUI Engines And The Following
MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512,
3516
'-
r'12 - - '
r;-:, FlO L
12
RYE~ -
~ ~ F9 11
R8 E:g16 ~ I-
10
E~
F8
R7 ~19
~~
-
-
9 J I
I~ 6
F7
~ ( ( (
R6Eg
24 ~
8 f-- 14 12 11 10 9 8
F6 l-
. "s RELA Y DRIVER MODULE
R5E~ ~
7
'- @ @
g F5
6
R4
Eg28
-
~~ F4 5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+
R3
Eg
31 - 0 0 )
9
~
~
4
~ F3
-
R2 E34
~ 3
~~ F2 -
R1
E37
~ 2
~.
~ F1 I ~
RDM
~ 1
c.!,
RELAY BOARD
-
~
\41
[D1 ~ •
ASSEMBLY
V RDM
GENERATOR GSC-30 ~
SET RDM
B- DATA
CONTROL OUT
(GSC)
Y .Ai;.
V
RM-12
~
F10
RM-39
+BAT
At..
V
illustration 241 g006S8 l

377
IFPA 99 Alarm Module For All

:ngines
@ @ 0 0
. .:" ~ 1J@ HORN 9 - I

14 3h
';0 b.JUflK
"1J"~1 ~DC
@ '<'''''''''
"., 4 I SPARE F AUt. T ItJPUT lLt.D 1)
@ C' '11 hLiNfi

I ~
~SPARE
RI':::E:E E_~7 -
. FAULT INPUT (LEO 8)
2 9
@ J 10 :8 0 7~ £flOW FUEL LEVEL
@ ".
fo"
4 II
i
"," 5 12 SWITCH 1J
o G 13 ALARM 0
DA f ALINK
90 L~
I
121 20 LAMP TEST
(If REQUIRED)
7 I' I
'0 .,,""'
,ou'«
CD
o TERN
I
No
I (Gsc3 I' '~
I
©\ @ J@ I NO :ON
0 I
I
I I I
@ @ 0
°0 0
I
I I I ,I
(FRONT) (REAR)
Jstration 242 900546229
378
Custom Alarm Module For All

Engines
o o
I~H:;CO;";'-;O;;N--;;I4-:,~___6!l9L..1b~..:;---',16--- SPARE f AUl T INPUT (LED I)
fiRST
R~139~:! :Joe
+1 1~~ ~:::~ :;~t: II~:~: tt:~ ~:
ALARM
MODULE 111.127
~7
;4
I: - 'Il~SPARr fAULT mpur (LfO 4)
;3 r-- SPARE
r--
FAUL 1 INPUT (LEO
SPARE rAUt T lupur (tEO 6)
~)
68,5?-SPARE FAULT INPUT (LED 7)

ALARM YUTE .13 c "L'R" 90 ~ -13
. .6 ~ SPARE FAULT INPUT (LEO 8)
"" "
L _ _ _ _--'OATAUNK O----OL'~14
_ _:;'~LAMP TEST
(Ir REQUIRED)
,
~o
,
, ,
:W,
° ,
,
°0 'I ,
,
,
,
EKE
o o lllilli '~
(FRONT) (REAR)
900546230
Illustration 243
379
lad Sharing Module For The

)/lowing MUI Engines: 3412C,
;08, 3512, 3516
-1l1tN
;0'r .,.
'ii~<
"0
n
, r
v
r
"
rn,
,00
OCO
O~
0
r
M
•
g00688596
tration 244
380
Load Sharing Module For PEEC

And EUI Engines
CIRCUIT
WOODWARD
'~CO~______________________~+--4~-f-~+-_8~R~~ Ij
GE;NERATOR \- FlO
') AD £ -
=
LOAOSHARE
MODULE
4P-0319 MAIN BUS
AO
BO
CO
I-- A18-111311
f - ATB-T12
f - ATB T13 50 40 H }
TO VOL TI.4ETERS, ECT.
ON SWITCHBOARD
(OPTIONAL)
AO CURRENT XfORMER !.....- TB 51
AO AMI.1ETER - ATB 51
80 CURRE;NT XfORt.lER TO AMMETERS, ECT.
- TB-52
80 AMMETER f-- ATB 52
ON SWITCHBOARD
(OPTIONAL)
CO CURRENT XfORMER f-- T8-53 }
I- •
CO AMM£TER
LOAD SHARE (-t)
LOAD SHARE (-)
10
11
ATB 53
+>
-
LOAD SHARING LINES
COMMON TO ALL UNITS
LOAD SHARE SHIELD GND 12 OPEN fOR DROOP
DROOP SWITCH CONTACT A 13
DROOP SWITCH CONTACT B o--------::L.. AUXILIARY CONT ACT.::t
14
95-130 .VAC JUI.1PER 16

190-260 VAC JUMPER 16
PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL (-t) 19
PWM OUTPUT SIGNAL (_) 20
PWM OUTPUT SHIELD GND
LOAD SIGNAL (-t) FOR SETUP ONLY
21
22 +> LOAD SIGNAL
LOAD SIGNAL ( )/SPM SYNC SHIElD eNO 2>
SPM SYNCHRONIZER INPUT (+)
SPM SYNCHRONIZER INPUT ( )
24
25
+>
- (FOR snup ONLY)
SPM SYNCHRONIZER INPUT
(OPiIONAL)
SPEED TRIP POT HIGH 2. cw SPEED TRIM
SPEED TRIM POT WIPER 27 POTENTIOMETER
SPEED TRIM POT LOW 28 (OPTIONAL)
10K, 10 TURN
NOTES:
£ WITH A BALANCED THREE PHASE LOAD AND UTILITY POWER FACTOR, THE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS SHOULD BE WlRED IN THE ,CORRECT POTENTlAl LEG
AND MUST BE PHASED AT THE CONTROL AS fOLLOWS:
PHASE A, POTENTIAL TERMINAL

'.
WITH RESPECT 10 NEUTRAL,
WITH cr TERMINALS 4 TO 5.
IN PHASE
PHASE 8, POTENTIAL TERMINAL 2. WITH RESPECT 10 NEUTRAL, IN PHASE

WITH CT TERMINALS 6 TO 7.
PHASE C, POTENTIAL TERMINAL 3. WITH RESPECT 10 NEUTRAL, IN PHASE
WITH CT TERMINALS 8 TO 9.
~ POWER SOURCE CURRENT TRANSfORMERS SHOULD BE SIZED TO PRODUCE 5A

SECONDARY CURRENT WITH MAXIMUM GENERATOR CURRENT. CT BURDEN IS
ESSENTIALLY 0 VA.
& CONTACTS TO CLOSE WHEN BREAKER CLOSES .
.&. THIS CONTROL CONTAINS INTERNAL BURDEN RESISTORS. THESE BURDEN

RESISTORS MUST BE CONNECTED ACROSS POWER SOURCE CURRENT
TRANSfORMERS WHENEVER UNIT IS RUNNING TO PREVENT LETHAL HIGH
VOL lAGE FROM DEVELOPING ON LEADS TO THESE TERMINALS.
&" JUMPER 15 TO 16 AND 17 TO 18 WHEN POTENTIAL INPUT AT TERMINALS

1 lHRU .3 IS 95 TO l30VAC PHASE TO PHASE (50-400HZ).
~ JUMPER 16 TO 17 WHEN POTENTI AL INPUT AT TERMINALS 1 THRU .3 IS 190

TO 260VAC PHASE TO PHASE (50-400HZ)
£ POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER BURDEN IS 5VA PER PHASE WITH 230VAC INPUT

AND 2.5VA PER PHASE WITH 115VAC INPUT.
dh. CONTROL SIGNAL LINES SHOULD BE TWISTED PAIRS. SHIELD IS

TO BE TIED TO GROUND AT MODULE END ONLY.

381
dditional Connections For

ptions On PEEC Engines Without
Elralleling ADDITIONAL WIRES LOCATED
IN MARSHALLING BOX/PANEL
CONNECTING LOOMS FOR
OPTIONS.
V)-2!...c L:.I
"" 71 (;j
\7 ~'=@"--_-"-<'.~
W)2L(:~E1=--_~,z~
w)-!!.{.=[]"----_---"-"r;j
W)-!!.{=ra"----_~"r;j
W) '1i'
(~
114
em 1~7 8
""
c"'" ~ 8
em 201 B
em ZOJ B

382
Additional Connections For

Options On PEEC Engines With
Paralleling
r-----------.,
IADDITIONAL WIRES LOCAT 9D
1 IN MARSHALL ING BOX/PAN~L
ICONNECTING LOOMS FOR
IOPTIONS.
W7I1ill
)-'-'-( 71~
W)-"-'(
84 113 84~
1 WH [ill 12~
1
1
1 v;;;y )-'-'-(
8I [lJ] 1
1
81~
1
I· W,,1m
)-'-'-( "~
1
1 1
1 V) 73 c~ 73
B 1
1
1
1
W) 75
c~ "B 1
1
1
V) " C~" B
1
1
1 V) 79 (~ 79 B 1
1 1
1
W) '01 C
m207 B 1
1 136 'V') I"
C .
~136
B
1
1° 1
1 "W') '" C[i]"'B 1
1
: V) "3
C
rn203 B 1
1 V' )-'-'{
70B G 708~
1
1 1
1 "W'"B
)-'-'-( "r;; 1
1
1
V87 lEI
)-'-'-( 87 m
1 V'
88 IiEII
)-'-'-(
88
m
1
1 V
8' Ifill
)-'-'-( 8'm
1
1
V) 206
C
~206
B
10137V) 137 C~I37B
1 V 401 ~401
1 ) C B
1
1
V )
'" C~402B
1 131V)
1°
131 C~'3IB
L ___________ J
Illustration 247 gOO689353

383
Motorized Circuit Breakers

169 - 4496 Motorized Circuit Breaker
(MCCB)
~~_'_' ____---o-I~
I~-'-'--'~'~~-J
10fi
cH~IIGE II - TO
A H
/ 8 [=it;;!C= ~~-"4J
_",_11... /
-,,l H r __ r'-------~-----~-------",.
t" l.'.,.
eo,," "" "'"
rRO~ (;(~(RHOk 1 -v
-v
1/
II ------------------C-'
r-.--------I-~
---~--~--t_. ~-----~II ' .
LJ .•
-v ----'~,.
IS1 410 158 II
C [ __"_7~----I~a4 HOTOR
b-2!~~~4 <:-PEII
3412C P£EC, 3-412C MUI

4BZ02100-UP AND 3406[ ONLY
~D~[m.~;--;~"s11--: l'il 410 I ~B II
OFJ :
-------------------- --~
E [IS~ 1$') DAl eUlS( I
~BI
I rARIH
"n[?_5~ -= I
f [ III 81.8 III OAI IIEUIRAl
C' TlPE HC>TOftl/E(l DRUt.(R
REFERENCE 3412C PEEC 3412C PEEC

NUMBER AND MUI AND MUI 3406E (All)
4BZOOOOI-4BZ02099 4BZ02100-UP
A REF. E-l REF. 0-12
B REF. E-2 REF. A-12
C REF. E-3 REF. A-1\
0 N/A REF. B-l1
E REF, E-3 REF. B-1\

F REF. E-3 REF. 8-09
G REF. E-4 REF. B-11
H REF. A-2 REF. G-12
I REF. E-2 REF. B-l0/B-l1
900717063
Illustration 248
I
384
169 - 4497 Motorized Circuit Breaker

(ACB)
/lOTE If ~ POLE 6R(A~ER rlTT(D

CHMIG!: II __ TO
,
'"
,
"
,,7
/ REF.
B[=
~!.o-
-o~
- ,:'I
l~1
.11,.
l~ <,j
;1 "[
" -
"7 ~ ~
", 1 ,"
I
I " " " "
•
,
'" '" '"
'" '" (SA)
REF. C [- " I" , "I

'" 1S1
'" IS.
"
-------------------------------- -------- -- -
J41Z.c PEEC ANO
4BI0210D-UP AND 34D5E ONLY
""I
REF. D [- ", '" " "
157 410 158 N
REF. E [- '" I 59 A4 XF f-'."'6---j I I I I ,
"..I"I "" JI
REF. I
REF. F [- -o-U 0A
AIR CIRCUIT BREAK R
MOTOR I ZED
REF. G [- -o--.!,"-,,'------....!!..!I'"
CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM REFERENCES

REFERENCE 3412C PEEC 3412C PEEC
NUMBER AND MUI AND MUI 3406[ (ALL)
4BZOOOOI-4BZ02099 4BZ02100-UP
A REF. [-1 REF. 0-12
B REF. E-2 REF. A-12
C REF. E-3 REF. A-II
0 N/A REF. B-11
E REF. E-3 REF. B-11
F REF. E-3 REF. B-II
G REF. E-4 REF. B-09
H REF. A-2 REF. G-12
I REF. E-2 REF. 8-10/8-11
g007170~
Illustration 249
Generator Set Wiring Diagram For

The Following MUI Engines: 3306B,
3406C
385
900546232
ustralion 250
386

The Following MUI Engines Without
Paralleling: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516
387
900689066
Hlustration 251
388

3412C (4BZ1-02099) MUI Engines
With Paralleling
. .
389
g00717474
stration 252
390

3412C (4BZ02100-UP) MUI Engines
With Paralleling
, ,
391
gO0738872
stration 253
392

The Following MUI Engines With
Paralleling: 3508, 3512, 3516
393 '1
Testing and Adjusting Section i
900734019
Iration 254
394
Generator Set Wiring Diagram

For 3500 EUI Engines Without
Paralleling
395
900717520
Jstration 255
396

3500 EUI Engines With Paralleling
397
g00733971
stralion 256
398

3406E Engines Without Paralleling
399
g00716855
ustration 257
400

3406E Engines With Para"eling
. .
401
I
i
I
,I
,
, I
g00716832
stralion 258
402
Generator Set Wiring Diagram

For 3412 PEEC Engines Without
Paralleling
403
I'
I'
f
I'
900717526
Jstration 259
404

3412 (4BZ1-02099) PEEC Engines
With Paralleling
405
g00717527
ustralion 260
'i
406

3412 (4BZ02100-UP PEEC Engines
With Paralleling)
. .
407
'I
t,
[ I
, I
ill
I. I
',I
I II
III
I
g00738871
ustration 261
408
i01386046
Service Record
SMCS Code: 4490
Table 34
Service Table - Record Of Setpoint Values
Generator Description: Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part Number., etc ••
Engine IGenerator Programming OP5-0

Setpoint Specified Value Actual Valuel1) Setpoint Description Possible Values Default Value
POO1 Fuel Solenoid Type o = ETR, 1 = ETS 0
P002 Units Shown o = Eng, 1 = metric 0
P003 Shutdown Override For o = shutdown. 0
Engine Fault 1 = alarm
P004 Shutdown Enable For 0= alarm, 0
Sensor Fault 1 = shutdown
P005 Coolant Loss Sensor o = w/o sensor, 0
Installed 1 = w/sensor
P006 Shutdown Override For o = shutdown. 0
Coolant Loss Fault 1 = alarm
P007 System Voltage 24 volts or 32 volts 24
P008 This Setpoint Is Not Used. NA NA
P009 Number Of Ring Gear 95 to 350 teeth 136 teeth for
Teeth MUI and PEEC
engines. 1.83
.' teeth for EUI
engines.
P010 Engine Overspeed 500 to 4330 rpm 2120 rpm
P011 Crank Terminate Speed 100 to 1000 rpm 400 rpm
P012 Oil Step Speed 400 to 1800 rpm 1350 rpm
P013 Low Oil Pressure Shutdown 34 to 420 kPa 205 kPa (30 psi)
At Rated Speed (5 to 61 psi)
P014 Low Oil Pressure Shutdown 20 to 336 kPa 70 kPa (10 psi)
At Idle Speed (3 to 49 psi)
P015 High Water Temperature 85 to 123'C 10rC (225'F)
Shutdown (185 to 253'F)
.
P016 Low Water Temperature o to 36'C (32 to 97'F) 21'C (70'F)
Alarm
P017 Total Cycle Crank Time 5 to 360 seconds 90 seconds
P018 Cycle Crank Time 5 to 300 seconds 10 seconds
P019 Cooldown Time o to 30 minutes 5 minutes
P020 AC Voltage 150V to 30.0 kV 70DV
P021 AC Current Full Scale 75A to 4000A 60DA
P022 GSC+ Engine Number 01 to 08 01
(conllnued)
409 .1
lble 34 contd)

lenerator Description: Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part Number., etc ..
Engine IGenerator Programming OP5-0

Setpoint Specified Value Actual Valuel t ) Setpoint Description Possible Values Default Value
I
P023 Engine Type 0; MUI
1; GAS
2; EUI
P024 Crank Time Delay o to 20 seconds 5 seconds
P025 Oil Temperature Sensor o = w/o sensor, 0
Installed 1 ; w/sensor
P026 High Oil Temperature 85 to 123'C 107'C (225'F)
Shutdown (185 to 253'F)
P027 Shutdown Override For 0; alarm, 0
High Oil Temperature 1; shutdown
P028 Nameplate Voltage 100 to 25kV 480V
P029 Nameplate Current o to 4000A 500A
P030 Nameplate Power o to 10MW 400kW
P031 Rated Frequency 50, 50 or 400 Hz 60
P032 Connection Configuration o ; wye, 1 ; delta 0
Of Generator
P033 Number Of Generator o to 254 4
Poles
The actual value space is provided for recording and comparing values during future servicing or troubleshooting of the particular
generator set.
ate: This table provides a record of setpoint values

" a singular generator set. The table is intended
, be an easy reference for future servicing or
Jubleshooting of a particular generator set.
ble 35
Generator Description : Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part No., etc ..
OP5-1 Setpoints It) - Protective Relaying Programming
Setpoint Specified Value Actual Valuel t) Name Range Of Value Factory
Default
P101 Overvoltage Alarm o . disabled 1
Enable 1 - enabled
P102 Overvoltage Alarm 100 to 125% of nameplate 105%
Threshold voltage in increments of 1%
P103 Overvoltage Alarm o to 120 seconds(2) in 10
Time Delay increments of 1 seconds
P104 Overvoltage 0- disabled 1
Shutdown Enabled 1 - enabled
P105 Overvoltage 100 to 125% of nameplate 110%
Shutdown Threshold voltage in increments of 1%
(continued)
410
(Table 35 , ecnld)
Setpoint Specified Value Actual Value(1) Name Range Of Value Factory
Default
P106 Overvoltage o to 120 secondsl') in 10
Shutdown Time increments of 1 seconds
Delay
Pl07 Undervoltage Alarm 0- disabled 1
Enable 1 - enabled
Pl08 Undervoltage Alarm 60 to 100% of nameplate 90%
Threshold voltage in increments of 1%
Pl09 Undervoltage Alarm o to 120 secondsl2l in 10
P110 Undervoltage 0- disabled 1
Shutdown Enable 1 - enabled
P111 Undervoltage 60 to 100% of nameplate 85%
Shutdown Threshold voltage in increments of 1%
Pl12 Undervoltage o to 120 seconds~) in 15
Delay
P113 Overlrequency 0- disabled 1
Alarm Enable 1 - enabled
P114 Overlrequency 50 to 60, for 50 Hz Gen 53 Hz
Alarm Threshold 60 to 70 , for 60 Hz Gen 63 Hz
400 to 480, for 400 Hz Gen 422 Hz
P115 Overlrequency o to 120 seconds~) in 10
Alarm Time Delay increments of 1 seconds
P116 Overlrequency 0- disabled 1
P117 Overlrequency 50 to 60, for 50 Hz Gen 55Hz
Shutdown Threshold
70, for 60Hz Gen
Hz Gen
PEEC and EUI Engines: 400 440 Hz
to 480, for 400 Hz Gen
MUI Engines: 400 to 480, for 422 Hz
400 Hz Gen
P118 Overlrequency o to 120 secondsl') in 10
Delay
P119 Underfrequency 0- disabled 1
Alarm Enable 1 - enabled
(continued
411
(Table 35 conld)
I Service Table - Record Of Setpoint Values

Generator Description : Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part No., etc .•
OP5-1 Setpoints 11) - Protective Relaying Programming
Setpoint Specified Value Actual Valuel1) Name Range Of Value Factory
Default
P120 Underfrequency MUI Engines: 30 to 50, for 50 45 Hz
Alarm Threshold Hz Gen
50, lor 50 Hz Gen
Hz Gen
60, for 60 Hz Gen
MUI Engines: 240 to 400, for 360 Hz
400 Hz Gen
PEEC and EUI Engines: 240 378 Hz
to 400, for 400 Hz Gen
P121 Underfrequency o to 120 secondsl2) in 10
Alarm Time Delay increments of 1 seconds
P122 Underfrequency 0- disabled 1
P123 Underfrequency 30 to 50, for 50 Hz Gen 45 Hz
Shutdown Threshold 36 to 60, for 60 Hz Gen 54 Hz
240 to 400, for 400 Hz Gen 360 Hz
P124 Underfrequency o to 120 secondsl2) in 15
.. Shutdown Time
Delay
increments of 1 seconds
P125 Reverse Power o . disabled 1

P126 Reverse Power o 10 20% of nameplate power 15%
Shutdown Threshold in increments of 1%
P127 Reverse Power o to 30 seconds(2) in increments 10
Shutdown Time of 1 seconds
Delay
P128 Overcurrent Alarm o - disabled 1
Enable 1 - enabled
P129 Phase Overcurrent 100 to 160% of nameplate 105%
Alarm Threshold current in increments of 5%
P130 Phase Overcurrent o to 250 secondsl~ in MUI
Alarm Time Delay increments of 1 Engines:
20
seconds
PEEC
and EUI
Engines:
0
seconds
-----------
P131 Total Overcurrent 100 to 160% of three 105%
Alarm Threshold times nameplate current
in increments of 5%
(conllnued)
412
(Table 35 conld)
Setpoint Specified Value Actual Value(1) Name Range Of Val ue Factory
Default
P132 Total Overcurrent o to 250 seconds~) in MUI
Alarm Time Delay increments of 1 Engines:
20
seconds
PEEC
and EUI
Engines:
0
seconds
P133 Overcurrent 0- disabled 1
Shutdown Ecable 1 - enabled
P134 Phase Overcurrent 100 to 160% in increments of 110%
Shutdown Threshold 5%
P135 Phase Overcurrent o to 250 seconds!') in MUI
Shutdown Time increments of 1 Engines:
Delay 30
seconds
PEEC
and EUI
Engines:
0
seconds
P136 Total Overcur/ent 100 to 160,),0 of three 110% •
Shutdown Threshold times nameplate current
in increments of 5%
P137 Total Overcurrent o to 250 seconds!') in MUI
Shutdown Time increments of one. Engines:
Delay 30
seconds
PEEC
and EUI
Engines:
0
seconds
P138 KW Level Relay 0- disabled 1
Enable 1 - enabled
P139 KW Level Relay o to 110% 01 nameplate power 105%
Threshold in increments of 1%
P140 KW Level Relay o to 120 seconds!') in 0
(continued)
413
,ble 35 , conld)
Service Table· Record Of Set point Values
OP5·' Setpoints I') • Protective Relaying Programming
Setpoint Specified Value Actual Valuel1l Name Range Of Value Factory
Default
P141 KW Level Relay o to 110% of nameplate power 100%
Disengage in increments of 1%
Threshold
P142 KW Level Relay o to 120 secondsl'l in 10
Disengage Time increments of 1 seconds
Delay
The setpolnts are programmed at the factory to the default value. The setpoints may be changed in order to satisfy customer Dr application
requirements.
The actual value space is provided for recording and comparing values during future servicing or troubleshooting of the particular
generator set.
When programmed to 0 seconds, the actual time is from 0.5 to 1.0 seconds.
ote: This table provides a record of setpoint values

Ir a singular generator set. The table is intended
I be an easy reference for future servicing or
Jubleshooting of a particular generator set.
,ble 36
Service Table· Record Of Setpoint Values
,
3enerator Description: Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part No., etc .•
,
••
Set~oint I Specified Actual Value(') I Set point Description Possible Values Default Value
Value I
Spare Input/Output Progr~mming OP6
SP01 Spare Input 1 Active State o = active low, 0
1 = active high
SP02 Spare Input 1 Response o = shutdown, 0
1 = alarm
SP03 Spare Input 1 Time Delay o to 250 seconds o seconds
1 = active high
1 = alarm
1 = active high
SPOS Spare Input 3 Response o = shutdown, 0
1 = alarm
1 = active high
1 = alarm
SP12 . __
Spare Input
.
4 Time Delay o to 250 seconds o seconds
SP13 Spare Output Response 0= shutdown, 0
1 = alarm
--
(continued)
414
(Table 36 eonld)
Generator Description: Site, Serial No., EMCP 11+ Part No., etc ..
Setpoint Specified Actual Valuel') I Setpoint Description Possible Values Default Value
Value I
Spare Input/Output Programming OP6
SP14 Spare Output Trigger Numerous~) 8 = 8
Condition cooldown mode
SP15 Spare Relay Output o =inactive, 1
Response 1 = active
SP16 Spare Relay Output Trigger Numerous(2) 8 = 8
Condition cooldown mode
SP1? Spare Indicator 1 Trigger Numerous~) 0 = 0
Condition unused
SP18 Spare Indicator 2 Trigger Numerous~) 0 = 0
Condition unused
SP19 Spare Indicator 3 Trigger Numerous~) 0 = 0
Condition unused
Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming OP8
AC01 Phase A Voltage o to 255 bar code value~)
Calibration
AC02 Phase B Voltage o to 255 bar code value~)
Calibration
AC03 Phase C Voltage o to 255 bar code value~)
Calibration
AC04 Phase A Current o to 255 tiar code value~)
Calibration
AC05 Phase B Current o to 255 bar code value~)
Calibration
AC06 Phase C Current o to 255 bar code value~)
Calibration
AC Offset Adjustment OP10
PH A Phase A Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % 01 0
Adjustment measured voltage
PH B Phase B Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % 01 0
PH C Phase C Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % 01 0
PH A-B Phase A-B Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % 01 0
PH B-C Phase B-C Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % of 0
PH C-A Phase C-A Voltage -5.0 to +5.0 % 01 0
..
(1) The actual value space IS provIded for recording and companng values dUring future servIcIng or troubleshootmg of the partIcular
generator set.
(2) Numerous possible valUes exist. See System Operation, "Spare InpuVOutput Programming OP6".
(3) The setpoints are programmed at the factory to the calibration value which is listed on the bar code sticker of the AT8+.
415 . ,
______________________________________________-------------"~e~s~t~in~g~a=n~d~A=d~ju~s=ti~n~g~S=e=c~t=io~n I
lote: This table provides a record of setpoint values

lr a singular generator set. The table is intended
) be an easy reference for future servicing or
oubleshooting of a particular generator set.
416
Index Section
Index
A Display of Voltage or Current Is Zero (for MUI
3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516 and EUI and PEEC
AC Factory Calibration Setpoint Programming Engines) ............................................................. 140
OP5-2 .................................................................. 75 Display of Voltage or Current or Power Is
AC Factory Calibration Setpoint Viewing OP2-2 ... 65 Inaccurate .......................................................... 145
Procedure To View The Setpoints ...................... 65
AC Offset Adjustment OP1 0 .................................. 98
Procedure For AC Offset Adjustment... .............. 99 E
AC Voltage Range - Adjust... ............................... 327
AL Fault Code ...................................................... 291 Electrical Converter (Pulse Width Modulated) (For
AL Fault Codes .................................................... 100 EUI Engines and PEEC Engines Only) .............. 43
Alarm Mode ........................................................... 51 EMCP Electronic Control (AC Transformer Box) -
Alarm Mode Sequence ...................................... 52 Replace .............................................................. 341
Alarm Module Control - Adjust ............................ 329 Replacement Procedure .................................. 341
Adjustment Procedure ..................................... 329 EMCP Electronic Control (Bus Transformer Box) -
Alarm Module Control (Custom) .......................... 111 Replace ...............•.............................................. 342
Alarm Ope(ation ............................................... 112 EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) ............. 29
Alarm Silence Function .................................... 112 Fault Indicators .................................................. 30
Customized Labeling ....................................... 112 GSC+ Part Number............................................ 29
Lamp Test Function .......................................... 112 GSC+ Serial Number ......................................... 30
Alarm Modules .................................................... 108 Keypad ............................................................... 34
Description Of Operation ................................. 109 Lower Display..................................................... 32
Relays ................................................................ 35
Upper Display .................................................... 31
B EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) - Flash
Program ............................................................. 346
Block Diagram of Generator Set Control ............. 352 Connection Procedure ..................................... 346
Flash Update Procedure .................................. 349
EMCP Electronic Control (Generator Set) -
c Replace.'.....•....................................................... 345
Replacement Procedure .................................. 345
Charging System ................................................. 294 Engine Does Not Shutdown (for EUI Engines) .... 123
Component Location (For 3306B and 3406C MUI Engine Does Not Shutdown (for MUI 3306B, 3406C
Engines) ................................................................. 6 Engines) ............................................................. 127
Component Location (For 3406E and 3500B EU I Engine Does Not Shutdown (for MUI 3412C,
Engines With Paralleling) ..................................... 11 3508,3512, 3516 Engines) ................................. 130
Component Location (For 3412C, 3508, 3512, and Engine Does Not Shutdown (for PEEC Engines) .. 133
3516 MUI Engines (Including Paralleling) and 3412C Engine Setpoint Verification OP9 .......................... 96
Engines With Paralleling) ..................................... 19 Procedure For High Water Temperature
Component Location (For EUI Engines Without Verification ........................................................ 97
Paralleling) ........................................................... 14 Procedure For Oil Pressure Verification ............. 97
Component Location (For Non-Paralleling 3412C Procedure For Overspeed Verification ............... 97
PEEC Engines) .................................................... 17 Engine/Generator Programming OP5-0 ................ 67
Connector Contact Identification of Generator Set Procedure For Engine/Generator
Control ............................................................... 354 Programming .................................................... 68
Customer Interface Module ................................. 114 Engine/Generator Setpoint Viewing OP2-0 ........... 65
Application Guidelines ..................................... 114 External Potential Transformer Connections ....... 324
Procedure For Programming When PT's Are
Used ............................................................... 326
D
Data Link ............................................................... 44 F

DiagnostiC Code Procedures ............................... 153
Diagnostic Codes ................................................ 106 Fault Description .................................................. 100
Diagnostic System Procedures ........................... 291 Fault Identification .......... ...................... ...... ......... 117
Display of Voltage or Current Is Zero (for MUI 3306B, Fault Log Clearing 0P4 ......................................... 67
3406C Engines) ................................................. 136 Fault Log Clearing OP4 ..................................... 67
Procedure for Clearing Faults ............................ 67
417
Index Section
:ault Log Viewing OP1 .......................................... 64 GSC CID 0858 - FMI 04 ...................................... 273
Procedure To View The Fault Log ...................... 64 GSC CID 0859 - FMI 03 ...................................... 274
GSC CID 0859 - FMI 04 ...................................... 276
GSC CID 1038 - FMI 03 ...................................... 277
GSC CID 1038 - FMI 04 ...................................... 278
GSC CID 1167 - FMI 04 ...................................... 280
3eneral Information ......................................... 5, 116 GSC CID 1168 - FMI 03 ...................................... 281
3SC CID 0100 - FMI 02 (for EUI Engines) .......... 156 GSC CID 1168 - FMI 04 ...................................... 282
3SC CID 0100 - FMI 02 (for MUI and PEEC GSC CID 1169 - FMI 02 ...................................... 284
Engines) ............................................................. 157 GSC CID 1170 - FMI 02 ...................................... 284
3SC CID 0100 - FMI 03 ...................................... 159 GSC CID 1170 - FMI 04 ...................................... 287
3SC CID 0100 - FMI 04 ...................................... 161 GSC CID 1170 - FMI 08 ...................................... 288
3SC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for EUI Engines) .......... 163 GSC Operation Is Erratic ..................................... 135
3SC CID 0110 - FMI 02 (for MUI and PEEC
Engines) ............................................................. 164
3SC CID 0110 - FMI 03 ...................................... 166 H
3SC CID 0110 - FMI 04 ...................................... 169
3SC CID 0111 - FMI 03 ...................................... 170 Hourmeter Programming OP7.. ............................. 93
3SC CID 0168 - FMI 03 ...................................... 172 Procedure For Hourmeter Programming ........... 93
3SC CID 0168 - FMI 04 ...................................... 178
3SC CID 0175 - FMI 02 ...................................... 184
3SC CID 0175 - FMI 03 ...................................... 186
3SC CID 0175 - FMI 04 ...................................... 188
3SC CID 0190 - FMI 02 ...................................... 189 Important Safety Information ................................... 2
3SC CID 0190 - FMI 03 ...................................... 192 Indicator for Emergency Stop (for EUI and PEEC
3SC CID 0248 - FMI 09 (for EUI Engines) .......... 195 Engines) ............................................................. 303
3SC CID 0248 - FMI 09 (for MUI and PEEC Indicator for Emergency Stop (for MU I 3306B, 3406C
Engines) ............................................................. 196 Engines) ............................................................. 304
3SC CID 0268 - FMI 02 ...................................... 198 Indicator for Emergency Stop (for MUI 3412C, 3508,
SSC CID 0269 - FMI 03 ...................................... 199 3512,3516 Engines).......................................... 306
SSC CID 0269 - FMI 04 ...................................... 201 Indicator for Engine Overs peed ........................... 307
3SC CID 0333 - FMI 03 ...................................... 204 Indicator for High Water Temperature .................. 308
SSC CID 0333 - FMI 04 ....................................... 206 Indicator for Low Coplant Level ........................... 310
3SC CID 0334 - FMI 03 ...................................... 208 Indicator for Low Oil Pressure ............: ................ 311
3SC CID 0334 - FMI 04 ...................................... 209 Indicator for Overcrank (for MUI and EUI
3SC CID 0336 - FMI 02 ...................................... 211 Engines) ............................................................. 312
SSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for EUI Engines) .......... 214 Indicator for Overcrank (for PEEC Engines) ........ 319
3SC CID 0441 - FMI 12 (for MUI Engines) ......... 216 Indicators of Alarm Module or Remote Annunciator
GSC CID 0441 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ...... 217 Are Constantly Flashing ..................................... 150
3SC CID 0442 - FMI 12 ...................................... 219 Instrument Panel (For 3306B and 3406C MUI
GSC CID 0443 - FMI 12 ...................................... 221 Engines) ............................................................... 37
GSC CID 0444 - FMI 12 (for MUI and EUI Instrument Panel (For 3508,3512, and 3516 MUI
Engines) ............................................................. 224 Engines (Including Paralleling) and 3412C PEEC
GSC CID 0444 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ...... 227 Engines With Paralleling) ..................................... 38
GSC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for EUI Engines) .......... 229 Instrument Panel (For EUI Engines) ...................... 41
GSC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for MUI Engines) ......... 231 Instrument Panel (For Non-Paralleling PEEC
GSC CID 0445 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ...... 233 Engines) ............................................................... 42
GSC CID 0446 - FMI 12 ...................................... 235 Introduction .......................................................... 116
GSC CID 0447 - FMI12 (for EUI Engines) .......... 236
GSC CID 0447 - FMI 12 (for MUI Engines) ......... 239
GSC CID 0447 - FMI12 (for PEEC Engines) ...... 241 M
GSC CID 0448 - FMI 12 ...................................... 243
GSC CID 0475 - FMI 03 ...................................... 245 Modes Of Operation .............................................. 48
GSC CID 0475 - FMI 04 ...................................... 247
GSC CID 0500 - FMI 12 ...................................... 248
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for EUI Engines) .......... 249 N
GSC CID 0566 - FMI 07 (for PEEC Engines) ...... 262 Normal Mode ......................................................... 49
GSC CID 0590 - FMI 09 ...................................... 269
GSC CID 0770 - FMI 09 (for EUI and PEEC
Engines) ............................................................. 269 P
GSC CID 0858 - FMI 03 ...................................... 272 Parallel Setpoint Programming OP5-3 ................... 75
418
Index Section
Parallel Setpoint Tuning OP-11 .............................. 99 Battery Charger, Jacket Water Heater, and Space
Procedure For Programming Synchronization Heater For 3500 Engines ............................... 372
Setpoints ........................... ........... .................... 99 Battery Charger, Jacket Water Heater, and Space
Parallel Setpoint Viewing OP2-3 ............................ 66 Heater For The 3412C ................................... 371
Paralleling. Mode .....................................•.............. 55 Battery Charger, Jacket Water Heater, and Space
Glossary ............................................................. 56 Heater For The Following MUI Engines: 3306B,
Synchronization Sequence Of Operation ........... 60 3406C ....•.............................•.......................... 370
Synchronizing Tuning Procedure ....................... 58 Custom Alarm Module For All Engines ............ 378
Synchroscope .................................................... 57 Electronic 1724/8290 Governor For The Following
Tuning Procedure ............................................... 59 MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C .......................... 356
Password Entry OP3 ............................................. 66 Fuel Level Contactor For PEEC Engines And The
Programmable Kilowatt Level Output .................. 108 Following MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C .......... 361
Programmable Spare Output... ............................ 107 Generator Running Relay And General Alarm
Programmable Spare Relay Outputs ................... 107 Relay For EUI And PEEC Engines And The
Protective Relaying Programming OP5-1 .............. 71 Following MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512,
Procedure For Protective Relaying 3516 ............................................................... 359
Programming .................................................... 71 Generator Running Relay And General Alarm
Protective Relaying Programming ...................... 71 Relay For The Following MUI Engines: 3306B,
Protective Relaying Setpoint Viewing OP2-1 ......... 65 3406C ............................................................. 359
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Sensor - Test ..... 337 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3406E Engines
Test Procedure ................................................. 340 With Paralleling .............................................. 400
Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3406E Engines
Without Paralleling ......................................... 398
R Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3412
(4BZ02100-UP PEEC Engines With
Relay Driver Module ............................................ 113 Paralleling) ..................................................... 406
Relay Module - Replace ...................................... 344 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3412
Replacement Procedure .................................. 344 (4BZ1-02099) PEEC Engines With
Paralleling ...................................................... 404
Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3412 PEEC
5 Engines Without Paralleling ........................... 402
Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3412C
Schematics and Wiring Diagrams ....................... 355 . (4BZ02100-UP) MUI Engines With .,
2301 A Speed Control For The Following MUI Paralleling ........... ........................................... 390
Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516 ................ 356 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3412C
Additional Connections For Options On PEEC (4BZ1-02099) MUI Engines With Paralleling .. 388
Engines With Paralleling ................................ 382 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3500 EUI
Additional Connections For Options On PEEC Engines With Paralleling ................................ 396
Engines Without Paralleling ........................... 381 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For 3500 EUI
Air Shutoff System For EUI Engines ................ 355 Engines Without Paralleling ........................... 394
Air Shutoff System For MUI Engines ............... 355 Generator Set Wiring Diagram For The Following
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Below Floor MUI Engines With Paralleling: 3508,3512,
Level Pumped Fuel Supply For PEEC Engines 3516 ............................................................... 392
And The Following MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, Generator Set Wiring Diagram For The Following
3512, 3516 ..................................................... 366 MUI Engines Without Paralleling: 3412C, 3508,
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Below Floor 3512, 3516 ..................................................... 386
Level Pumped Fuel Supply For The Following Generator Set Wiring Diagram For The Following
MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C .......................... 365 MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C .......................... 384
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Free Ground Fault System For EUI Engines And The
Standing Pumped Fuel Supply For PEEC Engines Following MUI Engines: 3508, 3512, 3516 .... 374
And The Following MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, Ground Fault System For PEEC Engines And
3512, 3516 ..................................................... 363 The Following MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C,
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Free 3412C ............................................................. 373
Standing Pumped Fuel Supply For The Following Load Sharing Module For PEEC And EUI
MUI Engines: 3306B, 3406C .......................... 362 Engines .......................................................... 380
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Gravity Fuel Load Sharing Module For The Following MUI
Supply For PEEC Engines And The Following Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516 ................ 379
MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3516 ........ 369 Motorized Circuit Breakers ............................... 383
Automatic Fuel Transfer System With Gravity Fuel Motorized Governor For 3306, 3406, and 3412
Supply For The Following MUI Engines: 3306B, MUI Engines ................................................... 357
3406C ............................................................. 368 NFPA 99 Alarm Module For All Engines .......... 377
419
Index Section
Over/Under Voltage Relay For EUI Engines And Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (3412C, 3508,
The Following MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, 3512, 3512, and 3516 MUI Engines Only) ................... 335
3516 ............................................................... 360 Test Procedure ................................................. 337
Over/Under Voltage Relay For The Following MUI Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (EUI Engines
Engines: 3306B, 3406C ................................. 360 Only) .................................................................. 332
Relay Driver Module For PEEC And EUI Engines Test Procedure ................................................. 333
And The Following MUI Engines: 3412C, 3508, Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (PEEG Engines
3512,3516 ..................................................... 376 Only) .................................................................. 334
Relay Driver Module For The Following MUI Test Procedure ................................................. 334
Engines: 3306B, 3406C ................................. 375 Starting Motor Remains Engaged (for EUI and PEEC
Start Aid System For PEEC Engines And The Engines) ............................................................. 119
Following MUI Engines: 3412C ...................... 358 Starting Motor Remains Engaged (for MUI 3412C,
Start Aid System For The Following MUI Engines: 3508,3512,3516 Engines) ................................ 121
3306B, 3406C ................................................ 357 Symbols ............................................................... 352
Start Aid System For The Following MUI Engines: Symptom Procedures .......................................... 119
3508, 3512, 3516 ........................................... 358 System Communication Module (Customer) ....... 115
Sensors ................................................................. 45 Using the CCM in Paralleling Applications ....... 115
Fluid Level Sensor (Engine Coolant) ................. 46 Systems Operation Section ..................................... 5
Pressure Sensor (Engine Oil) ............................ 45
Speed Sensor (Engine) ...................................... 47
Temperature Sensor (Engine Coolant) .............. 45 T
Temperature Sensor (Engine Oil) ...................... 46
Service Mode ........................................................ 62 Table of Contents ..................................................... 3
Service Record .................................................... 408 Testing and Adjusting .......................................... 324
Service Tools ....................................................... 116 Testing and Adjusting Section ............................. 324
Shutdown Mode (For MUI Engines) ...................... 52 Troubleshooting Dedicated Shutdown
Engine Start Sequence (After Shutdown) .......... 53 Indicators ........................................................... 302
Shutdown Mode Sequence ................................ 53 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes ...................... 153
Shutdown Mode (For PEEC and EUI Engines) ..... 53 Diagnostic Codes ............................................. 154
Engine Start Sequence (After Shutdown) .......... 54 Troubleshooting Section ...................................... 116
Shutdown Mode Sequence ................................ 54 Typical Generator Abbreviations .......................... 350
SP Fault Code ..................................................... 292
Troubleshooting Procedure .............................. 293
SP Fault Codes ................................................... 105 V
Spare Input/Output Programming OP6 (For 3306B
and 3406C MUI Engines) .................................... 77 Voltmeter/Ammeter Programming OP8 ................. 95
Procedure For Spare Input/Output Procedure For Voltmeter/Ammeter
Programming .................................................... 79 Programming .................................................... 95
Programmable Spare Relay Outputs ................. 79
Spare Indicators ................................................. 78
Spare Inputs ....................................................... 77
Spare Output... ................................................... 78
Spare Input/Output Programming OP6 (For 3412C,
3508,3512, and 3516 MUI Engines) ................... 87
Programming .................................................... 90
Spare Inputs ....................................................... 87
Spare Output. ..................................................... 88
Spare Input/Output Programming OP6 (For EUI And
PEEC Engines) .................................................... 82
Programming .................................................... 84
Spare Inputs....................................................... 82
Spare Output... ................................................... 83
Speed Sensor (Engine) - Adjust.. ........................ 329
Starting Motor Magnetic Switch - Test (3306B and
3406C MUI Engines) ......................................... 330
Test Procedure ................................................. 331
©2002 Caterpillar
All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.

Electronic Modular Control Panel 11 (EMCP 11)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electronic Modular Control Panel 11 (EMCP 11)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C..a..

Important Safety Information

The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows:

When replacement parts are required for this

Failure to heed this warning can lead to prema-

Table of Contents SP Fault Codes ................................................... 105

Diagnostic System Procedures

Systems Operation Section

Note: The engine EeM (ADEM) that is shown in

Control Panel ~ Face Of Front Panel

Control Panel Interior - Subpanel

mm flo fl7 fiB f19 F'ZO f21 1"22

- !Iffi •• oo~ IIIIIIIIII

The DC compartment (37) is used to house

IIIIII ~tll:'11 11?1=---l

Junction Box - Cover Removed

Most of the EMCP 11+ components are in one of the

0_" .. lib ,---==='-----,

Control Panel - Face of Front Panel

Control Panel - Rear of Front Panel

88.0C1G1liQle. 88.~.8. 8e.~ClQoIlo GlID.ern.". 96l.eCl!9C10C1

. . :;::f: "'~1:: ... ::!:{: ~.: ¥:-L: ... =!:f:

ATR ATR ATR STR STR

Control Panel - Back Of Front Panel

Control Panel· Sub· Panel Interior

Note: If your generator has a PEEC engine, the

Instrument Panel Interior For EMCP II+P - Subpanel

@ LOAD SHARING MODULE

Instrument Panel Interior For The EMCP II+P - Subpanel

Instrument Panel - Customer Connection Box (3500 generator sets)

Instrument Panel - Bottom View (EMCP 11+ Control Panel and

Illustration 25 900720350 Illustration 26 gOO'

101359233 • The displays show the fault codes. The displays

• The GSC+ contains programmable features for

vo"'" , Note: Setting P023 to 0 ensures proper operation

Fault Indicators (2) are present only in paralleling g0031 0244

• The GSC+ shows engine conditions and

shutdown indicator is ON CONTINUOUSLY, the

Upper Display Showing: Illustration 36 9003

The display will stop scrolling when the opera I

• Real power phase C (kW)

• Total apparent power (kVA)

• Tolal reaclive power (KVAR)

• Total reactive energy output (kVARHr)

Note: All real power values are signed with a "+" or

691 kW, total real power of generator output

[ ~A Note: You may view the power factor for the

I I 1000 kW/h, total energy of generator output

The right side of lower display (6) shows the value

• Left side exhaust temperature (optional) Keypad

• Engine oil temperature (optional)

• System battery voltage

• Engine oil pressure

Engine Meter Key - This key controls the viewir

Alarm Codes Key - If fault alarm indicator (4) is

The relays are located in the relay module on the

Some of the contacts of the relays are internally

Note: Jumper block (1) is used to select the voltage

"Iia bl e 1 The CTA is used to indicate that the engine is

K5 - Run Relay (RR)

K8 - Programmable Spare Relay (PSR)

On non-paralleling panels, this relay is for customer 101389954

The optional speed adjust potentiometer (SP) (6) is Instrument Panel